Business Communication - McGraw-Hill Books

TABLE OF CONTENTSBusiness Communication .......... 11Business Communications (Prof Ref.) .............................. 24Business Communications - Special Topics ..................... 23Business English ............................................................. 21Business Writing ............................................................. 22Corporate Communication ............................................. 19International Business Communication ........................... 21Introduction to Business Communication ........................ 12Managerial Communication ........................................... 19Technical Writing ........................................................... 18Business Law ........................ 25Business Law .................................................................. 26Cyberlaw ........................................................................ 31Employment Law ............................................................ 30International Business Law .............................................. 30Legal Environment of Business ........................................ 28E-Commerce .......................... 33Business Process & Re-Engineering ................................. 35Customer Relations Management .................................... 41Cyberlaw and Ethics ....................................................... 36Cyberpreneurship ........................................................... 37E-Commerce Cases Book ................................................ 38Internet Marketing .......................................................... 36Introduction to E-Commerce ........................................... 34Knowledge Management ................................................ 38Professional E-Commerce ............................................... 42Risk Management ........................................................... 37Strategy .......................................................................... 37Supply Chain Management ............................................. 39Technology / Infrastructure ............................................. 34Management ......................... 43Business and Society ...................................................... 87Business Environment ................................................... 118Business Ethics ............................................................... 88Business In Asia .............................................................. 84Business Policy & Strategic Management Cases ............ 116Business Policy & Strategic Management - Software ...... 116Business Policy & Strategic Management - Textbooks ... 105Change ........................................................................... 93Compensation ................................................................ 76Corporate Governance (Professional References) .......... 125Employee Benefits ........................................................ 118Entrepreneurship .......................................................... 100Entrepreneurship (Professional References) ................... 125Human Relations ............................................................ 66Human Resource Management / Leadership(Professional References) ............................................ 123Human Resource Management - Supplements ................ 75Human Resource Management - Textbooks .................... 68Human Resource Strategy ............................................... 75International Business - Supplements .............................. 83International Business - Textbooks .................................. 81International Human Resource Management .................. 81International Management .............................................. 84International Organizational Behavior ............................ 63Knowledge Management (Professional References) ....... 125Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining ......................... 77Leadership ...................................................................... 94Management & Organizational BehaviorCombination ................................................................ 64Management Skills ......................................................... 67Management Skills (Professional References) ................ 123Motivation .................................................................... 119Negotiation .................................................................... 97Organizational Behavior - Supplements .......................... 63Organizational Behavior - Textbooks .............................. 56Organization Development ............................................ 93Organization Theory ...................................................... 92Principles of Management - Supplements ........................ 53Principles of Management - Textbooks ............................ 47Small Business Management ........................................... 98Special Topics in Management ..................................... 121Staffing ........................................................................... 76Strategic Management (Professional References) ........... 124Supervision ..................................................................... 54Technology & Innovation ............................................. 119Training and Development ............................................. 771Main Content & New Titles page.i1 110/5/2006 2:09:20 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTSBusiness Administration .........127Introduction to Business - Software ............................... 130Introduction to Business - Textbooks ............................. 128Keyboarding & OfficeTechnology .........................131Customer Service .......................................................... 135Keyboarding ................................................................. 132Keyboarding Advanced ................................................. 135Medical Transcription ................................................... 135Office Filing ................................................................. 136Management InformationSystems ................................... 137Advanced MIS .............................................................. 150Computers in Society / Computer Ethics ....................... 151Database Management ................................................. 143Database Management (Professional References) .......... 153Data Communications / Telecommunications /Office Systems ............................................................ 147Data Mining ................................................................. 153Decision Support Systems ............................................. 149Enterprise Resource Planning ........................................ 152Information & Society ................................................... 143Introduction to Information Systems ............................. 139Knowledge Management .............................................. 151Management Information Systems ................................ 140Object-Oriented System Analysis & Design .................. 146Project Management ..................................................... 149System Analysis & Design ............................................. 144Marketing ...........................155Advertising & Promotion / IMC ..................................... 174Business to Business ..................................................... 182Consumer Behavior ...................................................... 165Customer Relation Management ................................... 192Customer Relation Management (Prof Ref.) ................... 195Direct Marketing .......................................................... 190International Marketing ................................................. 187Internet Marketing ........................................................ 190Introductory Marketing - Supplement ............................ 163Logistics ....................................................................... 185Marketing Channels ...................................................... 183Marketing Management Cases ...................................... 171Marketing Management - Software ................................ 172Marketing Management - Text ...................................... 168Marketing Management - Text & Cases ......................... 169Marketing Planning ...................................................... 190Marketing Principles ..................................................... 157Marketing (Professional References) .............................. 194Marketing Research ...................................................... 164Marketing - Software ..................................................... 163New Product Management ........................................... 184Pricing .......................................................................... 191Product Design ............................................................. 184Product Management .................................................... 183Public Relations ............................................................ 192Retail Management ....................................................... 186Sales Management ........................................................ 181Selling .......................................................................... 177Services Marketing ....................................................... 189Special Topics in Marketing .......................................... 193Strategic Marketing - Cases ........................................... 174Strategic Marketing - Text ............................................. 172Strategic Marketing - Text & Cases ................................ 174Travel and Tourism ....................................................... 191Indexes ...............................197Title Index .................................................................... 197Author Index ................................................................ 2022Main Content & New Titles page.i2 210/5/2006 2:09:20 PM

2007-2008 NEW TITLESBusiness Communication2007 New Titles• ANGELLBusiness Communication Design, 2e .......................12ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322358-2 / MHID: 0-07-322358-1• ARGENTICorporate Communication, 4e ................................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299054-6 / MHID: 0-07-299054-6• CAMPCollege English and Communication, 9e .................13ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310650-2 / MHID: 0-07-310650-X• DE JANASZInterpersonal Skills in Organizations .......................15ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471558-1 / MHID: 0-07-471558-5[MH Australia Title]• JADERSTROMBusiness English at Work, 3e ...................................21ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313787-2 / MHID: 0-07-313787-1• KENKELExtreme Resume Makeover .....................................18ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351182-5 / MHID: 0-07-351182-X• LOCKERBusiness Communication, 3e ...................................13ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293210-2 / MHID: 0-07-293210-4Business Law2007 New Titles• BENNETT-ALEXANDEREmployment Law for Business, 5e ...........................30ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302895-8 / MHID: 0-07-302895-9• MALLORBusiness Law, 13e .................................................... 26ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293399-4 / MHID: 0-07-293399-2• McADAMSLaw, Business and Society, 8e .................................28ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304810-9 / MHID: 0-07-304810-0Business Law2008 New Titles• REEDThe Legal and Regulatory Environment ofBusiness, 14e ........................................................... 28ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304849-9 / MHID: 0-07-304849-6• SATTERWHITEBusiness Communication at Work, 3e .....................14ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313831-2 / MHID: 0-07-313831-2Business Communication2008 New Titles• BARRETTLeadership Communication, 2e ...............................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340314-4 / MHID: 0-07-340314-8• HATTERSLEYManagement Communication, 3e ............................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352505-1 / MHID: 0-07-352505-7• HYNESManagerial Communication, 4e ..............................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352504-4 / MHID: 0-07-352504-9• LESIKARBasic Business Communications, 11e ......................12ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305036-2 / MHID: 0-07-305036-9• VARNERIntercultural Communication in the GlobalMarketplace, 4e ........................................................21ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352506-8 / MHID: 0-07-352506-53Main Content & New Titles page.i3 310/5/2006 2:09:21 PM

2007-2008 NEW TITLESManagement2007 New Titles• KIRBYEntreprenurship, 2e .................................................102ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710827-4 / MHID: 0-07-710827-2[MH UK Title]• KREITNEROrganizational Behavior, 7e .................................... 57ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312892-4 / MHID: 0-07-312892-9• LAMBERTONHuman Relations, 3e ............................................... 66ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352231-9 / MHID: 0-07-352231-7• LEWICKIEssentials of Negotiation, 4e .................................... 97ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310276-4 / MHID: 0-07-310276-8• LEWICKINegotiation: Readings, Exercises and Cases5e ............................................................................97ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297310-5 / MHID: 0-07-297310-2• LUCASHuman Resource Management in anInternational Context ..............................................70ISBN-13: 978-1-843-98109-1 / MHID: 1-843-98109-2[MH UK Title]• MAIDMENTAnnual Editions: Human Resources 06/07,16e ..........................................................................75ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352838-0 / MHID: 0-07-352838-2• MAIDMENTAnnual Editions: International Business,14e ..........................................................................83ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352842-7 / MHID: 0-07-352842-0• MAIDMENTAnnual Editions: Management, 14e .........................53ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352844-1 / MHID: 0-07-352844-7• MANNINGThe Art of Leadership, 2e ........................................94ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299568-8 / MHID: 0-07-299568-8• McSHANEOrganizational Behavior ......................................... 59ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325562-0 / MHID: 0-07-325562-9• McSHANEOrganizational Behavior on the Pacific Rim,2e ............................................................................61ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471658-8 / MHID: 0-07-471658-1[MH Aust Title]• MUNRORoundtable Viewpoints: OrganizationalLeadership ............................................................... 95ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352782-6 / MHID: 0-07-352782-3• NEWSTROMOrganizational Behavior, 12e .................................. 59ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287546-1 / MHID: 0-07-287546-1Management2007 New Titles• NEWSTROMSupervision: Managing for Results, 9e ..................... 54ISBN-13: 978-0-07-354508-0 / MHID: 0-07-354508-2• NOEFundamentals of Human ResourceManagement, 2e ...................................................... 70ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325794-5 / MHID: 0-07-325794-X• PALMERThe Business Environment, 5e .................................118ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710990-5 / MHID: 0-07-710990-2[MH UK Title]• PEARCEFormulation, Implementation and Control ofCompetitive Strategy, 10e .......................................108ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305438-4 / MHID: 0-07-305438-0• PEARCEStrategic Management, 10e .....................................108ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305422-3 / MHID: 0-07-305422-4• ROBERTSNew Business Ventures and the Entrepreneur6e ............................................................................102ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340497-4 / MHID: 0-07-340497-7• ROBERTSONRoundtable Viewpoints: InternationalBusiness ................................................................... 83ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352781-9 / MHID: 0-07-352781-5• ROLLINSONUnderstanding Employment Relations .....................71ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711486-2 / MHID: 0-07-711486-8[MH UK Title]• ROSENFELDManaging Organizations, 3e ....................................61ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710416-0 / MHID: 0-07-710416-1[MH UK Title]• RUEManagement, 12e ....................................................51ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353014-7 / MHID: 0-07-353014-X• RUESupervision, 9e ........................................................55ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305439-1 / MHID: 0-07-305439-9• SIMMONDSIntroduction to Human ResourceManagement ............................................................ 72ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711102-1 / MHID: 0-07-711102-8[MH UK Title]• SMITHIntroduction to Innovation ......................................120ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710861-8 / MHID: 0-07-710861-2[MH UK Title]5Main Content & New Titles page.i5 510/5/2006 2:09:21 PM

2007-2008 NEW Business Communication TitlesBusiness Communication~ ContentsBusiness Communications (Prof Ref.) .............................. 24Business Communications - Special Topics ..................... 23Business English ............................................................. 21Business Writing ............................................................. 22Corporate Communication ............................................. 19International Business Communication ........................... 21Introduction to Business Communication ........................ 12Managerial Communication ........................................... 19Technical Writing ........................................................... 182007 New Titles• ANGELLBusiness Communication Design, 2e .......................12ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322358-2 / MHID: 0-07-322358-1• ARGENTICorporate Communication, 4e ................................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299054-6 / MHID: 0-07-299054-6• CAMPCollege English and Communication, 9e .................13ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310650-2 / MHID: 0-07-310650-X• DE JANASZInterpersonal Skills in Organizations .......................15ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471558-1 / MHID: 0-07-471558-5[MH Australia Title]• JADERSTROMBusiness English at Work, 3e ...................................21ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313787-2 / MHID: 0-07-313787-1• KENKELExtreme Resume Makeover .....................................18ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351182-5 / MHID: 0-07-351182-X• LOCKERBusiness Communication, 3e ...................................13ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293210-2 / MHID: 0-07-293210-4• SATTERWHITEBusiness Communication at Work, 3e .....................14ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313831-2 / MHID: 0-07-313831-22008 New Titles• BARRETTLeadership Communication, 2e ...............................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340314-4 / MHID: 0-07-340314-8• HATTERSLEYManagement Communication, 3e ............................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352505-1 / MHID: 0-07-352505-7• HYNESManagerial Communication, 4e ..............................19ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352504-4 / MHID: 0-07-352504-9• LESIKARBasic Business Communications, 11e ......................12ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305036-2 / MHID: 0-07-305036-9• VARNERIntercultural Communication in the GlobalMarketplace, 4e ........................................................21ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352506-8 / MHID: 0-07-352506-511HED 2007 Business Communication.11 1110/5/2006 12:07:28 PM

Business CommunicationIntroduction to BusinessCommunicationInternational EditionNEWBASIC BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS11th EditionBy Raymond V Lesikar, University of North Texas2008 (November 2006) / 648 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-305036-2 / MHID: 0-07-305036-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110128-8 / MHID: 0-07-110128-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lesikar11eCONTENTSPART ONE: Introduction. Chapter One: Communication in the Workplace.PART TWO: Fundamentals of Business Writing. Chapter Two:Adaptation and the Selection of Words. Chapter Three: Constructionof Clear Sentences and Paragraphs. Chapter Four: Writing for Effect.PART THREE: Basic Patterns of Business Messages. Chapter Five: TheWriting Process and an Introduction to Business Messages. ChapterSix: Directness in Good-News and Neutral Messages. Chapter Seven:Indirectness in Bad-News Messages. Chapter Eight: Indirectness in PersuasiveMessages. Chapter Nine: Strategies in the Job-Search Process.PART FOUR: Fundamentals of Report Writing. Chapter Ten: Basics ofReport Writing. Chapter Eleven: Report Structure: The Shorter Forms.Chapter Twelve: Long, Formal Reports. Chapter Thirteen: Graphics.PART FIVE: Other Forms of Business Communication. Chapter Fourteen:Informal Oral Communication. Chapter Fifteen: Public Speakingand Oral Reporting. PART SIX: Cross-Cultural Correctness, Technology,Research. Chapter Sixteen: Techniques of Cross-Cultural Communication.Chapter Seventeen: Correctness of Communication. ChapterEighteen: Technology-Enabled Communication. Chapter Nineteen:Business Research Methods. AppendixesInternational EditionNEWBUSINESS COMMUNICATION DESIGN2nd EditionBy Pamela A Angell, Hudson Valley Community College2007 (January 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322358-2 / MHID: 0-07-322358-1(with OLC Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110812-6 / MHID: 0-07-110812-2[IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/angell2eBusiness Communication Design by Pamela Angell focuses onpragmatic design techniques that are easy to use, understand,and teach. The text allows instructors to integrate their coursematerials and ideas into flexible and comfortable businesscommunication content. Innovative topics include useful andnecessary applications of listening, culture, collaborative, andvisual communication. The text presents these topics conciselyin its 17 chapters, a manageable number to cover over an averagecollege term. The text emphasizes the role of critical andcreative thinking in the communication process. Students learna systematic approach to designing messages for every businesscommunication situation. The author offers a simple yet effectivemodel for message design that focuses on the needs of thepeople involved in the communication and the circumstancesof the message. Business Communication Design addresses thevariety of communication options that modern workers face.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Ethics in Action boxes feature situations based on current businessevents that provides students with real-world ethical challenges. Thematerial is designed to inspire students to consider ethical questions, orto develop a plan of action when facing ethical dilemmas.• Based on reviewer feedback, more sample memorandums, letters,reports, and proposals are included to provide students with detailedapproaches and step-by-step methods to writing effective businessmessages.• The content has been updated to reflect current practice and researchtrends. For example, chapter 1 contains a new section on ethics; chapter12 includes a new section on intercultural writing and speaking; andchapter 13 highlights a new section on leadership.FEATURES• The text offers students a simple yet effective model for businesscommunication design. The eight steps discussed in Ch. 3 are, in brief,Map out message goals, Evaluate audience, Shape message content,Select channel, Acquire resources, Generate source credibility, Eliminatedesign flaws, and Send Message (MESSAGES). By mastering these eightsteps students will become better communication designers and moreeffective business communicators.• Business Communication Design features such unique content as 1)an entire chapter devoted to listening- a crucial skill for effective communication;2) culture as a fundamental determinant in communicationdesign and survival in business; and 3) conflict, its resolution, and itsplace in the business environment.• In a Nutshell acts as the brief introduction for each chapter. Based oncurrent events and real world stories, Nutshells heighten student awarenessof real-life communication issues as they apply to the conceptsintroduced in the chapters.• Creative Challenges are flexible critical-thinking exercises that challengestudents to apply chapter concepts and to think strategically.• Jump Ins are skills-based assignments, tasks, or activities that askstudents to design communication strategies. They are sprinkledthroughout each chapter to reinforce the key concepts as the studentslearn them.• A Word on the Web is an interactive Internet activity that offersstudents an opportunity to access various websites for informationpertinent to chapter concepts.• Creative Cases are examples that describe real-world companies andtheir communication challenges. Each case includes multiple discussionquestions and there is one case study per chapter.• End of Chapter Material concentrates on critical thinking and skillacquisition: -Strategies: a numbered “take-away” list that highlightsskills which should be mastered once completing the chapter. -ChapterSummary: numbered list summarizing key points of chapter. -BusinessCommunication Projects: end of chapter exercises and assignmentsfor groups and individuals.-Discussion Questions: endof chapter questions designed to inspire class discussions.CONTENTSCH. 1 The Basics. CH. 2 How Business Communicates. CH. 3 CreatingEffective Messages. CH. 4 Listening: A Silent Hero. CH. 5 Creatingand Using Meaning. CH. 6 Designing Messages with Words. CH. 7Designing Oral Presentations. CH. 8 Business Writing Design. CH. 9Direct and Indirect Communication Strategies. CH. 10 The Business ofReports: Informal and Formal Report Writing. CH. 11 Writing Strategiesfor Reports and Proposals. CH. 12 Culture: Inside and Out. CH. 13 Interpersonaland Collaborative Messages. CH. 14 The Business of Changeand Conflict. CH. 15 Creating a Career and Designing Résumés. CH.16 Interviewing to Get the Job. CH. 17 Creativity and Visual Design.Appendix A Grammar and Punctuation. Appendix B Formatting andDocumenting Business Documents. References. Index12HED 2007 Business Communication.12 1210/5/2006 12:07:28 PM

Business CommunicationNEWCOLLEGE ENGLISH AND COMMUNICATION9th EditionBy Sue C Camp, Gardner-Webb College2007 (February 2006) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310650-2 / MHID: 0-07-310650-XGlencoe/McGraw-Hill TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/camp9eCollege English and Communication, ninth edition continuesto provide up-to-date coverage of key topics such as culturaldiversity, ethics, global communications, electronic communications,and using the Internet for communication and onlineresources. The text covers the basics of grammar, spelling, andpunctuation while incorporating customer service, businesscorrespondence, the job search process, oral communication,and technology.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New coverage of nonverbal communications and their importancein business.• Updated technology aspect of business communication--including anentire new section on Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), updated informationon e-commerce, and using the Internet in communication.• Expanded information on preparing for and delivering presentations.• The latest guidelines for electronic résumés and updates to standardrésumé styles.• Previous Stories from the Real World Unit Openers. Each of thereal-world stories from the previous edition are available the Web site.This gives instructors the option of using more real-world applications,a key feature in business communication courses.• Internet Activities (CEC Online and Internet Quest) have been movedto the Web site.• Unit Closers and Chapter Reviews have been moved to the Website.• Case Studies, scenarios providing students the opportunity to analyzea situation and then propose a solution, evaluate a proposal, or make adecision have been moved to the Web site.FEATURES• Stories from the Real World – Unit Openers. Each unit has a realworldstory opener with critical thinking questions.• Chapter Openers. Each chapter opener has a Workplace Connectionfeature that provides a link between the theoretical and practical.• Key Terms. Key terms are listed in the beginning of each section andthen recapped at the end of each section.• End-of-Section Materials. At the end of each section, students willfind Discussion Points, Editing Practices, and Practical Applications toreinforce the material just covered.• Team Activities are included at the end of each chapter.• Communicating in Your Career offers students a chance to enhancetheir occupational communication.• Going Global is an introduction to multicultural aspects of businesscommunication.• Digital Data is designed to highlight the use of new technology forcommunication purposes.• Ethics in Action alerts students to ethical or legal issues in businesscommunication.• Thinking Critically asks questions that require more advancedthinking skills such as interpretation, analysis, comparison, makingjudgments, or applying concepts.• Memory Hooks offer students a way to easily learn common concepts.• OOPS! Features show common mistakes that can be easily avoided.• Self Assessments give students the opportunity to recap what theyhave learned.CONTENTSUnit One: Introduction to Communication. Chapter 1: Communicatingin Everyday Life. Chapter 2: Interpreting Communication. Chapter3: Communicating Globally. Unit Two: Developing Language Skills.Chapter 4: Exploring Language Elements. Chapter 5: Mastering Nounsand Pronouns. Chapter 6: Expanding Language Skills. Unit Three: DevelopingWriting Skills. Chapter 7: Applying the Mechanics of Style.Chapter 8: Sharpening Writing Skills. Unit Four: Applying CommunicationSkills. Chapter 9: Writing E-mails, Memos, and Letters. Chapter10: Writing Specific Communications. Chapter 11: Preparing andWriting Reports. Unit Five: Communicating in a Business Environment.Chapter 12: Working with Technology. Chapter 13: CommunicatingWith Customers. Chapter 14: Developing Presentation Skills. Unit Six:Employment CommunicationChapter 15: Searching for Jobs. Chapter16: Interviewing and Employment Issues. Appendix. GlossaryInternational EditionNEWBUSINESS COMMUNICATION3rd EditionBy Kitty O Locker, The Ohio State University and Stephen KyoKaczmarek, Columbus State Community College2007 (March 2006) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-293210-2 / MHID: 0-07-293210-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326140-9 / MHID: 0-07-326140-8(with Business Communication Grademax)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110917-8 / MHID: 0-07-110917-X[IE with Grademax Passcard]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bcs3eA unique approach to a hands-on course, written by the sameauthor of Business and Administrative Communication, thiscompletely new approach is devised and created with theassistance of a community college colleague. The innovativemodule structure allows instructors to focus on specific skillsand provides greater flexibility for short courses and differentteaching approaches. While grounded in solid business communicationfundamentals, this paperback takes a strong workplaceactivity orientation which helps students connect whatthey learn to what they do or will do on the job.NEW TO THIS EDITION• NEW: GradeMax is a revolutionary adaptive testing tool that deliversunique tests to each of your students to assess his or her understandingof each concept in a chapter. Instructors get powerful graphic reportingat the class and student level to help adjust teaching emphasis.Each student’s test results leads to a set of recommended interactivemodules to remediate knowledge and skills. Registration is free withevery new book.• “Building Critical Skills” boxes (half of which have been updated orare new) are included in each chapter. Each box addresses a particularskill that needs to be learned (i.e.: building a professional image,13HED 2007 Business Communication.13 1310/5/2006 12:07:29 PM

Business Communicationrevising after feedback, etc.), and the boxes summarize why this skill isimportant. It goes on to explain how business communications studentscan master the skills.• All new unit-ending cases include both individual and team activitiesthat allow professors considerable flexibility in assigning work. Theseexercises are based on communication challenges faced by real-worldcompanies, businesses, and organizations.• Module 13 (E-mail) has been expanded to include information onblogging and writing for the Web.• Module 28 (Job Application Letters) is being expanded to includeinformation on T-letters, a cross between a traditional job applicationletter and a resume.FEATURES• Polishing Your Prose sections conclude each chapter. These activitiesprovide students with a summary of important advice concerningwriting and writing for business. Each section includes 10 exercises forincreased comprehension. The answers to the odd-numbered exercisesare included at the end of the book.• “Site to See” boxes appear in the margins of each chapter. Theyinclude a sample web site and its description. These URLs expand oninformation in the chapters to show students where they can go formore resources or how companies are taking advantage of the Internetto promote their company and services.• “FYI” boxes are interspersed through each chapter and include funbits of information relating to the chapter-at-hand. Topics like the averagenumber of emails received a day by employees are included here.This feature serves a similar purpose to the well-known sidebars thatare found in Business and Administrative Communication.• “Instant Replay” boxes are found in the margins of each chapter. Theyoffer highlights of the important information presented in the chaptersto reinforce key concepts.• Cartoons are included in most chapters to illustrate key conceptswith levity.• Full-page letter and memo examples are included throughout thetext so students can see the actual proportions of how correspondenceshould appear.• Good and bad examples are given of all message types to helpstudents understand how to correct common mistakes in businesscommunication.• Chapters open with thought-provoking questions that act as learningobjectives for the chapter. The questions provide a roadmap for thechapter and motivate students to learn the material; they understandfrom the beginning how the chapter content answers the questions theyhave about business communication. The text is built around the ideaof answering these critical questions, and teaching the critical skillsneeded in the real business world.CONTENTSUnit 1 Building Blocks for Effective Messages. 1. Business Communication,Management, and Success. 2. Adapting Your Message to YourAudience. 3. Communicating Across Cultures. 4. Planning, Writing,and Revising. 5. Designing Documents, Slides, and Screens. Unit 2Creating Goodwill. 6. You-Attitude. 7. Positive Emphasis. 8. ReaderBenefits. Unit 3 Letters, Memos, and E-Mail Messages. 9. Formats forLetters and Memos. 10. Informative and Positive Messages. 11. NegativeMessages. 12. Persuasive Messages. 13. E-Mail Messages. Unit4 Polishing Your Writing. 14. Editing for Grammar and Punctuation.15. Choosing the Right Word. 16. Revising Sentences and Paragraphs.Unit 5 Interpersonal Communication. 17. Listening. 18. Working andWriting in Teams. 19. Planning, Conducting, and Recording Meetings.20. Making Oral Presentations. Unit 6 Research, Reports, and Visuals.21. Proposals and Progress Reports. 22. Finding, Analyzing, and DocumentingInformation. 23. Short Reports. 24. Long Reports. 25. UsingVisuals. Unit 7 Job Hunting. 26. Researching Jobs. 27. Résumés. 28.Job Application Letters. 29. Job Interviews. 30. Follow-Up Letters andCalls and Job OffersInternational EditionNEWBUSINESS COMMUNICATION AT WORK3rd EditionBy Marilyn Satterwhite, Danville Area Community College and JudithOlson-Sutton, Matc-Truax2007 (February 2006) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313831-2 / MHID: 0-07-313831-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110740-2 / MHID: 0-07-110740-1 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bcw3eBusiness Communication at Work 3e is a very practical, handsontext-workbook to help students learn how to write the typesof communication that they are most apt to experience on thejob. Each chapter is an independent unit that allows the teacherthe flexibility of covering most chapters in any order. This flexibilityallows the teacher to customize the course to meet theneeds of individual classes. Many chapters are easily brokeninto units so teachers can cover just the units they want. Thebook is full of examples of letters, memos, etc. so students canactually see the application of the principles covered in thebook. A Web site for this book provides supplemental learningexercises. Although the main focus of the book is written communication,a chapter on listening and making a presentationis now included. This text provides the “basics” for communicatingeffectively in business, including writing, listening, andspeaking. The ability to communicate effectively is essential foranyone and for any organization wanting to be successful. Inaddition, communication skill is a “life skill.” There continuesto be an increasing awareness in education as well as businessof the need for improvement of these skills in individuals. Frompersonal experiences working with hundreds of students andwith business people for many years, I was very aware of thecritical need for the improvement and enhancement of theseskills—the authors felt that their experiences provided themwith valuable insights that would be beneficial to share withothers. With easy-to-read and comprehend material, concreteexamples, and meaningful applications and exercises, BusinessCommunication at Work is designed to help students developand apply those essential skills needed to be successful.NEW TO THIS EDITION• In Chapter 4, a section on “speaking” has been added. We felt thatit was necessary to address the “basics” in speaking/oral presentationswithin the communications text. In the last edition, in Chapter 4, the“listening” chapter was added. Now, with listening and speaking, wehave expanded and enhanced the areas of communication in the text.Speaking is vitally important in business and also, in many instances,determines whether an individual advances in his/her career. By discussingthe basics of speaking near the beginning of the text, instructorscan incorporate more oral communications (including a piece ofgiving effective presentations) in various exercises throughout the restof the chapters.• In Chapter 6, the “Technology” chapter has been completely revised.We have moved from basically a discussion of technology, includingemphasis on software, to a discussion on the effective use of technologyin communications. In the revised chapter, we have a strong emphasison communicating electronically—we address specifically the effectiveuse of e-mail; “when” to use e-mail; guidelines on “how” to use e-mailfrom formatting to content; company policies; confidentiality; etc. Theincreasing use of e-mail and, with that, the seemingly decreasing qualityof communications—because e-mails are fast and informal, the qualitythat is required in business appears to be eroding.• We have added “Concept Review” worksheets for each chapter onthe Web site. Teachers may use these as an informal assessment/feedbackas to whether students have understood the basic concepts in thechapters in addition to the worksheets in the text.• The Student CD materials and Online Exercises have all been retainedbut moved to the Web site.14HED 2007 Business Communication.14 1410/5/2006 12:07:29 PM

Business CommunicationFEATURES• Communication at Work pieces tie in the real-world experiences somany instructors and students look for in texts.• Margin features, including Notes (for more info on chapter material),Thinking Caps (challenging puzzlers related to the chapter information),Global Diversity (cross-cultural communication scenarios), Go to Web(for extra Student activities on the OLC), and Internet (for Internet-relatedresearch).• Boxed/In-text material: Legal and Ethical boxes (scenarios that tie-in tothe text material), Concept Checks (to assess the students’ understandingof the material) at the end of each section in the chapters, Checklists (toapply principles learned to an actual communication).• Worksheets are included at the end of each chapter to assess the students’grasp of the chapter material and apply the concepts learned.CONTENTSUnit 1: Chapter 1: Setting the Stage for Effective Communication.Chapter 2: Choosing the Right Words. Chapter 3: Developing Sentencesand Paragraphs. Unit 2: Chapter 4: Developing Listening and SpeakingSkills. Chapter 5: Planning and Organizing Business Messages. Chapter6: Using Technology to Improve Communication. Chapter 7: FormattingBusiness Messages. Unit 3: Chapter 8: Goodwill Principles andGoodwill Messages. Chapter 9: Messages for Inquiries and Requests.Chapter 10: Claim and Adjustment Messages. Chapter 11: PersuasiveMessages. Chapter 12: Order, Credit, and Collection Messages. Unit4: Chapter 13: Developing Memos and Memo Reports. Chapter 14:Creating Press Releases, Newsletters, and Letters to Public Officials.Chapter 15: Constructing and Presenting Reports. Chapter 16: PreparingMeeting Communications. Unit 5: Chapter 17: Conducting the JobSearch. Chapter 18: Selling Yourself to EmployersNEWINTERPERSONAL SKILLS IN ORGANIZATIONSBy Suzanne De Janasz, University of Mary Washington, GleniceWood and Lorene Gottschalk of University of Ballarat, Karen Dowd,James Madison University and Beth Schneider, George MasonUniversity2006 (May 2006 )ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471558-1 / MHID: 0-07-471558-5McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/dejanaszInterpersonal Skills in Organisations is a student-focussed textwhich explores intrapersonal, interpersonal and team skillsthrough Australian, New Zealand and Asian examples.Understanding Yourself - Whether preparing to enter a newjob or needing to develop team skills, Interpersonal Skills inOrganisations offers students exercises and activities that emphasisebusiness/manager situations and work groups, whileincorporating theory with practical examples.Understanding Others - Interpersonal Skills in Organisationstakes a fresh, thoughtful look at the key skills necessary for personaland managerial success in today’s workplace. This bookis filled with a variety of exercises, cases and group activities,which employ and experiential approach suitable to studentsat all levels.Understanding Teams - Chapters on Coaching and ProvidingFeedback for Improved Performance; and Making Decisionsand Solving Problems creatively, help students put conceptsinto a real-world perspective.Understanding Leading - The important skills of individual andteam empowerment are explored in Chapter 18 on leadershipand self-leadership. Students are guided through the process ofeffective delegation, giving an insight into the skills needed tolead a modern busines succbusinessy.FEATURES• Clear treatment: Relevant and accessible, this edition relates to thecontemporary workplace, by way of Australian, New Zealand and Asianexamples and references. Written in a clear manner, the presentationof content is suitable for today’s student. Theories and concepts areintroduced in a cohesive and accessible manner, to assist in studentunderstanding.• Active Learning: De Janasz is designed to provide students withan enriched learning experience, through the combination of theory,case studies and practical application. Pedagogical features, such as“Tips In …” offer a comprehensive list of hints to help students developmanagerial skills; and “Small Group Discussion Questions” at the end ofeach chapter offer students the chance to workshop ideas and developstronger problem-solving abilities. These activities allow students toapply theory to their experiences.• Broad Approach: Content in this text has been carefully organizedso that students gain a much broader view of each topic area. Forexample, in Chapter 15, politicking and power have been combined,so that students may investigate the relationship between the two. InChapter 18, leadership and self-leadership are addressed to explorehow they combine to create a successful work environment. De Janaszhas 4 distinct sections (Understanding Yourself, Understanding Others,Understanding Teams, and Leading) that can be used collectively, ormodularly, depending on the instructor’s preference and the students’need.CONTENTSPart 1 Intrapersonal effectiveness: understanding yourself Chapter 1.Journey into self-awareness Chapter 2. Self-disclosure and trust Chapter3. Establishing goals by identifying values and ethics Chapter 4. Timeand self-management Part 2 Interpersonal effectiveness: understandingand working with others Chapter 5. Understanding and working withdiverse others Chapter 6. The importance and skill of listening Chapter7. Conveying verbal messages Chapter 8. Persuading individuals andaudiences Part 3 Understanding and working in teams Chapter 9.Negotiation Chapter 10. Building teams and work groups Chapter 11.Managing conflict Chapter 12. Achieving business results through effectivemeetings Chapter 13. Facilitating team success Chapter 14. Makingdecisions and solving problems creatively Part 4. Leading individualsand groups Chapter 15. Power and politicking Chapter 16. Networkingand mentoring Chapter 17. Coaching and providing feedback forimproved performance Chatper 18. Leading aChapterwering self andothers Chapter 19. Project management / Endnotes / IndexCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com15HED 2007 Business Communication.15 1510/5/2006 12:07:29 PM

Business CommunicationInternational EditionBUSINESS AND ADMINISTRATIVECOMMUNICATION7th EditionBy Kitty O. Locker, Ohio State University2006 / 720 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296446-2 / MHID: 0-07-296446-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125712-1 / MHID: 0-07-125712-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/locker7eThis Seventh Edition of Business and Administrative Communicationby Kitty Locker is a true leader in the business communicationsfield. Beyond covering the broad scope of topicsin both oral and written business communication, Locker’s textuses a student-friendly writing style and strong design elementto hold student attention. Real-world examples and real businessapplications underscore the relevance and importance ofthe material presented to the classroom experience and to thestudents’ careers. Kitty Locker’s text also conveys the best possibleadvice to students through its research base; the author’sreputation as a contributor to this field of study lends an evengreater element of teachability and relevance to this marketleadingtitle. Locker continues to lead the pack with innovativetechnology offerings – the BComm Skill Booster, PowerWeb– round out the learning experience with Business and AdministrativeCommunicationCONTENTSI. The Building Blocks of Effective Messages Chapter 1. Business Communication,Management, and Success Chapter 2. Building GoodwillChapter 3. Adapting Your Message to Your Audience Chapter 4. MakingYour Writing Easy to Read Chapter 5. Planning, Composing, and RevisingChapter 6. Designing Documents and Screens II. Letters and MemosChapter 7. Informative and Positive Messages Chapter 8. Negative MessagesChapter 9. Persuasive Messages Chapter 10. Sales, Fund-Raising,and Promotional Messages III. Interpersonal Communication Chapter11. Communicating Across Cultures Chapter 12. Working and Writingin Groups IV. Reports Chapter 13. Planning, Proposing, and ResearchingReports Chapter 14. Analyzing Information and Writing ReportsChapter 15. Using Graphs and Other Visuals Chapter 16. Making OralPresentations V. Job Hunting Chapter 17. Resumes Chapter 18. JobApplication Letters Chapter 19. Job Interviews, Follow-Up Letters andCalls, and Job Offers Appendixes A. Formats for Letters, Memos andE-Mail Messages B. Writing Correctly C. Making and CommunicatingMeaning D. Crafting Logical ArgumentsInternational EditionFOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONBy Dona Young2006 / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297954-1 / MHID: 0-07-297954-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111682-4 / MHID: 0-07-111682-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/djyoungDona Young is a charismatic, passionate author with a strongbackground in teaching, curriculum design, faculty development,and corporate training. Our shared vision is developinga text and package that prepares students to communicate atall levels and leads them to successful business careers. Oneimportant learning theme of the text is “Explore, Practice, Apply.”Students first learn to embrace the idea that communicationconsists of different skill sets and that, given the right tools, theycan master these skills. Because students bring in varying levelsof ability, the learning materials are diagnostic and flexible:they help students assess their strengths and weaknesses in thedifferent skills sets and then engage them in practice exercisesto develop expertise. Finally, students learn decision-makingstrategies that motivate them to apply their skills to real-worldsituationsCONTENTSUNIT 1: WRITING SKILLS Chapter 1: Communication and the WritingProcess Section A. Communication as Process Section B. The WritingProcess Section C. Purpose and Audience Section D. Tone / Writer’sHandbook At-a-Glance, Part I: The Mechanics of Writing / Chapter2: What Is Good Writing? Section A. A Simple, Clear and ConciseStyle Section B. Tone and Style / Writer’s Handbook At-a-Glance, PartII: Writing Essentials: Grammar for Writing / Chapter 3: Developingand Revising Short Business Messages Section A. Paragraphs SectionB. Empty Information Section C. The Process of Revising Section D.Transitions and Connectors UNIT 2: PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICA-TION Chapter 4: Office Communications Section A. E-Mail Section B.Business Letters Section C. Memos, Faxes, Voicemail, and Cell Phones/ Handbook At-a-Glance, Part III: Formatting Standard Business Documents/ Chapter 5: Persuasive Communication Section A. The Process ofPersuasion Section B. Formal Persuasion Section C. Persuasive WritingChapter 6: Verbal Communication Skills Section A. Informal SpeechSection B. Feedback Section C. Meetings, Agendas, and Round-TableDiscussions Section D. Presentations Chapter 7: Global Communicationsand Technology Section A. Global Communications Section B.Meetings and Phone Conferences Section C. Technology UNIT 3 APP-PLICATIONS AND CAREERS Chapter 8: Team Communications SectionA. Working in Teams Section B. Developing a Team Strategy SectionC. Writing a Proposal / Handbook At-a-Glance, Part IV: Research: Collecting,Conducting, Displaying and Citing / Chapter 9: Getting a JobSection A. Job Survival Skills Section B. Networks Section C. Letters ofApplications Section D. The Interview Chapter 10: Communicating onthe Job Section A. Leadership Section B. Evaluation: Objectives, ActionPlans, and Performance Feedback Section C. Purpose Statements/ APPENDICES / KEYS to CHAPTER EOC ACTIVITIES / THE WRITER’SHANDBOOK / The Writer’s Handbook, Part I: The Mechanics of WritingSection A. The Comma / Section B. The Semicolon Section C. OtherMarks Section D. Punctuation Errors / The Writer’s Handbook, Part II:Writing Essentials: Grammar for Writing / Section A. Verb Basics SectionB. Pronouns Basics: Case and Point of View Section C. Parallel StructureSection D. Modifiers / Part III: Formatting Standard Business DocumentsSection A. Formatting Basics: Special Features and White Space SectionB. Business Letters Section C. E-Mail and Memos Section D. Agendasand Minutes Section E. Envelopes and Labels / Part IV: Research: Collecting,Conducting, Displaying and Citing Section A. Research SectionB. Displaying Research Section C. Citing Research / KEYS to HandbookExercises, EOC activities / GLOSSARY / INDEXCOMMUNICATION FOR IT2nd EditionBy Access Educational Services2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471478-2 / MHID: 0-07-471478-3McGraw-Hill Australia TitleCommunication for IT 2/e is an Australian text for IT and computerstudents keen to develop communication skills. Buildingon the success of the first edition, the new edition retains astrong industry focus and activity-driven pedagogy. Like itspredecessor, this edition uses plenty of illustrations, case studiesand workplace activities to help students understand basic communicationconcepts as they relate to the workplace. This textalso uses competency links and training logs, to assist teachersin establishing a Portfolio of Evidence.CONTENTSPart A: Interpersonal skills Chapter 1: Communication concepts Chapter2: Conflict resolution and negotiation skills Part B: Working in teamsChapter 3: Participating in and leading on work teams Chapter 4:meetings Part C: Interacting with clients Chapter 5: Communicationwith clients Chapter 6: Presentation skills Part D: Writing for informationtechnology Chapter 7: Principles of effective writing Chapter 8:Workplace documents Chapter 9: Writing reports Chapter 10: Graphiccommunication / INDEX16HED 2007 Business Communication.16 1610/5/2006 12:07:30 PM

Business CommunicationInternational EditionCOMMUNICATING AT WORK8th EditionBy Ronald B Adler, Santa Barbara City College, Jeanne MarquardtElmhorst, Albuquerque Technical-Vocational Institute2005 / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297750-9 / MHID: 0-07-297750-7(with CD, OLC Bi-Card, Mandatory Package)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111224-6 / MHID: 0-07-111224-3[IE with Student CD and Online Learning Center]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/adler8The leading text in business communication, Communicatingat Work takes a pragmatic approach that features a strong multiculturalfocus, a heavy emphasis on effective presentations, anda pedagogical program designed to encourage group activitiesand skill building. Its combination of clear writing and effectiveuse of tables makes this text an excellent teaching tool. The newedition now addresses informal business presentations such asbriefings, reports, and sales presentations, and offers expandedcoverage of ethical issues throughout.CONTENTSPART I: BASICS OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICA-TION (Case Study I with Questions) Chapter 1: Communicating at WorkChapter 2: Communication, Culture, and Work PART II: PERSONALSKILLS (Case Study II with Questions) Chapter 3: Verbal and NonverbalMessages Chapter 4: Listening Chapter 5: Interpersonal Skills Chapter6: Interviewing Chapter 7: Types of Interviews PART III: WORKINGIN GROUPS (Case III with Questions) Chapter 8: Working in TeamsChapter 9: Effective Meetings PART IV: MAKING EFFECTIVE PRES-ENTATIONS (Case IV with Questions) Chapter 10: Developing thePresentation Chapter 11: Organizing Your Ideas Chapter 12: Verbal andVisual Support in Presentations Chapter 13: Delivering the PresentationChapter 14: Types of Presentations / Appendix I: Group PresentationsAppendix II: Business WritingInternational EditionBASIC BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONSkills for Empowering the Internet Generation,10th EditionBy Raymond V Lesikar, University of North Texas and Marie E Flatley,San Diego State University2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-308017-8 / MHID: 0-07-308017-9(with Student CD-ROM, B-Comm Skill Booster and PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111153-9 / MHID: 0-07-111153-0[IE with Student CD/OLC and PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lesikar10eBasic Business Communication (BBC), 10/e by Lesikar andFlatley provides both student and instructor with all the toolsneeded to navigate through the complexity of the modern businesscommunication environment. At their disposal, teachershave access to an online Tools & Techniques Newsletter thatwill continually keep them abreast of the latest research anddevelopments in the field while providing a host of teaching materials.Exciting new student resources, including a subscriptionto the Merriam Webster Collegiate website and an enhancedCD-ROM, allow students to practice and master concepts in funand interesting ways. BBC attends to the dynamic, fast-paced,and ever-changing means by which business communicationoccurs by being the most technologically current and pedagogicallyeffective books in the field. It has realistic examples thatare both consumer-and business-oriented.CONTENTSPart One: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1 Communication in the WorkplacePart Two: FUNDAMENTALS OF BUSINESS WRITING Chapter2 Adaptation and the Selection of Words Chapter 3 Construction ofClear Sentences and Paragraphs Chapter 4 Writing for Effect Part Three:BASIC PATTERNS OF BUSINESS MESSAGES Chapter 5 Introduction toMessages and the Writing Process Chapter 6 Directness in Good Newsand Neutral Messages Chapter 7 Indirectness in Bad-News MessagesChapter 8 Indirectness in Persuasion and Sales Messages Chapter 9Strategies in the Job-Search Process Part Four: FUNDAMENTALS OFREPORT WRITING Chapter 10 Basics of Report Writing Chapter 11Report Structure: The Shorter Forms Chapter 12 Long, Formal ReportsChapter 13 Graphics Part Five: OTHER FORMS OF BUSINESS COM-MUNICATION Chapter 14 Informal Oral Communication Chapter15 Public Speaking and Oral Reporting Part Six: SPECIAL TOPICSIN BUSINESS COMMUNICATION Chapter 16 Techniques of Cross-Cultural Communication Chapter 17 Correctness of CommunicationChapter 18 Technology-Enabled Communication Chapter 19 BusinessResearch Methods APPENDIXES: Corrections for the Self-AdministeredDiagnostic Test of Correctness / Physical Presentation of Messages,Memos, and Reports / General Grading Checklist (New!Formatted tocorrespond to the Markin grading software on the Instructor’s CD-ROM)/ Special Grading Checklists: Messages and Reports / Documentationand the Bibliography (Updated to include the new 15th Edition of theChicago Manual of Style and the 5th edition of the Publication Manualof the American Psychological Association)International EditionCOMMUNICATING IN BUSINESS ANDPROFESSIONAL SETTINGS4th EditionBy Michael S Hanna, University of South Alabama and Gerald LWilson, University of South Alabama1998 / / 496 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-026022-1 / MHID: 0-07-026022-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115985-2 / MHID: 0-07-115985-1 [IE]CONTENTSPart I. Preliminary Considerations: Communication and Organizations1. A Communication Perspective. 2. The Organization-TheoreticalPerspectives. 3. Leadership and Communication in Organizations. 4.Diversity in the Workplace. Part II. Basic Considerations: Foundationsfor Communication in Organizations 5. Perception and Listening.6. Language and Nonverbal Communication. 7. Technology in theWorkplace. Part III. Organizational Contexts: Interpersonal 8. InterpersonalCommunication. 9. Conflict Management. 10. Interviewingand Interviews: On the Job. 11. The Selection Interview: Hiring andBeing Hired for the Job. Part IV. Organizational Contexts: The GroupContext 12. Small Group Communication Process. 13. Communicatingwith Group or Staff. Part V. Organizational Contexts: The One-to-ManyContext 14. Thinking About the Ideas and Arguments. 15. Organizingthe Presentation. 16. Delivering the Presentation.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg17HED 2007 Business Communication.17 1710/5/2006 12:07:30 PM

Business CommunicationInternational EditionEFFECTIVE BUSINESS COMMUNICATION7th EditionBy Herta A. Murphy, University of Washington, Emeritus, Herbert W.Hildebrandt, Jane P. Thomas,University of Michigan1997 / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-044398-3 / MHID: 0-07-044398-X(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116587-7 / MHID: 0-07-116587-8[IE - 1 Color Text]ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114507-7 / MHID: 0-07-114507-9 [IE]CONTENTSPart One: Background for Effective Business Communication Chapter1 Effective Communications in Business. Chapter 2 The 7 C’s of EffectiveCommunication. Part Two: Business Communication in Context.Chapter 3 Business Communication and the Global Context. Chapter 4Business Communication and the Ethical Context. Chapter 5 BusinessCommunication and the Technology Context. Part Three: MessageDesign. Chapter 6 The Process of Preparing Effective Business MessagesChapter 7 The Appearance and Design of Business Messages. Chapter 8Good News and Neutral Messages. Part Four: Written Communication,Major Plans for Letter & Memos. Chapter 9 Bad News Messages. Chapter10 Persuasive Written Messages. Part Five: Written Communication,Reports. Chapter 11 Short Reports. Chapter 12 Long (Formal) Reports.Chapter 13: Proposals. Part Six: Strategies For Oral Communication.Chapter 14 Strategies for Successful Speaking and Successful Listening.Chapter 15 Strategies for Successful Informative and Persuasive Speaking.Chapter 16 Strategies for Successful Interpersonal Communication.Chapter 17 Strategies for Successful Business and Group Meetings. PartSeven: The Job Application Process. Chapter 18 The Job ApplicationProcess-The Written Job Presentation. Chapter 19 The Job ApplicationProcess-Interviews and Follow-up.NEWTechnical WritingEXTREME RESUME MAKEOVERThe Ultimate Guide to Renovating Your ResumeBy Cindy Kenkel, Northwest Missouri State University2007 (November 2005) / 168 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-351182-5 / MHID: 0-07-351182-XWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/kenkelExtreme Résumé Makeover focuses on the written communicationinvolved in finding a job, including résumés, cover letters,and thank you notes. “Before and after” examples of real résumésare incorporated providing concrete visual examples to use asmodels for the final product. Each resume example indicatesthe errors in the initial attempt and suggested improvements.There are also sections on electronic formatting and electronicrésumés, as well as lists of key words for various careers.FEATURES• Relatable “before and after” examples of résumés used successfullyby the author’s former students.• An easy-to-write formula for cover letters is unveiled. Exceptional examplesare showcased—from the traditional to the “T” or “two column”format. See how the cover letter and résumé should match.• Worksheets for both a résumé and cover letter in order to providereaders with a starting point when creating each.• A section showcasing thank you notes will ensure you make a goodimpression after an interview.• Computer instructions for creating a visually attractive document areincluded in the book.• The text utilizes a Frequently Answered Questions format in orderto provide concise, yet comprehensive, answers.• An Online Learning Center provides more examples of resumes andcover letters that do not appear in the text. The site also features anInstructor Center, which includes exam questions, PowerPoint presentations,and an Instructor’s Manual.CONTENTSPart One: Résumés. Chapter 1 – Getting Started. Chapter 2 – RésuméWorksheet. Chapter 3 – Choosing a Format. Chapter 4 – Before andAfter Résumé Examples. Chapter 5 – Electronic Résumé Guidelines.Part Two: Cover Letters. Chapter 6 – Your Cover Letter: A Résumé’sIntroducer. Part Three: Thank You Notes. Chapter 7 – Creating a PersonalizedThank-You Note. Appendix A – Action Verbs. Appendix B– Résumé ChecklistInternational EditionTECHNICAL COMMUNICATION2nd EditionBy Mary M Lay and Billie J Wahlstrom of University of Minnesota-Minneapolis, Carolyn Rude, Texas Tech University, Cindy Selfe,Michigan Tech University and Jack Selzer, Pennsylvania StateUniversity1999 / 768 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-22058-2 / MHID: 0-256-22058-1(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115076-7 / MHID: 0-07-115076-5 [IE]CONTENTSPART ONE: UNDERSTANDING TECHNICAL COMMUNICATIONChapter 1. Technical Communication in Today’s Workplace. Chapter2. The Writer and the Writing Process in the Workplace. Chapter 3.Audience and Technical Communication. Chapter 4. The PersuasiveNature of Technical Communication. PART TWO: ACQUIRING THETOOLS OF TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION Chapter 5. CollaborationChapter. 6. Secondary Sources of Information: Libraries and Online.Chapter 7. Primary Sources of Information: Surveys, Interviews, Observations.Chapter 8. Editing and Style. Chapter 9. Document Design andPackaging. Chapter 10. Visual Display and Presentation. PART THREE:CREATING EFFECTIVE DOCUMENTS Chapter 11. Creating Definitionsand Descriptions. Chapter 12. Instructions, Specifications, andProcedures. Chapter 13. Reports and Studies. Chapter 14. Reports forDecision Making. Chapter 15. Proposals. PART FOUR: DEVELOPINGAND MAINTAINING A PROFESSIONAL EDGE Chapter 16. ProfessionalCommunication. Chapter 17. Oral Presentations in the Workplace. Case/ Documents / Appendix / Index / Glossary• Key words—a critical element of today’s job search—are providedfor all sixteen careers highlighted in the text.• The latest guidelines for electronic formatting and electronic résumésare addressed in step-by-step instructions.18HED 2007 Business Communication.18 1810/5/2006 12:07:30 PM

Corporate CommunicationInternational EditionNEWCORPORATE COMMUNICATION4th EditionBy Paul A Argenti, Dartmouth College2007 (December 2005) / 264 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299054-6 / MHID: 0-07-299054-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125411-3 / MHID: 0-07-125411-0 [IE]Argenti’s Corporate Communication was the first text to tacklethis subject, and now in its Fourth Edition, it remains the mostcomprehensive book in this field. Corporate Communicationsdescribes the changes in the environment for business that havetaken place over the last half-century and their implications forcorporate communication. While attitudes about business havenever been totally positive, they have reached an all-time lowin recent years––mistrust and skepticism of corporate entitiesis high, as are expectations that companies will “give back”to society through philanthropy, community involvement, orenvironmental protection activities. By showing readers theimportance of creating a coordinated corporate communicationsystem, organizations will benefit with important strategiesand tools that few companies in the world are using yet.This new edition shows what companies need to know aboutadvanced communication strategies to stay one step ahead ofthe competition.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New & Updated Cases: By keeping material current, students remainon the cutting-edge of corporate trends and activities. With new casessuch as Muzak and Coca-Cola, readers are presented familiar companiesand introduced to relevant information that corresponds with the text’slesson. Updated cases, Arthur Anderson and Dell, show important dayto-daycompany details.• Updated Sections on Corporate Social Responsibility: Using thetsunami relief efforts as an example, this edition includes added materialon cause related marketing and employees. Another example, theMartha Stewart scandal is detailed showing the implication on stockand brand.• New Topics Covered: New sections on financial and accountingfraud are included as well as sections on identity theft and corporatehate sites.FEATURES• Experienced Author: Paul Argenti is one of the world’s leading expertswho helped define this field. Argenti offers readers a communicationframework developed over 23 years of teaching at the premier businessschools in the country and brings them to life using examples gleanedfrom his extensive consulting work with Fortune 500 companies.• Currency: Each chapter reflects changes in the business environmentas well as developments in the field of Corporate Communication. Inparticular, the impact of technology and the Internet are interlacedthroughout the book.• Managerial Focus: As in previous editions, the book has a managerialtone, making it appropriate for students at all levels of education andinterest in the field. This text is written so that students can grasp thebig picture of Corporate Communication and its role in developing andimplementing corporate strategy.CONTENTS1. The Changing Environment for Business. Case: Arthur Andersen. 2.Communicating Strategically. Case: Carson Containers. 3. An Overviewof the Corporate Communication Function. Case: Dell Computer Corporation.4. Identity, Image and Reputation. Case: Muzak. 5. CorporateAdvertising. Exercise: Corporate Ad Samples. 6. Media Relations. Case:Adolph Coors Company. 7. Internal Communication. Case: WestwoodPublishing. 8. Investor Relations. Case: Steelcase, Inc. 9. GovernmentRelations. Case: Disney’s America Theme Park. 10. Crisis Communications.Case: Coca-Cola IndiaManagerial CommunicationNEWLEADERSHIP COMMUNICATION2nd EditionBy Deborah Barrett, Rice University2008 (March 2007) / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340314-4 / MHID: 0-07-340314-8(Details unavailable at press time)NEWMANAGEMENT COMMUNICATIONPrinciples and Practice, 3rd EditionBy Michael Hattersley and Linda McJannet, Bentley College2008 (January 2007) / 336 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352505-1 / MHID: 0-07-352505-7(Details unavailable at press time)NEWBusiness CommunicationMANAGERIAL COMMUNICATIONStrategies and Applications,4th EditionBy Geraldine Hynes, Sam Houston State University2008 (January 2007) / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352504-4 / MHID: 0-07-352504-9(Details unavailable at press time)• Issue Boxes: These sections showcase topics from annual reports totips on media interviews in order to increase student awareness of theinner workings of the sub-functions of Corporate Communication.19HED 2007 Business Communication.19 1910/5/2006 12:07:31 PM

Business CommunicationInternational EditionLEADERSHIP COMMUNICATIONBy Deborah Barrett, Rice University2006 / 406 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-291849-6 / MHID: 0-07-291849-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124420-6 / MHID: 0-07-124420-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/barrett1eLeadership Communication is a text to guide current and potentialleaders in developing the communication capabilitiesneeded to lead organizations effectively. It brings togethermanagerial communication and concepts of emotional intelligenceto create a new model of communication skills andstrategies for corporate leaders. It begins with chapters on thecore communication skills of developing strategy, analyzingan audience, writing all types of business documents and correspondence,and designing and delivering effective PowerPointpresentations – all from a leadership perspective. Then, it takesstudents through chapters on emotional intelligence, culturalliteracy, meeting management, and team leadership, beforeconcluding with chapters on internal and external organizationalcommunication.CONTENTSIntroduction What Is Leadership Communication? Section 1: CoreLeadership Communication 1 Developing Leadership CommunicationStrategy 2 Creating Leadership Documents 3 Using Language to Achievea Leadership Purpose 4 Developing and Delivering Leadership Presentations5 Using Graphics and PowerPoint for a Leadership Edge Section 2:Managerial Leadership Communication 6 Developing Emotional Intelligenceand Cultural Literacy to Strengthen Leadership Communication7 Leading Productive Management Meetings 8 Building and LeadingHigh-Performance Teams Section 3: Corporate Leadership Communication9 Establishing Leadership through Strategic Internal Communication10 Leading through Effective External Relations APPENDIXESCONTENTSPart 1: Principles of Effective Communication Chapter 1: Foundationsof Management Communication Overview of the field, main schools ofthought, basic analytical tools, key ethical considerations, and how toserve as a credible source. Chapter 2: Goals Defining and organizingcommunication tasks in a general management context; clarifying goalsCase: Yellowtail Marine, Inc. Chapter 3: Audience Analysis Identifying,understanding, and ranking your audiences Case: Weymouth SteelCorporation Chapter 4: Point of View Understanding competing motives,needs, and viewpoints; interpersonal communication Case: SmithFinancial Corporation Chapter 5: Message: Content and ArgumentShaping the messages that will achieve your goal Case: Cuttyhunk Bank(A) Chapter 6: Structure Shaping your argument to the needs of youraudience Case: McGregors Ltd.Department Store Chapter 7: ChoosingMedia What media best convey your messages; upward and downwardcommunication Case: The Timken Company Chapter 8: Style and ToneDelivering your messages in language suitable to your audience Case:Vanrex, Inc. Part 2: Applications Chapter 9: Giving and ReceivingFeedback Hearing and being heard Case: Bailey and Wick Chapter 10:Meeting Management Participation and leadership Case: Lincoln ParkRedevelopment Project Chapter 11: Communicating Change Usingcommunication to overcome resistance to change Case: HammermillPaper Company Chapter 12: Communicating with External AudiencesSelling your organization’s point of view to concerned constituenciesCase A: Oxford Energy Case B: NutraSweet Chapter 13: Diversity andIntercultural Communication Multicultural and international communicationCase A: Reed-Watkins Pharmaceuticals Case B: InternationalOil Chapter 14: Personal And Corporate Ethics Making individual andorganizational ethical choices Case A: Hal of Erhardt & Company: OneAudit Senior’s Dilemma Case B: McArthur House Chapter 15: ElectronicCommunication Shaping the message to the medium Case A: UnifoneCommunication Case B: Savin Consulting Part 3: Technique Chapter16: Effective Writing Style manual to be cross-referenced throughout thecourse Chapter 17: Effective Speaking Style manual on speaking, use ofgraphics, and group presentation to be cross-referenced throughout thecourse Appendix: Case 19: Dotsworth Press Case 20: Inland Steel CoalCompany (A): The Sesser Coal Mine Case 21: United Way of El PasoCase 22: “Fair is Fair,” Isn’t it? Case 23: Kellogg CompanyInternational EditionMANAGEMENT COMMUNICATIONPrinciples and Practices, 2nd EditionBy Michael Hattersley, Management Communications Consultant,Linda M. McJannet, Bentley College2005 / 336 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-288356-5 / MHID: 0-07-288356-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123827-4 / MHID: 0-07-123827-1 [IE]Management Communication, 2/e by Hattersley and McJannetis a text and casebook that includes essential coverage of theprinciples of effective writing and speaking and aims to helpthe reader master the full range of skills required of a successfulmanager. Most of the eighteen end-of-chapter case studies weredeveloped at Harvard Business School where Dr. Hattersleyheaded the Management Communication Department andwhere Dr. McJannet taught (under her married name, Linda McJ.Micheli). The cases put the reader in the role of decision makerand communicator in actual business situations. Five additional(or alternative) cases appear at the end of the book. While thetext emphasizes in a simple, direct style, the enduring practicalcommunication skills every manager needs to master, it alsoincludes full chapters on electronic communication, corporateethics, audience analysis, meeting management, giving andreceiving feedback, choosing media, style and tone, interculturalcommunication, and business and the press. The two concludingchapters provide two style manuals, the first on writing and thesecond on speaking, through the use of graphics and group presentations.Each is designed to be cross-referenced throughoutthe course and serve as a valuable resource for readers to referto throughout their careers.International EditionMANAGERIAL COMMUNICATIONStrategies and Applications, 3rd EditionBy Geraldine E. Hynes, Sam Houston State University2005 (June 2004) / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-282915-0 / MHID: 0-07-282915-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-124321-6 / MHID: 0-07-124321-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hynes3eManagerial Communication, 3/e by Hynes focuses on skills andstrategies that managers need in today’s workplace. This bookcontinues to stand out in the field for its strategic approach,solid research base, comprehensive range of topics, its evenhandedexamination of oral and written channels, and its focuson managerial (as opposed to entry-level) competencies. Theoverriding principle for the revision was to preserve the book’skey strengths while bringing it in line with the early twenty-firstcentury workplace. The chapters have been streamlined andcondensed to meet the needs of a busy contemporary managerand content was added to reflect current business practices.CONTENTSPart 1 - Managing in Contemporary Organizations Chapter 1 - TheRole of Communication in Contemporary Organizations Chapter 2 - TheManagerial Communication Process Chapter 3 - Technologically MediatedCommunication Part 2 - Managerial Writing Strategies Chapter4 - Contemporary Managerial Writing Chapter 5 - Routine MessagesChapter 6 - Management Reports and Proposals Part 3 - Strategies forUnderstanding Messages Chapter 7 - Managerial Listening Chapter 8- Nonverbal Communication Chapter 9 - Intercultural Communication20HED 2007 Business Communication.20 2010/5/2006 12:07:31 PM

Business CommunicationPart 4 - Interpersonal Communication Strategies Chapter 10 - ConflictManagement Chapter 11 - Managerial Negotiation Chapter 12 - InterviewsPart 5 - Group Communication Strategies Chapter 13 - ManagingMeetings and Teams Chapter 14 - Making Formal PresentationsBusiness Communication 12. Intercultural Dynamics in the InternationalCompany Appendix: Case 1: What Else Can Go Wrong? Case 2: Hana:A Joint Venture between Health Snacks and Toka FoodsNEWInternational BusinessCommunicationINTERCULTURAL COMMUNICATION IN THEGLOBAL MARKETPLACE4th EditionBy Iris Varner, Illinois State University and Linda Beamer, CaliforniaState University-Los Angeles2008 (November 2006) / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352506-8 / MHID: 0-07-352506-5Intercultural Communication in the Global Workplace, 4/e byBeamer and Varner addresses the issues of culture and communicationwithin the context of international business. The textprovides examples of how cultural values and practices impactbusiness communication. The authors explore the relationshipsamong the cultural environments of the firm and the structure ofthe firm. They examine how companies and individuals communicate,and concentrate on the underlying cultural reasonsfor behavior. This approach helps readers develop an ability towork successfully within an environment of cultural diversityboth at home and abroad.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Updated discussions of globalization and new technology in businesscommunication and the role of intercultural teams in achievingcorporate goals.• New coverage on intercultural communication research, with a briefdiscussions on the history and paradigms of the study of cultures andcommunication, the distinction made by etic and emic study, the focuson whole cultures and on individuals, and the difference between crossculturaland intercultural communication scholarship.• More short cases, new illustrations and examples have been added,often drawn from cultures not mentioned in earlier editions. Real worldexamples and applications help provide lively class discussions anddevelop critical thinking skills.FEATURES• The authors, Linda Beamer and Iris Varner, are renowned researchersin intercultural communication. They have spent their professional livesresearching this field and working in environments where an understandingof the importance of intercultural communication is an issue on adaily basis. Their practical experience combined with their researchhistory makes them an ideal author pairing for this book.• Mini-Cases at the beginning of the chapters help the students correlatethe case with the topics in the chapter.CONTENTS1. Culture and Communication 2. The Role of Language in InterculturalBusiness Communication 3. Getting to Know Another Culture 4. Selfand Groups in Business Cultures 5. Organizing Messages to OtherCultures 6. Nonverbal Language in Intercultural Communication 7.Cultural Rules for Establishing Relationships 8. Information, Decisions,and Solutions 9. Intercultural Negotiation 10. Legal and GovernmentalConsiderations in Intercultural Business Communication 11. The Influenceof Business Structures and Corporate Culture on InterculturalNEWBusiness EnglishBUSINESS ENGLISH AT WORK3rd EditionBy Susan Jaderstrom, Santa Rosa Junior College and Joanne Miller2007 (January 2006) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313787-2 / MHID: 0-07-313787-1Glencoe/McGraw-Hill TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/bew3eWritten in a conversational tone, this text takes a totally newlearning approach to relating business English to the workplace.Up-to-date topics of telecommunications, customer service,online references, electronic mail, and a host of other real-worldsubjects connect directly to an assortment of activities and exercisesin grammar, punctuation, and writing. The activities in thetext and online accommodate different student learning styles.All students regardless of their previous English backgroundhave the opportunity to be successful learning grammar in abusiness context.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Expanded pretests and posttests• Expanded checkpoint and practice materials• Answers for students in the textbook to all checkpoints, practiceexercises, pretests, and posttests• PowerPoint presentations for each chapter• Design and Format• Internet-ready online courses in WebCT and BlackboardFEATURES• Concept presentation followed immediately with examples, explanations,and reinforcement checkpoints• Workplace application concepts around which all exercises, practices,and quiz/test questions are written• Diagramming exercises to demonstrate the way that the parts of asentence connect• Proofreading exercises to emphasize the importance of accuracy indocuments• Writing exercises that stress good sentence and paragraph development• Quizzes, unit tests, mid-term, and final exams to evaluate studentlearning• Practice exercises that emphasize spelling and correct use of commonlymisused words• Test bank with over 2000 items21HED 2007 Business Communication.21 2110/5/2006 12:07:31 PM

Business Communication• CD-ROM with additional student practice material for every checkpointand practice exercise in the text• Thinking critically and online exercises that correlate the study ofEnglish with problem solving and using the Internet• Marginal notes that include text highlights, student reminders, andpunctuation and capitalization alerts• Edit Patrols that illustrate humorous misuses of the language• Web site that provides additional activities for students and instructorsCONTENTSChapter 1. Resources to improve Vocabulary, Proofreading, and Spelling.Workplace Applications: Online References. Chatper 2. Overview ofParts of Speech. Workplace Applications: Telecommunications. Chapter3. Sentence Development. Workplace Applications: Customer Service.Chapter 4. Noun Functions and Plurals. Workplace Applications: TheInternet. Chapter 5. Compound and Possessive Nouns. Workplace Applications:The World Wide Web. Chapter 6. Capitalization. WorkplaceApplication: Time Management. Chapter 7: Pronouns. Workplace Applications:Electronic Mail. Chapter 8. Pronoun/Antecedent Agreement.Workplace Applications: Cultural Diversity. Chapter 9. Verb Types andParts. Workplace Applications: Problem Solving and Decision Making.Chapter 10. Verb Tense, Voice, and Mood-Verbals. Workplace Applications:Computer Software. Chapter 11. Subject-Verb Agreement.Workplace Applications: Teamwork. Chapter 12. Adjectives. WorkplaceApplications: Ergonomics. Chapter 13. Adverbs. Workplace Applications:Ethics and Etiquette. Chapter 14. Prepositions. Workplace Applications:Leadership. Chapter 15. Conjunctions. Workplace Applications:Stress and Coping Strategies. Chapter 16. The Period and the Comma.Workplace Applications: Job Search and Career Development. Chapter17. Other Punctuation. Workplace Applications: Business Communication.Chapter 18. Numbers. Workplace Applications: Doing Businesson the Internet. Glossary / Appendix A: Spelling Review. AppendixB: Commonly Misuesd or Confused Words or Phrases. Appendix C:Frequently Misspelled Words. / Photo Credits / IndexInternational EditionBUSINESS ENGLISH AND COMMUNICATION8th EditionBy Clark1994ISBN-13: 978-0-02-800990-2 / MHID: 0-02-800990-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118462-5 / MHID: 0-07-118462-7 [IE]Glencoe/McGraw-Hill TitleBusiness WritingInternational EditionSCHAUM’S QUICK GUIDE TO GREAT BUSINESSWRITINGBy Fitzgerald and Suzanne Sparks1999 / 160 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-022060-7 / MHID: 0-07-022060-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116764-2 / MHID: 0-07-116764-1 [IE]A Schaum Publication(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)CONTENTSPart I: Readable Writing. Chapter 1 Know Your Audience. Chapter2 What Should Your Writing Do? Chapter 3 The Power of Words toExpress, Not Impress. Part II: Working on. Chapter 4 Structure andStyle. Chapter 5 Easy Formats to Guide Your Reader. Chapter 6 ThePower of Visuals, White Space, and Headings. Chapter 7 How to Startand Stop. Chapter 8 Brush Up on Your Grammar. Chapter 9 UsingAction Verbs. Part III: Situational Writing. Chapter 10 Delivering BadNews. Chapter 11 Writing to Martians. Chapter 12 Postscript: Do’s andDon’ts-The Final Checklist.International EditionWRITING, RESEARCHING, COMMUNICATINGCommunication Skills For The Information Age,3rd EditionBy Keith Windshuttle and Elizabeth Elliot of Macleay College,Sydney1999 / 600 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-470703-6 / MHID: 0-07-470703-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124265-3 / MHID: 0-07-124265-1 [IE]McGraw-Hill Australia TitleCONTENTSPart One: Foundations of Communication Ch 1 The Nature of Communicationsin the Information Age. Ch 2 Developing Good CommunicationPractice. Ch 3 The Revolution in Communications Technology.Part Two: Writing for the Organization Ch 4 Writing Style. Ch 5Document Design. Ch 6 Business Letters - Basics. Ch 7 Types of BusinessLetters. Ch 8 Memos, Faxes and Forms. Ch 9 Instructions, Noticesand Brochures. Part Three: Writing and Research in Education Ch10 Essays - Planning and Research. Ch 11 Essays and Thesis Writing.Ch 12 Essays - References and Bibliography. Part Four: InterpersonalSkills and Client Relations Ch 13 Client Service and Relations. Ch 14Instructions and Requests. Ch 15 Interviews. Ch 16 Consulting, Listeningand Negotiating. Part Five: Employment Communications Ch 17 MakingJob Applications. Ch 18 Employment Interviews. Ch 19 Preparingand Writing a Resume. Part Six: Writing for the Media Ch 20 WritingNews and Feature Stories. Ch 21 Technical and Scientific Articles. Ch22 Writing for Broadcasting. Ch 23 Media Law Part Seven: Reports andSubmissions. Ch 24 Reports - Research and Analysis. Ch 25 Interviews,Questionnaires & Survey Research. Ch 26 Reports - Writing and Presentation.Ch 27 Administrative and Management Reports. Ch 28 AnnualReports. Ch 29 Submissions. Part Eight: Logic and Reasoning Ch 30Logic and Argument. Ch 31 Rational Debate and Common Fallacies.Part Nine: Public Speaking Ch 32 Public Speaking - Preparation. Ch 33Writing for the Spoken Work. Ch 34 Public Speaking - Delivery. PartTen: Communicating in the Organisation Ch 35 Management Theoryand Communication Structures. Ch 36 Group Decision-Making. Ch 37Formal Meetings. Ch 38 Humanising Meetings and Discussions. Ch 39Writing Objectives, Terms and Policies. Part Eleven: Public Relations Ch40 Public Relations Strategies and Techniques. Ch 41 Political Lobbying.22HED 2007 Business Communication.22 2210/5/2006 12:07:31 PM

Business CommunicationCh 42 How to Use the Media. Part Twelve: Intercultural CommunicationsCh 43 Understanding Cultural Differences. Ch 44 Communicatingwith Other Cultures Specialist Techniques: Section One - Writing. Ch45 Grammar and Technique. Ch 46 Punctuation. Ch 47 OvercomingWriter’s Block. Ch 48 Editing Copy Specialist Techniques: Section Two- Statistics. Ch 49 Using Statistics. Ch 50 Understanding Tables SpecialistTechniques: Section Three - Illustrations. Ch 51 Illustrating with Graphs.Ch 52 Photographs and Drawings Specialist Techniques: Section Four- References. Ch 53 Establishing a Personal Reference Library.International EditionEFFECTIVE WRITINGA Practical Grammar Review, 4th EditionBy Ted D Stoddard, R. Dermont Bell, and Devern Jay Perry, BrighamYoung University1998ISBN-13: 978-0-07-561848-5 / MHID: 0-07-561848-6(with Software Package)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115598-4 / MHID: 0-07-115598-8[IE with 3.5” Disk]CONTENTSAgreement and Reference. Tense. Mood and Voice. Modifiers. ConnectivesPunctuation. Each module contains the five key components:discussion, terminology, rules, self-examination, and exercises. They canbe taught in any order and are not numbered as chapters per se.BUSINESS SCENARIOS: A CONTEXT-BASEDAPPROACH TO BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONBy Heidi Schultz2006 / 144 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298424-8 / MHID: 0-07-298424-4To move students beyond theory to the application of businesscommunication principles, this book drops students intoworkplace scenarios and requires them to respond by writingbusiness messages or by presenting business ideas. To make theexperience challenging for students, this book progresses frombusiness communication basics to challenging rhetorical situations.At each step along the way, students get the groundworkthey need to wrestle with the real-world business situations thatrequire written or spoken responses. In short, this book takes theconcept “critical thinking” and puts it to the test by challengingstudents to make informed rhetorical choices in the face ofincreasingly complex or difficult situations.CONTENTSBuilding Blocks for Business Communication: A refresher. Chapter 1.Business Writing Basics Chapter 2. Business Speaking Basics Chapter3. S.N. Boyce and Its Catalog Division Chapter 4. Wake Partners– The “New Conservative Mutual Fund” Chapter 5. It Has Come toMy Attention . . . Chapter 6. Payroll’s Paperless Payday (informativemessage) Chapter 7. Do Not Park Here . . . or Here . . . or Here(negative message) Chapter 8. Special “No Interest/No Payments for12 Months” Promotion (persuasive message) Chapter 9. Fewer Injuriesfor Warehouse Employees (persuasive message) Chapter 10. MidwestUniversity Named “Number One Party School” Chapter 11. The BigNational Presentation (informative presentation) Chapter 12. Turn Outthe Lights (negative presentation) Chapter 13. Diner Beware Chapter14. District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority – CommunicatingHealth Hazards to the PublicBusiness Communications- Special TopicsPHONE SKILLS FOR THE INFORMATION AGE3rd EditionBy Dorothy A. Maxwell2006 / 152 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-301727-3 / MHID: 0-07-301727-2Website: http://www.mhhe.com/maxwell3eThis five-hour program teaches proper phone use to help studentsdevelop and maintain professional relationships, projecta positive company image, and provide reliable service. PhoneSkills for the Information Age features realistic situations andproblems found in today’s increasingly complex businessenvironments. The text includes reinforcement exercises, selfassessments,case studies, reference charts for on-the-job use,and a glossary.CONTENTSCommunicating Positively / Making Phone Calls / Handling IncomingPhone Calls / Handling Special Types of Calls / Servicing the Customeron the Phone / Using Phone-Related Equipment & TechnologyINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg23HED 2007 Business Communication.23 2310/5/2006 12:07:32 PM

Business CommunicationBusiness Communications(Professional References)International EditionTHE MCGRAW-HILL HANDBOOK OF MOREBUSINESS LETTERS4th EditionBy Ann Poe2006 / 400 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146080-4 / MHID: 0-07-146080-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125344-0 / MHID: 0-07-125344-0 [IE]A Professional Reference TitleExpert advice to help you craft the perfect letter for any businessneed. From requesting an appointment to announcing anacquisition to thanking a supplier, The McGraw-Hill Handbookof Business Letters shows how to create formal, professionalletters with greater confidence and stronger results. This latestedition offers expert strategies for using the right words in theright way, no matter the situation.PRODUCT LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENTDriving the Next Generation of Lean ThinkingBy Michael Grieves2005 (October 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145230-4 / MHID: 0-07-145230-3A Professional Reference TitleIf you want to take lean approaches to the next level, this groundbreakingbook introduces the next evolution of lean thinking:Product Lifecycle Management (PLM). This new methodologyreduces time, energy, and material expenditures across an organizationand has saved billions in costs while shaving 60%off cycle times for performance-driven companies that includeIBM, General Electric, Toyota, and Ford. Now PLM expertMichael Grieves shows business professionals how to roll outPLM across their entire organization. By applying this integrated,information-driven approach to all aspects of a product’s life,managers will dramatically increase agility, optimize efficiency,reduce costs, and enhance productivity.International EditionTHE MCGRAW-HILL HANDBOOK OF MOREBUSINESS LETTERS3rd EditionBy Ann Poe1998 / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-050517-9 / MHID: 0-07-050517-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116671-3 / MHID: 0-07-116671-8 [IE]A Professional Reference Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)International EditionWRITE TO THE POINT!Letters, Memos and Reports That Get ResultsBy Rosemary T. Fruehling, and Neild B. Oldham1992 / 261 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-022555-8 / MHID: 0-07-022555-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113941-0 / MHID: 0-07-113941-9 [IE]A Professional Reference Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com24HED 2007 Business Communication.24 2410/5/2006 12:07:32 PM

2007-2008 NEW Business Law TitlesBusiness Law ~ ContentsBusiness Law .................................................................. 26Cyberlaw ........................................................................ 31Employment Law ............................................................ 30International Business Law .............................................. 30Legal Environment of Business ........................................ 282007 New Titles• BENNETT-ALEXANDEREmployment Law for Business, 5e ...........................30ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302895-8 / MHID: 0-07-302895-9• MALLORBusiness Law, 13e .................................................... 26ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293399-4 / MHID: 0-07-293399-2• McADAMSLaw, Business and Society, 8e .................................28ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304810-9 / MHID: 0-07-304810-02008 New Titles• REEDThe Legal and Regulatory Environment ofBusiness, 14e ........................................................... 28ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304849-9 / MHID: 0-07-304849-625HED 2007 Business Law.indd 2510/5/2006 12:05:49 PM

Business LawBusiness LawBURTON’S LEGAL THESAURUS4th EditionBy William C Burton2007 (November 2006) / 1040 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-147262-3 / MHID: 0-07-147262-2A Professional Reference TitleFor more than 25 years, Burton’s Legal Thesaurus has beenthe one-of-a-kind reference tool in a field where the precisionand accuracy of language is vitally important. The latest editionof this classic resource adds 1,000 new words, terms, andexpressions to the roughly 7,000 already present, includingnontechnical words regularly used by attorneys.International EditionNEWBUSINESS LAWThe Ethical, Global, and E-Commerce Environment13th EditionBy Jane Mallor, Michael Phillips, L. Thomas Bowers, A. James Barnesand Arlen Langvardt of Indiana University - Bloomington2007 (February 2006) / 1312 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-293399-4 / MHID: 0-07-293399-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327139-2 / MHID: 0-07-327139-X(with OLC Card and You Be the Judge DVD, Vol 1 &2)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110242-1 / MHID: 0-07-110242-6[IE with OLC & You be the Judge DVD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mallor13eMallor, Barnes, Bowers and Langvardt’s: Business Law: TheEthical, Global, and E-Commerce Environment, 13e is appropriatefor the two-term business law course. The cases in the 13thedition are excerpted and edited by the authors. The syntax isnot altered, therefore retaining the language of the courts. As inthe 12th edition, the 13th edition includes a mix of actual ANDhypothetical cases. The title has been changed to reflect a newfocus of the book- the global and Internet environment.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapter 4, Business Ethics, Corporate Social Responsibility, andCritical Thinking includes two additional section:• -How to lead ethically, that is, how to ensure that those under one’sdirection, management, -Common characteristics of decisions gonewrong. This section meshes the material on ethics and critical thinking,concluding with a list of factors that commonly lead to bad decisions,such as complexity of a problem, low margin for error, and cognitivebiases that increase risk and lead to over-confidence.• Material on the unintended effects of Sarbanes Oxley has been added,including 1) an increase in going private (public companies choosingno longer to be public), 2) reduced quality audits by independent auditfirms that have a lower understanding of the client’s business, and 3)companies choosing to incorporate under foreign jurisdiction.• Chapter 43 now includes material on the convictions and acquittalsof high-profile corporate executives such as Dennis Kozlowski (Tyco),Bernie Ebbers (Enron), and Richard Scrushy (HealthSouth).• Bankruptcy Chapter now incorporates the major changes to theAct as a result of legislation passed in April 2005. These are the mostsignificant changes since the 1978 Act.• Chapter 46, Legal and Professional Responsibilities of Auditors, Consultants,and Securities Professionals expands the coverage of securitiesprofessionals and coverage of the actual effects of Sarbanes Oxley onthe accounting profession.FEATURES• A Student DVD is available with each new copy of the text and features18 interactive videos featuring courtroom arguments for businesslaw cases. These interactive videos give students the opportunity to hearthe case and then make their decision. After that, they can access thejudge’s decision and reasoning. Students are able to disagree with thejudge, and “state their case” at the end of each scenario.• Chapter on Ethics. With ethics in the forefront now, the authors havesignificantly increased the coverage to give instructors and studentsmore time to discuss this important topic.• Cyberlaw in Action. In keeping with today’s technological world,these boxes describe and discuss actual instances of e-commerce andcyberlaw occurring in businesses today.• The Global Business Environment. Since global issues affect us inmany different aspects of business, this material now appears throughoutthe text instead of in a separate chapter on International Issues. This boxbrings to life global issues that are affecting business law.• LogOn. These appear where appropriate and direct students to relevantweb sites that give more information on the topic at hand.• Ethics in Action. The ethic and public policy concerns have beenremoved from the text and replaced with Ethics in Action boxes in eachchapter. They appear throughout the chapters and offer critical thinkingquestions and situations that relate to ethical /public policy concerns.• Opening vignette opens each chapter and present students with amix of real-life and hypothetical situations and discussion questions.These stories provide a motivational way to open the chapter and getstudents interested in the content they are about to read.• Concept Reviews visually represent important concepts presented inthe text to help summarize key ideas at a glance and simplify students’conceptualization of complicated issues.• Case briefs include the judicial opinions accompanying court decisions.These help to provide concrete examples of the rules stated inthe text, and to provide a real-life application of the legal rule.• Problem cases appear at the end of each chapter to encourage studentreview and comprehension of key topics.• Key terms are bolded throughout the text and defined in the end oftext glossary to assist students in their comprehension.CONTENTSPart 1 Foundations of American Law. Chapter 1 The Nature of Law.Chapter 2 The Resolution of Private Disputes. Chapter 3 Business and theConstitution. Chapter 4 Business Ethics, Corporate Social Responsibility,Corporate Governance and Critical Thinking. Part 2 Crimes and Torts.Chapter 5 Crimes. Chapter 6 Intentional Torts. Chapter 7 Negligence andStrict Liability. Chapter 8 Intellectual Property and Unfair Competition.Part 3 Contracts. Chapter 9 Introduction to Contracts. Chapter 10 TheAgreement: Offer. Chapter 11 The Agreement: Acceptance. Chapter12 Consideration. Chapter 13 Reality of Consent. Chapter 14 Capacityto Contract. Chapter 15 Illegality. Chapter 16 Writing. Chapter 17Rights of Third Parties. Chapter 18 Performance and Remedies. Part 4Sales. Chapter 19 Formation and Terms of Sales Contracts. Chapter 20Product Liability. Chapter 21 Performance of Sales Contracts. Chapter22 Remedies for Breach of Sales Contracts. Part 5 Property. Chapter 23Personal Property and Bailments. Chapter 24 Real Property. Chapter 25Landlord and Tenant. Chapter 26 Estates and Trusts. Chapter 27 InsuranceLaw (moved from ch. 53). Part 6 Credit. Chapter 28 Introductionto Credit and Secured Transactions. Chapter 29 Security Interests inPersonal Property. Chapter 30 Bankruptcy. Part 7 Commercial Paper.Chapter 31 Negotiable Instruments. Chapter 32 Negotiation and Holderin Due Course. Chapter 33 Liability of Parties. Chapter 34 Checks andElectronic Transfers (new title). Part 8 Agency Chapter 35 The Agency26HED 2007 Business Law.indd 2610/5/2006 12:05:50 PM

Business LawRelationship. Chapter 36 Third-Party Relations of the Principal and theAgent. Part 9 Partnership Law. Chapter 37 Introduction to Forms of Businessand Formation of Partnerships. Chapter 38 Operation of Partnershipand Related Forms. Chapter 39 Partners’ Dissociation and Partnerships’Dissolution and Winding Up. Chapter 40 Limited Partnerships, LimitedLiability Limited Partnerships, and Limited Liability Companies. Part10 Corporations. Chapter 41 History and Nature of Corporations.Chapter 42 Organization, Financial Structure, and Dissolution ofCorporations. Chapter 43 Management of Corporations. Chapter 44Shareholders’ Rights and Liabilities. Chapter 45 Securities Regulation.Chapter 46 Legal Responsibilities of Auditors and Consultants. Part 11Regulation of Business. Chapter 47 Administrative Agencies. Chapter48 The Federal Trade Commission Act and Consumer Protection Laws.Chapter 49 Antitrust: The Sherman Act. Chapter 50 The Clayton Act,The Robinson-Patman Act, and Antitrust Exemptions and Immunities.Chapter 51 Employment Law. Chapter 52 Environmental Regulations.Appendix A The Constitution of the United States of AmericaLAW FOR BUSINESS9th EditionBy A James Barnes, Terry Morehead Dworkin and Eric L Richards ofIndiana University - Bloomington2006 / 1040 pagesISBn-13: 978-0-07-297611-3 / MHID: 0-07-297611-XWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/barnes9eFor over 20 years, Law for Business has gone well beyond merelyidentifying the current legal rules and regulations affectingbusiness by offering insights into new developments and trendsthat will affect the future of business. It has provided studentswith a comprehensive, yet concise treatment of the legal issuesof fundamental importance to business students and the businessprofession. The cases, which have always been a strongfeature, are edited and re-written by the authors, who dividethe material into three categories: facts, issues, decisions. Theauthors, Barnes, Dworkin, and Richards, choose cases that areappropriate to explain precedent and history as well as include“hot topic” cases that relate to current events. In addition tocase applications, the authors use such techniques as contentsummaries to apply concepts to practice. Effective managers andemployees must develop knowledge of both law and businessbecause people involved in business also are involved in, andgreatly affected by, the laws concerning business.CONTENTSPART I: Introduction to Law Chapter 1: Law, Legal Reasoning, and theLegal Profession Chapter 2: Dispute Settlement Chapter 3: BusinessEthics and Corporate Social Responsibility Chapter 4: Business and theConstitution Chapter 5: Crimes Chapter 6: Intentional Torts Chapter7:Negligence and Strict Liability PART II: Contracts Chapter 8: TheNature and Origins of Contracts Chapter 9: Creating a Contract: OffersChapter 10: Creating a Contract: Acceptances Chapter 11: ConsiderationChapter 12: Capacity to Contract Chapter 13: Voluntary ConsentChapter 14: Illegality Chapter 15: The Form and Meaning of ContractsChapter 16: Third Parties’ Contract Rights Chapter 17: Performanceand Remedies PART III: Sales Chapter 18: Formation and Terms ofSales Contracts Chapter 19: Warranties and Product Liability Chapter20: Performance of Sales Contracts Chapter 21: Remedies for Breachof Sales Contracts PART IV: Agency and Employment Chapter 22: TheAgency Relationship – Creation, Duties, and Termination Chapter 23:Liability of Principals and Agents to Third Parties Chapter 24: EmploymentLaws PART V: Business Organizations Chapter 25: Which Formof Business Organization? Chapter 26: Partnerships Chapter 27: Formationand Termination of Corporations Chapter 28: Management of theCorporate Business Chapter 29: Financing the Corporation and the Roleof Shareholders Chapter 30: Securities Regulation Chapter 31: LegalLiability of Accountants PART VI: Proper12ty Chapter 32: PersonalProperty and Bailments Chapter 33: Real Property Chapter 34: Landlordand Tenant Chapter 35: Estates and Trusts Chapter 36: Insurance PARTVII: Commercial Paper Chapter 37: Negotiable Instruments Chapter38: Negotiation and Holder in Due Course Chapter 39: Liability ofParties Chapter 40: Checks and Electronic Funds Transfers PART VIII:Credit Transactions Chapter 41: Introduction to Security Chapter 42:Security Interest in Personal Property Chapter 43: Bankruptcy PARTIX: Government Regulation Chapter 44: The Antitrust Laws Chapter45: Consumer Protection Laws Chapter 46: Environmental RegulationAppendix A: Constitution of the United States of America Appendix B:Glossary of Legal Terms and Definitions Appendix C: Spanish-EnglishEquivalents for Important legal Terms Subject IndexTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON LEGALISSUES12th EditionBy M Ethan Katsch, University of Mass-Amherst and William Rose,Albion College2006 / 408 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-354559-2 / MHID: 0-07-354559-7McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073545597.mhtmlThis twelfth edition of TAKING SIDES: LEGAL ISSUES presentscurrent controversial issues in a debate-style format designedto stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills.Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, anissue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual withtesting material is available for each volume. USING TAKINGSIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resourcewith practical suggestions on incorporating this effectiveapproach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader featuresan annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and issupported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSPart 1: Law and the Individual. Part 2: Law and the State. 3: Law andthe Community.FUNDAMENTALS OF BUSINESS LAW5th EditionBy Margaret Barron, Richard Fletcher and Peter Anderson of AdelaideInstitute of TAFE2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471544-4 / MHID: 0-07-471544-5McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/barron5eThis highly-regarded text has been completely updated to meetthe needs of business students undertaking the introductorystudy of business law. Renowned for its readability, the fifthedition builds on this reputation with an improved layout,designed to encourage and enhance students’ understandingof the essentials of business law. The robust theory in the texthas been supplemented by case studies and newspaper articles,providing students with a real-life focus and further opportunityfor discussion. The fifth edition contains both new and updatedcases, including a number of new cases in the area of torts. Manyof the featured cases are highly topical, for example, WaverleyMunicipal Council v Swain, which deals with liability of a publicauthority for negligence, and includes a discussion of the 2005High Court judgment. This book is specifically for students whoare studying business law as part of a business studies coursewhether the main focus of that course is commerce, accounting,management, human resources or another area of business.CONTENTSPart 1: Commercial Law. Chapter 1: Introduction to the Legal System.Chapter 2: The Australian Court System. Chapter 3: The Law of Torts.Chapter 4: Business Organisations. Chapter 5: Negotiable Instruments.Chapter 6: The Financial Transactions Report Act 1988 (Cwlth). Part2: Contract Law. Chapter 7: Contract Law 1. Chapter 8: Contract Law27HED 2007 Business Law.indd 2710/5/2006 12:05:50 PM

Business Law2. Chapter 9: Contract Law 3. Chapter 10: Property Law: Mortgages,Leases and Licenses. Chapter 11: Insurance Law. Part 3: ConsumerLaw. Chapter 12: Sale of Goods. Chapter 13: Consumer ProtectionLaw. Chapter 14: Consumer Credit Law. Chapter 15: Restrictive TradePractices. Chapter 16: Debt Recovery. Chapter 17: Intellectual Property.Part 4: Partnership and Bankruptcy Law. Chapter 18: Principaland Agent. Chapter 19: Partnership and Joint Venture Law. Chapter20: Bankruptcy Law. Part 5: Employment, Workplace Relations andOccupational Health and Safety Law. Chapter 21: Employment Law.Chapter 22: Workplace Relations Law. Chapter 23: Occupational Healthand Safety Law. Part 6: Marketing, Advertising and E-Commerce Law.Chapter 24: The Law of Marketing. Chapter 25: Advertising Law. Chapter26: E-Commerce LawINTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS LAW INSINGAPORE3rd EditionBy Ravi Chandran, National University of Singapore2005 / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-124965-2 / MHID: 0-07-124965-6An Asian PublicationIntroduction to Business Law in Singapore provides readerswith the fundamentals of business law as applied in Singapore.This book is essentially written for students who intend to takebusiness law as a subject. It addresses students’ difficulties inunderstanding the law and provides clear examples. Non-lawstudents without prior legal training will find that this bookmakes the law accessible to them.CONTENTSPreface. Law Report Abbreviations. Table of Cases. Table of Legislation.Chapter 1 Introduction to Law. The Essence of Law. Law and Business.Laws of Singapore. Sources of Law in Singapore. Criminal andCivil Law. Methods of Resolving Civil Disputes. Methods of EnforcingCivil Judgements. Obtaining Legal Advice. Chapter 2 Contract Law:Essentials of a Contract. Offer. Acceptance. Consideration. Intentionto Create Legal Relations. Writing. Variation of Contract. Parties tothe Contract. Chapter 3 Contract Law: Terms of A Contract. ExpressTerms. Implied Terms. Conditions, Warranties and Innominate Terms.Exemption Clauses. Chapter 4 Contract Law: Factors Vitiating a Contract.Incapacity. Illegality. Contracts against Public Policy. Misrepresentation.Duress. Undue Influence. Mistake. Chapter 5 Contract Law:Termination of a Contract. Performance. Agreement. Repudiatory orFundamental Breach. Frustration. Chapter 6 Contract Law: Remediesfor Breach of a Contract. Damages. Specific Performance. Injunctions.Restitution. Limitation of Actions. Chapter 7 Law of Sale of Goods.Scope of the Sale of Goods Act. Implied Terms. Excluding LiabilityImposed by the Sale of Goods Act. Liability of the Manufacturer. Passingof Property. Risk. Delivery. Sale by Person Who is Not the Owner.Seller’s and Buyer’s Remedies. Consumer Protection (Fair Trading) Act.International Sales. Chapter 8 Employment Law. Meaning of the Term“Employee”. Duties of the Employee. Duties of the Employer. Terminationof Contract of Employment. Trade Unions and Industrial Relations.Chapter 9 Law of Agency. The Essence of Agency. Agent-PrincipalRelationship. Principal-Third Party Relationship. Agent-Third PartyRelationship. Chapter 10 Law Relating to Business Organisations. SoleProprietorship. Partnership. Companies. Limited Liability Partnership.Joint Ventures. Chapter 11 Company Law: Members, Directors andOthers. Members. Company Secretary and Auditor. Directors. Chapter12 Company Law: Liquidation and Other Processes. Winding Up.Receivership. Judicial Management. Chapter 13 Law of Torts. Tort ofNegligence. Tort of Passing Off. Tort of Vicarious Liability. Chapter 14Intellectual Property Law. Trade Marks. Patents. Registered Designs.Copyright. Chapter 15 Credit and Security Law. Loans and Overdrafts.Mortgages or Charges over Land. Mortgages or Charges over Chattels.Company Charges. Security in Respect of Choses in Action. Pledges.Liens. Guarantees. Hire Purchase. Appendix A Sample Agreement.Appendix B Researching Singapore Law. Index. About the AuthorNEWLegal Environmentof BusinessTHE LEGAL AND REGULATORY ENVIRONMENT OFBUSINESS14th EditionBy O Lee Reed, Peter J Shedd and Jere W Morehead of University ofGeorgia, Marisa Anne Pagnattaro2008 (September 2006) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-304849-9 / MHID: 0-07-304849-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328404-0 / MHID: 0-07-328404-1(with OLC Premium Content Card)In 1963, the first edition of Legal and Regulatory Environmentof Business, authored by Bob Corley, started a new courseemphasizing the legal environment in which business is conducted.By focusing on the public nature of how governmentregulates business activities, rather than simply how businessesprivately make transactions, a movement away from traditionalBusiness Law began. Through it’s previous 13 editions, Legaland Regulatory Environment of Business has been the leader insetting the standard for materials covered in an introduction tothe legal and regulatory environment of business.CONTENTSPart ONE : Introduction to Law. I Law as the Foundation of Business. 2The Ethical Basis of Law and Business Management.Part TWO : DisputeResolution. 3 The Court System. 4 Litigation. 5 Negotiation and AlternativeDispute Resolution Systems. Part THREE : Business Foundations. 6The Constitution and Business. 7 Principles of Contract Law. 8 Torts inthe Business Environment. 9 Criminal Law and Business. 10 IntellectualProperty in the Property System. Part FOUR : Business Regulations. 11Agency Law and Business Organizations. 12 Administrative Law andCorporate Governance. 13 Antitrust Laws—Regulating Competition.14 Sarbanes-Oxley and Securities Regulations. 15 Employment andLabor Laws. 16 Discrimination in Employment. 17 Environmental Lawsand Pollution Control. Part FIVE : Globalization. 18 International LawAppendix I Case Briefing and Legal Study TipsAppendix II SampleComplaint Appendix III The Constitution of the United States of AmericaAppendix IV Selected Sections of Article 2 of Uniform CommercialCode Appendix V Selected Sections of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002Appendix VI Selected Sections of Securities Act of 1933 Appendix VIISelected Sections of Securities Exchange Act of 1934 Glossary IndexNEWLAW, BUSINESS AND SOCIETY8th EditionBy Tony McAdams, University of Northern Iowa2007 (February 2006) / 840 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-304810-9 / MHID: 0-07-304810-0Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mcadams8eLaw, Business, and Society, 8/e, by Tony McAdams, takes aninterdisciplinary approach, utilizing elements of law, politicaleconomy, international business, ethics, social responsibilityand management. The author produces a compelling holisticpicture of these concepts by giving extensive attention to readings,provocative quotes and factual details. Students learn notmerely the law but the law in context.28HED 2007 Business Law.indd 2810/5/2006 12:05:50 PM

Business LawNEW TO THIS EDITION• A new chapter on contracts offers students a thorough introduction tothis area, making it simpler to meet the new CPA Exam requirements.• Additional torts coverage also better prepares students for the CPAExam in this course area.• A new Practicing Ethics feature in each chapter introduces studentsto the question of how business is regulated in each topic area by highlightingcurrent ethical dilemmas. Students are encouraged to respondto the issues by questions included in each box, which instructors caneasily use for in-class discussion.• Expanded treatment of SOX helps broaden student understanding ofthe full implications of this law.• The new edition has been updated with many new cases, readings,and suggested web sites for student research.• The author has given increased attention to globalization and itsimplications for business in the 8th edition.• A new appendix with the United States Constitution gives studentsquick access to this information.FEATURES• Law, Business, and Society gives substantial attention to Enron,WorldCom, and other current business scandals. The text has two fullchapters devoted to business ethics, Chapter 2: Business Ethics andChapter 18: Internet Law and Ethics.• The text contains a unique integration of readings and cases that createa holistic picture of the relationship of business, law, and society.• The law cases within the text have been carefully edited to be challenging,yet readable.• The 8th edition again includes journalistic and scholarly articles andexcerpts that put the law and ethics in their day-to-day contexts.CONTENTSUnit One—Business and Society 1. Capitalism and the Role of Government2. Business Ethics 3. The Corporation and Public Policy: ExpandingResponsibilities Unit Two—Introduction to Law 4. The American LegalSystem 5. Constitutional Law and the Bill of Rights 6. Contracts 7. Tortsand Product Liability Unit Three—Trade Regulation and Antitrust 8.Government Regulation of Business 9. Business Organizations andSecurities Regulation 10. Antitrust Law—Monopolies and Mergers 11.Antitrust Law—Restraints of Trade Unit Four—Employer—EmployeeRelations 12. Employment Law I: Employee Rights 13. EmploymentLaw II: Discrimination 14. Employment Law III: Labor—ManagementRelations Unit Five—Business and Selected Social Issues 15. ConsumerProtection 16. Product Liability 17. Environmental Protection 18. InternetLaw and EthicsLEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESSBy Akhileshwar Pathak, Indian Institute of Management-Ahmedabad2005 / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-059768-6 / MHID: 0-07-059768-5Tata McGraw-Hill TitleThe interface of law with management is the organising themeof the book. Designed for the MBA students, it would helpthem to become a complete manager. This book emphasises ondevelopment of concepts by following an innovative pedagogicapproach. While building the foundations for a systematic appraisalof the business laws, it adopts the case study method,where the students would be engaged to apply and interpretlegal provisions in the context of real-life business situations.The discussion begins with topics which form the foundationof business law, i.e. laws pertaining to contracts, sale of goods,consumer protection and unfair trade practices (Part 1). Thesubsequent parts provide lucid and cogent discussion on differentthemes, namely, intellectual property rights, corporatelaw, banking law, law and taxation, business and FundamentalRights, business and criminal liability, and cyber law. PEDA-GOGICAL AIDS: A chapter on How to Interpret Legal Text; casesand illustrations based on real-life experiences, with referencenotes and discussions; Glossary of Legal Terms.CONTENTSPart 1: Foundations of Business Law. Chapter 1 – Introduction. Chapter2: Contract: Cases and Illustrations. Chapter 3: Development of ContractLaw. Chapter 4: Sale Of Goods: Cases. Chapter 5: Developmentof Law on Sale of Goods. Chapter 6: Reading Legal Texts. Chapter 7:Reading Legal Texts – Cases. Chapter 8: Consumer Protection Act:Cases. Chapter 9: Formation of the Consumer Protection Act. Chapter10: Unfair Trade Practices: Cases. Chapter 11: Development of Law onUnfair Trade Practices. Chapter 12: Law, Liberalisation and Globlasation.Part II: Intellectual Property Rights. Chapter 13: Patents. Chapter14: Copyright Protection. Chapter 15: Law on Trade Mark Protection.Part III: Corporate Law. Chapter 16: Company Law. Chapter 17: SecuritiesRegulation. Part IV: Banking Law. Chapter 18: Banking Law.Chapter 19: Negotiable Instruments. Part V: Law and Taxation. Chapter20: Introduction to Taxation in India. Chapter 21: Income Tax: Cases.Chapter 22: Income Tax: Ownership, Expenditure and Depreciation.Chapter 23: Income Tax: Set off and Carry Forward of Losses. Chapter24: Central Excise Tax. Part VI: Miscellaneous Themes. Chapter 25:Sales Tax. Chapter 26: Business and the Fundamental Rights. Chapter 27:Information Technology and Law. Chapter 28: Environment ProtectionAct. Chapter 29: Business and Criminal Liability. Chapter 30: IndianLegal System. Part VII: Reference Material. Annexure I: Reference forthe case of ‘Defective Taxi’. Annexure 2: Reference for the case: LaxmiEngineering Works. Annexure 3: Sections on Unfair Trade Practice in theMonopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices Act. Annexure 4: Referencefor the Case of ‘Aman’s Income’. Annexure 5: Reference for the Caseof ‘Carlyle’s Property’. Annexure 6: Reference for the Case of ‘ShrijanTravels’. Appendix 1: Rates at Which Depreciation Shall be AllowableFrom Assessment Year 2003-2004 onwardsINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg29HED 2007 Business Law.indd 2910/5/2006 12:05:51 PM

Business LawInternational EditionLEGAL ENVIRONMENT OF BUSINESSIn the Information AgeBy David Lee Baumer and J. Carl Poindexter of North Carolina StateUniversity—Raleigh2004 / 800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-294313-9 / MHID: 0-07-294313-0(with PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111516-2 / MHID: 0-07-111516-1[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/baumerleobBaumer and Poindexter’s, Legal Environment of Business in theInformation Age, 1e, is the legal environment text for the 21stcentury. In the next few years, many of the laws that comprisethe legal environment of business will change, and the paceof the change is likely to be quick. Because of the growth ofinformation technology, many legal issues have emerged andare occupying center stage. Baumer/Poindexter targets futuremanagers who will be dealing with information technology insome way, and reinforces the latest trends in business educationby providing a similar experience with law. Legal Environmentof Business in the Information Age places an emphasis on themanner in which regulatory law deals with changes in technology,and devotes significantly more attention to E-Commercecontract law and legal protection of intellectual property.CONTENTSPart 1 The Structure of the Legal Environment 1. The Legal Environmentof Business in the Information Age Appendix: How to Brief a Case andWhat Does All That Stuff Mean? 2. The Court System and Jurisdiction3. The Trial Process 4. Alternative Dispute Resolution 5. ConstitutionalLaw 6. Government Regulation of Business and Ethics Part 2 The CommonLaw and Interfaces with the Internet 7. Basic Contract Law 8.Commercial Law: The UCC 9. Contract Law for E-Commerce: UCITA,UETA, and UCC Revisions 10. Basic Tort Law 11. Cybertorts, Privacy,and Government Regulation 12. Basic Property Law and Protection ofIntellectual Property 13. Copyright, Trademarks and Legal Protectionof Software 14. Business Organization and Cybercompanies Part 3Government Regulation 15. Agency, Electronic Agents and Employmentat Will 16. Employment Law and Protection of Workers 17.Antidiscrimination Legislation 18. Consumer Protection and ElectronicTransactions 19. Antitrust and the Interface with Intellectual Property20. Government Regulation of Securities and Online Trading 21. EnvironmentalLaw 22. Cybertrash: Pornography, Fraud, Cyber Crime andSPAM 23. Jurisdiction and International IssuesCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comInternational Business LawInternational EditionINTERNATIONAL BUSINESS LAWBy John H. Willes and John A. Willes of Queen’s University2005 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-282251-9 / MHID: 0-07-282251-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123846-5 / MHID: 0-07-123846-8 [IE]International Business Law by Willes and Willes successfullyprovides an overview of an extremely vast field. It incorporatesthe business conducts and legal procedures that exists in Internationaltrade and business dealings. The chapters are neatlystructured in the division of international business into trades ingoods, services, intellectual property and investment. The restof the chapters are the divided into sections of global/governmentlaw and regulations as it relates to the business enterprisecomponent.CONTENTSPART ONE – The Environment of International Business Law Ch. 1– The International Business Environment Ch. 2—The Foundations ofthe International Environment Ch. 3—The International Law Foundationsof International Business Law Ch. 4—Public Organizations andInternational Agreements Ch. 5 – Regional Integration PART TWO– INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS LAW TRANSACTIONS Ch. 6 – ImportingCh. 7 – Direct Sale of Goods Exports Ch. 8 – Transportation &Logistics Ch. 9 – Trade Payment and Finance PART THREE- ALTIUSAND FORTIUS: TRANSACTIONS WITH HIGHER AND STRONGERFOREIGN MARKET COMMITMENTS Ch. 10—International DistributionCh. 11—Intellectual Property and Licensing Ch. 12—Foreign InvestmentCh. 13 – International Alternative Dispute Resolution Ch. 14—Taxationof International Business TransactionsNEWEmployment LawEMPLOYMENT LAW FOR BUSINESS5th EditionBy Dawn Bennett-Alexander, University of Georgia and Laura P.Hartman, University of Wisconsin-Madison2007 (November 2005) / 832 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-302895-8 / MHID: 0-07-302895-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326072-3 / MHID: 0-07-326072-X(with PowerWeb Bind-In, Mandatory Package)Website: http://www.mhhe.com/emplaw5eBennett-Alexander and Hartman’s Employment Law for Business,5/e addresses law and employment decisions from amanagerial perspective. It is intended to instruct students onhow to manage effectively and efficiently with full comprehensionof the legal ramifications of their decisions. Students areshown how to analyze employment law facts using concreteexamples of management-related legal dilemmas that do notpresent clear-cut solutions. The methods of arriving at resolutionsare emphasized, so that when the facts of the workplaceproblem are not quite the same, the student can still reach agood decision based on the legal considerations required bylaw, which remain relevant.30HED 2007 Business Law.indd 3010/5/2006 12:05:51 PM

Business LawNEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapters 1-3 now explore and delineate the basic structure of employmentregulation in a chronological and intuitive format.• Because the issue of testing and performance appraisals appear atthe commencement or early on in the employment relationship andoften have implications for the discrimination chapters, they are nowaddressed earlier in the 5th edition.• Each chapter features new end of chapter questions based on updatedcase law or problems.• Expanded treatment of topics, thoroughly updated material, and newcases have been included in the 5th edition. Examples include:-Chapter 1: New case: Pennsylvania v. Suders is a critical case thatexplores whether sexual harassment can form the basis of a constructivedischarge claim.-Chapter 1: Expanded discussion on retaliatory discharge includingdetailed explanation of guidance from EEOC’s compliance manual.-Chapter 3 now encompasses the legal structure that defines the employmentrelationship and the evolution of that relationship, includinghow the law governs recruitment, selection, hiring, testing, appraisals,and other connected issues.-Chapter 10: Entire new section covering harassment on the basis ofnational origin.-Chapter 10: New case: Kang v. U. Lim America, Inc., further clarifiesthe case for harassment on the basis of national origin-Chapter 11: Detailed analysis of Supreme Court’s 2005 opinion in Smithv. City of Jackson, which was the first case to find for the possibilityof age discrimination based on disparate impact. The implications forjustifications based on economic arguments are discussed, as are theimplications of Meacham v. Knolls Atomic Power Laboratory.-Chapter 11: New section added that explores employee’s prima faciecase for claims of hostile environment based on age.-Chapter 12: Additional case-based examples throughout serve to effectivelyilluminate the complicated terms included in any discussionof disability discrimination.-Chapter 13: Expansion of section on regulation of off-work activitiesto reflect recent caselaw.-Chapter 13: New discussion of polygraphs and other forms of testing,as well as impact of HIPAA on privacy issues.-Chapter 13: New section on privacy rights since September 11,2001.-Chapter 15: New section on “willfulness” of an OSHA violation andits legal implications based on recent case law.-Chapter 15: Additional discussion of OSHA’s first recommendationswith regard to the prevention of ergonomic (musculoskeletal) injuriesin specific professions.FEATURES• Hot topics like race and gender discrimination in the workplace,disability issues, and sexual harassment claims have been incorporatedinto the 4th edition where appropriate.• Case-end questions are designed as critical-thinking questions to getthe student to go beyond the legal concepts and think critically aboutmanagement issues from an employer’s standpoint. The authors feeladdressing the issues in the way they are likely to arise in life greatlyenhances a students learning ability and likelihood of recognition andunderstanding of these situations when they arise in the workplace.• Inclusion of boxed items from everyday sources such as People andUSA Today shows students how text material relates to real managementsituations in the workforce.• Background information is provided on relevant social or politicalmovements so students know the history behind the laws in place.• Web URLs are provided on the text’s website for students to dofurther research on the topics discussed in the chapters.CONTENTSPart I: The Regulation of the Employment Relationship Ch. 1 “TheRegulation of Employment” Ch. 2 “Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of1964” Ch. 3 “Legal Construction of the Employment Environment” PartII: The Regulation of Discrimination in Employment Introduction toPart II Ch. 4 “Affirmative Action” Ch. 5 “Race Discrimination” Ch. 6“Gender Discrimination” Ch. 7 “Sexual Harassment” Ch. 8 “AffinityOrientation Discrimination” Ch. 9 “Religious Discrimination” Ch. 10“National Origin Discrimination” Ch. 11 “Age Discrimination” Ch. 12“Disability Discrimination” Part III: The Regulation of the EmploymentEnvironment Ch. 13 “The Employee’s Right to Privacy and Managementof Personal Information” Ch. 14 “Labor Law” Ch. 15 “OccupationalSafety and Health” Ch. 16 “Employee Retirement Income Security Act”Ch. 17 “Fair Labor Standards Act”International EditionCyberlawLEGAL LANDMINES IN E-COMMERCEBy David R. Canton, Harrison Pensa LLP and John E. Millar, TheAttache Group, Inc.2003 / 144 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-252787-2 / MHID: 0-07-252787-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121325-7 / MHID: 0-07-121325-2 [IE]CONTENTSIntroduction Case 1: www.centralmba.com Case 2: Creating a WebSite for Medisys Health Group Case 3: Enerline Restorations Inc.: StayWith an ASP? Case 4: Homegrocer.com Case 5: eLance.com: PreventingDisintermediationInternational EditionCYBERLAW AND E-COMMERCEBy David Baumer and J Poindexter of North Carolina State University2002 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-244120-8 / MHID: 0-07-244120-8(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112300-6 / MHID: 0-07-112300-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/baumercyberlawCONTENTSChapter 1: The Legal Environment of Business in the Information AgeChapter 2: Basic Contract Law Chapter 3: Current and Future Contractlaw for E-Commerce Chapter 4: Contracting and Licensing SoftwareChapter 5: Torts: Wrongs and Their Remedies Chapter 6: Cybertorts,Privacy, and Government Regulation Chapter 7: Product Liability in TortChapter 8: Intellectual Property I: Basic Patent and Trade Secret LawChapter 9: Intellectual Property II: Basic Copyright and Trademark LawChapter 10: Intellectual Property III: Creating, Using, and ProtectingSoftware Chapter 11: Business Organization: Bricks and Mortar Chapter12: Cyber Companies and Internet Agreements31HED 2007 Business Law.indd 3110/5/2006 12:05:51 PM

Business Law32HED 2007 Business Law.indd 3210/5/2006 12:05:51 PM

2007-2008 NEW E-Commerce TitlesE-Commerce ~ ContentsBusiness Process & Re-Engineering ................................. 35Customer Relations Management .................................... 41Cyberlaw and Ethics ....................................................... 36Cyberpreneurship ........................................................... 37E-Commerce Cases Book ................................................ 38Internet Marketing .......................................................... 362007 New Titles• BENTONPurchasing and Supply Management .......................39ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6• BOWERSOXSupply Chain Logistics Management, 2e .................. 39ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8• SIMCHI-LEVIDesigning and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e ........40ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-XIntroduction to E-Commerce ........................................... 34Knowledge Management ................................................ 38Professional E-Commerce ............................................... 42Risk Management ........................................................... 37Strategy .......................................................................... 37Supply Chain Management ............................................. 39Technology / Infrastructure ............................................. 3433HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3310/5/2006 1:47:03 PM

E-CommerceIntroduction to E-CommerceInternational EditionINTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE2nd EditionBy Jeffrey F. Rayport and Bernard J. Jaworski of Monitor / MarketspaceCenter and Breakaway Solutions Inc.2004 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286525-7 / MHID: 0-07-286525-3(with PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123266-1 / MHID: 0-07-123266-4[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/rayport04Introduction to E-Commerce, 2/e, by Rayport and Jaworksi,can be used as the principles book for e-commerce. Much likethere is a “Principles of Marketing” that is intended to be thefirst course in marketing, The text covers the entire landscapeof e-commerce. The key message is that faculty who want toteach an introductory class on e-commerce and focus on thestrategy parts of e-commerce first and technology second, shouldadopt this book. Faculty who teach marketing, management,strategy and entrepreneurship as the core discipline prefer thisbook over technology-oriented e-commerce books. Introductionto e-Commerce gives present and future practitioners ofe-Commerce a solid foundation in all aspects of conductingbusiness in the networked economy. The text focus is on whata manager needs to know about Internet infrastructure, strategyformulation and implementation, technology concepts, publicpolicy issues, and capital infrastructure in order to make effectivebusiness decisions. This is presented in a framework for thestudy and practice of e-Commerce with business strategy at thecore surrounded by four infrastructures; the technology infrastructurethat underlies the Internet, the media infrastructure thatprovides the content for businesses, public policy regulationsthat provide both opportunities and constraints, and the capitalinfrastructure that provides the money and capital to run thebusinesses. Within this framework, the authors provide a deepexploration of core concepts of online strategy and associatedenablers enriched by a wide variety of examples, case studies,and explanations culled directly from practice.CONTENTS1 A Framework for E-Commerce Part I: The Basic Technology of theInternet and the Web 2 Basic Technology of the Web and E-CommerceBusinesses Part II: Strategy Formulation for New Economy Firms 3Framing Market Opportunity 4 Business Models 5 Customer Interface6 Market Communications and Branding 7 Strategy Implementation 8Metrics Part III: Technology Infrastructure 9 Website DevelopmentProcess 10 Website Architecture Part IV: Capital Infrastructure 11Human and Financial Capital Part V: Media Infrastructure 12 MediaConvergence Part VI: Public Policy and Structure 13 Public Policy:RegulationInternational EditionE-COMMERCEStrategy, Technologies And ApplicationsBy David Whiteley2000 / 300 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-709552-9 / MHID: 0-07-709552-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118346-8 / MHID: 0-07-118346-9 [IE]ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124161-8 / MHID: 0-07-124161-2[IE – POD Printing]McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/books/whiteleyCONTENTSAcknowledgements / Preface / Part 1: Introduction to ElectronicCommerce / Chapter 1 Electronic Commerce / Part 2: Business Strategyin an Electronic Age / Chapter 2 The Value Chain / Chapter 3Competitive Advantage / Chapter 4 Business Strategy / Chapter 5 CaseStudy—Electronic Commerce in Passenger Air Transport / Part 3: Businessto Business Electronic Commerce / Chapter 6 Inter-organisationalTransactions / Chapter 7 Electronic Markets (EM) / Chapter 8 ElectronicData Interchange (EDI) / Chapter 9 EDI, the Nuts and Bolts / Chapter 10EDI and Business / Chapter 11 Inter-organisational E-Commerce / Part4: Business to Consumer Electronic Commerce / Chapter 12 ConsumerTrade Transactions / Chapter 13 The Internet / Chapter 14 A Page on theWeb / Chapter 15 The elements of E-Commerce / Chapter 16 E-Business/ Part 5: Conclusions / Chapter 17 Electronic Commerce—May ManyFlowers Bloom / Bibliography / IndexTechnology/InfrastructureELECTRONIC COMMERCE2nd EditionBy Bharat Bhasker, Indian Institute of Management2005 / 552 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-060095-9 / MHID: 0-07-060095-3Tata McGraw-Hill TitleFollowing an integrated approach, this book provides a thoroughunderstanding of what electronic commerce is all about-- advantages, caveats and business models, including its completeframework and enabling technologies. With the growingimportance of mobile commerce (M-commerce), this editiondiscusses in detail the technological and managerial issuespertaining to M-commerce. Five comprehensive case studieson - Online payment for railway tickets: SBI`s eRail service- Electronic Data Interchange: Indian Customs & Excise adoptsEDI - E-Commerce Strategy, Business Models and Internet Startups:A Business Case on Fabmart Pvt. Ltd - E-Commerce in theDistribution System: The Case of HLL RS Net - Deploymentof Information Security Infrastructure: The Experience of IIMLucknow This book is indispensable for the students of bothmanagement and technical courses on electronic commerce. Itwill also prove to be a valuable source of reference to studentsof computer science, managers and information officers.CONTENTS1. Introduction to Electronic Commerce. 2. Electronic Commerce: BusinessModels. 3. Electronic Data Interchange. 4. Electronic Commerce:Architectural Framework. 5. Electronic Commerce: Network Infrastructure.6. Electronic Commerce: Information Distribution and Messaging.7. Electronic Commerce: Information Publishing Technology. 8. ElectronicCommerce: Securing the Business on Internet. 9. Electronic Commerce:Securing Network Transaction. 10. Electronic Payment Systems.11. Electronic Commerce: Search Engines and Directory Services. 12.Internet Advertising. 13. Mobile Commerce: Introduction, Framework,and Models. 14. Agents in Electronic Commerce34HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3410/5/2006 1:47:03 PM

International EditionE-COMMERCEContext, Concepts and ConsequencesBy N Bandyopadhyay, University of East London2002 / 400 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-709857-5 / MHID: 0-07-709857-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123068-1 / MHID: 0-07-123068-8 [IE]McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/bandyoCONTENTSContext: 1. Introduction to Electronic Commerce. 2. The Internet and theWorld-Wide-Web for E-commerce. 3. Information in Organizations. 4.The Intelligent Organization Concepts. 5. Communication Infrastructurefor E-commerce. 6. Information Management Infrastructure for E-commerce.7. Operational Infrastructure for E-commerce Consequences. 8.Strategic Implementation of E-commerce. 9. Creating trust in E-Commerce.10. E-commerce and Society in the 21st century.International EditionE-BUSINESS AND E-COMMERCE INFRASTRUCTURETechnologies Supporting E-Business InitiativeBy Abhijit Chaudhury and Jean-Pierre Kuilboer2002 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-247875-4 / MHID: 0-07-247875-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112313-6 / MHID: 0-07-112313-X [IE]CONTENTSChapter 1 E-Commerce and E-Business Chapter 2 Networking FundamentalsMultiplexing Chapter 3 Communication Protocols for E-BusinessChapter 4 Network Security and E-Commerce Chapter 5 Authentication,Encryption, Digital Payments, and Digital Money Chapter 6 Server Platformsin E-Commerce Chapter 7 Language for the Web: HTML, XML,and Beyond Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Software Chapter 10 Multimedia andWeb-casting on the WebBusiness Process &Re-EngineeringInternational EditionE-CommerceINTERNET BUSINESS MODELS AND STRATEGIESText and Cases, 2nd EditionBy Allan Afuah, University of Michigan-Ann Arbor and ChristopherTucci, New York University2003 / 496 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-251166-6 / MHID: 0-07-251166-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125248-5 / MHID: 0-07-125248-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/afuahtucci2eCONTENTSPart I: The Internet Chapter 1. Introduction and Overview Chapter2. Overview of Internet Technology and Value Network Chapter 3.Competitive Landscape-Changing Properties of the Internet Part II:Components, Linkages, Dynamics, and Evaluation of Business ModelsChapter 4. Components of a Business Model Chapter 5. Dynamics ofBusiness Models (rewritten new chapter) Chapter 6. Taxonomy of InternetBusiness Models (new) Chapter 7. Value Configurations and theInternet Chapter 8. Valuing and Financing an Internet Start-Up Chapter9. Appraisals of Internet Business Models (expanded into new chapter)Part III: The Role of Competitive and Macro Environments Chapter 10.Competitive and Macro Environments Part IV: Applying the Concepts,Models, and Tools Chapter 11. The General Manager and the InternetChapter 12. Sample Analysis of an Internet Business Model Case PartV : Cases Case 1. Broadcast.com Case 2. Webvan: Reinventing theMilkman Case 3. Reflect.com: Burn the Ship (new) Case 4. VerticalNetCase 5. Live READS: Valuing an e-Book Startup (new) Case 6. BeyondInteractive Case 7. Hotmail: Free email for sale Case 8 GMBuyPowerCase 9 iVillage Case 10 eBay, Inc. Case 11 Microsoft: X-Box online(new) Case 12 Sun Microsystems Case 13 Oscar: The Open Source CarProject (new) Case 14 E*trade: A lust for being different (new) Case 15RIM: Blackberry: Wireless e-mail: the killer App? (new) Case 16 SprintPCS: Winning the Wireless War? (new) Case 17 Napster: The GiantOnline Pirate Bazaar? (new)International EditionCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comINTERNET BUSINESS MODELSText and CasesBy Thomas Eisenmann, Havard Business School2002 / 656 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-250834-5 / MHID: 0-07-250834-5(with Case CD) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-112473-7 / MHID: 0-07-112473-X[IE with Case CD]CONTENTSPREFACE / INTERNET ACCESS PROVIDERS 1. Tele-Communications,Inc.: Accelerating Digital Deployment 2. Geocast Network Systems,Inc. 3. Teledesic [CD ROM bound into volume] ONLINE PORTALS4. Yahoo!: Business on Internet Time 5. StarMedia: Launching a LatinAmerican Revolution 6. Tellme Networks, Inc. ONLINE CONTENTPROVIDERS 7. Boston.com 8. CNET 2000 9. BET.com 10. BMGEntertainment ONLINE RETAILERS 11. Staples.com 12. Petstore.com13. Sendwine.com ONLINE BROKERS 14. DLJdirect: “Putting OurReputation Online” 15. Carpoint in 1999 16. Rosenbluth Internationaland Biztravel.com 17. Wit Capital: Evolution of the Online InvestmentBank (A) and (B) ONLINE MARKET MAKERS 18. Priceline WebhouseClub 19. eBricks.com 20. Sothebys.com NETWORKED UTILITYPROVIDERS 21. Adobe Systems Incorporated APPLICATION SERVICEPROVIDERS 22. Everdream 23. DoubleTwist, Inc.35HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3510/5/2006 1:47:04 PM

E-CommerceInternet MarketingInternational EditionINTERNET MARKETINGBuilding Advantage in a Networked Economy,2nd EditionBy Rafi Mohammed, Monitor Marketspace Center, Robert J. Fisher,University of Western Ontario, Bernard J. Jaworski, Monitor MarketspaceCenter and Gordon Paddison, , New Line Cinema2004 / 768 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07253842-7 / MHID: 0-07-253842-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286526-4 / MHID: 0-07-286526-1(with PowerWeb for E-Commerce)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123259-3 / MHID: 0-07-123259-1[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mohammed04Internet Marketing: Building Advantage in a Networked Economy,2e presents a “road-tested” framework to help studentsand practitioners understand how to think about and implementeffective Internet marketing programs. The focus is on usingmarketing levers to vary the level of intensity that the consumerhas with a Website to build a relationship with the customerthrough four stages: from Awareness, to Exploration/Expansion,to Commitment, and possibly through Dissolution. This fourstage customer-centric framework shows readers how to usethe Internet to create intense and profitable relationships withtheir customers. In addition to comprehensively discussing thekey levers that marketers can use to create relationships, theauthors focus on two primary forces that the Internet brings tomarketing: the Individual and Interactivity—detailing how theseforces influence key marketing levers and how these forces canbe leveraged to create intense relationships with customers.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction to Internet Marketing Part I: Framing the MarketOpportunity Chapter 2: Framing the Market Opportunity Part II:Marketing Strategy Chapter 3: Marketing Strategy in Internet MarketingPart III: The Design of the Customer Experience Chapter 4: CustomerExperience Part IV: Building the Customer Interface Chapter 5: CustomerInterface Part V: The Design of the Marketing Program Chapter6: Customer Relationships Chapter 7: Product Chapter 8: Pricing Chapter9: Communication Chapter 10: Community Chapter 11: DistributionChapter 12: Branding Chapter 13: Designing the Marketspace MatrixChapter 14: Designing the Marketing Program for Lord of the Rings PartVI: Leveraging Customer Information Through Technology Chapter15: Customer Information Systems: Leveraging Customer InformationThrough Internet Technology Part VII: Marketing Program EvaluationChapter 16: Customer MetricsINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sgInternational EditionINTERNET MARKETINGReadings and Online ResourcesBy Paul S. Richardson, Loyola University—Chicago2001 / 368 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-242793-6 / MHID: 0-07-242793-0 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118809-8 / MHID: 0-07-118809-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/richardson01CONTENTS1. Introduction To Internet Marketing. 2.Conceptual Foundations ofInternet Marketing. 3.Business-to-Consumer Internet Marketing. 4.Shopping Agents & Consumer Behavior. 5. Internet Marketing Communications.6. Interactivity & Community. 7. Business-to-BusinessInternet Marketing. 8 . Internet Marketing Research. 9. The Internet& International Marketing. 10. The Internet & Public Policy. 11. TheInternet & Information Economics.International EditionE-MARKETING STRATEGYBy Chaston2000ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709753-0 / MHID: 0-07-709753-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-118873-9 / MHID: 0-07-118873-8 [IE]McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/chastonCONTENTS1. Managing in an E-Commerce World / 2. E-Buyer Behavior / 3. Mappingthe E-Market System / 4. E-Commerce Competence / 5. E-MarketPositioning and Competitive Advantage / 6. Selecting E-Strategies andConstructing an E-Plan / 7. E-Commerce Innovation / 8. E-Promotion / 9.E-Pricing and Distribution / 10. E-Management Systems / 11. E-Businessand Institutional Markets / 12. E-Service MarketsCyberlaw and EthicsInternational EditionLEGAL LANDMINES IN E-COMMERCEBy David R. Canton, Harrison Pensa LLP and John E. Millar, The AttacheGroup, Inc.2003 / 144 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-252787-2 / MHID: 0-07-252787-0 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121325-7 / MHID: 0-07-121325-2 [IE]CONTENTSIntroduction Case 1: www.centralmba .com Case 2: Creating a WebSite for Medisys Health Group Case 3: Enerline Restorations Inc.: StayWith an ASP? Case 4:Homegrocer.com Case 5:e Lance.com: PreventingDisintermediation36HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3610/5/2006 1:47:04 PM

E-CommerceInternational EditionCYBERLAW AND E-COMMERCEBy David Baumer and J Poindexter of North Carolina State University2002 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-244120-8 / MHID: 0-07-244120-8(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112300-6 / 0-07-112300-8 [IE]CONTENTSChapter 1: The Legal Environment of Business in the Information Age.Chapter 2: Basic Contract Law. Chapter 3: Current and Future Contractlaw for E-Commerce. Chapter 4: Contracting and Licensing Software.Chapter 5: Torts: Wrongs and Their Remedies. Chapter 6: Cybertorts,Privacy, and Government Regulation. Chapter 7: Product Liability inTort. Chapter 8: Intellectual Property I: Basic Patent and Trade SecretLaw. Chapter 9: Intellectual Property II: Basic Copyright and TrademarkLaw. Chapter 10: Intellectual Property III: Creating, Using, and ProtectingSoftware. Chapter 11: Business Organization: Bricks and Mortar.Chapter 12: Cyber Companies and Internet Agreements.CyberpreneurshipInternational EditionBUILDING AN E-BUSINESSFrom the Ground UpBy Elizabeth Eisner Reding2001 / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-242636-6 / MHID: 0-07-242636-5 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115081-1 / MHID: 0-07-115081-1 (IE)Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ebusinessCONTENTSCHAPTER ONE: Getting Started on the Web / CHAPTER TWO: Creatinga Business Plan / CHAPTER THREE: Developing a Marketing Plan/ CHAPTER FOUR: Designing a Web Page / CHAPTER FIVE: Creatinga Web Site / CHAPTER SIX: Enhancing Web Pages / CHAPTER SEVEN:Creating Advanced Web Pages / CHAPTER EIGHT: Running an E-Business/ GlossaryRisk ManagementInternational EditionELECTRONIC COMMERCESecurity, Risk Management, and Control, 2nd EditionBy Marilyn Greenstein, Arizona State University-West and MiklosVasarhelyi, Rutgers University, Newark2002ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251915-0 / MHID: 0-07-251915-0(with PowerWeb) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-124064-2 / MHID: 0-07-124064-0[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/business/accounting/greenstein2eCONTENTS1. Overview of Electronic Commerce. 2. The Electronization of Business.3. B2B Process and Strategies. 4. Electronic Commerce and the Roleof Independent Third-Parties. 5. The Regulatory Environment. 6. EDI,Electronic Commerce and the Internet. 7. Risks of Insecure Systems.8. Risk Management. 9. Internet Security Standards. 10. Cryptography& Authentication. 11. Firewalls. 12. Electronic Commerce PaymentMediums. 13. Intelligent Agents. 14. Web-Based MarketingInternational EditionStrategyINTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE2nd EditionBy Jeffrey F. Rayport and Bernard J. Jaworski of Monitor / MarketspaceCenter and Breakaway Solutions Inc.2004 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286525-7 / MHID: 0-07-286525-3(with PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123266-1 / MHID: 0-07-123266-4[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/rayport04Introduction to E-Commerce, 2/e, by Rayport and Jaworksi,can be used as the principles book for e-commerce. Much likethere is a “Principles of Marketing” that is intended to be thefirst course in marketing, The text covers the entire landscapeof e-commerce. The key message is that faculty who want toteach an introductory class on e-commerce and focus on thestrategy parts of e-commerce first and technology second, shouldadopt this book. Faculty who teach marketing, management,strategy and entrepreneurship as the core discipline prefer thisbook over technology-oriented e-commerce books. Introductionto e-Commerce gives present and future practitioners ofe-Commerce a solid foundation in all aspects of conductingbusiness in the networked economy. The text focus is on whata manager needs to know about Internet infrastructure, strategyformulation and implementation, technology concepts, publicpolicy issues, and capital infrastructure in order to make effectivebusiness decisions. This is presented in a framework for thestudy and practice of e-Commerce with business strategy at thecore surrounded by four infrastructures; the technology infrastructurethat underlies the Internet, the media infrastructure thatprovides the content for businesses, public policy regulationsthat provide both opportunities and constraints, and the capitalinfrastructure that provides the money and capital to run thebusinesses. Within this framework, the authors provide a deepexploration of core concepts of online strategy and associatedenablers enriched by a wide variety of examples, case studies,and explanations culled directly from practice.CONTENTS1 A Framework for E-Commerce Part I: The Basic Technology of theInternet and the Web 2 Basic Technology of the Web and E-CommerceBusinesses Part II: Strategy Formulation for New Economy Firms 3Framing Market Opportunity 4 Business Models 5 Customer Interface6 Market Communications and Branding 7 Strategy Implementation 8Metrics Part III: Technology Infrastructure 9 Website DevelopmentProcess 10 Website Architecture Part IV: Capital Infrastructure 11Human and Financial Capital Part V: Media Infrastructure 12 MediaConvergence Part VI: Public Policy and Structure 13 Public Policy:Regulation37HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3710/5/2006 1:47:04 PM

E-CommerceInternational EditionE-COMMERCEBy Jeffrey Rayport and Bernard Jaworski of Monitor / MarketspaceCenter2001 / 456 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-246521-1 / MHID: 0-07-246521-2 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118945-3 / MHID: 0-07-118945-9 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/marketspaceCONTENTSChapter 1: Overview of E-commerce Framework Chapter 2: FramingMarket Opportunity Chapter 3: Business Models Chapter 4: CustomerInterface Chapter 5: Market Communications and Branding Chapter 6:Implementation Chapter 7: Metrics Chapter 8: Valuation Chapter 9:Network Infrastructure Chapter 10: Media ConvergenceKnowledge ManagementINFORMATION AND KNOWLEDGE SOCIETYBy Al-Hawamdeh Suliman, Nanyang Technological University and LHart Thomas, Florida State University2001 / 296 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-120238-1 / MHID: 0-07-120238-2An Asian PublicationCONTENTSChapter 1. Information Society: Global Perspective. Chapter 2. InformationInfrastructure. Chapter 3. Communication and InformationTransfer. Chapter 4. Electronic Publishing in the Digital Era. Chapter5. Knowledge Management and the Economy of Ideas. Chapter 6. IntellectualProperty and Copyright in the Digital Era. Chapter 7. Educationin the Digital Age. Chapter 8. Privacy in the Information Age. Chapter 9.Information Security and Ethics. Chapter 10. Information Standards.E-Commerce Cases BookInternational EditionCASES IN ELECTRONIC COMMERCE2nd EditionBy Sid L Huff, Scott Schneberger, Michael Wade, Peter Newson andMichael Parent2002 / 488 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-245731-5 / MHID: 0-07-245731-7 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112352-5 / MHID: 0-07-112352-0 [IE]CONTENTS1.Introduction 2. E-Commerce Infrastructure 3. Sourcing of E-CommerceCapabilities 4. Financial Systems and Choices 5. Business-to-ConsumerE-Commerce 6. Business-to-Business E-Commerce and E-CommerceStrategy 7. Virtual Work 8. Virtual Communities 9. Social and LegalIssuesInternational EditionKNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENTBy Ganesh Natarajan, President of APTECH, a leading and training &consultant organization and Sandhya Shekhar, Principal Consultantof APTECH, Mumbai.2000 / 375 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-463770-8 / MHID: 0-07-463770-3 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118820-3 / MHID: 0-07-118820-7 [IE]Tata McGraw-Hill TitleA Professional Reference TitleCONTENTS1. Introduction. 2. Demystifying Knowledge Management. 3. KM TheBusiness Perspective. 4. KM The Technology Perspective. 5. KM TheProcess Perspective. 6. KM The Learning Systems Perspective. 7. K MThe Market Perspective. 8. Building the Knowledge Corporation. 9. KMin Other Segments. 10. KM Your Perspective. 11. KM The FutureInternational EditionCASES IN E-COMMERCEBy Jeffrey Rayport and Bernard Jaworski of Monitor / MarketspaceCenter2002 / 656 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-250095-0 / MHID: 0-07-250095-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112412-6 / MHID: 0-07-112412-8 [IE]Website: www.Marketspaceu.comCONTENTSChapter 1: Overview of e-Commerce Framework. Chapter 2: Framingthe Market Opportunity. Chapter 3: Business Models. Chapter 4: CustomerInterface. Chapter 5: Marketing Communications and Branding.Chapter 6: Implementation. Chapter 7: Valuation. Chapter 8: NetworkInfrastructure. Chapter 9: Media Convergence.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com38HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3810/5/2006 1:47:04 PM

Supply Chain ManagementInternational EditionE-CommerceNEWInternational EditionNEWPURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENTBy W C Benton2007 (June 2006) / 800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110630-6 / MHID: 0-07-110630-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/benton07Purchasing and Supply Management, 1/e, by W.C. Benton,offers insights into the theory, practice, and implementationof supply management issues. A step-by-step approach helpsstudents and professionals gain analytical purchasing skills.Many actual case studies and exercises help students transformpurchasing theory into purchasing practice and implementation.Some of the topics include purchasing business processes, pricecost analysis, professional services, transportation purchasing,global purchasing, and healthcare purchasing.FEATURES• Introduces innovative and recent concepts in purchasing and supplychain management, such as supply chain power and e-purchasingsystems concepts.• Includes coverage of pricing, price discrimination, and an appendixon the Robinson-Putman act.• Covers special topics of interest to majors: equipment and leasing,healthcare purchasing, service procurement, and legal issues in purchasingand supply management.• Contains over 25 case studies, all original to this text.CONTENTSPreface. Part 1: Introduction to Purchasing and Supply Management.Chapter 1: Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 2: PurchasingDecisions and Business Strategy. Chapter 3: The Legal Aspects ofPurchasing. Part 2: Materials Management. Chapter 4: Materials Management.Chapter 5: Inventory Management. Chapter 6: Just-In-Time(Lean) Purchasing. Chapter 7: Purchasing Procedures, E-Purchasing, andSystems Contracting. Part 3: Fundamentals of Purchasing and SupplyManagement. Chapter 8: Supplier Selection and Evaluation. Chapter9: Global Sourcing. Chapter 10: Purchasing, Supply Partnerships, andSupply Chain Power. Chapter 11: Total Quality Management (TQM)and Purchasing. Part 4: Price/Cost Analysis and Negotiation Strategies.Chapter 12: Price Determination. Chapter 13: Bargaining and Negotiations.Part 5: Special Purchasing Application. Chapter 14: PurchasingTransportation Services. Chapter 15: Equipment Acquisition and Disposal.Chapter 16: Healthcare Purchasing and Supply Management.Chapter 17: Procuring Professional Services. Cases. Glossary. IndexSUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT2nd EditionBy Donald Bowersox, David Closs and M. Bixby Cooper of MichiganState University—East Lansing2007 (November 2005) / 464 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125414-4 / MHID: 0-07-125414-5 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bowersox2eSupply Chain Logistics Management is exciting and promises tobolster traditional logistics courses and invigorate supply chainmanagement courses, by examining traditional logistics issueswithin the context of the supply chain. Supply Chain LogisticsManagement integrates technology and provides a solid foundationthat clearly describes the role of logistics within the supplychain, portraying a complete view of the subject and goingfarther to show how all the pieces fit together. The most currenttrends in process integration, relationship management, supplychain security and sustainability, globalization, and the impactof the new consumer economy on supply chain managementand design are featured in the Second Edition.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Important new topics on supply chain added: process integration,relationship management, supply chain security and sustainability,globalization, and the impact of the new consumer economy on supplychain management and design.• New, integrated treatment of technology, including ERP and advancedplanning and scheduling systems.• The book has been shortened and reorganized to facilitate a betterteaching and learning pace, and a leaner presentation.FEATURES• Technology—Vast coverage of the most current technology in thisindustry such as Information Networks, Enterprise Resource Planningand Decision Support Systems are covered. .• MSU Loga Simulation—This unique simulation stresses a completerange of supply chain decisions..• Authorship—The authors are well-known and respected. Don Bowersoxis a well-published author and researcher. He is acknowledgedas one of the leading authorities on logistics. David Closs’ researchin logistics is also well respected, he also has extensive consultingexperience and is a roundtable officer of the Council of LogisticsManagement, Bixby Cooper is the co-author of Marketing Channelsalong with Bowersox and is very visible as a member of various logisticsprofessional organizations. Their talent will be very well receivedwithin the industry.• Unique Balanced Approach : The book offers a unique blend ofsupply chain and logistics.• Extensive integration of spreadsheet-based solution methods in thetext and problem material, for example: Use of Excel Solver to solvelinear programming problems (Chapter 10) and reciprocal cost allocationproblems (Chapter 14), Use of Excel regression to solve linear regressionproblems, Use of spreadsheets to perform sensitivity analysis incost-volume-profit analysis and to prepare process cost reports. ActualExcel screens are used to illustrate the use of the methods to make iteasier to replicate the examples and problems, following the illustratedExcel commands39HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 3910/5/2006 1:47:05 PM

E-CommerceCONTENTSPART ONE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT. Chapter 121st Century Supply Chains. Chapter 2 Logistics. Chapter 3 CustomerAccommodation. Chapter 4 Procurement and Manufacturing. Chapter5 Information Technology Framework. PART TWO – SUPPLY CHAINLOGISTICS OPERATIONS. Chapter 6 Inventory. Chapter 7 TransportationInfrastructure. Chapter 8 Transportation Operations. Chapter 9Warehousing. Chapter 10 Packaging and Materials Handling. Chapter11 Operational Integration. PART THREE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICSDESIGN. Chapter 12 Global Strategic Positioning. Chapter 13 NetworkIntegration. Chapter 14 Logistics Design and Operational Planning.PART FOUR – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS ADMINSTRATION. Chapter15 Relationship Development and Management. Chapter 16 Operational,Financial and Social Performance. EPILOGUEInternational EditionNEWDESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPY CHAIN3rd EditionBy David Simchi-Levi, Northwestern University, Philip Kaminsky,University of California-Berkeley and Edith Simchi-Levi, Logic Tools,Inc., Lexington2007 (Feb 2006) / 460 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-124477-0 / MHID: 0-07-124477-8 [IE]As the most up-to-date, cutting-edge supply chain managementbook on the market, the Third Edition of Designing and Managingthe Supply Chain discusses the problems, models andconcepts derived from issues related to effective supply chainmanagement. While many core supply chain management issuesare interrelated, the authors have tried to make each chapteras self-contained as possible so that the reader can refer directlyto chapters covering topics of interest. Each chapter utilizescase studies and numerous examples. Mathematical and technicalsections can be skipped without loss of continuity. Mosttextbooks do not include models and decision support systemsrobust enough for industry, but that is not true of this new edition.The accompanying CD-ROM also features the return oftwo simulations, the Computerized Beer Game and the RiskPool Game and a computerized tool. These simulations helpusers develop and execute supply chain contracts while alsoillustrating many of the concepts discussed in the text.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Improved and Integrated Coverage of Technology – To reflect a morerealistic approach to incorporating technology in today’s companies,Chapter 8 (on “ Supply Chain Design”) has again been updated, incorporatingnew material on coordinating product and supply chain, onmodular processes and products; Chapter 9 (“Customer Value”) expandsand updates an Amazon.com example and adds material on “CustomerRelations Management”’; Chapter 10 (“Information Technology”) hasnew material on “the Internet” “events management” “collaboration”and “exchanges”, “modeling” and “demand planning” (Chapter 11“Decision Support Systems”).• New or updated cases: Several new cases have been added andremaining ones updated. When possible, a single case has been replacedwith multiple cases within a chapter, in response to reviewersuggestions.• More comprehensive and complete ancillary package.Improvedsolutions, powerpoint, and teaching notes on the instructor CD offeradded flexibility and resources for the instructor.FEATURES• Strong coverage of e commerce as it relates to procurement anddistribution. Reflecting the current trends in e-commerce, one entirechapter is devoted to “Procurement Strategies” (Chapter 12)another, to“Distribution Strategy” (Chapter 5)and the impact of ecommerce.• Expanded discussion of forecasting: Responding to the recommendationsof reviewers, the material on “Forecasting” (Chapter 4, “The Valueof Information”) has been enhanced.• Broad Introduction to many critical issues pertinent to Supply ChainManagement: The topics discussed range from a basic discussion ofinventory management, logistics network design, distribution systems,and customer value, to more advanced discussions of strategic alliances,the value of information in the supply chain, information technologyand decisions support systems, and international issues in supply chainmanagement.• State-of-the-art models: Managing and Designing the Supply Chainintroduces state-of-the-art models, concepts, and solution methodsimportant in the design, control operation, and management of supplychain systems.• Innovative Software included on CD-ROM: The Computerized BeerGame and the Risk Pool Game are included on a CD-ROM, availablefree-of-charge and packaged with each copy of the text.• Case Studies: Each chapter contains at least one case study.• Authorship: The authors have taught a variety of students and thebook is written to appeal to many types of readers. This book is appropriatefor undergraduate and graduate business students as well asfor engineers and engineering students. It will also have tremendousappeal to customers in the professional market that are seeking a referencebook on supply chain management.• New “Supply Contracts” Tool on CD-ROM: Besides the computerizedversions of “The Beer Game” and the “Risk Pool Game,” there will bea newly developed electronic tool dealing with supply contracts. Nowstudents have even more support to help them conceptualize strategicsupply chain management.International EditionPURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT13th EditionBy Michiel Leenders, University of Western Ontario, Harold E.Fearon, Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, Emeritus, AnnaFlynn and P. Fraser Johnson, University of Western Ontario2006 / 588 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287379-5 / MHID: 0-07-287379-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124966-9 / MHID: 0-07-124966-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/leenders13eThe Leenders’ text provides a comprehensive introduction tothe purchasing and supply chain management field, supportedby 50 case studies. Cases cover purchasing and supply chainissues in a variety of settings, from process industries to high techmanufacturing and services as well as public institutions. SupplyManagement concepts, both strategic and tactical, have beenexpanded throughout the text, particularly in new chapters onSupply Law and Ethics, Public Supply, and Supplier Relations.While all basic tenets of the purchasing function and cost issuesremain, the coverage of the field is state of the art highlightingthe supply chain approach.40HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 4010/5/2006 1:47:05 PM

E-CommerceCONTENTSChapter 1 – Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2 – SupplyOrganization Chapter 3 – Supply Processes Chapter 4 – InformationSystems and Technology Chapter 5 – Quality, Specification and ServiceChapter 6 – Quantity and Inventory Chapter 7 – Transportation and DeliveryChapter 8 – Price Chapter 9 – Cost Management, Discounts, andNegotiation Chapter 10 – Supplier Selection Chapter 11 – InvestmentRecovery Chapter12 – Supply Law and Ethics Chapter 13 – Researchand Metrics Chapter 14 – Global Supply Chapter 15 – Public SupplyManagement Chapter 16 – Capital Goods Chapter 17 – Services Chapter18 – Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing Chapter 19 – SupplierRelations Chapter 20 – Strategy in Purchasing and Supply Management/ Case Index / Subject IndexInternational EditionWORLD CLASS SUPPLY MANAGEMENTThe Key to Supply Chain Management with StudentCD (Cases), 7th EditionBy David N. Burt, University of San Diego and Donald W. Dobler,Colorado State University, Emeritus2003ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283156-6 / MHID: 0-07-283156-1(with CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123627-0 / MHID: 0-07-123627-9[IE with CD-ROM]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/burt7eCONTENTSI The Foundation: 1. World Class Supply Management / 2. PurchasingBecomes Supply Management / 3. Supply Management: An Organization-SpanningActivity / 4. Supply Management: Implementor of Threeof the Firm’s Social Responsibilities / II. Enabling Concepts: 5. ThreeTypes of Buyer-Supplier Relationships / 6. Cross-Functional Teams /7. Quality / 8. Total Cost of Ownership / 9. e-Procurement / III. TheRequirements Process: 10. New Product Development / 11. Specificationsand Standardization / 12. Equipment / 13. Services / IV. StrategicSourcing: 14. Make or Buy/Outsourcing / 15. Source Selection / 16.Global Supply Management / V. Strategic Cost Management: 17. Pricing/ 18. Cost Analysis / 19. Types of Compensation / 20. Negotiation / VI.Relationship Management: 21. Relationship and Contract Management/ 22. Supplier Development / 23. Alliance Development / 24. Ethics /25. Legal / VII. Integrating the Supply Chain: 26. Demand Management/ VIII. Institutional and Government Procurement: 27. SupplyManagement in Institutions / 28. Government Procurement / IX. SupplyChain Management: 29. World Class Supply Management (sm) : TheKey to Supply Chain Management.International EditionDESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPY CHAIN2nd EditionBy David Simchi-Levi, Northwestern University, Philip Kaminsky,University of California-Berkeley and Edith Simchi-Levi, Logic Tools,Inc., Lexington2003 / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-284553-2 / MHID: 0-07-284553-8(with Student CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123205-0 / MHID: 0-07-123205-2[IE with CD-ROM]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/business/opsci/simchi_levi2e/CONTENTS1. Introduction to supply chain management. 2. Logistics networkconfiguration. 3. Inventory management and risk pooling. 4. Thevalue of information. 5. Distribution strategies and e-fulfillment. 6.Strategic alliances. 7. International issues in supply chain management.8. Coordinated product and supply chain design. 9. Customer valueand supply chain management. 10. Information technology for supplychain management. 11. Decision support systems. 12. Procurementstrategies. Appendix A The computerized Beer Game / Appendix BThe Risk Pool GameCustomer RelationsManagementCUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENTCreating Competitive Advantage throught Win-WinRelationship StrategiesBy Kaj Storbacka, CEO of CRM Group Ltd and Jarmo L Lehtinen,University of Tampere2001 / 176 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-120678-5 / MHID: 0-07-120678-7 (Softcover)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118861-6 / MHID: 0-07-118861-4 (Hardcover)An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference TitleThe aim of customer relationship management (CRM) is to buildrelationship strategies that refine relationships, and in this wayincrease their value. This book is the result of an extensiveresearch project that studied new ideas in marketing and howthese ideas are being applied in practice. Field trips to US andEuropean businesses to study their CRM processes, and theparticipation of major Scandinavian companies provide a widerange of practical examples. The authors also draw on theirexperiences in consulting work to present in-depth examplesof successful implementations of these new ideas.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg41HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 4110/5/2006 1:47:05 PM

E-CommerceProfessional E-CommerceInternational EditionE-COMMERCE2nd EditionBy KK Bajaj and Debjani Nag2005 / 616 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-058556-0 / MHID: 0-07-058556-3Tata McGraw-Hill TitleA Professional Reference TitleA comprehensive coverage of technology and processes behinde-commerce and e-governance At the time of the publication ofthe first edition of this book, the Internet was seen as a formidableforce. It portended to disrupt and transform almost all facetsof life; the way we lived and worked, the way commerce wasconducted and the way governments would provide servicesto their citizens. E-commerce was largely seen as the vehicleto propel and accelerate these changes. Most of these changeshave occurred, despite the bursting of the Internet bubble after aperiod of big hype in the year 2000. E-Commerce has weatheredmany challenges and continues to grow. Now businesses andeconomies accept that e-commerce is here to stay. New businessmodels are being tried and tested, along with novel methodsfor exploiting the Internet to make businesses survive and thrivein the highly competitive e-marketplace. The revised edition ofthis highly successful book captures the essence of the momentouschanges that were witnessed in the last six years. Content,which is no longer relevant, has been deleted, while some ofthe chapters have been rewritten in entirety. New chapters havebeen added to address the major developments in e-governance,incidence of cyber crimes and their mitigation and the legalframework for enabling trust in the electronic environment.E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge of Business presents the technologyand processes behind e-commerce and e-governance.It also underscores the importance of security of transactions inthe electronic environment. With such an extensive coverage,the book will be useful to people in trade and commerce andto businesses which are trying to expand using Internet andintranet commerce. Students and teachers of e-commerce willfind that the technology and processes that make e-commerceclick have been addressed in detail. The book will also be ofenormous value to government officials, financial institutions,public sector and the private industry keen to learn about ‘TheCutting Edge of Business’.CONTENTSPart I: Theme of the Book. 1. Information Technology and Business. 2.E-Commerce. Part II: Electronic Communication. 3. PCs and Networking.4. E-mail. 5. The Internet. 6. Intranets. Part III: Building Blocksfor E-Commerce. 7. Electronic Data Interchange. 8. The UN/EDIFACTStandard. 9. The Internet and Extranets. 10. Identification and TrackingTools. Part IV: Reengineering for Change. 11. Business ProcessReengineering. 12. Management of Change. Part V: Concerns forE-Commerce Growth. 13. Legal Issues. 14. Cyber Security. 15. CyberCrimes. Part VI: Creating Trust in the Electronic Environment. 16.Information Technology Act, 2000. 17. Public Key Infrastructure. 18.Electronic Payment Systems and Internet Banking. Part VII: Case Studiesin India. 19. E-Commerce—Case Studies. 20. E-Governance—CaseStudies. Part VIII: AppendicesEBAY THE SMART WAY4th EditionBy Joseph T. Sinclair2005ISBN-13: 978-0-8144-7289-7 / MHID: 0-8144-7289-3McGraw-Hill UK TitleA Professional Reference TitleWhy would anyone buy a book for dummies when they caneBay the Smart Way? The only thing easier than buying andselling on eBay is getting lumped in with more than 125 millionother eBayers. The savviest eBay users turn to eBay the SmartWay, the definitive guide to smarter eBay tactics for both buyersand sellers. Now in its fourth blockbuster edition, this pricelesstool has changed with the times to cover the latest trends! Withsales of over 125,000 copies, the eBay the Smart Way series hashelped countless eBayers—from occasional buyers to full-timeprofessional sellers—find the best deals and maximize profitson everything from collectibles to cars to real estate. eBay theSmart Way is the go-to resource for first-time sellers and veteransalike, with step-by-step instructions for listing products, creatingattention-grabbing photos and descriptions, offering top-notchcustomer service, and maintaining high credibility. eBay buyerswill also benefit from powerful strategies for finding the bestproducts, bidding smarter, negotiating great deals, and more. Forthe most indepth and accessible information on how to makethe most out of online auctions, “nothing explains it better thaneBay the Smart Way.” — The Internet Marketing BookshelfCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com42HED 2007 E-Commerce.indd 4210/5/2006 1:47:05 PM

CONTENTSManagement~ ContentsBusiness and Society ...................................................... 87Business Environment ................................................... 118Business Ethics ............................................................... 88Business In Asia .............................................................. 84Business Policy & Strategic Management Cases ............ 116Business Policy & Strategic Management - Software ...... 116Business Policy & Strategic Management - Textbooks ... 105Change ........................................................................... 93Compensation ................................................................ 76Corporate Governance (Professional References) .......... 125Employee Benefits ........................................................ 118Entrepreneurship .......................................................... 100Entrepreneurship (Professional References) ................... 125Human Relations ............................................................ 66Human Resource Management / Leadership(Professional References) ............................................ 123Human Resource Management - Supplements ................ 75Human Resource Management - Textbooks .................... 68Human Resource Strategy ............................................... 75Management & Organizational BehaviorCombination ................................................................ 64Management Skills ......................................................... 67Management Skills (Professional References) ................ 123Motivation .................................................................... 119Negotiation .................................................................... 97Organizational Behavior - Supplements .......................... 63Organizational Behavior - Textbooks .............................. 56Organization Development ............................................ 93Organization Theory ...................................................... 92Principles of Management - Supplements ........................ 53Principles of Management - Textbooks ............................ 47Small Business Management ........................................... 98Special Topics in Management ..................................... 121Staffing ........................................................................... 76Strategic Management (Professional References) ........... 124Supervision ..................................................................... 54Technology & Innovation ............................................. 119Training and Development ............................................. 77International Business - Supplements .............................. 83International Business - Textbooks .................................. 81International Human Resource Management .................. 81International Management .............................................. 84International Organizational Behavior ............................ 63Knowledge Management (Professional References) ....... 125Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining ......................... 77Leadership ...................................................................... 9443HED 2007 Management.indd 4310/5/2006 1:24:11 PM

2007-2008 NEW Management Titles2007 New Titles• BATEMANManagement, 7e ......................................................49ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292330-9 / MHID: 0-07-292330-X• BERNARDINHuman Resource Management, 4e ..........................68ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298275-6 / MHID: 0-07-298725-1• BLOSISAn Introduction to Human ResourceManagement ............................................................72ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710968-4 / MHID: 0-07-710968-6[MH UK Title]• BLOSISManagement and Organizational Behavior,2e ............................................................................64ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711107-6 / MHID: 0-07-711107-9[MH UK Title]• CUTCHERCasees in Strategy and Management .......................116ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471619-9 / MHID: 0-07-471619-0[MH Aust Title]• DESSStrategic Management .............................................107ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710988-2 / MHID: 0-07-710988-0[MH UK Title]• DESSStrategic Management, 3e .......................................105ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312457-5 / MHID: 0-07-312457-5• DESSStrategic Management: Text and Cases, 3e ..............106ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310246-7 / MHID: 0-07-310246-6• DILTSCases in Collective Bargaining and IndustrialRelations, 11e ..........................................................78ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298736-2 / MHID: 0-07-298736-7• HILLInternational Business, 6e ........................................81ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110912-3 / MHID: 0-07-110912-9• IVANCEVICHHuman Resource Management, 10e ........................69ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313771-7 / MHID: 0-07-313711-1• JICKManaging Change: Text and Cases, 3e .....................93ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310274-0 / MHID: 0-07-310274-1• JONESEssentials of Contemporary Management,2e ............................................................................50ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301122-6 / MHID: 0-07-301122-3• KATZEntrepreneurial Small Business........................ 98, 101ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296798-2 / MHID: 0-07-296798-6• KIRBYEntreprenurship, 2e .................................................102ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710827-4 / MHID: 0-07-710827-2[MH UK Title]• KREITNEROrganizational Behavior, 7e .................................... 57ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312892-4 / MHID: 0-07-312892-9• LAMBERTONHuman Relations, 3e ............................................... 66ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352231-9 / MHID: 0-07-352231-7• LEWICKIEssentials of Negotiation, 4e .................................... 97ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310276-4 / MHID: 0-07-310276-8• LEWICKINegotiation: Readings, Exercises and Cases5e ............................................................................97ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297310-5 / MHID: 0-07-297310-2• LUCASHuman Resource Management in anInternational Context ..............................................70ISBN-13: 978-1-843-98109-1 / MHID: 1-843-98109-2[MH UK Title]• MAIDMENTAnnual Editions: Human Resources 06/07,16e ..........................................................................75ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352838-0 / MHID: 0-07-352838-2• MAIDMENTAnnual Editions: International Business,14e ..........................................................................83ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352842-7 / MHID: 0-07-352842-0• MAIDMENTAnnual Editions: Management, 14e .........................53ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352844-1 / MHID: 0-07-352844-7• MANNINGThe Art of Leadership, 2e ........................................94ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299568-8 / MHID: 0-07-299568-8• McSHANEOrganizational Behavior ......................................... 59ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325562-0 / MHID: 0-07-325562-9• McSHANEOrganizational Behavior on the Pacific Rim,2e ............................................................................61ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471658-8 / MHID: 0-07-471658-1[MH Aust Title]• MUNRORoundtable Viewpoints: OrganizationalLeadership ............................................................... 95ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352782-6 / MHID: 0-07-352782-3• NEWSTROMOrganizational Behavior, 12e .................................. 59ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287546-1 / MHID: 0-07-287546-1• NEWSTROMSupervision: Managing for Results, 9e ..................... 54ISBN-13: 978-0-07-354508-0 / MHID: 0-07-354508-244HED 2007 Management.indd 4410/5/2006 1:24:11 PM

2007-2008 NEW Management Titles2007 New Titles• NOEFundamentals of Human ResourceManagement, 2e ...................................................... 70ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325794-5 / MHID: 0-07-325794-X• PALMERThe Business Environment, 5e .................................118ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710990-5 / MHID: 0-07-710990-2[MH UK Title]• PEARCEFormulation, Implementation and Control ofCompetitive Strategy, 10e .......................................108ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305438-4 / MHID: 0-07-305438-0• PEARCEStrategic Management, 10e .....................................108ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305422-3 / MHID: 0-07-305422-4• ROBERTSNew Business Ventures and the Entrepreneur6e ............................................................................102ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340497-4 / MHID: 0-07-340497-7• THOMPSONCrafting and Executing Strategy: Text andReadings, 15e ..........................................................110ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313721-6 / MHID: 0-07-313721-9• THOMPSONCrafting and Executing Strategy: The Questfor Competitive Advantage, 15e ..............................109ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296943-6 / MHID: 0-07-296843-1• TIMMONSNew Business Mentor 2007, 7e ...............................103ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310283-2 / MHID: 0-07-310283-0• TIMMONSNew Venture Creation, 7e .......................................103ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310279-5 / MHID: 0-07-310279-2• WADDELLContemporary Management ................................52, 64ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471482-9 / MHID: 0-07-471482-1[MH Aust Title]• WALKERModern Competitive Strategy, 2e ............................111ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310284-9 / MHID: 0-07-310284-9• ROBERTSONRoundtable Viewpoints: InternationalBusiness ................................................................... 83ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352781-9 / MHID: 0-07-352781-5• ROLLINSONUnderstanding Employment Relations .....................71ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711486-2 / MHID: 0-07-711486-8[MH UK Title]• ROSENFELDManaging Organizations, 3e ....................................61ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710416-0 / MHID: 0-07-710416-1[MH UK Title]• RUEManagement, 12e ....................................................51ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353014-7 / MHID: 0-07-353014-X• RUESupervision, 9e ........................................................55ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305439-1 / MHID: 0-07-305439-9• SIMMONDSIntroduction to Human ResourceManagement ............................................................ 72ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711102-1 / MHID: 0-07-711102-8[MH UK Title]• SMITHIntroduction to Innovation ......................................120ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710861-8 / MHID: 0-07-710861-2[MH UK Title]• STREETTaking Sides: Clashing Views in Management,2e ............................................................................54ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352721-5 / MHID: 0-07-352721-145HED 2007 Management.indd 4510/5/2006 1:24:11 PM

2007-2008 NEW Management Titles2008 New Titles• BALDWINDeveloping Management Skills ................................67ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292010-9 / MHID: 0-07-292010-6• BALLInternational Business, 11e ......................................81ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353016-1 / MHID: 0-07-353016-6• BARTLETTTransnational Management: Text and Cases5e ............................................................................84ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310172-9 / MHID: 0-07-310172-9• BUDDLabor Relations, 2e ..................................................77ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340489-9 / MHID: 0-07-340489-6• CARRTeam Learning Assistant Workbook, 2e.............63, 121ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338118-3 / MHID: 0-07-338118-7• CERTOSupervision, 6e ........................................................54ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340500-1 / MHID: 0-07-340500-0• GHILLYERBusiness Ethics .........................................................88ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340304-5 / MHID: 0-07-340304-0• GOMEZ-MEJIAManagement, 3e ...................................................... 47ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302743-2 / MHID: 0-07-302743-X• HARTMANBusiness Ethics .........................................................89ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313686-8 / MHID: 0-07-313686-7• HILLGlobal Business Today, 5e ....................................... 81ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321054-4 / MHID: 0-07-321054-4• HILLManagement ............................................................ 48ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353012-3 / MHID: 0-07-353012-3• KETCHENStrategy 07/08 .........................................................105ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338128-2 / MHID: 0-07-338128-4• KINICKIManagement, 3e ......................................................48ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353019-2 / MHID: 0-07-353019-0• KINICKIOrganizational Behavior, 3e ....................................56ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340496-7 / MHID: 0-07-340496-9• LAWRENCEBusiness and Society, 12e ........................................87ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353017-8 / MHID: 0-07-353017-4• LUSSIERHuman Relations in Organizations, 7e ....................66ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321055-1 / MHID: 0-07-321055-2• LUTHANSOrganizational Behavior, 11e .................................56ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340495-0 / MHID: 0-07-340495-0• McSHANEOrganizational Behavior, 4e ....................................56ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331425-9 / MHID: 0-07-331425-0• MILKOVICHCompensation, 9e ....................................................76ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296941-2 / MHID: 0-07-296941-5• NOEEmployee Training and Development, 4e ................77ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340490-5 / MHID: 0-07-340490-X• RICHARDSONAnnual Editios: Business Ethics 07/08, 19e ..............89ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352845-8 / MHID: 0-07-352845-5• SCHILLINGStrategic Management of TechnologicalInnovation, 2e .........................................................119ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321058-2 / MHID: 0-07-321058-7• HISRICHEntrepreurship, 7e ...................................................100ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321056-8 / MHID: 0-07-321056-0• IVANCEVICHOrganizational Behavior and Management, 8e .......64ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340508-7 / MHID: 0-07-340508-6• JONESContemporary Management, 5e ..............................48ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353022-2 / MHID: 0-07-353022-0• KATZIntroduction to Collective Bargaining andIndustrial Relations, 4e ............................................78ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313715-5 / MHID: 0-07-313715-446HED 2007 Management.indd 4610/5/2006 1:24:12 PM

ManagementPrinciples of Management- TextbooksInternational EditionNEWMANAGEMENT3rd EditionBy Luis Gomez-Mejia, Arizona State University-Tempe, David BBalkin, University of Colorado-Boulder and Robert Cardy, ArizonaState University-Boulder2008 (November 2006) / 864 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-302743-2 / MHID: 0-07-302743-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-110096-0 / MHID: 0-07-110096-2 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gomez3eMANAGEMENT 3rd Edition, by Gomez-Mejia, Balkin, andCardy, is an exciting new take on principles of management.Ask your incoming students what “management” is, and they’lltalk about the kind of management they know from their ownwork experience. Managers assign people their hours, they giveraises or promotions, they tell people what job to do-the manager,in other words, is “the boss”. In most other work settings,however, management means something far more importantand complex. In addition to people, managers also manageperformance, processes, relationships, and more increasinglyin today’s world, deal with the pressure and flux of constantchange. This, coupled with the fact that workplaces have steadilybecome less hierarchical and more team- and group-driven,means the traditional responsibilities of the manager havegradually been dispersed throughout the organization. Studentspreparing to work in today’s business environment may notstart in a corner office with an assistant, but they still need tothink like managers and understand the strategic goals of theorganization. Management 3rd Edition, prepares your studentsto join a new kind of workplace, one where management iseveryone’s business and provides many in-text and online applicationsto emphasize this approach.NEW TO THIS EDITION• AACSB & Learning Outcomes -Gomez-Mejia/Balkin/Cardy supportsyou in testing learning outcomes unlike any other text on the market.The Test Bank has been tagged for (1) textual feature (e.g. LearningObjectives, boxed features), and (2) AACSB guidelines (Categories includeGlobal, Ethics and Social Responsibility, Legal and other ExternalEnvironment, Communication, Diversity, Group Dynamics, IndividualDynamics, Production, and IT).• Integrated Learning Path -Each chapter opens with 5-6 action-orientedLearning Objectives. Each Learning Objective will be followed up onwith strategically placed scenario-based multiple choice question toreinforce the learning objective. The chapter summary is based on thechapter learning objectives providing a stronger pathway through eachchapter. Test your students on their comprehension of these learningobjectives with the tagged test bank.FEATURES• Management is Everyone’s Business -Gomez-Mejia/Balkin/Cardymakes management relevant to students by focusing on the need forevery employee to think like a manager and gives students many opportunitiesto put themselves into the shoes of a manager by interactingwith the text’s wealth of applications.• Management Close-Up -This feature helps students look up-close atthe issues real managers and organizations are facing. Ethics, CustomerFocus, or Dealing with Change subtitle these boxes and highlight aspectsof management particularly important today.• Manager’s Notebook -These checklists supplement chapter contentwith a practicing manager’s perspective. Manager’s Notebooks providevaluable insider tips to dealing with common situations and are an idealjumping-off point for classroom discussion.• Opening Case Application -These new or updated vignettes neatlyencapsulate actual business issues students will encounter. Posed criticalthinking questions ask students to put themselves into the shoes of amanager. The “Concluding Thoughts” section at the end of every chapterbrings the Opening Case materials and critical thinking questions fullcircle providing students a cohesive frame of reference for conceptscovered in the chapter.• End of Chapter Cases -Two Management Minicases, a EntrepreneurialManager video case, and an additional Individual/Collaborative LearningCase at the end of every chapter provide students the opportunityto analyze and apply chapter concepts.• Reinforce relevancy -Students always want to know how the manytheories they learn are used in real work situations--the OLC solvesthis major problem. In text icons guide students to over 45 interactiveexercises and through scenarios that illustrate how theory relates topractice. Each interactive exercise has quizzing and feedback. Additionally,the OLC includes videos and quizzing. See description under“Supplements.”• Skills for Managing -Most chapters include skill-building exercisesthat summarize management skills crucial to workplace effectiveness.Most of these exercises are appropriate for individual or group use.Manager’s Check-Up exercises provide students a fun and interestingway to practice and refine those skills, and are found with the End-of-Chapter material.CONTENTSPART ONE 1 Management and Its Evolution PART TWO 2 Managingin a Global Environment 3 Managing Social Responsibility and Ethics 4Managing Organizational Culture and Change PART THREE 5 Managingthe Planning Process 6 Decision Making 7 Strategic Management8 Entrepreneurship and Innovation PART FOUR 9 Managing theStructure and Design of Organizations 10 Human Resource Management11 Managing Employee Diversity PART FIVE 12 Motivation 13Leadership 14 Managing Teams 15 Managing Communication PARTSIX 16 Management Control 17 Operations Management 18 ManagingInformation Systems• Focusing on the Future gives students a glimpse into “day in thelife” of real managers in accounting/finance, operations/general, humanresources, marketing/communications, and entrepreneurship andshows how theories discussed in the chapter are used to solve real-worldmanagerial challenges.• The Entrepreneurial Manager cases and videos (16) have been integratedin the text and connect chapter concepts to how they’ve beenapplied successfully in entrepreneurial ventures and small businesses.In text summaries and discussion questions highlight relevant conceptsmanagers such as Todd McFarlane & Jim McCann (1800-Flowers) haveemployed on their way to success. Students are able to access the videoson the Online Learning Center, a Instructor DVD is also available.47HED 2007 Management.indd 4710/5/2006 1:24:12 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWMANAGEMENTBy Charles Hill, University of Washington and Steven McShane,University of Western Australia2008 (December 2006) / 704 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-353012-3 / MHID: 0-07-353012-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110098-4 / MHID: 0-07-110098-9 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hillmcshaneCharles Hill and Steve McShane, two of the most successful,well-thought of authors, researchers, teachers and consultants,have come together to write Management. This dynamic duo’sprogressive text engages students with their exceptional storytellingwriting style and great examples to see the big picture/interconnectivity between the four functions of management andprepares them better for their careers ahead. A unique “ManagementPortfolio Project” rounds out the student experience.Faculty are supported with a truly integrated support package.FEATURES• Interconnectivity of the four functions of management--Hill/McShaneprovides students with connections between different concepts bringto light the “Big Picture” they need to understand in order to becomesuccessful managers. Specific examples include:• (1) The control function, often relegated to the end of the book as a“feedback loop” chapter, Hill/McShane incorporates control into theorganizing function to demonstrate how control impacts goals andperformance measurement, organizational culture, etc. and introducesthe balanced scorecard as a measurement tool.• (2) Chapter 13 on Motivation builds off of the goal-setting materialreferenced in the planning chapter (Ch. 5) so that students understandthe relationship between the functions of planning and leading and howemployee goals ideally should be aligned to company strategies.includes extra “war stories” cases and teaching tips to use in the classroomthat are not in the text. The test bank questions are categorizedby blooms taxonomy, AACSB tagged, tagged by learning objective,level of difficulty.CONTENTSPART ONE MANAGERS AND THE ENVIRONMENT Chapter 1 ManagementChapter 2 The External and Internal Environment Chapter 3Globalization and the Manager Chapter 4 Stakeholders, Ethics andCorporate Social Responsibility PART TWO STRATEGIZING Chapter 5Planning and Decision Making Chapter 6 Strategy Chapter 7 ManagingOperations PART THREE ORGANIZATIONAL ARCHITECTURE Chapter8 Organizing Chapter 9 Control Systems Chapter 10 OrganizationalCulture Chapter 11 Developing High Performance Teams PART FOURLEADING Chapter 12 Staffing and Developing a Diverse WorkforceChapter 13 Motivating and Rewarding Employee Performance Chapter14 Managing Employee Attitudes and Wellbeing Chapter 15 Managingthrough Power, Influence and Negotiation Chapter 16 LeadershipChapter 17 CommunicationPART FIVE CHANGE Chapter 18 ManagingInnovation and ChangeInternational EditionNEWCONTEMPORARY MANAGEMENT5th EditionBy Gareth Jones, Texas A&M University and Jennifer George, RiceUniversity2008 (January 2007) / 832 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-353022-2 / MHID: 0-07-353022-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128561-2 / MHID: 0-07-128561-X [IE](Details unavailable at press time)• (3) Chapter 10 on Organizational Culture builds off of the organizationalvalues material introduced in chapter 2 on the Internal Environment,which demonstrates how values drive culture.• Storytelling writing style--As they have in their current marketleadingbooks, both authors use stories to connect with students as avehicle to help them learn, using great use of language. “From bloodyawful to bloody awesome in five years” (Ch. 3) or “No frankenfoodhere, please” (Ch. 18) are just two examples of how the authors grabstudents’ attention and hold it with stories that are woven into the narrativeof the text.• Unique Theory/Application Writing style – The authors cover relatedtheories and then apply them with rich examples that are NOT hiddenin text boxes that students don’t read, but incorporated into the narrativeof the text. Examples are highlighted in the margin of the text sostudents know an applied example is reinforcing a particular concept(e.g. “cost-leadership at Dell” or “Motivation at 3M”).NEWMANAGEMENT3rd EditionBy Angelo Kinicki, Arizona State University--Tempe and Brian KWilliams2008 (February 2007)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353019-2 / MHID: 0-07-353019-0(Details unavailable at press time)• Why does it matter? -Every chapter concludes with a summary ofwhy the material covered matters for students of management, andhow understanding these concepts can help students become a moresuccessful manager.• Management Portfolio Project--Mirroring the goal of the book (showingstudents how the 4 functions interact) this activity at the end of everychapter asks students to apply chapter concepts to their organization ofchoice. By following one company throughout the semester studentsget a grasp of how and why all functions work together regardless oftheir experience working in organizations. Perfect for a course project,the instructor’s manual includes an implementation guide as well assamples of actual student portfolios.• Integrated Support Package -Unlike revised texts/ resource packages,where materials are refitted, resized and repurposed, the resourcessupporting this text have been freshly created in close conjunctionwith the text and each other to provide you a truly integrated supportpackage. The instructor’s manual is laid out by learning objective andINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg48HED 2007 Management.indd 4810/5/2006 1:24:12 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWMANAGEMENTLeading and Collaborating in the Competitive World,7th EditionBy Thomas Bateman, University of North Carolina and Scott A Snell,Cornell University2007 (November 2005) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-292330-9 / MHID: 0-07-292330-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-325462-3 / MHID: 0-07-325462-2 (with OLC)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110853-9 / MHID: 0-07-110853-X [IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bateman7eBateman and Snell have consistently discussed and explainedthe traditional, functional approach to management throughplanning (delivering strategic value), organizing (buildinga dynamic organization), leading (mobilizing people), andcontrolling (learning and changing). Management: Leading& Collaborating in a Competitive World retains its series of“firsts”: first to have a chapter on diversity, first to devote asection to the natural environment, and first to relate a “bricksand clicks” theme to explain the challenges of managing in aNew Economy. This new edition is no exception with an emphasison leadership and collaboration as a means to success.To survive competition and thrive in today’s world, you mustperform in ways that give you an edge over your competitors.Four essential performance dimensions- cost, quality, speed,and innovation -when well done, deliver value to the customerand competitive advantage to students and their employers. Inthe new Seventh Edition of Management, Bateman and Snellgo a step further to discuss the advantages of leadership andcollaboration as two essential means to these four “bottom line”practices that successful managers and companies must deliverto their customers. This leadership and collaboration theme isthe key to successful management. People working with oneanother, rather than against, is essential to competitive advantage.By reinforcing these new business practices in context withthe functional approaches, the authors deliver a unique themeamong all principles of management texts- how to manage, lead,and collaborate in ways that deliver results.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Advantages of Collaboration Boxes: Successful organizations arebased on the premise that working together creates leaders, teamwork,strategic alliances, and partnerships. This collaboration is a meansto four “bottom line” practices- quality, cost, speed, and innovation-that all good managers should deliver. These boxes demonstrate howorganizations create competitive advantage through people workingtogether as teammates, cooperating with one another, and workingproductively together.• New ‘unfolding’ cases begin with content in the chapter-openingprologues illustrating real management situations. The connection boxin the middle of the chapter adds a second layer to the case and providesstudents’ with practical application of the chapter concepts. Chapterconcludingepilogues wrap-up the case. Examples include cleaning upCitigroup’s culture, Jeff Bezos forming Amazon.com, Telecom ManagersFight for Market Share- to name just a few -highlighted to providea relevant example of the chapter concepts.• New Concluding Cases at the end of each chapter are hypotheticalcases based on real management events. For example, in Chapter 5 theconcluding case is on J&G Garden Center: Lawn Care Services Divisionwhich discusses the owner’s ethical and moral conflicts regardingthe welfare of his customers and neighbors for pesticide or fungicidelawn applications.• Five new Supplemental Cases can be found at the end of each part.These optional cases are longer and include ‘Pension Benefits GuarantyCorporation’ at the end of Part 3, ‘Leadership at AIG: Does StyleMatter?’ at the end of Part 4, and ‘Fannie May: Lassiez-Faire Control?’at the end of Part 5.• Updated “Bottom Line” Practice Icons (Quality, Cost, Speed, Innovation)--thesehallmark icons have been updated to include a shortexplanation in the margin making the connection between the iconand the topic in the paragraph. These icons are located at appropriatepoints in the text to indicate an extended example, best practice, or issuefor discussion. They continually reinforce and enhance the learning ofthese important themes.• The end-of-chapter material has been updated to include more selfassessmentexercises and experiential exercises to encourage studentsto apply the theories they have just learned in the chapter.• Margin Pop-Ups are located periodically throughout the chapters.This new feature provides informative and interesting factoids, ideas,quotes, or other items to supplement the text material. The marginpop-ups add variety and memorable material to enrich students’ learningexperience.• The interactive exercises and self-assessments previously foundon the student CD-ROM have been moved online at www.mhhe.com/bateman7e.FEATURES• The four classical functions (planning, organizing, leading, andcontrolling) are retained but also reconceptualized for the new era asdelivering strategic value (planning), building a dynamic organization(organizing), mobilizing people (leading), and learning and changing(controlling).• Chapter 1 is new and discusses the Internet, globalization, knowledgemanagement, and collaboration across boundaries, while retainingcoverage of the management functions and competitive themes. Itconcludes with a section titled “You and Your Career”, personalizingthe chapter and setting a personal tone for the book.• Learning Objectives: open each chapter, identify what students willlearn by reading and studying the chapter.• Opening Quotes: provide a thought-provoking preview of chaptermaterial. The quotes are from people like Peter Drucker (on management),Jack Welch (on strategy), Henry David Thoreau (on ethics),Julius Caesar (on leadership), and Charles Kettering (on change andthe future).• Setting the Stage: the chapter opening vignette describes an actualorganizational situation and provides a rich introductory example andpractical application of the chapter topic.• Boxed features: describe current examples and controversial issuesand are found throughout each chapter• Experiential exercises, which appear in each chapter, encouragestudents to apply the theories they have just learned.• “From the Pages of Business Week”: highlight recent Business Weekarticles in each chapterCONTENTSPart I. Foundations of Management CHAPTER 1. Managing AppendixA: The Evolution of Management CHAPTER 2. The External Environmentand Organizational Culture CHAPTER 3. Managerial Decision MakingPart II. Planning and Strategy CHAPTER 4. Planning and StrategicManagement CHAPTER 5. Ethics and Corporate Responsibility AppendixB: The Caux Round Table Business Principles of Ethics AppendixC: Managing in Our Natural Environment CHAPTER 6. InternationalManagement CHAPTER 7. Entrepreneurship Appendix D: Informationfor Entrepreneurs Part III. Organizing: Building a Dynamic OrganizationCHAPTER 8. Organization Structure CHAPTER 9. OrganizationalAgility CHAPTER 10. Human Resource Management CHAPTER 11.Managing the Diverse Workforce Part IV. Leading: Mobilizing PeopleCHAPTER 12. Leadership Appendix E: Classic Contingency Models ofLeadership CHAPTER 13. Motivating for Performance CHAPTER 14.Teamwork CHAPTER 15. Communicating Part V. Control and ChangeCHAPTER 16. Managerial Control CHAPTER 17. Managing Technologyand Innovation Appendix F: Operations Management in the NewEconomy CHAPTER 18. Managing and Creating Change49HED 2007 Management.indd 4910/5/2006 1:24:12 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWESSENTIALS OF CONTEMPORARY MANAGEMENT2nd EditionBy Gareth Jones, Texazs A&M University and Jennifer George, RiceUniversity2007 (January 2006) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-301122-6 / MHID: 0-07-301122-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322357-5 / MHID: 0-07-322357-3(with OLC, Premium Content Card and DVD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110770-9 / MHID: 0-07-110770-3[IE with Student DVD, OLC Premium Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/jones2eJones and George are dedicated to the challenge of “Making ItReal” for students. The authors present management in a waythat makes its relevance obvious even to students who mightlack exposure to a “real-life” management context. Their goal isto relate management theory to real life examples to drive homethe message that management matters both because it determineshow well organizations perform, and because managersand organizations affect the lives of people who work insidethem and people outside the organization, such as customers,communities, and shareholders. Essentials of Managementconcisely surveys current management theories and research.Through a variety of real world examples from small, medium,and large companies the reader learns how those ideas are usedby practicing managers. The organization of this text follows themainstream functional approach of planning, organizing, leading,and controlling; but the content is flexible and encouragesinstructors to use the organization they are most comfortablewith. One of the most popular features of the book has alwaysbeen its focus on the “Manager as a Person,” which discussesmanagers as real people with their own personalities, strengths,weaknesses, opportunities, and problems. In the 2nd Edition,the authors expand on this theme by discussing the importanceof management competencies -the specific set of skills, abilities,and experiences that gives one manager the ability to performat a higher level than another in a specific context. The themesof diversity, ethics, globalization, and information technology-all areas of importance that make up the workplace realities thattoday’s student will encounter in the course of a career- havealso been greatly expanded in the 2nd Edition in the text, photographs,“unboxed” stories, and the end-of-chapter material.NEW TO THIS EDITION• The authors have thoroughly updated every chapter in the text to includemany important new developments in management and the inclusionof scores of new and updated boxes focusing on the problems facingmanagers now. Highlights include: new coverage of the implicationsof global outsourcing; expanded coverage of information technologythroughout the book including the use of enterprise resources planningand B2B systems; inclusion of scales for measuring personality; newtreatment of emotions and emotional intelligence including a new scalethat measures the latter; new treatment of organizational culture; newmaterial on creativity; expanded focus on the sources of competitiveadvantage and global strategy; expanded discussion of human resourcemanagement challenges; expanded coverage of gender, emotional intelligence,and leadership; and, the use of new communication systemsto improve decision making.• Chapter 3, Managing Ethics and Diversity, has been substantiallyrevised to provide additional material on ethics, ethics and the law, andthe nature of ethical dilemmas, the effective management of diversity,and ways to eradicate sexual harassment.• The Build Your Management Skills Student DVD makes it easyto use the latest in technology to help students hone their personalmanagement skills. Packaged free with every new copy of the text, theStudent DVD features Manager’s Hot Seat exercises such as “Ethics:Let’s Make a Fourth Quarter Deal” and “Change: More Pain than Gain”;Test Your Knowledge exercises such as “Fiedler’s Contingency Modelof Leadership” and “Porter’s Five Forces”; and Self-Assessments suchas “Active Listening Skills Inventory” and “Do You Have What it Takesto Be a Leader?” An end-of-chapter section titled “Additional Activitieson the Build Your Management Skills DVD” shows which exercises touse with a particular chapter. (Teaching notes and classroom activitiesthat can be used with the Build Your Management Skills exercises andassessments are included in the Group and Video Resource Manual:An Instructor’s Guide to an Active Classroom.)• Video cases for every chapter are included at the end of the book.Each video case illustrates application of the relevant chapter conceptsand has a corresponding video in VHS or DVD format. These casesfeature timely and thought-provoking topics affecting the businessenvironment—such as “Federal Government Investigation Into EnronBankruptcy,” “The Columbia Space Shuttle Disaster may Force a HardLook at NASA”—as well as profiles of successful businesses and managers—suchas “Cirque du Soleil: A Truly Global Workforce,” “Pike PlaceFish Market,” and “Toying with Success: The McFarlane Companies.”• “Manager as a Person” feature focuses on how a real managerbrought about change to their organization. These examples withinthe chapters give students the opportunity to reflect on how individualmanagers dealt with real-life on-the-job challenges related to variouschapter concepts.FEATURES• Chapter 2, Values, Attitudes, Emotions, and Culture: The Manageras a Person, puts the student in the manager’s shoes by focusing onmanagers as feeling, thinking human beings. This chapter explains howthe personal characteristics of managers and entrepreneurs influence anorganization’s culture and the process of management.• In addition to the updated Chapter 3 on ethics and diversity, ethical issuesare explored throughout the book through in-text “Ethics in Action”examples and through the real-life Managing Ethically exercise at the endof every chapter. In all these ways the authors drive home to studentsthe deep and significant ethical issues involved in management.• A career appendix gives students guidance in choosing a career inmanagement as well as in finding and landing the right job.• A real life case (Management Snapshot) opens each chapter, posinga chapter related challenge and then discussing how managers in oneor more organizations responded to that challenge. The ManagementSnapshot helps demonstrate the uncertainty and excitement surroundingthe management process.• The creative and flexible Management in Action end-of-chaptermaterial that instructors and student alike enjoyed in previous editionshas been retained. They are designed to be used in either large or smallclasses and each chapter includes:-Topics for Discussion and Action-Building Management Skills (more assessment-based in this edition)-Small Group Breakout: The authors recognize that today workingeffectively in small groups is a vital skill for future managers. Thisfeature ensures that students learn the importance of collaborationand teamwork in solving business challenges. It can be used in smallor large classes.-Be the Manager presents a realistic scenario in which a manager/organizationfaces some kind of challenge, problem, or opportunity and thestudent plays the role of a manager offering advice and recommendinga course of action based on the chapter content.-Management Case in the News features BusinessWeek Cases (based onactual Business Week articles) with discussion questions that encouragestudents to read about and to analyze how real managers deal with realproblems in the business world.-Integration of Key Themes is one of the principle strengths of this text.Unlike other texts, examples are blended seamlessly into the text ratherthan set off in isolated boxes. The authors seamlessly integrate storiesand examples about key issues with integrated “un-boxes” highlightingkey issues: Focus on Diversity, Ethics in Action, Manager as a Person,50HED 2007 Management.indd 5010/5/2006 1:24:12 PM

ManagementManagement Insight, and Managing Globally, and IT Byte. Examplesare carefully selected to be both interesting and relevant, including suchtopics as Pizza Teams at Amazon and NASA’s Flawed Culture.CONTENTSPART 1 MANAGEMENT AND MANAGERS Chapter 1 The ManagementProcess Today Appendix: History of Management Chapter 2 Values,Attitudes, Emotions, and Culture: The Manager as a Person PART 2THE ENVIRONMENT OF MANAGEMENT Chapter 3 Managing Ethicsand Diversity Chapter 4 Managing in a Global Environment PART 3PLANNING, DECISION MAKING, AND COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGEChapter 5 Decision Making, Learning, Creativity, and Innovation Chapter6 Planning, Strategy, and Competitive Advantage PART 4 ORGAN-IZING AND CHANGE Chapter 7 Designing Organizational StructureChapter 8 Control, Change, and Entrepreneurship PART 5 LEADINGINDIVIDUALS AND GROUPS Chapter 9 Motivation Chapter 10 Leadersand Leadership Chapter 11 Effective Team Management Chapter12 Building and Managing Human Resources PART 6 CONTROLLINGESSENTIAL ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES Chapter 13 Communicationand Information Technology Management Chapter 14 OperationsManagement: Managing Vital Operations and Processes Appendix:Management CareersInternational EditionNEWMANAGEMENT12th EditionBy Leslie W Rue, Georgia State University and Lloyd Byars, GeorgiaInstitute of Technology2007 (June 2006) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-353014-7 / MHID: 0-07-353014-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-110301-5 / MHID: 0-07-110301-5 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/rue12eRue/Byars: MANAGEMENT, 12e is a short, value-priced paperback,which presents the fundamentals of managementprinciples to undergraduate students. It continues its tradition ofpresenting principles of management in a very straightforwardand accessible manner focusing on skills that are needed tobecome a successful manager.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Many of the end-of-chapter “Case Incidents” have been updated withnew cases that reflect the management trends and corporate examplesdiscussed in the chapter.• Major sections of the chapter on the Basics of Planning and StrategicManagement have been reorganized and new material added.• The chapter on Managing Conflict and Stress has been significantlysupplemented with several new sections and topics.• Numerous new cases and experimental cases have been addedthroughout the book.• Approximately two-thirds of the “Management Illustrations” usedthroughout the text are new to this edition, making them very up-todate.FEATURES• Web addresses with appropriate “Management Illustration” boxesencourage students to go online to learn more about concepts andtopics.• E-commerce coverage throughout the text addresses the role oftechnology and how the Internet affects the role of a manager.• Greater international coverage emphasizes the effects of the workforce as businesses shift toward globalization.• Information systems is integrated throughout the textbook whereappropriate.• Skill-Building Questions appear in each chapter. These exercises(3 per chapter) can be assigned in class or as homework. These questionsask students to get a deeper level of understanding by applying,comparing, contrasting, evaluating and illustrating ideas presented ina chapter.• A Margin Glossary leads students through the key vocabulary in thecourse to help students reviewing material for study and/or testing.• Corporate/organization references throughout the text bridge the gapbetween theory and practice.CONTENTSSECTION I FOUNDATIONS Chapter 1 Management in a DiverseWorkplace Chapter 2 The Management Movement Chapter 3 DevelopingCommunication Skills Chapter 4 Decision-Making Skills SEC-TION II ENVIRONMENTS Chapter 5 International Business Chapter6 Legal, Ethical, and Social Responsibilities of Management SECTIONIII PLANNING SKILLS Chapter 7 The Basics of Planning and StrategicManagement Chapter 8 Operations Management and Planning SEC-TION IV ORGANIZING AND STAFFING SKILLS Chapter 9 OrganizingWork Chapter 10 Organizing Structure Chapter 11 UnderstandingWork Teams Chapter 12 Staffing Chapter 13 Developing Employeesand Managers SECTION V DIRECTING SKILLS Chapter 14 MotivatingEmployees Chapter 15 Developing Leadership Skills Chapter 16 ManagingConflict and Stress Chapter 17 Managing Change and CultureSECTION VI CONTROLLING SKILLS Chapter 18 Controlling Chapter19 Appraising and Rewarding Performance Chapter 20 OperationsControl / GlossaryInternational EditionCONTEMPORARY MANAGEMENT4th EditionBy Jennifer M. George, Rice University and Gareth Jones, Texas A&MUniversity—College Station2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111548-3 / MHID: 0-07-111548-X[IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/jonesgeorge4eWhen first introduced, Contemporary Management, by Jonesand George made a huge splash with its innovative voice,content, pedagogy, design, and package. The cutting-edge 4thEdition continues to redefine what principles of managementtexts should look, sound, and feel like. As an author team GarethJones and Jennifer George are uniquely qualified to write aboutboth the strategic and organizational challenges managers face.No Management textbook author team today matches theircombined research and text-writing experience. ContemporaryManagement is a comprehensive text that surveys the theoreticalunderpinnings of modern management thought and research.Through a variety of real world examples from small, medium,and large companies it shows the reader how those ideas areused by practicing managers. While the organization of thistext follows the mainstream functional approach of planning,organizing, leading, and controlling its chapters can be usedflexibly and instructors can organize their management courseaccording to the format they are most comfortable with. Oneof the most popular features of the book has always been itsfocus on the “Manager as a Person,” which discusses managersas real people with their own personalities, strengths, weaknesses,opportunities, and problems. In the 4th Edition, theauthors expand on this theme by discussing the importance ofmanagement competencies—the specific set of skills, abilities,and experiences that gives one manager the ability to performat a higher level than another in a specific context. The themes51HED 2007 Management.indd 5110/5/2006 1:24:13 PM

Managementof diversity, ethics, and information technology have also beengreatly expanded in the 4th Edition through chapters dedicatedto each of these topics as well as in-text examples, photographs,“unboxed” stories, and the end-of-chapter material – all areas ofimportance that truly serve to bring to life the workplace realitiesthat today’s student will encounter in the course of a career.CONTENTSPart One: Management Chapter 1 Managers and Managing Chapter2 The Evolution of Management Thought Chapter 3 The Manager as aPerson: Values, Attitudes, Emotions, and Culture Part Two: The Environmentof Management Chapter 4 Ethics and Social Responsibility Chapter5 Managing Diverse Employees in a Multi-Cultural Environment Chapter6 Managing in the Global Environment Part Three: Decision-Making,Planning, and Strategy Chapter 7 The Manager as a Decision MakerChapter 8 The Manager as a Planner and Strategist Chapter 9 ValueChain Management: Operating Strategies to Increase Quality, Efficiency,and Responsiveness to Customers Part Four : Managing OrganizationalArchitecture Chapter 10 Managing Organizational Structure Chapter11 Organizational Control and Change Chapter 12 Human ResourceManagement Part Five: Managing Individuals and Groups Chapter 13Motivation and Performance Chapter 14 Leadership Chapter 15 EffectiveGroups and Teams Chapter 16 Communication Part Six: ControllingCritical Organizational Processes Chapter 17 Managing OrganizationalConflict, Politics, and Negotiation Chapter 18 Developing AdvancedInformation Systems and Technologies Chapter 19 Promoting Innovation,Product Development, and EntrepreneurshipInternational EditionMANAGEMENTA Practical Introduction, 2nd EditionBy Angelo Kinicki, Arizona State University—Tempe and Brian K.Williams2006 / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313896-1 / MHID: 0-07-313896-7(with OLC with Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111810-1 / MHID: 0-07-111810-1[IE with OLC with Premium Content Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kw2eBlending scholarship and imaginative writing, ASU businessprofessor Kinicki (of Kreitner/Kinicki Organizational Behavior5e) and writer Williams (of Williams/Sawyer Using InformationTechnology 5e) have created a highly readable introductorymanagement text in an exciting student-friendly layout certainto be well received by today’s visually oriented students. Theauthors have structured Management as a series of two-pagespreads (i.e., left and right facing pages) of 2 – 6 pages per section,to optimize learning by presenting information in easilymastered “bite-size” chunks. Although the text is organized ina unique manner, the coverage of basic management conceptsand principles is still prevalent. And besides presenting fundamentalconcepts of management, the book emphasizes practicaladvice throughout, expressed in the features “The Manager’sToolbox,” “Practical Action” boxes, real-life “Example” boxes,“Management in Action” and “Ethical Dilemma” cases, andthe Web-based “Taking Something Practical Away from thisChapter.”CONTENTSPART 1. INTRODUCTION 1. The Exceptional Manager: What You Do,How You Do It 2. Management Theory: Essential Background for theSuccessful Manager PART 2. THE ENVIRONMENT OF MANAGEMENT3. The Manager’s Changing Work Environment & Responsibilities 4.Global Management: Managing Across Borders PART 3. PLANNING 5.Planning: The Foundation of Successful Management 6. Strategic Management:How Star Managers Realize a Grand Design 7. Individual &Group Decision Making: How Managers Make Things Happen PART 4.ORGANIZING 8. Organizational Culture, Structure, & Design: BuildingBlocks of the Organization 9. Human Resource Management: Gettingthe Right People for Managerial Success 10. Organizational Change &Innovation: Life-Long Challenges for the Exceptional Manager PART 5.LEADING 11. Managing Individual Differences & Behavior 12. MotivatingEmployees: Achieving Superior Performance in the Workplace 13.Groups & Teams: From Conflict to Cooperation 14. Power, Influence,& Leadership: From Becoming a Manager to Becoming a Leader 15.Interpersonal & Organizational Communication PART 6. CONTROL16. Control: Techniques for Enhancing Organizational EffectivenessAppendix: The Project Planner’s Toolkit: Flowcharts & Gantt ChartsNEWCONTEMPORARY MANAGEMENTBy Dianne Waddell, Deakin University, Jennifer Devine, EdithCowen University, Gareth Jones, Texas A&M University and JenniferGeorge, Rice University2006 (August 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471482-9 / MHID: 0-07-471482-1McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/mcshaneThis is a new Australian adaptation of two popular US editionsby Jones and George, Contemporary Management 3e and Essentialsof Contemporary Management 1e. Waddell and Devine’sContemporary Management presents a fresh and humane viewof the manager in the workplace. This non-prescriptive textexplores the manager as a person, rather than an institution,with values and ethics. Its innovative approach to managementraises issues that are relevant to the workplace today, such asfocusing on diversity, cultural sensitivity and managing globally.This text recognises that human interaction and communicationis the basis of effective management in business.FEATURES• Contemporary vision• Action-orientated approach• AccessibilityCONTENTSPart 1: Introduction 1. What is Management? 2. Evolution of ManagementPart 2: The Environmental Context of Management 3. Managingthe Environment: Organisational Culture 4. Managing Change andDiversity 5. Attitudes, Values and Ethics: Corporate Social ResponsibilityPart 3: Managing People 6. Leadership 7. Motivation 8. DecisionMaking 9. Human Resource Management Part 4: Managing Organisations10. Managing Strategy and Structure: Planning 11. ManagingInformation: Communication and Technology 12. Managing in a GlobalEnvironment 13. Managing Control Processes: Operations ManagementPart 5: Revolution of Management 14. Fads, Fashions and the Futureof ManagementPRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT3rd EditionBy Tripathi, Sukhadia University and Reddy, Bangalore University2005 (December 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-060058-4 / MHID: 0-07-060058-9Tata McGraw-Hill Title(Details unavailable at press time)52HED 2007 Management.indd 5210/5/2006 1:24:13 PM

ManagementMANAGEMENTA Global Perspective, 11th EditionBy Heinz Weihrich, University of San Francisco, and Harold Koontz,(Deceased), Formerly of UCLA2004 / 632 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-123946-2 / MHID: 0-07-123946-4An Asian PublicationThis book presents contemporary management theory, science,and practice with a global perspective. The eleventh edition ofManagement strives to strives to anticipate and respond to thenew demands and challenges in the new millennium. Materialcovered in previous editions has been expanded to includeeven more international cases, topics, and recent developmentsin management.The highlights of this edition include:• Thorough coverage of the international aspects of the moderncorporation• Managing in Asia, North America, the New Europe, and LatinAmerica• Global strategic management and mergers and acquisitions• Managing diversity in the international corporation• Discussions of many real-life situations• Reengineering, lean manufacturing, and total quality management• Application of information technology for productivity improvementThis book is for students in colleges and universities, aspiringmanagers, managers who want to become more effective, andother professionals to help them make organizations more effectiveand effi cient. It is for people in all kinds of organizations,not just business fi rms; it is relevant to nonbusiness organizationsas well, such as governments, health-care organizations,educational institutions, and other not-for-profi t enterprises.Two appendixes included in this edition are especially useful inmaking the content of the book relevant to organizations, to helpthem become more competitive in the global environment.CONTENTSPart 1: The Basis of Global Management: Theory and Practice 1. Management:Science, Theory and Practice 2. Management and Society:The External Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics 3. Global,Comparative, and Quality Management Part 1 CLOSING: The Basicsof Global Management Part 2: Planning 4. Essentials of Planning andManaging by Objectives 5. Strategies, Policies, and Planning Premises 6.Decision Making Part 2 CLOSING: Global Planning Part 3: Organizing7. The Nature of Organizing, Entrepreneuring, and Reengineering 8. OrganizationStructure: Departmentation 9. Line/Staff Authority, Empowerment,and Decentralization 10. Effective Organizing and OrganizationCulture Part 3 CLOSING: Global Organizing Part 4: Staffing 11. HumanResource Management and Selection 12. Performance Appraisal andCareer Strategy 13. Managing Change through Manager and OrganizationDevelopment Part 4 CLOSING: Global Staffing Part 5: Leading 14.Human Factors and Motivation 15. Leadership 16. Committees, Teamsand Group Decision Making 17. Communication Part 5 CLOSING:Global Leading Part 6: Controlling 18. The System and Process ofControlling 19. Control Techniques and Information Technology 20.Productivity, Operations Management, and Total Quality ManagementPart 6 CLOSING: Global Controlling and Global Challenges AppendixA: Summary of Major Principles or guides for the Managerial Functionsof Planning, Organizing, Staffing, Leading and Controlling /AppendixB: Management Excellence Survey / IndexesESSENTIALS OF MANAGEMENTAn Asian PerspectiveBy Joseph M Putti, School of Management, National University ofSingapore and Harold Koontz, University of California at Los Angelesand Heinz Weihrich, University of San Francisco1998 / 560 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-125720-6 / MHID: 0-07-125720-9An Asian PublicationCONTENTS1. The Environment of Business 2. The Nature and Meaning of Management3. Evolution of Management Thought 4. Human Relations inManagement 5. The Planning Function 6. Managing By Objectives 7.The Decision-making Process 8. The Organizing Function 9. AuthorityIn Organizations 10. The Control Function 11. The Staffing Function 12.Leadership for Management 13. Motivating Employees 14. Communicationfor Management 15. Participation In Organizations 16. ProductivityAnd Quality Management 17. Managing Performance Improvement 18.Managing Corporate Culture 19. Cultural Impact on Management 20.Japanese Management Practices 21. Management and Society: SocialResponsibility and EthicsNEWPrinciples of Management- SupplementsANNUAL EDITIONS: MANAGEMENT14th EditionBy Fred H Maidment, Western CT State University2007 (September 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352844-1 / MHID: 0-07-352844-7McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528447.mhtmlThis Fourteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: MANAGE-MENT provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articlesselected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; ageneral introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topicalindex; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered asa practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles aresupported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUNIT 1. Managers, Performance, and the Environment Part A.Management Classic 1. The Manager’s Job: Folklore and FactPart B. Management Skills, Roles, and Performance 2. Success in ManagementNew!3. The New Organisation Part C. The Environment New!4. It’s a Flat World, After All New! 5. Globalization and the AmericanLabor Force UNIT 2. Planning Part A. Management Classic 6. A NewLook at Managerial Decision Making Part B. Decision Support Systems7. Choose the Right Tools for Internal Control Reporting Part C. StrategicAnalysis New! 8. Let’s Be Friends New! 9. Embracing Confusion:What Leaders Do When They Don’t Know What to Do New! 10. WhyEnvironmental Scanning Works Except When You Need It UNIT 3.Organizing Part A. Management Classic 11. Classifying the Elementsof Work Part B. Elements of Organization New! 12. Focus is on theCustomer Part C. Designing and Changing the Organization 13. TheDark Side of Change New! 14. Build Your Own Change Model UNIT 4.Directing Part A. Management Classic 15. A Theory of Human MotivationPart B. Leadership New! 16. The True Measure of a CEO Part C.Performance New! 17. Can One Man Save GM? Part D. Communication53HED 2007 Management.indd 5310/5/2006 1:24:13 PM

Management18. Disaster’s Future UNIT 5. Controlling Part A. Management Classic19. An Uneasy Look at Performance Appraisal Part B. Financial ControlNew! 20. Zero In on the Numbers Part C. Security New! 21. CorporateSecurity Management: What’s Common? What Works? Part D. TotalQuality Management New! 22. Quality Is Easy UNIT 6. Staffing and HumanResources Part A. Management Classic 23. Management Womenand the New Facts of Life Part B. Developing Human Resources New!24. The Health-Care Tussle 25. The Next Bubble? Part C. Maintainingan Effective Workforce New! 26. Turning Boomers Into BoomerangsUNIT 7. Perspective and Trends Part A. Management Classic 27. TheDiscipline of Innovation Part B. The Multinational Corporation New!28. Thinking Locally, Succeeding Globally New! 29. The Great Wal-Mart of China Part C. Corporate Culture New! 30. The Real ReasonYou’re Working So Hard…and What You Can Do About It Part D. Ethicsand Social Responsibility New! 31. The Tone at the Top and EthicalConduct Connection 32. The Road to Stronger Corporate GovernanceNew! 33. Do the Right Thing—the Right Way Part E. Small Businessand Entrepreneurship New! 34. Up to the Challenge Part F. The War onTerror New! 35. In Fourth Year of ‘War on Terror’: Successes, Failures,Blowback from IraqNEWSupervisionSUPERVISIONConcepts and Skill-Building6th EditionBy Samuel Certo, Rollins College-Winter Park2008 (February 2007) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340500-1 / MHID: 0-07-340500-0(Details unavailable at press time)NEWTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS INMANAGEMENT2nd EditionBy Marc Street, University South Florida-St Petersbu2007 (October 2006) / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352721-5 / MHID: 0-07-352721-1McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073527211.mhtmlThis Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWSIN MANAGEMENT presents current controversial issues in adebate-style format designed to stimulate student interest anddevelop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framedwith an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript.An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for eachvolume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is alsoan excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. EachTAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selectedWorld Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website,www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSPART 1. Ethical Issues for Managers ISSUE 1. Do Corporations Havea Responsibility to Society that Extends Beyond Merely MaximizingProfit? ISSUE 2. Is the Corporate Strategy of Downsizing Unethical?ISSUE 3. Is Bluffing During Negotiations Unethical? ISSUE 4. ShouldInsider Trading Be Legalized? PART 2. Organizational Behavior andHuman Resource Management New! ISSUE 5. Has Affirmative ActionOutlived its Usefulness in the Workplace? New! ISSUE 6. Is WorkplaceDrug Testing a Wise Corporate Policy? New! ISSUE 7. Is Diversity in theWorkplace a Worthwhile Goal for Corporations? ISSUE 8. Is GenderDiscrimination the Main Reason Women Are Paid Less Than Men? New!ISSUE 9. Would Reforming Social Security be Good for American Business?PART 3. Strategic Management New! ISSUE 10. Is Outsourcinga wise Corporate Strategy? ISSUE 11. Are U.S. CEOs Overpaid? ISSUE12. Corporate Governance Reform: Is Sarbanes-Oxley the Answer?New! ISSUE 13. Is First-to-Market a Successful Strategy? New! ISSUE14. Must Firms Constantly Grow to be Considered Successful? PART4. Environmental and International Issues ISSUE 15. Is the Conditionof the Environment Really as Bad as Environmentalists Claim? New!ISSUE 16. Should U.S. Corporations be Allowed to Hire Illegal Aliens?ISSUE 17. Is Economic Globalization Good for Mankind? ISSUE 18.Are Global Sweatshops Exploitative?NEWSUPERVISION: MANAGING FOR RESULTS9th EditionBy John Newstrom, University of Minnesota—Duluth and Lester RBrittel2007 (January 2006) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-354508-0 / MHID: 0-07-354508-2McGraw-Hill/Glencoe PublicationWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/newstrom9eThis text offers a comprehensive presentation of the vital aspectsof supervision with a focus on practical advice about how tohandle real-life, on-the-job situations. In this revision, the authorhas recognized the ever-changing social and work environmentand has updated the text with current trends and situations andthe latest professional concepts of supervisory practice. Thetext is arranged with an emphasis on inquiry learning, whichpresents the key concepts in a clear and concise manner. Awide variety of exercises, applications, and margin notes helpto further the learning process.NEW TO THIS EDITION• A new Instructor Resource CD-Rom replaces the previous printsupplement so that the instructor has easy access to new materials,such as test bank questions and PowerPoint presentations, as wellas familiar materials, such as Lesson Plans, Lecture Notes, Keys andCommentaries.• A new DVD provides updated video segments which depict managersand supervisors in various lifelike professional situations.• The author has prepared and inserted ten “Practical Guideline forSupervisors” at the end of each chapter, providing a strong basis forsupervisory success in the readers’ careers.• The text has been reorganized into fewer chapters, in order tostreamline the flow of material and to make the text more adaptable tosemester-length courses.FEATURES• The optional Study Guide will still be available for students in anupdated form, so that they may further reinforce the concepts presentedin the text.• The Application aids are retained and include: Self-Assessmentsthroughout each chapter, Skill Development, Role Play, Group Exercises,and Cases for Analysis.• Practical advice in the form of do’s and don’ts, based on the author’sexperience and knowledge.54HED 2007 Management.indd 5410/5/2006 1:24:14 PM

Management• An emphasis on inquiry learning, whereby readers are given a seriesof related questions and then are immediately provided with feedbackin the form of answers.• A set of learning objectives, which alerts readers to what they shouldknow or be able to do as a result of reading the chapter.CONTENTSPart One: Supervisory Management. Chapter 1: The Supervisor’s Rolein Management. Chapter 2: Creating a Positive Workplace Withina Dynamic Environment. Part Two: Planning and Problem Solving.Chapter 3: Setting Goals, Making Plans, and Improving Costs. Chapter4: Problem Solving and Managing Information. Part Three: Organizing,Staffing and Training. Chapter 5: Organizing an Effective Department.Chapter 6: Staffing with Human Resources. Chapter 7: Training andDeveloping Employess. Part Four: Leading the Workforce. Chapter8: Leadership Skills, Styles, and Qualities. Chapter 9: Understandingand Motivating People at Work. Chapter 10: Effective Employee Communication.Part Five: Working with Individuals and Teams. Chapter11: Appraisal of Employee Performance. Chapter 12: Counseling andPerformance Management. Chapter 13: Building Cooperative Teamsand Resolving Conflict. Part Six: Controlling and Improving Results.Chapter 14: Control: Keeping People, Plans, Programs, and Costs onTrack. Chapter 15: Stimulating Productivity and Quality. Part Seven:Contemporary Concerns of Supervision. Chapter 16: Managing a DiverseWorkforce. Chapter 17: Employee Safety and Health, and LaborRelations. Chapter 18: Achieving Personal Supervisory Success. PartEight: Appendixes. Glossary of TermsInternational EditionNEWSUPERVISIONKey Link to Productivity, 9th EditionBy Leslie W. Rue, Georgia State University and Lloyd L. Byars,Georgia Institute of Technology2007 (January 2006) / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-305439-1 / MHID: 0-07-305439-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110736-5 / MHID: 0-07-110736-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/rue9eSUPERVISION: Key Link to Productivity by Rue and Byers isa solid text written for student appeal in terms of its approachand readability. The Ninth Edition retains its accessible writingstyle. The active learning approach emphasizes productivity byfeaturing an applications section at the end of every chapter.The content comes alive for students as they are encouragedto apply key concepts.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapter Reorganization: Based on reviewer feedback, this new edition’schapter topics flow in a more intuitive order. Increased attentionis placed on the changing workplace environments as the environmentfor supervision, diversity, ethics in the workplace, managing change,and innovation.• Employee Motivation: This topic has been moved closer to the beginningof the text. This placement emphasizes its role as a fundamentalcomponent of supervising well.• Performance Coverage: This coverage has been moved to the LeadershipSkills section linking performance and appraisal and rewardingwith the leadership role of supervision.• Employee and Labor Relations: These topics are also discussed in theleadership section—creating a more natural flow of topics showing howsupervisors can truly guide their employees in the workplace.FEATURES• Supervision Illustration boxes: Up-to-date material highlights real lifeexamples of the topics discussed in each chapter. These thought-provokingincidents or news stories bring the topics to life for students.• Company Web Addresses: Website addresses to real companiesare included following the Supervision Illustration boxes encouragingstudents to investigate outside of class.• Chapter Icons: Found in the margins throughout the text, theseicons indicate where chapter learning objectives are answered, furtherenhancing the applied nature of this text.• Supervision Dilemma: These opening scenarios feature both maleand female supervisors in a service or manufacturing setting. They areanswered at the end of each chapter, incorporating how material justcovered applies to supervisory issues.• Updated End-of-Chapter Material: The suggested readings, end-ofchapterincidents for student feedback, and critical-thinking exercisesfeature revised material to enhance the text’s new organizational flowand reflect changes in supervisory thought.• Supplements Package: Important to this course due to the number ofadjunct or part time instructors in this course area, the materials availablewith this new edition enhance the text and help instructors workwithin their course plans.CONTENTSSection I. Foundations of Supervision Ch. 1: Supervision in a DiverseWorkplace Ch. 2: Making Sound and Creative Decisions Ch. 3: ImprovingCommunication Skills Ch. 4: Motivating Today’s Employees SectionII. Contemporary Issues Ch. 5: Managing Change and Innovation Ch. 6:Ethics and Organization Politics Section III. Planning and OrganizingSkills Ch. 7: Supervisory Planning Ch. 8: Managing Your Time Ch. 9:Organizing and Delegating Ch. 10: Understanding Work Groups andTeams Section IV. Staffing Skills Ch. 11: Staffing and Training Skills Ch.12: Understanding Equal Employment Opportunity Ch. 13: Counselingand Supporting Employees Section V. Leadership Skills Ch. 14: LeadingEmployees Ch. 15: Handling Conflict and Stress Ch. 16: Appraising andRewarding Performance Ch. 17: Employee and Labor Relations SectionVI. Controlling Skills Ch. 18: Supervisory Control and Quality Ch. 19:Improving Productivity Ch. 20: Safety and Accident PreventionCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com55HED 2007 Management.indd 5510/5/2006 1:24:14 PM

ManagementInternational EditionSUPERVISIONConcepts and Skill-Building, 5th EditionBy Samuel Certo, Rollins College - Winter Park2006 / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298752-2 / MHID: 0-07-298752-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111692-3 / MHID: 0-07-111692-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/certo5eCerto’s Supervision: Concepts and Skill Building 5th Edition,prepares students to be supervisors in a challenging modernworkplace. It is based on the premise that organizationalvariables including diversity in the workforce, computer andcommunication technology, and the design of organizationstructures are constantly changing. Students will learn the criticalrole of a supervisor in an organization and the abilities neededto be successful.CONTENTSPART ONE: What is a Supervisor? Chapter 1: Modern Supervision: NewEra Challenge PART TWO: Modern Supervision Challenges Chapter 2:Ensuring High Quality and Productivity Chapter 3: Teamwork: EmphasizingPowerful Meetings Chapter 4: Meeting High Ethical StandardsChapter 5: Managing Diversity PART THREE: Functions of the SupervisorChapter 6: Reaching Goals and Objectives Chapter 7: Organizingand Authority Chapter 8: The Supervisor as Leader Chapter 9: ProblemSolving and Decision Making, and Creativity PART FOUR: Skills ofthe Supervisor Chapter 10: Communication Chapter 11: MotivatingEmployees Chapter 12: Improving Productivity Chapter 13: Supervising“Problem” Employees Chapter 14: Managing Time and Stress Chapter15: Managing Conflict and Change Appendix A: Negotiation and PoliticsPART FIVE: Supervision and Human Resources Chapter 16: SelectingEmployees Chapter 17: Providing Orientation and Training Chapter 18:Appraising Performance Chapter 19: The Impact of the Law AppendixB: Career Management for the SupervisorOrganizational Behavior- TextbooksInternational EditionNEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIORKey Concepts, Skills and Best Practices, 3rd EditionBy Angelo Kinicki and Robert Kreitner of Arizona State University-Tempe2008 (December 2006) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340496-7 / MHID: 0-07-340496-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128577-3 / MHID: 0-07-128577-6Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kinicki3e(Details unavailable at press time)NEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR11th EditionBy Fred Luthans, University of Nebraska-Lincoln2008 (October 2006) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340495-0 / MHID: 0-07-340495-0Website: http://www.mhhe.com/luthans11e(Details unavailable at press time)NEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR4th EditionBy Steven McShane, University of Western Australia and Mary AnnVon Gitlow, Florida Int’l University-Miami2008 (October 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331425-9 / MHID: 0-07-331425-0Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mcshane4eIn their new Fourth Edition, McShane and Von Glinow continuethe trailblazing innovations that made previous editionsof Organizational Behavior recognized and adopted by thenew generation of organizational behavior (OB) instructors.Acclaimed for its readability and presentation of currentknowledge, this textbook’s philosophy is that OB knowledgeis for everyone, not just traditional managers. The new realityis that everyone- sales representatives, production employees,physicians –needs OB knowledge to successfully work in andaround organizations. Organizational Behavior is unparalleledin its ability to engage students by bringing cutting edge OBconcepts closer to reality through the ‘theory-practice link’ approach.McShane and Von Glinow help readers connect OBtheories to emerging workplace realities through hundreds offascinating real-life stories from across the United States andaround the world. McShane/Von Glinow’s Organizational Behavior4th Edition also continues to be the source of the hottesttopics, such as: employee engagement, resilience, four-drivetheory, blogs and wikis, psychological harassment, learningorientation, Schwartz’s values model, separating socioemotionalfrom constructive conflict, and much, much, more.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New cutting edge topics such as employee engagement, resilience,four-drive theory, blogs and wikis, psychological harassment, learningorientation, Schwartz’s values model, separating socioemotional fromconstructive conflict, and much, much, more. McShane/Von Glinowwas the first OB textbook to include the workplace emotions, appreciativeinquiry, social identity theory, future search events, virtual teams,workaholism, and emotional intelligence.• Over 85 superior self-assessments--more than any other OB text!New self-assessments on guanxi orientation, propensity to trust, stresscoping preferences, Connor-Davidson resilience scale, and need forpersonal structure – bringing the total to 36 self-assessments, plus 50additional self-assessments online.• New cases from instructors throughout the world, such as From Lippert-JohansonIncorporated to Fenway Waste Management, How DidI Get Here?, Rhonda Clark: Taking Charge at the Smith Foundation,Work/Life Balance at Oxford Manufacturing, Cox-2 Inhibitor Drugs,FTCA– Regional and Headquarters Relations, and several others newto this 4th edition, as well as dozens more cases available online fromregional and past editions.56HED 2007 Management.indd 5610/5/2006 1:24:14 PM

Management• McShane/Von Glinow supports you in testing AACSB learningoutcomes unlike any other OB text on the market. The Test Bank hasbeen tagged for (1) textual feature (e.g. Opening Vignettes, LearningObjectives, Connections Boxes, Exhibits, etc.), (2) AACSB guidelines(Categories include Global, Ethics and Social Responsibility, Legal andother External Environment, Communication, Diversity, Group Dynamics,Individual Dynamics, Production, and IT), (3) Bloom’s Taxonomy(Knowledge (Recall), Comprehension, Application, Analysis, Synthesisand Evaluation). These tags provide schools with a way to sort test questionsby the various standards and create reports to provide “assurance”that they are including the recommended “learning experiences” intheir curricula.• New learning objectives have been developed and inserted at specificbreak points within each chapters to help guide students more preciselythrough the content.• New opening vignettes, captioned photos, and other examples liberallyinserted throughout the book to provide more engaging readingand strengthen the theory-practice link.• The WebCT/Blackboard/eCollege cartridge content contains overthree dozen self-assessment exercises, interactive exercises, chapterquizzes, and video material can be found. These interactivities help thestudents’ connection to the field of organizational behavior be morepersonal and immediate through interesting self-assessments that coversuch areas as leadership, listening skills, and they type of company inwhich they would prefer to work.• The Team Learning Assistant (TLA) Version 2 is designed to maximizethe students’ team learning experience, and to save professorsand students alike valuable time. TLA is an optional resource to helpinstructors facilitate the team process in a completely online paperlessenvironment. Instructors can regularly and efficiently monitor teamprogress and have greater ability to grade individual performance onany given team.• The Manager’s Hot Seat Videos Online www.mhhe.com/MHS -Intoday’s workplace, managers are confronted daily with issues like ethics,diversity, working in teams, and the virtual workplace. The Manager’sHot Seat videos allow students to watch as 15 real managers apply theiryears of experience to confront these issues. Students assume the roleof the manager as they watch the video and answer multiple choicequestions that pop up forcing them to make decisions on the spot.They learn from the manager’s mistakes and successes, and then do areport critiquing the manager’s approach by defending their reasoning.Reports can be emailed or printed out for credit. These video segmentsare a powerful tool for your course that truly immerses your studentsin the learning experience. The Manager’s Hot Seat videos are just anadditional $10 when packaged with this text.FEATURES• Steven McShane is the author of Canadian Organizational Behaviour,6th Ed. (2006), one of Canada’s best-selling OB textbooks. Steve Mc-Shane also co-authors (with Tony Travaglione) Organizational Behaviouron the Pacific Rim, 2e (2007) which has become the best selling OB textin Australia and New Zealand. Mary Ann Von Glinow is a past presidentof the Academy of Management and teaches at Florida InternationalUniversity. Steve McShane is a past president of the Canadian equivalent(Administrative Sciences Association of Canada) and currently teachesin Perth, Singapore, and Manila for the University of Western Australia.Both authors have extensive experience teaching and consulting outsidethe U.S and bring a global perspective to the OB course.• All ancillaries are authored by Steve McShane, ensuring the highestquality and reliability of each and every piece of this superlativeteaching package.• End-of-Chapter Short Cases and Comprehensive Cases– This textbookhas become a popular source for both short and comprehensivecases. Short cases appear at the end of each chapter to help studentsdiagnose organizational issues using OB concepts from the chapter.More comprehensive cases also appear in the “Additional Cases” sectionof the book.• Self-Assessment Exercises– This book offers three dozen self-assessments,including at least one in each chapter and others on student CD(all with an overview in the textbook!). These instruments allow studentsto diagnose their attitudes, personality, values, and beliefs on a varietyof organizational behavior concepts.• Team /Experiential exercises found in each chapter– These entertainingand informative activities help students to experience OB concepts,rather than just read about them. McShane and Von Glinow offer oneor more exercises in each chapter.• Captioned photos– Every chapter has eye-catching photos withdetailed captions, mostly about specific companies, These captionedphotos, as well as the opening vignette to each chapter and lengthierexamples called “Connections” that appear in most chapters, make theconcepts more interesting in meaningful for students.• Business Week Cases– These cases (found at the end of each chapter)encourage students to use organizational behavior knowledge asa tool to diagnose and solve organizational problems. They also relatechapter concepts to the dynamic world of business. Students see OBconcepts at work in a variety of organizational settings, from spectacularsuccesses to spectacular failures. Each Business Week case includes aset of discussion questions. Example: In “After Enron: The Ideal Corporation”(Chapter 2), students examine ways to improve ethical valuesand practices among business leaders.CONTENTSPART 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Introduction to the Field of OrganizationalBehavior PART 2: INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR AND PROCESSES 2 IndividualBehavior, Values, and Personality 3 Perception and Learning inOrganizations 4 Workplace Emotions and Attitudes 5 Motivation inthe Workplace 6 Applied Performance Practices 7 Work-Related StressAnd Stress Management PART 3: TEAM PROCESSES 8 Decision Makingand Creativity 9 Foundations of Team Dynamics 10 Developing HighPerformance Teams 11 Communicating in Teams and Organizations12 Power and Influence in the Workplace 13 Conflict and Negotiationin the Workplace 14 Leadership in Organizational Settings PART4: ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESSES 15 Organizational Structure 16Organizational Culture 17 Organizational Change / Additional Cases/ Appendix A: Theory Building and Systematic Research Methods AppendixB: Scoring Keys for Self-Assessment ActivitiesInternational EditionNEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR7th EditionBy Robert Kreitner and Angelo Kinicki of Arizona State University—Tempe2007 (November 2005) / 800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-312892-4 / MHID: 0-07-312892-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322435-0 / MHID: 0-07-322435-9(with OLC & Premium Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110822-5 / MHID: 0-07-110822-X[IE with OLC & Premium Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kreitnerOrganizational Behavior, Seventh Edition continues in its traditionof being up-to-date, relevant and user-driven. Kreitnerand Kinicki’s approach to organizational behavior is basedon the authors’ belief that reading a comprehensive textbookis hard work, but that the process should be interesting (andsometimes fun). Thus, they consistently attempt to find a wayto make complex ideas understandable through explanations,contemporary examples, and/or learning exercises. With everyedition, the authors make every effort to respond to user feedbackand ensure the text covers the very latest OB research andpractices. The seventh edition of Organizational Behavior againuses the familiar wolf image on its cover. This remains a centraltheme because Kreitner and Kinicki see wolves as an instructive57HED 2007 Management.indd 5710/5/2006 1:24:14 PM

Managementand inspiring metaphor for modern Organizational Behavior.Wolves are dedicated team players, great communicators, andadaptable. These are key success attributes in today’s workplace.Organizational Behavior uses these fundamentals to explore andexplain the forces behind conventional corporate behavior andorganizational theory.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Video Cases: One video is provided for each of the 18 chapters, andeach has a corresponding written Video Case included at the end ofthe book. Each case provides a written overview of the video contentas well as additional background information and discussion questionsthat encourage students to critically examine and apply chapter conceptsto analyzing the cases. Video topics and companies feature timely andinteresting people and companies (e.g., Cirque du Soleil: A Truly GlobalWorkforce; Toying with Success: The McFarlane Companies; The Retirementof Jack Welch) and issues (e.g., Wal-Mart Faces the Biggest CivilRights Case Ever and The Columbia Space Shuttle Disaster).• Streamlined & improved table of contents: The Seventh Edition isone chapter shorter than the Sixth. Now it will be easier for instructorsand students to cover all of the critical motivation topics in the courseof the semester. The three motivation chapters in the 6th Edition havebeen refined and condensed into two (Chapters 8 & 9). There is a newfocus on the performance management approach in Chapter 9 (keyterm and model in Figure 9-1) which integrates coverage of goal-setting,feedback, extrinsic and intrinsic rewards, and positive reinforcement. Inaddition, Learning Modules B through E (Self-Management, PerformanceAppraisal, Additional Leadership Models, and Research Methods in OB)are now located on book’s Online Learning Center.• Real World/Real People Boxes: These short, provocative new boxesstrategically positioned throughout the text highlight current real-worldexamples of important ethical, diversity, and global issues that demonstratehow OB concepts apply to real people in real organizations.Examples include “An Entrepreneur’s Odyssey: Lawyer, Baker, Manager”(Ch. 1), how “Emotional Intelligence Keeps These Executives on an EvenKeel” (Ch. 5), “It’s Party Time in Houston!” (Ch. 9), “What Really GoesOn During Conference Calls?” (Ch. 14), and how an executive talkedhis kidnappers into releasing him unharmed (Ch. 15).FEATURES• More Coverage of Ethics/New Ethical Dilemmas: In response to userfeedback and the increasing demand for ethical decision-making intoday’s business world, ethics coverage has been improved, expanded,and featured in a separate Learning Module following Chapter 1. Likea standard chapter, Learning Module A includes a real-life openingvignette, Real World, Real People box, an OB Exercise, and a GroupExercise. Also included are Ethical Dilemmas at the end of each chapterthat give students the opportunity to wrestle with today’s tough ethicalissues.• Latest research and topics: Kreitner and Kinicki take pride in keepingthe text relevant and up-to-date by including the very latest research andtopics. New topics in the Seventh Edition include: -OB-related skillsand Lawler’s virtuous career spiral (Figure 1-1)-e-leadership (Table 1-2)-positive organizational behavior (POB) (ch.1)-A decision tree for ethical decisions (LMA)-Summary of Equal Employment Opportunity Legislation (Table 2-1)-Surface level and deep level dimensions of diversity (Ch. 2)-Onboarding (key term) (Ch. 3)-Cultural intelligence (key term) (Ch. 4)-Leadership lessons from the GLOBE Project: Leadership attributesuniversally liked and disliked across 62 nations (Table 4-2)-Nine key cross-cultural competencies (Table 4-4)-Gardner’s 8 multiple intelligences (Ch. 5)-Value congruence or person-culture fit (Ch. 6 key term)-Organizational response to work-family issues (Ch. 6)-Galatea effect (Ch. 7 key term)-The use and effectiveness of modern incentive pay plans (Table 9-3)-New survey data on sexual harassment (Ch. 10)-Developing teamwork competencies (Table 11-4)-Decision making blunders (Ch. 12)-IDEO’s rules for brainstorming (Ch. 12)-Blogs (key term) and blogging (Ch. 14)-Participative management now integrated with empowerment (Ch.15)-New and expanded coverage of leadership traits and traits of bad leaders(Ch. 16)-Peter Drucker’s new tips for improving leadership effectiveness (Ch.16)-Full-range theory of leadership (Ch. 16)-Four underlying behaviors associated with transformational leadership(Ch. 16)-Shared leadership (Ch. 16 key term)-Level 5 leadership (Figure 16-5)-Role of followers in the leadership process (Ch. 16)• Improved PowerPoint slides: Prepared by Paige Wolf of GeorgeMason University, the improved PowerPoint slides are designed to 1)be meaningful lessons for students that encourage active thinking andparticipation and 2) allow the instructor to have at their fingertips theinformation they want to convey for each slide. The PowerPoint not onlyincludes overviews, key concepts, and materials from the text, but alsoprovides supplemental examples, charts, and data from outside sourcesto enhance lecture presentations. eInstruction discussion questions (CPS)are also included in the PowerPoint slides which can be used with orwithout the “clickers”.• Fresh cases and features: Continuing their tradition of being currentand relevant, the authors have included new chapter-opening vignettesfor every chapter. Sixteen of the chapter-closing OB in Action CaseStudies are new.• Up-to-date in-text business examples: This is a clear advantage overmany texts that tend to cite research findings without giving a realapplication.• Strong coverage of women in organizations: The text includes lots offemale role models and research insights on gender-related differences,reflecting women’s growing presence in the workplace.• Meta-analysis: When citing research many competitors will summarizeonly a few research studies and then draw a conclusion. Instead,Kreitner and Kinicki cite meta-analysis studies, which statistically summarizenumerous studies before arriving at conclusions-a more efficientand statistically accurate process.• Consistent pedagogical structure: Each topic presented in the textfollows a similar cadence: theory/research/practice. Following thisorder of explanation is logical, efficient and ensures that all conceptsare directly related.• In-text OB Exercises: Rather than just having only end-of-chapter exercises,Kreitner and Kinicki have numerous in-text exercises designed toinvolve students in the learning process and encourage them to discoverand understand their personal management styles.• International OB: Kreitner has an entire chapter (4) devoted toInternational OB, covering important concepts for today’s workforce,such as leadership lessons from the GLOBE project and cross-culturalcompetencies. Many of the Real World, Real People examples also showhow organizational behavior topics relate to a wide array of differentcountries and cultures, such as China, Australia, Japan, India, Finland,and Central America.• A strong emphasis on diversity with a complete chapter (2), manyin-text examples, and many Real World/Real People features devotedto this vital topic.CONTENTSPart 1 The World of Organizational Behavior Chp 1 OrganizationalBehavior: The Quest for People-Centered Organizations Chp 2 ManagingDiversity: Releasing Every Employee’s Potential Chp 3 OrganizationalCulture, Socialization, and Mentoring Chp 4 International OB:Managing across cultures Part 2 Individual Behavior in OrganizationsChp 5 Self-Concept, Personality, Abilities, and Emotions Chp 6 Values,Attitudes, and Job Satisfaction Chp 7 Social Perception and AttributionsChpt 8 Foundations of Motivation Chp 9 Improving Job Performancewith Goals, Feedback, Rewards, and Positive Reinforcement Part 3Group and Social Processes Chp 10 Group Dynamics Chp 11 Teamsand Teamwork Chp 12 Individual and Group Decision-Making Chp58HED 2007 Management.indd 5810/5/2006 1:24:15 PM

Management13 Managing Conflict and Negotiation Part 4 Organizational ProcessesChp 14 Communication in the Internet Age Chp 15 Influence Tactics,Empowerment, and Politics Chp 16 Leadership Chp 17 Creating EffectiveOrganizations Chp 18 Managing Change and StressInternational EditionNEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOREssentials with Online Learning Access CardBy Steven McShane, University of Western Australia and Mary AnnVon Glinow, Florida InternationalUniversity-Miami2007 (February 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325562-0 / MHID: 0-07-325562-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110851-5 / MHID: 0-07-110851-3 [IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mcshaneESSOrganizational Behavior [essentials] offers the same quality ofcontemporary knowledge, excellent readability, and classroomsupport that has made the hardback book by the same authorteam one of the best-selling OB books around the world--but ina smaller package. It applies four fundamental principles: linkingtheory with reality, organizational behavior for everyone,contemporary theory foundation, and active learning support.McShane and Von Glinow have sliced out the extended orsecondary topics so students can drill down to what is reallyessential. Although this book is less than two-thirds the lengthof their comprehensive hardback textbook, it doesn’t skimp onclassroom support. In this era of active learning, critical thinking,and outcomes-based teaching, these supplements are becomingmore “essential” than ever.FEATURES• Cutting-edge topics include employee engagement, appreciative inquiry,corporate blogs, personal resilience, four-drive theory, separatingsocioemotional conflict from constructive conflict, Schwartz’s valuesmodel, learning orientation, and several others.• A complete instructor’s package is available with OB [essentials]ensuring the highest quality and reliability of each and every pieceof this superlative teaching package. Each chapter in the Instructor’sManual includes the learning objective, key terms with definitions,lecture outline, suggested answers to discussion questions, teachingnotes for the chapter case study, teaching notes for the team exercise(s),and teaching notes for the self-assessment(s) related to that chapter aswell as for additional self-assessments online.• Self-Assessment Exercises at the end of each chapter allow studentsto diagnose their attitudes, personality, values, and beliefs on a varietyof organizational behavior concepts. Topics include active listeningskills, upward influence, conflict handling, leadership, Identifying YourPreferred Organizational Structure, Corporate Culture Preference Scale,and Tolerance of Change Scale among others. Additional self-assessmentsare located online at www.mhhe.com/mcshaneESS• End-of-Chapter Cases- Several new cases have been written byinstructors from across the globe. One case appears at the end of eachchapter to help students diagnose organizational issues using OB conceptsfrom the chapter. Examples include Ancol Corp., Inhibitor Drugs,From Lippert-Johanson Inc. to Fenway Waste Management, and Buddy’sSnack Company among others.• Opening vignettes begin each chapter to draw students into the topicswith a real organizational incident related to the content of that chapter.Some examples include Google, Owens Corning, Indianapolis Power& Light, Fish! Philosophy at Pike Place Fish Market, NASA, WorldCom,Arthur Anderson, and Procter & Gamble among others.• End-of-part video summaries are located in an appendix at the backof the text. New videos from NBC include “Bully Broads” and “CelebrityCEO Charisma” along with Business Week TV’s “Childcare Help”.• End-of-chapter material includes a chapter summary, key terms,critical thinking questions, case study, team exercises, web exercise,team activity, and self-assessment exercise• Every chapter has eye-catching photos, usually about specific companies.Detailed captions briefly describe real-life incidents relatingto the photo.CONTENTSPART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to Organizational BehaviorPART 2: INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR AND PROCESSES 2. Individual Behavior,Values, and Personality 3. Perceptions and Learning in Organizations4. Workplace Emotions and Attitudes 5. Motivation and AppliedPerformance 6. Individual Decision Making PART 3: TEAM PROCESSES7. Team Dynamics 8. Communicating in Teams and Organizations 9.Power and Influence in the Workplace 10. Conflict Management 11.Leadership in Organizational Settings PART 4: ORGANIZATIONALPROCESSES 12. Organizational Structure 13. Organizational Culture14. Organizational ChangeInternational EditionNEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIORHuman Behavior at Work, 12th EditionBy John Newstrom, University of Minnesota--Duluth2007 (May 2006) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287546-1 / MHID: 0-07-287546-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125430-4 / /MHID: 0-07-125430-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/newstrom12eOrganizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, 12e is asolid research-based and referenced text is known for its veryreadable style and innovative pedagogy. While minimizingtechnical jargon, Newstrom and Davis carefully blend theorywith practice so that its basic theories come to life in a realisticcontext. As in previous editions, this edition will be filled withpractical, applied advice.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Every chapter contains all-new “What Managers Are Reading” summariesof relevant ‘best-selling’ books.• At the end of each chapter is an “Advice to Future Managers” set ofuseful guidelines (resulting in a total of 180 practical prescriptions forstudents to follow).• Every chapter contains ethics-related references- primarily throughthe “An Ethics Question” boxes, designed to stimulate student thoughtand discussion on pertinent issues.• New content inclusions such as:-Positive organizational behavior, authenticity, and micromanagement(Ch. 2)-Framing, blogs, and organizational silence (Ch. 3)-Humor and fun workplaces (Ch. 4)-Servant leadership (Ch. 7)-Presenteeism (Ch. 9)-Dues-paying (Ch. 10)-Facilitation skills (Ch. 11)-Virtual teams (Ch. 13)-Appreciative Inquiry (Ch. 14)59HED 2007 Management.indd 5910/5/2006 1:24:15 PM

Management-Effects of abusive supervision, incivility, and bullying; employeeresilience (Ch. 15)FEATURES• Chapter opening illustrations preceding every chapter to engage thereader in a real life issue.• Newstrom and Davis have expanded and updated the OB model inChapter 2 to provide a guiding framework for the entire book.• Organizational Behavior, 12e has a streamlined chapter structure tofit perfectly with a semester-length course (16 chapters).• Substantial coverage of teams, their organizational context, factorsthat make them successful and team building processes that help memberswork together more effectively.CONTENTSPart 1 Introduction and Setting Chapter 1 The Study of OrganizationsChapter 2 Organizational Culture Chapter 3 Globalization Part 2 BehaviorWithin Organizations: Individual Chapter 4 Individual Behavior andDifferences Chapter 5 Motivation: Background and Theories Chapter 6Motivation: Organizational Applications Chapter 7 Work Stress Part 3Behavior within Organizations: Groups and Interpersonal InfluenceChapter 8 Group Behavior and Teamwork Chapter 9 Conflict andNegotiation Chapter 10 Power and Politics Chapter 11 Leadership:Fundamentals Chapter 12 Leadership: Emerging and Changing ConceptsPart 4 The Structure and Design of Organizations Chapter 13The Study of Organizations Chapter 14 Organizational Structure Part5 The Processes of Organizations Chapter 15 Managing CommunicationProcesses Chapter 16 Decision Making Chapter 17 OrganizationalChange and Learning / Appendix Procedures and Techniques For StudyingOrganizations: Behavior, Structure, Processes• This text has been successfully used with students in classrooms andbusiness organizations for over 40 years.• This text offers careful blending of theory/research with practice:basic theories come to life via hundreds of examples of real organizationalsituations.• Each chapter includes numerous discussion questions, many whichrequire thought, encourage insight, or invite readers to analyze theirown experiences in terns of the ideas in the chapter.CONTENTSPart One: Fundamentals of Organizational Behavior. Chp.1 The Dynamicsof People and Organizations. Chp.2 Models of OrganizationalBehavior. Chp.3 Managing Communications. Chp.4 Social Systems andOrganizational Culture. Part Two: Motivation and Reward Systems.Chp.5 Motivation. Chp.6 Appraising and Rewarding Performance.Part Three: Leadership and Empowerment. Chp.7 Leadership. Chp.8Empowerment and Participation. Part Four: Individual and InterpersonalBehavior. Chp.9 Employee Attitudes and Their Effects. Chp.10Issues between Organizations and Individuals. Chp.11 InterpersonalBehavior. Part Five: Group Behavior. Chp.12 Informal and FormalGroups. Chp.13 Teams and Team Building. Part Six: Change and ItsEffects. Chp.14 Managing Change. Chp.15 Stress and Counseling.Part Seven: Emerging Aspects of Organizational Behavior. Chp.16Organizational Behavior across Cultures. Part Eight: Case Problems.Glossary. Appendix A: Personal Development Plan. References. NameIndex. Subject IndexInternational EditionORGANIZATIONS12th EditionBy James Gibson, University of Kentucky - Med/Lexington, JohnIvancevich, University of Houston, James Donnelly, University ofKentucky and Robert Konopaske, Florida Atlantic University2006 / 624 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298717-1 / MHID: 0-07-298717-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125538-7 / MHID: 0-07-125538-9 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gibson12eManaging people and their behavior in organizations is oneof the most challenging tasks anyone could face. Gibson’sOrganizations: Behavior, Structure, Processes, Twelfth Edition,presents theories, research results, and applications that focuson managing organizational behavior in small, large, and globalorganizations. It is organized and presented in a sequence basedon behavior, structure, and processes. Each part is presented asa self-contained unit and can therefore be presented in whateversequence instructors prefer. Organizations is easily adaptable toindividual preferences. This edition emphasizes that the mostsuccessful managers in the global economy will be those whocan anticipate, adapt, and manage change.International EditionORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIORKey Concepts, Skills and Best Practices, 2nd EditionBy Angelo Kinicki and Robert Kreitner of Arizona State University2006 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313833-6 / MHID: 0-07-313833-9(with Student CD and OLC with Premium Content)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111811-8 / MHID: 0-07-111811-X[IE with Student CD and OLC with Premium Content]ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320585-4 / MHID: 0-07-320585-0(Business Week Edition)Website: http://mhhe.com/kinickiob2eIn addition to facilitating active learning, Organizational Behavior:Key Concepts, Skills & Best Practices meets the needsof those instructors looking for a brief, paperback text for theirOB course, who do not want to sacrifice content or pedagogy.This book provides lean and efficient coverage of topics such asdiversity in organizations, ethics, and globalization, which arerecommended by the Association to Advance Collegiate Schoolsof Business (AACSB). Timely chapter-opening vignettes, interactiveexercises integrated into each chapter, four-color presentation,lively writing style, captioned color photos, cartoons, andreal-world in-text examples make Organizational Behavior: KeyConcepts, Skills & Best Practices the right choice for today’s business/managementstudent. The topical flow of this 16-chaptertext goes from micro (individuals) to macro (groups, teams, andorganizations). Mixing and matching chapters and topics withinchapters in various combinations is possible and encouraged tocreate optimum teaching/learning experiences.CONTENTSPart One Managing People in a Global Economy Chapter One Needed:People-Centered Managers and Workplaces Chapter Two OrganizationalCulture, Socialization, and Mentoring Chapter Three DevelopingGlobal Managers Part Two Managing Individuals Chapter FourUnderstanding Social Perception and Managing Diversity Chapter FiveAppreciating Individual Differences: Self-Concept, Personality, EmotionsChapter Six Motivation I: Needs, Job Design, Intrinsic Motivation, andSatisfaction Chapter Seven Motivation II: Equity, Expectancy, and GoalSetting Chapter Eight Improving Performance with Feedback, Rewards,and Positive Reinforcement Part Three Making Decisions and ManagingSocial Processes Chapter Nine Making Decisions Chapter TenEffective Groups and Teamwork Chapter Eleven Managing Conflictand Negotiating Part Four Managing Organizational Processes ChapterTwelve Communicating in the Internet Age Chapter Thirteen Influence,Power, and Politics: An Organizational Survival Kit Chapter FourteenLeadership Part Five Managing Evolving Organizations Chapter FifteenDesigning Effective Organizations Chapter Sixteen Managing Changeand Organizational Learning / Endnotes / Glossary / Index60HED 2007 Management.indd 6010/5/2006 1:24:15 PM

ManagementNEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR ON THE PACIFICRIM2nd EditionBy Steven McShane, University of Western Australia and TonyTravaglione, Charles Sturt University2006 (September 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471658-8 / MHID: 0-07-471658-1McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/mcshane2eThe ‘fish book’ has become a phenomenal success story. Primarilyused as a 2nd year level text for students majoring inManagement, the popularity and widespread use of the texthas enabled us to gain further insight into developing this nextedition to meet the needs of the market.FEATURES• Contemporary and Informed. This text addresses contemporarytopics in a depth that other textbooks have yet to achieve. Students arekept up-to-date with:• ~ Revised case studies and boxed features• ~ Daily OB news from around the country, through Press Gallery• ~ Updated coverage of concepts• Written in clear, uncomplicated language. The text has been commendedfor linking learning with work-related behaviour and its focuson essential concepts and smooth transition from theory to practice.• Relevant and Engaging. The examples are real, current and thoughtprovokingand relate to student’s experience and interest. The bookmaintains a Pacific Rim focus whilst including international examplesto ensure that students are exposed to OB on a broader scale.CONTENTSPart One: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to the field of organisationalbehaviour Part Two: INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOUR AND PROCESSES 2.Individual behaviour and learning in organisations 3. Perception andpersonality in organisations 4. Workplace values, ethics and emotions5. Foundations of employee motivation 6. Applied motivation practices7. Stress management Part Three: TEAM PROCESSES 8. Team dynamics9. Decision making and employee involvement 10. Creativity andteam decision making 11. Communicating in organisational settings 12.Power, politics and persuasion 13. Conflict and negotiation 14. LeadershipPart Four: ORGANISATIONAL PROCESSES 15. Organisationalstructure and design 16. Organisational culture 17. Organisationalchange and developmentNEWMANAGING ORGANIZATIONS3rd EditionBy Robert Rosenfeld, Nassau County Comm College and DavidWilson, Warwick Business School2006 (November 2006) / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710416-0 / MHID: 0-07-710416-1McGraw-Hill UK Title(Details unavailable at press time)ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR3rd EditionBy Buelens, Medstdash and Van Der Heijden of De Vlerick School ofManagement—University of Ghent2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710723-9 / MHID: 0-07-710723-3McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/buelens3eOrganisational Behaviour, 3e is a major revision of this contemporaryEuropean textbook. The revised part structure nowaccommodates new chapters that successfully integrate the latestresearch and theoretical developments in the field of OB. Forexample, a new opening chapter on foundations of OB as wellas completely new coverage of organisational structure andsustainable and ethical organisations.CONTENTSPart 1 1. Foundations of organizational behaviour Part 2: Individualprocesses 2. Personality, values, attitudes and job satisfaction 3. Perception4. Content theories on motivation 5. Motivation: process theories,feedback and rewards 6. Stress Part 3: Group and social processes7. Interpersonal communication 8. Group dynamics 9. Teams andteamwork 10. Leadership 11. Decision making 12. Conflict andnegotiation 13. Power and politics Part 4: Organizational processes14. Elements of organization structure 15. Organizational structureand design 16. Organizational culture and international management17. Organizational change and innovation 18. Sustainable and ethicalorganizations New Online Learning Centre — Lecturer Area will contain:Instructor’s Manual / Power Point Slides / Test Bank / Additional Cases/ Additional Exercises / Student Area will contain: Self-test multiplechoice questions / Test Bank / Chapter by Chapter Learning Objectives/ Chapter by Chapter Web Links / GlossaryINTRODUCTION TO ORGANIZATIONALBEHAVIOUR3rd EditionBy Dick and Ellis2005 / 368 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710807-6 / MHID: 0-07-710807-8McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/dickandellisIntroduction to Organizational Behaviour, 3e provides a conciseand engaging grounding in the core concepts and practical issuesof Organizational Behaviour for students with little or no previousexperience of business or management. The book adoptsa micro-macro approach to OB, starting with the individualthrough to groups and teams and finishing with the organization.The authors’ approach is balanced between a management andpsychological perspective, and is pedagogically enhanced withup-to-date illustrative examples, case studies and assessmentmaterial. This edition has been thoroughly updated to reflectdevelopments within the field. It includes a new chapter onorganization environments - giving special attention to the topicalconcept of the ‘knowledge worker’, and dedicates increasedcoverage to sociological issues such as structure, strategy, powerand subjectivity.CONTENTSChapter 1 ~ What is organisational behaviour all about? Chapter 2 ~Personality and intelligence Chapter 3 ~ Perception and attitudes Chapter4 ~ Motivation Chapter 5 ~ Groups Chapter 6 ~ OrganisationalLeaders and managers Chapter 7 ~ Organisational analysis: structure,systems and culture Chapter 8 ~ Organisation and environment Chapter9 ~ Power and Self Chapter 10 ~ Organisational and managementdevelopment61HED 2007 Management.indd 6110/5/2006 1:24:16 PM

ManagementInternational EditionORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIORHuman Behavior at Work, 10th EditionBy Fred Luthans, University of Nebraska-Lincoln2005 / 704 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287387-0 / MHID: 0-07-287387-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124881-5 / MHID: 0-07-124881-1 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/luthans10eLuthans: Organizational Behavior was the first mainstreamorganizational behavior text on the market and continues itstradition of being the most current and up to date researchedtext today. The author, Fred Luthans, is well known in this field,and is the 5th highest Publisher in the Academy of ManagementJournal. He continues to do research in the area of organizationalbehavior. This text is aimed at professors who take a researchbased and conceptual approach to their OB course.CONTENTSPART I: ENVIRONMENTAL AND ORGANIZATIONAL CONTEXT 1.Introduction to Organizational Behavior 2. Environmental Context:Information Technology and Globalization 3. Environmental Context:Diversity and Ethics 4. Organizational Context: Design and Culture5. Organizational Context: Reward Systems PART II: COGNITIVEPROCESSES OF ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR 6. Perception andAttribution 7. Personality and Attitudes 8. Motivational Needs andProcesses 9. Positive Organizational Behavior PART III: DYNAMICSOF ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR 10. Communication 11. DecisionMaking 12. Stress and Conflict 13. Power and Politics 14. Groups andTeams PART IV: MANAGING AND LEADING FOR HIGH PERFORM-ANCE 15. Managing Performance through Job Design and Goal Setting16. Behavioral Performance Management 17. Effective LeadershipProcesses 18. Great Leaders: Styles, Activities, and SkillsInternational EditionBEHAVIOR IN ORGANIZATIONS8th EditionBy Abraham B Shani, and James Lau, California Polytechnic StateUniversity2005 / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-248575-2 / MHID: 0-07-248575-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123845-8 / MHID: 0-07-123845-X [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/shani8eBehavior in Organizations, 8/e, by Shani and Lau, is a paperbacktext that takes a hands-on, experiential approach to organizationbehavior. The majority of the exercises, role-playing simulations,and cases were developed in and for management trainingworkshops. The cases themselves represent different industriesand organizations around the globe with diverse size, product,service, and cultures. Instructors appreciate the multiple interactiveteaching methods for each teaching module. Experientialmethods provide a powerful stimulus for learning, growth, andchange by helping participants focus on their own behaviorsand reactions as data. The text begins with structured, lesspersonal exercises that are readily recognized as relevant tohuman effectiveness in organizational settings. Personal growthand self-understanding activities are introduced later in the text,after students have had enough experience to become morecomfortable and ready for them.CONTENTSPART I: THE ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR CONTEXT 1. OrganizationalBehavior: An Overview 2. Expectations, Learning, and AppreciativeInquiry 3. Leadership Dynamics PART II: MANAGING TEAMS 4.Team Problem Solving, Decision Making, and Effectiveness 5. GroupDynamics and Performance 6. Conflict Management and NegotiationsPART III: UNDERSTANDING AND MANAGING INDIVIDUALS 7.Appreciating Individual Differences 8. Motivation 9. Perception andAttribution 10. Communication 11. Stress and the Management of StressPART IV: MANAGING ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESSES 12. Organizationand Work Design 13. Creativity and Innovation 14. OrganizationCulture 15. Organizational Change, Development, and Learning PARTV: UNDERSTANDING AND MANAGING EMERGING COMPLEXPROCESSES (ADVANCED MODULES—ON THE WWW) 16. CareerPlanning and Development 17. Knowledge Management Processes 18.Technology and Computer-based TechnologyInternational EditionORGANIZATION BEHAVIORSolutions for ManagementBy Paul Sweeney, University of Central Florida and Dean McFarlin,University of Dayton2002 / 496 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-365908-4 / MHID: 0-07-365908-8 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112130-9 / MHID: 0-07-112130-7 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/sweeneyCONTENTSCh 1 Organizational Behavior and Effective Management Part I: ManagingIndividual Employees Ch 2 Organizing Perceptions and AvoidingBiases Ch 3 Understanding Attitudes and Personality Ch 4 MotivatingEmployees to do Their Best Ch 5 Effective Decision-Making Part II: ManagingGroups and Relationships Effectively Ch 6 Designing MotivatingJobs and High Performance Teams Ch 7 Leadership That Works Ch 8Power and Influence: Exercising Leadership & Practicing Politics Ch 9Constructively Dealing with Conflict and Stress Ch 10 Communicatingand Negotiating Successfully Part III: Managing Behavior Across theOrganization Ch 11 Structuring Companies for Effective CompetitionCh 12 Corporate Culture: Analyzing and Shaping the Firm’s Way ofLife Ch 13 Behavioral Challenges in International Management Ch 14Creating & Implementing Organizational ChangeInternational EditionEFFECTIVE BEHAVIOR IN ORGANIZATIONS7th EditionBy Allan Cohen, Babson College, Herman Gadon, University ofCalifornia-San Diego, Stephen Fink, University of New Hampshireand Robin Willits2001 / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-288039-7 / MHID: 0-07-288039-2(with PowerWeb, Mandatory Package) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-121833-7 / MHID: 0-07-121833-5 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/cohenfi nkCONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: The Total Organization and theConcept of Systems Chapter 3: The Work Group Chapter 4: Cohesivenessin Groups Chapter 5: Differentiation in Groups Chapter 6:Developing Group Effectiveness Chapter 7: Basic Human Needs andRewards Chapter 8: The Personal System Chapter 9: Diagnosing theTwo-Person Work Relationship Chapter 10: Improving the Two-PersonWork Relationship Chapter 11: Leadership: Exerting Influenceand Power Chapter 12: Leadership: Managerial Functions and StylesChapter 13: Relations among Groups in the Organization Chapter 14:Initiating Change Cases62HED 2007 Management.indd 6210/5/2006 1:24:16 PM

Organizational Behavior- SupplementsCONTENTSManagementStep 1: First Steps Step 2: Team Contracts Step 3: Team and MeetingManagement Step 4: Peer Feedback Step 5: After Action Review Step6: Evaluation and ClosingNEWTEAM LEARNING ASSISTANT WORKBOOK2nd EditionBy Sandra Deacon Carr, Ellen Herman, Sandra Keldsen and JeffreyMiller of Boston University-School of Management, Patricia Wakefield,McMaster University2008 (January 2007)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338118-3 / MHID: 0-07-338118-7The Team Learning Assistant (TLA) is designed to maximizethe students’ team learning experience, and to save professorsand students alike valuable time. TLA is organized into twotoolboxes, one for students and one for faculty. The facultytoolbox contains teaching notes, helpful hints, and proven materials,designed for instructors who use teams in their courses.The professor determines how students will use the studenttool box, and then are able to track student performance datagenerated by each class. Located at www.mhhe-tla.com, theTeam Learning Assistant features such important advice onintegrating teams into the syllabus and grading process, theimportance of having a team contract and how to write one,details on peer and instructor evaluations, as well as meetingand conflict management.NEW TO THIS EDITION• The Team Learning Assistant walks instructors through the entireprocess of designing and executing a team learning component in theircourse. In “First Steps,” there are instructions for developing a syllabusand addressing grading issues in a team-based course, as well as examplesof effective team assignments and sample syllabi.• The Team Learning Assistant provides a detailed rationale for andidentifies the steps for developing the Team Contract. In order to succeed,team members must be committed to accomplishing the team’sgoals, understand members’ expectations, and set positive team norms.To do this in the most efficient and effective manner, teams need todevelop a formal Team Contract. The Team Contract is an essentialtool that allows teams to structure expectations and establish operatingprocedures. Team roles and leadership are carefully defined for studentsas part of the contract.• Team and Meeting Management are cumbersome tasks for studentsand professors alike. The Team Learning Assistant features readings andassignments to increase the efficiency and effectiveness of the teamdecision-making process. TLA also enumerates strategies for preventing,diffusing, confronting, and effectively resolving conflict.• The Peer Feedback instrument is a central part of the Team LearningAssistant and is the basis for one of the most important and productiveexercises for each team. The feedback process is a structured learningprocess, and addresses the performance expectations established in theTeam Contract. The ability to give and receive constructive feedbackis an essential skill for managers and team members alike. The TeamLearning Assistant provides the environment for providing this developmentalfeedback through forms, action plans, and reports.• The After Action Review is a tool that allows teams to learn fromwhat they are doing and improve their performance. The AAR is astructured discussion of specific events, inclusive of the entire team,and focused on learning from action to improve performance. It is nota process debriefing. The structure of the AAR and the specific steps tofollow when conducting the AAR are discussed in the required readingsand assignment.ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR IN ASIAIssues and ChallengesBy Tan Joo Seng and Chi Ching of Nanyang Technological University2004ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124164-9 / MHID: 0-07-124164-7An Asian PublicationCONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction to Globalization Chapter 2: Globalization’sChallenges Chapter 3: The New Millennium Employees Chapter 4:Emerging Employment Relationships Chapter 5: Ethics and CorporateGovernance in Asia Chapter 6: Leadership in the Asian Context Chapter7: Teams in Asian Organizations Chapter 8: Creativity, Innovation &Entrepreneurship in Asia Chapter 9: Case Studies and Business Perspectivesby KW Ching Chapter 10: ConclusionInternational OrganizationalBehaviorInternational EditionGLOBAL MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONALBEHAVIORBy Robert Konopaske, University of North Carolina-Wilmington andJohn M. Ivancevich, University of Houston—Houston2004 / 456 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-284306-4 / MHID: 0-07-284306-3 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123251-7 / MHID: 0-07-123251-6 [IE]Global Management and Organizational Behavior By Konopaskeand Ivancevich was written to provide a clear picture, analysis,and set of suggestions for managers and leaders to operate ininternational settings. Global Management and OrganizationalBehavior is a self-contained set of materials, which illustratesthat globalization requires a different tack and course than thetraditional treatment of management or organizational behavior.To support the content, models and examples provided inthe book, each of the three parts of the text contains readings,exercises and cases.CONTENTSI. Introduction to Globalization 1. Global Developments and Trends:A Management Perspective 2. Culture Awareness and Implications II.Managing in a Global Environment 3. Global Social Responsibilityand Ethical Decision Making 4. Communicating in Global Setting 5.Motivation 6. Negotiating Cross-Culturally 7. Managing Diversity 8.Groups and Teams III. Managing Human Resources 9. Global HumanResource Management 10. Family and Career Considerations IV. Endof Book Resources / Glossary / Subject and Name Indices63HED 2007 Management.indd 6310/5/2006 1:24:16 PM

ManagementManagement & OrganizationalBehavior CombinationInternational EditionNEWORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR ANDMANAGEMENT8th EditionBy John Ivancevich, University of Houston, Robert Konopaske,Florida Atlantic University-Boca Raton and Michael Matteson,University of Houston2008 (February 2007) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340508-7 / MHID: 0-07-340508-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128580-3 / MHID: 0-07-128580-6(Details unavailable at press time)CONTENTSPreface / Guidelines for study / Guided tour / Technology to enhancelearning and teaching / Acknowledgements / Part 1: WHAT MANAGERSAND ORGANISATIONS DO Chapter 1: Introduction to managementand organisational behaviour Chapter 2: Managers and organizationsChapter 3: Organisational strategy, planning and continuous improvementPart 2: THE INDIVIDUAL: MANAGING PEOPLE Chapter 4:Understanding perception, learning, and personality Chapter 5: Motivationprinciples at work Chapter 6: Motivation methods and applicationsChapter 7: Self-management at work: managing careers and stress Part 3:GROUPS AND TEAMS: MANAGING BEHAVIOUR BETWEEN PEOPLEChapter 8: Communicating for understanding and results Chapter 9:Creating productive interpersonal relationships Chapter 10: Managinggroups and teams Chapter 11: Conflict management and negotiationPart 4: THE ROLE OF THE MANAGER: LEADERSHIP PRACTICESChapter 12: Ethical problem-solving and decision-making Chapter 13:Power and politics Chapter 14: Leadership Part 5: DEVELOPING THEORGANISATION Chapter 15: Organisational structure and designChapter 16: The impact of organisational structure Chapter 17: Therole of Human Resource Management in the organization Chapter 18:Organisational change, development and innovationNEWMANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONALBEHAVIOR2nd EditionBy Wendy Bloisi, Curtis Cook and Phillip Hunsaker of University ofSan Diego2006 (November 2006) / 816 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711107-6 / MHID: 0-07-711107-9McGraw-Hill UK TitleThis second European edition of Management and OrganisationalBehaviour builds on the success of the previous edition tooffer a comprehensive discussion of behavioural skills and theworkings of organisations. Updated to reflect current businesspractices, the text includes a new chapter on HRM within theorganisation and expanded coverage of key topics such as globalisation.The author takes a functional approach, integratingtheory and practice in a lively and engaging manner, to promotecritical awareness and equip students to deal with real-worldmanagement situations.FEATURES• Strong pedagogy: Each chapter provides a wealth of interactive exercises,progressing through various levels of ability, to suit seminar groupsand individual study. These include experiential exercises, questions forstudy and discussion and case studies linked to chapter topics• European examples: Provided throughout the text, these examplesapply the theory of management and organisational behaviour in botha European and wider global context, allowing students to engage withthe material in a relevant way• A new chapter on HRM within the organisation: This chapter hasbeen added to enhance breadth of knowledge and provide up-to-datecoverage of key legislation• Strong practical focus: Thought-provoking boxes interspersedthroughout the text ground academic theory in a dynamic real-worldcontext, highlighting contemporary issues such as research, ethics,diversity, technology and the environmentNEWCONTEMPORARY MANAGEMENTBy Dianne Waddell, Deakin University, Jennifer Devine, EdithCowen University, Gareth Jones, Texas A&M University and JenniferGeorge, Rice University2006 (August 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471482-9 / MHID: 0-07-471482-1McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/mcshaneThis is a new Australian adaptation of two popular US editionsby Jones and George, Contemporary Management 3e and Essentialsof Contemporary Management 1e. Waddell and Devine’sContemporary Management presents a fresh and humane viewof the manager in the workplace. This non-prescriptive textexplores the manager as a person, rather than an institution,with values and ethics. Its innovative approach to managementraises issues that are relevant to the workplace today, such asfocusing on diversity, cultural sensitivity and managing globally.This text recognises that human interaction and communicationis the basis of effective management in business.FEATURES• Contemporary vision• Action-orientated approach• AccessibilityCONTENTSPart 1: Introduction 1. What is Management? 2. Evolution of ManagementPart 2: The Environmental Context of Management 3. Managingthe Environment: Organisational Culture 4. Managing Change andDiversity 5. Attitudes, Values and Ethics: Corporate Social ResponsibilityPart 3: Managing People 6. Leadership 7. Motivation 8. DecisionMaking 9. Human Resource Management Part 4: Managing Organisations10. Managing Strategy and Structure: Planning 11. ManagingInformation: Communication and Technology 12. Managing in a GlobalEnvironment 13. Managing Control Processes: Operations ManagementPart 5: Revolution of Management 14. Fads, Fashions and the Futureof Management64HED 2007 Management.indd 6410/5/2006 1:24:16 PM

ManagementInternational EditionORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR ANDMANAGEMENT7th EditionBy John M Ivancevich and Michael Hatteson of University of Houstonand Robert Konopaske, University of North Carolina -Wilmington2005 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310963-3 / MHID: 0-07-310963-0(with Student CD and OLC with Premium Content)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124631-6 / MHID: 0-07-124631-2[IE with OLC and PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/ivancevich7eThe revitalized and new author team of Ivancevich, Konopaskeand Matteson has listened and responded to reviewers’,instructors’, and students’ suggestions on how to continue tomake Organizational Behavior and Management, 7e a moreuser-friendly and application rich introductory OB textbook.To accomplish this, OBM 7e has achieved the difficult goal ofbalancing between preserving its key strengths (i.e., thorough,current, good mixture of research and practice, integratedtext with relevant readings/cases/exercises) and revitalizing itscontent and internal appearance in several high-impact ways.«Preserving while revitalizing» captures the spirit of what I/K/Mused as a guiding principle while writing OBM 7e.CONTENTSPart I: The Field of Organizational Behavior Chapter 1: Introductionto Organizational Behavior Chapter 2: Organizational Culture Part II:Understanding and Managing Individual Behavior Chapter 3: IndividualDifferences and Work Behavior Chapter 4: Perceptions and Emotions(NEW) Chapter 5: Motivation Chapter 6: Job Design, Work, and MotivationChapter 7: Evaluation, Feedback, and Rewards Chapter 8: ManagingMisbehavior (NEW) Chapter 9: Managing Individual Stress Part III:Group Behavior and Interpersonal Influence Chapter 10: Groups andTeams Chapter 11: Managing Conflict and Negotiations Chapter 12:Power, Politics, and Empowerment Part IV: Organizational ProcessesChapter 13: Communication Chapter 14: Decision Making Chapter 15:Leadership Part V: Organization System Chapter 16: OrganizationalStructure and Design Chapter 17: Managing Change, Innovation, andCreativity / Appendix 1 (old Appendix 1B—Quantitative and QualitativeResearch Techniques / Glossary / Chapter Endnotes / Name Index/ Company Index / Subject IndexCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comInternational EditionMANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONALBEHAVIOR3rd EditionBy Curtis Cook, San Jose State University, Phillip Hunsaker,University of San Diego, and Robert Coffey, University of SouthernCalifornia2001 / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-250833-8 / MHID: 0-07-250833-7(with PowerWeb) – Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-115018-7/MHID: 0-07-115018-8[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cookCONTENTSWhat Managers and Organizations Do - Chapter 1: Managing Peopleand Organizations Chapter 2: Strategic Thinking, Planning, and ControllingChapter 3: Organizing Work and People Chapter 4: Creatingand Modifying Organizational Culture Managing People - Chapter5: Understanding Perception, Learning, and Personality Chapter 6:Motivation Principles Chapter 7: Methods of Motivating People inOrganizations Managing Relationships - Chapter 8: Communicating forUnderstanding and Results Chapter 9: Creating Productive InterpersonalRelationships Chapter 10: Building Groups Into Teams Chapter 11:Conflict Management and Negotiation Leadership Practices Chapter12: Ethical Problem Solving and Decision Making Chapter 13: Powerand Politics Chapter 14: Leadership Managing Change - Chapter 15:Managing Change and Organizational Development Chapter 16: SelfManagement at Work: Stress, Health, CareerInternational EditionMANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONALBEHAVIOR CLASSICS7th EditionBy Michael Matteson and John Ivancevich of University of Houston1999 / 336 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-26457-9 / MHID: 0-256-26457-0 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122328-7 / MHID: 0-07-122328-2 [IE]CONTENTSPart One Foundations for Understanding Management and OrganizationalBehavior Chp 1 Of the Division of Labor Chp 2 What is ScientificManagement? Chp 3 Notes on the Theory of Organization Chp 4 TheWestern electric Researchers Chp 5 The Human Side of Enterprise Chp6 The Management Theory Jungle Part Two Classical ManagementProcesses: Planning, Organizing, Controlling Chp 7 Planning Chp 8Long-Range Planning: Challenge to Management Science Chp 9 Classifyingthe Elements of Work Chp 10 Organization Theory: An Overviewand an Appraisal Chp 11 The Theory of Authority Chp 12 The IdealBureaucracy Part Three Managing Individual and Group Behavior Chp13 The Bases of Social Power Chp 14 Role Conflict and Ambiguity inOrganizations Chp 15 On the Folly of Rewarding A, while Hoping forB Chp 16 Overcoming Resistance to Change Chp 17 How to PreventOrganizational Dry Rot Chp 18 The Development and Enforcement ofGroup Norms Part Five Managing Organizational Behavior: leadership,Motivation, Decision Making Chp 19 The Contingency Model - NewDirections for Leadership Utilization Chp 20 Decision Making as ASocial Process: Normative and Descriptive Models of Leader BehaviorChp 21 A Theory of Human Motivation Chp 22 That Urge to AchieveChp 23 Participation by Subordinates in the Managerial Decision-MakingProcess Chp 24 The Myth of Management65HED 2007 Management.indd 6510/5/2006 1:24:17 PM

ManagementNEWHuman RelationsHUMAN RELATIONS IN ORGANIZATIONSApplications and Skill Building, 7th EditionBy Robert Lussier, Springfield College2008 (September 2006) / 704 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-321055-1 / MHID: 0-07-321055-2Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lussier7eAs the subtitle indicates, Lussier’s Human Relations in Organizations:Applications and Skill Building employs an applicationsand skill building approach. It’s the most “how to” work withpeople textbook. This style is perfect for professors that wantto incorporate activities and exercises into the classroom, andbenefits students who want to understand concepts as well asapply and develop skills that they can use in their daily andprofessional lives. The text has also been successfully used foronline courses. The book and test bank provide a balanced,three-pronged approach: • A clear concise understanding ofhuman relations/ organizational behavior concepts; • The applicationof HR/OB concepts for critical thinking in the businessworld; • The development of HR/OB skills.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Increased global coverage: all chapters now include a section discussingglobal issues as they pertain to the chapter content. This will betterprepare students to work in the global economy.• Fifteen new video cases: new Manager’s Hot Seat Video Casespresent stimulating, real-world management situations in the classroom.They focus on tough issues and sensitive topics that will help studentsunderstand, develop and apply the skills necessary in today’s businessworld. The video cases are available on the Online Learning Center atwww.mhhe.com/lussier7e.• New cases: about half of the cases are new to this edition, while theothers have been updated. This keeps the material relevant and fresh.• New ethical dilemmas: each chapter has one ethical dilemma presentinga situation with questionable ethical behavior. Students are askedto assess the situation and ask themselves what they would do.• Reorganized: although still based on the levels of organizationalbehavior and the competency model of managerial education, formerPart V (Intrapersonal Skills: Personal Development) has been eliminated.Content in former Chapter 15 (Time and Career Management) has beenmoved to Chapter 4 to keep the intrapersonal skills together.• Totally updated: every chapter has been updated to provide the mostcurrent research and examples possible. Chapter by chapter details onthese improvements are in the preface and the instructor’s manual.FEATURES• Systems Orientation: the parts of the book are based on the competencymodel of managerial education, building from intrapersonal skills,to interpersonal skills, to leadership skills. It also follows the levels ofbehavior approach, going from individual, to group, to organizationlevels of behavior.• Research-based and current: the book is based on research, not opinion,and is completely updated to reflect the newest research. There areover 750 new references for an average of 50 per chapter.• Flexible and comprehensive: The concepts, applications and skillbuildingmaterial are clearly identified in the text and instructor’s materials;there are more quality and quantity of application and skill-buildingmaterials to allow professors to create their unique courses using thefeatures that will achieve their specific objectives.• Workbook format: allows students to interact with the textbook, andeasily turn in homework assignments.• Outstanding teaching support: to make sure that skills have indeedbeen acquired, the test bank includes skill building questions. Theinstructor’s manual gives detailed instructions on using all of the skillbuildingexercises as well as answers. It also provides suggestions forhow students can be tested on the exercises. The Video package provides18 behavior models and the 15 Manager’s Hot Seat Video cases.CONTENTSPart I. Intrapersonal Skill: Behavior, Human Relations, and PerformanceBegin With You 1. Understanding Behavior, Human Relations,and Performance 2. Personality, Stress, Learning, and Perception 3.Attitudes, Self-Concept, Values, and Ethics 4. Time and Career ManagementPart II. Interpersonal Skills: the Foundation of Human Relations5. Interpersonal Communications 6. Organizational Structure andCommunication 7. Dealing with Conflict Part III. Leadership Skills:Influencing Others 8. Leading and Trust 9. Motivating Performance10. Ethical Power and Politics 11. Networking and Negotiating Part IV.Leadership Skills: Team and Organizational Behavior, Human Relations,and Performance 12. Team Dynamics and Leadership 13. Teamsand Creative Problem Solving and Decision Making 14. OrganizationalChange and Culture 15. Valuing Diversity Globally Appendix A. ApplyingHuman Relations SkillsNEWHUMAN RELATIONS3rd EditionBy Lowell Lamberton and Leslie Minor-Evans of Central OregonComm College2007 (January 2006) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352231-9 / MHID: 0-07-352231-7A Glencoe PublicationWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/lamberton3eWhat strategies and techniques can we teach our students toencourage their growth in human relations success on andoff the job? How can students tap into the power that comesfrom working well in one-on-one situations, in groups, and inorganizations both big and small? Human Relations: Strategiesfor Success attempts to provide answers to these questions andguidance toward developing human relations skills that transferfrom the classroom to the real world of work. The authors’commitment to the creation of a book that is at once interestingto read, motivating to study, and relevant to a wide variety ofstudents has been the driving force behind the book. The textcovers time-tested, research-based psychology and managementprinciples, as well as newer theories and philosophies of humanrelations drawn from management theory, group theory,personality theory, and relationship theory. More than ever,effective human relations skills are crucial to business successas organizations grow and compete in a global business environment.Employees must have the knowledge and skill to adapt toa workplace where change is frequent and inevitable.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Updated opening chapter, with new facts on such historical namesas Mary Parker Follett and Frank and Lillian Gilbreth, to underscore—among other reasons—the important contributions that women havemade to the human relations movement.• Material on theorist Frederick Herzberg (two-factor theory) has beenadded to the motivation chapter (Ch. 6).• An updated and revised chapter on workplace health, with timelymaterial on drug, alcohol, and other issues that threaten the 21st centuryworkplace.66HED 2007 Management.indd 6610/5/2006 1:24:17 PM

Management• New opening vignettes and revised end-of-chapter activities andcases. Each chapter opens with a short vignette to set the tone of, focusattention on, and foster discussion about the chapter topics. Thesehigh-interest vignettes are drawn from situations that students will likelyrecognize from their own experiences.• Entire book updated for currency, especially in the areas of diversity(Ch. 16), social responsibility and ethics (Ch. 17), and creativity (Ch.12).• More information in the final chapter on career choices and goalsetting.• Additional emphasis on careers throughout the text.• Updated Web links and activities updated to remove the deadlinks.CONTENTSPart One: Human Relations and You. Chapter 1: Human Relations: ABackground. Chapter 2: Self-Esteem in Human Relations. Chapter 3: Self-Awareness and Self-Disclosure. Chapter 4: Attitudes. Chapter 5: Personaland Organization Values. Chapter 6: Motivation: Increasing Productivity.Part Two: Human Relations in Groups. Chapter 7: Communicationand Human Relations. Chapter 8: People, Groups, and Their Leaders.Chapter 9: Teams in Quality Organizations. Chapter 10: Transactionsand Relationships. Part Three: Building Your Human Relations Skills.Chapter 11: Individual and Organizational Change. Chapter 12: Creativityand Human Relations. Chapter 13: Conflict Management. Chapter14: Stress and Stress Management. Chapter 15: Winning and KeepingYour Customers. Part Four: Thriving In a Changing World. Chapter 16:Human Relations in a World of Diversity. Chapter 17: Business Ethicsand Social Responsibility. Chapter 18: Maintaining Workplace Health.Chapter 19: Human Relations and Your Future Success• Different types of problem employees discussed (Ch. 13), and addedmaterial on maintaining good customer relations (Ch. 15).• An almost entirely new chapter 19, which includes material on careerchoices, job search, and positive psychology.• A change from two-color to four-color format, increasing readabilityand usability.FEATURES• On Target: Strategies for Success: To highlight the connection betweenhuman relations theories and their real-world applications, thistextbook contains a unique set of strategies that are integrated into allof the chapters. These strategies offer concrete guidance on how to usehuman relations skills to address situations that all people face.• Case Studies: Two realistic, job-based Case Studies (each with questions)are presented in every chapter. These classroom-tested Case Studiesare drawn from familiar experiences in a wide variety of workplacesettings. These cases allow students to resolve realistic human relationsproblems for which there is often more than one solution. Each CaseStudy can be used as a springboard for classroom discussion and groupproblem-solving activities.• “Working It Out” Exercises: For most students, active participation ismotivating, rewarding, and crucial to reinforcing learning. In a varietyof classroom-tested Working It Out exercises, students are encouragedto build on their human relations skills as they role-play; intervieweach other; assess their own and each other’s feelings, strengths, andweaknesses; work on setting goals and developing strategies; practicegiving and getting feedback; and explore other applications of chaptertopics.International EditionManagement SkillsNEWDEVELOPING MANAGEMENT SKILLSWhat Great Managers Know and DoBy Timothy Baldwin, Indiana University-Bloomington, Bill Boomerand Robert Rubin2008 (January 2007) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-292010-9 / MHID: 0-07-292010-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110628-3 / MHID: 0-07-110628-6 [IE]FEATURES• Module based system for learning key concepts in Principles ofManagement known as problem-based learning• The content is designed around what is the most effective learningstimuli for today’s student: personal assessment / problem-based learning/ skill applications in a real context• An E-learning module that is a behavioral assessment that requiresa demonstration of managerial knowledge• Chapter Concepts and Learning Objectives: Each chapter opens withthese two at-a-glance study aids. Chapter Concepts quickly map out thechapter content, highlighting each chapter’s practical strategies, and theobjectives help the student focus on the chapter’s critical points.• Internet Exercises: Each chapter contains challenging Internet exercisesthat allow interactive learning related to the topics covered.Topic-related Web links, with suggestions for brief learning activitiesand exercises, are also included.• Key Terms: Important Terms are highlighted within the text and calledout in the margin. They are also listed at the end of each chapter andare defined in the glossary.• Review Questions: Each chapter closes with though-provoking questions.These questions call on students to go beyond simply readingthe chapter by asking them to consider its implications for their lives inthe classroom and beyond. Many questions tap students’ creativity andproblem-solving abilities as they encourage students to think beyondthe text boundaries.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg67HED 2007 Management.indd 6710/5/2006 1:24:17 PM

ManagementInternational EditionINTERPERSONAL SKILLS BUSINESS2nd EditionBy Suzanne de Janasz, Karen Dowd and Beth Schneider of JamesMadison University2006 / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-288139-4 / MHID: 0-07-288139-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124435-0 / MHID: 0-07-124435-2 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/iso2eInterpersonal Skills in Organizations, 2nd Edition, by deJanasz,Dowd, and Schneider takes a fresh, thoughtful look at thekey skills necessary for personnel and managerial success inorganizations today. Chock-full of exercises, cases and groupactivities, the book employs an experiential approach suitablefor all student audiences. The book is broken up into 4 distinctsections (Understanding Yourself, Understanding Others, UnderstandingTeams, and Leading) that can be used collectivelyor modularly depending on the instructor’s preference andstudent-audience need.CONTENTSUnit One: Interpersonal Effectiveness: Understanding Yourself 1.Journey into Self-awareness 2. Self-disclosure and Trust 3. EstablishingGoals by Identifying Values and Ethics 4. Self-Management Unit Two:Interpersonal Effectiveness: Understanding and Working with Others5. Understanding and Working with Diverse Others 6. The Importanceand Skill of Listening 7. Conveying Verbal Messages Unit Three: AdvancedInterpersonal Skills 8. Persuading Individuals and Audiences9. Negotiation 10. Teams and Work Groups 11. Managing Conflict 12.Achieving Business Results through Effective Meetings 13. FacilitatingTeam Success 14. Making Decisions and Solving Problems CreativelyUnit Four: Leading Individuals and Groups 15. Power and Politicking16. Networking and Mentoring 17. Coaching and Providing Feedbackfor Improved Performance 18. Leading and Empowering Self and Others19. Project ManagementCONTENTSINTRODUCTION 1. The philosophy of this book 2. How the bookworks PART I 3. Planning your career 4. The qualities of successfulmanagers & leaders 5. Assessing yourself and setting some goals forself-development 6. How to select and use the activities PART II Activitiesfor management self-developmentMANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMSBy Sekhar2005 (October 2005) / 456 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-058593-5 / MHID: 0-07-058593-8Tata McGraw-Hill TitleCONTENTSPART I: THE CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS1. The Newer Paradigms of Management Controls 2. Balancing the Tensionsin Control Systems Part II: THE TRADITIONAL INSTRUMENTS OFCONTROLS IN ORGANISATIONS 3. External Audit, Internal Controls,and Internal Audit 4. Accountability in Organisations 5. Profit Centersand Transfer Pricing 6. Investment Centers and Long Term Accountability7. Compensation and Incentives Part III: THE NEWER DIMENSIONSOF CONTROL IN RISK AND UNCERTAINTY 8. Coping with ITand the Knowledge Revolutions 9. Increasing Profits with DecreasedRisks Part IV: MATCHING CONTROL SYSTEMS WITH STRATEGIES10. Strategic as a Guidepost for Controls 11. Differentiated Controls forDifferentiated Situations 12. Measuring Performance to Match Strategy:Non-Financial Insights and Balanced Score Cards PART V: SECTORALAPPLICATIONS 13. Controls in the Financial Sector 14. Control inthe Service Industry 15. Multinational, Global, Transnational, andInternational Organisations 16. Controls in Project Management 17.Controls in Non-profit Organisations 18. Government and Cooperativesin Business 19. Small Business PART VI: COMING TO GRIPSWITH REAL LIFE 20. Comprehensive Cases 21. Designing ControlSystems: A Tool KitA MANAGER’S GUIDE TO SELF-DEVELOPMENT5th EditionBy Mike Pedler, Salford University, John Burgoyne, LancasterUniversity and Tom Boydell2006 (September 2006) / 289 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711470-1 / MHID: 0-07-711470-1McGraw-Hill UK TitleA Professional Reference TitleA Manager’s Guide to Self-Development has become the indispensableguide for building management skills. Now in its fifthedition the book details a self-development programme aimed athelping readers improve their managerial performance, advancetheir careers and realize their full potential.NEW TO THIS EDITION• 6 new activities including find a mentor, be a good coach, treatyourself well, coping with difficult situations, effective communicationstyles, and multiple intelligence• Simplified diagnostic exercise to help you identify which are the bestactivities for you to follow• Updated references and follow up activities throughout• Improved layout designHuman ResourceManagement -TextbooksInternational EditionNEWHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT4th EditionBy H John Bernardin, Florida Atlantic University-Boca Raton2007 (March 2006) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298725-6 / MHID: 0-07-298725-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125413-7 / MHID: 0-07-125413-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bernardin4eHuman Resource Management: An Experiential Approach, ForthEdition, focuses on the enhancement of personal competencieswhile providing a theoretical and experiential approach to thestudy of human resource management (HRM). John Bernardinprovides the conceptual background and content necessary tounderstand the relevant issues in HRM, along with individualand group exercises that require the application of chapter contentto specific problems designed to develop critical personalcompetencies. Students “learn by doing” by participating in experientialexercises that require the application of HRM knowledgeexpected of practicing managers and HR generalists.68HED 2007 Management.indd 6810/5/2006 1:24:17 PM

ManagementNEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapter 2, The Role of Globalization in HR Policy and Practice,has been updated to include a discussion of Friedman’s book relatedto globalization technological advances and political forces; latestresearch on expatriates.• Chapter 3, The Legal Environment for HRM: Equal EmploymentOpportunity, has been updated on EEO laws and latest SupremeCourt rulings on affirmative action and ADEA. A new discussion of theWal*Mart sex discrimination lawsuit is included as well as an expandeddiscussion on EEO and multinational corporations.• Chapter 5, Human Resource Planning and Recruitment, has beenupdated to include information on internet recruiting, downsizing, anda new case on HR planning and recruitment.• Expanded coverage of O*NET and five factor model for career guidancehas been added to Chapter 9 on Career Development.• Chapter 10, Direct and Indirect Compensation, has an expandeddiscussion of gender wage differences, social security and pensions.• New Online Learning Center at www.mhhe.com/bernardin4e followsthe textbook chapter-by-chapter with ancillary and supplementarycontent germane to the textbook.FEATURES• Technology has been integrated into the discussion of each majorHRM function where technology has had a profound impact. Forexample: considerable space is devoted to the online revolution inpersonnel recruitment and selection and the role of the Internet andHR software in HR functions.• There is an emphasis on globalization and international business tomatch its increased importance to the HRM function. An entire chapter(2) is now devoted to global issues and the authors maintain discussionof international issues as they relate to each functional HR issue.• Critical Thinking Exercises cover some of the most important issuesof the day, including the development of an anti-terrorism policy andprocedure and whether a company should adopt a binding arbitrationagreement for all employees.• Based on course trends, the authors have placed an increasedemphasis on the implications of HRM issues and policies for generalmanagers who apply HRM policy but who also have the most to dowith the success or failure of HRM. In addition, the authors pay moreattention to the implications of HRM for small business where all HRMfunctions may rest with personnel also performing a myriad of othersmall business activities with no formal HRM training.• Exercises and discussion questions which require the student to considerequal employment opportunity laws in particular HRM contextscan still be found throughout the text.• The authors continue to offer discussion and experiential exercises onthe controversial issues of today, including affirmative action programsand sexual harassment policies.CONTENTSPreface. Part I Human Resource Management and the Environment.Chapter 1 Strategic Human Resource Management in a ChangingEnvironment. Chapter 2 The Role of Globalization in HR Policy andPractice. Chapter 3 The Legal Environment of HRM: Equal EmploymentOpportunity. Part II Acquiring Human Resource Capability. Chapter4 Work Analysis and Design. Chapter 5 Human Resource Planningand Recruitment. Chapter 6 Personnel Selection. Part III DevelopingHuman Resource Capability. Chapter 7 Performance Managementand Appraisal. Chapter 8 Training and Development. Chapter 9 CareerDevelopment. Part IV Compensating and Managing Human Resources.Chapter 10 Compensation. Chapter 11 Pay for Performance. Chapter12 Managing the Employment Relationship. Chapter 13 Labor Relationsand Collective Bargaining. Chapter 14 Employee Health and Safety.Appendix A Critical Thinking Applications. Appendix B Chapter Exercises.Appendix C Assessment Guidelines for Self, Peer, and DesignatedAssessors. Endnotes. IndexesInternational EditionNEWHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT10th EditionBy Johm M Ivancevich, University of Houston2007 (March 2006) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313711-7 / MHID: 0-07-313711-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125423-6 / MHID: 0-07-125423-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ivancevich10eIvancevich’s Human Resource Management, 10e takes a managerialorientation; that is it takes the position that HRM is relevantto managers in every unit, project, or team. Managers are constantlyfaced with HRM issues, problems, and decision-makingand the text’s primary goal is to show how each manager must bea human resource problem solver and diagnostician. This bookpays attention to the application of HRM approaches in “real”organizational settings and situations. Realism, understanding,and critical thinking were important in the revision. Studentsand faculty alike have identified readability and relevance as keystrengths of the text. It provides a book that stimulates ideas andkeeps all users up-to-date on HRM thinking and practice.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Each new edition benefits from comments, suggestions, and recommendationsoffered by colleagues, students, instructors, and HRMspecialists. Discussions with this diverse audience have resulted in newand strengthened content and content illustrations--such as :-The strategic aspects of HRM are discussed, analyzed, and used asa framework to display how the field has progressed in the last threedecades.-The diagnostic model is made more understandable and easier to graspfor students. The streamlined treatment of diagnosing is thorough, butis not dense or overwhelming.-Extensive coverage of global, technological, strategic, ethical, anddiversity issues and concepts are topics in cases, exercises, and otherchapter elements.-Legal matters are so crucial to HRM and this is emphasized in manylocations.-New research and approaches to online recruiting, staffing, selection,and training is spotlighted.-Compensation decision making and controversy is illustrated withexamples.-Many updated or new Chapter Openers, HRMemo elements in themargins are interspersed throughout the Chapters.-Ethics and ethical decisions are pointed out again and again.-Managing a career is the responsibility of each person. The career managementprocess is illustrated with examples and factual information.-The impact of information technology is presented in a number ofchapters as it gains credibility because of its efficiency.-The cost/benefit view of HRM is a common theme used in this editionFEATURES• www.mhhe.com/ivancevich10e includes a link to Human ResourcesOnline. Students stay current and expand their knowledge in the fieldof human resources by completing approximately twenty online exercisesin such areas as training and employee development, selectionand recruitment, compensation and benefits, labor relations, employeeseparation and retention, as well as training and employee development.In each exercise, students review one or more online resources, suchas articles covering a recent HR trend. They then answer some chal-69HED 2007 Management.indd 6910/5/2006 1:24:18 PM

Managementlenging questions. For the busy instructor, Human Resources Onlineincludes password-protected teaching notes that provide insights andanswers to each question.• Internet applications within the text are enhanced with the newHROnline and Business Around the World, which links directly to theleading HR magazines and professional sources. In addition, the coverageof Internet resources continues to be an important topic in this newedition. Each chapter is linked to Internet resources and include wwwaddresses with strong student appeal.• An emphasis on managerial responsibilities and actions pertainingto HRM activities is woven throughout the content and chapter elements,making the text relevant to general managers as well as humanresource majors.• Key themes have been integrated in the content and pedagogicalelements of each chapter: managing diversity, legal issues of HRM,productivity growth, globalization, impact of technology, embeddednature of TQM, strategically managing HRM, enhancing employeeskills, changing nature of work, and current examples.• Author Ivancevich uses “Legal Practical Alerts” in each chapter to citebrief legal points, cases, or facts that enhance student understanding ofthese important issues in HRM.• Each of the five parts uses a video case and discussion questions tointegrate material relevant to the participation section of the book.CONTENTSPreface. PART ONE Introduction to Human Resource Managementand the Environment. 1 Human Resource Management. 2 A StrategicManagement Approach to Human Resource Management. 3 EqualEmployment Opportunity: Legal Aspects of Human Resource Management.4 Global Human Resource Management. PART TWO AcquiringHuman Resources. 5 Human Resource Planning and Alignment. 6 JobAnalysis and Design. 7 Recruitment. 8 Selection. PART THREE RewardingHuman Resources. 9 Performance Evaluation and Management. 10Compensation: An Overview. 11 Compensation: Methods and Policies.12 Employee Benefits and Services. PART FOUR Developing HumanResources. 13 Training and Development. 14 Career Planning andDevelopment. PART FIVE 15 Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining.16 Managing Employee Discipline. 17 Promoting Safety and Health.APPENDIXES. GLOSSARY. INDEXESNEWHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN ANINTERNATIONAL CONTEXTBy Rosemary Elizabeth Lucas, Hamish Mathieson and BenjaminLupton2007 (January 2007) / 450 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-843-98109-1 / MHID: 1-843-98109-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleHuman Resource Management in Organisations identifies anddiscusses key developments within a variety of organisationsincluding the public sector, privatised utilities, Small MediumEnterprises and the not-for-profit sectors, and looks at HumanResource Management within an organisational context. Thistext is designed to cater for students taking an international HRMmodule or learning about HRM in an international context.Written primarily for MBA students and Master students onHRM or business programmes, the text gives a basic groundingin Human Resource theory and practice, and assists managersin managing their people more effectively.FEATURES• With the use of practical, real life case studies, this text providesstudents with a sound understanding of the theoretical approaches tothe management of people together with an appreciation of their applicationwithin different organisational contexts.• Designed to cater for students studying a Human Resource Managementmodule on undergraduate programmes, or postgraduateprogrammes as part of an HRM or business degree programme, itis also suitable for students taking the CIPD Managing and LeadingPeople module.• Combines HRM as the core subject area and OB in one book topresent the subjects as an integrated subject area.• Offer a critical perspective to OB and HRM issues.• Offers strong pedagogical guidance to aid student learningCONTENTSIntroduction Part 1: The Changing Context of Employment: Thechanging world of work / Managing strategic organisational change/ The link between people and organisational performance / Part 2:The Organisational Architecture of High Performance: People withinorganisations--identifying, attracting and building ability / Resourcing theorganisation / Developing ability / Motivating ability for high performance/ Managing and rewarding performance at work / Providing theopportunity for high performance / Part 3: Optimising and sustaininghigh performance: Leadership / The HR challengeInternational EditionNEWFUNDAMENTALS OF HUMAN RESOURCEMANAGEMENT2nd EditionBy Raymond Andrew Noe, Ohio State University, John R. Hollenbeck,Michigan State University—East Lansing, Barry Gerhart,University of Wisconsin — Madison and Patrick M. Wright, CornellUniversity—Ithaca2007 (December 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325794-5 / MHID: 0-07-325794-X(with OLC Code Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110855-3 / MHID: 0-07-110855-6 [IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/noefund2eFundamentals of Human Resource Management, by Noe, Hollenbeck,Gerhart and Wright is specifically written to provide acomplete introduction to human resource management. Whileit doesn’t cover the depths of human resource managementtheory, the book is rich with examples and engages studentsthrough application. Fundamentals differs from the hardbacktextbook by the same author team. Instead of a higher levelof theory that’s geared towards the HRM majors, this bookfocuses on the uses of human resources for the general businessmanager. Issues such as strategy are reduced to give agreater focus on how human resources management is used inthe everyday work environment. It provides students with thebackground necessary to manage human resources effectivelyand to be able to distinguish good from poor human resourcemanagement practices and how they impact business. Instructorsare provided with a robust ancillary package that includesa comprehensive instructor’s manual, test bank, PowerPointpresentation and a complete Online Learning Center to makecourse preparation easy.70HED 2007 Management.indd 7010/5/2006 1:24:18 PM

ManagementNEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapter 2: Trends in Human Resource Management has beenupdated to include discussions of off-shoring, Internet, e-commerce,expanded global issues, and eHRM.• New Thinking Ethically Boxes at the end of the chapters confrontsstudents with ethical issues regarding managing human resources andasks them to make and justify their decisions. For example, Kodak’sprogram to prevent harassment of gays and lesbians in its workforce,Molson Coors Brewing Company explores the topic of whether you canteach employees to be ethical through training, and the organization’sand employee’s ethical obligations when employees leave the company,the ethics of use and abuse of sick time and organizations’ policies.• New SHRM (Society of Human Resource Management) guide onlineat www.mhhe.com/noefund2e correlates sections of the SHRM examto page references in Noe Fundamentals.• New BusinessWeek Cases look at events at real companies as reportedby the nation’s number one business weekly and encourage studentsto critically evaluate each situation and apply the chapter concepts. NewBusinessWeek cases include Wipro, an Indian company that goes toextraordinary lengths to recruit and retain enough employees to meetdemand and Google’s selection methods of pre-employment testing.• End-of-Chapter Cases take another look at companies and how theirpractices illustrate and apply concepts from the chapter. These casesprovide external examples to bring into a lecture, along with questionsfor assignments or classroom discussion. Examples include IBM’s recentefforts at innovation in Chapter 2, an American company in Knoxville,TN that does custom tailoring and its struggles to find qualified tailorsthroughout the world in Chapter 5.• New Did You Know...? Boxes with general business career advicehave been added throughout the chapters. Examples include the TopTen Causes of Workplace Injuries, Downsizing, what most senior HRexecutives want HR to do for them: increase employee productivity,and the importance of first impressions in interviews.• New Manager’s Hot Seat exercises can be found online at www.mhhe.com/noefund2e These individual and group exercises correspondto the Manager’s Hot Seat DVD video segments. The video segmentshighlight scenarios that are critical to HR success. This interactive DVDis available as an optional package for students for an additional $5.• New self-assessment exercises and Internet exercises formerlyfound on the student CD-Rom are now located online at www.mhhe.com/noefund2e These hands on activities reinforce the specific chaptercontent.FEATURES• “Best Practices” boxes appear in each chapter and show specificcompany examples of what is working well. These real-world examplesillustrate actual company policies that have been successfully put inplace and help students apply chapter concepts to real-world businesspractices.• Technology is a major issue in all areas of business, and humanresource management is no exception to that rule. To underscore itsimportance, the authors include “e-HRM” boxes in each chapter to emphasizehow technology is changing the way things are getting done.• “What Do I Need to Know?” questions open each chapter. Thesethought-provoking queries bring attention to the key topics found inthe chapter and they are reinforced in the margins of the book as well.These questions are designed to motivate and to provide a map for thestudent through the chapter content.• Learning objectives and key terms with definitions are highlightedwithin the text margin where they first appear. This pedagogical tool isa useful device for test preparation and key concept review.from the chapter. The discussion questions check comprehension ofkey chapter concepts and the case materials encourage critical thinking.BusinessWeek Cases proved especially intriguing to reviewers,as instructors consistently praised the inclusion of rich materials likethese that enable them to supplement their lectures with examplesbuilt into the text.• “HR How To” boxes are found in every chapter and discuss the stepsreal companies have actually taken to creating valuable HRM programsfor their employees. This feature helps students understand the commonfunctions of human resource professionals.CONTENTSChapter 1 Managing Human Resources Part I The Human ResourceEnvironment Chapter 2 Trends in Human Resource Management Chapter3 Providing Equal Employment Opportunity and a Safe WorkplaceChapter 4 Analyzing Work and Designing Jobs Part II Acquiring andPreparing Human Resources Chapter 5 Planning for and RecruitingHuman Resources Chapter 6 Selecting Employees and Placing Themin Jobs Chapter 7 Training Employees Part III Assessing Performanceand Developing Employees Chapter 8 Managing Employees’ PerformanceChapter 9 Developing Employees for Future Success Chapter10 Separating and Retaining Employees Part IV Compensating HumanResources Chapter 11 Establishing a Pay Structure Chapter 12Recognizing Employee Contributions with Pay Chapter 13 ProvidingEmployee Benefits Part V Meeting Other HR Goals Chapter 14 CollectiveBargaining and Labor Relations Chapter 15 Managing HumanResources Globally Chapter 16 Creating and Maintaining High-PerformanceOrganizationsNEWUNDERSTANDING EMPLOYMENT RELATIONSBy Derek Rollinson, University of Huddersfield and Tony Dundon,National University of Ireland, Galway2007 (February 2007) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711486-2 / MHID: 0-07-711486-8McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/rollinsonThe text is sub-divided into four main parts, each comprisinga number of engaging and critical chapters and ending withan integrative section. This traces the links between the topicscovered in the separate chapters and across the book as awhole. Both traditional and contemporary topics are dealt withand this comprehensive approach allows the book to becomea complete teaching package in its own right.FEATURES• Integrative Sections --The text contains four integrative chapterswhich examine links between each group of chapters and across thebook as a whole. This facilities a more complete understanding ofEmployment Relations.• Comprehensive coverage --The book covers all the main topics ofEmployment Relations, including both traditional and contemporaryissues. There is a particular focus on SMEs and non-unionised organisationsas well as other hot topics such as corporate governance.• Complete teaching package --Each chapter contains a number offeatures to enrich student understanding and assimilation of topicscovered, including self-completed student exercises, short case studies,summary points boxes and review and discussion questions. This richpedagogy, full, up-to-date topic coverage and integrative learning makethis text a complete learning package.• End-of-chapter material includes chapter summary, chapter discussionquestions, Business Week cases, and other end-of-chapter cases.Summaries recap the “What Do I Need to Know?” questions from thebeginning of each chapter and simply reiterate only the key points71HED 2007 Management.indd 7110/5/2006 1:24:18 PM

ManagementCONTENTSPART 1: INTRODUCING EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS Chapter 1 TheSubject of Employment Relations Chapter 2 The Changing Contextsof Employment Relations in Great Britain Integration 1 ComparingEmployment Relations Systems PART 2: THE PARTIES IN EMPLOY-MENT RELATIONS Chapter 3 Employers, Managers and ManagementStyles Chapter 4 Trade Unions and and other Collective Associationsof Employees Chapter 5 The Role of the State in Employment RelationsIntegration 2 Integrating Parties and Contexts in EmploymentRelations PART 3: INTERPERSONAL PROCESSES IN EMPLOYMENTRELATIONS Chapter 6 Discipline and Grievance Chapter 7 Dismissaland Redundancy Integration 3 Integrating the Effects of InterpersonalProcesses PART 4: ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESSES IN EMPLOYMENTRELATIONS Chapter 8 Employee Voice Chapter 9 Collective BargainingChapter 10 Negotiation Chapter 11 Conflict and Protest in EmploymentRelations Chapter 12 Control in Employment Relations Integration 4Integrating the Effects of Organizational ProcessesNEWINTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCEMANAGEMENTBy David Simmonds, Christine Porter and Cecilie Bingham ofWestminster Business School2007 (February 2007) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711102-1 / MHID: 0-07-711102-8McGraw-Hill UK TitleThis new HRM text is a combination of the latest theory andpractice in the subject, but also includes the more innovative andunorthodox perspectives. Structured in six sections, the bookleads the reader through HRM from introduction to strategy.With a case study in each chapter and practical examples andillustrations throughout, the text is designed to be user friendlyto students and aid learning and revision. The pedagogicalfeatures not only encourage reflective learning, but also aidtutors. On-line links are also provided throughout to aid boththe students and lecturer.CONTENTSINTRODUCTION Chapter 1 What is HRM?- Context & PurposeChapter 2 Analytical Skills in HRM Chapter 3 HRM: people, perceptions,performance Chapter 4 Role of HRM/Line Manager Chapter5Communication & HRM RESOURCING Chapter 6 Recruitment &Selection Chapter 7 Performance Management & Appraisal Chapter8 Managing Internationally Mobile Personnel Chapter 9 Work-LifeBalance REWARD Chapter 10 Reward Management Systems Chapter11 Pensions RELATIONS Chapter 12 Employee Relations Chapter 13Employment Law Chapter 14 Diversity Management Chapter 15 Bullying& Stress DEVELOPMENT Chapter 16 Training & DevelopmentChatper 17 Management Development Chapter 18 Personal Developmentthrough Counselling/Mentoring/Coaching STRATEGIC ASPECTSChapter 19 Strategic HRM Chapter 20 Ethics & HRM Chapter 21Knowledge ManagementNEWAN INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCEMANAGEMENTBy Wendy Bloisi2006 (November 2006) / 688 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710968-4 / MHID: 0-07-710968-6McGraw-Hill UK TitleThis book aims to discuss the developing theories and conceptsof HRM and link them to practice through discussions in thetext and additional cases, that run as themes throughout thechapters. This will enable students to link theory to practice andalso gain an understanding of current issues in HRM, which iscurrently lacking in other leading HRM texts. The book is aimedat undergraduate level students who will be studying HRM forthe first time. This may be at undergraduate level 1, 2 or 3. Thebook would also be useful for HND students who study HRMas part of their diploma and as an introduction for Master’s studentscoming from non -management disciplines onto businesscourses. The book will be supported by an On-Line learningcentre, which will include: § A lecturer’s manual § Power pointslides relating to the key points and exhibits in the chapters. §Internet Exercises § Test bank for students § Additional test bankfor lecturers § Links to additional web based resourcesCONTENTS1) Introduction to HRM 2) Strategic Human Resource Management(SHRM) 3) HR Planning and resourcing 4) Remuneration and reward5) Retention 6) Learning, training and development 7) Managing anddeveloping performance 8)Career Management, stress and employeewelfare 9) Maintaining employee relations 10) Managing for diversity11)International issues 12) Current issues and New developmentsInternational EditionHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT8th EditionBy Lloyd L. Byars, Georgia Institute of Technology and Leslie W.Rue, Georgia State University2006 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298728-7 / MHID: 0-07-298728-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111561-2 / MHID: 0-07-111561-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/byars8eHuman Resource Management, Eighth Edition, continues topresent both the theoretical and practical aspects of HRM.The theoretical material is presented throughout the text andhighlighted via a marginal glossary. The practical aspects ofHRM are presented through lively and pedagogically effectiveexamples woven throughout the text and in the end-of-chaptermaterials. The new edition reflects changes in the business worldin general, and the HRM function within organizations, sincethe previous edition was published.CONTENTSPART 1 Introduction and Background of Human Resources Chapter 1Human Resource Management: A Strategic Function Chapter 2 EqualEmployment Opportunity: The Legal Environment Chapter 3 ImplementingEqual Employment Opportunity Chapter 4 Job Analysis andJob Design PART 2 Acquiring Human Resources Chapter 5 HumanResource Planning Chapter 6 Recruiting Employees Chapter 7 SelectingEmployees PART 3 Training and Developing Employees Chapter8 Orientation and Employee Training Chapter 9 Management andOrganizational Development Chapter 10 Career Development Chapter72HED 2007 Management.indd 7210/5/2006 1:24:18 PM

Management11 Performance Management Systems PART 4 Compensating HumanResources Chapter 12 The Organizational Reward System Chapter 13Base Wage Salary System Chapter 14 Incentive Pay Systems Chapter15 Employee Benefits Chapter 16 Employee Safety and Health Chapter17 Employee Relations PART 5 Labor Relations Chapter 18 The LegalEnvironment and Structure of Labor Unions Chapter 19 Union OrganizingCampaign and Collective BargainingInternational EditionMANAGING HUMAN RESOURCES7th EditionBy Wayne Cascio, University of Colorado, Denver2006 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298732-4 / MHID: 0-07-298732-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111564-3 / MHID: 0-07-111564-1 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cascio7eWayne Cascio’s Managing Human Resources, 7/e, is perfectfor the general management student whose job inevitably willinvolve responsibility for managing people. It explicitly linksthe relationship between productivity, quality of work life,and profits to various human resource management activitiesand, as such, strengthens the students’ perception of humanresource management as an important function, which affectsindividuals, organizations, and society. It is research-based andcontains strong links to the applicability of this research to realbusiness situations.CONTENTSPart I ENVIRONMENT Chapter 1: Human Resources in a GloballyCompetitive Business Environment Chapter 2: The Financial Impact ofHuman Resource Management Activities Chapter 3: The Legal Contextof Employment Decisions Chapter 4: Diversity At Work Part II EMPLOY-MENT Chapter 5: Analyzing Work and Planning for People Chapter6: Recruiting Chapter 7: Staffing Part III DEVELOPMENT Chapter 8:Workplace Training Chapter 9: Performance Management Chapter10: Managing Careers Part IV COMPENSATION Chapter 11: Payand Incentive Systems Chapter 12: Indirect Compensation: EmployeeBenefit Plans Part V LABOR-MANAGEMENT ACCOMMODATIONChapter 13: Union Representation and Collective Bargaining Chapter14: Procedural Justice and Ethics in Employee Relations Part VI SAFETY,HEALTH, AND INTERNATIONAL IMPLICATIONS Chapter 15: Safety,Health, and Employee Assistance Programs Chapter 16: InternationalDimensions of Human Resource ManagementInternational EditionHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENTGaining a Competitive Advantage, 5th EditionBy Raymond Noe, Ohio State University, John Hollenbeck, MichiganState University -East Lansing, Barry Gerhart, University of Wisconsin- Madison and Patrick Wright - Cornell University — Ithaca2006 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313194-8 / MHID: 0-07-313194-6(with OLC Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111814-9 / MHID: 0-07-111814-4[IE with OLC Card]Website: http://mhhe.com/noe5eAs competitors strive to win the war for talent, effective humanresource management is necessary to gain true competitiveadvantage in the marketplace. Three challenges companiesface are sustainability, technology, and globalization. HumanResource Management 5th Edition brings these challenges tolife by highlighting real-world examples pertaining to theseissues and relating it to the concepts within the chapter. Thisbest-selling McGraw-Hill/Irwin Human Resource Managementtitle provides students with the technical background needed tobe a knowledgeable consumer of human resource (HR) productsand services, to manage HR effectively, or to be a successful HRprofessional. While clearly strategic in nature, the text also emphasizeshow managers can more effectively acquire, develop,compensate, and manage the internal and external environmentthat relates to the management of human resources.CONTENTSChapter 1 Human Resource Management: Gaining a Competitive AdvantagePART 1 The Human Resource Environment Chapter 2 StrategicHuman Resource Management Chapter 3 The Legal Environment: EqualEmployment Opportunity and Safety Chapter 4 The Analysis and Designof Work PART 2 Acquisition and Preparation of Human ResourcesChapter 5 Human Resource Planning and Recruitment Chapter 6Selection and Placement Chapter 7 Training PART 3 Assessment andDevelopment of HRM Chapter 8 Performance Management Chapter 9Employee Development Chapter 10 Employee Separation and RetentionPART 4 Compensation of Human Resources Chapter 11 Pay StructureDecisions Chapter 12 Recognizing Employee Contributions withPay Chapter 13 Employee Benefits PART 5 Special Topics in HumanResource Management Chapter 14 Collective Bargaining and LaborRelations Chapter 15 Managing Human Resources Globally Chapter16 Strategically Managing the HRM Function / Glossary / Photo Credits/ Name and Company Index / Subject IndexHUMAN RESOURCE AND PERSONNELMANAGEMENT4th EditionBy Aswathappa, Canara Bank School of Management Studies2005 / 712 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-059930-7 / MHID: 0-07-059930-0Tata McGraw-Hill TitleAn indispensable text for all business management and commercestudents and teachers. A useful reference resource forprofessionals. This well-received book has been revised to keepit up to date, by including recent information, concepts andpractices of importance in the subject area. As the earlier edition,this edition too discusses the concepts in the context of Indianbusiness environment. NEW AND EXPANDED SECTIONS:HRM in the BPO industry; ethics as a challenge in HRM; relationshipof HRM with productivity and quality; job enrichmentand design; performance appraisal and competitive advantageOrganisational communication; burnout and stress management;participative management Eliticism and EgalitarianismPEDAGOGICAL FEATURES: Learning Objectives; ChapterOpening Cases; Chapter Summary; Key Terms Review Questions;Discussion Questions; Chapter Closing CasesCONTENTSSECTION ONE 1. Nature and Scope of Human Resource Management2. Environment of Human Resource Management 3. Strategic HumanResource Management SECTION TWO 4. Human Resource Planning5. Job Analysis and Design 6. Recruitment 7. Selection 8. Orientationand Placement SECTION THREE 9. Training and Development 10.Performance Appraisal and Job Evaluation 11. Employee Remuneration12. Incentive Payments 13. Employee Benefits and Services 14. ExecutiveRemuneration SECTION FOUR 15. Basic Motivation Concepts 16.Application of Concepts of Motivation 17. Participative Management 18.Employee Communication SECTION FIVE 19. Employee Welfare 20.Safety and Health 21. Promotions, Transfers and Separations SECTIONSIX 22. Industrial Relations 23. Trade Unions 24. Disputes and theirResolution. SECTION SEVEN. 25. Ethical Issues in Human ResourceManagement. 26. Human Resource Audit. 27. Challenges of HumanResource Management. 28. International Human Resource Management.Bibliography. Organisation and Name Index. Subject Index73HED 2007 Management.indd 7310/5/2006 1:24:19 PM

ManagementHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN AUSTRALIA2nd EditionBy De Cieri, Monash University and Kramar, Macquarie University2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471492-8 / MHID: 0-07-471492-9McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/decieri2eThe latest edition of the bestseller Human Resource Managementin Australia offers lecturers and students the strongestproduct in the market. De Cieri and Kramar emphasise theimportance of strategic human resource management (HRM),and the links between strategy, people and performance.Students thereby understand the relationship between HRMpractices, a company’s business objectives, and the use ofHRM as a means to create value and competitive advantage.New chapters on occupational health and safety, ethics and thelegal environment of HRM ensure readers are kept informed ofthe most current issues affecting these areas. New and extensivecase studies at the end of each chapter make this a trulyengaging edition. Even more exciting are the new video cases,developed specially for this edition - a first for a book of thistype in the Australian market.CONTENTSPart One: Managing the human resource environment Chapter 1Human resource management in Australia Chapter 2 Strategic humanresource management Chapter 3 The legal context for human resourcemanagement Chapter 4 Occupational health and safety Chapter 5Industrial relations Part Two: Building human resource managementsystems Chapter 6 Analysis and design of work Chapter 7 Humanresource planning and human resource information systems Chapter8 Recruitment and selection Part Three: Developing people Chapter9 Managing diversity and work–life balance Chapter 10 Performancemanagement Chapter 11 Employee learning Chapter 12 Employeedevelopment and career management Part Four: Rewarding peopleChapter 13 Managing compensation Chapter 14 Performance-relatedpay Part Five: Contemporary issues for human resource managementChapter 15 Ethics and human resource management Chapter 16 Internationalhuman resource management Chapter 17 Managing employeeturnover and retention Chapter 18 Evaluating and improving the humanresource functionAUSTRALIAN HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENTBy Jeremy Seward, Sunraysia TAFE and La Trobe University and TimDein, NSW TAFE2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471330-3 / MHID: 0-07-471330-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471883-4 / MHID: 0-07-471883-5 (Software)McGraw-Hill Australia TitleAustralian Human Resources Management is the only humanresourcestext written specifically for the TAFE market andmapping to the competencies of the new Business ServicesTraining Package. As a VET-styled text, it takes a learning-centredapproach to ensure the needs of all students are met viaan easy readability, practical work-place focus and hands-onapproach.CONTENTSChapter 1: HRM: Past, Present and Future Chapter 2: AdministeringHR Policies and Procedures Chapter 3: Administering Employee NeedsChapter 4: Consultancy Chapter 5: Recruitment Chapter 6: Selecting andKeeping the Right Employee Chapter 7: Appraising Employee PerformanceChapter 8: The Environment for Performance Chapter 9: AustralianIndustrial Laws and Practices Chapter 10: Industrial and OccupationalLaws and Regulations / Glossary / IndexHUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN ASIABy John M. Ivancevich, University of Houston and Lee Soo Hoon,Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute2002 / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-120173-5 / MHID: 0-07-120173-4An Asian PublicationCONTENTSPart 1: Introduction to HRM / Chapter 1: Human Resource Management/ Chapter 2: A Strategic Human Resource Management: A DiagnosticApproach / Part 2: Securing Human Resources / Chapter 3: HumanResource Planning and Succession Planning / Chapter 4: Job Analysisand Design / Chapter 5: Recruitment / Chapter 6: Selection / Part 3:Developing Human Resources / Chapter 7: Orientation, Training andDevelopment / Chapter 8: Career Planning and Development / Part 4:Rewarding Human Resources / Chapter 9: Performance Management /Chapter 10: Compensation / Chapter 11: Pay-for-Performance / Chapter12: Employee Benefits and Services / Part 5: Maintaining Labor-ManagementRelations / Chapter 13: Legal Aspects of Human ResourceManagement / Chapter 14: Employee Relations / Part 6: InternationalHRM and Evaluation / Chapter 15: International Human ResourceManagement / Chapter 16: Evaluating Human Resource ManagementFunction / Appendix A: Measuring Human Resource Activities / AppendixB: Source of Information about Human Resource Management/ Appendix C: Career Planning / IndexInternational EditionHUMAN RESOURCE AND PERSONNELMANAGEMENT5th EditionBy William Werther, Jr., University of Miami and Keith Davis,Arizona State University1996 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-069572-6 / MHID: 0-07-069572-5 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123218-0 / MHID: 0-07-123218-4 [IE]CONTENTSPART 1: FRAMEWORKS AND CHALLENGES 1. The Human ResourceFramework 2. Environmental Challenges 3. International Challenges4. Equal Employment Challenges PART 2: PREPARATION AND SE-LECTION 5. Job analysis and Design 6. Human Resource Planning7. Recruitment 8. Selection PART 3: DEVELOPMENT AND EVALU-ATION 9. Orientation, Placement, and Separation 10. Training andDevelopment 11. Career Planning 12. Performance Appraisal PART4: COMPENSATION AND PROTECTION 13. Wages and Salaries 14.Incentives and Gainsharing 15. Benefits and Services 16. Security, Safetyand Health PART 5: EMPLOYEE RELATIONS AND ASSESSMENT 17.Employee relations Challenges 18. Union-Management Relations 19.Assessment and ProspectsINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg74HED 2007 Management.indd 7410/5/2006 1:24:19 PM

Human Resource Management- SupplementsHuman ResourceStrategyManagementNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN RESOURCES 06/0716th EditionBy Fred Maidment, Western Connecticut State University2007 (March 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352838-0 / MHID: 0-07-352838-2McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073528382.mhtmlThis sixteenth edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN RE-SOURCES provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected World WideWeb sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; ageneral introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topicalindex; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered asa practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles aresupported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSUnit 1: Human Resource Management in Perspective. Part A. The Environmentof Human Resource Management. 1. The Changing Workforce.2. Business Partners. 3. Numbers Games. 4. HR is Dead, Long Live HR.Part B. Human Resources and Corporate Strategy. 5. Strange Bedfellows.6. Understanding HRM-firm Performance Linkages: The Role ofthe “Strength” of the HRM System. Part C. Americans with DisabilitiesAct. 7. Unquiet Minds. 8. The Devil is in the Details. 9. The ADA’s NextStep: Cyberspace. Part D. Sexual Harassment. 10. Not in My Company:Preventing Sexual Harassment. Part E. 9/11 and the War on Terror. 11.Some of “Our Boys Overseas” have Gray Hair. 12. The Aesthetics ofSecurity. Unit 2: Meeting Human Resource Requirements. Part A. JobRequirements. 13. Too Old to Work. Part B. Human Resources Planning,Selection, and Recruitment. 14. Human Resources Planning, Selection,and Recruitment. 14. Can you Interview for Integreity? 15. Brain Drain.Part C. Human Resource Information Systems. 16. Tomorrow’s World.Unit 3: Creating a Productive Work Environment. Part A. MotivatingEmployees. 17. The Future of Work Motivation Theory. 18. BullyingNot Just for Schoolyard Anymore. Part B. Facilitating Communications.19. Managing in the New Millennium, Interpersonal Skills. 20. ManagingEmployee Relations. 21. Fear of Feedback. Unit 4: DevelopingEffective Human Resources. Part A. Training Employees. 22. What todo about E-dropouts. 23. Who’s Next? Part B. Career and Staff Development.24. Hot Careers for the Next 10 Years. Part C. PerformanceAppraisal. 25. Seven Habits of Spectacularly Unsuccessful Executives.Part D. Diversity in the Workplace. 26. Equality’s Latest Frontier. 27.The Conundrum of the Glass Ceiling. 28. The Draw of Diversity. Unit5: Implementing Compensation, Benefits, and Workplace Safety. PartA. Managing Employee Compensation. 29. Philosophizing Compensation.30. Merging Compensation Strategies. Part B. Incentive Compensation.31. Better Carrots? 32. Ten Steps to Designing an EffectiveIncentive Program. Part C. Executive Pay. 33. Executive Compensation:Are Some Paid Too Much? Part D. Health and Safety. 34. Doc in theBox. 35. Building a Mentally Healthy Workforce. Part E Benefits. 36.The Battle Over Benefits. 37. Fringe Benefits: Employer Gifts. Unit 6:Fostering Employee/Management Relationships. Part A Dynamics ofLabor Relations, Collective Bargaining, and Contract Administration. 38.Losing Its Grip. Part B. Disciplinary Action. 39. The ABC’s of EmployeeDiscipline. 40. Hard-core Offenders. Part C. Temporary and Part-TimeEmployees. 41. Interns on the Payroll. Part D. Ethics. 42. The Moralityof Time. 43. Accounting for Corporate Behavior. Unit 7. InternationalHuman Resource Management. 44. Globalization and the AmericanLabor Force. 45. Immigration and the U.S. Economy: The Public’sPerspective. 46. Learning From Our Overseas Counterparts. 47. SexualHarassment in the European Union: The Dawning of a New Era. 48.Don’t Settle for Less: Global Compensation Programs Need GlobalCompensation Tools.International EditionHUMAN RESOURCE STRATEGYA Behavioral Perspective for the General ManagerBy George Dreher, Indiana University - Bloomington and Thomas WDougherty, University of Missouri - Columbia2001 / 456 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-21189-4 / MHID: 0-256-21189-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118111-2 / MHID: 0-07-118111-3 [IE]CONTENTSPart 1: Understanding Behavior in Organizations: Basic TheoreticalOrientations Chapter 1 The Effective Management of People: An Introductionand Point-of-View Chapter 2 Some Basic Theory about Ability,Motivation, and Opportunity Part 2: Human Resource Systems: Whatthe General Manager Should Know Chapter 3: Human Resource Systems:A Look at the Possibilities Chapter 4: Reward and CompensationSystems Chapter 5: Staffing Systems Chapter 6: Employee and CareerDevelopment Systems Chapter 7: Performance Management SystemsPart 3: Aligning HR with Business Strategy Chapter 8: The Link to BusinessStrategy and Firm Performance Chapter 9: Sustained CompetitiveAdvantage through Inimitable HR Practices Chapter 10: Domestic andInternational Labor Markets Chapter 11: The Equal Employment andLabor Relations Environment Part 4: Designing HR Systems for SpecificBusiness Situations Illustration 1: HR Systems for the Customer ContactTier Illustration 2: HR Systems for TQM-Oriented Manufacturing TeamsIllustration 3: HR Systems for Financial Services Sales Illustration 4: HRSystems for Project-Development Teams: Writing for Television Illustration5: HR Systems for Marketing Managers in AsiaInternational EditionHUMAN RESOURCE STRATEGYBy James W Walker, The Walker Group1992 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-067846-0 / MHID: 0-07-067846-4 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112889-6 / MHID: 0-07-112889-1 [IE]CONTENTS1. Introduction. 2. Focusing on Human Resource Issues. 3. DevelopingHuman Resource Strategies. 4. Shaping Expectations. 5. Designing theFuture Organization. 6. Strategic Staffing. 7. Developing EmployeeTalent. 8. Developing Management Talent for the Future. 9. ProvidingResources for Performance. 10. Evaluating Performance. 11. Recognizingand Rewarding Performance. 12. Managing the Human ResourceFunction. 13. Evaluating Results in Managing Human Resources.75HED 2007 Management.indd 7510/5/2006 1:24:19 PM

ManagementInternational EditionStaffingSTAFFING ORGANIZATIONS5th EditionBy Herbert Heneman III, University of Wisconsin - Madison andTimothy Judge, University of Iowa2006 / 744 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298722-5 / MHID: 0-07-298722-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124450-3 / MHID: 0-07-124450-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/heneman5eHeneman and Judge’s Staffing, 5th Edition, is based on a comprehensivestaffing model. Components of the model includestaffing models and strategy, staffing support systems (legalcompliance, planning, job analysis and rewards), core staffingsystems (recruitment, selection, employment), and staffingsystem and retention management. Up-to-date research andbusiness practices are the hallmarks of this market leading text.In-depth applications (cases and exercises) at the end of chaptersprovide students with skill-building and practice in key staffingactivities and decision-making. A comprehensive running caseinvolving a fictitious retailing organization provides even greateropportunity for in-depth analysis and skill building. Studentsalso have the opportunity to address ethical issues at the endof each chapter.CONTENTSPart One; The Nature of Staffing Chapter 1 Staffing Models and StrategyPart Two; Support Activities Chapter 2 Legal Compliance Chapter3 Planning Chapter 4 Job Analysis and Rewards Part Three; StaffingActivities: Recruitment Chapter 5 External Recruitment Chapter 6Internal Recruitment Part Four; Staffing Activities: Selection Chapter7 Measurement Chapter 8 External Selection I Chapter 9 External SelectionII Chapter 10 Internal Selection Part Five; Staffing Activities:Employment Chapter 11 Decision Making Chapter 12 Final Match PartSix; Staffing System and Retention Management Chapter 13 StaffingSystem Management Chapter 14 Retention ManagementRECRUITING EXCELLENCEAn insiders guide to sourcing top talentBy Jeff Grout and Sarah Perrin2005 / 256 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711121-2 / MHID: 0-07-711121-4 (Softcover)McGraw-Hill UK TitleA Professional Reference TitleYou want to fill your company with smart ideas, fill it with greatpeople. In times of boom or bust, it is the people that providecompetitive advantage. Recruiting excellence explains how thedynamics of the modern work place have changed, and how thishas impacted on recruiting strategies. Split into three sections,Part one takes a step back, looking at the strategic environment:the candidate’s agenda, changing employment market,employer branding, alternative means of sourcing new recruitsand alternatives to taking more staff on board. Part two takes apractical look at recruitment – addressing the process, use ofconsultancies, headhunters, advertising, CV’s and applicationforms. It also explains the psychometric texts, their use andeffectiveness. It gives tips on interviewing and the final selection.Part three – After the selection- examines making the offer,probationary period and how to retain the key recruits.CONTENTSIntroduction: People are your powerhouse Part I: The strategic environmentChapter 1 The Business Agenda Chapter 2: The Candidate’sAgenda Chapter 3: Strategies for Successful Recruitment Chapter 4:Alternative sourcing Chapter 5: Alternatives to recruitment Chapter6: Common recruitment failings Part II: Practical Recruiting Chapter 7:The recruitment process Chapter 8: Calling in the cavalry: Recruitmentconsultancies Chapter 9: Effective advertising Chapter 10: CVs andapplication forms Chapter 11: Testing times Chapter 12: Interviewing:technique tips Chapter 13: Interviewing: effective questioning Chapter14: The final selection Part III: After selection: Getting the best fromrecruits Chapter 15: Making the offer Chapter 16: Effective on boardingChapter 17: Re-recruitment Chapter 18: FiringNEWCompensationCOMPENSATION9th EditionBy George Milkovich, Cornell University-Ithaca and Jerry Newman,Suny Buffalo2008 (April 2007) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296941-2 / MHID: 0-07-296941-5Website: http://www.mhhe.com/milkovich9e(Details unavailable at press time)International EditionCOMPENSATION8th EditionBy George Milkovich, Cornell University - Ithaca and Jerry Newman,SUNY-Buffalo2005 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287543-0 / MHID: 0-07-287543-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123928-8 / MHID: 0-07-123928-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/milkovich8eCOMPENSATION, 8th Edition, by Milkovich and Newman isthe market-leading text in this course area. It offers instructor’scurrent research material, in depth discussion of topics, integrationof Internet coverage, excellent pedagogy, and a trulyengaging writing style. George Milkovich and Jerry Newmanare leading authorities in the field of Human Resource Managementand Compensation. They consult with leading businesses,have won teaching awards, publish in the leading journals.Milkovich received a career contribution award from Worldat-Work (formerly American Compensation Association) in 2000.COMPENSATION, 8th Edition, examines the strategic choicesin managing total compensation. The total compensation modelintroduced in chapter one serves as an integrating frameworkthroughout the book. The authors discuss major compensationissues in the context of current theory, research, and real-businesspractices. Milkovich and Newman strive to differentiatebetween beliefs and opinions from facts and scholarly research.They showcase practices that illustrate new developments incompensation practices as well as established approaches tocompensation decisions. Time after time, adopters relay storiesof students getting job offers based on the knowledge theylearned from this book.76HED 2007 Management.indd 7610/5/2006 1:24:20 PM

ManagementCONTENTSChapter 1 - The Pay Model Chapter 2 - Strategic Perspectives Part 1- Internal Alignment: Determining the Structure Chapter 3 - DefiningInternal Alignment Chapter 4 - Job Analysis Chapter 5 - Evaluating Work:Job Evaluation Chapter 6 - Person-Based Structures Part 2 - ExternalCompetitiveness: Determining the Pay Level Chapter 7 - Defining CompetitivenessChapter 8 - Designing Pay Levels, Mix, and Pay StructuresPart 3 - Employee Contributions: Determine Individual Pay Chapter 9- Pay for Performance: The Evidence Chapter 10 - Pay for PerformancePlans Chapter 11 - Performance Appraisals Part 4 - Employee BenefitsChapter 12 - The Benefits Determination Process Chapter 13 - BenefitOptions Part 5 - Extending the System Chapter 14 - Compensation ofSpecial Groups Chapter 15 - Union Role in Wage and Salary AdministrationChapter 16 - International Pay Systems Part 6 - Managing theSystem Chapter 17 - Government and Legal Issues in CompensationChapter 18 - Budgets and AdministrationNEWTraining and DevelopmentEMPLOYEE TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT4th EditionBy Raymond Andrew Noe, Ohio State University-Columbus2008 (November 2006) / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340490-5 / MHID: 0-07-340490-XWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/etd4eRaymond Noe’s Employee Training and Development setsthe standard in this course area. First introduced in 1998, ETDbecame the market-defining text within 6 months of publication.Its popularity is due to the lively writing style and inspiringexamples of the most up-to-date developments in training,research and in practice, including the strategic role of trainingand the use of new technologies in training. Employee Trainingand Development strikes a balance between research and realcompany practices. It provides students with a solid backgroundin the fundamentals of training and development includingneeds assessment, transfer of training, designing a learningenvironment, methods, and evaluation.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Each chapter is updated to include the most recent research findingsand new best company practices. New examples have been added ineach chapter.• New and expanded coverage of topics such as outsourcing training,business embedded training function, intangible assets and humancapital, and implications for the aging workforce for training and development.New technologies in training including iPods and avatarsare also addressed.• Training and Development from the Pages of Business Week is anew feature found on the book’s website at www.mhhe.com/etd4e.This feature includes Business Week articles discussing current companytraining and development practices. Each article is accompaniedby a series of questions that can be used for student discussion and/orwritten assignment.FEATURES• Shows theory and research in practice--Each chapter begins witha vignette of a company practice that relates to the material coveredin the chapter. More examples of company practices are providedthroughout the chapters.• Devotes an entire chapter to the use of new technologies in training,including online learning, blended learning, iPods and Personal DataAssistants (PDAs). This reflects the profound way that technology hasinfluenced training practice.• Emphasizes good instructional design. Introduced early as a concept,the importance of good design is supported in later chapters ontraditional training methods, new technology in training, development,careers emphasize that needs assessment, link to business strategy andgoals, design, and evaluation.• Addresses strategic training early in the book. Successful training effortsrelate to business goals and strategy. This is a particularly importantfor students with a non-business background (such as psychology andeducation majors) who go on to become trainers. They need to understandthe strategic perspective and how it relates to the organization ofthe training function and the type of training conducted.• Pedagogically sound and current, with chapter openers, objectives,key terms, additional discussion questions, and assignments includingweb-based exercises. Timely examples of real company practices makeETD the most current text on the market.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction to Employee Training and Development Chapter2 Strategic Training Chapter 3 Needs Assessment Chapter 4 Learning:Theories and Program Design Chapter 5 Transfer of Training Chapter6 Training Evaluation Chapter 7 Traditional Training Methods Chapter8 E-Learning and Use of Technology in Training Chapter 9 EmployeeDevelopment Chapter 10 Special Issues in Training and EmployeeDevelopment Chapter 11 Careers and Career Management Chapter 12Special Challenges in Career Management Chapter 13 The Future ofTraining and Development / Glossary / Name Index / Company Index/ Subject IndexLabor Relations & CollectiveBargainingInternational EditionNEWLABOR RELATIONSStriking a Balance, 2nd EditionBy John Budd, University of Minnesota2008 (December 2006) / 578 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340489-9 / MHID: 0-07-340489-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110090-8 / MHID: 0071100903 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/budd2e(Details unavailable at press time)• New and updated web-based application assignments are includedat the end of each chapter, and are also found on the book’s website,where they can be updated and new web exercises can be added.77HED 2007 Management.indd 7710/5/2006 1:24:20 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWINTRODUCTION TO COLLECTIVE BARGAININGAND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS4th EditionBy Harry Katz, Cornell University - Ithaca and Thomas A Kochan,Massachusetts Institute of Tech.2008 (March 2007) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313715-5 / MHID: 0-07-313715-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07125425-0 / MHID: 0-07-125425-0 [IE]NEW TO THIS EDITION• Separate chapter on comparative and internationl issues, discussionof international industrial relations developments and pressures createdby multinational corporations.• New material on collective bargaining in the public sector arehighlighted• By examining the influence of business and union strategies onindustrial relations this book provides a broader focus then most otherintroductory texts. It is important to understand how these functionscontribute to the challenges of the labor movement.FEATURES• Related Web Sites section at the end of each chapter directs studentsand instructors to the companies, unions, or other organizations mentionedwithin the chapter.• New and improved coverage of current research and relevant eventsare found within the text discussion and the boxes which appearthroughout the text.• The text is organized around the three tier strategic choice frameworkthat the authors (along with their colleague Robert McKersie) madefamous in the award winning book, The Transformation of AmericanIndustrial Relations.NEWCASES IN COLLECTIVE BARGAINING ANDINDUSTRIAL RELATIONS11th EditionBy David Dilts, Indiana University and Raymond Hilgert,Washington University-St Louis2007 (June 2006) / 360 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298736-2 / MHID: 0-07-298736-7Cases in Collective Bargaining and Industrial Relations contains81 cases that vary in length, complexity and numbers of issues.A major objective of the book is to provide a means by whichstudents can apply principles, concepts, and legal considerationsto actual decision situations and confrontations between laborand management. These cases have been tested in seminarsand classes, and are challenging, fascinating learning instruments.As in previous editions, the cases are divided into twoparts. Part One presents National Labor Relations Board casesas restructured from published reports of the NLRB and courtdecisions. Part Two consists of cases adapted from grievancearbitrationdecisions.CONTENTSPart One: Legal Aspects of Collective Bargaining: National Labor RelationsBoard Cases / Introduction to the Labor Management RelationsAct (LMRA) / Selected Bibliography / Partial Text of the Labor ManagementRelations Act, 1947 / Index to Cases for Part One / 1. ImproperInterference with Union’s Freedom of Speech 2. Supervisor or Memberof Bargaining Unit? 3. Jurisdiction of the NLRB over a GovernmentContractor 4. Surveillance of the Employee and Nonemployee UnionOrganizers 5. Withholding a Wage Increase Prior to a RepresentationalElection 6. Independent Contractors or Employees? A Company’s Refusalto Bargain 7. On the Dole: A Refusal to Bargain with a Properly CertifiedUnion 8. Racial/Ethnic Prejudice during a Union RepresentationalElection 9. Waiver to Arbitrate or Unlawful Refusal? 10. Claim of anInability to Pay Wage Demands: What is Bargaining in Good Faith?11. Was the Employee Involvement Committee a Violation of LaborLaw? 12. A Penny Saved Was a Warning Not Earned 13. Terminationfor Failure to Report Accident or for Solicitation of Employees 14.Causes for Discharge: A Game of Ladders and Questions 15. Dischargefor Disruptive Conduct, or for Protected Union Activity? 16. Was theESOP Leveraged Buyout Proposal Protected Concerted Activity? 17.The Distasteful and Offensive Definition of a “Scab” 18. Deferral to anExisting Arbitration Award: Just Cause or Protected Activity? 19. Did theEmployee Have the Right to Have a Union Representative Present? 20.Was Changing the Christmas Bonus Formula an Unfair Labor Practice?21. Payment of a Signing Bonus to Nonstriking Employees 22. CrossingPicket Lines: Union’s Right to Discipline? 23. Voluntary ParticipationPrograms and Union Discipline 24. Threats and Insubordination, orPerforming a Shop Steward’s Job? 25. Judicial Review of the NLRB’s“Punitive” Remedy Concerning the Health Care Plan 26. The Enforcementof No-Solicitation Rules: A Real Whopper 27. Management Teamsor Employee Involvement Committees: Authority to Put a Cork in It 28.The Company’s Refusal to Provide a List of Disciplinary Work Rules29. The Obligation to Reduce the Agreement to a Written Contract30. Information Requests and the Duty to Bargain Collectively: NotMickey Mouse 31. A Presumption of Union Interference During aDecertification Election 32. Threatening the Union Dissidents 33. TheGrievance-Processing Fee for Nonmembers in a Right-to-Work State 34.The Union’s Letter to Nonmember Employees Who Crossed the PicketLine 35. Resignation from the Union and Checkoff of Dues 36. Werethe Union’s Grievances an Unlawful Secondary Boycott? 37. WhoseWork is it? Case of a Jurisdictional Dispute 38. How Do I Get My Cookies?Information Requests to the Contract Part Two: Case Problems inUnion-Management Relations: Cases from Grievance Arbitration /Conflict Resolution, Grievance Procedures, and Arbitration / SelectedBibliography /Index to Cases for Part Two / 39. Who Should Maintainthe Parks and Ballfields? 40. Health Insurance Coverage UnilaterallyChanged by Public Employer 41. A Changed Remedy for Misassignments42. Probation for the Teacher 43. Appeal to Arbitration: A DayLate? 44. Denial of the Safety Incentive Prize 45. Demoted or Reclassified?46. Voluntary Resignation or Layoff? 47. The Doubtful Worker48. The Recalled Management Trainee 49. The Right to Bid Down 50.Taking Care of Union Business 51. Sick Leave for Adoption Care 52.An Issue of Reasonable Accommodation 53. Refusal to Post the Union’sMemorandum 54. Terminated for Possessing a Gun 55. Are TeachersObliged to Supervise Students in the Cafeteria? 56. Anti-Arab Comments:Cause for Discipline? 57. Abuse of a Senior Citizen Resident 58. Abilityand Seniority for Promotion: Which Controls? 59. Company Picnic:Employee Benefit or Gratuity 60. An Error in Equalizing the Overtime61. Forced to Work on a Holiday 62. Full Consideration to Seniorityand Qualifications 63. No Accommodation without an Examination64. Last Chance Violation: Strike Three or Overreaction? 65. HealthInsurance Benefits for Same-Sex Domestic Partners 66. Arbitrabilityof the Scheduling Past Practice 67. How Should the Lead Skycap beSelected? 68. Post-Reinstatement Drug Testing 69. Conflict of InterestRules and Discharge for News Photographer 70. Sickness and AccidentBenefits Denied 71. Self-Defense or Excessive Use of Force 72. EgregiousHorseplay73. No Reporting Pay 74. Who Decides if an Employee isUnable to Work? 75. Internet Kiddie Pornography at Work: Just Causefor Discharge? 76. Unilateral Changes to the Absence Control Policy77. Wage Concession: Contract Violation or Authorized Wage Freeze?78. Layoff of the Higher-Seniority Employees 79. Cash Same as Stock?The Case of the 401k Contributions 80. Vacation, or Layoff, During aShutdown 81. Discharge for Job Abandonment?78HED 2007 Management.indd 7810/5/2006 1:24:20 PM

ManagementInternational EditionLABOR RELATIONS9th EditionBy John Fossum, University of Minnesota2006 / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298713-3 / MHID: 0-07-298713-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124441-1 / MHID: 0-07-124441-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fossum9eLabor Relations: Development, Structure, Processes discussesthe history and development of labor relations, the structure ofunion organizations, union organizing and union avoidance,bargaining issues, and the process of negotiations and contractadministration. As a result of decreasing union membership overthe last twenty years, more material in the book addresses employeerelations in nonunion organizations including examplesof both cooperative and adversarial relationships.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Evolution of American LaborChapter 3 Labor Law and Federal Agencies Chapter 4 Union Structureand Government Chapter 5 Unions: Member and Leader Attitudes,Behaviors, and Political Activities Chapter 6 Union Organizing CampaignsChapter7 Union Avoidance: Rationale, Strategies, and PracticesChapter 8 The Environment for Bargaining Chapter 9 Wage and BenefitIssues in Bargaining Chapter 10 Nonwage Issues in Bargaining Chapter11 Contract Negotiations Chapter 12 Impasses and Their ResolutionChapter 13 Union-Management Cooperation Chapter 14 Contract AdministrationChapter 15 Grievance ArbitrationChapter 16 Public-SectorLabor Relations Chapter 17 A Survey of Labor Relations in DevelopedMarket EconomiesLabor Relations be Less Adversarial? New! 14. The Developing Law ofNeutrality Agreements New! 15. Who Will Fold First? New! 16. E-Organizing,The Next Frontier? Labor Unions Seek Access to Company E-mailSystem New! 17. PC Use at Home and for Union Organizing—NewChallenges in the Wired Workplace New! 18. Collective Bargainingis the Right Step New! 19. Up Against Wal-Mart New! 20. RollbackWAGES! Will Labor Take the Wal-Mart Challenge? New! 21. Street Corner,Incorporated UNIT 3. Labor-Management Contract NegotiationsNew! 22. Labor Contract Negotiations in the Airline Industry New! 23.Process, Strategy, and Tactics in Labor-Management Mediation New!24. Tortilla Flap New! 25. Labor Adversaries Bury the Hatchet New! 26.The New Deal New! 27. Labor and Management Build a Prescriptionfor Health New! 28. Deauthorization and Decertification Elections: AnAnalysis and Comparison of Trends UNIT 4. Dispute Resolution andAdministering the Relationship New! 29. Psychological Contracts inthe Workplace: Understanding the Ties That Motivate New! 30. GoodManagement/Union Relations can be a Sweet Deal New! 31. MendingLabor-Management Relationships New! 32. Nature vs. Nurture New! 33.Quaker Oats Co. New! 34. Ambiguities in Labor Contracts: Where doThey Come From? New! 35. Minimizing the Likelihood of EmploymentLitigation New! 36. The Pivotal Role of Labor-Management CommitteesNew! 37. Behavioral Safety: A Necessary Part of the Whole New! 38.Delphi Gets a Handle on Hand Protection New! 39. Union Liability inDiscrimination Cases New! 40. Dispatches from Decatur: Communityis the First Casualty in America’s Labor Wars UNIT 5. Public SectorCollective Bargaining New! 41. Making Labor-Management RelationsIntegral to the Management Process New! 42. Union Monopoly is Badfor Teachers New! 43. Trade Unions: The Facts UNIT 6. InternationalCollective Bargaining New! 44. Taming the Tigers New! 45. Shut Upor Die! New! 46. Employment Tribunals: Using Your Last Resort New!47. The “Race to the Bottom” in Imported Clothes UNIT 7. The Futureof Labor Union Movement in the United States New! 48. Are UnionsObsolete? Neuhaus v. O’Connor on Labor New! 49. A Proposal for aTwenty-First-Century Trade Union Education League: An Attempt toSolve the Crisis of Organizing the Unorganized New! 50. The WorkingPoor in 2001ANNUAL EDITIONS: LABOR MANAGEMENTRELATIONS 05/06By Kim Overby, Elwyn Inc.2006 / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310917-6 / MHID: 0-07-310917-7McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: www.dushkin.com/catalog/0073109177.mhtmlAnnual Editions: Labor-Management Relations 05/06 was developedto show both the breadth and depth of the labor-managementrelations field not only in the United States, but around theworld. It provides perspectives to students from the legal issues,the managerial view, the union’s view, and global views. Sincethe mid-1950’s, union membership has continually been decliningin the United States. At the same time, employees are facedwith an increasing workload; decreases in benefits and pensions;wage concessions; and the loss of jobs to outsourcing. What istaking place within these circumstances? To better understandwhat is happening, Annual Editions: Labor-Management Relations05/06 looks at the inherent struggle between labor andmanagement as well as the legal and global contexts in whichit occurs. What does the future hold for labor-managementrelations?CONTENTSUNIT 1. Historical and Legal Regulation of Collective Bargaining New!1. Basic Labor Law New! 2. Individual “Concerted” Activity UnderFederal Labor Laws New! 3. U.S. Labor Law New! 4. Weingarten Rightsin Non-Union Settings New! 5. Labor Pains for Union-Free EmployersNew! 6. The Impact of Employer E-Mail Policies on Employee Rightsto Engage in Concerted Activities Protected by the National Labor RelationsAct New! 7. The Thirteenth Amendment and the Right to StrikeNew! 8. Does America Need a National Right-to-work Law? (Pro andCon arguments ) New! 9. The ’Living Wage’: It Couldn’t Do Any HarmNew! 10. Palace Coup at the AFL-CIO New! 11. Building Strength UNIT2. Strategies for Collective Bargaining New! 12. Guaranteeing OpportunityFor The Workers New! 13. Should Collective Bargaining andMALAYSIAN INDUSTRIAL AND EMPLOYMENT LAW5th EditionBy Maimunah Aminuddin, University Teknologi MARA (UITM)2005 / 420 pagesISBN-13: 978-983-3219-19-3 / MHID: 983-3219-19-5An Asian PublicationThis book provides an updated and thorough coverage on asubject of importance to students of human resource management,trade union leaders, managers of small firms and workersthemselves. The Malaysian system of industrial relations andemployment law is described in detail to ensure readers understandthese key areas of concern which affect the well-being ofeveryone in society today.CONTENTS1. An Overview 2. The Employment Act and Related Acts 3. The SocialSecurity Laws 4. The Law on Occupational Safety and Health 5. TradeUnions 6. Collective Bargaining 7. Trade Disputes and Industrial Action8. The Industrial Court 9. Discipline at the Workplace / AppendixA: Example of a Letter of Appointment / Appendix B: Items found inCompany Handbooks / Appendix C: Example of a Collective Agreement/ Appendix D: Excerpts from the Employment Act / Appendix E: Excerptsfrom the Children and Young Persons (Employment) Act / Appendix F:Examples of Industrial Court Awards / Glossary / Selected Bibliography/ Useful Websites / Index79HED 2007 Management.indd 7910/5/2006 1:24:20 PM

ManagementINDUSTRIAL RELATIONS3rd EditionBy Mark Bray, University of Newcastle, Stephen Deery and JanetWalsh of Kings College2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471550-5 / MHID: 0-07-471550-XMcGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: www.mhhe.com/au/bray3eThe new edition of this classic textbook contains the most upto-dateand theoretically-informed analysis of the processes andpractices of industrial relations in Australia. The result is a strongertext than ever before. The changing roles of management,unions, governments and arbitration tribunals are accuratelydescribed, while the bargaining processes at all levels and theireconomic and social outcomes are revealed. This text providesstudents with a current understanding of the modern labour market,labour process and regulatory institutions, locating the latesttrends within a sound conceptual framework. This new editionhas been substantially reworked and introduces a number ofkey contributing authors, in particular Dr Peter Waring who hasmade significant additions to its overall development.CONTENTSPreface Part 1: The nature and context of industrial relations 1. Thestudy of industrial relations – NEW CONTENT 2. The Changing natureof work and employment Part 2: The Parties 3. The state 4. The federaltribunal 5. Management 6. Employee representation – Trade union 7.Employee representation – Non-Trade union Part 3: Processes andchange 8. Bargaining Structures and processes 9. Conflict and cooperationin the workplace 10. Performance, Productivity, Efficiency andEquity Glossary References IndexInternational EditionLABOR RELATIONSStriking a BalanceBy John Budd, University of Minnesota—Minneapolis2005 / 568 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-284221-0 / MHID: 0-07-284221-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111305-2 / MHID: 0-07-111305-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/buddLabor Relations: Striking a Balance, 1st Edition, by John Buddpresents labor relations as a system for striking a balance betweenthe employment relationship goals of efficiency, equity,and voice, and between the rights of labor and management.Budd’s Labor Relations broadens the narrow process focus ofexisting labor relations texts by placing the discussion of contemporaryU.S. processes into the context of underlying themes- what are the goals of labor relations, are those goals beingfulfilled, and are reforms needed. This textbook replaces thetired paradigm of “labor relations equals detailed work rules”with the dynamic paradigm of “labor relations equals balancingworkplace goals and rights.” Labor law, union organizing,bargaining, dispute resolution, and contract administration arecentral topics, but these processes are not presented as selfevidentlygood. These topics are placed in the broader contextof the goals of the employment relationship, conflicting rights,and the environment of the 21st Century. This broader contextserves to make labor relations more engaging and relevant tostudents. It also allows instructors to raise important “big picture”ideas while covering the applied business functions andstrategies of the existing processes.CONTENTSPart I: Foundations Chapter 1: Contemporary Labor Relations: Objectives,Practices, and Challenges Chapter 2: Labor Unions: Good or Bad?Chapter 3: Labor Relations Outcomes: Individuals and the EnvironmentPart II: The U.S. New Deal Industrial Relations System Chapter 4:Historical Development Chapter 5: Labor Law Chapter 6: Labor andManagement: Strategies, Structures, and Rights Chapter 7: Union OrganizingChapter 8: Bargaining Chapter 9: Impasse, Strikes, and DisputeResolution Chapter 10: Contract Clauses and Their Administration PartIII: Issues for the 21st Century Chapter 11: Flexibility and EmployeeInvolvement Chapter 12: Globalization Part IV: Reflection Chapter 13:Comparative Labor Relations Chapter 14: What Should Labor RelationsDo? / Appendix: Selected Laws and DeclarationsInternational EditionINTRODUCTION TO COLLECTIVE BARGAININGAND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS3rd EditionBy Harry Katz, Cornell University - Ithaca and Thomas A Kochan,Massachusetts Institute of Tech.2004 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-283700-1 / MHID: 0-07-283700-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111085-3 / MHID: 0-07-111085-2 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/katz3eAuthored by a well-respected team in labor relations, this textcovers key topics in industrial relations and collective bargainingusing a unique conceptual framework based on the three levelsof industrial relations activity (strategic, functional, and workplace).Two extensive, class-tested mock-bargaining exercisesare included. International and comparative labor relations areboth integrated throughout and receive full chapter treatment.The text extensively discusses recent reorganizations in theprocess and outcome of bargaining, including detailed treatmentof the participatory process.CONTENTSPART ONE: INTRODUCTION 1. A Framework for Analyzing CollectiveBargaining and Industrial Relations 2. The Historical Evolution ofthe U.S. Industrial Relations System 3. The Legal Regulation of Unionsand Collective Bargaining 4. The Role of the Environment PART TWO:THE STRATEGIC LEVEL OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND STRUC-TURES FOR COLLECTIVE BARGAINING 5. Management Strategies andStructures for Collective Bargaining 6. Union Strategies and Structuresfor Representing Workers PART THREE: THE FUNCTIONAL LEVELOF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 7. Union Organization and BargainingStructures 8. The Negotiations Process and Strikes 9. Dispute ResolutionProcedures 10. Contract Terms and Employment Outcomes PARTFOUR: THE WORKPLACE LEVEL OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 11.Administering the Employment Relationship 12. Participatory ProcessesPART FIVE: SPECIAL TOPICS 13. Collective Bargaining in the PublicSector 14. International and Comparative Industrial Relations 15. TheFuture of U.S. Labor Policy and Industrial Relations Appendix A: PrivateSector Mock Bargaining Exercise Appendix B: Public Sector Mock BargainingExercise Appendix C: Grievance Arbitration Exercises80HED 2007 Management.indd 8010/5/2006 1:24:21 PM

International Human ResourceManagementInternational EditionManagementNEWInternational EditionTHE GLOBAL CHALLENGEFrameworks for International Human ResourceManagementBy Paul Evans and Vladmimir Pucik2002 / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-239730-7 / MHID: 0-07-239730-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125704-6 / MHID: 0-07-125704-7 [IE]CONTENTSChapter 1: The Challenges of International Human Resource ManagementChapter 2: Three Faces of Human Resource Management in theInternational Firm Chapter 3: Exploiting Global Integration Chapter 4:Becoming Locally Responsive Chapter 5: Managing Alliances and JointVentures Chapter 6: Forging Cross-Border Mergers and AcquisitionsChapter 7: Mastering Network Coordination Chapter 8: DevelopingTalent for the Transnational Enterprise Chapter 9: Steering throughthe Tensions of Change and Innovation Chapter 10: Transforming theGlobal Human Resource RoleNEWInternational Business- TextbooksINTERNATIONAL BUSINESS11th EditionBy Donald Ball, Wendell H McCulloch and Paul Frantz of CaliforniaState University, Michael Geringer, California Polytechnic StateUniversity and Michael Minor, University of Texas Pan American2008 (February 2007) / 768 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-353016-1 / MHID: 0-07-353016-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110089-2 / MHID: 0-07-110089-X [IE](Details unavailable at press time)NEWGLOBAL BUSINESS TODAY5th EditionBy Charles Hill, University of Washington2008 (March 2007) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-321054-4 / MHID: 0-07-321054-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110097-7 / MHID: 0-07-110097-0 [IE](Details unavailable at press time)INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS6th EditionBy Charles W L Hill, University of Washington2007 (March 2006) / 768 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-110912-3 / MHID: 0-07-110912-9[IE with OLC & PowerWeb Card]Market-defining since it was first introduced, International Business6e by Charles W. L. Hill, continues to set the standard forinternational business textbooks. In writing the book, CharlesHill draws on his experience in teaching, writing, and globalconsulting to create the most thorough, up-to-date, and thoughtprovokingtext on the market. Because many issues in internationalbusiness are complex, the text explores the pros and consof economic theories, government policies, business strategies,organizational structures, etc. Hill’s: International Business isknown for its strong emphasis on strategy, and for maintaininga tight integrated flow between chapters. Hill’s book is practicalin nature, focusing on the managerial implications of each topicon the actual practice of international business. The author’spassion and enthusiasm for the international business arena isapparent on every page as he strives to make important theoriesinteresting, informative, and accessible to all students.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New Chapter 4, Ethics in International Business! In the wake ofthe numerous ethical scandals that swept through the business worldrecently, greater emphasis is placed on this vitally important topic. Likethe text, the chapter is both rigorous and practical, covering not onlythe foundations of ethics, but also how ethics informs strategy as wellas “how-to” steps for implementing ethics into strategic operationaldecisions. This chapter provides efficient coverage of ethics which isrecommended by the Association to Advance Collegiate Schools ofBusiness (AACSB). The coverage of the rise of the global capital marketthat was found in Ch. 4 of the previous edition has now moved to Ch.10 and 11 based on reviewer feedback.• Enhanced technology package on the book’s website at www.mhhe.com/hill includes 8 video cases, 6 interactive flash exercises based on thetoughest IB concepts, a new Interactive Atlas, and the Global BusinessPlan Project which helps students create their own plan for launchinga new global business venture.• Many new and revised chapter opening cases, closing cases, andend-of-part cases stimulate discussion and show how chapter materialrelates to actual business problems. New part-ending cases include“AIDS Drugs in South Africa”, “Boeing versus Airbus: Two Decades ofTrade Disputes”, “Agricultural Subsidies and Development”, and “TheRussian Ruble Crisis and Its Aftermath.” The part ending cases also havecorresponding videos, some of which are new.• Updated GlobalEdge Research Tasks, created by Tunga Kiyak andTomas Hult of the CIBER Center at Michigan State, are in each chapter.These exercises have been updated for the sixth edition and challengestudents to solve problems similar to those faced by practicing internationalbusiness managers and acquaint them with the tools and datareal managers use and are ideal for web-based courses. Instructors aregiven solutions and the URL where the information is located.FEATURES• Material has been inserted wherever appropriate to reflect recentacademic work or important current events. For example, all statisticshave been updated to incorporate the most recently available data.New examples, cases, and boxes have been added and older examplesupdated to reflect new developments. New material has been insertedwherever appropriate to reflect recent academic work or important currentevents. For example, Chapter 5 has been updated to discuss progresson the current round of talks sponsored by the WTO aimed at reducingbarriers to trade, particularly in agriculture (the Doha Round). Chapter6 now discusses the slump in foreign direct investment flows that took81HED 2007 Management.indd 8110/5/2006 1:24:21 PM

Managementplace in 2001-2004. The section on the European Union in Chapter 8has been revised to reflect the fact that ten more member states wereadmitted on May 1st, 2004. At several places in the book, there is extendeddiscussion of the outsourcing of service activities, from softwaretesting and diagnosis of MRI scans to telephone call centers and billingfunctions, to developing nations such as India and the implications ofthis development for international business are explored.• The Focus on Managerial Implications sections at the end of eachof the theory and foundation chapters in Parts One, Two and Threeexplain how theory translates to practice.• Country Focus boxes provide background on the political, economic,social or cultural aspects of countries grappling with an internationalbusiness issue, raising students’ awareness of how national and geographicdifferences affect the conduct of international business.• Management Focus boxes provide lively illustrations of the relevanceof chapter material for the practice of international business.CONTENTSPart 1 Introduction and Overview. Chp. 1 Globalization. Part 2 CountyFactors. Chp. 2 National Differences in Political Economy. Chp. 3Differences in Culture. Chp. 4 Ethics in International Business. [Cases:Nike: The Sweatshop Debate/Qualcomm’s Chinese Odyssey/Etch-a-Sketch Ethics] Part 3 The Global Trader and Investment Environment.Chp. 5 International Trade Theory. Chp. 6 The Political Economy ofInternational Trade. Chp. 7 Foreign Direct Investment. Chp. 8 The PoliticalEconomy of Foreign Direct Investment. Chp. 9 Regional EconomicIntegration.[Cases: Agricultural Subsidies and Development / Boeingversus Airbus: Two Decades of Trade Disputes/The Politics of Trade inSteel/ Dixon Ticonderoga: Victim of Globalization?/ Drug Developmentin the European Union] Part 4 The Global Monetary System. Chp. 10The Foreign Exchange Market. Chp. 11 The International MonetarySystem. [Cases: The Tragedy of the Congo/ The Russian Ruble Crisisand Its Aftermath] Part 5 The Strategy and Structure of InternationalBusiness. Chp. 12 The Strategy of International Business. Chp. 13 TheOrganization Of International Business. Chp. 14 Entry Strategy andStrategic Alliances. [Cases: 3M in the New Millennium: Innovations andGlobalization/ Restructuring Exide/Toyata; The Rise of a Global Corporation]Part 6 Business Operations. Chp. 15 Exporting, Importing, andCountertrade. Chp. 16 Global Production, Outsourcing, and logistics.Chp. 17 Global Marketing and R&D. Chp. 18 Global Human ResourceManagement. Chp. 19 Accounting in the International Business. Chp.20 Financial Management in the International Business[Cases: Procter& Gamble in Japan/Merrill Lynch in Japan/ Starbucks Corporation:Competing in a Global Market]International EditionINTERNATIONAL BUSINESS10th EditionBy Donald Ball and Wendell H. McCulloch of California StateUniversity—Long Beach, Michael Geringer, California PolytechnicState University - San Luis Obispo, Paul L. Frantz, California StateUniversity—Long Beach and Michael S. Minor, University of TexasPan American2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310576-5 / MHID: 0-07-310576-7(with OLC/Premium Content and CESIM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111556-8 / MHID: 0-07-111556-0[IE with OLC/Premium Content and CESIM]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ball10eInternational Business: The Challenge of Global Competition,10th Edition, by Ball, McCulloch, Frantz, Geringer, and Minorcontinues to be the most objective and thorough treatment of InternationalBusiness available for students. Enriched with maps,photos, and the most up-to-date world data, this text boasts thecollective expertise of five authors with firsthand internationalbusiness experience, specializing in international management,finance, law, global strategy, and marketing--a claim no othertext can make. Only Ball, McCulloch, Frantz, Geringer, andMinor can offer a complete view of International Business asdiverse as the backgrounds of business students.CONTENTSPart I: The Nature of International Business 1. The Rapid Changeof International Business 2. International Trade and Foreign DirectInvestment 3. Theories of International Trade and Investment Part II:Cooperation Among Nations 4. Dynamics of International Institutions5. Understanding the International Monetary System Part III: InternationalEnvironmental Forces 6. Cultural Forces 7. Natural Resourcesand Environmental Sustainability 8. Economic and SocioeconomicForces 9. Political Forces 10. Legal Forces 11. Financial Forces 12. LaborForces Part IV: The Organizational Environment 13. InternationalCompetitive Strategy 14. Assessing and Analyzing Markets 15. EntryModes 16. Export and Import Practices 17. Marketing Internationally 18.Organizational Design and Control 19. Human Resource Management20. Financial Management 21. Global Supply Chain ManagementInternational EditionGLOBAL BUSINESS TODAY4th EditionBy Charles W. L. Hill, University of Washington2006 / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-319175-1 / MHID: 0-07-319175-2(with CD and OLC Premium Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111807-1 / MHID: 0-07-111807-1[IE with CD and OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hillGBT4eCharles Hill’s Global Business Today, 4e (GBT) has becomean established text in the International Business market for itsexcellent but concise coverage of the key global issues includingthe cultural context for global business, cross-border tradeand investment, the global monetary system and competitionin the global environment. GBT’s concise chapters give a generalintroduction to international business – emphasizing theenvironmental factors, with less coverage of operations. CharlesHill is renowned for his attention to research trends and thatis evident in Global Business Today, 4e through a variety ofreal world examples and cases from small, medium, and largecompanies throughout the worldCONTENTSPart One Globalization Chapter 1 Globalization Part Two Country DifferencesChapter 2 National Differences in Political Economy Chapter3 Differences in Culture Chapter 4 Ethics in International Business PartThree Cross-Border Trade and Investment Chapter 5 InternationalTrade Theory Chapter 6 The Political Economy of International TradeChapter 7 Foreign Direct Investment Chapter 8 Regional EconomicIntegration Part Four Global Money System Chapter 9 The ForeignExchange Market Chapter 10 The International Monetary System PartFive Competing in a Global Marketplace Chapter 11 The Strategy ofInternational Business Chapter 12 Entering Foreign Markets Chapter 13Exporting, Importing, and Countertrade Chapter 14 Global Production,Outsourcing, and Logistics Chapter 15 Global Marketing and R & DChapter 16 Global Human Resource Management82HED 2007 Management.indd 8210/5/2006 1:24:22 PM

ManagementINTERNATIONAL BUSINESSBy Aswathappa, Canara Bank School of Management Studies inBangalore2005 (Sept 2005) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-059715-0 / MHID: 0-07-059715-4Tata McGraw-Hill TitleCONTENTS1. Nature of International Business 2. Theories of Global Trade andInvestment 3. Political and Technological Environments 4. Cultural Environment5. Economic Environment 6. International Strategic Management7. International Organisation Structure 8. International OperationsManagement 9. Managing Technology Transfers 10. International Marketing11. International Financial Management 12. Financing ForeignTrade 13. International Accounting 14. International Human ResourceManagement 15. International Strategic Alliances 16. Integration BetweenCountries 17. World Trade Organisation 18. Social Responsibilityand Ethical Issues in International BusinessMurder by Medicine New! 22. The Sham Economy New! 23. Fakes!UNIT 4. International Business Operations Part A. International StrategicManagement New! 24. Making It in China Part B. Import/Exportand Entering Foreign Markets New! 25. Bushmeat on the Menu New!26. The China Factor Part C. Foreign Direct Investment New! 27. WhyChina Wants to Scoop Up Your Company New! 28. A Whiff of NewMoney New! 29. The China Hedge Part D. Financial Management andAccounting New! 30. The Brave New World of IFRS New! 31. TheDash for Cash Part E. Operations, Supply Chaining, and Research andDevelopment New! 32. Your Next TV New! 33. Shaping the Future ofManufacturing Part F. International Marketing New! 34. Here ComeChinese Cars Part G. International Human Resource Management New!35. Every Little Reform Counts New! 36. Outsourcing Jobs: The Mythsand Realities New! 37. Globalization and the American Labor ForceUNIT 5. International Business and the Future New! 38. Countdown toa Meltdown New! 39. A New World Economy: The Balance of PowerWill Shift to the East as China and India Evolve New! 40. New Century,New Challenges New! 41. Globalization and YouNEWInternational Business- SupplementsANNUAL EDITIONS: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS14th EditionBy Fred Maidment, Western Connecticut State University2007 (October 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352842-7 / MHID: 0-07-352842-0McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528420.mhtmlThis FOURTEENTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: IN-TERNATIONAL BUSINESS provides convenient, inexpensiveaccess to current articles selected from the best of the publicpress. Organizational features include: an annotated listing ofselected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents;a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for eachsection; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide withtesting materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASS-ROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUALEDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUNIT 1. Overview of International Business Part A. Introduction toInternational Business New! 1. Globalization and Its Contents New!2. Trading Places New! 3. The Leading Economic Organizations at theBeginning of the 21st Century Part B. International Trade Theory New!4. Shaking Up Trade Theory New! 5. A Theory of International NewVentures: A Decade of Research New! 6. Decoupled UNIT 2. InternationalInstitutions and Organizations Part A. International InstitutionsNew! 7. The World’s Banker New! 8. The Bretton Woods System: AreWe Experiencing a Revival? Part B. Financial Markets and ExchangesNew! 9. Too Much Money New! 10. Squeezed by the Euro Part C.Monetary System and Balance of Payments New! 11. Bottom-DollarNew! 12. The Dollar’s Day of Reckoning Part D. Global CorporationsNew! 13. The Great Wal-Mart of China New! 14. Thinking Locally,Succeeding Globally UNIT 3. Environmental Factors and InternationalBusiness Part A. Legal and Political Environment New! 15. Crime andPunishment New! 16. Taking Steps in OFC’s Part B. Cultural and SocialEnvironment New! 17. Grassroots Diplomacy New! 18. Is U.S. BusinessLosing Europe? New! 19. Prosperity Without Peace New! 20. A TradeWar with China? Part C. Ethics and International Business New! 21.NEWROUNDTABLE VIEWPOINTS: INTERNATIONALBUSINESSBy Christopher Robertson, Northeastern University2007 (July 2006) / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352781-9 / MHID: 0-07-352781-5McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073527815.mhtmlROUNDTABLE VIEWPOINTS: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESSoffers varying perspectives on important issues and providesreaders with balanced and fair coverage of a topic to form theirown opinion or to support their research. This reader is designedto address a number of different issues regarding internationalbusiness. Each issue question is relevant to the topic and guidesreaders through the readings. The controversy and differentviews among the captivating readings is readily apparent to thereader and stimulates discussion. The 3-5 selections per issueare current, culled from a variety of sources, and relate to themost popular issues surrounding the topic. In addition to theissue questions and selections, ROUNDTABLE VIEWPOINTS:INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS includes an issue introduction;summary/overview; highlights; critical thinking; challenge questions;and additional reading and/or websites.CONTENTSPART 1. Ethical Issues in International Business New! ISSUE 1. WhatAre the Benefits and Costs of International Outsourcing? New! ISSUE2. What Are the Standards and Practices Surrounding Sweatshops?New! ISSUE 3. What Are the Best Approaches to Minimizing GlobalCorruption? PART 2. Operating in a Global Economy New! ISSUE 4.How Does Globalization Affect the World? New! ISSUE 5. How DoFree-Trade Agreements Affect Multinational Firms? New! ISSUE 6. WhatAre Some Key Strategies for Taking Advantage of Modern TechnologiesRelated to Global Logistics? PART 3. The Human Side of GoingInternational New! ISSUE 7. What Are the Major Challenges That FaceExpatriates While Living Abroad? New! ISSUE 8. Why Is It So Importantto Understand Cultural Differences When Working Abroad?83HED 2007 Management.indd 8310/5/2006 1:24:22 PM

ManagementBusiness In AsiaMANAGEMENT CONTROL OF MULTINATIONALENTERPRISES IN CHINABy Neale O’Connor2006 / 296 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-124738-2 / MHID: 0-07-124738-6An Asian PublicationThis book aims at developing an understanding of the variouscontracting and control issues faced by the multinationalenterprise. Emphasis is placed on the theoretical determinantsof external contracting and the management control of multinationaloperations. These issues are illustrated with examplesand 18 case studies of actual multinational and regional firmoperations in China. In particular, you will be able to:a) Appreciate various theoretical determinants of internationalbusiness contracting strategies and the organisational structuresthat complement those strategies;b) Appreciate the cost/benefit trade-offs that are associated withthe various contracting arrangements of foreign direct investmentin China; andc) Appreciate the significance of various managerial accountingand control techniques that can support the various forms ofcontracting that are used by foreign multinationals in China.CONTENTSForeword / Preface / Acknowledgements / About the Author / Abbreviations/ 1 The International Business Environment and InformationNeeds / Case Study 1: A Ltd - Guanxi and Agency Problems inChina / Case Study 2: SK Group − Selecting Capital Investment inChina versus South Korea / Case Study 3: Hotel Kunming Ltd − AnEvaluation of a Hotel Investment in China / 2 International Expansionand External Contracting / Case Study 4: Adams Corporation − BestMode of Entry for Further Expansion into China / Case Study 5: AceStyle − Best Mode of Entry for Expanding Its Production in China /Case Study 6: XYZ (HK) Ltd − Using a Distributorship versus RetailOutlet Ownership as a Mode of Entry into China / Case Study 7: MHKLtd − Using a Distributorship versus Branch Office as a Mode of Entryinto China /3 Management Control of Wholly Owned Subsidiaries /Case Study 8: ABC Ltd − Managing a Service Department in China/ Case Study 9: Sanyung Ltd − Can Activity-based Costing ImproveSanyung’s Management Decision Making? / Case Study 10: TSL JewelleryLtd − / Activity-based Costing / Case Study 11: Healthcare Ltd −Multiple Performance Measures / Case Study 12: Yunhong Group −Delegation and Performance Measurement / 4 Management Controlof International Joint Ventures / Case Study 13: Fortune Ltd − TheBalanced Scorecard in a Sino-US Joint Venture in China / Case Study14: AB Holding Limited − A New Incentive Scheme / Case Study 15:ECG Group − Fraud and the Liquidation of a Joint Venture in China / 5International Transfer Pricing / Case Study 16: XYZ Group − FactorsInfluencing Its Transfer Pricing Strategy / Case Study 17: MS Group −Organisation Efficiency and Regulatory Requirements: The Influenceon Transfer Pricing Determination in a Competitive Environment / CaseStudy 18: ABC Group − How Can a More Efficient Combination ofPricing and Resource Strategies be Achieved to Minimise the Group’sTax Liability? / References / IndexTHE CHINA CASEBOOKBy Wilfred R Vanhonacker2004 / 368 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-123762-8 / MHID: 0-07-123762-3An Asian PublicationThe China Casebook contains 20 case studies which spanvarious industries, from services to fast-moving consumergoods. Some of the companies are local Chinese enterpriseswhile others are foreign investment enterprises. Collectively,the issues raised in the cases cover most of the strategic andoperational ones companies that operate in China run into. Asnot all cases are success stories, the comprehensive set highlightsthe dos and don’ts of operating in China. Besides beingan excellent basis for course development, the casebook alsoprovides stimulating reading for all interested in and actuallydoing business in China.CONTENTSPreface / Acknowledgments / About the Author / Synopsis of the Cases/ China 2000: An Overview / 1. CRE Beverage Ltd.: South AfricanBreweries’ Strategy in China 2. Hong Kong’s Airport Express Train3. Beijing Textile Group 4. Looking into a Mirror or through a Glass?Understanding Cultural Differences in Foreign-funded Enterprises inChina 5. Cyberway Computer Communications Co. Ltd. 6. FudjianIndustrial Securities Company 7. Hang Cheong Surveyors Ltd. 8. Kodakin China (A) 9. Kodak in China (B): A Billion for a Billion 10. Kodak inChina (C) 11. Shanghai Museum 12. Guangzhou Peugeot AutomobileCo. Ltd.: Partnership Breakdown13. Roland Berger (Shanghai) InternationalManagement Consultants Ltd. 14. Shanghai Automotive IndustryCorporation (A) 15. Shanghai Automotive Industry Corporation (B):Shanghai General Motors 16. www.Shanghai-ed.com 17. ShanghaiFamous Pops 18. The Stone Group’s Diversification Strategy: Caughtbetween a Rock and a Hard Place 19. Tony Roma’s in Shanghai 20.Beijing Wangfujing Department Store (Group) Co. Ltd.NEWInternational ManagementTRANSNATIONAL MANAGEMENTText and Cases, 5th EditionBy Christopher Bartlett, Harvard Business School, Sumantra Ghoshal,London Business School and Julian Birkinshaw2008 (December 2006) / 864 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310172-9 / MHID: 0-07-310172-9Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bartlett5eTRANSNATIONAL MANAGEMENT focuses on the managementchallenges associated with developing strategiesand managing the operations of companies whose activitiesstretch across national boundaries. The purpose of this bookis to provide a conceptual framework of the interplay betweenthe multinational corporation, the countries in which it doesbusiness, and the competitive environment in which it operates.Through text narrative, cases, and readings, the authorsskillfully examine the development of strategy, organizationalcapabilities, and management challenges for operating in theglobal economy.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New co-author Paul Beamish is one of the most widely-known andrespected scholars in international business. Professor Beamish bringsa wealth of research, course development, and teaching experienceto this and future editions. His extensive work on International jointventures and alliances is well-known, as is his expertise in managing84HED 2007 Management.indd 8410/5/2006 1:24:22 PM

Managementin the Asian region, especially China where he has been a constantresearcher and consultant since the 1970s to the present day. At theUniversity of Western Ontario’s Ivey School of Business, he has servedas Associate Dean for Research as well as being the founding directorof Ivey’s Asian Management Institute.• Over half of the case studies and half of the readings are new to thisedition, keeping the book current.FEATURES• The book is organized into three main parts. Part 1 covers the strategicimperatives; Part 2 covers the organizational challenges faced bymultinational companies, and Part 3 covers the managerial implicationsfor multinational companies• Uses an administrative point of view, focusing on the company andmanagement level perspective. It helps make sense of concepts throughthe eyes of the executive who is in the “thick of it”—whether that is theCEO, the global account manager, the country subsidiary manager, orthe frontline business manager.• Written by leading scholars on global strategy and organization.CONTENTSPart 1: The Strategic Imperatives Chapter 1: Expanding Abroad: Motivations,Means, and Mentalities Chapter 2: Understanding the InternationalContext: Responding to Conflicting Environmental Forces Chapter 3:Developing Transnational Strategies: Building Layers of CompetitiveAdvantage Part 2: The Organizational Challenge Chapter 4: Developinga Transnational Organization: Managing Integration, Responsiveness,and Flexibility Chapter 5: Creating Worldwide Innovation and Learning:Exploiting Cross Border Knowledge Management Chapter 6: Engaging inCross Border Collaboration: Managing across Corporate Boundaries Part3: The Managerial Implications Chapter 7: Implementing the Strategy:Building Multidimensional Capabilities Chapter 8: The Future of theTransnational: An Evolving Global RoleInternational EditionINTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENTCulture, Strategy, and Behavior, 6th EditionBy Richard Hodgetts, Florida Intl University, Fred Luthans, Universityof Nebraska and Jonathon Don, Villanova University2006 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313585-4 / MHID: 0-07-313585-2(with OLC Bi-Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125708-4 / MHID: 0-07-125708-X[IE with OLC Bi-Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hld6eAs a discipline of academy inquiry, International Managementapplies management concepts and techniques to their contextsin firms working in multinational, multicultural environments.Hodgetts’ Luthans: International Management was the firstmainstream International Management text in the market. Its5th edition continues to set the standard for International Managementtexts with its research-based content and its balancebetween culture, strategy, and behavior. International Managementstresses the balanced approach and the synergy/connectionbetween the text’s four parts: Environment (3 chapters): Culture(4 chapters), Strategy and Functions (4 chapters) and OrganizationalBehavior /Human Resource Management (4 chapters).CONTENTSPart one: Environmental Foundation 1. Globalization and WorldwideDevelopments 2. The Political, Legal, and Technological Environment3. Ethics and Social Responsibility Brief Integrative Case 1: Colgate’sDistasteful Toothpaste Brief Integrative Case 2: Advertising or FreeSpeech? The Case of Nike and Human Rights In-Depth Integrative Case1: Pharmaceutical Companies, Intellectual Property, and the GlobalAIDS Epidemic Part Two: The Role of Culture 4. The Meanings andDimensions of Culture 5. Managing Across Culture 6. OrganizationalCulture and Diversity 7. Cross-Culture Communication and Negotiation/ Brief Integrative Case 1: Cross Cultural Conflicts in the Corning-VitroJoint Venture / Brief Integrative Case 2: Integrating Nationaland Organizational Cultures: Chemical Bank’s Mergers in Europe /In-Depth Integrative Case 1:EuroDisney / In-Depth Integrative Case 2:Wal-Mart’s Japan Strategy Part Three: International Strategic Management8. Strategy Formulation and Implementing Strategy 9. EntryStrategies and Organizational Structures 10. Managing Political Risk,Government Relations, and Alliances 11. Management Decision andControl / Brief Integrative Case 1: KNP, N.V / Brief Integrative Case 2:Reliance / In-Depth Integrative Case 1:The HP-Compaq Merger and itsGlobal Implications / In-Depth Integrative Case 2:Can the Budget AirModel Succeed in Asia? The Story of AirAsia Part Four: OrganizationalBehavior and Human Resource Management 12. Motivation AcrossCultures 13. Leadership Across Cultures 14. Human Resource SelectionAnd Development Across Cultures 15. Labor Relations and IndustrialDemocracy / Brief Integrative Case 1: The Road to Hell / Brief IntegrativeCase 2: A Copy Shop Goes Global / In-Depth Integrative Case 1:Lord John Browne and BP’s Global Shift / In-Depth Integrative Case 2:Chiquita’s Global Turnaround References Endnotes Glossary Index SubIndexTHE OFFSHORE NATIONStrategies for Success in Global Outsourcing andOffshoringBy Atul Vashistha and Avinash Vashistha2006 (February 2006) / 256 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146812-1 / MHID: 0-07-146812-9A Professional Reference PublicationWritten by two outsourcing consultants to many Standard &Poor’s 500 companies, The Offshore Nation offers you guidanceon integrating outsourcing into your organization’s coregoals, maximizing ROI, and minimizing operational risks. Theauthors also make a case for the globalization of services andoffer insights into outsourcing trends worldwide.Atul Vashistha recently debated Lou Dobbs on Dobbs’ “ExportingAmerica” segment on CNN, is featured in The Worldis Flat by Tom Friedman and has appeared on CNN, CNBCand NPR• Covers outsourcing in many different countries and a varietyof services (IT, telecom, customer service, etc.)COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com85HED 2007 Management.indd 8510/5/2006 1:24:22 PM

ManagementCOMPARATIVE INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENTBy Carla Koen, Tilburg University2005 / 464 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710391-0 / MHID: 0-07-710391-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleInternational Comparative Management provides the readerwith a broad coverage of comparative international managementtopics focusing on a number of key issues, such as differencesin management styles, organizational structures, corporategovernance, production systems, corporate strategy, labour relations,and human resource issues in different countries. In doingso, the text uses a cultural-institutional explanation to clearlyhighlight the reasons why countries differ, allowing the readerto appreciate the importance management in international andglobalising economies.CONTENTSPreface / Introduction and Plan of the Book / Introduction to the Approachesto Comparative International Management Chapter 1 TheSocietal Environment and Economic Development Chapter 2 CulturalDiversity at the National Level Chapter 3 Organizational Culture ResearchChapter 4 National Diversity: Institutions and Culture IntegratedChapter 5 Managing Resources: Human Resource Management Chapter6 Corporate Governance in an International World – Large versus Smalland Medium-sized Organizations Chapter 7 Managing Resources:Production Management Chapter 8 Managing Resources: NationalInnovation Systems Chapter 9 Multinational Corporations: StructuralIssues Chapter 10 Multinational Corporations: Comparative CorporateStrategy Chapter 11 Networks and Clusters of Economic ActivityChapter 12 Institutional and Cultural Adaptiveness: Convergence to“Best Practice”?International EditionINTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENTManaging in a Diverse and Dynamic GlobalEnvironmentBy Arvind V Phatak, Exec. Director of Institute of Global ManagementStudies, Rabi S. Bhagat and Roger Kashlak2005 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-281906-9 / MHID: 0-07-281906-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111239-0 / MHID: 0-07-111239-1 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/phatak1eInternational Management: Managing in a Diverse and DynamicGlobal Environment offers a modern perspective of internationalmanagement rooted in a recognized framework. The frameworkfollows the generally accepted course structure beginning withthe macro-environment, then moves to the firm level, and concludeswith the individual manager in the international setting.This traditional framework is embellished with modern chapterson collaborative strategies, managing technology and knowledge,and ethics and corporate social responsibilty. Each chapterhas several mini-case examples and full-length, comprehensivecases conclude each part.CONTENTSSection I: The International Environment Chapter 1: An Introductionto International Management Chapter 2: The Global Macro-EconomicEnvironment Chapter 3: The Political Environment and Political RiskChapter 4: The International Legal Environment of Business Chapter 5:The Cultural Environment Section II: Managing International StrategicPlanning and Implementation Chapter 6: Strategies for InternationalCompetition Chapter 7: Modes of Entry into Foreign Markets Chapter 8:Managing International Collaborative Initiatives Chapter 9: OrganizingInternational Operations Chapter 10: Controlling International Strategiesand Operations Chapter 11: Managing Technology and KnowledgeChapter 12: Communication across Borders and Cultures Chapter 13:Negotiation and Decision-Making across Borders and Cultures Chapter14: Work Motivation across Borders and Cultures Chapter 15: Leadershipacross Borders and Cultures Chapter 16: International HumanResources Management Section IV: Ethical Dilemmas in InternationalManagement Chapter 17: Ethics and Social Responsibility for InternationalFirmsInternational EditionINTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENTText and Cases, 5th EditionBy Paul W. Beamish and Allen J. Morrison of University of WesternOntario, Philip M. Rosenzweig, IMD and Andrew Inkpen, AmericanGraduate School of International Management2003 / 752 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297538-3 / MHID: 0-07-297538-5(with PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111405-9 / MHID: 0-07-111405-X [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/beamish5eCONTENTSPart I: TEXT 1. The Internationalization Process 2. The Global BusinessEnvironment 3. The World of International Trade 4. Managing ExportOperations 5. Global Sourcing Strategy: R&D, Manufacturing, andMarketing Interfaces 6. Licensing 7. The Design and Management ofInternational Joint Ventures 8. International Strategy Formulation 9. TheImpact of Globalization on the Organization of Activities 10.The EvolvingMultinational 11.The Global Manager 12.Managing InternationalGovernment Relations 13.Global Leadership 14. Ethics 15. Managingthe Global Workforce Part II: CASES ON INTERNATIONALIZATION16. The Global Branding of Stella Artois 17. Sesame Workshop andInternational Growth 18. Where Have You Been? An Exercise to AssessYour Exposure to the Rest of the World’s Peoples 19. MTN: Inventing inAfrica 20. The Chinese Fireworks Industry 21. Swatch and the GlobalWatch Industry 22. Selkirk Group in Asia 23. Looks.com (A): A GreyIssue 24. Intel’s Site Selection Decision in Latin America 25. CameronAuto Parts (A): Revised 26. Time Warner Inc. and the ORC Patents 27.GM and AvtoVAZ of Russia 28. Nora-Sakari: A Proposed Joint Venturein Malaysia 29. Euro-Air(A) Part III: MULTINATIONAL MANAGEMENT30. Samsung China: The Introduction of Color TV 31. Dubai Aluminum(A) 32. Quest Foods Asia Pacific and the CRM Initiative 33. Blue RidgeSpain 34. Meridian Magnesium: International Technology Transfer 35.Honeywell Inc. and Global Research and Development 36. WhirlpoolCorporation¿s Global Strategy 37. Bristol Compressors, Asia-Pacific38. Larson in Nigeria 39. HCM Beverage Company 40. Enron and theDabhol Power Company -new 41. Crisis at Renault: The Vilvoorde Plantclosing (A) 42. Global Enterprises, Inc. 43. Steve Parker and the SA-TechVenture (A) 44. Sicom GmbH and CD Piracy 45. DSL de Mexico S.A.de C.V. (A) 46. Staffing Foreign Expansion: Rentsch Enters Poland 47.Mabuchi Motor Co., Ltd.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg86HED 2007 Management.indd 8610/5/2006 1:24:23 PM

ManagementInternational EditionMANAGING THE GLOBAL CORPORATIONCase Studies in Strategy and Management, 2nd EditionBy Jose De La Torre, University of California and Yves L Doz, Inseadand Timothy Devinney, Australian Graduate School of Management,University of New South Wales2001 / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-234798-2 / MHID: 0-07-234798-8 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118110-5 / MHID: 0-07-118110-5 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/moreCONTENTSSection I Introduction Section II Global Competitive Strategies inTransition Unit 1. From International to Global Competition Unit 2.Competitive Moves in Global/Local Industries Unit 3 Global Competitionin Fragmented Sectors Unit 4 Global Expansion in Service IndustriesUnit 5 Global Strategy in Smaller and/or Entrepreneurial Firms SectionIII Managing the Globalization Process Unit 6 The Need for CompetitiveInnovation and Protection Unit 7 Dealing with Governments asCustomers and Partners Unit 8 Entry Strategies and Political Risks Unit9 Alliances, Partnerships and Acquisitions Unit 10 Network OrganizationsSection IV. Managing Global Operations Unit 11 Managing theGlobal Marketing Function Unit 12 Managing the Global Finance FunctionUnit 13 Managing the Global Manufacturing, Logistics and PlantLocation Unit 14 Managing Research, Knowledge and New ProductDevelopment Unit 15 Managing People in the Global Economy SectionV Organization and Strategic RedirectionBusiness and Societyand is known for its inclusion of historical background. Eachchapter has three elements; (1) a beginning story to illustratecentral themes, (2) explanatory text, and (3) a case study invitingdebate about events related to the subject area. One of the mostcomplete on the market, the 10th Edition of Business, Governmentand Society not only covers the stakeholder theory, butalso covers a total of four theoretical models for analyzing theactions and duties of corporations.CONTENTSChapter 1: The Study of Business, Government, and Society Chapter2: The Dynamic Environment Chapter 3: Business Power Chapter 4:Critics of Business Chapter 5: Corporate Social Responsibility Chapter 6:Implementing Social Responsibility Chapter 7: Business Ethics Chapter8: Making Ethical Decisions in Business Chapter 9: Business in PoliticsChapter 10: Federal Regulation of Business Chapter 11: ReformingRegulation Chapter 12: Multinational Corporations and Trade Chapter13: Globalization Chapter 14: Industrial Pollution and EnvironmentalPolicy Chapter 15: Managing Environmental Quality Chapter 16:Consumerism Chapter 17: The Changing Workplace Chapter 18: CivilRights at Work Chapter 19: Corporate Governance Index Case ListingChapter 2: The American Fur Company Chapter 3: John D. Rockefellerand the Standard Oil Trust Chapter 4: A Campaign against KFC Corporation(New) Chapter 5: The Jack Welch Era at General Electric Chapter6: Marc Kasky versus Nike, Inc. (New) Chapter 7: The Trial of MarthaStewart (New) Chapter 8: Short Incidents for Ethical Reasoning Chapter8: HCA-The Healthcare Company Chapter 9: Westar Goes to Washington(New) Chapter 10: The FDA and Tobacco Regulation Chapter11: Microsoft Corporation and Antitrust Chapter 12: Union CarbideCorporation and Bhopal Chapter 13: The World Trade Organizationand Its Critics Chapter 14: Owls, Loggers, and Old-Growth ForestsChapter 15: Johns Manville Corporation and the Asbestos NightmareChapter 16: Advertising Alcohol Chapter 17: Workplace Drug TestingChapter 18: Adarand vs. Pena Chapter 19: Cendant Shareholders AttackExecutive Pay (New)NEWBUSINESS AND SOCIETYCorporate Strategy, Public Policy and Ethics,12th EditionBy Anne Lawrence, San Jose State University, James Weber,Duquesne University and James Post, Boston University2008 (February 2007) / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-353017-8 / MHID: 0-07-353017-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110102-8 / MHID: 0-07-110102-0 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lawrence12e(Details unavailable at press time)International EditionBUSINESS, GOVERNMENT AND SOCIETYA Managerial Perspective, 11th EditionBy George A. Steiner and John F. Steiner of University of California- Los Angeles2006 / 656 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299442-1 / MHID: 0-07-299442-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111665-7 / MHID: 0-07-111665-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/steiner11eBusiness, Government and Society, by Steiner and Steiner, wasone of the very first books in this course area and has benefitedgreatly from the reputation of its authors. George Steiner, thefather in this father-and-son team, is one of the pioneers in thefield. The text includes coverage of all the distinct content areasLEADING CORPORATE CITIZENS2nd EditionBy Sandra Waddock, Boston College2006 / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287949-0 / MHID: 0-07-287949-1Leading Corporate Citizens, Second Edition, explores the insight,vision, values, and learning that it takes to add enough valuesto a company so that it becomes a leading corporate citizen.This innovative text operates at three levels of leadership:individual, organizational, and societal. The premise is thatbusinesses operate successfully in society when they respectand are responsible to stakeholders, a balance is needed amongsectors in society and with nature, and that vision and valuescan result in distinctive competencies that lead to value-addedfor companies of the 21st century.CONTENTSPart 1—A Context for Leading Corporate Citizens 1. Leading CorporateCitizenship: Vision, Values, Value Added 2. The Three Spheres ofHuman Civilization Part 2—Leading Corporate Citizens with Vision,Values, and Value Added 3. Personal and Organizational Vision 4.Values in Management Practice: Operating with Integrity 5. ValueAdded: The Impact of Vision and Values 6. Stakeholders: The RelationshipKey Part 3—Leading Corporate Citizens and their Stakeholders7. Managing Corporate Responsibility and Corporate Citizenship 8.Investment and Assessment for Corporate Citizenship 9. Sustainabilityand the Global Village Part 4—Leading Corporate Citizens into theFuture 10. Global Standards – Global Village 11. Values Added: GlobalFutures 12. Leading Global Futures: The Emerging Paradigm of LeadingCorporate Citizenship87HED 2007 Management.indd 8710/5/2006 1:24:23 PM

ManagementInternational EditionBUSINESS AND SOCIETYStakeholders, Ethics, Public Policy, 11th EditionBy Anne T Lawrence, San Jose State University, James Weber,Duquesne University and James Post, Boston University2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298621-1 / MHID: 0-07-298621-2(with PowerWeb Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111387-8 / MHID: 0-07-111387-8[IE with PowerWeb Card]ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124748-1 / MHID: 0-07-124748-3[IE, 2 Color-Text]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/lawrence11eBusiness and Society: Stakeholder Relations, Ethics and PublicPolicy by Lawrence/Weber/Post, has continued through severalsuccessive author teams to be the market-leader in its field. Forover thirty years, Business and Society has been updated andreinvented in response to society’s relationship to business.Business and Society, 11e highlights why government regulationis sometimes required as well as new models of businesscommunitycollaboration. Business and Society, 11e is a bookwith a point of view. Lawrence, Weber and Post believe thatbusinesses have social (as well as economic) responsibilities tosociety; that business and government both have important rolesto play in the modern economy; and that ethics and integrityare essential to personal fulfillment and to business success.The book is designed to be easily modularized; an instructorwho wishes to focus on a particular portion of the material mayselect individual chapters or cases to be packaged in a Primiscustom product.CONTENTSTHE CORPORATION IN SOCIETY Ch 1: The Corporation and Its StakeholdersCh 2: Public Affairs Management BUSINESS AND THE SOCIALENVIRONMENT Ch 3: Corporate Social Responsibility Ch 4: CorporateCitizenship BUSINESS AND THE ETHICAL ENVIRONMENT Ch 5: EthicalIssues in Business Ch 6: Ethical Reasoning and Corporate ProgramsBUSINESS AND GOVERNMENT IN A GLOBAL SOCIETY Ch 7: TheChallenges of Globalization Ch 8: Business-Government Relations Ch9: Influencing the Political Environment Ch 10: Antitrust, Mergers,and Competition Policy THE CORPORATION AND THE NATURALENVIRONMENT Ch 11: Ecology and Sustainable Development Ch 12:Managing Environmental Issues BUSINESS AND TECHNOLOGICALCHANGE Ch 13: Technology: An Economic-Social Force Ch 14: ManagingTechnological Challenges BUILDING RELATIONSHIPS WITHSTAKEHOLDERS Ch 15: Stockholder Rights and Corporate GovernanceCh 16: Consumer Protection Ch 17: The Community and the CorporationCh 18: Employees and the Corporation Ch 19: Managing a DiverseWorkforce Ch 20: Business and the MediaInternational EditionChapter 8 Regulation. Chapter 9 Regulation and Deregulation for the1960’s to the 1990’s. Chapter 10 Philanthropy and Corporate Giving.Part 3 Managing People and Social Issues: Chapter 11 Workplace Issuesof the 1990’s. Chapter 12 Equal Employment and Affirmative Action.Chapter 13 Unions, Occupational Safety, and Health. Part 4 ConsumerWelfare: Chapter 14 Consumers and Information. Chapter 15 ProductUse Issues. Part 5 The Environment and Multinational Corporations:Chapter 16 Environmental Issues. Chapter 17 The International Environment.Chapter 18 Management’s Challenge to the New Millennium.NEWBusiness EthicsBUSINESS ETHICSBy Andrew Ghillyer, Argosy University Tampa2008 (December 20060 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340304-5 / MHID: 0-07-340304-0Website: http://mhhe.com/ghillyer1eFEATURES• Progress Questions. (16 per chapter) Positioned throughout thechapter to underline key points in the material to reinforce learningoutcomes and promote the retention of the content.• Thought-provoking Cases. Within each chapter provide additionalillustrations of the concept being reviewed.• End of Chapter Material. Review questions are provided at the endof the chapter to demonstrate comprehension of the material along withreview and team exercises to further encourage the exploration of moreactive participation and debate of the material.• Discussion cases. Topical and relevant to each chapter, (withquestions) they allow application of the chapter content to other casescenarios.• Comprehensive Supplements. Full complement of supplementalmaterial—instructor’s manual, test bank, powerpoints, and videos.• Frontline Focus Boxes. Appear in each chapter to present real-lifehypothetical scenarios that resonate with frontline employees.CONTENTSSECTION I: DEFINING BUSINESS ETHICS Chapter 1: UnderstandingEthics Chapter 2: Defining Business Ethics SECTION II: THE PRACTICEOF BUSINESS ETHICS Chapter 3: Organizational Ethics Chapter 4: CorporateSocial Responsibility Chapter 5: Corporate Governance Chapter6: The Role of Government Chapter 7: Blowing the Whistle Chapter 8:Ethics & Technology SECTION III: THE FUTURE OF BUSINESS ETHICSChapter 9: Ethics & Globalization Chapter 10: Making it Stick: DoingWhat’s Right / AppendixBUSINESS AND SOCIETYA Managerial Approach, 6th EditionBy Heidi Vernon, Northeastern University1998 / 648 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-21765-0 / MHID: 0-256-21765-3(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115871-8 / MHID: 0-07-115871-5 [IE]CONTENTSPart 1 Strategic Management of Social Issues: Chapter 1 Business andSocial Responsiveness. Chapter 2 Strategy Formulation. Chapter 3 StrategyImplementation. Chapter 4 Crisis Management. Chapter 5 Ethics.Chapter 6 The Origins of Big Business. Part 2 Political and CommunityResponsiveness: Chapter 7 Managing the Legal and Political Processes.88HED 2007 Management.indd 8810/5/2006 1:24:23 PM

ManagementNEWBUSINESS ETHICSDecision-Making for Personal Integrity and SocialResponsibilityBy Laura Hartman, DePaul University and Joseph DesJardins, Collegeof St Benedict2008 (April 2007) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313686-8 / MHID: 0-07-313686-7FEATURES• Chapter overview• Chapter objectives• Key terms and definitions, with examples• Reality Check questions (concept checks) to consider while reviewingthe chapter• Readings and hypotheticals throughout chapters• 2-3 Cases per chapter• web project--1 per chapter• Leadership Dilemmas--open ended situations through chaptersNEWANNUAL EDITIONS: BUSINESS ETHICS 07/0819th EditionBy John Richardson, Pepperdine University - Los Angeles2008 (March 2007) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352845-8 / MHID: 0-07-352845-5McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528455.mhtmlThis Nineteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: BUSINESSETHICS 07/08 provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected WorldWide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; ageneral introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topicalindex; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered asa practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles aresupported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.(Details unavailable at press time. Refer to old edition fordetails)ANNUAL EDITIONS: BUSINESS ETHICS 06/0718th EditionBy John Richardson, PepperdineUniversity - Los Angeles2007 (March 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352837-3 / MHID: 0-07-352837-4McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073528374.mhtmlThis eighteenth edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: BUSINESSETHICS provides convenient, inexpensive access to currentarticles selected from the best of the public press. Organizationalfeatures include: an annotated listing of selected WorldWide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; ageneral introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topicalindex; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered asa practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles aresupported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSUNIT 1. Ethics, Values, and Social Responsibility in Business. 1. ThinkingEthically: A Framework for Moral Decision Making. New! 2. BusinessEthics: Back to Basics. New! 3. Advice from Aristotle on Business Ethics.New! 4. Truth or Consequences: The Organizational Importance ofHonesty. 5. Why Good Leaders Do Bad Things. 6. Best Resources forCorporate Social Responsibility. UNIT 2. Ethical Issues and Dilemmasin the Workplace. Part A. Employee Rights and Duties. 7. You’ve GotMail…And The Boss Knows. New! 8. Flip-Flop Over Faculty Fingerprints.Part B. Organizational Misconduct and Crime. 9. The Hidden Costs ofOrganizational Dishonesty. 10. Corruption: Causes and Cures. New!11. Where the Dangers Are. Part C. Sexual Treatment of Employees.New! 12. Gender Issues: Sex-Discrimination Lawsuits Are on The Rise.Is Your Company at Risk? 13. Sexual Harassment and Retaliation: ADouble-Edged Sword. Part D. Discriminatory and Prejudicial Practices.New! 14. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and ItsThreat to Business Vitality. 15. Where Are the Women? New! 16. HowCorporate America is Betraying Women. Part E. Downsizing of the WorkForce. New! 17. 50 and Fired. 18. Into Thin Air. Part F. Whistleblowingin the Organization. New! 19. The Dark Side of Whistleblowing. 20.Hall Monitors in the Workplace: Encouraging Employee Whistleblowers.New! 21. On Witnessing a Fraud. Part G. Handling Ethical Dilemmas atWork. New! 22. Birth of the Ethics Industry. 23. Academic Values andthe Lure of Profit. New! 24. Like the Smoke of a Blazing Room. 25. TheParable of the Sadhu. UNIT 3. Business and Society: ContemporaryEthical, Social, and Environmental Issues. Part A. Changing Perspectivesin Business & Society. 26. Does It Pay to Be Good?. 27. Trust inthe Marketplace. New! 28. How Women Are Changing. New! 29. Old.Smart. Productive. New! 30. The Truth About Drug Companies. PartB. Contemporary Ethical Issues. New! 31. Eminent Domain: Is It OnlyHope for Inner Cities? New! 32. Debate Flares Anew Over Violence inVideo Games. Part C. Global Ethics. 33. Values in Tension: Ethics AwayFrom Home. New! 34. Managing Ethically with Global Stakeholders:A Present and Future Challenge. New! 35. Fakes! UNIT 4. Ethics andSocial Responsibility in the Marketplace. Part A. Marketing Strategyand Ethics. 36. The Perils of Doing the Right Thing. New! 37. Is MarketingEthics an Oxymoron?. New! 38. Truth in Advertising: Rx Drug AdsCome of Age. New! 39. Rejuvenating Wal-Mart’s Reputation. Part B.Ethical Practices in the Marketplace. 40. Managing for OrganizationalIntegrity. New! 41. An Ethical Delimma: How to Build Integrity into YourSales Environment. New! 42. The Right Balance. New! 43. Patagonia’sFounder Seeks to Spread Environmental Gospel. UNIT 5. Developingthe Future Ethos and Social Responsibility of Business. 44. Ethics for aPost-Enron America. New! 45. Hiring Character. 46. Why CorporationsCan’t Control Chicanery. New! 47. Corporate Greed vs. IMA’s EthicsCode. New! 48. 100 Best Corporate Citizens89HED 2007 Management.indd 8910/5/2006 1:24:23 PM

ManagementCORPORATE GOVERNANCEBy John Colley and Jacqueline Doyle of University of VA-Charlottesville,Wallace Stettinius and George Logan2006 / 256 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146400-0 / MHID: 0-07-146400-XA Professional Reference TitleCorporate Governance delivers vital information on the smoothand transparent running of your business, with a high-levelanalysis of key governance aspects, from board selection anddirectors’ legal obligations to board and corporate organization.It covers the board’s role in strategy formulation, business planning,and gaining necessary new financing.Environmental Pragmatism: Towards a Consensus on EnvironmentalResponsibility 9.3 Corporate Social Responsibility and the Environment9.4 Business’ Responsibility and Environmental Regulation 9.5 BusinessEthics and Sustainable Economics 9.6 Business Ethics in the Ageof Sustainable Development 9.7 Conclusions Chapter Ten: Diversityand Discrimination 10.1 Introduction: Diversity and Equality 10.2Discrimination, Equal Opportunity, and Affirmative Action 10.3 PreferentialTreatment in Employment 10.4 Arguments against PreferentialHiring 10.5 Arguments in Support of Preferential Hiring 10.6 SexualHarassment in the Workplace Chapter Eleven: International Businessand Globalization 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Ethical Relativism and Cross-Cultural Values 11.3 Cross-Cultural Values and International Rights 11.4Globalization and International Business 11.5 Globalization and thePoor 11.6 “Race to the Bottom” 11.7 Democracy, Cultural Integrity,and Human Rights / Glossary / IndexInternational EditionAN INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ETHICS2nd EditionBy Joseph R DesJardins, College of St. Benedict2006 / 288 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298900-7 / MHID: 0-07-298900-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124437-4 / MHID: 0-07-124437-9 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/desjardinsSince its inception An Introduction to Business Ethics, by JosephDesjardins has been a cutting-edge resource for the businessethics course. This text is unique in that it encompasses all thatan introductory business ethics course is, multidisciplinarycoverage, critical analysis and integrated perspective of philosophywith those of management, law, economics, andpublic policy.CONTENTSChapter One: Why Study Ethics? 1.1 Why Study Business Ethics? 1.2Values and Ethics: Doing Good and Doing Well 1.3 The Nature andGoals of Business Ethics 1.4 Business Ethics and the Law 1.5 Ethics andEthos 1.6 Morality, Virtues, and Social Ethics 1.7 Ethical Perspectives:Managers and Other Stakeholders Chapter Two: Ethical Theory andBusiness 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Ethical Relativism and Reasoning in Ethics2.3 Psychological Egoism 2.4 Modern Ethical Theory: Utilitarian Ethics2.5 Challenges to Utilitarianism 2.6 Utilitarianism and Business Policy2.7 Deontological Ethics 2.8 Virtue Ethics 2.9 Summary and ReviewChapter Three: Corporate Social Responsibility 3.1 Introduction 3.2The Classical Model of Corporate Social Responsibility 3.3 CriticalAssessment of the Classical Model: The Utilitarian Defense 3.4 CriticalAssessment of the Classical Model: The Private Property Defense3.5 Modified Version of the Classical Model: The Moral Minimum 3.6The Stakeholder Theory 3.7 Summary and Review Chapter Four: TheMeaning and Value of Work 4.1 Introduction 4.2 The Meanings ofWork 4.3 The Value of Work 4.4 Conventional Views of Work 4.5 TheHuman Fulfillment Model 4.6 The Liberal Model of Work 4.7 Business’Responsibility for Meaningful Work 4.8 Summary and Review ChapterFive: Moral Rights in the Workplace 5.1 Introduction: Employee Rights5.2 The Right to Work 5.3 Employment at Will 5.4 Due Process in theWorkplace 5.5 Participation Rights 5.6 Employee Health and Safety5.7 Privacy in the Workplace Chapter Six: Employee Responsibilities6.1 Introduction 6.2 The Narrow View of Employee Responsibilities:Employee as Agents 6.3 Professional Ethics and the Gatekeeper Function6.4 Managerial Responsibility and Conflicts of Interests 6.5 Trust andLoyalty in the Workplace 6.6 Responsibilities to Third Parties: Honesty,Whistleblowing, and Insider Trading Chapter Seven: Marketing Ethics:Product Safety and Pricing 7.1 Introduction: Marketing and Ethics 7.2Ethical Issues in Marketing: An Overview 7.3 Product Safety: FromCaveat Emptor to Negligence 7.4 Strict Products Liability 7.5 Ethicsand Pricing Chapter Eight: Marketing Ethics: Advertising and TargetMarketing 8.1 Introduction: Ethics of Sales, Advertising, and ProductPlacement 8.2 Regulating Deceptive and Unfair Sales and Advertising8.3 Marketing Ethics and Consumer Autonomy 8.4 Targeting the Vulnerable:Marketing and Sales Chapter Nine: Business’ EnvironmentalResponsibilities 9.1 Introduction: Environmental Responsibilities 9.2BUSINESS ETHICSPolicies and Persons, 4th EditionBy Kenneth E. Goodpaster, University of St. Thomas, Laura L. Nash,Harvard Business School and Henri-Claude deBettignies, INSEAD2006 / 648 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299690-6 / MHID: 0-07-299690-0This comprehensive collection presents a case-method approachto teaching business ethics. It contains a wide rangeof individual, managerial, and corporate cases, many with aninternational perspective. All cases have been classroom-testedat the Harvard Business School; most have been developed inthe field rather than in the library. 27 new cases (of the total 59cases) cover such topics as labor-management trust, productliability, foreign child labor, business e-ethics, the oil industryand climate control, and more. A new appendix, “CorporateSelf-Assessment and Improvement,” provides a corporate selfassessmenttool for senior management and boards of directorsaimed at increasing ethical awareness and avoiding potentialthreats to an organization’s reputation. The second Appendix,“Bridging East and West in Management Ethics,” has been revisedand updated to discuss certain basic similarities betweenAsian and Western ethical ideals through the Caux Round TablePrinciples of Business Conduct.CONTENTSPART ONE: Personal Values / Introduction / Peter Green’s First Day /Dilemma of an Accountant / Martha McCaskey / Viking Air Compressor,Inc. / Joe Camel’s Mom: RJR and Youth Marketing (A) / PART TWO:Corporate Values: Looking Inward / Introduction / A. “GovernanceIssues”: The Corporate Scandals of 2002 and A Note on the Sarbanes-Oxley Act / Note on the Role of the Ethics Officer / American RefiningGroup, Inc. (A) / H. J. Heinz Company: The Administration ofPolicy (A) / H. J. Heinz Company: The Administration of Policy (B) /B. “Employee Issues”: The Individual and the Corporation 4/27/04 /Lex Service Group, Ltd.: Developing the Guidelines (A) / Lex ServiceGroup, Ltd.: Closing Portsmouth Deport (B) / Lex Service Group, Ltd.:Working Conditions at Inglesby Shipyard (C) / Lex Service Group, Ltd.:The Reading Pallets Theft (D) / Refill Precision Manufacturing, Inc: AMatter of Direction(A) / FBS, Inc.: Ethics and Employee Investments /Waterbee Toy Company (A) and A Note on E-Mail and Internet Privacy/ Webster Health Systems (A) and A Note on the Americans withDisabilities Act PART THREE: Corporate Values: Looking Outward/ Introduction / Tennessee Coal and Iron / Dayton Hudson Corporation:Conscience and Control (A) / Dayton Hudson Corporation:Conscience and Control (B) / Dayton Hudson Corporation: Conscienceand Control (C) / Northwest Airlines: Private Sector, Public Trust (A) /The Bush Foundation: A Case Study in Giving Money Away (A) / AlcoBeverage Company and Moderation Advertising / Note on ProductSafety / Managing Product Safety: The Ford Pinto / Managing ProductSafety: The Procter & Gamble Rely Tampon / Kolcraft, Hasbro, andthe Playskool Travel-Lite Crib (A) / Minnesota Bank, Inc. (A) and ANote on Financial Privacy / Northwest Airlines vs. Wcco-TV: BusinessEthics & The Media (A) / Northwest Airlines vs. Wcco-TV: BusinessEthics & The Media (B) / U.S. Citizen Bank (A) and A Note On the90HED 2007 Management.indd 9010/5/2006 1:24:24 PM

ManagementChallenge of Responsible Lending and Debt: An Introduction to Non-Standard Credit / Environmental Pressures: The Pollution Problem /Ashland Oil, Inc.: Trouble at Floreffe (A) / Exxon Valdez: CorporateRecklessness on Trial / PART FOUR: Corporate Values: InternationalBusiness / Introduction / Changmai Corporation / Safety First? / TheEvaluation / Dow Corning Corporation: Business Conduct and GlobalValues / Dow Corning Corporation: The Breast Implant Controversy(A) / Managing Boundaries: ADC Telecommunications in Mexico (A)/ Energy, Power, and the Cree Nations (A) / Medtronic in China (A) /Business e-Ethics: Yahoo! On Trial (A) (N/INSEAD) / The Oil Industryand Climate Change (A) / The Oil Industry and Climate Change (B)– Climate / Change Strategies of Three Multinational Oil Companies/ Monsanto and Genetically Modified Organisms / Soccer Balls Madefor Children by Children? Child Labor in Pakistan / Mobil in Aceh,Indoneisa (A) / Appendixes / Bridging East and West in ManagementEthics: Kyosei and the Moral Point of View / Corporate Self-Assessmentand Improvement – A Balrige Process for Ethics? / Self-Assessment andImprovement Process (SAIP) Executive SurveyTAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ONCONTROVERSIAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS ETHICS ANDSOCIETY9th EditionBy Lisa Newton and Maureen Ford of Fairfield University2006 / 464 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352720-8 / MHID: 0-07-352720-3McGraw-Hill/Duhskin TitleWebsite: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073527203.mhtmlThis ninth edition of TAKING SIDES: BUSINESS ETHICS ANDSOCIETY presents current controversial issues in a debatestyleformat designed to stimulate student interest and developcritical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed withan issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. Aninstructor’s manual with testing material is available for eachvolume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is alsoan excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions onincorporating this effective approach in the classroom. EachTAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selectedWorld Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website,www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSPart 1. Capitalism and the Corporation. Issue 1: Is Capitalism the BestRoute to Human Happiness? Issue 2: Can Individual Virtue SurviveCorporate Pressure? Issue 3: Can Restructuring a Corporation’s RulesMake a Moral Difference? Issue 4: Should Corporations Adopt Policiesof Corporate Social Responsibility? Part 2. Current Issues in Business.Issue 5: Are Pharmaceutical Firms Obliged to Cut Their Prices for PoorAIDS Victims? Issue 6: Should Casino Gambling Be Prohibited? Issue7: Is Wal-Mart a Good Model for Retail Sales? Issue 8: Does the EnronCollapse Show That We Need More Regulation of the Energy Industry?Part 3. Human Resources: The Corporation and the Employee. Issue 9:Does Blowing the Whistle Violate Company Loyalty? Issue 10: Is ControllingDrug Abuse More Important than Protecting Privacy? Issue 11: Is“Employment-at-Will” Good Social Policy? Issue 12: Is CEO CompensationJustified by Performance? Part 4. Consumer Issues. Issue 13: AreMarketiong and Advertising Fundamentally Exploitive? Issue 14: WasFord to Blame in the Pinto Case? Issue 15: Should we require Labelingfor Genetically Modified Food? Issue 16: Are Multinational CorporationsFree From Moral Obligation? Issue 17: Are Sweatshops NecessarilyEvil? Issue 18: Should Patenting Life Be Forbidden? Issue 19: Should weExport Pesticides to Developing Nations? Part 6. Environmental Policyand Corporate Responsibility. Issue 20: Do Environmental RestrictionsViolate Basic Economic Freedoms? Issue 21: Is Bottling Water a GoodSolution to Problems of Water Purity and Availability?International EditionTHE ETHICS OF MANAGEMENT5th EditionBy La Rue Hosmer, University of Michigan—Ann Arbor2006 / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299607-4 / MHID: 0-07-299607-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124452-7 / MHID: 0-07-124452-2 [IE]The theme of The Ethics of Management, Fifth Edition, is thatbusiness firms today operate in a competitively intense, technologicallycomplex and culturally diverse global economy.Pressures to dodge issues and cut corners are greater than everbefore. The Ethics of Management by LaRue Hosmer providesa very explicit three-part framework to analyze those problemsby combining economic outcomes, legal requirements and ethicalprinciples. Students will learn how to convincingly presenttheir moral point of view to others in order to jointly serve theircompanies, protect their careers, and improve their societies.CONTENTSPreface – The Growing Importance of Ethics in Management [Case: Bankof America and the Rapid Trading of Customers’ Mutual Funds] ChapterI – Moral Problems in Business Management [Case: Tyco Corporationand Questionable Actions by the Chairman] Case: Cruise Ships and theDisposal of Waste at Sea] [Case: Whirlpool Corporation and the Sale ofDish Antennas] Chapter II –Moral Analysis and Economic Outcomes[Case: 9/11 Terrorist Attack and Compensation for the Victims] [Case:World Bank and the Export of Pollution] [Case: Green Giant and theMove to Mexico] Chapter III – Moral Analysis and Legal Requirements[Case: Martha Stewart and the Sale of ImClone Stock] [Case: SarahGoodwin] [Case: H. B. Fuller and the Sale of Resistol] Chapter IV– Moral Analysis and Ethical Duties [Case: New York Stock Exchangeand Pay/Retirement Package for the Chairman] [Case: Susan Shapiro][Case: Wal-Mart and Expansion into Smaller Towns] Chapter V – WhyShould a Business Manager Be Moral? [Case: Johnson & Johnson andthe Worldwide Recall of Tylenol] [Case: Herman Miller and the Protectionof the Environment] [Case: Merck and the Cure for River Blindness]Chapter VI – How Can a Business Organization be Made Moral? [Case:Electrolux Corporation and the Possibility of Renewal] [Case: TwoCompanies in Need of Redirection] [Case: Enron Corporation and theNeed for Complete Revision]International EditionBUSINESS ETHICSA Global and Managerial Perspective, 2nd EditionBy David J Fritzsche, Pennsylvania State University - Malvern2005 / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-249690-1 / MHID: 0-07-249690-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124987-4 / MHID: 0-07-124987-7 [IE]Fritzsche’s: Business Ethics: A Global and Managerial Perspective2e, integrates sociological theories and codes of moralethat a manager might face in the modern business world. Thispaperback combines research and theory with real world examplesand cases, discussion questions, and interactive «whatwould you do» situations.CONTENTS1. Business Ethics: A Global Framework 2. The Importance Of EthicsIn Business 3. Moral Standards 4. Ethics And Decision Making 5. TheEmpirical Evidence 6. Making Moral Decisions 7. Ethics In Practice /Appendix A United States Bill Of Rights Appendix B Universal DeclarationOf Human Rights91HED 2007 Management.indd 9110/5/2006 1:24:24 PM

ManagementInternational EditionPERSPECTIVES IN BUSINESS ETHICS3rd EditionBy Laura Hartman, DePaul University2005 / 816 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-288146-2 / MHID: 0-07-288146-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123826-7 / MHID: 0-07-123826-3 [IE]Laura Hartman’s: Perspectives in Business Ethics offers a foundationin ethical thought, followed by a variety of perspectives ondifficult ethical dilemmas in both the personal and professionalcontext. This anthology encourages the reader to “criticallyevaluate each perspective using his or her own personal ethicaltheory base.” Instructors who favor an interactive, discussion-orientedapproach to the ethics course will appreciate thedifferent perspectives offered by the Hartman text. This bookincorporates the traditional text with definitions and explanations,and combines it with short and long cases, reprints of bothtraditional and innovative articles, and nontraditional materialssuch as song lyrics, excerpts from classical literature, and shortstories. This text focuses on involving as many views as possiblein ethical situations or decisions.CONTENTSPart One: Ethical Theories and Approaches 1: Traditional Theories 2:Ethical Analysis and Application - Corporate and Personal Decision-Making3: Corporate Ethical Leadership: Corporate Culture and ReputationManagement 4: Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility Part Two:Ethics in The Business Disciplines 5: Ethics and HRM A. Downsizing/ B. Discrimination and Affirmative Action: Legislated Ethics? / C.Compensation: Comparable Worth / D. Whistleblowing / E. HumanResource Values in Conflict: U.S. Standards vs. Others? 6: Ethics andMarketing A. Advertising Issues / B. Planned Obsolescence Issues / C.Marketing Research and Data Mining Issues / D. Sales Practice Issues /E. Issues in Marketing to Minors / F. Pricing Issues 7: Ethics in Financeand Accountancy 8: Ethical Implications of TechnologyCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comOrganization TheoryInternational EditionORGANIZATIONAL THEORYTension and ChangeBy David Jaffee, University of North Florida2001ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234166-9 / MHID: 0-07-234166-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118962-0 / 0-07-118962-9 [IE]CONTENTSPart 1. INTRODUCTION: DEFINITIONS AND CONCEPTIONSChapter 1 Organization: Elements, A Definition and Images Chapter 2Classical Social Theory and Organizational Analysis Chapter 3 ContemporarySocial Theory and Organizational Analysis Part 2. CONCEPTUALFRAMEWORK FOR THE ANALYSIS OF ORGANIZATION THEORYChapter 4 Levels of Organizational Analysis and Transaction Chapter5 Tension #1: Controlling The Human Factor Chapter 6 Tension #2:Differentiation and Integration Chapter 7 Paradox: The UnderlyingSource of Organizational Tension Part 3. THE RISE OF THE FACTORYSYSTEM Chapter 8 Introduction Chapter 9 The Formal Subordinationof Labor: Creating A Human Factor of Production Chapter 10 The RealSubordination of Labor: Disciplining the Human Factor Chapter 11Scientific Management in Theory Chapter 12 Scientific Managementin Practice: The Hoxie Study Chapter 13 Scientific Management: TheBroader Context Part 4. THE HUMAN ORGANIZATION Chapter 14The Hawthorne Revelations and Beyond Chapter 15 Hawthorne and theRevision of Organization Theory Chapter 16 Chester & #8217;s World:Barnard & #8217;s Theory of Organization and Management Chapter17 Humanistic Management Practice Chapter 18 Leadership Part 5. BU-REAUCRACY, RATIONALIZATION, AND ORGANIZATION THEORYChapter 19 Weber and the Rational-Bureaucratic Model Chapter 20Weber and the Dilemma of Authority Chapter 21 Bureaucratic Dysfunctionsand Unintended Consequences Chapter 22 Operationalizingthe Rational Model: Administrative Science Chapter 23 BureaucraticRationalization and Domination Chapter 24 McDonaldization: Diffusionof the Bureaucratic Ethos Chapter 25 The Charges against BureaucracyPart 6. EMERGING ORGANIZATIONAL FORMS: BEYOND FORDISMChapter 26 Fordism Chapter 27 Toward Alternative OrganizationalModels Chapter 28 The Flexibility Paradigm Part 7. EMERGING OR-GANIZATIONAL PARADIGMS: POST- BUREAUCRACY, CULTURE,AND KNOWLEDGE Chapter 29 Postbureaucratic Organization Chapter30 Organizational Culture Chapter 31 The Learning OrganizationChapter 32 What’s Happening on the Ground? Part 8. TECHNOLOGYAND ORGANIZATIONAL TRANSFORMATION Chapter 33 Technologyand Organization Theory Chapter 34 Entering the Age of The SmartMachine Chapter 35 Technology and Organizational Change Chapter36 The Virtual Organization Part 9. THE ENVIRONMENT AND THEORGANIZATION Chapter 37 Theory Chapter 38 Population EcologyTheory Chapter 38 Resource Dependence Theory Chapter 39 EnvironmentalInfluences on Public-Sector Organizations Chapter 40 InstitutionalTheory Chapter 41 The Political-Economic Environment Part 10.INTER-ORGANIZATIONAL DYNAMICS : MARKETS, HIERARCHIESAND NETWORKS Chapter 42 The Markets and Hierarchies ApproachChapter 43 Between Market and Hierarchy: Theoretical RationalesChapter 44 To Vertically Disintegrate or Not to Vertically Disintegrate:GM and Delphi Chapter 45 Disintegration and Alternative ArrangementsChapter 46 Alliance Capitalism: The Rise and Demise of the KeiretsuChapter 47 The Spatial Dimension Chapter 48 Recent Developments:Supply Chains and Real Options Part 11. THE FUTURE OF ORGANI-ZATION AND POSTMODERN ANALYSIS Chapter 49 Modernist andPostmodernist Approaches Chapter 50 Organizational Implications ofPostmodernism Chapter 51 BLUR: Postmodernism Popularized Chapter52 Fragmented Humans and Dedifferentiated Structures92HED 2007 Management.indd 9210/5/2006 1:24:24 PM

Organization DevelopmentChangeManagementInternational EditionORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT ANDTRANSFORMATIONManaging Effective Change, 6th EditionBy Wendell French and Cecil H Bell of University of Washington andRobert A Zawacki, University of Colorado-Boulder2005 / 516 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-248167-9 / MHID: 0-07-248167-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124098-7 / MHID: 0-07-124098-5 [IE]Organization Development and Transformation is a paperbackcollection of 46 readings that focuses on how people functionwith and within organizations, and how to make the workingrelationship function best. This edition includes coverage of classicOD articles, coverage of topics such as self-directed teams,centers of excellence, and learning organizations.CONTENTSPART I MAPPING THE TERRITORY 1 What is Organizational Development?2 A History of Organization Development 3 General Strategies forEffecting Change in Human Systems 4 Toward Third-Wave Managingand Consulting 5 Organization Development and Transformation 6 MostInfluential Management Books of the 20th Century PART II FOUNDA-TIONS OF ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT AND TRANSFORMA-TION 7 The Field Approach: Culture and Group Life as Quasi-StationaryProcesses 8 Two-Person Disputes 9 Intervention Theory and Method10 Intergroup Problems in Organizations 11 Organizational Culture12 Sociotechnical System Principles and Guidelines: Past and PresentPART III FUNDAMENTAL INTERVENTIONS 13 Methods for FindingOut What’s Going On 14 Operation KPE: Developing a New Organization15 When Power Conflicts Trigger Team Spirit 16 Strategies forImproving Headquarters-Field Relations 17 Organization Mirror Interventions18 The Confrontation Meeting 19 Parallel Learning Structures20 Survey-Guided Development: Using Human Resources Measurementin Organizational Change PART IV CUTTING-EDGE CHANGESTRATEGIES 21 Successful Self-Directed Teams and Planned Change:A Lot in Common 22 Appreciative Inquiry: The New Frontier 23 FutureSearch: Acting on Common Ground in Organizations and Communities24 Meeting the Global Competitive Challenge: Building Systems ThatLearn on a Large Scale 25 Centers of Excellence: Empowering Peopleto Manage Change 26 Building a Learning Organization 27 Fast CycleOD: “Faster, Better, Cheaper” Catches up to Organization DevelopmentPART V IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES AND ISSUES 28 CreatingReadiness for Organizational Change 29 Defining a Political Model ofOrganizations 30 Functional Roles of Group Members 31 Choosingthe Depth of Organizational Intervention 32 Rules of Thumb for ChangeAgents 33 Shining a New Light on Organizational Change: ImprovingSelf-Efficacy Through Coaching PART VI EXAMPLES AND SPECIALSITUATIONS 34 Creating Successful Organization Change 35 ManagingOrganizational Transformations: Lessons from the Veterans HealthAdministration 36 Innovation in Whole Scale Change: Past, Present andFuture 37 Organization Development in the Entrepreneurial Firm 38 AreOrganizational Development Interventions Appropriate in TurnaroundSituations? PART VII CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES FOR THEFUTURE 39 An Interview with Peter Vaill 40 Ethics and OrganizationalChange 41 Powering Up Teams 42 Managing Discontinuities: TheEmerging Challenges 43 Seven Practices of Successful Organizations44 The New Agenda for Organization DevelopmentInternational EditionNEWMANAGING CHANGEText and Cases, 3rd EditionBy Todd Jick , Harvard Business School and Maury Peiperl, LondonBusiness School2007 (March 2007) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310274-0 / MHID: 0-07-310274-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125424-3 / MHID: 0-07-125424-2 [IE](Deails unavailable at press time. Refer to old edition fordetails)International EditionMANAGING CHANGEBy Ian Palmer, Richard Dunford and Gib Akin, University ofVirginia—Charlottesville2006 / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-249680-2 / MHID: 0-07-249680-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123838-0 / MHID: 0-07-123838-7 [IE]Managing Organizational Change, by Palmer/Dunford/Akin,provides managers with an awareness of the issues involvedin managing change, moving them beyond “one-best way” approachesand providing them with access to multiple perspectivesthat they can draw upon in order to enhance their successin producing organizational change. These multiple perspectivesprovide a theme for the text as well as a framework for the wayeach chapter outlines different options open to managers inhelping them to identify, in a reflective way, the actions andchoices open to them. The authors favor using multiple perspectivesto ensure that change managers are not trapped by a“one-best way” of approaching change which limits their optionsfor action. Changing organizations is as messy as it is exhilarating,as frustrating as it is satisfying, as muddling-through andcreative a process as it is a rational one. This book recognizesthese tensions for those involved in managing organizationalchange. Rather than pretend that they do not exist it confrontsthem head on, identifying why they are there, how they canbe managed and the limits they create for what the manager oforganizational change can achieve.CONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction: Stories of Change Chapter 2 Images of ManagingChange Chapter 3 Why Organizations Change Chapter 4 WhatChanges in Organizations Chapter 5 Diagnosis for Change Chapter 6Resistance to Change Chapter 7 Implementing Change: OrganizationDevelopment, Appreciative Inquiry and Sensemaking ApproachesChapter 8 Implementing Change: Change Management, Contingencyand Processual Approaches Chapter 9 Linking Vision and ChangeChapter 10 Strategies for Communicating Change Chapter 11 Skills forCommunicating Change Chapter 12 Consolidating Change93HED 2007 Management.indd 9310/5/2006 1:24:24 PM

ManagementInternational EditionMANAGING CHANGEText and Cases, 2nd EditionBy Todd Jick, Havard Business School and Maury Peiperl, LondonBusiness School2003 / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-26458-6 / MHID: 0-256-26458-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112220-7 / MHID: 0-07-112220-6 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/moreCONTENTSMODULE 1 Forces for Change MODULE 2 Envisioning ChangeMODULE 3 Implementing Change MODULE 4 The Recipients ofChange MODULE 5 Leading Change: The Personal Side MODULE 6Continuous ChangeInternational EditionLeadershipNEWTHE ART OF LEADERSHIP2nd EditionBy George Manning and Kent Curtis of University of NorthernKentucky2007 (November 2005) / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299568-8 / MHID: 0-07-299568-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110700-6 / MHID: 0-07-110700-2 [IE]The Art of Leadership uses a highly interactive approach toexplore Leadership Development. By blending behavior theory,practical application, and personalized learning, students areencouraged to develop their full potential as a leader and tobecome the kind of leader they always wanted to have. Thebook can be described as more than just a textbook. Rather,it is a “learning” book which actively involves the reader inthe learning process. The text’s applied approach combinesbehavior theory with business practice, as each chapter focuseson central concepts and skills in an important area of leadershipdevelopment. The book is made more valuable and theimpact is made greater by the self-evaluation questionnairesand practical exercises that are used for personal developmentand class involvement. In this way, readers are equipped toengage with all that the text offers. The Art of Leadership retainsthe most popular topics and exercises of the previous editionand adds timely subjects and new activities to make the bookfresh, alive, and interesting for leaders in today’s workplace. Itteaches concepts, principles, and skills of leadership in a waythat is appropriate for both new and experienced leaders, aswell as for the everyday person who must influence others toget things done.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Leadership Ethics Focus— The second edition concentrates onleadership ethics and the role of the leader as moral agent. Readerswill learn not so much that ethics pays, but that ethics counts in themodern work environment.• Role of a Leader Examined— Increased attention is also placed onthe subject of transformational leadership, showing readers how therole of the leader is important in elevating employee performance toextraordinary levels.• Adaptation of a Leader Profiled— This new edition highlights theimportance of the adaptive capacity of potential leaders, and how therole of the leader is important in managing complex change—withspecial attention focused on the importance of attitude in leadershipand on how to avoid burnout.FEATURES• Questionnaires, Activities, and Exercises— Self-evaluation questionnairesand updated practical exercises personalize concepts and principlesand help bridge the gap between classroom and work environment,theory and practice.• Student Retention— Anecdotes, inspiring quotes, and true-life examplessupport the text’s concepts along with appropriate facts and figures.The warm writing style is personal and conversational, with minimalprofessional jargon. This style not only makes the book interesting toread, but the material easier to assimilate and recall.• Instructor Support— An updated and expanded Instructor’s Guideincludes cases, learning activities, videos, test bank questions, and anew PowerPoint presentation.• Workbook Format— Students are encouraged to write directly inthe book in practicing leadership exercises, jotting notes, and fullyengaging with the text. The activities can be shared with friends andco-workers as part of their personal development, or turned in to instructorsfor grading.• Realistic Approach— The authors believe that leadership occursto the extent a leader cares about the work and cares about people.Neither of these can be faked and neither can be gotten out of a book.However, if a leader cares, this book builds upon that foundation indeveloping leadership expertise. The book’s approach thus incorporatesall universal principles of effective leadership in order to teach leadershow to create a productive and humanistic workplace.CONTENTSIntroduction: Setting the Stage Part One: Leadership Variables ChapterOne: The Leadership Equation Chapter Two: Leadership Qualities ChapterThree: Characteristics of Followers Chapter Four: Situational FactorsPart Two: The Power of Vision Chapter Five: The Importance of VisionChapter Six: The Motive to Lead Chapter Seven: Organizational ClimatePart Three: The Importance of Ethics Chapter Eight: Leadership EthicsChapter Nine: The Role of Values Chapter Ten: Ethics at Work Part Four:The Empowerment of People Chapter Eleven: Leadership AuthorityChapter Twelve: Empowerment in the Workplace Chapter Thirteen:The Quality Imperative Part Five: Leadership Principles Chapter Fourteen:Effective Leadership Chapter Fifteen: Human Relations ChapterSixteen: The Team Concept Part Six: Understanding People ChapterSeventeen: Human Behavior Chapter Eighteen: The Art of PersuasionChapter Nineteen: The Diversity Challenge Part Seven: MultiplyingEffectiveness Chapter Twenty: Effective Delegation Chapter Twentyone:How to Assign Work Chapter Twenty-two: The Role of PersonalityPart Eight: Developing Others Chapter Twenty-three: The Leader asTeacher Chapter Twenty-four: Helping People Through Change ChapterTwenty-five: Burnout Prevention Part Nine: Performance ManagementChapter Twenty-six: Managing Performance Chapter Twenty-seven:Professional Performance Chapter Twenty-eight: Sustaining Discipline/ Conclusion: Challenge and ChargeINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg94HED 2007 Management.indd 9410/5/2006 1:24:25 PM

ManagementNEWROUNDTABLE VIEWPOINTS: ORGANIZATIONALLEADERSHIPBy Joyce Huth Munro, American Association of Colleges for TeacherEducation and Elaine Green, Chestnut Hill College2007 (February 2007) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352782-6 / MHID: 0-07-352782-3A McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073527823.mhtmlROUNDTABLE VIEWPOINTS: ORGANIZATIONAL LEAD-ERSHIP offers varying perspectives on important issues andprovides readers with balanced and fair coverage of a topic toform their own opinion or to support their research. This readeris designed to address a number of different issues regardingorganizational leadership. Each issue question is relevant to thetopic and guides readers through the readings. The controversyand different views among the captivating readings is readilyapparent to the reader and stimulates discussion. The 3-5 selectionsper issue are current, culled from a variety of sources,and relate to the most popular issues surrounding the topic. Inaddition to the issue questions and selections, ROUNDTABLEVIEWPOINTS: ORGANIZATIONAL LEADERSHIP includesan issue introduction; summary/overview; highlights; criticalthinking; challenge questions; and additional reading and/orwebsites.International EditionLEADERSHIPThe Art of Experience, 5th EditionBy Richard Hughes and Robert Ginnett of Center for Creative Leadershipand Gordon Curphy, The Blandin Foundation2006 / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-288120-2 / MHID: 0-07-288120-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124453-4 / MHID: 0-07-124453-0 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hughes5eLeadership: The Art of Experience, Fifth Edition, is written forthe general student to serve as a stand-alone introduction tothe subject of leadership. The text consists of 13 chapters and afinal section on Basic and Advanced Leadership Skills. AuthorsHughes, Ginnett, and Curphy have drawn upon three differenttypes of literature: empirical studies; interesting anecdotes,stories and findings; and leadership skills to create a text thatis personally relevant, interesting and scholarly. The authors’unique quest for a careful balancing act of leadership materialshelp students apply theory and research to their real-lifeexperiences.CONTENTSPART I LEADERSHIP IS A PROCESS, NOT A POSITION 1. Leadershipis Everyone’s Business 2. Leadership Involves an Interaction betweenthe Leader, the Followers, and the Situation 3. Leadership is Developedthrough Education and Experience 4. Assessing Leadership and Measuringits Effects PART II FOCUS ON THE LEADER 5. Power and Influence6. Leadership and Values 7. Leadership Traits 8. Leadership BehaviorPART III FOCUS ON THE FOLLOWERS 9. Motivation, Satisfaction andPerformance 10. Groups and Teams PART IV FOCUS ON THE SITUA-TION 11. Characteristics of the Situation 12. Contingency Theories ofLeadership 13. Leadership and Change PART V LEADERSHIP SKILLSBasic Leadership Skills: Learning from Experience/ Communication/Listening/Assertiveness /Providing Constructive Feedback/ Guidelines forEffective Stress Management / Building Technical Competence/ BuildingEffective Relationships with Superiors / Building Effective Relationshipswith Peers / Setting Goals /Punishment/ Conducting Meetings /AdvancedLeadership Skills/Delegating / Managing Conflict /Negotiation/ProblemSolving/Improving Creativity/Diagnosing Performance Problems in Individuals,Groups, and Organizations/Team Building for Work Teams/The Building Blocks of Team Building/ Team Building at the Top/DevelopmentPlanning /Credibility/Coaching/EmpowermentInternational EditionLEADERS AND THE LEADERSHIP PROCESS4th EditionBy Jon Pierce and John W. Newstrom of University of Minnesota—Duluth2006 / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298743-0 / MHID: 0-07-298743-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-124472-5 / MHID: 0-07-124472-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/pierce04Pierce and Newstrom’s Leaders and the Leadership Process, 4eis a collection of readings, self-assessments, case studies andexperiential exercises on leadership intended to give studentsa feel for the breadth and richness of this study. This paperbackbook provides students with a sense of the complexity associatedwith leadership in organizations as well as an understanding ofthe pieces that serve to define leadership. The text encouragesstudents to engage in dialogue and to think critically about theleaders and the leadership process. Self-assessments, whichbegin most chapters of the book, encourage students to look attheir own personal leadership style. A capstone section of Applications,in the form of case studies and experiential exercises,asks students to move beyond theory to the practice of leadership.The authors use this combination of readings, self-assessments,and applications to create a “leadership mosaic” – onethat encourages students to examine the concepts, propositions,perspectives, and theories one at a time as it builds towards thestudents ultimate unique leadership mosaic.CONTENTSPrologue / Self-Assessment: Self-confidence: Generalized Self-efficacy /Reading 1 Perspective on Leadership from Homer’s Odyssey. F. KramerPart I: Readings Chapter 1: Introduction to Leadership Reading 2 Onthe Meaning of Leadership, J.L. Pierce and J.W. Newstrom Reading 3 AStudy of the Leadership Process, A..J. Murphy Reading 4 ContemporaryTrends in the Analysis of the Leadership Process, E.P. Hollander andJ.W. Julian Reading 5 Leadership: The Management of Meaning, L.Smircich and G. Morgan Chapter 2: The Leader-Follower Relationship:Fairness, Trust, and Ethics Self-Assessment: Leader-Member ExchangeSelf-Assessment: Organizational Justice Self-Assessment: Trust inLeadership Reading 6 Rethinking the Leader-Member Exchange: AnOrganizational Justice Perspective, T.A. Scandura Reading 7 Trust inLeadership and Team Performance, K.T. Dirks Reading 8 Leadership,Moral Development, and Citizenship Behavior, J.W. Graham Chapter3: Leaders and the Role of Personal Traits / Self Assessment: Positiveand Negative Affect / Self-Assessment: Leadership Motivation Reading9 Leadership: Do Traits Matter? S.A. Kirkpatrick and E.A. Locke Reading10 Personality and Leadership: A Qualitative and Quantitative Review,T.A. Judge, J.E. Bono, R. Ilies, and M.W. Gerhardt Chapter 4: Leadershipand the Role of Gender / Self-Assessment: Masculinity/Femininity /Reading 11 Effects of Sex and Gender Role on Leader Emergence, R. L.Kent and S.E. Moss Reading 12 Gender and Leadership Style: A Meta-Analysis, E.H. Eagly and B.T. Johnson Reading 13 Are AndrogynousManagers Really More Effective? G.L Baril, N. Elbert, S. Mahar-Potter,and G. C. Reavy Chapter 5: Leader Emergence / Self-Assessment: Self-Monitoring / Reading 14 Emergent Leadership and Social Influence,E.P. Hollander Reading 15 Who Gets Power – And How They Holdon to It: A Strategic Contingency Model of Power, G.R. Salancik and J.Pfeffer Reading 16 The Role of Self-Monitoring and Gender on LeaderEmergence: A Laboratory and Field Study, G.H. Dobbins, W.S. Long,E.J. Dedrick, and T.C. Clemons Chapter 6: Leadership as an Influence95HED 2007 Management.indd 9510/5/2006 1:24:25 PM

ManagementProcess / Self-Assessment: Influence Tactics / Self-Assessment: PersonalPower Profile / Reading 17 The Bases of Social Power, J.R.P. French,Jr. and B. Raven Reading 18 Consequences of Influence Tactics Usedwith Subordinates, Peers and the Boss, G. Yukl and J. B. Tracey Chapter7: Leadership and Leader Behaviors / Self-Assessment: Leadership– Michigan Organizational Assessment / Self-Assessment: InitiatingStructure and Consideration / Reading 19 Predicting OrganizationalEffectiveness with a Four-Factor Theory of Leadership, D.G. Bowersand S.E. Seashore Reading 20 Patterns of Leadership Behavior Relatedto Employee Grievances and Turnover, E.A. Fleishman and E.F. HarrisReading 21 Effects of Leader Warmth and Directiveness on SubordinatePerformance on a Subsequent Task, D. Tjosvold Chapter 8: Leadershipand Situational Differences / Self-Assessment: Least Preferred Co-Worker/ Self-Assessment: Need for Leadership / Reading 22 Path-Goal Theoryof Leadership, R. J. House and T. R. Mitchell Reading 23 How DoYou Make Leaders More Effective: New Answers to an Old Puzzle, F.E. Fiedler Reading 24 Situational Leadership ®, P. Hersey Reading 25A Multidirectional Approach toward Leadership: An Extension of theConcept of Behavioral Complexity, R. Hooijberg Reading 26 Need forLeadership as a Moderator of the Relationships between Leadershipand Individual Outcomes, R.E De Vries, R.A. Roe, and T.C.B. TaillieuChapter 9: Leadership in the Cross-Cultural Context / Self-Assessment:Individualism- Collectivism / Reading 27 Cultural Constraints in ManagementTheories, G. Hofstede Reading 28 Leadership in Western andAsian Countries: Commonalties and Differences in Effective LeadershipProcesses Across Cultures, P.W. Dorfman, J.P. Howell, S. Hibino, J.K.Lee, U. Tate, and A. Bautista Chapter 10: Followers and The LeadershipProcess Reading 29 The Reciprocal Nature of Influence BetweenLeader and Subordinate, C.N. Greene Reading 30 The Follower’sRole in Leadership Phenomena, F.H. Sanford Reading 31 Leadership,Followership, Self, and Others, E.P. Hollander Reading 32 EffectiveFollowership: Leadership Turned Upside Down, R.P. Vecchio Chapter11: Participative Leadership / Self-Assessment: Participatory LeadershipAttitudes / Reading 33 Supervisory Style and Productivity: Review AndTheory, S. M. Sales Reading 34 Leadership and the Decision-MakingProcess, V.H. Vroom Reading 35 Participation, Satisfaction, and Productivity:A Meta-Analytic Review, K.K. Miller and P.R. Monge Chapter 12:Leadership: Substitutes, Neutralizers, and Enhancers / Self-Assessment:Substitutes for Leadership / Self-Assessment: Group Cohesiveness /Self-Assessment: Organization-Based Self-Esteem (OBSE) / Reading 36Substitutes for Leadership: Their Meaning and Measurement, S. Kerr andJ.M. Jermier Reading 37 Substitutes for Leadership: Effective Alternativesto Ineffective Leadership, J.P. Howell, D.E. Bowen, P.W. Dorfman, S.Kerr and P.M. Podsakoff Chapter 13: Leadership and Work Teams /Self-Assessment: Emotional Intelligence / Reading 38 Emotional Intelligenceas the Basis of Leadership Emergence in Self-Managing Teams,S.B. Wolff, A.T. Pescosolido, and V.U. Druskat Reading 39 Leadershipfor Self-Managing Work Teams: A Typology and Integrative Model, G.L.Stewart and C.C. Manz Reading 40 Leadership and Semi-AutonomousWork Team Performance, M.S. O’Connell, D. Doverspike, and A.B.Cober Chapter 14: Charismatic and Transformational Leadership / Self-Assessment: Transformational and Charismatic Leadership / Reading41 A 1976 Theory of Charismatic Leadership, R.J. House Reading 42Toward a Behavioral Theory of Charismatic Leadership, J. A. Congerand R.N. Kanungo Reading 43 The Motivational Effects of CharismaticLeadership: A Self-Concept Based Theory, B. Shamir, R.J. House andM.B. Arthur Reading 44 The Two Faces of Transformational Leadership:Empowerment and Dependency, R. Kark, B. Shamir, and G. ChenReading 45 Transformational Leader Behaviors and Their Effects onFollowers’ Trust in Leader, Satisfaction, and Organizational CitizenshipBehaviors, P.M. Podsakoff, S. B. MacKenzie, R. H. Moorman, and R.Fetter Chapter 15: Dysfunctional Aspects of Leadership / Self-Assessment:Machiavellianism / Reading 46 The Dark Side of Leadership,J.A. Conger Reading 47 Narcissism and Leadership: An Object RelationsPerspective, M.F. R. Kets de Vries and D. Miller. Chapter 16: Does LeadershipReally Make a Difference? Point: Leadership is but a Mirage—ItReally Does Not Make a Difference Counterpoint: Leadership ReallyDoes Make a Difference Reading 48 The Ambiguity of Leadership, J.Pfeffer Reading 49 Executive Leadership and Organizational Performance:Suggestions for a New Theory and Methodology, D.V. Day andR. G. Lord. Part II Beyond Theory and Into the Practice of LeadershipApplications: Case Studies and Experiential Exercises / Sam Perkins / ADifferent Style of Leadership / Donny is My Leader / What You See is(Not Necessarily) What You Get: Connecting Observations of Leadership/ Figures to Inferences / Exploring Leadership Beliefs / TinkertoyConstruction / Choosing a Leader / Characteristics of Superior Leaders /Leader-Subordinate Friendships (LSFs) / Leadership (Locker-Room) Talks/ Follow the Leader / Probing Metaphors for their Leadership Lessons/ Leadership through Film: Power and Influence / Deriving LeadershipLessons from The Lion King / Exploding Leadership Beliefs / IdentifyingCausal Connections / Generating Leadership LessonsLEADERSHIP MADE EASYBy Randall D Ponder2006 / 280 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-932-53159-6 / MHID: 1-932-53159-9A Professional Reference TitleLeadership Made Easy identifies 15 essential leadership skillsand provides step-by-step instructions on how to develop anduse them, rather than focusing on inspirational leadershipstories or leadership theory. The author discusses challengesthat a leader might face and offers easily implemented, taskorientedsolutionsLEADING CORPORATE CITIZENS2nd EditionBy Sandra Waddock, Boston College2006 / 480 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287949-0 / MHID: 0-07-287949-1Leading Corporate Citizens, Second Edition, explores the insight,vision, values, and learning that it takes to add enough valuesto a company so that it becomes a leading corporate citizen.This innovative text operates at three levels of leadership:individual, organizational, and societal. The premise is thatbusinesses operate successfully in society when they respectand are responsible to stakeholders, a balance is needed amongsectors in society and with nature, and that vision and valuescan result in distinctive competencies that lead to value-addedfor companies of the 21st century.CONTENTSPart 1—A Context for Leading Corporate Citizens 1. Leading CorporateCitizenship: Vision, Values, Value Added 2. The Three Spheres ofHuman Civilization Part 2—Leading Corporate Citizens with Vision,Values, and Value Added 3. Personal and Organizational Vision 4.Values in Management Practice: Operating with Integrity 5. ValueAdded: The Impact of Vision and Values 6. Stakeholders: The RelationshipKey Part 3—Leading Corporate Citizens and their Stakeholders7. Managing Corporate Responsibility and Corporate Citizenship 8.Investment and Assessment for Corporate Citizenship 9. Sustainabilityand the Global Village Part 4—Leading Corporate Citizens into theFuture 10. Global Standards – Global Village 11. Values Added: GlobalFutures 12. Leading Global Futures: The Emerging Paradigm of LeadingCorporate CitizenshipGET REALEmpower the Manager-Leader WithinBy Andrew EB Tani2002 / 368 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-120237-4 / MHID: 0-07-120237-4An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference TitleThe book is a ground-breaking effort to help managers becomemore effective at influencing people, the essence of leadership.More accurately, it will help the reader become a managerleaderwho produces sustainable results by stirring, showing,developing, reinforcing and bringing co-workers to the conclusionthat they are working for their own interest when they givetheir best to the team and the business that keeps them going.96HED 2007 Management.indd 9610/5/2006 1:24:25 PM

International EditionNegotiationNEWESSENTIALS OF NEGOTIATION4th EditionBy Roy J. Lewicki, Ohio State University, David M. Saunders,University of Calgary, Bruce Barry, Vanderbilt University — Nashvilleand John W. Minton, Havatar Associates2007 (April 2006) / 288 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310276-4 / MHID: 0-07-310276-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125427-4 / MHID: 0-07-125427-7 [IE]ESSENTIALS OF NEGOTIATION, 4e is a short paperback derivativefrom the main text, NEGOTIATION, 5e. It explores themajor concepts and theories of the psychology of bargainingand negotiation, and the dynamics of interpersonal and intergroupconflict and its resolution. Fourteen of the 20 chaptersfrom the main text have been included (about half have beenshortened by about 1/3) for this volume. Chapters are shortenedby removing more ‘academic’ material and some of the boxes.This effectively leaves the message and theories of negotiationintact.NEW TO THIS EDITION• All chapters have been revised from the 3rd edition of Essentials ofNegotiation. New chapters from Negotiation, 5e have also been added(on communication, influence, negotiation in relationships, and teams)to reflect the revision of Negotiation, 5e.A brand new summary chapter on Best Practices in Negotiation. Inthis chapter, the author team offers their words of wisdom gatheredfrom years of experience in negotiation. It is constructed around tenbest practices:1) Be Prepared2) Diagnose the fundamental structure of the negotiation3) Work the BANTA4) Be willing to walk away5) Master paradoxes6) Remember the intangibles7) Actively manage coalitions8) Savor and protect your reputation9) Remember that rationality and fairness are relative10) continue to learn from the experienceUp to date research to support the key points of each chapter. Two ofthe best examples of this research are found in chapters 8 (on Influence)and 10 (on Relationships). Both are new practices in negotiations. Theentire Negotiation line is based around up-to-date coverage of the researchfield. This form of presentation is far more comprehensive andauthoritative than a trade book (which comprises the majority of thecompetition). Completely revised instructor’s manual featuring a newTest Bank chapter outlines and PowerPoints. This edition is designed tobe more closely coordinated with the Negotiation: Readings, Exercisesand Cases text. -The Readings in REC are now aggregated to matchNegotiation, 5e part for part. This lends itself to the Essentials text as itis a more concise version of the main text.FEATURES• Expanded sections on framing dynamics and on the planning process.How parties frame the conflict, and how they prepare for negotiation,have been demonstrated as essential for understanding how a disputeevolves.• Revised chapters on integrative negotiation, cognitive biases, power,ethics in negotiation, and processes by which negotiating parties canresolve their own disputes.• With the low cost and short length of Essentials, it makes a greatpackage with Negotiation: Readings, Cases and Exercises.• The text explores major concepts and theories of bargaining andnegotiation in a succinct format. It is relevant to the broad spectrum ofnegotiation problems that are traditionally faced by mangers.• The full chapter on the Nature of Negotiation (chapter 1) provides animportant overview and introduction to the topic of negotiation.• Application Boxes and cartoons make the text more enjoyable andreadable.CONTENTSChapter 1 – The Nature of Negotiation. Chapter 2 – Strategy and Tacticsof Distributive Bargaining. Chapter 3 – Strategy and Tactics of IntegrativeNegotiation. Chapter 4 – Negotiation, Strategy and Planning. Chapter5 – Perception, Cognition and Emotion. Chapter 6 – Communication.Chapter 7 – Finding and Using Negotiation Power. Chapter 8 – Influence.Chapter 9 – Ethics in Negotiation. Chapter 10 – Relationshipsin negotiation. Chapter 11 – Multiple Parties and Teams. Chapter 12– International and Cross-cultural Negotiation. Chapter 13 – ManagingNegotiation Impasses. Chapter 14 – Best Practices in NegotiationInternational EditionManagementNEWNEGOTIATIONReadings, Exercises and Cases, 5th EditionBy Roy Lewicki, Ohio State University, David Saunders, University ofCalgary, John Minton, Pfeiffer University and Bruce Barry,Vanderbilt University2007 (February 2006) / 768 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297310-5 / MHID: 0-07-297310-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125428-1 / MHID: 0-07-125428-5 [IE]Negotiation is a critical skill needed for effective management.NEGOTIATION: READINGS EXERCISES, AND CASES, 5/e takesan experiential approach and explores the major concepts andtheories of the psychology of bargaining and negotiation, andthe dynamics of interpersonal and inter-group conflict and itsresolution. It is relevant to a broad spectrum of managementstudents, not only human resource management or industrialrelations candidates. It contains approximately 50 readings, 32exercises, 9 cases and 5 questionnaires.NEW TO THIS EDITION• The Readings section has been updated with about 40% NEWreadings.-New readings are included on preparation for negotiation, collaborativestrategy, persuasion, negotiator ethics, trust, negotiation by agents,gender and negotiation, cross-cultural negotiation and dealing with“problem” opponents.• There is about 30% NEW content in the Role Play, Questionnaireand Cases sections.-The Questionnaires are designed as self-assessment activities coveringtopics such as: Trust, Ethics, Communication Competence and more. Allof these topics relate back to negotiation skills and practices.• This edition is designed to be more closely coordinated with theEssentials version of this text.-The Readings are now aggregated to match a completely reorganizedNegotiation, 5e textbook, part for part. This organization also lendsitself to the revised 4e Essentials text, as it is a more concise versionof the main text.FEATURES• Exercises are streamlined and presented in a new format making iteasier for the students to understand the concepts.97HED 2007 Management.indd 9710/5/2006 1:24:26 PM

Management• Coordinated text and reader provides professors and students witha fully integrated learning system.• Easy to duplicate exercise material in the Instructors Manual (IM).The IM for Negotiation: REC, 5e contains files that are designed to beprinted, copied and handed out without the complications of re-formattingor re-typing. This tool will save users a lot of time.• Full background information on how to design and teach a negotiationcourse is provided in the Instructors Manual.• Reproducible masters for debriefing most exercises and cases arelocated in the IM online.CONTENTSSection 1: Negotiation Fundamentals. Section 2: Negotiation Subprocesses.Seciton 3: Negotiation Contexts. Section 4: Individual Differences.Section 5: Negotiation across Cultures. Section 6: Resolving Difference.Section 7: Summary. Exercises. Cases. Questionaireseconomies in Asia: China, Japan and India. Using a case studyapproach, the book presents an incisive analysis of the successesand failures in cross-cultural negotiations. Further, it providesvaluable insights that will deepen negotiators’ understanding ofcross-cultural negotiations as well as strengthen negotiators’ capabilityto deal with major issues in cross-cultural negotiations.The book is designed to: 1. Present the strategies, techniques,and dynamics of the negotiation process, 2. Elaborate on keycultural values and norms in China, Japan, and India, 3. Drawkey lessons on negotiating strategies in various cultures fromdetailed case studies, 4. Marry cross-cultural research frameworkand research findings with practitioners’ negotiating experience,5. Present a F.R.A.M.E. approach for cross-cultural analysis ofnegotiations with the Chinese, Japanese, and Indians, and 6.Offer practical negotiation tips (the dos and don’ts) for crossculturalnegotiation.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction to Negotiation and Culture Chapter 2: Negotiatingwith the Chinese Chapter 3: Negotiating with the Japanese Chapter4: Negotiating with the Indians Chapter 5: Cross-case Analysis - TheF.R.A.M.E. Approach to Strategic Negotiation Chapter 6: The Dos andDont’s in NegotiationsInternational EditionNEGOTIATION5th EditionBy Roy Lewicki, Ohio State University, Bruce Barry, VanderbiltUniversity—Nashville and David Saunders, University of Calgary2006 / 522 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297307-5 / MHID: 0-07-297307-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124460-2 / MHID: 0-07-124460-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lewickinegotationNegotiation is a critical skill needed for effective management.NEGOTIATION 5/e explores the major concepts andtheories of the psychology of bargaining and negotiation, andthe dynamics of interpersonal and intergroup conflict and itsresolution. It is relevant to a broad spectrum of managementstudents, not only human resource management or industrialrelations candidates.CONTENTS1. The Nature of Negotiation 2. Strategy and Tactics of DistributiveBargaining 3. Strategy and Tactics of Integrative Negotiation 4. NegotiationStrategy and Planning 5. Perception, Cognition and Emotion 6.Communication 7. Finding and Using Negotiation Power 8. Influence9. Ethics in Negotiation 10. Relationships in Negotiation 11. Audiences,Constituencies, Agents 12. Coalitions 13. Multiple Parties and Teams14. Individual Differences I: Gender and Negotiation 15. IndividualDifferences II: Personality and Abilities 16. International and Cross-Cultural Negotiation 17. Managing Negotiation Impasses 18. ManagingNegotiation Mismatches 19. Managing Difficult Negotiations: ThirdParty Approaches 20. Concluding CommentsSTRATEGIES FOR CROSS-CULTURAL NEGOTIATIONBy Tan Joo Seng and Elizabeth NK Lim2004 / 228 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-123478-8 / MHID: 0-07-123478-0An Asian PublicationThis book is about strategic negotiation across cultures. It iswritten for negotiators and students of negotiation who seekto understand the principles and processes of cross-culturalnegotiation and develop effective strategies for negotiating indifferent cultures. This book takes a completely different approachin the analysis of cross-border negotiations by examiningthe negotiations of US multinational companies in three majorSmall Business ManagementInternational EditionNEWENTREPRENEURIAL SMALL BUSINESSBy Jerry Katz, St Louis University2007 (December 2005) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296798-2 / MHID: 0-07-296798-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325795-2 / MHID: 0-07-325795-8(with Student CD and OLC)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110856-0 / MHID: 0-07-110856-4[IE with OLC and Premium Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/katzesbThis book is geared to give students a clear vision of small businessas it really is today. It focuses on the kinds of businessesthat students might actually start, instead of giving informationabout high growth firms. The goals of the companies describedin this text are personal independence with financial security,not market dominance with extreme wealth. Traditional beliefsand models in small business are discussed, as well as the latestfindings and best practices from academic and consulting arenas.ESB recognizes the distinction between entrepreneurs who aimto start the successor to Amazon.com or the pizza place on thecorner and focuses on the challenges facing entrepreneurs, whilekeeping focused on the small businesses they plan to create orenter. Most postsecondary school graduates are now startingsmall business, not high-growth or high-tech entrepreneurialfirms. This book addresses the need to focus on the distinctivenature of small business.FEATURES• Entrepreneurial Small Business focuses on the reality of how smallbusinesses get started by including a separate chapter on part-timebusinesses, Chapter 5: Paths to Part-Time Entrepreneurship. Part-timebusinesses are tremendously important as they are a major portion ofall current entrepreneurship and the way most people enter into selfemployment.This chapter discusses the benefits and challenges ofpart-time entrepreneurship.98HED 2007 Management.indd 9810/5/2006 1:24:26 PM

Management• Entrepreneurial Small Business has a separate chapter on cash,Chapter 14: Cash: Lifeblood of the Business. All small businesses mustunderstand how to manage the business’s cash flow. This chapter focuseson the basics of cash, budgets, shortages, and strategies to dealwith cash flow problems.• Skill Modules are included in every chapter help students understandand practice critical competencies for small business owners. Resources,techniques, and suggestions are included that students can use as theyplan or grow their small business. Examples include: Competency Self-Assessment, Steps to EBay Success, Building a Customer Base, Sweetand Short Industry Analysis, and The Art of Closing.• Small Business Insights and The Thoughtful Entrepreneur are twoboxes included throughout the chapters. Small Business Insights give‘under the radar’ advice from real small business owners, and helpfulstatistics from small businesses around the country. The ThoughtfulEntrepreneur boxes give advice for students who want to learn morethan the basics. They include examples of what works well (or whatdoesn’t work) from experienced small business owners.• Outstanding business plan supports including two sample businessplans -wedding planning and boat detailing- included in the text, withnine outstanding student-written business plans included online atwww.mhhe.com/katzesb. Online plans include a manufacturer, anautomotive wholesaler, a construction firm, a construction service firm,a franchise restaurant, a pizzeria, a record company, a retail store, andan online retailer.• Coverage of the classic topics in small business plus the latest research.Examples include entrepreneurial personality, the 4 P’s of Marketing,the 4 C’s of Borrowing and Porter’s Five Forces integrated withcoverage of essential topics for small business small business success youwill find nowhere else, such as network building, negotiating, buildinglegitimacy, crisis management, and pursuing funding that students willactually get (not just debt & equity, but also gifts).• Net-savvy support including the only authorized in-book examples ofGoogle searches showing students the key search techniques for smallbusiness owners. URLs in the margins point students to helpful smallbusiness resources, and support for online businesses and eBay salesintegrated throughout the book.• The end-of-chapter material includes a detailed summary bulletedby chapter objective, to help students review the chapter material andstudy for tests; a mini-case so that students can apply the lessons ofthe chapter; experiential exercises students can complete to get moreinformation on the chapter topic, look for additional resources, andto help build their competencies in a certain aspect of small businessownership; and discussion questions that can be given as assignmentsor that can be used for in-class discussion. Suggested answers to thediscussion questions are included in the Instructor’s Manual.• Support for the full range of class projects including business plans,but also including full-length, student developed examples such as aFeasibility Study, Industry Analysis, Elevator Pitch, Cover Letter, Resume,and Marketing Plan.• Unprecedented support for student field projects with dedicatedend-of-book appendices covering SIFE-style free enterprise communitydevelopment projects and SBIDA-style student consulting projects tosmall businesses. Six helpful appendices are included throughout thebook including Feasibility Study, Industry Analysis, The Elevator Pitch,Marketing Plan, Reconciling Bank Statements, and EOQ/Ordering.These appendices closely follow the information in the chapters, offeringstudents the clearest possible idea of how the chapter’s approachapplies in their own work.• A longer case for each chapter (20 total) is included at the end of thetext. These cases offer additional opportunities for students to analyzesituations and apply the lessons of each chapter in a carefully crafted casedrawn from real-world small business. The Instructor’s Manual providessuggestions on how to use and discuss each of these cases.• ‘Focus on Small Business’ opening vignettes begin each chapter highlightingan entrepreneur and their small business. Discussion questionsare included for students to consider as they read the chapter.• Entrepreneurial Small Business provides instructor’s with a comprehensivesupplement package. A comprehensive instructor’s manual,test bank, PowerPoint presentation and a complete Online LearningCenter make course preparation easy.CONTENTSPart 1 Entrepreneurs, Ideas and Plans: The Basis of Small BusinessChapter 1 The Heart of Small Business Chapter 2 Small Business Ethics:A Key to Long-Term Success Chapter 3 Small Business Entrepreneurs:Characteristics and Competencies Chapter 4 Creativity, Opportunity,and Feasibility Appendix: Feasibility Study Chapter 5 Paths to Part-TimeEntrepreneurship Chapter 6 Paths of Entry into Small Business Chapter7 Imitation with a Twist: Uniquely Small Business Strategies for SuccessAppendix: Industry Analysis Chapter 8 Business Plans: Seeing Audiencesand Your Business Clearly Appendix: The Elevator Pitch Part 2 Marketingin the Small Business Chapter 9 Product and Pricing Chapter 10Promotion: Capturing the Eyes of Your Market Chapter 11 Distributionand Location Chapter 12 Marketing Plans: Saying How You’ll Get SalesAppendix (TBD) Marketing Plan Part 3 Cash, Accounting, and Financein the Small Business Chapter 13 Accounting for Small Business Chapter14 Cash: Lifeblood of the Business Chapter 15 Finance for Small BusinessChapter 16 Assets: Inventory and Operations Management Chapter 17Protection: Handling Risks Using Management and Insurance Part 4Management and Organization in the Small Business Chapter 18 LegalIssues in the Small Business Chapter 19 Human Resource Managementin the Small Business Chapter 20 Achieving Success in the Small Business.Appendices. Cases. Glossary. Endnotes. Photo Credits. Indexes.International EditionSMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENTAn Entrepreneur’s Guidebook, 5th EditionBy Leon Megginson and Mary Jane Byrd of University of Mobile andWilliam L Megginson, University of Oklahoma-Norman2006 / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297256-6 / MHID: 0-07-297256-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124464-0 / MHID: 0-07-124464-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/megginson5eOperating any business is complex and challenging, but it providesinteresting, creative, and rewarding experiences. SmallBusiness Management, Fifth Edition, takes a practical and downto-earthapproach to planning, organizing, and running a smallbusiness. While employing current research and theory, SmallBusiness Management takes a pragmatic “how-to” perspectiveillustrating many practical examples and applications from thebusiness world. It explains how to achieve optimum benefitsfrom the limited resources available to small firms, as well ashow to plan for growth and succession in a business. It alsoexplores arguments both for and against owning a small business.All three authors, Megginson, Byrd and Megginson, havehad meaningful experiences in the “real world” as an owner,manager or employee of one or more small businesses.CONTENTSPART I The Dynamic Role Of Small Business Chapter 1 The GrowingImportance of Small Business Chapter 2 Challenging Opportunities inSmall Business Chapter 3 Forms of Ownership of Small Business PARTII How To Plan And Organize A Business Chapter 4 Becoming theOwner of a Small Business Chapter 5 Planning, Organizing and Managinga Small Business Chapter 6 How to Obtain the Right Financing forYour Business PART III How To Market Goods and Services Chapter7 Developing Marketing Strategies Chapter 8 Promoting and DistributingPART IV How To Organize and Manage the Business Chapter 9How to Obtain and Manage Human Resources and Diversity in SmallCompanies Chapter 10 Maintaining Good Relationships with YourEmployees and Their Representatives PART V How To Operate TheBusiness Chapter 11 Obtaining and Laying Out Operating FacilitiesChapter 12 Purchasing, Inventory, and Quality Control PART VI BasicFinancial Planning and Control Chapter 13 Profit Planning Chapter99HED 2007 Management.indd 9910/5/2006 1:24:26 PM

Management14 Budgeting and Controlling Operations and Taxes Chapter 15 UsingComputer Technology in Small Businesses PART VII Providing SecurityFor The Business Chapter 16 Risk Management, Insurance, and CrimePrevention Chapter 17 Maintaining Good Government Relations andBusiness Ethics Chapter 18 Planning for the Future of Family-OwnedBusinessesInternational EditionEntrepreneurshipNEWENTREPRENEURSHIP7th EditionBy Robert Hisrich, University Case Western Reserve2008 (October 2006) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-321056-8 / MHID: 0-07-321056-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331373-3 / MHID: 0-07-331373-4(with Online Learning Center Access Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110332-9 / MHID: 0-07-110332-5 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hisrich7eEntrepreneurship, by Robert Hisrich, Michael Peters and DeanShepherd has been designed to clearly instruct students onthe process of formulating, planning, and implementing anew venture. Students are exposed to detailed descriptions of‘how to’ embark on a new venture in a logical manner. Comprehensivecases at the end of the text have been hand-pickedby the authors to go hand-in-hand with chapter concepts. Thesuperb author team of Hisrich, Peters, and Shepherd drawfrom their distinct backgrounds to create a book that addressesthe dynamics of today’s entrepreneurial challenges. From BobHisrich’s expertise in global entrepreneurship to Mike Peter’sbackground as a both a real-life entrepreneur and academic toDean Shepherd’s current research on cognition and entrepreneurialmindset, this book balances the crucial line betweenmodern theory and practice.NEW TO THIS EDITION• There is increased coverage of the entrepreneurial mindset in Chapter2 as well as coverage of effectuation and cognition.• Chapter 6 has a focus on intellectual property issues as well as legalissues. There are major updates in the laws related to patents, trademarks,and copyrights and the role of the internet as a search tool andfor downloading material for filing. The material on the Sarbanes-OxleyAct has also been updated.• Chapter 10, The Financial Plan, has been improved by includinga simple example of a small manufacturer preparing a budget that iscarried throughout the chapter to make the financial section easier forstudents to understand. From the budget students can see how the entrepreneurdevelops the proforma statements (income statement, cashflow statement, and balance sheet). All of the numbers are based onthe one simple example making it much easier for students to followand to understand how each statement is prepared. A break even is alsocalculated for this same example.• New Chapter 15, Going Global, addresses the important area ofglobal entrepreneurship. In this new chapter, motivations to go globalare addressed and strategic issues and important considerations in goingglobal are discussed. Entrepreneurial entry strategies in entering a newcountry are presented and entrepreneurial partnering is addressed.• Chapter 17, Ending the Venture, has been updated to include newregulations regarding bankruptcy. There is a stronger emphasis on thesuccession of the business with a table on succession planning tips.In addition, the authors have added a section on “Options for Sellingthe Business” which includes actual steps or strategies on selling theventure.• New end-of-part cases have been added (17 total cases) to make thetext as current as possible. New cases include Gril-Kleen Corporationwhich emphasizes product development and market selection for astart-up firm, and Top Human which is a Chinese company run by a veryhigh potential woman entrepreneur focusing on starting and expandingtheir business in China.• New Ethics boxes... including Ch. 6 that focuses on the legal issuesrelated to file sharing and downloading of musicFEATURES• “As Seen in Entrepreneur Magazine” boxes are article excerpts fromEntrepreneur magazine that present current topics in entrepreneurshipand allow students to analyze business opportunities and adviseentrepreneurs.• Research tasks and class discussion questions at the end of eachchapter encourage thinking and classroom debate.• A strong and up-to-date marketing chapter that emphasizes customerservice, stronger marketing research and market segmentation.• Hisrich/Peters/Shepherd maintains it’s renowned “from start to finishapproach.” This comprehensive text starts with entrepreneurial culture,onto the new venture strategies, financing the venture, and managingthe ending the venture. After each of the four parts are 4 to 5 cases thatmatch chapter content.• Hisrich places an increased emphasis on the presentation of thebusiness plan to investors, the management team, and forecasting salesin the early stages of the start-up.• As in previous editions, the 7th edition not only integrates internationalcoverage throughout the text but also contains a chapter dealingin International issues, a must for any textbook in this era.CONTENTSPART 1 THE ENTREPRENEURIAL PERSPECTIVE 1 The Nature andImportance of Entrepreneurship 2 The Entrepreneurial Mind-Set 3 EntrepreneurialIntentions and Corporate Entrepreneurship 4 InternationalEntrepreneurship Opportunities PART 2 CREATING AND STARTINGTHE VENTURE 5 Creativity, the Business Idea, and Opportunity Analysis6 Intellectual Property and Other Legal Issues for the Entrepreneur 7 TheBusiness Plan: Creating and Starting the Venture 8 The Marketing Plan9 The Organizational Plan 10 The Financial Plan PART 3 FINANCINGTHE NEW VENTURE 11 Sources of Capital 12 Informal Risk Capital,Venture Capital, and Going Public PART 4 MANAGING, GROWING,AND ENDING THE NEW VENTURE 13 Entrepreneurial Strategy: Generatingand Exploiting New Entries 14 Strategies for Growth and Managingthe Implications of Growth 15 Going Global 16 Accessing Resourcesfor Growth from External Sources 17 Ending the VentureINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg100HED 2007 Management.indd 10010/5/2006 1:24:26 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWENTREPRENEURIAL SMALL BUSINESSBy Jerry Katz, St Louis University2007 (December 2005) / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296798-2 / MHID: 0-07-296798-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325795-2 / MHID: 0-07-325795-8(with Student CD and OLC)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110856-0 / MHID: 0-07-110856-4[IE with OLC and Premium Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/katzesbThis book is geared to give students a clear vision of small businessas it really is today. It focuses on the kinds of businessesthat students might actually start, instead of giving informationabout high growth firms. The goals of the companies describedin this text are personal independence with financial security,not market dominance with extreme wealth. Traditional beliefsand models in small business are discussed, as well as the latestfindings and best practices from academic and consulting arenas.ESB recognizes the distinction between entrepreneurs who aimto start the successor to Amazon.com or the pizza place on thecorner and focuses on the challenges facing entrepreneurs, whilekeeping focused on the small businesses they plan to create orenter. Most postsecondary school graduates are now startingsmall business, not high-growth or high-tech entrepreneurialfirms. This book addresses the need to focus on the distinctivenature of small business.FEATURES• Entrepreneurial Small Business focuses on the reality of how smallbusinesses get started by including a separate chapter on part-timebusinesses, Chapter 5: Paths to Part-Time Entrepreneurship. Part-timebusinesses are tremendously important as they are a major portion ofall current entrepreneurship and the way most people enter into selfemployment.This chapter discusses the benefits and challenges ofpart-time entrepreneurship.• Entrepreneurial Small Business has a separate chapter on cash,Chapter 14: Cash: Lifeblood of the Business. All small businesses mustunderstand how to manage the business’s cash flow. This chapter focuseson the basics of cash, budgets, shortages, and strategies to dealwith cash flow problems.• Skill Modules are included in every chapter help students understandand practice critical competencies for small business owners. Resources,techniques, and suggestions are included that students can use as theyplan or grow their small business. Examples include: Competency Self-Assessment, Steps to EBay Success, Building a Customer Base, Sweetand Short Industry Analysis, and The Art of Closing.• Small Business Insights and The Thoughtful Entrepreneur are twoboxes included throughout the chapters. Small Business Insights give‘under the radar’ advice from real small business owners, and helpfulstatistics from small businesses around the country. The ThoughtfulEntrepreneur boxes give advice for students who want to learn morethan the basics. They include examples of what works well (or whatdoesn’t work) from experienced small business owners.• Outstanding business plan supports including two sample businessplans -wedding planning and boat detailing- included in the text, withnine outstanding student-written business plans included online atwww.mhhe.com/katzesb. Online plans include a manufacturer, anautomotive wholesaler, a construction firm, a construction service firm,a franchise restaurant, a pizzeria, a record company, a retail store, andan online retailer.• Net-savvy support including the only authorized in-book examples ofGoogle searches showing students the key search techniques for smallbusiness owners. URLs in the margins point students to helpful smallbusiness resources, and support for online businesses and eBay salesintegrated throughout the book.• The end-of-chapter material includes a detailed summary bulletedby chapter objective, to help students review the chapter material andstudy for tests; a mini-case so that students can apply the lessons ofthe chapter; experiential exercises students can complete to get moreinformation on the chapter topic, look for additional resources, andto help build their competencies in a certain aspect of small businessownership; and discussion questions that can be given as assignmentsor that can be used for in-class discussion. Suggested answers to thediscussion questions are included in the Instructor’s Manual.• Support for the full range of class projects including business plans,but also including full-length, student developed examples such as aFeasibility Study, Industry Analysis, Elevator Pitch, Cover Letter, Resume,and Marketing Plan.• Unprecedented support for student field projects with dedicatedend-of-book appendices covering SIFE-style free enterprise communitydevelopment projects and SBIDA-style student consulting projects tosmall businesses. Six helpful appendices are included throughout thebook including Feasibility Study, Industry Analysis, The Elevator Pitch,Marketing Plan, Reconciling Bank Statements, and EOQ/Ordering.These appendices closely follow the information in the chapters, offeringstudents the clearest possible idea of how the chapter’s approachapplies in their own work.• A longer case for each chapter (20 total) is included at the end of thetext. These cases offer additional opportunities for students to analyzesituations and apply the lessons of each chapter in a carefully crafted casedrawn from real-world small business. The Instructor’s Manual providessuggestions on how to use and discuss each of these cases.• ‘Focus on Small Business’ opening vignettes begin each chapter highlightingan entrepreneur and their small business. Discussion questionsare included for students to consider as they read the chapter.• Entrepreneurial Small Business provides instructor’s with a comprehensivesupplement package. A comprehensive instructor’s manual,test bank, PowerPoint presentation and a complete Online LearningCenter make course preparation easy.CONTENTSPart 1 Entrepreneurs, Ideas and Plans: The Basis of Small BusinessChapter 1 The Heart of Small Business Chapter 2 Small Business Ethics:A Key to Long-Term Success Chapter 3 Small Business Entrepreneurs:Characteristics and Competencies Chapter 4 Creativity, Opportunity,and Feasibility Appendix: Feasibility Study Chapter 5 Paths to Part-TimeEntrepreneurship Chapter 6 Paths of Entry into Small Business Chapter7 Imitation with a Twist: Uniquely Small Business Strategies for SuccessAppendix: Industry Analysis Chapter 8 Business Plans: Seeing Audiencesand Your Business Clearly Appendix: The Elevator Pitch Part 2 Marketingin the Small Business Chapter 9 Product and Pricing Chapter 10Promotion: Capturing the Eyes of Your Market Chapter 11 Distributionand Location Chapter 12 Marketing Plans: Saying How You’ll Get SalesAppendix (TBD) Marketing Plan Part 3 Cash, Accounting, and Financein the Small Business Chapter 13 Accounting for Small Business Chapter14 Cash: Lifeblood of the Business Chapter 15 Finance for Small BusinessChapter 16 Assets: Inventory and Operations Management Chapter 17Protection: Handling Risks Using Management and Insurance Part 4Management and Organization in the Small Business Chapter 18 LegalIssues in the Small Business Chapter 19 Human Resource Managementin the Small Business Chapter 20 Achieving Success in the Small Business.Appendices. Cases. Glossary. Endnotes. Photo Credits. Indexes.• Coverage of the classic topics in small business plus the latest research.Examples include entrepreneurial personality, the 4 P’s of Marketing,the 4 C’s of Borrowing and Porter’s Five Forces integrated withcoverage of essential topics for small business small business success youwill find nowhere else, such as network building, negotiating, buildinglegitimacy, crisis management, and pursuing funding that students willactually get (not just debt & equity, but also gifts).101HED 2007 Management.indd 10110/5/2006 1:24:27 PM

ManagementNEWENTREPRENEURSHIP2nd EditionBy David Kirby, University of Surrey2007 (March 2007) / 350 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710827-4 / MHID: 0-07-710827-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleCONTENTSSection 1—Entrepreneurship and the Environment Chapter 1~Approachesto the Study of Entrepreneurship Chapter 2 ~The Role ofEntrepreneurship in the Economy and Society Chapter 3~Influences onEntrepreneurship Development Chapter 4~Support for EntrepreneurshipDevelopment Section 2—Entrepreneurship and the Person Chapter5~The Nature, Characteristics and Behaviour of the Entrepreneur Chapter6~Entrepreneurship, Creativity and Innovation Chapter 7~Entrepreneurship,Motivation and Leadership Chapter 8~Entrepreneurship,Team Building and Conflict Resolution Section 3—Entrepreneurshipand the Organization Chapter 9~The Entrepreneurial New VentureChapter 10~New Venture Planning and Creation Chapter 11~RetainingEntrepreneurship as the Venture Grows Chapter 12~ Intrapreneurship:Developing Entrepreneurship in Large Organizations• The 6th edition has a very heavy focus on the entrepreneur as a generalmanager. The entrepreneur is more than just the creator of a thoughtor product; they must be proficient in managing the entire businessfrom product to staff and strategic process. Students will gain the skillsneeded to grasp and implement the general managerial responsibilitiesrequired to be a successful entrepreneur.• New Business Ventures is based on the new required first year coursein entrepreneurship at Harvard Business School.FEATURES• New Business Ventures maintains focus on the entrepreneur overthe life cycle of the venture, not just start-up.• The fundamental approach is summed up in four aspects of theentrepreneurial environment- high uncertainty, rapid growth, radicalchange and limited resources. These areas combined make-up theenvironment in which entrepreneurial managers must operate andthrive to succeed.• Roberts, 6e helps students to understand how entrepreneurs think.This includes concept, development, funding and generally how toreduce uncertainties.• This text does not simply focus on the few tech giants. Rather, thecases selected to include a great variety of industries and businesses.Some industries and circumstances that are included: fruit juice, genomics,real estate, software, manufacturing, services, start-ups, leveragedbuy-outs, ventures backed by investors and those funded by creditcard debt.International EditionNEW• All major sources of capital are covered, including: friends and family,angel investors, venture capital firms, commercial lending institutionsand regional and global investment bankers.NEW BUSINESS VENTURES AND THEENTREPRENEUR6th EditionBy Michael Roberts, Howard H Stevenson, William Sahlman, PaulMarshall and Richard Hamermesh of Harvard Business School2007 (July 2006) / 648 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340497-4 / MHID: 0-07-340497-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125812-8 / MHID: 0-07-125812-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/roberts6eRoberts’ New Business Ventures and the Entrepreneur, 6e standsout as a text designed to guide tomorrow’s entrepreneurs downthe difficult road ahead. Specifically, the Roberts team addressesthe entrepreneur before, during and after the decision to create anew venture. Entrepreneurs need to realize that they are assuminga managerial role- both in a product and people sense. NewBusiness Ventures, 6e will leave students with the skills neededto grasp and implement the general managerial responsibilitiesrequired to be a successful entrepreneur. The text provides aninnovative approach to teaching the core general managementskills via the lens of the entrepreneur. The course upon whichthis book I based is now the new core required course in generalmanagement at Harvard Business School.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Over 90% of the cases are NEW to this edition! All cases are interesting,challenging and relevant. Topics include entrepreneurship innon-profit and social enterprise sector, as well as entrepreneurship inthe larger corporate sector.• Entrepreneurs are responsible for more than just developing anidea. Roberts et al identify the obstacles faced by these new managersthrough the growth period of their new business. Not only are problemareas like strategy and managerial tasks overviewed, but the text alsoprovides approaches to managing them.• With all of the entrepreneurial opportunities available in today’sbusiness world, how do you decide what– if any –are right for you?The author team break down the different entrepreneurial endeavors(non-profit, start-up, established company with internal enterprise, etc)allowing students to create a connection based on their personality.CONTENTSPart I: Introduction: What is Entrepreneurship? Chapter 1 A Perspectiveon Entrepreneurship Part II: Recognizing and Analyzing OpportunityChapter 2 Some Thoughts on Business Plans Chapter 3 Note on BusinessModel Analysis for the Entrepreneur Chapter 4 Valuation, Financingand Capitalization Tables in the New Venture Context Chapter 5 HowVenture Capitalists Evaluate Potential Venture Opportunities Part III:Assembling Intellectual, Human and Financial Resources Chapter 6The Legal Protection of Intellectual Property Chapter 7 New VentureFinancing Chapter 8 Deal Structure and Deal Terms Part IV: Managingthe Early-Stage Venture Chapter 9 Managing Risk and Reward in theEntrepreneurial Venture Chapter 10 The Legal Forms of OrganizationPart V: Managing Growth and Realizing Value Chapter 11 Managingthe Growing Venture• 6 of the 11 chapters in this edition are NEW! New chapters focuson: “Business Model Analysis”; “Valuation and Capitalization Tables”;“Perspectives from Venture Capitalists on the Evaluation of New VentureOpportunities”; “Managing Risk and Reward in the EntrepreneurialVenture”; “Managing Growth”.• These new chapters, in combination with five of the chapters fromthe prior edition, provide a broad treatment of the full range of issuesaround starting and managing new ventures.102HED 2007 Management.indd 10210/5/2006 1:24:27 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionNEWNEW BUSINESS MENTOR 20077th EditionBy Jeffry A. Timmons, Babson College2007 (April 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310283-2 / MHID: 0-07-310283-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110856-0 / MHID: 0-07-110856-4[IE with OLC and Premium Card]It’s your business. You want it to grow. Now there’s a tool tohelp you. With the assistance of The New Business Mentor -asuite of powerful business assessment and planning tools- theprocess of growing your business just got easier... and smarter.The New Business Mentor empowers you to learn in a way thatmeets your unique needs and preferences. You can choose tohave your personal business mentor guide you through the assessmentand planning tools or explore the CD-ROM on yourown. Either way, you’ll have access to outstanding resourcesand solutions that inspire you to follow your entrepreneurialdreams.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Better prepare yourself and your business for success. The BusinessMentor provides the tools you need to:-Assess your business needs.-Evaluate the feasibility of your business venture.-Develop a plan for starting, operating, or growing your business.-Prepare financial projections for determining feasibility, planning andfinancing.-Learn more about successful business strategies.• Access the information you need with The Business Mentor’s powerfulfeatures.-Easy-to-use templates, in step-by-step Q&A format, to build a feasibilityor business plan.-Microsoft Excel spreadsheets to generate reports for financial feasibility,start-up costs, financial ratios, budget assumptions and monthly cashflow.-A personal, business mentor to guide you through the planning process,challenge your thinking and direct you to resources and solutions.-A Mentor’s Office that contains all of the CD-ROM’s resources in oneeasy-to-access location. Search the glossary, find a valuable resourceor a sample business plan, watch a video of an entrepreneur’s successstory... and more.FEATURES• The New Business Mentor is based on the curriculum and experienceof the Kauffman Foundation’s renowned FastTrac program, whichhas provided training to tens of thousands of entrepreneurs and is thewinner of the 1998 U.S. Small Business Administration’s Vision 2000Models of Excellence Award for Entrepreneurial Education. Both TheNew Business Mentor and FastTrac program are supported by theEwing Marion Kauffman Foundation.• Follow The New Business Mentor’s simple Question & Answerformatted templates to build, save and print a comprehensive businessplan or feasibility plan. Helpful links direct you to value-added informationabout specific topics, including relevant resources, sample businessand feasibility plans, interactive stories from successful entrepreneursand more.NEW VENTURE CREATIONEntrepreneurship for the 21st Century, 7th EditionBy Jeffry A. Timmons, Babson College2007 (March 2006) / 704 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310279-5 / MHID: 0-07-310279-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328591-7 / MHID: 0-07-328591-9(with OLC Access Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125438-0 / MHID: 0-07-125438-2 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/timmons7eThis new 7th Edition of New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurshipfor the 21st Century, is the most heavily revised edition since itsexistence, yet it still maintains the market defining “TimmonsModel of the Entrepreneurial Process.” As always, Timmons& Spinelli cover the process of getting a new venture started,growing the venture, and successfully harvesting it. Throughtext, case studies, and hands-on exercises, this how-to textguides students in discovering the concepts of entrepreneurshipand the competencies, skills, tools, and experience to equipstudents to successfully launch a new venture and recognizeentrepreneurial opportunities. The authors recognize that thereis no substitute for actually starting a company, but believe thatit is possible to expose students to many of the vital issues andimmerse them in key learning experiences.NEW TO THIS EDITION• The Timmons Model of the Entrepreneurial Process has been updatedto include the addition of social, economic, and a hot research topicon environmental sustainability factors.• Eight new cases and two revised cases have been included to capturethe dynamic ups and downs new firms experience over an extendedperiod of time. New cases include October Sky, Indulgence Spa Products,Newland Medical Technologies, Lightwave Technologies, ForteVentures, The Case of the Bank Loan, Jim Poss, and Maclean Palmer.• New Chapter 17, The Family as Enterprise, outlines the significanteconomic and entrepreneurial contribution families make to communitiesand countries worldwide, and examines the different rolesfamilies play in the entrepreneurial process. The chapter describes theSix Dimensions for Family Enterprising, and provides a model to assessa family’s relative mindset for enterprising, and to identify key issuesfor family dialogue.• New Test Bank! This is the first time that a test bank is offered as partof the instructor supplement package for this text and includes true false,multiple choice, short answer, fill-in-the-blank and essay questions.• New Excel financial planning model has been added online atwww.mhhe.com/timmons7e, which can be a time saving tool forentrepreneurs evaluating or planning a venture. This tool can be usedand modified to develop financial projections for the income statement,balance sheet and case flow statement and save entrepreneurs dozens,if not hundreds of hours.• New Chapter 1, The Entrepreneurial Mind: Crafting a PersonalEntrepreneurial Strategy, combines content previously found in Ch.7 and 20 based on reviewer feedback. This revised chapter looks atthe founder/lead entrepreneur through a zoom lens. What is uniqueabout the entrepreneurial mind-set? What do successful entrepreneursdo? How do they think and act? What are their attitudes and values?How do they lead? What are their strategies and practices? This chapterincludes a new section on Entrepreneurial Reasoning that captures theoutside-the-box creative and inventive thinking of entrepreneurship.There is an updated and broader discussion and data on the importanceof women and minorities in the entrepreneurial economy.103HED 2007 Management.indd 10310/5/2006 1:24:27 PM

Management• New Internet Impact examples at the end of each chapter. Thesebrief, focused reports relate to the Timmons Model on how the Internethas fundamentally changed the business landscape forever. These areconcrete, current examples of how entrepreneurs use the Internet totheir advantage in every aspect of their venture from launch, to growthand renewal. The Internet coverage previously found in Ch. 5 is nowthroughout the text.• The Next Sea Changes is a new exercise that challenges students toresearch brainstorm, and identify what are likely to be the upcoming‘sea changes’ that will drive the next growth industries.• Examples of entrepreneurs in action, coping with the post-Internetbubble era.FEATURES• As always, we have included the latest data and updates on the significantchanges in the whole new world of capital markets, the economy,and the banking environment that are relevant to entrepreneurs.• Chapter 6, The Business Plan, presents a complete business planguide along with tips, practical advice, and know-how from successfulentrepreneurs and investors on the development and presentation ofthe plan.• Study questions for each chapter are provided to enable the studentto focus on key issues, test their knowledge, and organize importantmaterial and insights presented in the chapter.• Mind Stretchers at the end of each chapter pose some thought provokingideas for readers allowing them to apply the material.• The Venture Opportunity Screening Exercises (VOSE) have beensimplified and segmented into discreet exercises that can be usedseparately or in total. This change allows for maximum flexibility inthe syllabus and when counseling individual students or mentoringfield study projects.CONTENTSPart One: The Entrepreneurial Mind for an Entrepreneurial Society.Chapter 1. The Entrepreneurial Mind: Crafting a Personal EntrepreneurialStrategy. Chapter 2. America’s Entrepreneurial Revolution Goes Global.Part Two: The Opportunity. Chapter 3. The Entrepreneurial Process.Chapter 4. The Opportunity: Creating, Shaping, Recognizing, Seizing.Chapter 5. Screening Venture Opportunities. Chapter 6. The BusinessPlan. Part Three: The Founder and Team. Chapter 7. The EntrepreneurialManager. Chapter 8. The New Venture Team. Chapter 9. Personal Ethicsand the Entrepreneur. Part Four: Financing Entrepreneurial Ventures.Chapter 10. Resource Requirements. Chapter 11. Franchising. Chapter12. Entrepreneurial Finance. Chapter 13. Obtaining Venture and GrowthCapital. Chapter 14. The Deal: Valuation, Structure, and Negotiation.Chapter 15. Obtaining Debt Capital. Part Five: Startup and Beyond.Chapter 16. Managing Rapid Growth: Entrepreneurship Beyond Startup.Chapter 17. The Family Enterprise. Chapter 18. The Entrepreneur andthe Troubled Company. Chapter 19. The Harvest and BeyondENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL FIRM4th EditionBy David Deakins, University of Praisley and Mark Freel2006 / 360 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710826-7 / MHID: 0-07-710826-4McGraw-Hill UK TitleThe fourth edition of this text continues to cover entrepreneurialand small firm theory, concepts, evidence, policy and practice.This fully updated edition contains the latest research developmentsas well as practical assignments, examples and real lifecase studies. In addition, it has new coverage of family businessand female entrepreneurs, and a revised structure.CONTENTSChapter 1: The Entrepreneur: Concepts and Evidence / Chapter 2: Entrepreneurialactivity and the economy (include international perspective)/ Chapter 3: Diversity in Entrepreneurship: The role of women & ethnicminorities / Chapter 4: Sources of Finance: Overview of Issues and DebtFinance / Chapter 5: Finance: VCs and BAs / Chapter 6: Innovation andEntrepreneurship / Chapter 7: Information and Communication Technologiesand E-Business / Chapter 8: Growth / Chapter 9: InternationalEntrepreneurship / Chapter 10: Family businesses / Chapter 11: Issuesin Business Start-up / Chapter 12: Preparation for Business Start-upBEN FRANKLIN: AMERICA’S ORIGINALENTREPRENEURBy Blaine McCormick and Benjamin Franklin2006 / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-932-53168- 8 / MHID: 1-932-53168-8A Professional Reference TitleYou are holding the only modern adaptation of BenjaminFranklin’s 18th century autobiography. It is at its heart oneof the greatest business stories ever told. The most versatileFounding Father was a husband, a father, a writer, an inventor,a statesman, a fundraiser and a military leader. But in his mind,he was first and foremost a businessman. Franklin’s captivatingadventures include his almost single-handed responsibility forestablishing the first media empire, the first public library, thefirst fire brigade, the University of Pennsylvania, the first bookclub and the first franchise--all of which are detailed within thesepages with Franklin’s characteristic mix of humility and pride.Franklin chronicles his own story, from his early days growingup in colonial Boston to his retirement from printing and growinginvolvement in national politics. It was during these yearsthat he honed his management and leadership skills, acquireda fervent distaste for tyranny of all types, embraced a strong setof morals, and developed an uncompromising work ethic. Fromthe moment he fled his tyrannical master and set himself up as aprinter in Philadelphia, all who came into contact with Franklinrecognized his destiny. His wisdom transcends the ages--and hislife lessons are insights are as compelling today as ever.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg104HED 2007 Management.indd 10410/5/2006 1:24:27 PM

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ENTREPRENEURSHIP 04/055th EditionBy Robert Price, Global Entrepreneurship Institute2006 / 224 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352835-9 / MHID: 0-07-352835-8A McGraw-Hill/Duskhin TitleWebsite: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073528358.mhtmlThis fifth edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: ENTREPRENEURSHIPprovides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selectedfrom the best of the public press. Organizational featuresinclude: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites;an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction;brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and aninstructor’s resource guide with testing materials. USING AN-NUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practicalguide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supportedby our student website, www.dushkin.com/online.CONTENTSUNIT 1. MASTERING ENTREPRENEURSHIP New! 1. The Engine ofCapitalist Process: Entrepreneurs in Economic Theory New! 2. BuildingEntrepreneurial Economies New! 3. Entrepreneurs in the U.S. Face LessRed Tape 4. Who Are the Self-Employed? New! 5. The Making of anEntrepreneur New! 6. Leader of the Pack 7. Success Rules! New! 8. ToGet Ahead, Own the Store New! 9. The New Road to Riches UNIT 2.CREATING AND LAUNCHING THE BUSINESS VENTURE 10. OneMore Time … Should Small Companies Attempt Strategic Planning?11. How Entrepreneurs Craft Strategies That Work New! 12. SevenKeys to Shaping the Entrepreneurial Organization 13. Characteristicsof a Successful Entrepreneurial Management Team New! 14. Listeningto Your Inner Entrepreneur 15. How to Write a Great Business Plan 16.Outline for a Business Plan: A Proven Approach for Entrepreneurs OnlyUNIT 3. FINANCING THE NEW VENTURE New! 17. Pursuing VentureCapital New! 18. Venture Impact 2004: Venture Capital Benefits to theU.S. Economy 19. Venture Capitalists’ Assessment of New Venture Survival20. Ready or Not? New! 21. The Entrepreneur’s Financial-FitnessChecklist 22. Solving the Puzzle of the Cash Flow Statement New! 23.The ABCs of Borrowing for Growth New! 24. Harnessing InnovationNew! 25. A Kick-Start for Entrepreneurs New! 26. Field of Dreams New!27. Negotiating Venture-Capital Transactions 28. The Do’s and Don’tsof Fund Raising New! 29. All in the Delivery UNIT 4. MANAGINGGROWTH AND CREATING HARVEST OPTIONS 30. “Are You Builtto Grow?” 31. Managing Growth New! 32. The Big Question: ToGrow or Not to Grow? 33. Three Strategies for Managing Fast Growth34. Managing Global Expansion: A Conceptual Framework New! 35.Innovation Special: Entrepreneurs 36. Harvesting Firm Value: Processand Results 37. Choosing Your Exit Strategy 38. The Initial Public Offering:Early Planning Considerations New! 39. The Joys of An ESOPNew! 40. Selling a Family Enterprise: Tough to Decide and to Do New!41. Oiling the Hinges on Your Exit Strategy 42. Company for Sale byOwner—Or Maybe NotCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comNEWBusiness Policy & StrategicManagement - TextbooksSTRATEGY 07/08By Dave Ketchen, Florida State University-Tallahassee and GregoryDess, G T Lumpkin, University of Illinois-Chicago2008 (February 2007) / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-338128-2 / MHID: 0-07-338128-4(Details unavailable at press time)International EditionManagementNEWSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENTCreating Competitive Advantage, 3rd EditionBy Gregory Dess, University of Kentucky - Lexington and G.T. (Tom)Lumpkin, University of Illinois - Chicago and Marilyn Taylor, Universityof Missouri - Kansas City2007 (January 2006) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-312457-5 / MHID: 0-07-312457-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326721-0 / MHID: 0-07-326721-X(with OLC Access Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110939-0 / MHID: 0-07-110939-0[IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/dess3eSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENT: Creating Competitive Advantages,3/e, by Dess, Lumpkin, and Eisner, responds to the demands oftoday’s rapidly changing and unpredictable global marketplacethat students will face when they enter the business world. Theconcepts-only text provides students with a timely, rigorous,and relevant book written in an engaging manner to spur theirinterest and excitement. This book provides a solid treatment oftraditional topics in strategic management as well as contemporarytopics such as entrepreneurship, knowledge management,and e-commerce and internet strategies. Numerous applicationsfrom business practice plus sidebars (approximately six per chapter)bring key concepts to life. Instructors can create their owncase volumes for use with Strategic Management 3rd Editionfrom a variety of source- pre-selected case packets, customizingfrom a recommended set which have been carefully mapped tothe chapter concepts, or from the entire Primis database whichfeatures cases from Harvard, Darden, INSEAD, Ivey, and otherreputable sources.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapter-ending exercises challenge students to apply the centralstrategy concepts emphasized in each chapter. These include experientialexercises, summary review questions, application questions andexercises, and ethics questions.• Chapter 4 (Analysis of Intellectual Assets) includes further discussionof how knowledge is shared within firms. The authors also address someof the dysfunctional outcomes that firms may experience by participatingin the “war for talent” and how firms can effectively control humanresource costs without eroding their base of human capital.• Chapter 6 (Corporate-level Strategy) provide balanced perspectiveon real options analysis—address the “potential downsides” such asescalation and managerial conceit (hubris)105HED 2007 Management.indd 10510/5/2006 1:24:28 PM

Management• Chapter 7 includes a discussion of the potential benefits and pitfallsof offshoring (competitiveness, loss of jobs, economic effects)• In Chapter 9 (Effective Strategic Controls) the authors incorporatea detailed discussion of the role of corporate governance in today’sorganization– a topic which has generated heated discussions andextensive legislation in the US in recent years.• In Chapter 11 (Strategic Leadership, Learning Organizations, andEthics), the authors address emotional intelligence (EI)- a very currentleadership topic in both academic and practitioner circles. In addition toaddressing the components of EI and its role in a leader’s effectiveness,the authors discuss the bases of a leader’s power and how its effectiveuse can overcome barriers to change. A discussion of a leader’s role inshaping an ethical organization has also been expanded by articulatingthe need for organizations to become more proactive and move fromcompliance-based models to integrity-based models.• The 3e features two entrepreneurship chapters (Chapter 12) as well asan expanded discussion of the use of strategic management techniquesby small firms and pioneering, imitative, and adaptive new entry strategiesused by start-ups (Chapter 13).FEATURES• The traditional organizing framework includes crisply-written chaptersthat address contemporary topics. Strategic Management is dividedinto chapters in the traditional sequence: analysis, formulation, andimplementation. In addition, the authors provide chapters on suchtimely topics as the Internet and digital strategies, intellectual capitaland knowledge management, and entrepreneurship.• Key strategic concepts are introduced in a clear and concise mannerand followed by timely and interesting examples from business practice.These concepts include Porter’s Five-Forces, the Value Chain,the resource based view of the firm, competitive advantage, boundary-lessorganizations, digital strategies, corporate governance, andentrepreneurship.• Chapter-opening vignettes provide insightful, real-world examples ofwhat can go wrong in strategic management. These are designed tospur student curiosity and interest in learning and applying the courseconcepts. Most texts err on the side of admiring good business practicesin their chapter openers when students need to be able to diagnoseproblems and look for solutions in the real business world.• Students who take a strategic management course need a thoroughgrounding in ethics, globalization and technology. In response to this,Dess and Lumpkin thoroughly weave these themes into every chapterof the text, as part of the text flow and within the “Strategy Spotlight”boxes that appear in every chapter. All of these are new or revised forthis edition.• Many key text concepts are applied to start-up firms and smaller businesses,which is particularly important and relevant given the fact thatmany students will begin their professional careers in just these kindsof smaller firms.• Strategic Management by Dess/Lumpkin features the best chapter teachingnotes available today! While many books outline or summarize thetext materials, Dess/Lumpkin focus on “value added” materials. Eachchapter includes many suggested questions to spur in-class discussionas well as three teaching tips for each chapter to further stimulate debateand practical applications of course concepts. In addition, thereare many examples and “war stories” to provide illustrations of keyconcepts—well beyond the material in the text. (In fact, the chapternotes average about 16 pages). This keeps the material fresh for studentswhile reducing preparation time for the instructor.CONTENTSPart One: Strategic Analysis Chapter 1 Strategic Management: CreatingCompetitive Advantages Chapter 2 Analyzing the External Environmentof the Firm Chapter 3 Assessing the Internal Environment of the FirmChapter 4 Recognizing a Firm’s Intellectual Assets: Moving beyond aFirm’s Tangible Resources Part Two: Strategic Formulation Chapter 5Business-Level Strategy: Creating and Sustaining Competitive AdvantagesChapter 6 Corporate-Level Strategy: Creating Value through DiversificationChapter 7 International Strategy: Creating Value in GlobalMarkets Chapter 8 Digital Business Strategy: Leveraging Capabilities in aDisruptive Environment Part Three: Strategic Implementation Chapter 9Strategic Control and Corporate Governance Chapter 10 Creating EffectiveOrganizational Designs Chapter 11 Strategic Leadership: Creating aLearning Organization and an Ethical Organization Chapter 12 ManagingInnovation and Fostering Corporate Entrepreneurship Chapter 13Recognizing Opportunities and Creating New Ventures Part Four: CaseAnalysis Chapter 14 Analyzing Strategic Management CasesInternational EditionNEWSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENTText and Cases, 3rd EditionBy Gregory Dess, University of Texas at Dallas, G.T. (Tom) Lumpkin,University of Illinois-Chicago and Alan Eisner, Pace University2007 (January 2006) / 960 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310246-7 / MHID: 0-07-310246-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326720-3 / MHID: 0-07-326720-1(with OLC Access Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110940-6 / MHID: 0-07-110940-4 [IE with OLC]Strategic Management: Text and Cases, 3rd Edition, by Dess/Lumpkin/Eisner is both readable and rigorous– written fortoday’s student. A rocket-ship in its first editions, this revisioncontinues to provide solid treatment of traditional topics instrategic management, as well as contemporary topics likeentrepreneurship, innovation, knowledge management, andinternet strategies. The prestigious author team understandsthe importance of thorough, modern concepts illustrated byrich, relevant, and teachable cases. The new case selectionsemphasize variety, currency, and familiar company names. Thecases are up-to-date in terms of both financial data and strategicissues. This group of cases gives both instructors and studentsunparalleled quality and variety. Based on consistent reviewerfeedback, these selections combine comprehensive and shorterlength cases about well known companies.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New and retained features of this hardback text match the featuresof the paperback of the same edition number, EXCEPT where featurespertain strictly to case material (the paperback version DOES NOTcontain cases).• Case Lineup has been revised to include short, medium, and longcases from a variety of sources including NACRA, IVEY, and HarvardBusiness School. The case studies span a wide variety of industries includingaviation, automotive, restaurant, retail, casinos, entertainment,and nonprofit. Most cases (the hypothetical cases are the exception)include financials. Companies represented in the 3rd edition include:JetBlue Airways, Panera Bread, Ford Motor Company, Enron, Kmartand Sears, Zara, Procter & Gamble, Wal-Mart, and the American RedCross, among others.• Case Editor Alan Eisner brings new energy to our case line-up, whichfeatures these expanded benefits in the 3e:-11 brand-new case studies from a variety of sources, including Harvardand IVEY.-19 of the 41 cases are enhanced with PowerPoint slides to aid in casediscussion.-Videos relating to both the text and the case studies include titles suchas “Troubled Gamblers”, “US Auto Makers Struggle”, “Fallen Star”, “TopTarget: Enron CEO Kenneth Lay Indicted”, “JetBlue Airways”, “PaneraBread”, and several others.-Over half of the cases have weblinks for additional student research.Each set of weblinks comes with discussion questions. Content for caseson the OLC includes web links to financial data and stories from thenews relating to the case studies.106HED 2007 Management.indd 10610/5/2006 1:24:28 PM

Management• Chapter-ending exercises challenge students to apply the centralstrategy concepts emphasized in each chapter. These include experientialexercises, summary review questions, application questions andexercises, and ethics questions.• Chapter 4 (Analysis of Intellectual Assets) includes further discussionof how knowledge is shared within firms. The authors also address someof the dysfunctional outcomes that firms may experience by participatingin the “war for talent” and how firms can effectively control humanresource costs without eroding their base of human capital.• Chapter 6 (Corporate-level Strategy) provide balanced perspectiveon real options analysis—address the “potential downsides” such asescalation and managerial conceit (hubris)• Chapter 7 includes a discussion of the potential benefits and pitfallsof offshoring (competitiveness, loss of jobs, economic effects)• In Chapter 9 (Effective Strategic Controls) the authors incorporatea detailed discussion of the role of corporate governance in today’sorganization– a topic which has generated heated discussions andextensive legislation in the US in recent years.• In Chapter 11 (Strategic Leadership, Learning Organizations, andEthics), the authors address emotional intelligence (EI)– a very currentleadership topic in both academic and practitioner circles. In addition toaddressing the components of EI and its role in a leader’s effectiveness,the authors discuss the bases of a leader’s power and how its effectiveuse can overcome barriers to change. A discussion of a leader’s role inshaping an ethical organization has also been expanded by articulatingthe need for organizations to become more proactive and move fromcompliance-based models to integrity-based models.• The 3e features two entrepreneurship chapters (Chapter 12) as well asan expanded discussion of the use of strategic management techniquesby small firms and pioneering, imitative, and adaptive new entry strategiesused by start-ups (Chapter 13).FEATURES• The traditional organizing framework includes crisply-writtenchapters that address contemporary topics. Strategic Management isdivided into chapters in the traditional sequence: analysis, formulation,and implementation. In addition, the authors provide chapters on suchtimely topics as the Internet and digital strategies, intellectual capitaland knowledge management, and entrepreneurship.• Key strategic concepts are introduced in a clear and concise mannerand followed by timely and interesting examples from businesspractice. These concepts include Porter’s Five-Forces, the Value Chain,the resource based view of the firm, competitive advantage, boundary-lessorganizations, digital strategies, corporate governance, andentrepreneurship.• Chapter-opening vignettes provide insightful, real-world examplesof what can go wrong in strategic management. These are designed tospur student curiosity and interest in learning and applying the courseconcepts. Most texts err on the side of admiring good business practicesin their chapter openers when students need to be able to diagnoseproblems and look for solutions in the real business world.• Students who take a strategic management course need a thoroughgrounding in ethics, globalization and technology. In response to this,Dess and Lumpkin thoroughly weave these themes into every chapterof the text, as part of the text flow and within the “Strategy Spotlight”boxes that appear in every chapter. All of these are new or revised forthis edition.and practical applications of course concepts. In addition, there aremany examples and “war stories” to provide illustrations of key concepts—wellbeyond the material in the text. (In fact, the chapter notesaverage about 16 pages). This keeps the material fresh for students whilereducing preparation time for the instructor.CONTENTSPart One: Strategic Analysis. Chapter 1 Strategic Management: CreatingCompetitive Advantages. Chapter 2 Analyzing the External Environmentof the Firm. Chapter 3 Assessing the Internal Environment of the Firm.Chapter 4 Recognizing a Firm’s Intellectual Assets: Moving beyond aFirm’s Tangible Resources. Part Two: Strategic Formulation. Chapter5 Business-Level Strategy: Creating and Sustaining Competitive Advantages.Chapter 6 Corporate-Level Strategy: Creating Value through Diversification.Chapter 7 International Strategy: Creating Value in GlobalMarkets. Chapter 8 Digital Business Strategy: Leveraging Capabilities in aDisruptive Environment. Part Three: Strategic Implementation. Chapter9 Strategic Control and Corporate Governance. Chapter 10 CreatingEffective Organizational Designs. Chapter 11 Strategic Leadership:Creating a Learning Organization and an Ethical Organization. Chapter12 Managing Innovation and Fostering Corporate Entrepreneurship.Chapter 13 Recognizing Opportunities and Creating New Ventures. PartFour: Case Analysis. Chapter 14 Analyzing Strategic Management Cases.Cases: 1. JetBlue Airways. 2. Ford Motor Company in 2004: EnteringSecond Century of Existence. 3. Starbucks Corporation: Competing ina Global Market. 4. The Skeleton in the Corporate Closet. 5. GreenMountain Coffee Roasters. 6. Pixar. 7. eBay: King of the Online AuctionIndustry. 8. The Best-Laid Incentive Plans. 9. American Red Cross in2002 (A). 10. Yum! Brands, Pizza Hut, and KFC. 11. Crown Cork & Sealin 1989. 12. Growing for Broke. 13. Dippin’ Dots Ice Cream. 14. PaneraBread Company. 15. Wal-Mart’s Strategy for the 21st Century: SustainingDominance. 16. Edward Marshall Boehm, Inc. 17. McDonald’s. 18.Microsoft’s Battle for the Living room: The Trojan Horse—The Xbox. 19.Schoolhouse Lane Estates. 20. Atari and InfoGrames Entertainment SA.21. FreshDirect. 22. Robin Hood. 23. Johnson & Johnson. 24. GeneralMotors. 25. Heineken. 26. Procter & Gamble. 27. Sun Life Financial:Entering China. 28. The Casino Industry. 29. Yahoo! 30. Enron: On theSide of the Angels. 31. World Wrestling Entertainment. 32. Zara: FastFashion. 33. Kmart–Sears Merger of 2005. 34. Kroger Company. 35.QVC. 36. Philips versus Matsushita: A New Century, a New Round. 37.Expedited Competition: The Express Delivery Services Industry—UPS,FedEx, DHL, TNT—Differentiated Options. 38. Reader’s Digest: Inform,Enrich, Entertain, and Inspire—Inspire Whom: And for How MuchLonger? 39. Southwest Airlines: How Much Can “LUV” Do? 40. Toys“R” Us. 41. The Lincoln Electric Company, 1996. IndexesNEWSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENTBy Gregory Dess, University of Texas at Dallas, G.T. (Tom) Lumpkin,University of Illinois-Chicago and Marilyn Tayor, University of Missouri-KansasCity and David Lal, Robert Gordon University2007 (February 2006) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710988-2 / MHID: 0-07-710988-0McGraw-Hill UK Title(Details unavailable at press time)• Many key text concepts are applied to start-up firms and smallerbusinesses, which is particularly important and relevant given the factthat many students will begin their professional careers in just thesekinds of smaller firms.• Strategic Management by Dess/Lumpkin features the best chapterteaching notes available today! While many books outline or summarizethe text materials, Dess/Lumpkin focus on “value added” materials. Eachchapter includes many suggested questions to spur in-class discussion aswell as three teaching tips for each chapter to further stimulate debate107HED 2007 Management.indd 10710/5/2006 1:24:28 PM

ManagementInternational EditionNEWan Effective Organization. 12 Organizational Leadership and Culture.13 Strategic Control, Innovation, and Entrepreneurship. IndexFORMULATION, IMPLEMENTATION ANDCONTROL OF COMPETITVE STRATEGY10th EditionBy John Pearce, Villanova University, and Richard Robinson,University of South Carolina2007 (December 2005) / 488 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-305438-4 / MHID: 0-07-305438-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110914-7 / MHID: 0-07-110914-5 [IE with OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/pearce10eContemporary research in strategic management, with an emphasison conceptual tools and skills created by scholars andpractitioners in the field are evident throughout this 13-chapterbook. Pearce and Robinson’s FORMULATION, IMPLEMENTA-TION AND CONTROL, 10e, retains its high level of academiccredibility and its market-leading emphasis on Strategic Practice.The material presented here is the text material that can be foundin STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT, 10e (text and cases). It continuesto have strong support from longtime adopters and growingsupport in schools with a desire to provide straightforwardtreatment of strategic management with a practical, systematicapproach. An abundance of real world examples from currentperiodicals such as BusinessWeek about companies familiarto students, permeate the text. Pearce and Robinson continueto use a unique pedagogical model created by the authors toprovide logic and structure to its treatment of strategic managementwhich in turn makes the material more easily organizedby the instructor and learned by the student.NEW TO THIS EDITION• A new chapter 3 dedicated to corporate social responsibility andbusiness ethics has been included to meet the needs of today’s curriculum.• Continuing its tradition of being current, Pearce/Robinson nowcontains in-depth coverage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 inChapter 2.• A new section on leadership, including numerous examples andillustrations that help provide practical guidelines young, emergingleaders can use.• New coverage on the pros and cons of outsourcing and the realityof what is now a truly global environment.• A new chapter 11 dedicated to structuring effective 21st centuryorganizations.• New “Top Strategist” boxes which profile executives from variousindustries who are strategy experts in their fields.FEATURES• Revised content on strategic analysis and choice is enhanced.• The central themes of globalization, ecommerce, information technology,speed and continuous improvement will receive heightenedtreatment across every chapter.CONTENTSBrief Contents. Preface. PART ONE Overview of Strategic Management.1 Strategic Management. PART TWO Strategy Formulation. 2 Definingthe Company’s Mission and Social Responsibility. 3 Corporate SocialResponsibility and Business Ethics. 4 The External Environment. 5 TheGlobal Environment. 6 Internal Analysis. 7 Long-Term Objectives andStrategies. 8 Strategic Analysis and Choice in Single- or Dominant-ProductBusinesses: Building Sustainable Competitive Advantages. 9 StrategicAnalysis and Choice in the Multibusiness Company: RationalizingDiversification and Building Shareholder Value. PART THREE StrategyImplementation, Control, and Innovation. 10 Implementing Strategy:Objectives, Tactics, Outsourcing, Policies, and Rewards. 11 StructuringInternational EditionNEWSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENT10th EditionBy John Pearce, Villanova University and Richard Robinson,University of South Carolina2007 (December 2005) /960 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-305422-3 / MHID: 0-07-305422-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326073-0 / MHID: 0-07-326073-8(with Premium Content Card and BW Subscription)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110913-0 / MHID: 0-07-110913-7[IE with Premium Content Card and BW Subscription]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/pearce10eContemporary research in strategic management, with an emphasison conceptual tools and skills created by scholars andpractitioners in the field are evident throughout STRATEGICMANAGEMENT, 10e. Pearce and Robinson have retained highlevel of academic credibility and market-leading emphasis onstrategic practice with this edition. This text continues to havestrong support from longtime adopters and growing support inschools with a desire to provide straightforward treatment ofstrategic management with a practical, systematic approach.The 10th edition will once again include numerous BusinessWeek short cases and a wide assortment of traditional, longerstrategic management cases. Pearce and Robinson continue touse a unique pedagogical model they created to provide logicand structure to its treatment of strategic management which inturn makes the material more easily organized by the instructorand learned by the student.NEW TO THIS EDITION• A new chapter 3 dedicated to corporate social responsibility andbusiness ethics has been included to meet the needs of today’s curriculum.• Continuing its tradition of being current, Pearce/Robinson nowcontains in-depth coverage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 inChapter 2.• A new section on leadership, including numerous examples andillustrations that help provide practical guidelines young, emergingleaders can use.• New coverage on the pros and cons of outsourcing and the realityof what is now a truly global environment.• A new chapter 11 dedicated to structuring effective 21st centuryorganizations.• New “Top Strategist” boxes which profile executives from variousindustries who are strategy experts in their fields.FEATURES• The central themes of globalization, ecommerce, information technology,speed and continuous improvement will receive heightenedtreatment across every chapter in the 9e.• Corporate governance, strategic alliance structures, disintermediation,strategic quality initiatives and recent techniques for environmental andindustry analysis in an information rich and internet-driven environmentexemplify significant new treatments in the 9e.• New examples have been added to every chapter on strategy fore-commerce businesses. Often from Business Week, these examplesrefer to company changes in strategy since 2002.108HED 2007 Management.indd 10810/5/2006 1:24:29 PM

Management• Global Strategy in Action boxes: updated! These boxes help studentsappreciate how strategic managers worldwide meet global competition,as they learn about various businesses around the world.• Strategy in Action boxes: these provide boxed examples that illustratecontemporary business examples related to chapter topics, in order toenhance student interest and learning.• The core Pearce and Robinson strategic management frameworkwill provide the organizational structure of the book, accommodatinga specific request from numerous repeat adopters.CONTENTSPreface. PART ONE Overview of Strategic Management. 1 StrategicManagement. PART TWO Strategy Formulation. 2 Defining the Company’sMission and Social Responsibility. 3 Corporate Social Responsibilityand Business Ethics. 4 The External Environment. 5 The GlobalEnvironment. 6 Internal Analysis. 7 Long-Term Objectives and Strategies.8 Strategic Analysis and Choice in Single- or Dominant-ProductBusinesses: Building Sustainable Competitive Advantages. 9 StrategicAnalysis and Choice in the Multibusiness Company: RationalizingDiversification and Building Shareholder Value. PART THREE StrategyImplementation, Control, and Innovation. 10 Implementing Strategy:Objectives, Tactics, Outsourcing, Policies, and Rewards. 11 Structuringan Effective Organization. 12 Organizational Leadership and Culture.13 Strategic Control, Innovation, and Entrepreneurship. PART FOUR.Cases Guide to Strategic Management Analysis. A BusinessWeek Case.B Comprehensive Cases. Case Index. Subject IndexInternational EditionNEWCRAFTING AND EXECUTING STRATEGYThe Quest for Competitive Advantage,15th EditionBy Arthur A Thompson and AJ Strickland III, University of Alabama- Tuscaloosaes and John E Gamble, University of South Alabama- Mobile2007 (June 2006) / 1152 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296943-6 / MHID: 0-07-296943-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327038-8 / MHID: 0-07-327038-5(with OLC Access Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110317-6 / MHID: 0-07-110317-1[IE with OLC Access Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thompsonThompson, Strickland and Gambles’, CRAFTING AND EXECUT-ING STRATEGY, 15e presents the latest research findings fromthe literature and cutting-edge strategic practices of companieshave been incorporated to keep step with both theory and practice.Scores of new examples have been added to complementthe new and updated Illustration Capsules. More chapter-endexercises have been included. The result is a text treatmentwith more punch, greater clarity, and improved classroomeffectiveness. But none of the changes have altered the fundamentalcharacter that has driven the text’s success over theyears. The chapter content continues to be solidly mainstreamand balanced, mirroring both the best academic thinking andthe pragmatism of real-world strategic management. Knownfor its cases and teaching notes, CRAFTING AND EXECUT-ING STRATEGY includes a case line--up that will spark studentinterest and generate lively classroom discussions. A truly appealinglineup of 32 diverse, timely, and thoughtfully-craftedcases complements the text presentation. Many cases involvehigh-profile companies, and all are framed around issues andcircumstances tightly linked to the content of the 13 chapters,thus pushing students to apply the concepts and analytical toolsthey have read about. And there’s a comprehensive package ofsupport materials that are a breeze to use, highly effective, andflexible enough to fit most any course design.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Up-to-date coverage of the continuing march of industries and companiesto wider globalization, the growing scope and strategic importanceof collaborative alliances, the spread of high-velocity change to moreindustries and company environments, and how online technology isdriving fundamental changes in both strategy and internal operationsin companies across the world.• The resource-based view of the firm is prominently and comprehensivelyintegrated into the coverage of crafting both single-businessand multi-business strategies. Chapters 3 through 9 emphasize that acompany’s strategy must be matched both to its external market circumstancesand to its internal resources and competitive capabilities. Then,chapters 11, 12, and 13 on various aspects of executing strategy havea strong resource-based perspective that makes it unequivocally clearhow and why the tasks of assembling intellectual capital and buildingcore competencies and competitive capabilities are absolutely criticalto successful strategy execution and operating excellence.• The authors have revitalized the highly important chapter on“Strategy, Ethics, and Social Responsibility” with new discussions andmaterial so that it can better fulfill the important functions of (1) alertingstudents to the role and importance of incorporating business ethicsand social responsibility into decision-making and (2) addressing theaccreditation requirements of the AACSB that business ethics be visiblyand thoroughly embedded in the core curriculum. In addition, there arediscussions of the roles of values and ethics in Chapters 1, 2, 11, and13, thus providing professors and students alike with a very meaty andcomprehensive treatment of business ethics and socially responsiblebehavior as it applies to crafting and executing company strategies.• In response to market feedback, more chapter-end exercises havebeen included, and exercises are now more varied in format (ratherthan just internet searches), more detailed, and more closely alignedwith chapter content.• The 15th Edition includes 33 cases representing the very latestand best that the authors could find about companies that studentsknow and can relate to. There’s a good blend of cases from a lengthperspective—close to a fourth are under 15 pages, yet offer plenty forstudents to chew on; about a fourth are medium-length cases; and theremainder are longer, detail-rich cases that call for more sweepingand detailed analysis. There are four “dot-com” company cases, plusseveral others that will provide students with insight into the specialdemands of competing in industry environments where technologicaldevelopments are an everyday event, product life cycles are short,and competitive maneuvering among rivals comes fast and furious.Over 20 of the cases involve situations where company resources andcompetitive capabilities play as large a role in the strategy-making, strategy-executingscheme of things as industry and competitive conditionsdo. Scattered throughout the lineup are 10 cases concerning non-U.S.companies, globally competitive industries, and/or cross-cultural situations;these cases, in conjunction with the globalized content of thetext chapters, provide ample material for linking the study of strategicmanagement tightly to the ongoing globalization of the world economy.There are 7 cases dealing with the strategic problems of family-ownedor relatively small entrepreneurial businesses and 23 cases involvingpublic companies about which students can do further research onthe Internet. Eleven of the cases (JetBlue Airways, Competition in theMP3 Player Industry, Netflix, Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, eBay, Google,Harley-Davidson, Wal-Mart, Monsanto, Starbucks, and Merck-Vioxx)have accompanying videotape segments.FEATURES• The Business Strategy Game or GLO-BUS Simulation Exercises Eitherone of these text supplements involves teams of students managingcompanies in a head-to-head contest for global market leadership.Company co-managers have to make decisions relating to productquality, production, work force compensation and training, pricingand marketing, and financing of company operations. The challenge isto craft and execute a strategy that is powerful enough to deliver goodfinancial performance despite the competitive efforts of rival companies.Each company competes in North America, Latin America, Europe-Africa, and Asia-Pacific.109HED 2007 Management.indd 10910/5/2006 1:24:29 PM

Management• With the Business Strategy Game, teams of students run an athleticfootwear company in head-to-head competition against companies runby other class members. Company co-managers must make decisionsrelating to plant operations, distribution and warehouse operations,work force compensation, online sales at the company’s web site,sales and marketing, and finance. The challenge is to craft and executea competitive strategy that results in a respected brand image, keepsyour company in contention for global market leadership, and producesgood financial performance as measured by earnings per share, returnon investment, stock price appreciation, and credit rating. With GLO-BUS, teams of students run a digital camera company in head-to-headcompetition against companies run by other class members. Companyoperations parallel those of actual digital camera companies. Just as inthe real-world, companies compete with a product line that consistsof both entry-level and upscale, “multi-featured” digital cameras thatare sold worldwide.• Available via Premium Content in the OLC only, Case TUTORprovides direction to students on analyzing cases. It includes a set ofdownloadable files containing assignment questions for all 33 cases inthe text, plus analytically-structured “case preparation exercises” for11 of the cases that prompt them to do the strategic thinking needed toarrive at solid answers to the assignment questions for that case. Doinga conscientious job of completing the case exercise for an assignedcase helps students gain quicker command of and correctly apply theconcepts and analytical techniques, thus giving them a big assist indoing good strategic analysis and coming up with pragmatic actionrecommendations. The 11 cases for which there is a case preparationexercise are indicated by the Case-TUTOR logo in the case listing sectionof the Table of Contents (the Case-TUTOR logo also appears onthe first page of cases for which there is an exercise).• The fundamental character that has driven the text’s success over theyears is evident throughout the 15th. The chapter content continues tobe solidly mainstream and balanced, mirroring both the best academicthinking and the pragmatism of real-world strategic management.• The 13 chapters in this edition are arranged in the same order as theprior edition and cover essentially the same topics. But every chapterhas been given a refreshing facelift that includes the latest thinking andevidence from the literature, more refined presentations, and a greaternumber of current examples.• The comprehensive package of support materials is a breeze to use,highly effective, and flexible enough to fit most any course design.• Margin notes highlighting basic concepts, strategic managementprinciples, and kernels of wisdom help students by reinforcing keypoints in the text.• Extensive use of examples and Illustration Capsules, which accuratelyportray today’s business world and link theory to practice.CONTENTSPart I: Concepts and Techniques for Crafting and Executing StrategySection A: Introduction and Overview Chapter 1: What Is Strategy andWhy Is It Important? Chapter 2: The Managerial Process of Craftingand Executing Strategy Section B: Core Concepts and Analytical ToolsChapter 3: Evaluating a Company’s External Environment Chapter 4:Evaluating a Company’s Resources and Competitive Position SectionC: Crafting a Strategy Chapter 5: Five Generic Competitive Strategies--WhichOne to Employ? Chapter 6: Supplementing the ChosenStrategy: Other Important Strategy Choices Chapter 7: Competing inForeign Markets Chapter 8: Tailoring Strategy to Fit Specific Industryand Company Situations Chapter 9: Diversification: Strategies for Managinga Group of Businesses Chapter 10: Strategy, Ethics, and SocialResponsibility Section D: Executing the Strategy Chapter 11: BuildingBuilding an Organization Capable of Good Strategy Execution Chapter12: Managing Internal Operations: Actions That Promote Better StrategyExecution Chapter 13: Corporate Culture and Leadership: Keysto Good Strategy Execution / Cases / Section A: Crafting Strategy inSingle-Business Companies 1. Whole Foods Market in 2006: Mission,Values, Strategy 2. Oliver’s Market 3. JetBlue Airways: Can It Survivein a Turbulent Industry? 4. Competition in the Golf Equipment Industry5. Dell, Inc. in 2006: Can Rivals Beat Its Strategy? 6. Competition inthe MP3 Player Industry in 2005 7. Apple Computer 8. Netflix versusBlockbuster versus Video-on-Demand 9. easyCar.com 10. SmithfieldFoods’ Vertical Integration Strategy: Harmful to the Environment? 11.Zoe’s Kitchen 12. Krispy Kreme Doughnuts in 2006: Is A TurnaroundPossible? 13. Kodak at the Crossroads: Making the Transition from Film-Based to Digital Technology 14. Adam Aircraft 15. KRCB Televisionand Radio: The Canary In The Coal Mine? 16. Western States Insurance17. Ebay 18. Google in 2006: Can the Strategy Support the Lofty StockPrice? 19. Copperfield Books 20. Harley Davidson Section B: CraftingStrategy in Diversified Companies 21. Adidas-Salomon 22. Procter &Gamble’s Acquisition of Gillette Section C: Executing Strategy andStrategic Leadership 23. Robin Hood 24. Dilemma at Devil’s Den 25.Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. in 2006—Sustaining Growth and Combating Critics26. Outback Steakhouse: The Quest for Excellence in Casual Dining27. Moses at the Red Sea 28. Implementing Strategic Change: MonicaAshley’s Experience 29. Starbucks Global Quest in 2006: Is the BestYet to Come 30. TDC-Sunrise Section D: Strategy, Ethics, and SocialResponsibility 31. Merck and the Recall of Vioxx 32. Kimpton Hotels:Balancing Strategy and Environmental Sustainability 33. Monsanto andthe Genetic Engineering of Agricultural SeedsInternational EditionNEWCRAFTING AND EXECUTING STRATEGYText and Readings, 15th EditionBy Arthur A Thompson and AJ Strickland III, University of Alabama- Tuscaloosaes and John E Gamble, University of South Alabama- Mobile2007 (June 2006) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313721-6 / MHID: 0-07-313721-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326980-1 / MHID: 0-07-326980-8(with OLC with Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110951-2 / MHID: 0-07-110951-X[IE with OLC Premium Content Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thompsonThompson, Strickland and Gamble’s, CRAFTING AND EXECUT-ING STRATEGY, 15e presents the latest research findings fromthe literature and cutting-edge strategic practices of companieshave been incorporated to keep step with both theory and practice.Scores of new examples have been added to complementthe new and updated Illustration Capsules. More chapter-endexercises have been included. The result is a text treatment withmore punch, greater clarity, and improved classroom effectiveness.But none of the changes have altered the fundamentalcharacter that has driven the text’s success over the years.The chapter content continues to be solidly mainstream andbalanced, mirroring both the best academic thinking and thepragmatism of real-world strategic management. This paperbackversion of the text does not contain any cases, but it does include21 readings from noted business writers that support theconcepts in the main text portion. Instructors who would liketo create their own case packets to go with this book should goto www.mhhe.com/primis to make their selections.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Up-to-date coverage of the continuing march of industries and companiesto wider globalization, the growing scope and strategic importanceof collaborative alliances, the spread of high-velocity change to moreindustries and company environments, and how online technology isdriving fundamental changes in both strategy and internal operationsin companies across the world.• The resource-based view of the firm is prominently and comprehensivelyintegrated into the coverage of crafting both single-businessand multi-business strategies. Chapters 3 through 9 emphasize that acompany’s strategy must be matched both to its external market circumstancesand to its internal resources and competitive capabilities. Then,chapters 11, 12, and 13 on various aspects of executing strategy havea strong resource-based perspective that makes it unequivocally clearhow and why the tasks of assembling intellectual capital and buildingcore competencies and competitive capabilities are absolutely critical110HED 2007 Management.indd 11010/5/2006 1:24:29 PM

Managementto successful strategy execution and operating excellence.• The authors have revitalized the highly important chapter on“Strategy, Ethics, and Social Responsibility” with new discussions andmaterial so that it can better fulfill the important functions of (1) alertingstudents to the role and importance of incorporating business ethicsand social responsibility into decision-making and (2) addressing theaccreditation requirements of the AACSB that business ethics be visiblyand thoroughly embedded in the core curriculum. In addition, there arediscussions of the roles of values and ethics in Chapters 1, 2, 11, and13, thus providing professors and students alike with a very meaty andcomprehensive treatment of business ethics and socially responsiblebehavior as it applies to crafting and executing company strategies.• In response to market feedback, more chapter-end exercises havebeen included, and exercises are now more varied in format (ratherthan just internet searches), more detailed, and more closely alignedwith chapter content.FEATURES• The Business Strategy Game or GLO-BUS Simulation Exercises Eitherone of these text supplements involves teams of students managingcompanies in a head-to-head contest for global market leadership.Company co-managers have to make decisions relating to productquality, production, work force compensation and training, pricingand marketing, and financing of company operations. The challenge isto craft and execute a strategy that is powerful enough to deliver goodfinancial performance despite the competitive efforts of rival companies.Each company competes in North America, Latin America, Europe-Africa, and Asia-Pacific.• With the Business Strategy Game, teams of students run an athleticfootwear company in head-to-head competition against companies runby other class members. Company co-managers must make decisionsrelating to plant operations, distribution and warehouse operations,work force compensation, online sales at the company’s web site,sales and marketing, and finance. The challenge is to craft and executea competitive strategy that results in a respected brand image, keepsthe company in contention for global market leadership, and producesgood financial performance as measured by earnings per share, returnon investment, stock price appreciation, and credit rating. With GLO-BUS, teams of students run a digital camera company in head-to-headcompetition against companies run by other class members. Companyoperations parallel those of actual digital camera companies. Just as inthe real-world, companies compete with a product line that consistsof both entry-level and upscale, “multi-featured” digital cameras thatare sold worldwide.• The fundamental character that has driven the text’s success over theyears is evident throughout the 15th. The chapter content continues tobe solidly mainstream and balanced, mirroring both the best academicthinking and the pragmatism of real-world strategic management.• The 13 chapters in this edition are arranged in the same order as theprior edition and cover essentially the same topics. But every chapterhas been given a refreshing facelift that includes the latest thinking andevidence from the literature, more refined presentations, and a greaternumber of current examples.• The comprehensive package of support materials is a breeze to use,highly effective, and flexible enough to fit most any course design.• Margin notes highlighting basic concepts, strategic managementprinciples, and kernels of wisdom help students by reinforcing keypoints in the text.• Extensive use of examples and Illustration Capsules, which accuratelyportray today’s business world and link theory to practice.CONTENTSPart one Concepts and Techniques for Crafting and Executing Strategy/ Section A: Introduction and Overview 1. What Is Strategy and WhyIs It Important? 2. The Managerial Process of Crafting and ExecutingStrategy Section B: Core Concepts and Analytical Tools 3. Evaluating aCompany’s External Environment 4. Analyzing a Company’s Resourcesand Competitive Position Section C: Crafting a Strategy 5. The FiveGeneric Competitive Strategies: Which One to Employ? 6. Supple-menting the Chosen Competitive Strategy: Other Important StrategyChoices 7. Competing in Foreign Markets 8. Tailoring Strategy to FitSpecific Industry and Company Situations 9. Diversification: Strategiesfor Managing a Group of Businesses 10. Strategy, Ethics, and SocialResponsibility Section D: Executing the Strategy 11. Building an OrganizationCapable of Good Strategy Execution 12. Managing InternalOperations: Actions That Facilitate Strategy 13. Corporate Cultureand Leadership: Keys to Good Strategy Execution / Part two Readings/Section A: What is Strategy and How is the Process of Crafting andExecuting Strategy Managed? 1. What Is Strategy and How Do YouKnow If You Have One? 2. Walking the Talk (Really!): Why VisionsFail 3. The Power of Business Models 4. The Balanced Scorecard: ToAdopt or Not to Adopt? 5. Stretching Strategic Thinking Section B:Crafting Strategy in Single Business Companies 6. A New Tool forStrategy Analysis: The Opportunity Model 7. Playing Hardball: WhyStrategy Still Matters 8. Value Innovation: A Leap into the Blue Ocean9. Confronting the Low-End Competition 10. Strategies for Asia’s NewCompetitive Game 11. Racing to Be 2nd: Conquering the Industries ofthe Future 12. Outsourcing Strategies: Opportunities and Risks SectionC: Crafting Strategy in Diversified Companies 13. Insights from the NewConglomerates Section D: Executing Strategy 14. Turning Great Strategyinto Great Performance 15. Beyond Best Practice 16. The Integrationof Lean Management and Six Sigma 17. Linking Goals to MonetaryIncentives 18. A Leader’s Guide to Creating an Innovation Culture 19.The Seven Habits of Spectacularly Unsuccessful Executives Section E:Strategy, Ethics, and Social Responsibility 20. Competing Responsibly21. The Ethics Commitment Process: Sustainability through Value-BasedEthics / Indexes / Organization / Name / Case / SubjectInternational EditionNEWMODERN COMPETITIVE STRATEGY2nd EditionBy Gordon Walker, Southern Methodist University2007 (May 2006) / 320 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310284-9 / MHID: 0-07-310284-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327933-6 / MHID: 0-07-327933-1(with Online Access Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125440-3 / MHID: 0-07-125440-4 [IE]Modern Competitive Strategy, 2e, by Gordon Walker, providesconcise, rigorous, and broad synthesis of the theory and empiricsof the strategy field. The approach is eclectic, reflecting thediversity of the discipline, drawing on studies in industrial andinstitutional economics, economic and organizational sociology,mainstream strategy, and finance and marketing whenappropriate. Both single business and corporate-level organizationsare covered. Ideal for current and budding managers,many short cases, company examples, and practical tools areused to illustrate the concepts. The material is appropriate foreither a full semester course or a single module in MBA programs,advanced undergraduate courses, EMBA and executiveeducation classes.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Chapter 1 has been completely rewritten with new examples such asApple iPod and Toyota’s superior productivity vs. General Motors- anda new section on financial performance metrics including a referenceto Standard & Poors.• Chapter 3 now includes a new section on strategic interaction andcartels.• Chapter 4 includes new examples including Samsung’s dynamicgrowth cycle in 2003 and the substitution of DVD’s for VCR’s.• New sections on outsourcing, mergers and acquisitions and Sarbanes-Oxley have been incorporated into the second edition.111HED 2007 Management.indd 11110/5/2006 1:24:29 PM

ManagementFEATURES• Walker’s Strategic Management covers both business and corporate-levelstrategy, making it appropriate for strategy courses thatcover both.• A unique chapter on “Competing Over Time” discusses how firmssustain success over long periods of time and weather economic upsand downs.• The book’s eclectic approach offers a balanced presentation of leadingstrategic theorists, rather than focusing on a single perspective as isoften the case with competing texts.• The Walker text includes a chapter on Governing the Firm (corporategovernance)-a topic of particular interest given the recent problemsrelated to corporate governance at firms such as Enron, Tyco, andothers.• The text is pedagogically sound. Each chapter includes an introductionand summary of key points. Short case studies within chaptersprovide examples showing how concepts relate to today’s businessesand business issues. At the end of each chapter, “Questions for Practice”are presented to link the material to the concerns of managersand investors.CONTENTSPart One: Introduction 1. What is Strategy? Part Two: Building CompetitiveAdvantage 2. Competitive Advantage 3. Industry Analysis4. Competing Over Time: Industry and Firm Evolution 5. StrategyExecution Part Three: Managing the Boundaries of the Firm 6. VerticalIntegration and Outsourcing 7. Partnering Part Four: Expandingthe Scope of the Firm 8. Competing in Global Markets 9. New BusinessDevelopment 10. Managing the Multibusiness Firm Part Five:Governing the Firm 11. Corporate Governance 12. Strategic Planningand Decision MakingInternational EditionSTRATEGYCore Concepts, Analytical Tools, Readings,2nd EditionBy Arthur A Jr Thompson, University of Alabama - Tuscaloosa, JohnE Gamble, University of South Alabama - Mobile and A J StricklandIII, University of Alambama - Tuscaloosa2006 / 520 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299946-4 / MHID: 0-07-299946-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320334-8 / MHID: 0-07-320334-3(with OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111962-7 / MHID: 0-07-111962-0[IE with OLC and Premium Card]STRATEGY: Winning in the Marketplace is the newest offeringfrom proven authors Thompson, Gamble, and Strickland.As in previous works, the authors’ mainstream presentationincludes the most recent research in strategy presented in a waythat students can understand and apply to business cases andproblems. With fewer chapters and pages than previous texts bythese authors, this text offers a more concise, lively, and userfriendlypresentation of strategic management. Fundamentalstrengths of Thompson/Gamble/Strickland text treatments arevery much evident in this edition-a compelling presentation ofPorter’s Five-Forces model and globally competitive marketsand first-rate coverage of strategy execution and the drive foroperating excellence.CONTENTSPart I Introduction and Overview Chapter 1, What is strategy and whyis it important? Part II Core Concepts and Analytical Tools Chapter2, Analyzing a company’s external environment Chapter 3, Analyzinga company’s resources and competitive position Part III Crafting theStrategy Chapter 4, Crafting a strategy: The quest for competitive advan-tage Chapter 5, Competing in foreign markets Chapter 6, Diversification:Strategies for managing a group of businesses Chapter 7, Strategy, ethics,and social responsibility Part IV Executing the Strategy Chapter 8,Executing the strategy: Building a capable organization and instilling aculture Chapter 9, Managing internal operations in ways that promotegood strategy execution Part V Readings Section A: What Is Strategyand How Is The Process of Crafting and Executing Strategy Managed?1. What is Strategy and How Do You Know If You Have One? 2. Walkingthe Talk (Really!): Why Visions Fail 3. The Motivational Benefits ofGoal-Setting Section B: Crafting Strategy in Single Business Companies4. How Industries Change 5. Five Killer Strategies for Trouncing theCompetition 6. Racing to be 2nd: Conquering the Industries of theFuture 7. Oursourcing Strategies: Opportunities and Risks Section C:Crafting Strategy in Diversified Companies 8. Increasing the Odds ofSuccessful Growth: The Critical Prelude to Moving “Beyond the Core”Section D: Implementing and Executing Strategy 9. Management is theArt of Doing and Getting Done 10. Some Pros and Cons of Six Sigma:An Academic Perspective 11. Linking Goals to Monetary Incentives12. The Seven Habits of Spectacularly Unsuccessful Executives SectionE: Strategy, Ethics, and Social Responsibility 13. Corporate SocialResponsibility: Why Good People Behave Badly in Organizations 14.Good Governance and the Misleading Myths of Bad MetricsInternational EditionSTRATEGY: WINNING IN THE MARKETPLACECore Concepts, Analytical Tools, Cases, 2nd EditionBy Arthur Thompson, University of Alabama—Tuscaloosa, JohnGamble, University of South Alabama-Mobile and A.J. Strickland III,University of Alabama-Tuscaloosa2006 / 960 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298990-8 / MHID: 0-07-298990-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320313-3 / MHID: 0-07-320313-0(with OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111933-7 / MHID: 0-07-111933-7[IE with OLC and Premium Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/thompson2eSTRATEGY: Winning in the Marketplace is the newest offeringfrom proven authors Thompson, Gamble, and Strickland. As inprevious works, the authors’ mainstream presentation includesthe most recent research in strategy presented in a way that studentscan understand and apply to business cases and problems.With fewer chapters and pages and shorter cases than previoustexts by these authors, this text offers a more concise, lively, anduser-friendly presentation of strategic management. Fundamentalstrengths of Thompson/Gamble/Strickland text treatments arevery much evident in this edition-a compelling presentation ofPorter’s Five-Forces model and globally competitive marketsand first-rate coverage of strategy execution and the drive foroperating excellence. Another hallmark of this new product isthe package of Thompson/Gamble/Strickland cases and relatedteaching notes. Over the years, this author team has developeda great network of case authors and is able to select from thecream of the crop. Having written scores of cases themselvesand having a combined experience of 70 years teaching thisparticular course, they are very skilled in selecting the typesof cases that will spark student interest and generate livelyclassroom discussions. Many of the cases reflect high profileindustries, companies, products, and people that students willhave heard of, know about from personal experience, or caneasily identify with. The new case line-up features an excitingcollection of the latest and best cases flush with valuable teachingpoints and lessons for students.CONTENTSPart I Introduction and Overview Chapter 1, What is strategy and whyis it important? Part II Core Concepts and Analytical Tools Chapter2, Analyzing a company’s external environment Chapter 3, Analyzinga company’s resources and competitive position Part III Craftingthe Strategy Chapter 4, Crafting a strategy: The quest for competitiveadvantage Chapter 5, Competing in foreign markets Chapter 6, Diver-112HED 2007 Management.indd 11210/5/2006 1:24:30 PM

Managementsification: Strategies for managing a group of businesses Chapter 7,Strategy, ethics, and social responsibility Part IV Executing the StrategyChapter 8, Executing the strategy: Building a capable organization andinstilling a culture Chapter 9, Managing internal operations in ways thatpromote good strategy execution Part V Cases in Crafting and ExecutingStrategy Section A: Crafting Strategy in Single-Business Companies 1.Whole Foods Market in 2005 2. Starbucks in 2004: Driving for GlobalDominance 3. Netflix in 2004: What Strategic Moves to Make Next? 4.From KaZaA to Skype. 5. Competition in MP3 Players 6. Competition inthe Bottled Water Industry in 2004 7. Dell, Inc. in 2005 8. easyCar.com9. KFC and the Global Fast Food Industry 10. Krispy Kreme Doughnutsin 2005: Are the Glory Days Over? 11. Atkins Nutritionals: A MarketDriven Business Model 12. Kodak at the Crossroads: The Transitionfrom Film-Based to Digital Technology 13. Adam Aircraft 14. CreatingCustomer Value at Rocky Mountain Fiberboard 15. Electronic Arts andthe Global Video Game Industry 16. Ebay 17. Google’s Strategy—TheQuest for a Technology-Based Competitive Advantage 18. Vincor andthe New World of Wine 19. Coca-Cola’s Marketing Challenges in Brazil:The Tubaínas War 20. Harley Davidson 21. Globalizing Volkswagen:Creating Excellence on All Fronts Section B: Crafting Strategy inDiversified Companies 22. Adidas-Salomon 23. News Corp in 2004:The DirecTV Acquisition and Beyond Section C: Cases in ExecutingStrategy 24. Robin Hood 25. Dilemma at Devil’s Den 26. Wal-MartStores, Inc.—A New Set of Challenges 27. Michelin China 28. SingaporeAirlines 2004—Managing Organizational Change in a TurbulentEnvironment 29. Best Buy: Staying at the Top 30. Deloitte & Touche:Integrating Section D: Strategy, Ethics, and Social Responsibility 31.Smithfield Foods: When Growing the Business Damages the Environment32. Merck and the Vioxx FalloutInternational EditionCORPORATE STRATEGYA Resource Based Approach, 2nd EditionBy David J Collis, and Cynthia A Montgomery, Harvard University2005 / 256 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-231286-7 / MHID: 0-07-231286-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111107-2 / MHID: 0-07-111107-7 [IE]ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124932-4 / MHID: 0-07-124932-X[IE, 2 Color Text]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/collis05Corporate Strategy by Collis and Montgomery employs a singleconsistent framework for the analysis of corporate-level strategy.Based on the latest research in the resource-based view of thefirm and organizational economics, it develops a rigorous approachto the many important issues surrounding the scope ofthe firm. Starting from the analysis of how valuable resourcescontribute to the competitive advantage of a single business,the book progresses through the analysis of scale, scope andvertical integration within an industry, to the treatment of diversificationand the management of multi-business firms. Assuch, it perfectly complements those required strategy coursesthat develop the notions of strategy as the internal consistencyand external positioning of single business firms. This new editionhas been completely updated, including a new chapter oncorporate transformation.CONTENTSChapter 1: An Introduction to Corporate Strategy [Appendix A: PastApproaches to Corporate Strategy] Chapter 2: Resources and Rents[Appendix B: Business Strategy and Industry Analysis] Chapter 3: Scaleand Scope within an Industry Chapter 4: Diversified Expansion Chapter5: Organizational Limits to Firm Scope Chapter 6: Managing theMultibusiness Corporation [Appendix C: Mechanisms for AchievingCorporate Coherence] Chapter 7: Creating Corporate Advantage Chapter8: Corporate Transformation Chapter 9: Corporate GovernanceInternational EditionMANAGEMENT STRATEGYAchieving Sustained Competitive AdvantageBy Alfred A Marcus2005 / 224 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-305308-0 / MHID: 0-07-305308-2(with OLC Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123833-5 / MHID: 0-07-123833-6[IE with OLC Premium Content Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/marcus1eManagement Strategy: Sustaining Competitive Advantage, 1stedition, by Alfred Marcus, is a strategy book which focuses onhow making winning moves is dependent upon finding profitablepatterns that repeatedly meet customer demands for solutions.Where many strategy books have lost sight of the purposeof strategy and fail to show how decisions actually affect businessperformance and ultimately, outcomes, Management Strategyfocuses on the types of analyses the industry, environment,and a company’s internal resources require to make effectivestrategic moves. In eight chapters, this textbook builds uponthe analysis process and demonstrates how strategy impacts anorganization’s position in comparison to its competitors, bothin terms of the cost and quality of its products and the scopeof businesses in which it is involved (vertical and horizontalintegration), as well as its global versus domestic reach. Theoutcomes that come from analyzing an organization also determinethe extent to which the organization will strive to bean innovator as opposed to being a follower.CONTENTSPART ONE: MANAGING STRATEGICALLY Chapter 1: Strategy BasicsChapter 2: External Analysis Chapter 3: Internal Analysis PART TWO:MAKING MOVES Chapter 4: Timing and Positioning Chapter 5: Mergers,Acquisitions, and Divestitures Chapter 6: Globalization Chapter7: Innovation and Entrepreneurship PART THREE: REPOSITIONINGChapter 8: Continuous ReinventionSTRATEGY: ANALYSIS AND PRACTICEText and CasesBy Howard Thomas, John McGee and David Wilson of Universityof Warwick2005800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710705-5 / MHID: 0-07-710705-5 (Text only)1200 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710706-2 / MHID: 0-07-710706-3(Text and Cases)McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/mcgeethomaswilsonA hotly-anticipated new textbook brings strategy up-to-date witha fresh and vibrant approach. The author team of ProfessorsJohn McGee, Howard Thomas and David Wilson combine theirextensive experience of teaching and consulting in strategy withcutting edge research to form an exciting new textbook. Marryingcomprehensive coverage of strategy with an incisive andanalytical approach, the new text is ideal for undergraduate andMBA students taking a strategic management, corporate strategyor business policy module. The book sets out to provide studentswith an understanding of the core concepts and economics ofstrategy, laying the foundations for analysing strategy on a varietyof levels. With a strong emphasis on practice, the book explorescontemporary topics, including risk management, strategicchange, corporate governance, the learning organization andthe implementation of strategy for performance and process improvement.The theory is complemented by thorough pedagogythroughout and a range of excellent case examples and longer113HED 2007 Management.indd 11310/5/2006 1:24:30 PM

Managementcases* furnish students with the practical applications neededto fully appreciate the consequences of strategic decisions.CONTENTSPart One: An Introduction to Strategy 1. The Concept of Strategy 2.Strategy and Organisation Part Two: Economic Analysis for StrategicDecisions 3. The Microeconomics of Strategy 4. The Macroeconomicsof Strategy 5. Industry Analysis and Competitive Strategy Part Three:Strategy Analysis 6. Competitive Strategy: the Analysis of StrategicPosition 7. Competitive Strategy: the Analysis of Strategic Capability8. Competitive Strategy: moving from theory to practice 9. CorporateStrategy: Adding Value in Multi-Business Firms 10. Corporate Strategy:Mergers, Acquisitions and Strategic Alliances 11. Global Strategies andInternational Advantage 12. Strategy in the New Economy Part Four:Strategy and Practice 13. Process Analysis for Strategic Decisions 14.Risk , uncertainty and strategy 15. Managing Strategic Change 16. Strategyand the Learning Organization 17. Corporate Governance Part Five:Strategy as System 18. Analysing and measuring strategic performance19. Knowledge, information and innovation strategy 20. Total quality,customer value and process impacts 21. Managing business value as asystem: value creation from a systems perspective / Challenges in strategy:Final thoughts and Postscript / Case Study Section /These end ofchapter cases feature in BOTH the text only and text and cases versionand are 1-6 pages in length. 1. The Harder Hard Sell: The new challengesfacing the advertising industry 2. Made in Japan: How Japan is competingwith low-cost Chinese competitors 3. The Novotel Value Chain: How ahotel chain develops its competitive advantages 4. Mobile Telephoneand the move from 2G to 3G: new technology in communications 5.Dell: analysing the supply chain 6. Brand extension with Jacuzzi: howfirms such as Dior extend their product range 7. Stelios Haji Ioannou:Entrepreneurship at easyjet 8. Old Dogs, New tricks: the need for focusin large conglomerates 9. Disney: The battle for the Magic Kingdom:Comcast’s bid to acquire Disney 10. International law firms: getting theright global balance 11. How good is Google: the challenges faced bythe search engine 12. Browser Wars: Netscape’s new Gecko browserchallenges Microsoft 13. Freud Finance and Folly: human intuition andrisk 14. Decisions Risk and Uncertainty: A historical case shows howKodak and Polaroid demonstrate game theory in practice 15. How tomanage a dream factory: the management challenges in media andentertainment 16. Future learning: conflicts in strategy 17. Disney: Thecase against Michael Eisner- corporate governance issues 18. ContinentalHousehold Mortgage Co: a finance company develops its strategy 19.Proctor and Gamble: How Durk Jager, CEO, wants to turn P+G into ainnovative company 20. Wasting Disease: quality crisis in healthcare21. ‘Oh, the joy of the journey’--Anita Roddick on social responsibilityat Body Shop / Additional Case Studies. These additional longer (8-12pages) cases are included in the Text and Cases edition, and oftenfeature financial data. 1. Core competence at NEC and GTE 2. HondaA and B 3. Phil Knight: managing Nike’s transformation 4. Finland andNokia 5. Rockware 6. EasyJet 7. Hewlett-Packard: Creating a virtualsupply chain 8. Canon: competing on capabilities 9. LVMH managingthe multi-brand conglomerate 10. HSBC migrating for value 11. Thehouse that Branson built: Virgin’s entry into the new millennium 12.Rank Xerox: global transfer of best practices 13. Cola wars in China:the future is here 14. The Leo Burnett Company Ltd. virtual team management15. The Formula 1 Constructors 16. Ferrari: Transforming thePrancing Horse 17. IKEA culture as competitive advantage 18. BSkyBembracing the digital revolution 19. Battle for critical mass in the UKmobile communications industry 20. Low cost airlines 21. Diageo: FromBeds, to Burgers, to Booze--Grand Metropolitan and the creation of adrinks giant 22. The hostile bid for blue circle 23. BA profits in flight24. House of Townend: Electronic commerce opportunities in the UKwine trade 25. Shell Shock: why do good companies do bad things? 26.Abrakebabra: Surviving the franchisee revolt 27. Creyf: David againstGoliath in the European temping industry 28. Strategy and performancemanagement at DSM 29. Gatetrade.com: The making of the first NordicB2B market place 30. Strategic groups in consulting firmsInternational EditionBUSINESS MODELSA Strategic Management ApproachBy Allan Afuah, University of Michigan2004 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-288364-0 / MHID: 0-07-288364-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123639-3 / MHID: 0-07-123639-2 [IE]Business Models: A Strategic Management Approach by AllanAfuah represents a new kind of book. Business models are aboutmaking money and most firms are in business to make money (aprofit). It is therefore no surprise that the phrase «business model»is increasingly finding its way into CEO speech after speech andin business school functional areas from accounting to financeto marketing to strategy. Because strategic management isinherently integrative in nature and increasingly more focusedon firm performance, strategy textbooks have come closest toaddressing the subject of business models, but only implicitlyand partially so. Business Models: A Strategic Management Approachdraws on the latest research in strategic managementto explicitly and fully explore business models. It draws on thelatest research on to explore which activities a firm performs,how it performs them, and when it performs them to make aprofit. It offers an integrated framework for understanding therelationship between the set of activities that a firm chooses toperform, its revenue model, its cost structure, its resources andcapabilities, the competitive forces in the firm’s industry, andits ability to sustain a competitive advantage even in the faceof change. It provides the link between resources, productmarketpositions and profits how resources and product-marketpositions are translated into profits. (Existing strategy textsdemonstrate correlation between resources or product-marketpositions and profits, not their translation into profits). Additionally,it explores the relationship between business modelsand corporate social responsibility as well as the internationalcomponent to business models. It offers a definition of businessmodels that is deeply rooted in the resource-based and productmarkettheories of strategy.CONTENTSPART ONE: Positions, Activities, Resources, Industry Factors, andCost 1. Introduction and Overview 2. Customer Value and RelativePositioning 3. Pricing to Optimize Avenues 4. Sources of Revenuesand Market Targets 5. Connected Activities for a Profitable BusinessModel 6. Resources and Capabilities: The Roots of Business Models 7.Executing a Business Model 8. Innovation, Sustainability, and Change9. Analyzing the Cost of a Business Model 10. Analyzing the Sourcesof Profitability and Competitive Advantage in a Business Model 11.Financing and Valuing a Business Model 12. Business Model PlanningProcess 13. Corporate Social Responsibility and Governance PARTTWO: Cases / Case 1: Viagra: A Hard Act to Follow Case 2: Eclipse:The Next Big Thing in Small Aircraft Case 3: Salton Inc. and the GeorgeForeman Grill Case 4: Satellite Digital Audio Radio Service (SDARS)Case 5: Segway: Segue to... Case 6: Lego Bionicle: The Building Blocksto Core Competency? Case 7: KPN Mobile and the Introduction of i-Mode in Europe Case 8: Lipitor: At the Heart of Warner-Lambert Case9: eBay: Growing the World’s Largest Online Trading Community Case10: Borders: Responding to Change114HED 2007 Management.indd 11410/5/2006 1:24:30 PM

ManagementInternational EditionMANAGEMENT STRATEGYBy Daniel F. Spulber, Northwestern University2004ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287348-1 / MHID: 0-07-287348-5(with Student CD and PowerWeb) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-121834-4 / MHID: 0-07-121834-3[IE with Student CD and PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/spulberSpulber’s Management Strategy integrates mainstream strategy,up-to-date examples and economic analysis in this balanced,comprehensive, and compelling 1st Edition. In each chapterthere are up-to-date Mini-case industry examples and practicalNumerical Examples that use numbers and scenarios MBAsmight likely face on the job. Finally, there is notable coverageof important contemporary strategy topics such as innovation,global business, transaction costs, and game theory.CONTENTSPart I Management Strategy Ch. 1 Designing Management Strategy Ch.2 Value-driven Strategy Part II External Analysis and Internal AnalysisCh. 3 External Analysis: Customers and Suppliers Ch. 4 External Analysis:Competitors and Partners Ch. 5 Internal Analysis: OrganizationalStructure and Performance Ch. 6 Internal Analysis: Organizational Abilitiesand Incentives Part III Competitive Advantage Ch. 7 CompetitiveAdvantage and Value Creation Ch. 8 Cost Advantage Ch. 9 DifferentiationAdvantage Ch. 10 Transaction Advantage Part IV CompetitiveStrategy Ch. 11 Competition Ch. 12 Entry Barriers and Entry StrategyPart V Strategy and Organizational Structure Ch. 13 Corporate Strategyand Horizontal Organizational Structure Ch. 14 Transaction Costs andVertical Organizational StructureCORPORATE TURNAROUNDStrategies for RenewalBy Pradip Chandra2002 / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-118913-2 / MHID: 0-07-118913-0An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference TitleThis book delves into diverse and vital aspects such as issuesof protection of jobs, gested interests, managerial in epititude,selection of the ideal CEO, and turnaround strategy options.Corporate Turnaround is based on the experiences of a professionalwho was successful in managing a turnaround and twostart-up companies. An outcome of Pradip Chandra’s experiencein the United Kingdom and India, it describes strategies basedon the asset utilization philosophy, a model successfully usedin the post-OPEC economies and in European countries. Theasset utilization approach is based on the evaluation of a unit’sassets independent of its conventional usage and potential as a‘standalone’ revenue generator.International EditionGENERAL MANAGEMENTProcesses and ActionBy David Garvin, Harvard Business School2002 / 648 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-243241-1 / MHID: 0-07-243241-1(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113025-7 / MHID: 0-07-113025-X [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/garvin1eCONTENTS1. The Processes of Organization and Management MODULE I: STRA-TEGIC PROCESSES 2. Arthur D. Little, Inc. 3. R. R. Donnelley &Sons: The Digital Division 4. Allstate Chemical Company: The Commercializationof Dynarim 5. Time Life Inc. (A) 6. Watermill Ventures7. Note on the Major Appliance Industry in 1988 8. Electrolux: TheAcquisition and Integration of Zanussi 9. Emerson Electric: ConsistentProfits, Consistently 10. Xerox Charts a New Strategic Direction (Excerpts)MODULE II: RESOURCE ALLOCATION PROCESSES 11. EllisInternational Division: Patrick O’Brian 12. Americhem: The GaylordDivision (A) 13. Westinghouse Electric Corporation: Automating theCapital Budgeting Process (A) 14. Peterson Industries: Louis FriedmanMODULE III: DECISION-MAKING PROCESSES 15. British Steel Corporation:The Korf Contract 16. Note on Process Observation 17. StrategicDecision Processes in High Velocity Environments: Four Cases in theMicrocomputer Industry 18. Making Fast Strategic Decisions in High-Velocity Environments 19. Decision-Making Exercise (A) 20. GrowingPains 21. Decision-Making Exercise (B) 22. Decision-Making Exercise(C) 23. The Case of the Unhealthy Hospital 24. A Thousand Days 25.Thirteen Days 26. Decision Making at the Top: The All-Star SportsCatalog Division MODULE IV: LEARNING PROCESSES 27. Buildinga Learning Organization 28. Types of Learning Processes 29. A Noteon Knowledge Management MODULE V: MANAGERIAL PROCESSES30. Serengeti Eyewear: Entrepreneurship within Corning Inc. 31. TheSoul of a New Machine 32. The Transition to General ManagementWebsite 33. No Excuses Management 34. Harvard Business SchoolPublishing MODULE VI: CHANGE PROCESSES 35. SAP America 36.Millipore Corporation (A) 37. Harvey Golub: Recharging AmericanExpress 38. Pepsi’s Regeneration, 1990-1993 39. Leveraging Processesfor Strategic AdvantageInternational EditionEXPLORING STRATEGIC ANALYSIS AND DECISIONMAKINGBy John Odgers2002 / 162 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-471162-0 / MHID: 0-07-471162-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124270-7 / MHID: 0-07-124270-8 [IE]McGraw-Hill Australia TitleCONTENTSChapter 1: Exploring key concepts, processes, requirements and challenges.Chapter 2: Strategic development and growth. Chapter 3: A noteon financial management and analysis of financial institutions. Chapter4: Implementing and controlling organizational strategy. Chapter 5:Strategic analysis and diagnosis.115HED 2007 Management.indd 11510/5/2006 1:24:31 PM

ManagementBusiness Policy & StrategicManagement CasesNEWCASES IN STRATEGY AND MANAGEMENTBy Leanne Cutcher, Sydney University and Nick Wailes, Universityof Sydney2006 (May 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471619-9 / MHID: 0-07-471619-0McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/cutcherCases in Strategy and Management offers lecturers and studentsa unique opportunity to examine Australian business practicesin a contemporary setting. Each case focuses on a particularmanagement challenge faced by an organisation in Australia.These cases encourage students to consider how theory and innovationmay combine to create successful outcomes, therebycontributing to the overall achievements of the organisation andits employees. Management students, whether at the introductorylevel or MBA, will find this book a valuable resource, thanksto the diversity of companies covered. This text may be used onits own, or in conjunction with a McGraw-Hill title.FEATURES• 100% Australian material• Representation of diverse industry settings and issues.• Links to Strategic TheoryCONTENTSTable of Contents / About the Authors / Preface / A Guide to the Casesin this Book / Part 1 Introduction / Cases in Strategy and Management:An Introduction / Part 2 Cases / 1. ‘Back to the Future’: Bendigo Bank’sCommunity Bank® Model / 2.A Meeting of Minds: A US–AustralianJoint Venture / 3. The Road Less Travelled: Country Road’s Ventureinto Global Markets / 4. ‘Not for Profit, Not for Charity, but for Service’— Credit Unions: Not-For-Profits in the Financial Services Sector / 5.Stuck in Neutral? The Impact of Global Production on Local Strategyin the Australian Automotive Industry / 6. Knowledge Managementat Accenture Australia / 7. The Sydney Real Estate Market / 8. ATPInnovationsInternational EditionASIA-PACIFIC CASES IN STRATEGIC MANAGEMENTBy Paul Beamish, University of Western Ontario2000 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-239545-7 / MHID: 0-07-239545-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118312-3 / MHID: 0-07-118312-4 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/business/management/more/CONTENTSChapter 1 Asiasports: Hockey Night in Hong Kong Chapter 2 BeijingMirror Corp. Chapter 3 Ben & Jerry’s - Japan Chapter 4 Bundy AsiaPacific - China Strategy Chapter 5 CIBC Wood Gundy in Asia: AnEvolving Regional Strategy Chapter 6 DuPont Teflon: China BrandStrategy Chapter 7 Euro-Air Chapter 8 International Decorative GlassChapter 9 IPC Corporation, Singapore Chapter 10 Kami CorporationChapter 11 Kanzen Berhad: A Proposed Joint Venture with PacificDunlop Limited Chapter 12 Kentucky Fried Chicken in China (A) Chapter13 Mabuchi Motor Co., Ltd. Chapter 14 Nora-Sakari: A ProposedJoint Venture in Malaysia Chapter 15 Note on the Japanese KeiretsuChapter 16 Note on the Malaysian Pewter Industry Chapter 17 P.T.Sekbang Life Insurance (Indonesia) Chapter 18 Panmai Co-operativeChapter 19 Phil Chan Chapter 20 Royal Bank of Canada in ThailandChapter 21 Samsung and the Theme Park Industry in Korea Chapter22 Selkirk Group in Asia Chapter 23 Ssangyong Corporation Chapter24 Taiwan’s United Microelectronics Corporation (UMC) Chapter 25Technophar in Viet Nam Chapter 26 TV Asahi Theatrical Productions,Inc. APPENDIX Case AnalysisBusiness Policy & StrategicManagement - SoftwareMIKESBIKES ADVANCED5th EditionBy SmartSims2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323020-7 / MHID: 0-07-323020-0Mike’s Bikes Advanced is a simulation suited for courses instrategy or where knowledge of other functions is warranted.This simulation can be used two ways, via a CD or throughthe Internet. This dynamic simulation allows students to makedecisions regarding different functions like strategy, marketing,operations management, accounting, finance, product development,team dynamics, and economics.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comMIKE’S BIKES INTRO5th EditionBy Ferrell2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323011-5 / MHID: 0-07-323011-1Mike’s Bikes Intro is a simulation suited for courses in strategy orwhere knowledge of other functions is warranted. This simulationcan be used two ways, via a CD or through the Internet.This dynamic simulation allows students to make decisionsregarding different functions like strategy, marketing, operationsmanagement, accounting, finance, product development, teamdynamics, and economics.116HED 2007 Management.indd 11610/5/2006 1:24:31 PM

ManagementInternational EditionBUSINESS STRATEGY GAME ONLINEBy Jr Arthur Thompson, University of Alabama—Tuscaloosa2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304563-4 / MHID: 0-07-304563-2(BSG Online Version 8.0)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124507-4 / MHID: 0-07-124507-3[IE- BSG - For Adoption Only]BSG-Online has been expressly designed for today’s courses instrategic management or business strategy at the senior/MBAlevels. It makes a perfect accompaniment for any of the textsin the field or for an instructor’s own customized package ofcourse materials. We believe a simulation exercise is the singlemost powerful pedagogical device for hammering home the coreconcepts and analytical techniques that comprise the disciplineof business and competitive strategy. The Business StrategyGame has appeal from several perspectives:• It is designed to give students practice in utilizing the coreconcepts and analytical tools that are the foundation of coursesin strategic management. BSG-Online tightly connects to thematerial in all the leading strategy texts—you’ll have repeatedopportunity to link what is happening in BSG-Online to yourlectures and to the teaching points that you want to emphasizein assigned cases.• Competing companies have a wide degree of strategic latitude—there’sample room to put most any strategy into play:low-cost leadership, differentiation, best-cost, focused low-cost,focused differentiation, global strategies (mostly uniform worldwide)or “multi-regional” strategies (staking out a market positiontailored to competitive conditions in a particular geographicregion). BSG-Online is strategy neutral—most any strategy iscapable of producing good financial results, provided it is not“defeated” by the better-executed strategies of competitors orundermined by too many copycat strategies.• The Competitive Intelligence reports include strategic groupmaps and lists of competitive strengths and weaknesses. Datafor benchmarking costs is provided to all companies after eachdecision.• Decision variables include best practices training and TQM/Six Sigma quality control programs (topics covered in all theleading strategy texts).• BSG-Online delivers a genuine capstone experience—thesimulation is rich in terms of market setting, the authenticitywith which it parallels the real-world athletic footwear market,and its ability to integrate material from prior core courses inbusiness.• It mirrors the increasingly global nature of today’s competitivemarkets.• There are three product segments—branded footwear salesto footwear retailers, online sales at the company’s Web site,and producing private-label footwear for large footwear retailchains.• There are four geographic market segments — Europe-Africa,North America, Asia-Pacific, and Latin America.• There is a built-in three-year Strategic Plan feature, whichstudents can use to plat strategy for longer than 1-year at a timeand which instructors (if they so desire) can require that studentscomplete as a regular part of the exercise.• BSG-Online is somewhat more sophisticated than our recently-introducedGLO-BUS simulation involving digital camerasbecause companies can operate up to four plants, there are 12market segments (as compared to 8 in GLO-BUS), finished goodsinventories have to be managed at four distribution centers, andplayers have to develop a sales forecast based on their competitivestrategy and the expected competitive efforts of rivals.International EditionGLO-BUSAn Online Business SimulationBy Arthur A Jr Thompson and Geogory J Stappenbeck of Universityof Alabama – Tuscaloosa2004 / 64 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-301739-6 / MHID: 0-07-301739-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124720-7 / MHID: 0-07-124720-3[IE Glo-Bus Download Code Card] - For Adoption onlyGLO-BUS has been expressly designed for today’s courses instrategic management, business strategy, and international businessat both the senior/MBA levels. It makes a perfect accompanimentfor any of the texts in the field or for an instructor’s owncustomized package of course materials. Competition-basedbusiness simulations are powerful “learn-by-doing” exercises forgiving students hands-on practice in applying core concepts andanalytical techniques and in crafting successful strategies.What makes GLO-BUS appealing?• It delivers a genuine capstone experience. The simulation isrich in terms of market setting, the authenticity with which itparallels the real-world digital camera market, and its ability tointegrate material from prior core courses in business.• It mirrors the increasingly global nature of today’s competitivemarkets.• There are two product segments (entry-level and multi-featureddigital cameras) and there are four geographic marketsegments—Europe-Africa, North America, Asia-Pacific, and LatinAmerica. Companies contend for leadership in one or more ofthe 8 market segments.• Companies start the simulation on equal global and financialfooting but have different beginning market shares in differentgeographic regions. This introduces a powerful competitivedynamic that sets GLO-BUS apart from other business simulations.• GLO-BUS is “country and region neutral” so that students inEurope or Latin America or Hong Kong or Australia or SouthAfrica do not see themselves as playing a United States simulationor managing a US-based company. GLO-BUS is just asappropriate for courses taught in Switzerland or Great Britainor Mexico or Singapore or South Africa or Australia or Brazilas in the United States.• Competing companies have a wide degree of strategic latitude.Most any strategy is capable of delivering good results,provided it is not “defeated” by even better strategies of competitorsor undermined by too many copycat strategies.• Instructors can choose any of three GLO-BUS versions for theircourse—GLO-BUS Basic (about 1½ hours per decision round),GLO-BUS Plus (about 1¾ hours per decision round), and GLO-BUS Total (about 2¼ hours per decision round). Instructors canhave students play anywhere from 4 to 10 rounds, with either1 or 2 practice rounds.• The quarterly decision update option of GLO-BUS Total introducesa “real-time” element into the exercise, since companyco-managers are able to act and react from quarter-to-quarterand then make more sweeping changes annually.117HED 2007 Management.indd 11710/5/2006 1:24:31 PM

Management• GLO-BUS is positioned squarely in the middle of competingsimulations from a complexity standpoint—it’s definitely easierfor students than the market-leading Business Strategy Game(played by over 300,000 students), yet more challenging andsubstantive than the other online simulation.International EditionBUSINESS STRATEGY GAME PLAYER’S PACKAGEVERSION 7.207th EditionBy Arthur Thompson and Gregory Stappenbeck of University ofAlabama-Tuscaloosa2002ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282009-6 / MHID: 0-07-282009-8(Manual, Download Code Sticker and CD) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-122657-8 / MHID: 0-07-122657-5[IE with CD and Coding]CONTENTSSection 1: The Industry and Company Section 2: Obtaining and Runningthe Company Program Section 3: Competition and Demand ForecastsSection 4: Plant Operations Section 5: Warehouse and Shipping OperationsSection 6: Sales and Marketing Operations Section 7: FinancingCompany Operations Section 8: Scoring Reports, Analysis Options, andStrategic Plans Section 9: Decision Making: Recommended Procedures/ Appendix: Planning and Analysis FormsNEWBusiness EnvironmentTHE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT5th EditionBy Adrian Palmer, Gloucestrshire Business School and Bob Hartley,University College Northamton2006 (December 2005) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710990-5 / MHID: 0-07-710990-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleThe new edition of ‘The Business Environment’ will retainall of the strengths of the previous edition, whilst expandingcoverage on social responsibility, ethics, banking systems,money markets and the natural environment. With a new 5part structure, this new edition will include new, up-to-datecase studies, extended economic coverage and discussion ofnew contemporary issues.CONTENTSPart 1 – Contexts 1 What is the business environment? Part 2 – TheMacro-Environment 2 The Political Environment 3 The Social andDemographic Environment 4 The Technological and InformationEnvironment 5 The Legal Environment 6 Social Responsibility Part 3--Firms 7 Types of Business Organizations 8 Organizational Objectives,Growth and Scale 9 The Internal Environment Part 4 – Markets 10 TheCompetition Environment 11 The National Economic Environment 12The International Business Environment Part 5--Bringing it Together--Environmental Analysis 13 The Dynamic Business Environment 14Case StudiesEmployee BenefitsInternational EditionEMPLOYEE BENEFITS2nd EditionBy Joseph Martocchio, University of Illinois—Urbana-Champaign2006 / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-298897-0 / MHID: 0-07-298897-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111740-1 / MHID: 0-07-111740-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/martocchio2eJoseph Martocchio’s Employee Benefits: A Primer for Human ResourceProfessionals was written to promote a fuller understandingof employee benefits programs among students enrolled incollege-level compensation and benefits course. It is relevantto students who plan to be general managers who deal with avariety of human resource issues in their day-to-day jobs as wellas to those who expect to be human resource practitioners. Thereal-world focus of Martocchio’s text is evident on every page,as he seeks to balance current academic thought with brief examplesof contemporary benefits practices in business. Futureemployees and managers will gain a more complete understandingof the broader context of benefits management—not onlythe how but also the why companies provide benefits they do.Future practitioners will use this book as an introductory referenceguide, one that will enable them to put benefit practicesinto their appropriate context, and to orient them toward askingthe “right” questions of experts related to employee benefits, likeaccountants, attorneys, government bodies, etc. Martocchio’sEmployee Benefits is forward-thinking and seeks to bring thetopic into the mainstream of compensation understanding.Despite its importance, benefits tend not to be very well understoodmainly because of the vast array of regulations thatgovern employee benefits practices, and because of the widevariety of practices in benefits administration due to employerstailoring their own programs for competitive advantage and tothe needs and preferences of their workforces.CONTENTSPART 1: INTRODUCTION TO EMPLOYEE BENEFITS Chapter 1: IntroducingEmployee Benefits Chapter 2: The Economics of EmployeeBenefits Chapter 3: Regulating Employee Benefits PART 2: RETIREMENTAND HEALH, DISABILITY, LIFE INSURANCE Chapter 4: Employer-Sponsored Retirement Plans Chapter 5: Employer-Sponsored HealthInsurance Chapter 6: Employer-Sponsored Disability Insurance andLife Insurance Chapter 7: Government-Mandated Social Security andWorkers’ Compensation Programs PART 3: SERVICES Chapter 8: PaidTime-Off From Work Chapter 9: Accommodation and EnhancementPrograms Chapter 10: Managing the Employee Benefits SystemINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg118HED 2007 Management.indd 11810/5/2006 1:24:31 PM

International EditionMotivationMOTIVATION AND WORK BEHAVIOR7th EditionBy Lyman Porter and Gregory Bigley of University of California—Irvineand Richard M. Steers, University of Oregon2003 / 648 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-248162-4 / MHID: 0-07-248162-5(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113102-5 / MHID: 0-07-113102-7 [IE]CONTENTSPart One: Initial Considerations Chapter 1: Motivation in OrganizationsChapter 2: Conceptual Approaches to Motivation at Work Part Two:Central Issues in Motivation at Work Chapter 3: The Role of Cognitions,Attitudes and Beliefs in Motivation Chapter 5: The Role of Affectand Mood in Motivation Chapter 6: The Role of Social Influences inMotivation Chapter 7: The Role of Cross-Cultural Influences in MotivationPart Three: Applications of Motivational Approaches Chapter9: Rewards Chapter 10: Punishment Chapter 11: Creativity Part Four:Motivation Theory in Perspective Chapter 12: Work and Motivation:Some Concluding ObservationsNEWTechnology & InnovationSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENT OF TECHNOLOGICALINNOVATION2nd EditionBy Melissa Schilling, New York University2008 (October 2006) / 312 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-321058-2 / MHID: 0-07-321058-7Strategic Management of Technological Innovation, 2e byMelissa Schilling is the first comprehensive, rigorous and yetaccessible text for the Technology and Innovation Managementcourse. Unlike other books, Schilling’s approach synthesizesthe major research in the field, providing students with theknowledge needed to enhance case discussion and analysis.The subject is approached as a strategic process, and as such,is organized to mirror the strategic management process used inmost strategy textbooks, progressing from assessing the competitivedynamics of a situation, to strategy formulation, to strategyimplementation. As a brief, affordable paperback, it is ideal topackage with cases. Recommended case sets from the authorare available through the Primis Custom Case Database or fromthe Harvard Business School Case Database.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Five new chapter opening cases feature interesting examples ofstrategic management of technological innovation, including:Managemento Genzyme’s success in developing drugs for small populations ofpeople afflicted with rare diseases to create a unique advantage notpursued by most pharmaceutical companies.o The digital music distribution revolution--the key technologies (suchas peer-to-peer music sharing and podcasting) and events that are reshapingthe music industry while highlighting the copyright issues thatthese technologies have unleashed.o Frog design, a small global design firm that uses a set of creative toolsand philosophies that helps firms reinvent themselves.• More balance between industrial products versus consumer products.More industrial product examples, such as medical equipment,aerospace, and business software have been included. The book’semphasis is on technologies most likely to inspire the interest of abroad range of readers.• More comprehensive coverage and precise explanations are providedfor topics such as geographical clustering, the relationship betweentechnology performance and diffusion, the social construction of technology,Porter’s Five-Force Model, and more.• Suggestions for further readings in each chapter, with a list of bothclassic articles and recent work that can extend and enrich students’understanding of the topic.• The instructor’s manual now includes suggested in-class exercisesfor the students to apply the concepts from the text.FEATURES• Affordable, survey paperback with a managerial emphasis that allowsprofessors to incoporate their own case material, readings or projects.Suggested complementary cases and readings constantly updated andposted to the website.• Lots of great examples from industry that will appeal to studentssuch as Microsoft’s Xbox, Boeing’s Sonic Cruiser, Apple’s iPod, theSegway Human Transporter, XM Satellite Radio, Burton Snowboards,Hybrid/Alternative Fuel Cars, etc.• “Theory in Action” boxes illustrate how innovation theory appliesto real companies.• “Research Briefs” boxes highlight new research in the field of innovationand technology.• To enhance student learning, each chapter begins with an openingmini-case with discussion questions. Each chapter concludes withchapter summaries, discussion questions and definitions of key terms.CONTENTS1. Introduction Part One: Industry Dynamics of Technological Innovation2. Sources of Innovation 3. Types and Patterns of Innovation 4.Standards Battles and Design Dominance 5. Timing of Entry Part Two:Formulating Technological Innovation Strategy 6. Defining the Organization’sStrategic Direction 7. Choosing Innovation Projects 8. CollaborationStrategies 9. Protecting Innovation Part Three: ImplementingTechnological Innovation Strategy 10. Organizing for Innovation 11.Managing the New Product Development Process 12. Managing NewProduct Development Teams 13. Crafting a Deployment Strategyo How a scientist with a background in developing guided missilespioneered the creation of a “camera pill”--a revolutionary new medicaldevice that enables a stream of pictures to be transmitted from insidethe small intestine.o Honda’s development, production and marketing strategies for itshybrid electric vehicles.119HED 2007 Management.indd 11910/5/2006 1:24:32 PM

ManagementInternational EditionSTRATEGIC DYNAMICSConcepts and CasesBy Robert A. Burgelman, Andrew Grove and Philip Meza of StanfordUniversity2006 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-312265-6 / MHID: 0-07-312265-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125452-6 / MHID: 0-07-125452-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bgm1eStrategic Dynamics: Concepts and Cases, by Burgelman, Grove,and Meza offers unique and valuable insight into strategy makingfor companies in information technology-driven industries.It is the product of over twelve years of teaching and researchbased on a unique combination of academic (Stanford’s RobertBurgelman) and industry (Intel’s Andy Grove) experience.The key themes and conceptual frameworks discussed in thisbook, along with its case studies and industry notes, provideinstructors and students with a more complete viewpoint onthe dynamic interactions of companies within industries andbetween industries than is typically found in books on strategyand technology strategy.CONTENTSPart I: Introduction: Industry Context and Key Themes Chapter One:Evolution of Information Technology-Driven Industries Chapter Two:Three Key Themes Part II: The Microchip Matures Part III: CompoundingConfluence—Take I: The Internet and Ecommerce Part IV: CompoundingConfluence—Take II: Saving or Sinking Software Part V: Convergenceor Collision—Take I: Computing Meets Cellular Phone and ConsumerElectronics Part VI: Convergence or Collision—Take II: Do Digits DefeatPen and Plastic? Part VII: Convergence of Collision—Take III: IPMeets TelephonyNEWINTRODUCTION TO INNOVATIONBy David Smith, Nottingham Trent University2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710861-8 / MHID: 0-07-710861-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: http://highered.mhhe.com/sites/0077108612/information_center_view0/This is a book about Innovation. It aims to define innovation,identify its main characteristics, outline the processes that organisationsgo through to carry out innovation etc. It will alsoprovide tools of analysis so that students can take a criticalperspective of innovations they encounter, both in the mediaand in their working lives. The book takes a seminar friendlyapproach, with chapters based around mini case studies andexamples. It is also research based which aids the student andpromotes understanding.CONTENTSPart I: What is Innovation? Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Typesof Innovation Chapter 3: Entrepreneurship and Innovation Chapter 4:Technological Change Part II: What does Innovation Involve? Chapter5: Theories of Innovation Chapter 6: Sources of Innovation Chapter7: Commercialisation: The Innovation Process Chapter 8: IntellectualProperty rights Part III: How do you Manage Innovation? Chapter 9:Technology Strategy Chapter 10: New Technology Based Firms Chapter11: Innovation in Organisations Part IV: How do you Foster Innovation?Chapter 12: Technology Policy Chapter 13: Innovation Cluster Chapter14: National Systems of Innovation Chapter 15: Resource BankInternational EditionSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENT OF TECHNOLOGY ANDINNOVATION4th EditionBy Robert Burgelman, Stanford University, Modesto Maidique,Florida International University, and Steven C Wheelwright, HarvardUniversity2004 / 1224 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-253695-9 / MHID: 0-07-253695-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123230-2 / MHID: 0-07-123230-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/burgelman4eThe 4th Edition of Strategic Management of Technology andInnovation by Burgelman, Christensen, and Wheelwright continuesits unmatched tradition of market leadership, by usinga combination of text, readings, and cases to bring to life thelatest business research on these critical business challenges.New co-author Clay Christensen provides his insights on innovationmanagement and new market entries through severalnew cases. Approximately 40% of the cases are entirely newto this edition. Strategic Management of Technology and Innovationtakes the perspective of the general manager at theproduct line, business unit, and corporate levels. The book notonly examines each of these levels in some detail, but also addressesthe interaction between the different levels of generalmanagement—for example, the fit between product strategyand business unit strategy, and the link between business andcorporate level technology strategy. Each part of the book startswith an introductory chapter laying out an overall frameworkand offering a brief discussion of key tools and findings fromexisting literature. The remainder of each part offers a selectedhandful of seminar readings and case studies. Almost all of thecases deal with recent events and situations, including severalthat are concerned with the impact of the Internet. A few«classics» have been retained, however, because they capturea timeless issue or problem in such a definitive way that thehistorical date of their writing is irrelevant.CONTENTSPART I Introduction: Integrating Technology and Strategy Technologyand Strategy: A General Management Perspective. A. TechnologicalInnovation B. Technological Innovation and Strategy PART II Designand Evolution of Technology Strategy Design and Implementaion ofTechnology Strategy: An Evolutionary Perspective. A. TechnologicalEvolution B. Industry Context C. Organizational Context D. StrategicAction PART III Enactment of Technology Strategy: Developing theFirm’s Innovative Capabilities Designing and Managing Systems forCorporate Innovation. A. Internal and External Sources of TechnologyB. Linking New Technology and Novel Customer Needs C. InternalCorporate Venturing PART IV Enactment of Technology Strategy:Creating and Implementing a Product Development Strategy Creatingand Implementing a Product Development Strategy. A. New ProductDevelopment B. Building Competencies/Capabilities through NewProduct Development PART V Conclusion: Innovation Challenges inEstablished Firms Innovation Challenges in Established Firms.120HED 2007 Management.indd 12010/5/2006 1:24:32 PM

International EditionTECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENTText and International CasesBy Norma Harrison and Danny Samson2002 / 456 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-238355-3 / MHID: 0-07-238355-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112125-5 / MHID: 0-07-112125-0 [IE]ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125127-3 / MHID: 0-07-125127-8[IE-POD Printing]CONTENTSChapter 1-A Review of Technology Management / Chapter 2-TechnologyStrategy / Chapter 3-Development of Technological Capabilities /Chapter 4-Managing Innovation / Chapter 5-Technology Management,Operational Systems Strategy, and Business Competitiveness Interfaces/ Chapter 6-Decisions and Implementation of New Technology / Chapter7-Organizing for Technology / Chapter 8-E-Business TechnologyDevelopmentsInternational EditionINNOVATION AND THE GENERAL MANAGERBy Clayton Christensen, Harvard Business School1999 / 600 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-365915-2 / MHID: 0-07-365915-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118380-2 / MHID: 0-07-118380-9 [IE]CONTENTSIntroduction: Innovation and the General Manager Module 1: OverviewNote: Sensing the Need to Innovate 1.1 Disruptive Technologies:Catching the Wave 1.2 Continuous Casting Investments at USX Corporation1.3 Hewlett Packard: The Flight of the Kittyhawk 1.4 Teradyne:Corporate Management of Disruptive Change Module 2: OverviewNote: Finding New Markets for New & Disruptive Technologies 2.1 EliLilly & Company: Innovation in Diabetes Care 2.2 Studio Reality 2.3“Gunfire at Sea (Abridged)” 2.4 Dupont Kevlar: Aramid Industrial Fiber(Abridged) 2.5 Materials Technology Corporation 2.6 Electric Vehicles:Pipe Dream or Product of the Future? Module 3: Overview Note: LinkingStrategy, Innovation, and the Resource Allocation Process 3.1 LinkingStrategy and Innovation: Materials Technology Corporation 3.2 BectonDickinson: Worldwide Blood Collection Team (Abridged) 3.3 ManagingInnovation at Nypro, Inc. (A) 3.4 Cultivating Capabilities to Innovate:Booz Allen & Hamilton 3.5 Unilever’s Butter-Beater: Innovation forGlobal Diversity 3.6 We’ve Got Rhythm: Medtronic Corporation’sCardiac Pacemaker Business Module 4: Overview Note: Assessing andBuilding Organizations’ Capabilities to Innovate 4.1 Hospital EquipmentCorporation 4.2 Motorola, Inc.: Bandit Pager Project (Abridged)4.3 Quantum Corporation: Business and Product Teams 4.4 KirkhamInstruments Corporation Module 5: Overview Note: The Dimensionsof Technology Strategy 5.1 “Exploring the Limits of the TechnologyS-Curve” 5.2 Molding the Impossible: The Nypro-Vistaken DisposableContact Lens Project 5.3 GE Plastics: Selecting a Partner 5.4 Vallourec’sVenture into Metal Injection Molding 5.5 “Markets for Technology andthe Returns on Research” 5.6 Scientific Instruments CorporationSpecial Topics in ManagementNEWManagementTEAM LEARNING ASSISTANT WORKBOOK2nd EditionBy Sandra Deacon Carr, Ellen Herman, Sandra Keldsen and JeffreyMiller of Boston University-School of Management, Patricia Wakefield,McMaster University2008 (January 2007)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338118-3 / MHID: 0-07-338118-7The Team Learning Assistant (TLA) is designed to maximizethe students’ team learning experience, and to save professorsand students alike valuable time. TLA is organized into twotoolboxes, one for students and one for faculty. The facultytoolbox contains teaching notes, helpful hints, and proven materials,designed for instructors who use teams in their courses.The professor determines how students will use the studenttool box, and then are able to track student performance datagenerated by each class. Located at www.mhhe-tla.com, theTeam Learning Assistant features such important advice onintegrating teams into the syllabus and grading process, theimportance of having a team contract and how to write one,details on peer and instructor evaluations, as well as meetingand conflict management.NEW TO THIS EDITION• The Team Learning Assistant walks instructors through the entireprocess of designing and executing a team learning component in theircourse. In “First Steps,” there are instructions for developing a syllabusand addressing grading issues in a team-based course, as well as examplesof effective team assignments and sample syllabi.• The Team Learning Assistant provides a detailed rationale for andidentifies the steps for developing the Team Contract. In order to succeed,team members must be committed to accomplishing the team’sgoals, understand members’ expectations, and set positive team norms.To do this in the most efficient and effective manner, teams need todevelop a formal Team Contract. The Team Contract is an essentialtool that allows teams to structure expectations and establish operatingprocedures. Team roles and leadership are carefully defined for studentsas part of the contract.• Team and Meeting Management are cumbersome tasks for studentsand professors alike. The Team Learning Assistant features readings andassignments to increase the efficiency and effectiveness of the teamdecision-making process. TLA also enumerates strategies for preventing,diffusing, confronting, and effectively resolving conflict.• The Peer Feedback instrument is a central part of the Team LearningAssistant and is the basis for one of the most important and productiveexercises for each team. The feedback process is a structured learningprocess, and addresses the performance expectations established in theTeam Contract. The ability to give and receive constructive feedbackis an essential skill for managers and team members alike. The TeamLearning Assistant provides the environment for providing this developmentalfeedback through forms, action plans, and reports.• The After Action Review is a tool that allows teams to learn fromwhat they are doing and improve their performance. The AAR is astructured discussion of specific events, inclusive of the entire team,and focused on learning from action to improve performance. It is nota process debriefing. The structure of the AAR and the specific steps tofollow when conducting the AAR are discussed in the required readingsand assignment.CONTENTSStep 1: First Steps Step 2: Team Contracts Step 3: Team and MeetingManagement Step 4: Peer Feedback Step 5: After Action Review Step6: Evaluation and Closing121HED 2007 Management.indd 12110/5/2006 1:24:32 PM

ManagementFINANCIAL INTELLIGENCEBy Karen Berman and Joe Knight2006 (November 2005)ISBN-13: 978-1-59139-764-9 / MHID: 1-59139-764-2A Professional Reference TitleCompanies expect managers to use financial data to allocateresources and run their departments. But many managers can’tread a balance sheet, wouldn’t recognize a liquidity ratio, anddon’t know how to calculate return on investment. Worse,they don’t have any idea where the numbers come from orhow reliable they really are. In Financial Intelligence, KarenBerman and Joe Knight teach the basics of finance—but with atwist. Financial reporting, they argue, is as much art as science.Since nobody can quantify everything, accountants always relyon estimates, assumptions, and judgment calls. Savvy managersneed to know how those sources of possible bias can affect thefinancials—and they need to know that sometimes the numberscan be challenged. While providing the foundation for a deepunderstanding of the financial side of business, the book alsoarms managers with practical strategies for improving their companies’performance—strategies such as “managing the balancesheet” that are well understood by financial professionals butrarely shared with their nonfinancial colleagues. Accessible,jargon-free, and filled with entertaining stories of real companies,Financial Intelligence will help nonfinancial managers besmarter and more confident in their everyday work.CLASSIC DRUCKERBy Peter Drucker2006 (March 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-4221-0168-1 / MHID: 1-4221-0168-1A Professional Reference TitleThis book gathers together Peter Drucker’s articles from HarvardBusiness Review and frames them with a thoughtful introductionfrom the Review’s Editor Tom Stewart. One of this century’smost highly regarded students of management, Drucker hassought out, identified, and examined the most important issuesconfronting managers, from corporate strategy to managementstyle to social change. Through his unique lens, this volumegives us the rare opportunity to trace the evolution of the greatshifts in our workplaces, and to understand more clearly the roleof managers. This book gathers together Drucker’s articles fromHarvard Business Review and frames them with a thoughtfulintroduction from the review’s editor Thomas A. Stewart.International EditionGEMBA KAIZENA Commonsense, Low-Cost Approach to ManagementBy Masaaki Imai1997 / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-031446-7 / MHID: 0-07-031446-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118908-8 / MHID: 0-07-118908-4 [IE]A Professional Reference Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan.)CONTENTS1 What is Gemba? House of Gemba. 2 Managers’ Roles in Gemba. 3Foundations of Gemba Kaizen. 4 How to Implement Gemba Kaizen. 5Major Activities to Promote Gemba Kaizen. 6 What Comes After GembaKaizen. 7 Human Aspects of Gemba Kaizen.International EditionTHE WISDOM OF TEAMSBy Jon R Katzenbach, and Douglas K Smith1994 / 304 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-875-84367-4 / MHID: 0-875-84367-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113439-2 / MHID: 0-07-113439-5[IE] - Out of PrintA Harvard Business School Press Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)CONTENTSAcknowledgements / Prologue / Part 1: Understanding Teams Chapter 1.Why Teams? Chapter 2. One Team: A Story of Performance Chapter 3.Team Basics: A Working Definition and Discipline Chapter 4. High-PerformanceTeams: Very Useful Models Part 2: Becoming a Team Chapter5. The Team Performance Curve Chapter 6. Moving up the Curve: FromIndividual to Team Performance Chapter 7. Team Leaders Chapter 8.Teams, Obstacles, and Endings: Getting Unstuck Part 3: Exploiting thePotential Chapter 9. Teams and Performance: The Reinforcing CycleChapter 10. Teams and Major Change: An Inevitable CombinationChapter 11. Teams at the Top: A Difficult Choice Chapter 12. TopManagement’s Role: Leading to the High-Performance Organization /Epilogue / Appendix / Selected Readings / IndexInternational EditionASSERTIVENESS AT WORKA Practical Guide to Handling Awkward Situation,3rd EditionBy Ken Back and Kate Back2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711428-2 / MHID: 0-07-711428-0McGraw-Hill UK TitleA Professional Reference Title(Details unavailable at press time)KAIZENThe Key to Japan’s Competitive SuccessBy Masaaki Imai1986 / 260 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-554332-9 / MHID: 0-07-554332-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-112647-2 / MHID: 0-07-112647-3 [IE]A Professional Reference Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan.)CONTENTS1. Kaizen, The Concept 2. Improvement East and West 3. Kaizen byTotal Quality Control 4. Kaizen - The Practice 5. Kaizen Management6. The Kaizen Approach to Problem Solving 7. Changing the CorporateCulture / Appendixes / Index122HED 2007 Management.indd 12210/5/2006 1:24:33 PM

Human Resource Management/Leadership(Professional References)THE THREE FINANCIAL STYLES OF VERYSUCCESSFUL LEADERSBy Ted Prince, Founder of Perth Leadership Institute2006 / 352 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-145429-2 / MHID: 0-07-145429-2A Professional Reference TitleIn Prince’s The Three Financial Styles of Very Successful Leaders,nationally acclaimed leadership expert and executive coach TedPrince introduces the breakthrough concept of the “financialsignature,” a set of personal financial traits that inform everyleader’s decision making. Drawing upon his groundbreakingresearch into the behaviors of more than 130 corporate heads,as well as his two decades as a CEO and member of more thantwenty corporate boards, he• Identifies the relationship between a leader’s financial signatureand his company’s financial and valuation performance,products, market, strategy, and technology• Using present day leaders including Steve Jobs, Lou Gerstner,Pierre Omidyar, Sam Walton, Bill Gates, and Sandy Weill,Prince identifies different leadership styles• Case studies illustrate the key role financial signature hasplayed in many of the business world’s most sensational successesand failures• Self-Assessment exercises, give students the opportunity toprofile themselves along several different dimensions associatedwith leaders and the leadership process. These self-assessmentsprovide readers with an opportunity to take a look in the mirrorto identify your students’ financial signature, understand how itimpacts their firm’s financial performance and valuation, andshape strategies to take utmost advantage of their strengthsRECRUITING EXCELLENCEAn insiders guide to sourcing top talentBy Jeff Grout and Sarah Perrin2005 / 256 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711121-2 / MHID: 0-07-711121-4 (Softcover)McGraw-Hill UK TitleA Professional Reference TitleYou want to fill your company with smart ideas, fill it with greatpeople. In times of boom or bust, it is the people that providecompetitive advantage. Recruiting excellence explains how thedynamics of the modern work place have changed, and how thishas impacted on recruiting strategies. Split into three sections,Part one takes a step back, looking at the strategic environment:the candidate’s agenda, changing employment market,employer branding, alternative means of sourcing new recruitsand alternatives to taking more staff on board. Part two takes apractical look at recruitment – addressing the process, use ofconsultancies, headhunters, advertising, CV’s and applicationforms. It also explains the psychometric texts, their use andeffectiveness. It gives tips on interviewing and the final selection.Part three – After the selection- examines making the offer,probationary period and how to retain the key recruits.CONTENTSManagementIntroduction: People are your powerhouse Part I: The strategic environmentChapter 1 The Business Agenda Chapter 2: The Candidate’sAgenda Chapter 3: Strategies for Successful Recruitment Chapter 4:Alternative sourcing Chapter 5: Alternatives to recruitment Chapter6: Common recruitment failings Part II: Practical Recruiting Chapter 7:The recruitment process Chapter 8: Calling in the cavalry: Recruitmentconsultancies Chapter 9: Effective advertising Chapter 10: CVs andapplication forms Chapter 11: Testing times Chapter 12: Interviewing:technique tips Chapter 13: Interviewing: effective questioning Chapter14: The final selection Part III: After selection: Getting the best fromrecruits Chapter 15: Making the offer Chapter 16: Effective on boardingChapter 17: Re-recruitment Chapter 18: FiringManagement Skills(Professional References)THE GHOSN FACTOR24 Inspiring Lessons from Carlos Ghosn, The MostSuccessful Transnational CEOBy Miguel Rivas-Micoud, Professor of English in the Law faculty ofMeiji University--Tokyo2006 / 56 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-124867-9 / MHID: 0-07-124867-6A Professional Reference TitleThe Ghosn Factor presents a daunting profile of Carlos Ghosn,the turnaround corporate artist who is about to surpass himselfby heading Renault in France while continuing as CEO of Nissanin Japan. In this book Miguel Rivas-Micoud tells the Ghosnstory in 24 concise and bite-size chapters of analysis, history,anecdotes and quotations, principally drawn from extendedinterviews with his subject. Learn how Ghosn is able to generatevalue where others have failed, and what the man says andthinks about: Profitability • Vision • Patience • Motivation •Breaking the mold • Measurement • Implementation • Empowerment• Priorities. The Ghosn Factor shows how managers andemployees alike can quickly bring or keep their organizationson track for lasting profitable growth.CONTENTS1 The Five Imperatives 2 Generating Value 3 Profitability 4 Coachinga Successor 5 Keep It Simple 6 Vision 7 Looking Inside 8 The Plan 9Striking a Balance 10 Patience 11 Seize The Opportunity 12 ExactMeasurement 13 Beware Complacency 14 Motivation 15 ManagementEngaged 16 Breaking The Mold 17 Intensity 18 Stretching The Company19 Implementation 20 Empowerment 21 Priorities 22 Rewarding Performance23 Professional Craftsmanship 24 The Important Little Things/ Appendix: Key Events in the Life of Carlos Ghosn / Sources123HED 2007 Management.indd 12310/5/2006 1:24:33 PM

ManagementStrategic Management(Professional References)MULTISOURCINGBy Linda Cohen, Denise Underwood and Allie Young2006 (October 2005)ISBN-13: 978-1-59139-797-7 / MHID: 1-59139-797-9A Professional Reference TitleOver the last decade, the number of services that can be outsourcedhas grown exponentially. Yet research suggests that50 percent of outsourcing contracts signed during the last threeyears will fail to meet expectations. Gartner sourcing expertsLinda Cohen, Denise Underwood, and Allie Young argue thatthis is because most organizations are utilizing ad-hoc approachesto outsourcing that are both short-sighted and ineffective.Based on extensive, multiyear research, this book unveils anew operational model—multisourcing—that seamlessly blendsinternally and externally delivered services not just to cut costsor gain efficiencies, but to maximize growth, agility, and bottom-lineresults. Through practical frameworks and illustrativecompany examples, the authors guide managers in creating acustomized plan for managed multisourcing, including howto: assess their current sourcing strategy, strike the right typesof sourcing deals, set up effective governance systems, selectand evaluate service providers, and measure progress. A newapproach to a timely business issue from leading experts in thefield, Multisourcing presents a roadmap managers can followto position their firms as tomorrow’s industry leaders.REDEFINING HEALTH CAREBy Michael Porter, Harvard Business School Press and ElizabethTeisberg2006 (April 2006)ISBN-13: 978-1-59139-778-6 / MHID: 1-59139-778-2A Professional Reference TitleThe U.S. health care system is in crisis. At stake are the qualityof care for millions of Americans and the financial well-beingof individuals and employers squeezed by skyrocketing costs--not to mention the stability of state and federal governmentbudgets. In Redefining Health Care, internationally renownedstrategy expert Michael E. Porter and innovation expert ElizabethOlmsted Teisberg reveal the underlying and largely overlookedcauses of the problem and provide a powerful prescriptionfor change. The authors argue that participants in the healthcare system have competed to shift costs, accumulate bargainingpower, and restrict services rather than create value forpatients. This zero-sum competition takes place at the wronglevel--among health plans, networks, and hospitals--rather thanwhere it matters most: in the diagnosis, treatment, and preventionof specific health conditions. In spite of competition amongthese systems, the patient care cycle is poorly coordinated.The fractured system undermines both efficiency and qualityof outcomes. Redefining Health Care lays out a breakthroughframework for redefining health care competition based onpatient value over the full cycle of care—from prevention anddiagnosis through recovery or long-term disease management.With specific recommendations for hospitals, doctors, healthplans, employers, and policy makers, this book shows how tomove to value-based competition on results that will unleashstunning improvements in quality and efficiency.ALIGNMENTBy Robert Kaplan and David Norton of Harvard Business SchoolPress2006 (March 2006) / 320 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-591-39690-1 / MHID: 1-591-39690-5A Harvard Professional Reference TitleMost organisations consist of multiple business and supportunits, each populated by highly trained, experienced executives.But often the efforts of individual units are not coordinated,resulting in conflicts, lost opportunities, and diminishedperformance. Robert S. Kaplan and David P. Norton argue thatthe responsibility for this critical alignment lies with corporateheadquarters. In this book, the authors apply their revolutionaryBalanced Scorecard management system to corporate-level strategy,revealing how highly successful enterprises achieve powerfulsynergies by explicitly defining corporate headquarters’ rolein setting, coordinating, and overseeing organisational strategy.Based on extensive field research in organisations worldwide,Alignment shows how companies can build an enterprise-levelStrategy Map and Balanced Scorecard that clearly articulate the“enterprise value proposition”: how the enterprise creates valueabove that achieved by individual business units operatingalone. The book provides case studies, actionable frameworks,and sample scorecards that show how to align business andsupport units, boards of directors, and external partners withthe corporate strategy and create a governance process that willensure that alignment is sustained. The next breakthrough instrategy execution from the field’s premier thinkers, Alignmentshows how today’s companies can unlock unrealised valuefrom enterprise synergies.THE NEW STRATEGIC THINKINGBy Michel Robert, Decision Process International Inc2006 / 352 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146224-2 / MHID: 0-07-146224-4A Professional Reference TitleBestselling author Michel Robert gives you his trademark pureand simple rules for developing solid business strategies. Inthis anticipated follow-up to his previous bestsellers, managementexpert Michel Robert unveils his practical and provenmethodology for you to plan and implement effective corporatestrategies. Featuring a detailed explanation of how Robert usedhis approach to turn around Caterpillar as well as case studiesof leading companies that utilize Robert’s method, The NewStrategic Thinking shows you how to assemble a strategy team,identify your company’s driving force, determine the focus ofthe strategy (product, customer, or market), and launch initiativescompany wide.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com124HED 2007 Management.indd 12410/5/2006 1:24:33 PM

Entrepreneurship(Professional References)ManagementKnowledge Management(Professional References)BUSINESS PLANS MADE EASY3rd EditionBy David Bangs2006 / 320 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-932-53170-1 / MHID: 1-932-53170-XA Professional Reference TitleBusiness Plans Made Easy,Third Edition, is the latest incarnationof this essential guide for creating a high-impact businessplan. Revised and updated, it not only shows you how to writea business plan, but also how to use it, who should see it, andhow and when to update and revise it. New information onpersonal investment planning and information technology hasalso been included, and an added “expert advice” section at theend of each chapter gives helpful hints and tips.BEN FRANKLINBy Benjamin Franklin and Elaine McCormick2006 / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-1-932-53168-8 / MHID: 1-932-53168-8A Professional Reference TitleYou are holding the only modern adaptation of BenjaminFranklin’s 18th century autobiography. It is at its heart oneof the greatest business stories ever told. The most versatileFounding Father was a husband, a father, a writer, an inventor,a statesman, a fundraiser and a military leader. But in his mind,he was first and foremost a businessman. Franklin’s captivatingadventures include his almost single-handed responsibility forestablishing the first media empire, the first public library, thefirst fire brigade, the University of Pennsylvania, the first bookclub and the first franchise--all of which are detailed within thesepages with Franklin’s characteristic mix of humility and pride.Franklin chronicles his own story, from his early days growingup in colonial Boston to his retirement from printing and growinginvolvement in national politics. It was during these yearsthat he honed his management and leadership skills, acquireda fervent distaste for tyranny of all types, embraced a strong setof morals, and developed an uncompromising work ethic. Fromthe moment he fled his tyrannical master and set himself up as aprinter in Philadelphia, all who came into contact with Franklinrecognized his destiny. His wisdom transcends the ages--and hislife lessons are insights are as compelling today as ever.International EditionKNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENTEnabling Business GrowthBy Ganesh Natarajan, President of APTECH, a leading and training &consultant organization and Sandhya Shekhar, Principal Consultantof APTECH, Mumbai.2000 / 375 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-463770-8 / MHID: 0-07-463770-3(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118820-3 / MHID: 0-07-118820-7 [IE]Tata McGraw-Hill TitleA Professional Reference TitleCONTENTS1. Introduction 2. Demystifying Knowledge Management 3. KM TheBusiness Perspective 4. KM The Technology Perspective 5. KM TheProcess Perspective 6. KM The Learning Systems Perspective 7. K MThe Market Perspective 8. Building the Knowledge Corporation 9. KMin Other Segments 10. KM Your Perspective 11. KM The FutureCorporate Governance(Professional References)CORPORATE GOVERNANCEBy John L Colley and Jacqueline L Doyle of University of VA-Charlottesville,Wallace Stettinius and George Logan2006 / 256 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146400-0 / MHID: 0-07-146400-XA Professional Reference TitleCorporate Governance delivers vital information on the smoothand transparent running of your business, with a high-levelanalysis of key governance aspects, from board selection anddirectors’ legal obligations to board and corporate organization.It covers the board’s role in strategy formulation, business planning,and gaining necessary new financing.125HED 2007 Management.indd 12510/5/2006 1:24:33 PM

ManagementFROM CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCEBest Corporate Governance Practices for AsianCompaniesBy Mak Yuen Teen2006 / 464 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-124781-8 / MHID: 0-07-124781-5An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference TitleCorporate governance has become very much a part of thebusiness language and its importance continues to be reinforcedby recent corporate scandals worldwide. However, while goodcorporate governance aims to reduce the risks of fraud andmismanagement in companies, it is also about improving thefunctioning of these companies. Good corporate governanceis not only about conformance with laws, rules, standards andcodes but also about enhancing performance and shareholdervalue. This book approaches corporate governance from a multidisciplinaryperspective and emphasises not only conformanceissues but also best practices designed to enhance companyperformance and shareholder value. The book provides anoverview of corporate governance, including practices anddevelopments in the Asian region and internationally, and comprehensivecoverage of important areas of corporate governancerelating to the board of directors, remuneration, accountability,communication with investors, risk management and audit. Itis balanced between theory and practice and is written withan Asian audience in mind. Contributors to the book includeacademics, regulators, directors, senior executives and otherindustry professionals.CONTENTSPart I: Overview of Corporate Governance 1 The Goalposts haveMoved: Recent International Developments in Corporate Governance 2Corporate Governance in Malaysia: An Overview of Legal and RegulatoryReforms 3 Corporate Governance in Hong Kong 4 A ComparativeStudy of Corporate Governance Disclosures and Practices of Large ListedCompanies in Hong Kong, Malaysia, Thailand and Singapore 5 The 3P’s of Corporate Governance: Principles, Processes and People 6 TheReal Challenges of Good Corporate Governance Part II: The Boardof Directors 7 Current Issues in Directors’ Legal Liabilities 8 SelectingDirectors for an Independent Board 9 Directors’ Cut: Interviews withIndependent Directors on Current Issues and Challenges 10 Who isan Independent Director: Fact, Perception or Anything Goes? 11 SixDegrees of Separation between the CEO and Chairman: Asian-styleBoard Leadership 12 Should There be a Limit on the Number of Directorships?13 Board Size Really Matters 14 Lack of Separation betweenthe Board and Management 15 Information Requirements of the Boardof Directors 16 Directors’ and Officers’ Liability in a Changing Environmentin Asia 17 Directors’ and Officers’ Liability Insurance: TheAsian Landscape after 9/11, Corporate Scandals and Sarbanes-OxleyAct Part III: Remuneration 18 Using Stock Options as Compensation19 Disclosure is Not a Substitute for Good Governance: The Bio-TreatTechnology Case 20 Performance Shares: What’s Fair, What’s Not 21Accounting for Share-based Payments 22 Valuation of Stock OptionsPart IV: Audit, Risk Management and Accountability 23 Making RelatedParty Transactions Transparent: A Survey of International Practices 24Calibrating Corporate Governance Practices: Corporate GovernanceScores 25 Corporate Governance Rating: Thailand’s Experience 26 AnAuditor’s Perspective on Corporate Governance in Singapore 27 TheAudit Committee and Its Role in Corporate Governance 28 The Role ofRisk Management in a Sound System of Internal Controls 29 CorporateGovernance: New Challenges for the CFO Part V: Communication withInvestors 30 Best Practices in Investor Relations and the Current Stateof Investor Relations in Singapore 31 Communicating with Shareholders32 Investor Communications: A Case Study of a Chinese Mid-capState-owned EnterpriseCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg126HED 2007 Management.indd 12610/5/2006 1:24:33 PM

2007-2008 NEW Business Administration TitlesBusiness Administration~ Contents2007 New Titles• JONESIntroduction to Business ..........................................129ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322436-7 / MHID: 0-07-322436-7Introduction to Business - Software ............................... 130Introduction to Business - Textbooks ............................. 1282008 New Titles• FERRELLBusiness, 6e .............................................................128ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351166-5 / MHID: 0-07-351166-8• NICKELSUnderstanding Business, 8e .....................................128ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310597-0 / MHID: 0-07-310597-X127HED 2007 Business Administration127 12710/5/2006 1:26:32 PM

Business AdministrationIntroduction to Business -TextbooksInternational EditionNEWBUSINESSA Changing world, 6th EditionBy O C Ferrell, Colorado State University, Geoffrey Hirt and LindaFerrell of University of Wyoming2008 (January 2007) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-351166-5 / MHID: 0-07-351166-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128560-5 / MHID: 0-07-128560-1 [IE](Details unavailable at press time)International EditionNEWUNDERSTANDING BUSINESS8th EditionBy William Nickels, University of Maryland-College Park, Jim &Susan McHugh2008 (November 2006) / 832 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310597-0 / MHID: 0-07-310597-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-110136-3 / MHID: 0-07-110136-5Website: http://www.mhhe.com/nickels8eUnderstanding Business by Nickels, McHugh, and McHughhas been the number one textbook in the introduction tobusiness market for several editions for three reasons: (1) Thecommitment and dedication of an author team that teachesthis course and believes in the importance and power of thislearning experience, (2) we listen to our customers, and (3) thequality of our supplements package. We consistently look tothe experts –full-time faculty members, adjunct instructors, andof course students– to drive the decisions we make about thetext itself and the ancillary package. Through a series of focusgroups, symposia, as well as full-book, single-chapter, revisedmanuscript reviews of both text and key ancillaries, we haveheard the stories of more than 500 professors and their insightsand experiences are evident on every page of the revision andin every supplement. As teachers of the course and users of theirown materials, the author team is dedicated to the principlesof excellence in business education. From providing the richestmost current topical coverage to using dynamic pedagogythat puts students in touch with today’s real business issues, tocreating groundbreaking and market-defining ancillary itemsfor professors and students alike, Understanding Business leadsthe way.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Online Course Management. Online assets have been greatlyenhanced. Our content available for online courses is much morecomprehensive and in line with what needs to be available for hybrid(part online and part person-to-person) or completely online courses.The student CD has been eliminated and all study resources put on theOLC for easy access. (no premium content)• Standard Cartridge. =$5 The Standard Cartridge includes all of thematerial that is contained in the OLC, but in a format ready for Blackboard,WebCT, etc.• Enhanced Cartridge =$15 The Enhanced Cartridge is the perfect toolfor instructors teaching a hybrid course or a course completely onlinelooking for a lot of online content. Resources like threaded discussionpostings, assignments, student activities, etc –are included in the enhancedcartridge– plenty of material to keep students and professorsbusy who are in an online/hybrid course.• Bonus Chapters. The chapters on Using Technology to Manage Informationand Managing Personal Finances have been changed to BonusChapters. Previous appendices on Risk Management and the LegalEnvironment of Business have also been changed to bonus chaptersat the end of the book. Through our market research, we found mostpeople did not cover these 2 areas (technology and personal finances)in much depth. So, to help with important issues of book length, thesechapters were shortened a bit to give the most applicable and importantinformation to the student. But, for those who still want to cover theseconcepts, the information in the text is quite sufficient– and, importantly,these bonus chapters are still supported with supplemental material suchas test bank questions, instructor’s notes, PowerPoints, etc.• New Video Format. There is still 1 video per chapter included withthe text, but there are 12 new videos shot specifically for UB8e in a newmodular format to be used on a DVD. Each of these videos is broken outinto the same 7 short segments that focus on the company/organization’shistory, ethics, challenges, future plans, etc. Then the professor candrag and drop them into any order they prefer, thereby creating theirown video. Professors have been telling us they prefer much differentvideo lengths and topics– this allows them the flexibility to customizethe videos as they’ve been asking to do. The other videos that are notoriginal for UB8e are 8-10 minute videos.FEATURES• Authorship = Credibility. No one can deny the unique perspectivethis “Perfect Author Team” has to offer. Bill Nickels is a 4-yr schoolIntro to Business teacher; Jim McHugh is a community college Intro toBusiness teacher; Susan McHugh is an educational consultant. Authorswho teach the course are unique among competitors in this market.• Users of Understanding Business have always appreciated the currencyof the material as well as the large number of examples fromcompanies of all sizes and industries (e.g., service, manufacturing, profitand non-profit)-in the United States and around the world.• Assurance of Learning: Tied directly to the summaries at the end ofthe chapter and to the test questions, and critical for AACSB assuranceof learning standards, learning goals help students preview what theyare supposed to know after reading the chapter, and then test thatknowledge by answering the questions in the summary. The studyguide is also closely linked to the learning goals as part of the totalintegrated teaching, learning, and testing system. The Test Bank alsoincludes a test table that organizes the questions in the TB by learningobjective. A new test table for the study guide is also included in theIM so professors can see how these review questions are tied to thelearning objectives.• Getting Ready for Prime Time opens the text. Coverage includes aunique and popular business etiquette discussion, study skills and timemanagement guidance, and advice on how to get a rewarding job thatwill lead to a successful career. Career management is becoming anincreasingly important component of this course.• The critical themes of the revision remain tried and true to our pasteditions: ecommerce, small business and entrepreneurship, globalbusiness, technology and change, customer focus, ethics and social responsibility,teams and teamwork, quality, cultural diversity, The authorscontinue to feature boxes titled “Spotlight on Small Business,”MakingEthical Decisions,” “Legal Briefcase,” “Dealing with Change,” and“Reaching Beyond our Borders” in every chapter.• The emphasis on entrepreneurship continues to be a hallmark of the8th Edition. This emphasis exists because the vast majority of studentstaking this course currently works in, or ultimately will work in, smallcompanies. There is an Entrepreneurship Readiness Questionnaire aswell as an entire chapter on subject, Entrepreneurship and Starting aSmall Business. There is more coverage of entrepreneurship and startinga small business in Understanding Business 8th Edition than in anyother introduction to business text on the market.128HED 2007 Business Administration128 12810/5/2006 1:26:33 PM

Business Administration• “Getting to Know Business Professionals”: Each chapter beginswith a story about a person whose career illustrates an important pointcovered in the chapter. Not all the personalities are famous since manyof them work in small businesses and nonprofit organizations. Theseprofiles provide a transition between chapters and a good introductionto the text material.• Throughout the chapters there are “Progress Assessments” that askstudents to assess their understanding of what they have just read. Ifstudents are not understanding and retaining the material, the ProgressAssessments will stop them and show them that they need to reviewbefore proceeding.• SCANS. The Secretary’s Commission on Achieving Necessary Skills(SCANS) was appointed by the Secretary of Labor to identify the skillspeople need to succeed in the workplace. SCANS’s fundamental purposeis to encourage a high-performance economy characterized by high-skill,high-wage employment. To help students connect what they learn inclass to the world outside, it’s important that they understand these 5workplace competencies (resource skills, interpersonal skills, informationability, systems understanding, and technology ability).• Unique inserts called “Critical Thinking Questions” are foundthroughout each chapter, and ask students to pause and think about howthe material they are reading applies to their own lives. This device is anexcellent tool for linking the text material to the student’s past experienceto enhance retention. It greatly increases student involvement inthe text and course as recommended by SCANS.• Key terms are developed and reinforced through a three-tieredsystem. They are introduced in boldface, repeated and defined in themargin, listed at the end of each chapter with page references, anddefined in a glossary at the end of the text. The glossary also containsAmerican slang expressions used in the text, which provides studentsfrom other countries in particular some help in translating, since theexpressions are not found in most dictionaries (slang terms and definitionsare provided in italics).• Multi-lingual glossaries are included on the OLC for ESL students– thebusiness terms and their definitions from the text translated into Spanish,Russian, and Mandarin Chinese.• Photo and Illustration Essays are a hallmark of UB. Detailed captionsaccompany each photo or illustration. The accompanying descriptionshelp the student understand what is being shown in the graphic andhow it applies to concepts presented in the narrative. To that end, everyphoto in this edition is pedagogically relevant and the authors treat theillustrative content with as much care as the narrative. Students are visually-orientedlearners, so this increased emphasis on the pedagogicalvalue of the illustration program is essential.• Interactive Summaries. The end-of-chapter summaries are directlytied with the learning goals and are written in a unique question andanswer format. Answering the questions and getting immediate feedbackhelps prepare students for quizzes and exams. Students are extremelypositive about this format.• Optional “Taking It to the Net” Exercises at the end of every chapterallow students to research topics and issues on the Web. (The URL’s forthese exercises are updated as needed on the text OLC.)• The Developing Workplace Skills section has activities designed toincrease student involvement in the learning process. Some of thesemini-projects require library or Internet searches, but many of theminvolve talking with people to obtain their reactions and advice oncertain subjects. These assignments are appropriate for individual orteam-oriented assignments. These are the type of learning experiencesthat facilitate the SCANS competencies.• Each chapter concludes by referencing a short practice case thatcan be found at the text OLC (“Casing the Web”). These cases allowstudents to practice managerial decision-making. They are intentionallybrief and meant to be discussion starters rather than take up the entireclass period. The answers to the cases are in the instructor’s manual.These examples of real-world problem solving help students achievethe SCANS competencies.CONTENTSPart 1 Business Trends: Cultivating a Business in Diverse, GlobalEnvironments Chapter 1: Managing within the Dynamic Business Environment:Taking Risks and Making Profits Chapter 2: How EconomicsAffects Business: The Creation and Distribution of Wealth Chapter 3:Competing in Global Markets Chapter 4: Demonstrating Ethical Behaviorand Social Responsibility Part 2 Business Ownership: Startinga Small Business Chapter 5: Choosing a Form of Business OwnershipChapter 6: Entrepreneurship and Starting a Small Business Part 3Business Management: Empowering Employees to Satisfy CustomersChapter 7: Management, Leadership, and Employee EmpowermentChapter 8: Adapting Organizations to Today’s Markets Chapter 9:Producing World-Class Goods and Services Part 4 Managementof Human Resources: Motivating Employees to Produce QualityGoods and Services Chapter 10: Motivating Employees and BuildingSelf-Managed Teams Chapter 11: Human Resource Management:Finding and Keeping the Best Employees Chapter 12: Dealing withEmployee–Management Issues and Relationships Part 5 Marketing:Developing and Implementing Customer-Oriented Marketing PlansChapter 13: Marketing: Building Customer Relationships Chapter 14:Developing and Pricing Products and Services Chapter 15: DistributingProducts Quickly and Efficiently Chapter 16: Using Effective PromotionalTechniques Part 6 Managing Financial Resources Chapter 17:Understanding Financial Information and Accounting Chapter 18:Financial Management Chapter 19: Securities Markets: Financing andInvesting Opportunities Chapter 20: Understanding Money, FinancialInstitutions and the Federal Reserve Bonus Chapter A: Working Withinthe Legal Environment of Business Bonus Chapter B: Using Technologyto Manage Information Bonus Chapter C: Managing Risk Bonus ChapterD: Managing Personal FinancesInternational EditionNEWINTRODUCTION TO BUSINESSGareth R Jones, Texas A&M University2007 (January 2006) / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-322436-7 / MHID: 0-07-322436-7(with DVD, OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326066-2 / MHID: 0-07-326066-5(with CD, OLC and Tab Inserts)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125299-7 / MHID: 0-07-125299-1[IE with OLC PCC and Student DVD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/jonesintroBest-selling Management author, Gareth Jones, offers a freshapproach in Introduction to Business 1/e by engaging studentswith illustrative examples and stories embedded within the textto encourage them to learn more about the concepts than anyother paperback available. Jones’ Introduction to Business iscomprehensive yet concise by providing the main points in anarrative style without overwhelming the students with excessivedetail. The wealth of examples and the depth of coverageis unmatched by any other text. In contrast to the traditionalsurvey approach in this market, Jones provides a foundationto business by organizing the material to show students howbusiness happens not by separating topics by discipline.FEATURES• Jones provides students with an integrated “big picture” of business,not a survey approach that skims the surface. While other texts in thepaperback only survey the areas of business marketing, management,accounting and finance, Jones show students how these areas connectto each other and how they relate to the world in which we live.• Jones engages students through examples and stories which areintegrated within the text, making them more accessible than if theywere relegated to side boxes. In addition, when Jones introduces newconcepts, he relates them back to the student’s own experiences or toexamples covered in previous chapters to make material more cohesiveand student friendly.129HED 2007 Business Administration129 12910/5/2006 1:26:33 PM

Business Administration• In every chapter, hands-on exercises and thought-provoking questionsoffer students the opportunity to actively think and engage in businessissues and decision making.• Business in action boxes are included in the chapters and give realworldexamples, but don’t disrupt the text will too much unnecessarydetail.• A Question of Business feature opens up each chapter- it’s an in-depthstory bringing to light the substance of the business issue involved inthe chapter.• Why is This Important? Feature is included at the beginning of eachchapter and speaks directly to students so they know how the informationin the chapter will affect them in their future careers.• Did You Know? boxes appear throughout each chapter- these shortboxes highlight interesting statistics, quotes, and even trivia relatingto business.• In response to reviewer requests, each chapter will have an entrepreneurship/smallbusiness-related video and a corresponding VideoSmall Business In Action box. Each box will summarize and offer discussionsquestions related to the video. (Videos will be on the StudentDVD.) Chapter case videos will also be available that focus on larger,well-known companies.CONTENTSPart 1 The Environment of Business. Chapter 1 What Is Business? Chapter2 The Evolution of Business. Chapter 3 Entrepreneurs, Managers,and Employees. Chapter 4 Multinationals and the Global Environmentof Business. Chapter 5 Business Ethics and the Legal Environment ofBusiness. Part 2 The Human Side of Business. Chapter 6 Leadership,Influence, and Communication in Business. Chapter 7 Motivating andManaging People and Groups in Business Organizations. Chapter 8The Structure and Culture of a Business Organization. Part 3 A FunctionalApproach to Business. Chapter 9 Information Technology andE-Commerce: Managing Information, Knowledge, and Business Relationships.Chapter 10 Marketing and Product Development: Creatingand Positioning Goods and Services. Chapter 11 Sales, Distribution,and Customer Relationship Management: Reaching and Satisfying Customers.Chapter 12 Operations and Materials Management: Managingthe Production and Flow of Goods and Services. Chapter 13 HumanResource Management: Acquiring and Building Employees’ Skills andCapabilities. Chapter 14 Accounting: Measuring How Efficiently andEffectively Resources Are Creating Value and Profit. Chapter 15 Finance:Balancing Risk and ReturnInternational EditionBUSINESSA Changing World, 5th EditionBy O C Ferrell, Colorado State University, Geoffrey A Hirt, DePaulUniversity and Linda Ferrell, University of Wyoming2006 / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297358-7 / MHID: 0-07-297358-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312852-8 / MHID: 0-07-312852-X(with Student CD, OLC with Premium Content)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111748-7 / MHID: 0-07-111748-2[IE with Student CD and OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ferrell5eBusiness: A Changing World by Ferrell/Hirt/Ferrell is the fastestgrowing introductory business textbook on the market, and fora simple reason. Unlike competing books, which are trimmedand spliced from much longer works into an approximation of anessentials edition, Ferrell/Hirt/Ferrell is written from the groundup to be brief, lean, and flexible enough to enable you to coverjust the topics you want at the level of depth you want, plus itdoesn’t inherit out-dated examples from a hardback derivative.With market-leading teaching support and the most up to datecontent available, Business: A Changing World represents thebest value available in the brief Introductory Business market.What sets Ferrell apart? An unrivaled mixture of topical depth,current content and the best teaching support around.CONTENTSPart One: Business in a Changing World Chapter 1: The Dynamics ofBusiness and Economics Chapter 2: Business Ethics and Social Responsibility/ Appendix A The Legal and Regulatory Environment / Chapter 3:Business in a Borderless World Chapter 4: Managing Information Technologyand E-Business / Role-Play Exercise: National Farm & Garden,Inc. / Part Two: Starting and Growing a Business Chapter 5: Options forOrganizing Business Chapter 6: Small Business, Entrepreneurship, andFranchising /Appendix B The Business Plan / Role-Play Exercise: HumanResponse, Inc. / Part Three: Managing for Quality and CompetitivenessChapter 7: The Nature of Management Chapter 8: Organization,Teamwork, and Communication Chapter 9: Production and OperationsManagement / Role-Playing Exercise: McDougal Aircraft Company / PartFour: Creating the Human Resource Advantage Chapter 10: Motivatingthe Work Force Chapter 11: Managing Human Resources / Appendix CPersonal Career Plan / Role-Play Exercise: eQuality Assured / Part Five:Marketing: Developing Relationships Chapter 12: Customer-DrivenMarketing Chapter 13: Dimensions of Marketing Strategy / Role-PlayExercise: RedRiverShops.com / Part Six: Financing the Enterprise Chapter14: Accounting and Financial Statements Chapter 15: Money andthe Financial System Chapter 16: Financial Management and SecuritiesMarkets / Appendix D Personal Financial Planning / Role-Play Exercise:Dana Fashion Designs, Inc.Introduction to Business- SoftwareMIKE’S BIKES INTRO5th EditionBy Ferrell2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323011-5 / MHID: 0-07-323011-1Mike’s Bikes Intro is a simulation suited for courses in strategy orwhere knowledge of other functions is warranted. This simulationcan be used two ways, via a CD or through the Internet.This dynamic simulation allows students to make decisionsregarding different functions like strategy, marketing, operationsmanagement, accounting, finance, product development, teamdynamics, and economics.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com130HED 2007 Business Administration130 13010/5/2006 1:26:33 PM

2007-2008 NEW Keyboarding & Office Technology TitlesKeyboarding & OfficeTechnology ~ ContentsCustomer Service .......................................................... 135Keyboarding ................................................................. 132Keyboarding Advanced ................................................. 1352007 New Titles• BECKLINIntroduction to Medical Office TranscriptionPackage, 3e ............................................................. 135ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325936-9 / MHID: 0-07-325936-5• STEWARTGregg Quick Filing Practice Kit, 5e ......................... 136ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322288-2 / MHID: 0-07-322288-7Medical Transcription ................................................... 135Office Filing ................................................................. 136131HED 2007 Keyboarding & Office Te131 13110/5/2006 1:29:50 PM

Keyboarding & Office TechnologyKeyboardingGDP 1-60 KIT 1 WORD 200010th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-131: 978-0-07-313839-8 / MHID: 0-07-313839-8(Details unavailable at press time)GDP 1-60 KIT 1 WORD 200210th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313840-4 / MHID: 0-07-313840-1(Details unavailable at press time)GDP 1-60 KIT 1 WORD 200310th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313841-1 / MHID: 0-07-313841-XWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/gdpGregg College Keyboarding and Document Processing (GDP),10e by Ober, Johnson, and Zimmerly provides a highly flexible,complete learning system. Building from a strong foundation,this revision of GDP focuses on adding flexibility for the instructor.Multiple software enhancements and flexible InstructorManagement, both LAN and Web-based, support the program’sstrong content. Instructors will appreciate the flexibility of usinga program that can be successfully implemented in a varietyof classroom environments and that can be accessed from anyInternet-connected computer—regardless of where the programwas installed. This kit includes: Lessons 1-60 text, GDP HomeSoftware (Word 2003) w/ User’s Guide, Word 2003 Manual,and Easel.Other 1-60 Kits:Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing (GDP) Lessons1-60 Kit 1 (Word 2002), 10/e—ISBN 0073138401.Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing (GDP) Lessons1-60 Kit 1 (Word 2000), 10/e—ISBN 0073138398.CONTENTSPart One: The Alphabet, Number, and Symbol Keys Unit 1 Keyboarding– The Alphabet Unit 2 Keyboarding – The Alphabet Unit 3 Keyboarding– The Numbers Part Two: Basic Business Documents Unit 5 Emailand Word Processing Unit 6 Reports Unit 7 Correspondence Unit 8Tables Part Three: Reports, Correspondence, and Employment DocumentsUnit 9 Reports Unit 10 Correspondence Unit 11 EmploymentDocuments Unit 12 Skillbuilding and In-Basket Review / Skillbuilding/ Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet / Diagnostic Practice: Numbers /Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet / Diagnostic Practice: Numbers / PacedPractice / Supplementary Timed Writings / Appendix / Ten-Key NumericKeypad / IndexGDP 61-120 KIT 2 WORD 200010th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313842-8 / MHID: 0-07-313842-8(Details unavailable at press time)GDP 61-120 KIT 2 WORD 200210th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313843-5 / MHID: 0-07-313843-6(Details unavailable at press time)GDP 61-120 KIT 2 WORD 200310th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313844-2 / MHID: 0-07-313844-4Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gdpGregg College Keyboarding and Document Processing (GDP),10e by Ober, Johnson, and Zimmerly provides a highly flexible,complete learning system. Building from a strong foundation,this revision of GDP focuses on adding flexibility for the instructor.Multiple software enhancements and flexible InstructorManagement, both LAN and Web-based, support the program’sstrong content. Instructors will appreciate the flexibility of usinga program that can be successfully implemented in a varietyof classroom environments and that can be accessed from anyInternet-connected computer—regardless of where the programwas installed.This kit includes: Lessons 61-120 text, GDP Home Software(Word 2003) w/ User’s Guide, Word 2003 Manual, and Easel.Other 61-120 Kits:Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing (GDP)Lessons 61-120 Kit 2 (Word 2002), 10/e—ISBN 0073138436.Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing (GDP)Lessons 61-120 Kit 2 (Word 2000), 10/e—ISBN 0073138428.CONTENTSPart Four: Advanced Formatting Unit 13 Skill Refinement Unit 14Reports Unit 15 Correspondence Unit 16 Tables Part Five: SpecializedApplications Unit 17 Formal Report Project Unit 18 InternationalFormatting Unit 19 Medical Office Applications Unit 20 Legal OfficeApplications Part Six: Using and Designing Business Documents Unit21 Using and Designing Office Forms Unit 22 Designing Office PublicationsUnit 23 Designing Web Pages Unit 24 Skillbuilding and In-BasketReview / Skillbuilding / Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet / DiagnosticPractice: Numbers / Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet / Diagnostic Practice:Numbers / Paced Practice / Supplementary Timed Writings / Appendix/ Ten-Key Numeric Keypad / Index132HED 2007 Keyboarding & Office Te132 13210/5/2006 1:29:50 PM

Keyboarding & Office TechnologyGDP 1-120 KIT 3 WORD 200010th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313846-6 / MHID: 0-07-313846-0CONTENTSCollege Keyboarding & Document Processing 9/e Reference Manual/ Getting Started / Lesson 21 Orientation to Word Processing-A Lesson22 Orientation to Word Processing-B Lesson 23 Orientation to WordProcessing-C Lesson 24 Orientation to Word Processing-D Lesson 25Email Basics Lesson 26 One-Page Business Reports Lesson 27 MultipageBusiness Reports Lesson 28 Bulleted and Numbered Lists Lesson 29Academic Reports Lesson 30 Academic Reports with Displays Lesson31 Business Letters Lesson 33 Envelopes Lesson 35 CorrespondenceReview Lesson 36 Boxed Tables Lesson 37 Open Tables with TitlesLesson 38 Open Tables with Column Headings Lesson 39 Ruled Tableswith Number Columns Lesson 41 Business Reports with FootnotesLesson 42 Reports in APA Style Lesson 44 Report Citations Lesson 45Preliminary Report Pages Lesson 50 Letters in Modified-Block StyleLesson 51 Traditional Resumes Lesson 52 Electronic Resumes Lesson67 Agendas and Minutes of Meetings Lesson 69 Reports Formatted inColumns Lesson 72 Special Letter Features Lesson 73 More SpecialLetter Features Lesson 74 Multipage Memos with Tables Lesson 76Tables with Footnotes or Source Notes Lesson 78 Tables FormattedSideways Lesson 79 Multipage Tables Lesson 80 Using PredesignedTable Formats Lesson 81 Formal Reoprt Project Lesson 83 FormalReport Project Lesson 86 International Formatting (Canada) Lesson 87International Formatting (Mexico) Lesson 96 Legal Office ApplicationsLesson 101 Using Correspondence Templates Lesson 102 Using ReportTemplates Lesson 103 Designing Letterheads Lesson 104 DesigningNotepads Lesson 106 Designing Cover Pages Lesson 107 DesigningAnnouncements and Flyers Lesson 111 Creating, Saving, and ViewingWeb Pages Lesson 112 Creating Frames Lesson 113 Creating Web Pageswith Hyperlinks Lesson 115 Formatting Web Pages / Appendix A / StartWord from Windows / Quit Word / Appendix B / A Brief Introductionto the Internet / Overview-What is the Internet? / Internet Elements /The Internet and YouGDP 1-120 KIT 3 WORD 200210th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313847-3 / MHID: 0-07-313847-9CONTENTSReference Manual / Getting Started / Lesson 21 Orientation to WordProcessing-A Lesson 22 Orientation to Word Processing-B Lesson 23Orientation to Word Processing-C Lesson 24 Orientation to WordProcessing-D Lesson 25 Email Basics Lesson 26 One-Page BusinessReports Lesson 27 Multipage Business Reports Lesson 28 Bulleted andNumbered Lists Lesson 29 Academic Reports Lesson 30 AcademicReports with Displays Lesson 31 Business Letters Lesson 33 EnvelopesLesson 35 Correspondence Review Lesson 36 Boxed Tables Lesson37 Open Tables with Titles Lesson 38 Open Tables with ColumnHeadings Lesson 39 Ruled Tables with Number Columns Lesson 41Business Reports with Footnotes Lesson 42 Reports in APA Style Lesson44 Report Citations Lesson 45 Preliminary Report Pages Lesson 50 Lettersin Modified-Block Style Lesson 51 Traditional Resumes Lesson 52Electronic Resumes Lesson 67 Agendas and Minutes of Meetings Lesson69 Reports Formatted in Columns Lesson 72 Special Letter FeaturesLesson 73 More Special Letter Features Lesson 74 Multipage Memoswith Tables Lesson 76 Tables with Footnotes or Source Notes Lesson78 Tables Formatted Sideways Lesson 79 Multipage Tables Lesson 80Using Predesigned Table Formats Lesson 81 Formal Reoprt ProjectLesson 83 Formal Report Project Lesson 86 International Formatting(Canada) Lesson 87 International Formatting (Mexico) Lesson 96 LegalOffice Applications Lesson 101 Using Correspondence Templates Lesson102 Using Report Templates Lesson 103 Designing LetterheadsLesson 104 Designing Notepads Lesson 106 Designing Cover PagesLesson 107 Designing Announcements and Flyers Lesson 111 Creating,Saving, and Viewing Web Pages Lesson 112 Creating Frames Lesson113 Creating Web Pages with Hyperlinks Lesson 115 Formatting WebPages / Appendix A / Start Word from Windows / Quit Word / AppendixB / A Brief Introduction to the Internet / Overview-What is the Internet?/ Internet Elements / The Internet and YouGDP 1-120 KIT 3 WORD 200310th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313848-0 / MHID: 0-07-313848-7Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gdpGregg College Keyboarding and Document Processing (GDP),10e by Ober, Johnson, and Zimmerly provides a highly flexible,complete learning system. Building from a strong foundation,this revision of GDP focuses on adding flexibility for the instructor.Multiple software enhancements and flexible InstructorManagement, both LAN and Web-based, support the program’sstrong content. Instructors will appreciate the flexibility of usinga program that can be successfully implemented in a varietyof classroom environments and that can be accessed from anyInternet-connected computer—regardless of where the programwas installed.This kit includes: Lessons 1-120 text, GDP Home Software (Word2003) w/ User’s Guide, Word 2003 Manual, and Easel.Other 1-120 Kits:Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing (GDP)Lessons 1-120 Kit 2 (Word 2002), 10/e—ISBN 0073138479.Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing (GDP)Lessons 1-120 Kit 2 (Word 2000), 10/e—ISBN 0073138460.CONTENTSPart One: The Alphabet, Number, and Symbol Keys Unit 1 Keyboarding– The Alphabet Unit 2 Keyboarding – The Alphabet Unit 3 Keyboarding– The Numbers Unit 4 Keyboarding – The Symbols Part Two:Basic Business Documents Unit 5 Email and Word Processing Unit6 Reports Unit 7 Correspondence Unit 8 Tables Part Three: Reports,Correspondence, and Employment Documents Unit 9 Reports Unit 10Correspondence Unit 11 Employment Documents Unit 12 Skillbuildingand In-Basket Review Part Four: Advanced Formatting Unit 13 SkillRefinement Unit 14 Reports Unit 15 Correspondence Unit 16 TablesPart Five: Specialized Applications Unit 17 Formal Report ProjectUnit 18 International Formatting Unit 19 Medical Office ApplicationsUnit 20 Legal Office Applications Part Six: Using and Designing BusinessDocuments Unit 21 Using and Designing Office Forms Unit 22Designing Office Publications Unit 23 Designing Web Pages Unit 24Skillbuilding and In-Basket Review / Skillbuilding / Diagnostic Practice:Alphabet / Diagnostic Practice: Numbers / Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet/ Diagnostic Practice: Numbers / Paced Practice /Supplementary TimedWritings / Appendix / Ten-Key Numeric Keypad / IndexINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg133HED 2007 Keyboarding & Office Te133 13310/5/2006 1:29:51 PM

Keyboarding & Office TechnologyGDP 1-20 KIT10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball State University, Jack E Johnson and ArleneZimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313849-7 / MHID: 0-07-313849-5Website: http://www.mhhe.com/gdpGregg College Keyboarding and Document Processing (GDP),10e by Ober, Johnson, and Zimmerly provides a highly flexible,complete learning system. Building from a strong foundation,this revision of GDP focuses on adding flexibility for the instructor.Multiple software enhancements and flexible InstructorManagement, both LAN and Web-based, support the program’sstrong content. Instructors will appreciate the flexibility of usinga program that can be successfully implemented in a varietyof classroom environments and that can be accessed from anyInternet-connected computer—regardless of where the programwas installed.CONTENTSPart One: The Alphabet, Number, and Symbol Keys Unit 1 Keyboarding– The Alphabet 1) Home Keys: Space Bar ENTER F J D K S L A ; 2) NewKeys: H E O R3) New Keys: M T P C 4) New Keys: RIGHT SHIFT V .W 5) Review Unit 2 Keyboarding – The Alphabet 6) New Keys: I LEFTSHIFT—G 7) New Keys: U B : X 8) New Keys: Y , Q / 9) New Keys: NZ ? TAB 10) Review Unit 3 Keyboarding – The Numbers 11) NumberKeys: 5 7 3 9 12) Review 13) Number Keys: 8 2 0 14) Number Keys:4 6 1 15) ReviewUnit 4 Keyboarding – The Symbols 16) Symbol Keys:$ ( ) ! 17) Review 18) Symbol Keys: * # ‘ 19) Symbol Keys: & % “ @20) Review / Skillbuilding / Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet / DiagnosticPractice: Numbers / Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet / Diagnostic Practice:Numbers / Paced Practice / Supplementary Timed Writings / Appendix/ Ten-Key Numeric Keypad / Indexand Designing Office Forms Unit 22 Designing Office Publications Unit23 Designing Web Pages Unit 24 Skillbuilding and In-Basket ReviewTest 6 Skills Assessment on Part 6 / Skillbuilding / Diagnostic Practice:Alphabet / Diagnostic Practice: Numbers / Diagnostic Practice: Alphabet/ Diagnostic Practice: Numbers / Paced Practice / Supplementary TimedWritings / Appendix / Ten-Key Numeric Keypad / IndexGREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING DOCUMENTPROCESSING (GDP), LESSONS 1-20 TEXT10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006 / 128 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296340-3 / MHID: 0-07-296340-9Website: http://www.mhhe.com/keyboarding(Details unavailable at press time)GREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING & DOCUMENTPROCESSING (GDP), LESSONS 1-60 TEXT10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006 / 304 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296341-0 / MHID: 0-07-296341-7Website: http://www.mhhe.com/keyboarding(Details unavailable at press time)GREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING ANDDOCUMENT PROCESSING (GDP), LESSONS 1-12010th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006 / 592 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296338-0 / MHID: 0-07-296338-7(Main Text)Website: http://www.mhhe.com/GDP10Gregg College Keyboarding and Document Processing (GDP),10e by Ober, Johnson, and Zimmerly provides a highly flexible,complete learning system. Building from a strong foundation,this revision of GDP focuses on adding flexibility for the instructor.Multiple software enhancements and flexible InstructorManagement, both LAN and Web-based, support the program’sstrong content. Instructors will appreciate the flexibility of usinga program that can be successfully implemented in a varietyof classroom environments and that can be accessed from anyInternet-connected computer—regardless of where the programwas installed.CONTENTSPart One: The Alphabet, Number, and Symbol Keys Unit 1 Keyboarding– The Alphabet Unit 2 Keyboarding – The Alphabet Unit 3 Keyboarding– The Numbers Unit 4 Keyboarding – The Symbols Part Two: Basic BusinessDocuments Unit 5 Email and Word Processing Unit 6 Reports Unit7 Correspondence Unit 8 Tables Test 2 Skills Assessment on Part 2 PartThree: Reports, Correspondence, and Employment Documents Unit 9Reports Unit 10 Correspondence Unit 11 Employment Documents Unit12 Skillbuilding and In-Basket Review Test 3 Skills Assessment on Part3 Part Four: Advanced Formatting Unit 13 Skill Refinement Unit 14Reports Unit 15 Correspondence Unit 16 Tables Test 4 Skills Assessmenton Part 4 Part Five: Specialized Applications Unit 17 Formal ReportProject Unit 18 International Formatting Unit 19 Medical Office DocumentsUnit 20 Legal Office Documents Test 5 Skills Assessment on Part5 Part Six: Using and Designing Business Documents Unit 21 UsingGREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING & DOCUMENTPROCESSING (GDP), LESSONS 61-120 TEXT10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006 / 376 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296342-7 / MHID: 0-07-296342-5Website: http://www.mhhe.com/keyboarding(Details unavailable at press time)GREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING & DOCUMENTPROCESSING (GDP), LESSONS 121-180 TEXT10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006 / 248 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296343-4 / MHID: 0-07-296343-3Website: http://www.mhhe.com/keyboarding(Details unavailable at press time)134HED 2007 Keyboarding & Office Te134 13410/5/2006 1:29:51 PM

GREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING & DOCUMENTPROCESSING (GDP) STUDENT TAKE-HOMESOFTWARE10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299792- 7 / MHID: 0-07-299792-3(Details unavailbale at press time)Keyboarding AdvancedGREGG COLLEGE KEYBOARDING & DOCUMENTPROCESSING (GDP), LESSONS 121-180 TEXT10th EditionBy Scot Ober, Ball University, Jack E. Johnson and Arlene Zimmerly2006 / 248 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296343-4 / MHID: 0-07-296343-3Website: http://www.mhhe.com/keyboarding(Details unavailable at press time)Keyboarding & Office TechnologyNEWMedical TranscriptionINTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL OFFICETRANSCRIPTION PACKAGE3rd EditionBy Karonne Becklin and Edith Sunnarborg2007 (January 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325936-9 / MHID: 0-07-325936-5McGraw-Hill/Glencoe PublicationWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/MOT3eMedical Office Transcription, 3rd Edition, provides an introductioninto teaching medical transcription. The text/workbookreviews anatomy, medical terminology, symptoms and diseaseconditions, and grammar as it relates to the field of medicaltranscription. The one-semester text can be used independently,self-paced, or in a traditional classroom.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Current AAMT guidelines and formats—chapter 2 and AppendixA.• Updated appendices in abbreviations, drug classifications, laboratory,and HIPAA.Customer ServiceInternational EditionCUSTOMER SERVICEBuilding Successful Skills for the Twenty-First Century3rd EditionBy Robert W. Lucas, Creative Presentation Resources, Inc2005 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-293805-0 / MHID: 0-07-293805-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111292-5 / MHID: 0-07-111292-8 [IE]Customer Service, 3/e by Lucas features how-to topics for thecustomer service professional. It covers the concepts and skillsneeded for success in business careers, including listeningtechniques, verbal and nonverbal communication, and use oftechnology. Emphasis is given to dealing with customer serviceproblems and how to handle conflicts and stress. Insightsand tips are also provided for customer service supervisorypersonnel.CONTENTSPART ONE: THE PROFESSION Chapter 1 What Is Customer Service?Chapter 2 Contributing to the Service Culture PART TWO: SKILLSFOR SUCCESS Chapter 3 Positive Verbal Communication Chapter 4Nonverbal Communication in Customer Service Chapter 5 Listeningto the Customer Chapter 6 Customer Service and Behavior Chapter 7Handling Difficult Customer Encounters Chapter 8 Customer Servicein a Diverse World Chapter 9 Customer Service via Technology PARTTHREE: SELF-HELP SKILLS Chapter 10 Managing Your Stress Chapter11 Managing Your Time PART FOUR: ENHANCING CUSTOMERRELATIONSHIPS Chapter 12 Encouraging Customer Loyalty Chapter13 Service Recovery PART FIVE: CUSTOMER SERVICE FOR THETWENTY-FIRST CENTURY Chapter 14 Focusing on the Future• Chapter usage of current drugs, laboratory, and x-ray terms—chapters2-11.• Chapter-related review exercises and transcription—exercises inchapters 1-22; transcription in chapters 2-12.• Chapter-related hints for transcribing medical documents—chapters2-11.• Objectives reflect chapter content.• More word forms, incorporated into more exercises.• Expanded on grammar and punctuation according to AAMT rulesfor office transcription.• Updated format and style guidelines.• More homonyms and sound-alike words and their usage.• Expanded information in appendices including abbreviations, laboratorydata, and x-ray information.FEATURES• Basic anatomy information and diagrams.• Style Tips and Hints for Transcription as they apply to content andtranscription.• Actual doctors’ office dictation.• Text has capability for independent use as well as a classroom setting.135HED 2007 Keyboarding & Office Te135 13510/5/2006 1:29:51 PM

Keyboarding & Office TechnologyCONTENTSPreface. Chapter 1 Introduction to Medical Transcription. Chapter 2The Patient’s Medical Record. Chapter 3 The Integurnentary System.Chapter 4 The Respiratory System. Chapter 5 The Cardiovascular System.Chapter 6 The Digestive System. Chapter 7 The Endocrine System.Chapter 8 The Urinary System. Chapter 9 The Reproductive System andObstetrics. Chapter 10 The Musculoskeletal System. Chapter 11 TheNervous System. Chapter 12 Case Studies. Appendix A Basic MedicalTranscription Guidelines. Appendix B Abbreviations. Appendix C DrugClassifications. Appendix D Laboratory Tests. Appendix E HIPPA Overview.Appendix F Medical Transcriptionist Job Descriptions. IndexNEWOffice FilingGREGG QUICK FILING PRACTICE KIT5th EditonBy Jeffrey R Stewart, Virginia Polytech Inst and Barbara W Trent,Franklin University2007 (December 2005) / 96 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-322288-2 / MHID: 0-07-322288-7Website: http://www.mhhe.com/stewart5eThis kit provides training in the methods of paper and computerfiling. The theme of the text is that the reader is a new employeeof the fictional Online Printing Services and must complete areseries of tasks and exercises with the mock filing kit.NEW TO THIS EDITION• A new website for the text will include the Filing Tutorial, previouslyavailable on a floppy disk, as well as Instructor Materials, suchas objectives and tests.• A new look design of the mock filing kit provides easier set-up withless materials and more professional appearance. The box itself is utilizedas the mock filing cabinet.• There is an increased exposure to computer and electronic filing inorder to stay current with changing technologies.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg• The Table of Contents has been altered to present the material in amore coherent fashion.FEATURES• A mock filing kit, which includes files cards and miniature correspondence,is used to teach the methods of alphabetic, subject correspondence,geographic and numeric filing.• A print Instructor’s Manual and Key which includes objectives,plans of instruction, instructional suggestions for group and individualactivities, quizzes and tests, keys, competencies checklist, and a proficiencycertificate.CONTENTSChapter 1: Getting Started with Gregg Quick Filing Practice. Chapter2: Alphabetic Card Filing. Chapter 3: Alphabetic Correspondence Filing.Chapter 4: Subject Correspondence Filing. Chapter 5: ElectronicFiling. Chapter 6: Geographic Card Filing. Chapter 7: Numeric CardFiling. Answer SheetsCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com136HED 2007 Keyboarding & Office Te136 13610/5/2006 1:29:51 PM

2007-2008 NEW Management Information Systems TitlesManagement InformationSystems ~ ContentsAdvanced MIS .............................................................. 150Computers in Society / Computer Ethics ....................... 151Database Management ................................................. 143Database Management (Professional References) .......... 153Data Communications / Telecommunications /Office Systems ............................................................ 147Data Mining ................................................................. 153Decision Support Systems ............................................. 149Enterprise Resource Planning ........................................ 152Information & Society ................................................... 143Introduction to Information Systems ............................. 139Knowledge Management .............................................. 151Management Information Systems ................................ 140Object-Oriented System Analysis & Design .................. 146Project Management ..................................................... 149System Analysis & Design ............................................. 1442007 New Titles• APPLEYARDCorporate Information Strategy andManagement: Text and Cases, 7e ............................150ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294775-5 / MHID: 0-07-294775-6• AVISONInformation Systems Development, 4e .................... 145ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711417-6 / MHID: 0-07-711417-5[MH UK Title]• BATESPrinciples of Voice and DataCommunications .....................................................147ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6• CARRData Communications and NetworkSecurity ................................................................... 148ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297604-5 / MHID: 0-07-297604-7• DePALMAAnnual Editions: Computers in Society06/07, 13e ...............................................................151ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352832-8 / MHID: 0-07-352832-3• HAAGManagement Information Systems for theInformation Age with CD and MiSource, 6e ...........141ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323062-7 / MHID: 0-07-323062-6• HAYENSAP R/3 Enterprise Software ....................................152ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8• MANNINODatabase Design, Application Development,and Administration, 3e ............................................143ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294220-0 / MHID: 0-07-294220-7• O’BRIENIntroduction to Information Systems, 13e ...............140ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110710-5 / MHID: 0-07-110710-X• OLSONIntroduction to Business Data Mining .....................153ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1• WHITTENSystems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e ...............145ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110766-2 / MHID: 0-07-110766-5137HED 2007 MIS.indd 13710/5/2006 2:04:08 PM

2007-2008 NEW Management Information Systems Titles2008 New Titles• HAAGBusiness Driven Technology, 2e ..............................139ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312368-4 / MHID: 0-07-312368-4• HAAGInformation Systems Essentials, 2e ..........................139ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351152-8 / MHID: 0-07-351152-8• O’BRIENManagement Information Systems, 8e .....................140ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351154-2 / MHID: 0-07-351154-4• WHITTENIntroduction to Systems Analysis and Design ..........144ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340294-9 / MHID: 0-07-340294-X138HED 2007 MIS.indd 13810/5/2006 2:04:08 PM

Management Information SystemsIntroduction toInformation SystemsInternational EditionNEWBUSINESS DRIVEN TECHNOLOGY2nd EditionBy Stephen Haag, Paige Baltzan and Amy Phillips of University ofDenver2008 (November 2006) / 600 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-312368- 4 / MHID: 0-07-312368-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332306-0 / MHID: 0-07-332306-3 (with CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110318-7 / MHID: 0-07-110318-1 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bdt2eBDT takes a business-first approach, starting each chapter byexplaining the value of a business initiative and then detailingthe technology that enables the initiative. This revolutionaryapproach instantly demonstrates the ‘why’ to business studentswithout boring them with the ‘how’. The adaptive chapter/pluginorganization allows the instructor to adjust content accordingto their business or technical preferences.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Number of Business Plug-Ins increased from 10 to 15. Includes newPlug-Ins on business processes (B2), enterprise architectures (B4), networksand telecommunications (B5), and e-business (B11).• Number of Technology Plug-Ins increased from 7 to 10. New Plug-Ins include discussions on Access, FrontPage, and web design andexpanded discussions of Excel.• Number of case studies increased from 55 to 64.• Apply Your Knowledge appendix has been updated and expanded. Itcontains 50 projects that focus on student application of core conceptsand tools. All productivity tool projects come with Captivate solutionfile that walks students step-by-step through the solution, which savesinstructors valuable time.FEATURES• Business-first perspective: Allows instructors to easily convey thepurpose of technology and systems to support business needs and takeadvantage of opportunities.• Adaptive organization: 19 core chapters, 15 business plug-ins and10 technology plug-ins allows the instructor to use the core chaptersas a framework and select plug-ins that support their specific courseobjectives.CONTENTSUnit 1 Chapter 1: Business Driven Technology Chapter 2: IdentifyingCompetitive Advantages Chapter 3: Strategic Initiatives for ImplementingCompetitive Advantages Chapter 4: Measuring the Success of StrategicInitiatives Chapter 5: Organizational Structures that Support StrategicInitiatives Unit 2 Chapter 6: Valuing Organizational Information Chapter7: Storing Organizational Information – Databases Chapter 8: AccessingOrganizational Information – Data Warehouse Unit 3 Chapter 9:Enabling the Organization – Decision Making Chapter 10: Extendingthe Organization – Supply Chain Management Chapter 11: Buildinga Customer-Centric Organization –CRM Chapter 12: Integrating theOrganization from End-to-End – ERP Unit 4 Chapter 13: Creating InnovativeOrganizations Chapter 14: E-Business Chapter 15: CreatingCollaborative Partnerships Chapter 16: Integrating Wireless Technologyin Business Unit 5 Chapter 17: Building Software to Support an AgileOrganization Chapter 18: Outsourcing in the 21st Century Chapter19: Developing a 21st Century Organization / Business Plug-ins: B1:Business Basics B2: Business Process B3: Hardware and Software B4:Enterprise Architactures B5: Networks and Telecommunications B6:Information Security B7: Ethics B8: Supply Chain Management B9:Customer Relationship Management B10: Enterprise Resource PlanningB11: E-Business B12: Emerging Trends and Technologies B13: StrategicOutsourcing B14: Systems Development B15: Project Management /Technical Plug-ins: T1: Personal Productivity Using IT (Student CD andOLC only) T2: Basic Skills Using Excel T3: Problem Solving Using Excel(Student CD and OLC only) T4: Decision Making Using Excel (StudentCD and OLC only) T5: Designing Database Applications (Student CDand OLC only) T6: Basic Skills Using Access T7: Problem Solving UsingAccess (Student CD and OLC only) T8: Creating Forms and ReportsUsing Access (Student CD and OLC only) T9: Designing Web Pages(Student CD and OLC only) T10: Basic Skills Using FrontPage (StudentCD and OLC only)NEWINFORMATION SYSTEMS ESSENTIALS2nd EditionBy Stephen Haag, University of Denver and Maeve Cummings,Pittsburg State University2008 (November 2006)ISBN-13: 9780-07-351152-8 / MHID: 0-07-351152-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332308-4 MHID: 0-07-332308-X(with MISource 2007)Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cit/haag/9 chapters plus 3 appendices cover the traditional core materialof MIS. A comprehensive set of group projects and e-commerceprojects support an applied component to the course. Consistentwith Haag’s best-selling MIS for the Information Age, ISEssentials 2/e conveys the impact of IS on the individual withcontemporary writing and lively examples.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New prologue quickly conveys the value of this course to the non-MIS major.• HUGE appendix of projects• Concept Reinforcement sidebars in every chapter break up the readingwith short, hands-on activities.FEATURES• Haag’s Style of writing and story telling.• MIS and your career, was the prologue in the 1st edition, now appearsas an appendix.CONTENTSPrologue / Chapter 1: The Information Age in which You Live Chapter2: Major Business Initiatives Chapter 3: Databases and Data WarehousesChapter 4: Decision Support and Artificial Intelligence Chapter5: Electronic Commerce Chapter 6: Systems Development Chapter 7:Enterprise Infrastructure and Integration Chapter 8: Protecting Peopleand Information Chapter 9: Emerging Trends and Technologies AppendixA: Hardware and Software Appendix B: Network Basics AppendixC: MIS and Your Career Appendix D: Projects139HED 2007 MIS.indd 13910/5/2006 2:04:09 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionNEWManagement InformationSystemsINTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS13th EditionBy James A. O’Brien, Northern Arizona University, and GeorgeMarakas, University of Kansas–Lawrence2007 (January 2006) / 544 pages / HardcoverISBn-13: 978-0-07-110710-5 / MHID: 0-07-110710-X [IE]Browse http://www.mhhe.com/obrienO’Brien’s Introduction to Information Systems 13e continuesto reflect the movement toward enterprise-wide businessapplications. George Marakas from the University of Kansasjoins as a co-author on this new edition. New real world casestudies correspond with this curriculum shift. The text’s focusis on teaching the general business manager how to use andmanage the most current IT technologies such as the Internet,Intranets, and Extranets for enterprise collaboration, and howIT contributes to competitive advantage, reengineering businessprocesses, problem solving, and decision-making.NEW TO THIS EDITION* Chapter 2: Expanded coverage of Competitive Advantage.* Chapter 4: Complete and expanded coverage of XML, Java, andOpen Source code.* Chapter 6: New coverage of Bluetooth and VoIP (Voice Over IP).* Chapter 7: Expanded coverage of Enterprise Business Systems.* Chapter 12: New coverage of Global IT and Outsourcing, includingOff-shoring.CONTENTSModule I Foundation Concepts. 1 Foundations of Information Systemsin Business. SECTION I: Foundation Concepts: Information Systems inBusiness. SECTION II: Foundation Concepts: The Components of InformationSystems. 2 Competing with Information Technology. SECTIONI: Fundamentals of Strategic Advantage. SECTION II: Using InformationTechnology for Strategic Advantage. Module II Information Technologies.3 Computer Hardware. SECTION I: Computer Systems: End Userand Enterprise Computing. SECTION II: Computer Peripherals: Input,Output, and Storage Technologies. 4 Computer Software. SECTIONI: Application Software: End User Applications. SECTION II: SystemSoftware: Computer System Management. 5 Data Resource Management.SECTION I: Technical Foundations of Database Management.SECTION II: Managing Data Resources. 6 Telecommunications andNetworks. SECTION I: The Networked Enterprise. SECTION II: TelecommunicationsNetwork Alternatives. Module III Business Applications. 7Electronic Business Systems. SECTION I: Enterprise Business Systems.SECTION II: Functional Business Systems. 8 Electronic CommerceSystems. SECTION I: Electronic Commerce Fundamentals. SECTIONII: e-Commerce Applications and Issues. 9 Decision Support Systems.SECTION I: Decision Support in Business. SECTION II: Artificial IntelligenceTechnologies in Business. Module IV Development Processes.10 Developing Business/IT Solutions. SECTION I: Developing BusinessSystems. SECTION II: Implementing Business Systems. Module VManagement Challenges. 11 Security and Ethical Challenges. SEC-TION I: Security, Ethical, and Societal Challenges of IT. SECTION II:Security Management of Information Technology. 12 Enterprise andGlobal Management of Information Technology. SECTION I: ManagingInformation Technology. SECTION II: Managing Global IT. ReviewQuiz Answers. Selected References Glossary for Business Professionals.Name Index. Company Index. Subject Index.International EditionNEWMANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS8th EditionBy James O’Brien, Northern Arizona University and George Marakas,University of Kansas-Lawrence2008 (November 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351154-2 / MHID: 0-07-351154-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332309-1 / MHID: 0-07-332309-8(with MiSource 2007)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110140-0 / MHID: 0-07-110140-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/obrienThe benchmark text for the syllabus organized by technology(a week on databases, a week on networks, a week on systemsdevelopment, etc.) taught from a managerial perspective.O’Brien defines technology and then explains how companiesuse the technology to improve performance. Real world casesfinalize the explanation.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Bigger Real World Cases: A new 2-page format delivers more detailand depth. Additional discussion questions and activities for each caseallow for a variety of apply the cases to class. Thirty-eight new RealWorld Cases have been added for the 8th edition.• Completely revised Analysis Exercises at the end of each chapterprovide really interesting experiences applying the chapter concepts.• New Material, Same Organization – the list of updates to each chapterof each edition are simply too lengthy to list; it’s MIS after all.• Modular Chapter Organization breaks each chapter into two units,allowing instructors to skip units without lost continuity.FEATURES• Managerial Perspective: O’Brien continues to present the businessimpact of information systems as the company leaders would view it.• Table of Contents, proven effective over several editions, are essentiallythe same.CONTENTSMODULE I Foundation Concepts 1. Foundations of Information Systemsin Business Section I Foundation Concepts: Information Systemsin Business Section II Foundation Concepts: The Components of InformationSystems 2. Competing with Information Technology Section IFundamentals of Strategic Advantage Section II Using Information forStrategic Advantage MODULE II Information Technologies 3. ComputerHardware Section I Computer Systems: End User and EnterpriseComputing Section II Computer Peripherals: Input, Output, and StorageTechnologies 4. Computer Software Section I Application Software:End User Applications Section II System Software: Computer SystemManagement 5. Data Resource Management Section I Managing DataResources Section II Technical Foundations of Database Management6. Telecommunications and Networks Section I The Networked EnterpriseSection II Telecommunications Network Alternatives MODULEIII Business Applications 7. Electronic Business Systems Section IEnterprise Business Systems Section II Functional Business Systems 8.Enterprise Business Systems Section I Customer Relationship Management:The Business Focus Section II Enterprise Resource Planning: TheBusiness Backbone Section III Supply Chain Management: The BusinessNetwork 9. Electronic Commerce Systems Section I Electronic CommerceFundamentals Section II e-Commerce Applications and Issues10. Decision Support Systems Section I Decision Support in Business140HED 2007 MIS.indd 14010/5/2006 2:04:09 PM

Management Information SystemsSection II Artificial Intelligence Technologies in Business MODULE IVDevelopment Processes 11. Developing Business/IT Strategies SectionI Planning Fundamentals Section II Implementation Challenges 12. DevelopingBusiness/IT Solutions Section I Developing Business SystemsSection II Implementing Business Systems MODULE V ManagementChallenges 13. Security and Ethical Challenges Section I Security,Ethical, and Societal Challenges of IT Section II Security Managementof Information Technology 14. Enterprise and Global Management ofInformation Technology Section I Managing Information TechnologySection II Managing Global ITTrends and Technologies: Business, People, and Technology Tomorrow.Extended Learning Module I: Building an E-Portfolio. ExtendedLearning Module J: Implementing a Database with Microsoft Access(on CD). Extended Learning Module K: Careers in Business (on CD).Extended Learning Module L: Building Web Sites with FrontPage (onCD). Extended Learning Module M: Programming in Excel with VBA(on CD). Group Projects. Glossary. Notes. Photo Credits. IndexInternational EditionNEWMANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS FOR THEINFORMATION AGE WITH CD AND MISOURCE6th EditionBy Stephen Haag, University Of Denver, Maeve Cummings, PittsburgState University, and Amy Phillips, University of Denver2007 (December 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323062-7 / MHID: 0-07-323062-6(with MISource and CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110777-8 / MHID: 0-07-110777-0 [IE]Browse http://www.mhhe.com/haagChapters cover what instructors want students to know aboutMIS while Extended Learning Modules (XLMs) show studentswhat they can do with MIS. A contemporary writing style anda wealth of examples engage students like no other MIS text.Arranged with chapter opening cases that highlight how an organizationhas successfully implemented many of the chapter’sconcepts and chapter closing cases that help students applywhat they just learned gives students the hands-on knowledgethat is applicable in both their personal and professional experiences.NEW TO THIS EDITION* Haag 6e features new Extended Learning Module L on using FrontPageto build websites and new Extended Learning Module M on programmingin Excel with Visual Basic.* New or updated case studies on industry and global perspectives thathighlight with current trends.* New Student CD-ROM allows users to review additional XLMswhich focus on practical, hands-on knowledge applicable in a varietyof workplace scenarios.* Updated or expanded coverage of numerous topics including allforms of outsourcing* Nearly 85 “Team Work” and “On Your Own” ProjectsCONTENTSChapter One: The Information Age in Which you Live: Changing theFace of Business. Extended Learning Module A: Computer Hardwareand Software. Chapter Two: Major Business Initiatives: GainingCompetitive Advantage with IT. Extended Learning Module B: TheWorld Wide Web and the Internet. Chapter Three: Database andData Warehouses: Building Business Intelligence. Extended LearningModule C: Designing Databases and Entity-Relationship Diagramming.Chapter Four: Decision Support and Artificial Intelligence: Brainpowerfor Your Business. Extended Learning Module D: Decision Analysiswith Spreadsheet Software. Chapter Five: Electronic Commerce: Strategiesfor the New Economy. Extended Learning Module E: NetworkBasics (on CD). Chapter Six: Systems Development: Phases, Tools, andTechniques. Extended Learning Module F: Building a Web Page withHTML (on CD). Chapter Seven: Enterprise Infrastructure and Integration:Building the Dynamic Enterprise. Extended Learning Module G:Object-Oriented Technologies (on CD). Chapter Eight: ProtectingPeople and Information: Threats and Safeguards. Extended LearningModule H: Computer Crime and Forensics. Chapter Nine: EmergingINFORMATION SYSTEMS SOLUTIONSA Project ApproachBy Richard Van Horn, Albert Schwarzkopf, and R. Leon Price, all ofUniversity Of Oklahoma-Norman2006 / 480 pages / HardcoverISBN-13: 9780-07-352436-8 / MHID: 0-07-352436-0Browse http://www.mhhe.com/vanhornThe development, implementation and maintenance of computer-basedinformation system solutions require innovative thinking,research and communication skills, extensive documentation,and the ability to effectively apply proposed solutions.Information System Solutions: A Project Approach integratesbasic information systems knowledge with these requirements,culminating in their combined application in a project-basedreal-world scenario. Three different project models, an SDLCbasedchapter organization and an emphasis on teamwork makethis text easily adaptable to your teaching needs. Successfullytested in the classroom and approved by thousands of students,Information System Solutions: A Project Approach prepares yourstudents to be active, effective contributors to the professionalfield of information systems.The text includes:• Attention to various areas of interest, including general ISconcepts and environmental, client-specific factors (strategy,marketing, and organizational behavior).• A chapter organization that follows the System DevelopmentLife Cycle (SDLC).• Coverage of three project models–case, passive live, andactive live–for classroom use that enrich and enliven students’learning experience through “Learning by Doing.CONTENTSPART 1 Project and Team Organization. CHAPTER 1 Introduction tothe Project Approach. CHAPTER 2 Organizing and Working in a ProjectTeam. CHAPTER 3 Project Management. CHAPTER 4 Data Modeling.CHAPTER 5 Process and Object Modeling. PART 2 Project Definition.CHAPTER 6 Understanding the Client’s Problem and Organization.CHAPTER 7 Learning from the Current Situation. PART 3 ProposedSystem. CHAPTER 8 Proposed System Specifications. CHAPTER 9 Alternatives,Evaluation, and Recommendation. PART 4 System Delivery.CHAPTER 10 Outsourcing. CHAPTER 11 System Design. CHAPTER12 Proof of Concept. CHAPTER 13 Project Completion. APPENDIXA GB Video Final Report141HED 2007 MIS.indd 14110/5/2006 2:04:09 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionMANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS4th Editionby Gerald V Post, Univ of the Pacific and David L Anderson, DePaulU/McGowan Center2006 / Hardcover / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-294779-3 / MHID: 0-07-294779-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125732-9 / MHID: 0-07-125732-2 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/postmis4ePost opens every chapter with a business problem and uses thechapter to explain the processes and technology that can solvethe problem. This greater emphasis on problem-solving enablesthe instructor to quickly show “why” this material matters.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction Part One: Information Tech nol o gy InfrastructureChapter 2: Information Tech nol o gy Foundations Chapter 3: Networksand Telecommunications Chapter 4: Database Man age ment PartTwo: Operations Chapter 5: Computer Security Chapter 6: Transactionsand Operations Chapter 7: Enterprise In te gra tion Chapter 8: ElectronicBusiness Part Three: Tactics and Strat e gies Chapter 9: Teamwork Chapter10: Business Decisions Chapter 11: Strategic Analysis Part Four:Organizing Busi ness es and Systems Chapter 12: Systems De vel op mentChapter 13: Organizing MIS Resources Chapter 14: Information Management and Society / Glossary / Organization Index/ Subject IndexInternational EditionINFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ANDMANAGEMENT2nd Edi tionby Ronald L Thompson, Wake Forest University and William Cats-Baril, University of Vermont2003 / 704 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-293661-2 / MHID: 0-07-293661-4(with SIMNET MIS)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111063-1 / MHID: 0-07-111063-1[IE with SIMNET MIS]http://www.mhhe.com/Th omp son-Cats-BarilCONTENTSModule I: Application of Information Technology. Chapter 1: In tro -duc tion to Information Tech nol o gy and Man age ment. Chapter 2:Hardware and Software. Chapter 3: Data Management. Chapter 4:Tele com mu ni ca tions and Networking. Chapter 5: Internet and E-Business.Module II: Information Systems and Management. Chapter 6:Or ga ni za tion al Use of IS. Chapter 7: IS and Or ga ni za tion al Responsiveness.Chapter 8: IS to Support Decision Making. Chapter 9: IS andOr ga ni za tion al Competition. Module III: Development and Man age mentof IS. Chapter 10: IS and Business Process Management. Chapter 11:IS De vel op ment. Chapter 12: IS Sourcing and Application Ser viceProviders. Chapter 13: IS Management. Chapter 14: IT and Society.Glossary. IndexInternational EditionAPPLICATION CASES IN MAN AGE MENTIN FOR MA TION SYSTEMS5th Editionby James N Morgan, Northern Arizona Uni ver si ty2005 / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-293363-5 / MHID: 0-07-293363-1(for use with MIS titles) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-123836-6 / MHID: 0-07-123836-0 [IE]Morgan’s Application Cases in Management Information Systemsis an introductory level MIS business casebook, whichrequires the use of spreadsheet and database software and theInternet to solve managerial problems. It may be used as astandalone casebook or pack aged with any of our in tro duc to ryManagement Information Systems textbooks. The book wasdeveloped to give students additional projects or exercises toapply the concepts of what they have learned in their course.CONTENTSChapter 1: Business Ap pli ca tions and the Internet. Chapter 2: InternetCases. Chapter 3: Developing Spread sheet Ap pli ca tions. Chapter 4:Spreadsheet Cases. Chapter 5: Developing Da ta base Applications.Chapter 6: Database CasesInternational EditionFOUNDATIONS OF IN FOR MA TION SYSTEMSby Vladimir Zwass, Fairleigh Dickinson University1998 / 800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-697-13312-0 / MHID: 0-697-13312-5 (Out-of-Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115638-7 / MHID: 0-07-115638-0 [IE]CONTENTS1 Introduction to In for ma tion Systems & Their Ca pa bil i ties. 2 Fun da -men tal Concepts of Information Systems. 3 Competing with InformationSystems. 4 In for ma tion Systems Hardware. 5 Information SystemsSoft ware. 6 Database Management. 7 Tele com mu ni ca tions, the Internet,& Information Systems Architecture. 8 Support of Individual & GroupKnowledge Work. 9 Transaction Processing & Management ReportingSys tems. 10 Decision Support & Executive Information Sys tems. 11Expert Systems & Applied Artificial In tel li gence. 12 Information Systemsfor Business Functions. 13 Business Reengineering, InformationSystems Planning & Acquisition. 14 Managing & Controlling InformationSystems. 15 Development Life Cycle & Systems Analysis. 16 FromDesign to Main te nance of Information Systems. 17 Ethical, Societal, &Global Issues in Information Sys tems. 18 Innovating with InformationSystems for Global Reach.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg142HED 2007 MIS.indd 14210/5/2006 2:04:09 PM

Management Information SystemsInformation & SocietyINFORMATION AND KNOWLEDGE SOCIETYby Suliman Al-Hawamdeh, Division of In for ma tion Studies, NanyangTech no log i cal University and Thomas L Hart, School of InformationStudies, Florida State Uni ver si ty2001 / 296 pages / SoftcoverISBN-13: 978-0-07-120238-1 / MHID: 0-07-120238-2An Asian PublicationCONTENTSPreface. Acknowledgement. Chapter 1: Information So ci ety: GlobalPerspective. Chapter 2: Information In fra struc ture. Chapter 3: Communicationand In for ma tion Transfer. Chapter 4: Electronic Publishing inthe Digital Era. Chapter 5: Knowledge Management and the Economyof Ideas. Chapter 6: Intellectual Property and Copyright in the DigitalEra. Chapter 7: Education in the Digital Age. Chapter 8: Privacy in theInformation Age. Chapter 9: Information Security and Ethics. Chapter10: Information Standards. Bibliography. IndexDatabase ManagementInternational EditionNEWDATABASE DESIGN, APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT,AND ADMINISTRATION3rd EditionBy Michael V. Mannino, University Of Colorado-Denver2007 (December 2005) / 768 pages / HardcoverISBN-13: 978-0-07-294220-0 / MHID: 0-07-294220-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110701-3 / MHID: 0-07-110701-0 [IE]Browse http://www.mhhe.com/manninoMannino’s Database Management provides the informationyou need to learn relational databases. The book teachesstudents how to apply relational databases in solving basicand advanced database problems and cases. The fundamentaldatabase technologies of each processing environment are presented;as well as relating these technologies to the advancesof e-commerce and enterprise computing. This book providesthe foundation for the advanced study of individual databasemanagement systems, electronic commerce applications, andenterprise computing.NEW TO THIS EDITION* Extended coverage of Oracle 10g and SQL 2003, the latest databaseapplications.* Expanded coverage of data modeling and system requirements.* Expanded and updated coverage of the ‘normalization of data’.* Special focus on optimizing the physical database.* New coverage on data warehousing, and the latest trends in datamining.* Expanded coverage of distributed computing.CONTENTSPart 1: Introduction to Database Environments. Chapter 1: Introductionto Database Management. Chapter 2: Introduction to Database Development.Part 2: Understanding Relational Databases. Chapter 3: TheRelational Data Model. Chapter 4: Query formulation with SQL. Part3: Data Modeling. Chapter 5: Understanding Entity Relationship Diagrams.Chapter 6: Developing Data Models for Business Databases. Part4: Relational Database Design. Chapter 7: Normalization of RelationalTables. Chapter 8: Physical Database Design. Chapter 9: AdvancedQuery Formulation with SQL. Part 5: Application Development withRelational Databases. Chapter 10: Application Development withViews. Chapter 11: Stored Procedures and Triggers. Part 6: AdvancedDatabase Development. Chapter 12: View Design and Integration.Chapter 13: Database Development for Student Loan Limited. Part 7:Managing Database Environments. Chapter 14: Data and DatabaseAdministration. Chapter 15: Transaction Management. Chapter 16: DataWarehouse Technology and Management. Chapter 17: Client-serverProcessing and Distributed Databases. Chapter 18: Object DatabaseManagement Systems. Glossary of Terms. Bibliography. IndexInternational EditionDATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMSDesigning and Building Business Applications3rd Editionby Gerald Post, University of the Pacific2005 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-297312-9 / MHID: 0-07-297312-9(with Student CD) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-111181-2 / MHID: 0-07-111181-6[IE with Student CD]http://www.mhhe.com/postdbms3eGerald Post’s Database Man age ment Systems takes an introductoryapproach to de vel op ing database applications; teachingstudents to evaluate a business situation and then build anddesign a database application. From systems design to distributionand integration of the system and everything in between,students will gain knowledge by getting a hands-on experience.The third edition has been revised to offer a more flexible wayto deliver database management application. Post continuesto have a textbook that covers the core theories and ideas ofdatabase management. Now, it offers two different workbooksdepending on the software that the instructor utilizes. Oneworkbook covers Oracle and the other workbook covers Access;thus allowing the instructor to pick the workbook that will beemployed in the course and to go more ‘in-depth’ with eithertool. The book can also be used as a standalone; thus havingthe professor chose what software will be utilized in teachingthis course.CONTENTS1. Introduction Systems Design 2. Da ta base Design 3. Data NormalizationQue ries 4. Data Queries 5. Advanced Que ries and Subqueries Applications6. Forms, Reports & Applications 7. Data Integrity and Transactions8. Data Warehouses & Data Mining Database Administration 9.Data Administration 10. Distributed Da ta bas es and the InternetInternational EditionORACLE SQL AND IN TRO DUC TO RY PL/SQLby Linda Preece2004 / 264 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286046-7 / MHID: 0-07-286046-4(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124158- 8 / MHID: 0-07-124158-2 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/preeceTwo market issues provide momentum for this class and thistext. First, there is a move ment for MIS majors to obtain atleast one professional cer ti fi ca tion before they grad u ate. Sincethere is no licensing body for Software Engineers or SystemsAnalysts (as there is for accountants or engineers) more technicalprograms are offering certification programs from leadingsoftware de vel op ers such as Microsoft, Oracle, and Cisco. Thisbook prepares students for the first Oracle certification exam143HED 2007 MIS.indd 14310/5/2006 2:04:10 PM

Management Information Systemsand more importantly, it is an ideal replacement to OracleCor po ra tion’s Student Guides for introductory SQL and PL/SQL.Second, most Oracle SQL books are written for pro fes sion alprogrammers and de vel op ers- they read like trade books. Thistext is written for students with all the pedagogy one wouldfind in our suc cess ful textbooks and moves at a pace moresuitable for students. Advanced technical topics are covered inthorough detail and not treated in encyclopedic form as if thiswere a reference book.CONTENTSPreface. 1. Basic Select State ments. 2. Functions Applied to SingleValues. 3. Advanced Select Statements. 4. Report Formatting. 5. MakingChanges to Table Contents. 6. Table Structures and Constraints.7. Additional Objects. 8. User Privileges. 9. Introductory PL/SQL. 10.Advanced PL/SQL Concepts. Appendix A: General Syntax. AppendixB: The Two Da ta bas esInternational EditionDATABASES: DESIGN, DEVELOPMENT ANDDEPLOYMENT USING MICROSOFT ACCESS2nd Editionby Peter Rob and Elie Semaan both of Middle Tennessee StateUniversity2004ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288630-6 / MHID: 0-07-288630-7(with Student CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121805-4 / MHID: 0-07-121805-X [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/it/robRob’s Databases: Design, Development & De ploy ment UsingMicrosoft Access is a book that teaches the more advanced topicsof database-design through the use of Microsoft Access. The2nd edition has been completely updated to give students themost up-to-date information. By using Microsoft’s Access 2002,students will learn the intricacies of developing a database.Also with the ever- growing area of web pro gram ming, studentswill have a chapter tying database and web programming togetherand another chapter specifically on VB Script. Lastly, arevamped chapter on security will address the ever-changingand im por tant issues.CONTENTSChapter 1 Database Vo cab u lary, Concepts, and Design Tools. Chapter 2Normalizing the Database table Structures. Chapter 3 The POS DatabaseDesign Process. Chapter 4 Implementing the Database Design. Chapter5 Queries. Chapter 6 Form Development. Chapter 7 Reports and Labels.Chapter 8 Macros and Macro Groups. Chapter 9 Access and the Internet.Chapter 10 Im ple ment ing the POS Database Applications. Chapter 11The Database in the Web. Chapter 12 Database SecuritySystem Analysis & DesignInternational EditionNEWINTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ANALYSIS ANDDESIGNBy Jeffrey L Whitten and Lonnie D Bentley of Purdue University-WestLafayette2008 (December 2006) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340294-9 / MHID: 0-07-340294-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-128581-0 / MHID: 0-07-128581-4 [IE]Browse http://www.mhhe.com/whittenA complete, but less complex approach to SA&D. Introductionto Systems Analysis & Design is organized like Whitten’sbest-selling Systems Analysis & Design Methods, but withoutthe information systems architecture framework theme thatoverwhelms some students. Each chapter covers the same topics,but stops short of advanced details that are unnecessary tothe typical first course.FEATURES• No Systems Architecture Framework While this method is still importantto many and a big reason for the success of Whitten’s SA&DMethods, removing it makes the subject more accessible to manystudents.• Streamlined Chapter Content The last layer of depth has been removedfrom each subject, allowing instructors to cover more groundwith fewer distractions.CONTENTSPart One: The Context of Systems Development Projects Chapter 1:The Context of Systems Analysis and Design Methods Chapter 2: InformationSystems Development Chapter 3: Project Management PartTwo: Systems Analysis Methods Chapter 4: Systems Analysis Chapter 5:Fact-Finding Techniques for Requirements Discovery Chapter 6: ModelingSystem Requirements with Use Cases Chapter 7: Data Modelingand Analysis Chapter 8: Process Modeling Chapter 9: Object-OrientedAnalysis and Modeling Using the UML Chapter 10: Feasibility Analysisand the System Proposal Part Three: Systems Design Methods Chapter11: Systems Design Chapter 12: Application Architecture and ModelingChapter 13: Database Design Chapter 14: Output Design and PrototypingChapter 15: Input Design and Prototyping Chapter 16: User InterfaceDesign Chapter 17: Object-Oriented Design and Modeling Using theUML Part Four: Beyond Systems Analysis and Design Chapter 18:Systems Construction and ImplementationCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com144HED 2007 MIS.indd 14410/5/2006 2:04:10 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionNEWSYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN METHODS7th EditionBy Jeffrey L. Whitten, Purdue University–West Lafayette, and LonnieD. Bentley, Purdue University–West Lafayette2007 (December 2005) / 768 pp / HardcoverISBN-13: 978-0-07-110766-2 / MHID: 0-07-110766-5 [IE]Browse http://www.mhhe.com/whittenToday’s students want to practice the application of concepts.As with the previous editions of this book, the authors writeto balance the coverage of concepts, tools, techniques, andtheir applications, and to provide the most examples of systemanalysis and design deliverables available in any book. Thetextbook also serves the reader as a professional reference forbest current practices.NEW TO THIS EDITION* Chapter 10: Enhanced and expanded coverage of the Object-Orientedapproach.* Chapters 7, 10, 18: New material on the UML 2.0 updates.* Expanded discussion on feasibility, including environmental andpolitical considerations.* Chapter 5: Expanded coverage of Context diagrams.* New updated coverage VB.NET and C-Sharp throughout the book.* Recent reference to the Oracle acquisition of PeopleSoft.CONTENTSPreface / Part One The Context of Systems Development Projects / 1The Context of Systems Analysis and Design Methods 2 InformationSystem Building Blocks 3 Information Systems Development 4 ProjectManagement / Part Two Systems Analysis Methods / 5 Systems Analysis6 Fact-Finding Techniques for Requirements Discovery 7 ModelingSystem Requirements with Use Cases 8 Data Modeling and Analysis9 Process Modeling 10 Object-Oriented Analysis and Modeling Usingthe UML 11 Feasibility Analysis and the System Proposal / PartThree Systems Design Methods / 12 Systems Design 13 ApplicationArchitecture and Modeling 14 Database Design 15 Output Design andPrototyping 16 Input Design and Prototyping 17 User Interface Design18 Object-Oriented Design and Modeling Using the UML / Part FourBeyond Systems Analysis and Design / 19 Systems Construction andImplementation 20 Systems Operations and Support / Photo Credits /Glossary/IndexINFORMATION SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT4th EditionBy David Avison, University of Southampton and ESSEC and GuyFitzgerald, Brunei University2006 (March 2006) / 656 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711417-6 / MHID: 0-07-711417-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125315-4 / MHID: 0-07-125315-7 [IE]McGraw-Hill UK TitleInformation Systems Development has been adopted as the keytext for many information systems, business and management,and computer science courses. The book has seven parts whichrelate to the Information Systems Development Context, the SystemsDevelopment Lifecycle, Themes of Systems Development,Techniques, Methodologies, Tools and Toolsets and finally Issuesand Frameworks. This structure enables flexible use, eithersequentially or by selecting sections or chapters to fit the specificneeds of particular courses and favoured approaches. Offeringcomprehensive coverage from traditional approaches through tothe most recent agile methods, the book’s unique strength liesin its combination of descriptions and insight into methodologies,techniques and tools with the analysis of context, issuesand real-world problems associated with information systemsdevelopment. Retaining these existing strengths, the fourth editionhas been thoroughly updated and revised to reflect progressin this fast-paced discipline and to include the authors’ recentexperience of teaching with the text, as well as feedback fromreviewers, colleagues and students.CONTENTSPreface / Part 1: Introduction / 1. Context 2. Information systems development/ Part 2: The life cycle approach / 3. Information systemsdevelopment life cycle / Part 3: Themes in information systems development/ 4. Organisational themes 5. People themes 6. Modellingthemes 7. Rapid and evolutionary development 8. Engineering themes 9.External development / Part 4: Techniques / 10. Holistic techniques 11.Data techniques 12. Process techniques 13. Object-oriented techniques14. Project management techniques 15. Organizational techniques 16.People techniques 17. Techniques in context / Part 5: Tools and Toolsets/ 18. Tools 19. Toolsets / Part 6: Methodologies / 20. Process-orientedmethodologies 21. Blended 22. Object-oriented methodologies 23.Rapid development methodologies 24. People-oriented methodologies25. Organisational-oriented methodologies 26. Frameworks / Part 7:Methodology issues and comparisons / 27. Issues 28. Methodologycomparisons / Bibliography / IndexInternational EditionSYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGNAn Active Approachby George Marakas, University of Kansas--Lawrence2006 (December 2004) / 464 pages / HardcoverISBN-13: 978-0-07-297607-6 / MHID: 0-07-297607-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111619-0 / MHID: 0-07-111619-2 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/marakasThis new book provides a concise text that teaches students firsthow to identify the problem, before analyzing and designing asolution. Marakas applies the structure method of SA&D withsome coverage of object-oriented methods as an alternative. Thistext is accompanied by a web-based case simulation option thatprovides a realistic experience for students while automatingadministration for the instructor.145HED 2007 MIS.indd 14510/5/2006 2:04:10 PM

Management Information SystemsCONTENTSChapter 1 The Systems De vel op ment Environment Chapter 2 So Whatis the Problem? Chapter 3 Identification and Slelction of DevelopmentProjects Chapter 4 Systems Re quire ments Determination Chapter 5Modeling the Pro cess es and Logic Chapter 6 Modeling the Data: Conceptualand Logical Data Modeling Chapter 7 Case Tools and Joint andRapid Application De vel op ment Chapter 8 Moving from Anal y sis toDesign Chapter 9 Designing Systems for Diverse Environments Chapter10 Designing the Files and Databases Chapter 11 Designing the SystemOutput Chapter 12 Designing the Inputs and User Interface Chapter 13Designing the Systems Internals Chapter 14 Implementing and Maintainingthe System Appendix A Project Man age ment: Process, Techniques,and Tools Appendix B Object-Oriented Analysis and Design.International EditionBASIC INFORMATION SYS TEMS ANAL Y SIS ANDDESIGNby Myrvin Chester, Uni ver si ty of Wolverhampton and Avtar Athwall,Uni ver si ty of Wolverhampton2002 / 250 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-709784-4 / MHID: 0-07-709784-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-122921-0 / MHID: 0-07-122921-3 [IE]McGraw-Hill UK TitleCONTENTSReaders’ Guide, General. Chapter 1 is a general in tro duc tion to the subjectof the book, and discusses the important terms to be used. Chapter2 deals with the way systems analysis and design fit into the softwarelife cycle of an information system, together with a discussion of therole of the systems analyst. Chapter 3 looks in more detail at the severalways in which the requirements of a new information system may bediscovered, and their in cor po ra tion into the re quire ments catalogue.Chapter 4 covers the techniques of soft systems analysis; its use in thedis cov ery of the requirements of an in for ma tion system and possibleor gan i sa tion al and social implications. Chapter 5 dis cuss es the im por tanttop ics of report writing and pres en ta tions. Chapters 6 and 7 are the partsof book deal ing with the way the re la tion ship between data in a systemcan be mod elled using entity re la tion ship di a grams. Chap ters 8 and 9look at the tech niques for mod el ling the processes of a system and theway in for ma tion flows into, out of, and between those processes; as wellas where in for ma tion may be stored. This chapter uses the modellingtech nique of data flow diagrams. Chap ter 9 con cerns three ways inwhich proc ess es in in for ma tion sys tems may be de scribed more formallythan by us ing ordinary English. It covers de ci sion tables, decision treesand struc tured English. Chapter 10 de scribes the pro ce dure of logicalisation,which fol lows from the diagrams of the cur rent in for ma tion systemand leads to the design of a new system. Chapter 11 onwards will besystems designObject-Oriented SystemAnalysis & DesignInternational EditionOBJECT-ORIENTED SYSTEMS ANALYSIS ANDDESIGN USING UML3rd Editionby Simon Bennett, Celesio AG, Steve McRobb, De MontfortUniversity, and Ray Farmer, Coventry University2006 (August 2005) / 624 pages / SoftcoverISBN-13: 978-0-07-711000-0 / MHID: 0-07-711000-5(McGraw-Hill UK Title)Browse http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/bennettThe book provides a clear, practical framework for developmentthat uses all the major techniques from UML 2.0. It follows aniterative and incremental approach based on the industry-standardUnified Process. It places systems analysis and design in thecontext of the whole systems lifecycle, and includes genericanalysis and design issues. Two realistic case studies are usedthroughout the book--one for illustrative examples and the otherfor practical exercises for the reader. The book is structured infour parts, which can be flexibly combined to meet the needs ofthe syllabus. The first part provides the background to informationsystems analysis and design and to object-orientation. Thesecond begins with two case study chapters, and focuses on theactivities of requirements gathering and systems analysis, andthe basic notation of the Unified Modelling Language (UML).The third part covers the activities of system design and UMLnotation for object design. The final part examines the laterstages of the systems development lifecycle, reuse and softwaredevelopment methodologies.CONTENTS1. Information Systems: What Are They? 2. Problems in InformationSystems Development. 3. Avoiding the Problems. 4. What is Object-Orientation? Agate Limited Case Study (1) Food Co Limited Case Study5. Modelling Concepts 6. Requirements Capture. Agate Limited CaseStudy (2). 7. Requirements Modelling. Agate Limited Case Study (3). 8.Refining the Requirements Model. 9. Object Interaction. 10. SpecifyingOperations. 11. Specifying Control. Agate Limited Case Study (4).12. System Architecture. 13. Systems Design. 14. Detailed Design.15. Design Patterns. 16. Human-Computer Interaction. 17. DesigningBoundary Classes. 18. Data management design. Agate Limited CaseStudy (5). 19. Implementation. 20. Reusable components. 21. SoftwareDevelopment Process. Appendix A: Notation summaries. AppendixB: Selected Solutions and Answer Pointers. Glossary. Bibliography.Index.International EditionSYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT CASE STUDIESby M Gordon Hunter1998 / 264 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-27056-3 / MHID: 0-256-27056-2 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115984-5 / MHID: 0-07-115984-3 [IE]CONTENTS1 Initial Investigation. 2 Requirements Analysis. 3 System Specificationand Design. 4 Construction. 5 In stal la tion. 6 Operation/Maintenance.7 Review.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg146HED 2007 MIS.indd 14610/5/2006 2:04:10 PM

International EditionINTRODUCTION TO OB JECT-ORI ENT ED ANAL Y SISAND DESIGNby Stephen R Schach, Vanderbilt University - Nashville2004 / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-293984-2 / MHID: 0-07-293984-2(with UMLCD) -Out-of-PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-121878- 8 / MHID: 0-07-121878-5 [IE with CD]http://www.mhhe.com/schachooadThis text will be the first to present an object-oriented methodologyfrom the outset for beginning Systems Analysis andDesign students. It is the first book to introduce object-orientedmethods with out relying on classical meth ods to introduce keyconcepts or without requiring students to know Java or C++.It will presume no knowledge what so ev er about process modelingor data modeling. The widely used UML notation (unifiedmod el ing language) will be used throughout the book for alldiagrams and model renderings. The key benefit to this ap proachis that it makes the course easier to teach and learn since manystudents come to this course with limited back grounds havingonly taken one introductory MIS course. Also, this approachis appealing because object-oriented meth od ol o gy is widelyused in industry.CONTENTSPart One: Introduction to UML and the Unified Pro cess: Chapter 1. Introductionto Information Systems. Chapter 2. How Information Systemsare Developed. Chapter 3. The Object-Oriented Paradigm, UML, andthe Unified Process. Part Two: UML and the Uni fied Process: Chapter4. The Requirements Workflow I. Chapter 5. The Requirements WorkflowII. Chapter 6. The Object-Oriented Analysis Workflow. I. Chapter7. The Object-Oriented Analysis Workflow. II. Chapter 8. The Object-Oriented Design Workflow. Chapter 9. The Workflows and Phases ofthe Unified Process. Chapter 10. More on UML. Part Three: MajorTopics in Systems Analysis and Design: Chapter 11. CASE. Chapter 12.Teams. Chapter 13. Testing. Chapter 14. Management Issues. Chap ter15. Planning and Es ti mat ing. Chapter 16. Maintenance. Chapter 17.User-Interface Design. Chapter 18. Web-Based In for ma tion Systems.Chapter 19. Introduction to Database Management Sys tems. Chapter 20Technical Topics. Appendix A. Term Project: Chocoholics Anon y mous.Appendix B. Object-Oriented Design: Osbert Oglesby Case Study.Appendix C. Object-Oriented Design: MSG Foundation Case Study.Appendix D Implementation: Osbert Oglesby Case Study. AppendixE. Java Im ple men ta tion: MSG Foundation Case StudyManagement Information SystemsData Communications/Telecommunications/Office SystemsInternational EditionNEWPRINCIPLES OF VOICE AND DATACOMMUNICATIONSBy Regis Bates, TC International Consulting Inc and Marcus Bates2007 (April 2006) / 816 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125767-1 / MHID: 0-07-125767-5 [IE]Website: http//www.mhhe.com/bates1e and http://www.mhhe.com/batesvdcPrinciples of Voice and Data Communication is a technologybook for the non-technical student, a comprehensive overviewof the entire networking industry built on unrivaled real-worldexperience. With its helpful pedagogy, teaching support, andstudent-friendly tone, Principles of Voice and Data Communicationgives students the foundation they need to enter, andsucceed in, the technology and communications fields.FEATURES• Author Regis “Bud” Bates has nearly 40 years’ experience in thecommunications industry, and his work as both a technology managerand a successful consultant give him an insight into the field that nocompetitor can match.• The book maintains a powerful real-world focus, emphasizing howcommunications topics and technologies are implemented in the workplace.The authors address the reader as professionals, not professors.• “Working In This Field” boxes expand a topic by exploring it fromthe perspective of real-world technology practitioners. Web links givestudents the opportunity to go further and explore the topic in evengreater depth.• The end-of-chapter material is loaded with pedagogical tools forreinforcing the material, including summaries, review questions (about25 per chapter), and problems and exercises to work in class.International EditionOBJECT ORIENTED SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENTby Ali Bahrami, Rhode Island College1999 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-25348-1 / MHID: 0-256-25348-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-116090-2 / MHID: 0-07-116090-6 [IE]CONTENTSPART I: Introduction Chapter 1 Overview of Object-Ori ent ed SystemsDevelopment Chapter 2 Object Basics Chapter 3 Systems De vel op mentLife Cycle: Unified Approach PART II: Meth od ol o gy and ModelingChapter 4 Object-Oriented Methodology Chapter 5 Unified ModelingLanguage PART III: Object-Oriented Analysis Chapter 6 Object-OrientedAnalysis: The Use Case Driven Process Chapter 7 Object Analysis:Clas si fi ca tion Chapter 8 Object Re la tion ship Analysis PART IV: Object-OrientedDesign Chap ter 9 Object-Oriented Design Process andBenchmarking Chapter 10 Designing Class es: Defining Attributes andMethods Chap ter 11 Ob ject Storage and Access Layer Chapter 12 Designingthe View Layer: Toward Ob ject-Oriented User Interface (OOUI)PART V: Software Quality Chapter 13 Measuring User Satisfaction andSys tems Usability Chap ter 14 Software Quality Assurance Appendix ADoc u ment Template Appendix B Windows Basics Glossary Index• A dozen cases allow students to explore communications topics indetail and in a realistic setting.• Brought to you by the author of the Voice and Data CommunicationsHandbook, the standard reference work on the subject in the US andaround the world.CONTENTSChapter 1 Principles of Voice and Data Communications-An IntroductionChapter 2 The Evolution of the Telephone Set Chapter 3 Introductionof the Carriers and Regulation in the Industry Chapter 4 SignalingSystem 7, Intelligent Networks and Number Portability Chapter 5 Analogversus Digital Communications Chapter 6 Integrated Services DigitalNetwork and SONET Chapter 7 Data standards in Use Chapter 8 DataCommunications Chapter 9 The Internet Chapter 10 Local Area Networks(LANs) Chapter 11 Packets, Frames and Cell Switching ConceptsChapter 12 xDSL Chapter 13 Cable Modem Systems and TechnologyChapter 14 Overview of Cellular communications Chapter 15 Securityand Virtual Private Networks (VPN).147HED 2007 MIS.indd 14710/5/2006 2:04:11 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionNEWDATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKSECURITYby Houston H Carr, Auburn University, and Charles Snyder, AuburnUniversity2007 (July 2006) / 512 pages / HardcoverISBN-13: 9780-07-297604-5 / MHID: 0-07-297604-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110297-1 / MHID: 0-07-110297-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/carr2007Written for students and managers who do not have a technicalbackground, Data Communications and Network Securitycomprehensively introduces students to the technology andmanagement of data communications. This includes both wiredand wireless technology as well as comprehensive coverageof network security, helping both the organization and theindividual create and maintain a data-safe environment. Thebook’s unique organization allows the material to be presentedin a variety of ways, making the book a strong match to anyteaching approach.FEATURES* Business Impact: Carr/Snyder present technology from the perspectiveof how it effects a business.* Written for business students.International EditionTHE MAN AGE MENT OF TELE COM MU NI CA TIONS:Busi ness So lu tions to Busi ness Problems, 2nd Edi tionby Houston H Carr, Auburn University - Auburn and Charles Snyder,Auburn University - Auburn2003 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-291893-9 / MHID: 0-07-291893-4(with NETVIZ CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119928-5 / MHID: 0-07-119928-4 [IE]CONTENTSPart I Communication Basics. Chapter 1 What is Technology? Whatis Tele com mu ni ca tions? Chapter 2 Where did the Telephone comefrom and how does it Work? Chapter 3 What Media do we use for Telecommunications?Part II Networks. Chapter 4 Data Com mu ni ca tions:What is it? Chapter 5 Data Com mu ni ca tions: Conversion, Modulation,and Multiplexing. Chapter 6 Tele com mu ni ca tions Models. Chapter 7Networks by Topology: Protocols. Chapter 8 Networks by Geography:Network Equipment. Part III Uses of Networks. Chapter 9 The Internet– The Ultimate WAN. Chapter 10 Using Telecommunications forAc com mo da tion. Chapter 11 Business Ap pli ca tions of Telecommunications.Part IV Legislation and Global Issues. Chapter 12 How doLegislation and Regulation affect Telecommunications? Part V ManagingTelecommunications. Chapter 13 How do you Manage Tele com mu n-i ca tions in Organizations? Chapter 14 How do you Manage Tele com -mu ni ca tions Projects? Part VI The Need for Band width. Chapter 15 Howmuch Bandwidth do you need? Chapter 16 Lower reaches of BroadbandTechnologies. Chapter 17 Competing Broadband Technologies. PartVII The Future. Chapter 18 The End . . . The Beginning* Running case studyCONTENTSPart I: The Basics of Communications 1. Basics of CommunicationsTechnology 2. Media and Their Applications 3. Architecture, Models,and Standards Part II: Network Basics 4. Building a Network: Topologyand Protocols 5. Network Form and Function Part III: Wide-AreaNetworks: The Internet 6. From LANs to WANs: Broadband Technology7. The Internet, Intranets, and Extranets 8. Internet Applications PartIV: Wireless Networks 9. Wireless Networks: The Basics 10. WirelessNetworks: Issues and Management Part V: Security 11. Network Security12. Wireless Network Security Part VI: Network Management andControl 13. Monitoring and Control of Network Activity 14. Networkand Project Management Appendix A: Analog Voice Capabilities AppendixB: Epilogue: Emerging Technologies, Innovation, and RisksInternational EditionDATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKSby David Miller, Rochester Institute Technology2006 / 424 pages / HardcoverISBN-13: 978-0-07-296404-2 / MHID: 0-07-296404-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111624-4 / MHID: 0-07-111624-9 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/miller1eA friendlier voice in an area crowded with technical, formal textbooks,Miller’s style reaches the students quickly and effectively.The abundance of chapter projects and the audio/visual supportof concepts enables instructors to keep students engaged.CONTENTSChapter 1: Data Com mu ni ca tions—An Introduction Chapter 2: LocalArea Net works—An Introduction Chapter 3: Local Area Net works—Topologies and Ar chi tec tures Chapter 4: Local Area Net works—ConnectivityChapter 5: Network Operating Systems Chapter 6: DataStorage and Storage Networks Chapter 7: Voice Networks Chapter 8:Wide Area Networks Chapter 9: Network Security Chapter 10: TheInternet Appendix A: A Brief History of Data Communications andComputer NetworksInternational EditionBUSINESS DATA COM MU NI CA TIONSby Behrouz A. Forouzan, De Anza College2003 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-239702-4 / MHID: 0-07-239702-0(Out-of-Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123018-6 / MHID: 0-07-123018-1 [IE with OLC]CONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Basics. Chapter 3 Data Com mu -ni ca tion Models. Chap ter 4 Data Transmission. Chapter 5 TransmissionMedia and Channels. Chapter 6 Data Link Control. Chapter 7 Tra di tion alLANs. Chapter 8 High-Speed LANs. Chapter 9 Wire less LANs. Chapter10 Switch ing. Chapter 11 Traditional WANs. Chapter 12 High-SpeedWANs. Chapter 13 Networking and Internetworking Devices. Chapter14 TCP/IP Protocol Suite. Chapter 15 Internet ApplicationsInternational EditionGLOBAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS REVOLUTIONThe Business Perspectiveby Tom Housel and Eric Skopec2001 / 312 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-000786-4 / MHID: 0-07-000786-1 (Out-of-Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118137-2 / MHID: 0-07-118137-7 [IE]CONTENTSChapter One: Perspectives on Business Tele com mu ni ca tions ChapterTwo: Telecommuni-cations Applications in Busi ness Chapter Three: TheTelecommunications Business Chapter Four: Government Regulation ofTelecommunications Chapter Five: Network Fun da men tals Chapter Six:The Public Switched Tele phone Network Chapter Seven: Local AreaNetworks Chapter Eight: Wireless Networks Chapter Nine: The In for -ma tion Superhighway and Elec tron ic Commerce Chapter Ten: EmergingBusiness Ap pli ca tions Chapter Eleven: Capitalizing on New Re al i ties inTelecommunications Chapter Twelve: Reshaping Our World148HED 2007 MIS.indd 14810/5/2006 2:04:11 PM

Decision Support SystemsInternational EditionDECISION SUPPORT AND DATA WARE HOUSESYSTEMSby Efrem G Mallach, Uni ver si ty Mas sa chu setts Lowell2000 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-289981-8 / MHID: 0-07-289981-6 (Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116356-9 / MHID: 0-07-116356-5 [IE]CONTENTSPreface Chapter 1: In tro duc tion to Decision Support Systems Chapter2: Human Decision Making Processes Chapter 3: Systems, In for ma tionQuality, and Models Chapter 4: Types of Decision Support SystemsChapter 5: DSS Architecture, Hardware and Operating System Plat formsChapter 6: DSS Soft ware Tools Chapter 7: Build ing and Im ple ment ingDe ci sion Support System Tools Chapter 8: Models in De ci sion SupportSystems Chapter 9: Math e mat i cal Models and Optimization Chapter 10:Group Decision Support Sys tems Chapter 11: Expert Systems Chapter12: Data Warehousing and Executive Information System Fun da men talsChapter 13: The Data Warehouse Database Chapter 14: Analyzing theContents of the Data Warehouse Chap ter 15: Constructing a Data WarehouseSystem Chapter 16: Putting it all Together: Systems In te gra tionand the Future of DSS Appendix: Selected Case StudiesProject ManagementManagement Information SystemsSOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT4th EditionBy Bob Hughes, and Mike Cotterell, both of University of Brighton2006 (November 2005)/ 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710989-9 / MHID: 0-07-710989-9McGraw-Hill UK Title(Browse http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/hughes)From its first appearance in 1995, this book has been consistentlywell received by tutors and students alike. Now in itsfourth edition, this textbook is highly regarded for providinga complete introduction to Software Project Management forboth undergraduate and postgraduate students. The new editionretains its clear, accessible style and comprehensive coverage,plus the many examples and exercises throughout the chaptersthat illustrate the practical application of software project managementprinciples. Reflecting new developments in softwareproject management, the fourth edition has been developed toensure that the coverage is up-to-date and contemporary. Thisincludes new and expanded coverage of topics such as virtualteams and agile methods.CONTENTSChapter 1. Introduction to software project management. Chapter 2.“Step Wise” An overview of project planning. Chapter 3. Programmemanagement and project evaluation. Chapter 4. Selection of an appropriateproject approach. Chapter 5. Software effort estimation. Chapter6. Activity planning. Chapter 7. Risk management. Chapter 8. Resourceallocation. Chapter 9. Monitoring and control. Chapter 10. Managingcontracts. Chapter 11. Managing people and organizing teams. Chapter12. Software quality. Chapter 13. Small projects. Appendix A: Prince2. Appendix B: BS6079: 1996. Appendix C: Answer Pointers. FurtherReading. Index.THE AMA HANDBOOK OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT2nd EditionBy Paul Dinsmore and Jeannette Cabanis-Brewin2006 (January 2006) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-8144-7271-2 / MHID: 0-8144-7271-0McGraw-Hill UK TitleA Professional ReferencesThe second edition of The AMA Handbook of Project Managementis a vital resource containing all the critical concepts andtheories project managers must master. The book includesdefinitive models, advice and in-depth solutions to specificproject management dilemmas and illustrates key ideas withilluminating case studies. Thoroughly revised and completelyup-to-date, it is a a comprehensive reference that should have aplace on every project manager’s bookshelf. Includes the latesttechniques on how to:• establish project goalsPROJECT PLANNING, SCHEDULING ANDCONTROL4th EditionBy James Lewis, The Lewis Institute2006 (December 2005) / 550 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146037-8 / MHID: 0-07-146037-3A Professional ReferencesThe classic project manager’s handbook, with new chapters andinsights that demystify the new PM tools and the PMP® exam.Project Planning, Scheduling, and Control has been the standardguidebook for project managers for more than 15 years. Addressingthe key issues you face every day, Jim Lewis’s benchmarkbook brings the subject alive with accessible, nontechnicalquestions, step-by-step guidelines, and real-world examplesand applications. This revised, updated, and expanded fourthedition provides an applications-oriented understanding of theissues you must confront and important tips for passing theProject Management Professional (PMP®) exam.• implement planning on both the strategic and operationallevels• design dependable, but flexible, organisational structures• manage the project life cycle and meet objectives• budget the project• handle the transition from project idea to project reality149HED 2007 MIS.indd 14910/5/2006 2:04:11 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionINTRODUCTION TO IN FOR MA TION SYSTEMSPROJECT MANAGEMENT2nd Editionby David Olson, University of Nebraska, Lincoln2004 / 360 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-287270-5 / MHID: 0-07-287270-5(with Student CD) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-123261-6 / MHID: 0-07-123261-3 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/olson2eOlson’s Introduction to Project Management, 2/e is a projectmanagement text that focuses on “systems” issues. The primaryfocus is to examine the many issues facing MIS project managers.The revision also now incorporates the Project ManagementInstitute’s Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), better preparing usersfor the PMI certification exam. Olson focuses on traditionalproject management topics such as project adoption, planning,scheduling, and implementation while encouraging studentsto view the projects holistically and analytically. Utilizing themost current software and project management tools, he providesstudents with the most effective strategies for today’s ITproject managers.CONTENTS1. Introduction to Project Management. 2. Human As pects of In for -ma tion Systems Project Management. 3. Project Organization. 4.Project Se lec tion and Approval. 5. Re quire ments Definition. 6. SystemDevelopment. 7. Estimation. 8. Quantitative Project Sched ul ing Methods.9. Probabilistic Sched ul ing Models. 10. Project Implementation.11. Project Control and Assessment. Ap pen dix (Microsoft Project).PMBOK Cross ReferencesInternational EditionAdvanced MISNEWCORPORATE INFORMATION STRATEGY ANDMANAGEMENT: Text and Cases, 7th EditionBy Lynda M. Applegate, Robert D. Austin, and F. Warren McFarlan,all of Harvard Business School2007 (October 2005) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-294775-5 / MHID: 0-07-294775-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124419-0 / MHID: 0-07-124419-0 [IE]Browse http://www.mhhe.com/applegate7eCorporate Information Strategy and Management: Text andCases 7/e by Applegate, Austin and McFarlan is written forstudents and managers who desire an overview of contemporaryinformation systems technology management. It explainsthe relevant issues of effective management of informationservices activities and highlights the areas of greatest potentialapplication of the technology. No assumptions are made concerningthe reader’s experience with IT, though it is presumedthat the reader has some course work or work experience inadministration and/or management. This text is comprised ofan extensive collection of Harvard Business cases devoted toInformation Technology.NEW TO THIS EDITION* New Harvard cases: Bring into the classroom the recent findings andobservations of some of the brightest minds in IS as they analyze someof the most prominent global companies.* Additional coverage on systems integration: Important to the wholesystem is the discussion of the challenges of installing and integratingnew technology.* Contemporary view of IT opportunity, and how to take advantageof IT in business.* Strategic IT audits now covered in Chapter One.* Impact of IT on the ‘organizational design’ covered exclusively inChapter Two.* Impact of IT on the ‘extended enterprise’ covered exclusively inChapter Three.* Outsourcing, including off-shoring, updated in Module 3.FEATURES* Harvard Case Approach: Enables you to teach using the same methodand content used at Harvard.CONTENTSIntroduction: The Challenges of Managing in a Network Economy. Case#I-1 Li and Fung Internet Issues (A) (HBS #301-009). Module 1: BusinessImpacts. Chapter 1: IT and Strategy Chapter 2: IT and Organization.Chapter 3. Extending the Enterprise. Chapter 4. Making the Case for IT.Case #1-1 Charles Schwab in 2002 (HBS #803-070). Case #1-2 Learningfrom Leapfrog (HBS #804-062). Case #1-3 Wyndham International:Fostering High-Touch with High Tech (HBS #803-092). Case #1-4Global Healthcare Exchange (HBS #804-002). Article #1-5 IT Doesn’tMatter with Letters to the Editor (HBR #3566). Module 2: ManagingNetworked Infrastructure and Operations. Chapter 5. UnderstandingInternetworking Infrastructure. Chapter 6. Assuring Reliable and SecureIT Services. Chapter 7. Managing Diverse IT Infrastructures. Case #2-1CareGroup (HBS #303-097). Case #2-2 The iPremier Company: Denialof Service Attack (A) (HBS #601-114). Case #2-3 Ford Motor Company:Supply Chain Strategy ((HBS #699-198) Article #2-4 The Power ofVirtual Integration: An Interview with Dell Computer’s Michael Dell(HBR #98208). Case #2-5 Postgirot Bank and Provment AB: Managingthe Cost of IT Operations (HBS #302-061). Module 3: Managing andLeading a Networked IT Organization. Chapter 8. Organizing and Leadingthe IT Function. Chapter 9. Managing IT Outsourcing. Chapter 10.A Portfolio Approach to IT Projects. Case #3-1 Cathay Pacific: DoingMore with Less (HBS #303-106). Case #3-2 Royal Caribbean Cruises,Ltd. (HBS #304-019). Case #3-3 Rakuten (HBS #305-050). Case #3-4Telecomunicacoes de São Paulo S.A. (Telesp) (HBS #804-149). Case#3-5 Outsourcing IT: The Global Landscape in 2004 (HBS #304-104).Conclusion: The Challenges of Managing in a Network EconomyRevisited. Case #C-1 UCB (HBS #304-096). Case #C-2 Enabling BusinessStrategy with IT at the World Bank (HBS #304-055). AnnotatedBibliography. IndexInternational EditionCREATING BUSINESS ADVANTAGE IN THEINFORMATION AGEby Lynda M Applegate, Harvard Business School2002 / 432 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-252367-6 / MHID: 0-07-252367-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122658-5 / MHID: 0-07-122658-3 [IE]CONTENTSCases: 1. Charles Schwab (A). 2. Charles Schwab (B). Mod ule One:The Chal leng es of Managing in an In for ma tion Age. Cases: 1. H.E.Butt Grocery Com pa ny: The New Digital Strategy. 2. Admart. 3. Li& Fung. Module Two: Building In for ma tion Age Businesses. Cases:1. QuickenInsurance: The Race to Click and Close (Con densed). 2.Amazon.com 2000. 3. Amazon.com Val u a tion Exercise. 4. AmericanExpress Interactive. Module Three: Information Age Operations. Cases:1. Arepa. 2. Selecting a Hosting Pro vid er. 3. Web and IT Hosting Facilities.4. Trilogy (A). 5. The iPremier Company: Denial of Service Attack(A). Module Four: Managing Information Age Projects and Programs.150HED 2007 MIS.indd 15010/5/2006 2:04:11 PM

Management Information SystemsCases: 1. Tektronix, Inc.: Global ERP Implementation. 2. BAE AutomatedSystems: Denver International Airport Bag gage-Handling System (A).3. Cisco Systems Ar chi tec ture: ERP and Web-Enabled IT. 4. GeneralDynamics and Com put er Sciences Corporation: Outsourcing the ISFunction (A). Concluding Thoughts. Case: 1. Merrill Lynch: IntegratedChoice (Condensed)Computers In Society /Computer EthicsNEWKnowledge ManagementInternational EditionMEASURING AND MANAGING KNOWL EDGEby Tom Housel and Arthur Bell2001 / 176 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-229771-3 / MHID: 0-07-229771-9(Out-of-Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118119-8 / MHID: 0-07-118119-9 [IE]CONTENTS1. The Parameters of Knowl edge Management. 2. The Knowledge-basedEconomy. 3. Paradigms for Knowledge Management. 4. KnowledgeManage-ment Principles. 5. Knowledge Management at Work in Organizations.6. Per spec tives on Measuring Knowl edge. 7. MeasuringReturn on Knowledge. 8. Electronic Tools for Man ag ing Knowledge. 9.Im ple ment ing Knowledge Management. 10. The Future of KnowledgeManagement.International EditionKNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENTby Ganesh Natarajan, President & CEO, APTECH Mumbai andSandhya Shekhar, Principal Consultant, APTECH, Mumbai2000 / 375 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-463770-8 / MHID: 0-07-463770-3(Out-of-Print)ISBN-13; 978-0-07-118820-3 / MHID: 0-07-118820-7 [IE](Tata McGraw-Hill Title)Professional BookCONTENTS1. Introduction. 2. Demystifying Knowl edge Manage-ment. 3. KM TheBusiness Per spec tive. 4. KM The Technology Per spec tive. 5. KM ThePro cess Per-spective. 6. KM The Learning Sys tems Perspective. 7. K MThe Market Per spec tive. 8. Building the Knowl edge Cor po ra tion. 9. KMin Oth er Segments. 10. KM Your Perspective. 11. KM The FutureCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY06/0713th EditionBy Paul DePalma, Gonzaga University2007 (March 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352832-8 / MHID: 0-07-352832-3Browse http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073528323.mhtmlFrom McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series (formerlyknown as McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this Thirteen Edition of AN-NUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY 06/07 providesconvenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected fromthe best of the public press. Organizational features include:an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotatedtable of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction;brief overviews for each section; a topical index; and an instructor’sresource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUALEDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guidefor instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by ourstudent website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUNIT 1. Introduction 1. Five Things We Need to Know About TechnologicalChange 2. Whom to Protect and How? New! 3. On the Natureof Computing UNIT 2. The Economy 4. The Productivity ParadoxNew! 5. The Big Band Era New! 6. The New Gatekeepers New! 7. TheSoftware Wars UNIT 3. Work and the Workplace 8. Brain Circulation:How High-Skill Immigration Makes Everyone Better Off 9. Software10. Letter from Silicon Valley New! 11. When Long Hours at a VideoGame Stop Being Fun New! 12. The Computer Evolution New! 13.Making Yourself Understood UNIT 4. Computers, People, and SocialParticipation New! 14. Back-to-School Blogging New! 15. Structureand Evolution of Blogspace New! 16. New Technologies and OurFeelings: Romance on the Internet 17. From Virtual Communities toSmart Mobs 18. Making Meaning: As Google Goes, So Goes the NationNew! 19. Conquered by Google: A Legendary Literature Quiz UNIT5. Societal Institutions: Law, Politics, Education, and the Military 20.The Copyright Paradox 21. You Bought It. Who Controls It? New! 22.Electronic Voting Systems: the Good, the Bad, and the Stupid New!23. Small Vote Manipulations Can Swing Elections New! 24. To SizeUp Colleges, Students Now Shop Online New! 25. Facing Down theE-Maelstrom 26. Point, Click…Fire 27. The Doctrine of Digital WarUNIT 6. Risk New! 28. Why Spyware Poses Multiple Threats to SecurityNew! 29. Terror’s Server 30. Homeland Insecurity 31. The VirusUnderground New! 32. The Fading Memory of the State New! 33. FalseReporting on the Internet and the Spread of Rumors: Three Case Studies34. The Level of Discourse Continues to Slide UNIT 7. InternationalPerspectives and Issues New! 35. China’s Computer Wasteland New!36. The New Face of the Silicon Age New! 37. Restoring the Popularityof Computer Science 38. Dot Com for Dictators New! 39. Weaving theAuthoritarian Web 40. Kabul’s Cyber Cafe Culture 41. Japan’s Generationof Computer Refuseniks UNIT 8. The Frontier of Computing 42.Minding Your Business 43. Why Listening Will Never Be the SameNew! 44. The Intelligent Internet New! 45. Sparking the Fire of InventionNew! 46. Mind Control151HED 2007 MIS.indd 15110/5/2006 2:04:12 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionETHICAL DECISION MAKING AND INFORMATIONTECHNOLOGY2nd Edi tionby James Grillo and Ernest Kallman, both of Bentley College1996 / 152 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-034090-9 / MHID: 0-07-034090-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124065-9 / MHID: 0-07-124065-9 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/itCONTENTSPART 1: APPROACHES TO ETHICAL DECISION MAK ING. CHAPTER1: Ethics and Ethical Decision Making. Why We Should Care About Ethics.Computer Ethics and Regular Ethics. Competing Factors that AffectOur Behavior. Value Judgments. The Types of Eth i cal Choices. MakingDe fen si ble Decisions. Sum ma ry. Annotated References. CHAPTER 2:Ethics and Information Technology. New Technologies, New Problems.Why is Ethical Computer Use a Special Challenge? What is UnethicalComputer Use? Summary. Annotated References. CHAPTER 3: SolvingEthical Dilemmas: A Sample Case Exercise. A Four-step Analysis Process.Sample Case: Too Much of a Good Thing. Discovering the Four-stepProcess. Summary. PART 2: THE CASES. Case 1: Levity or Libel - AnE-mail Effort. Case 2: Credit Woes - Credit Bureau Decisions. Case 3:Something for Everyone - Data Re com bi na tion. Case 3A: Something forEveryone - Role-playing. Case 4: Abort, Retry, Ignore: Data Recovery.Case 5: Messages from All Over - Who Con trols E-mail. Case 6: A Jobon the Side - Part-time Consulting. Case 7: The New Job - Of fen siveGraphics. Case 7A: The New Job - Role-playing Ver sion. Case 8: TheBuyout - Inappropriately Ac quired Data. Case 9: Charades - StolenPassword. Case 10: Laccaria and Eagle - Restrictive Trade Practices.Case 11: Taking Bad with Good - Bad Software. Case 12: The Engineerand the Teacher - Copyright Ethics. Case 13: Test Data - Con fi den tialor Dummy Data. Case 14: The Brain Pick - Knowledge-based System.Case 15: Trouble in Sardonia - Overseas Copy right Ethics. Case 16: BadMedicine - Well-intentioned software. Case 17: Code Blue - Patient Data.Case 18: Virtual Success - Games Invade the Real World. Case 19: HisPrivate Lab - Student Com put er Use . APPENDIX A: Ethics Codes andPolicies. APPENDIX B: Worksheets for Four-step Analysis. IndexEnterprise Resource PlanningNEWSAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWAREAn IntroductionBy Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University2007 (May 2006) / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8Browse http://www.mhhe.com/hayenThis text is written by Dr. Roger Hayen, a SAP R/3 instructorat Central Michigan University, one of three universities in theU.S. to offer SAP R/3 certification for students in an SAP UniversityAlliance program, called “Process Integration CertificationAcademy”. Hayen’s extensive familiarity with the subject providesa useful introduction to the essential concepts of the SAPR/3 System, with the opportunity for hands-on implementationof those concepts. The text’s succinct, yet thorough coveragemakes it versatile, so that it is appropriate for both student instructionand professional training and reference.FEATURES• The core text is organized into three distinct main parts—UnderstandingEnterprise Software, Displaying SAP R/3 Information, and ProcessingSAP R/3—for easy readability and enhanced functionality.• Includes helpful “Quick Checks” for student review of conceptsafter each chapter.• Class-tested at Central Michigan University by undergraduate students;also used by SAP R/3 for its own training programs.• Hands-on, up-to-date exercises using SAP’s IDES training data, SAPR/3’s own help files, and the 4.6 R/3 release—critical to the understandingand application of the software. Frees instructors’ time, as they wouldotherwise have to create the data for students’ exercises themselves. Alsoensures students will be market-ready for SAP R/3 user companies.• Flexibility of the hands-on exercises. Provided in two formats: local,‘read-only’ ones and web-based activities with a ‘live client’ simulatinga ‘real world’ SAP/R3 implementation.• Can be purchased, at a discounted price, with other McGraw-Hill/Irwin texts in Operations Management.• Heavily illustrated with graphics and annotated screen shots.CONTENTSPreface / Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software Chapter 1 OverviewChapter 2 Navigation and Systems Operation Chapter 3 ApplicationModules Chapter 4 Businesses Processes Chapter 5 Web ApplicationServer Chapter 6 Internet Enabled Solutions Chapter 7 ConfigurationChapter 8 Implementation Framework Chapter 9 Organization StructureChapter 10 Customizing Tools Part 2 Displaying SAP R/3 InformationChapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities Part 3 Processing SAP R/3Transactions Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash Cycle Processes /Summary / Appendix Quick Check AnswersInternational EditionMANAGERIAL ISSUES OF EN TER PRISE RE SOURCEPLAN NING SYSTEMSby David L Olson, Uni ver si ty of Nebraska - Lincoln2004 / 336 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286112-9 / MHID: 0-07-286112-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123628-7 / MHID: 0-07-123628-7 [IE]http://www.mhhe.com/olsonerpThe primary purpose of this text will be to lay out the scope ofERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) Systems im ple men ta tion,explain the competitive advantages of using ERP Systems andsupport general concepts with short case stud ies. This text coversthe fun da men tal issues im por tant in ERP implementation andman age ment, starting from an in for ma tion systems/in for ma tiontechnology project man age ment perspective. Each chapterwill include a review of real cases of ERP im ple men ta tionsrelated to that particular chapter content. The text is meant tobe software product independent, in order to allow schools toselect their own ERP Systems software tools and use them astime permits. The benefit to this approach is that in addition tolearning key concepts related to ERP Sys tems operations andim ple men ta tion, adopters want to see lots of illustrations andexamples, especially case studies.CONTENTSChapter 1: Enterprise Resource Planning Systems. Chapter 2: ERPModules and Historical Development. Chap ter 3: ERP System Op tionsand Selection Methods. Chapter 4: Business Process. eEngineeringand Best Practices. Chapter 5: ERP System Installation. Chap ter 6: ERPProject Man age ment. Chapter 7: ERP Implementation and Main te nance.Chapter 8: Business In tel li gence Systems and ERP. Chapter 9: ERP andSupply Chains. Chapter 10: Advanced Tech nol o gy and ERP Security.Chapter 11: Trends in ERP152HED 2007 MIS.indd 15210/5/2006 2:04:12 PM

Management Information SystemsInternational EditionWHY ERP?A Primer on SAP Implementationby F Robert Jacobs, Indiana University - Bloomington and David ClayWhybark, University of North Carolina - Chapel Hill2000 / 144 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-240089-2 / MHID: 0-07-240089-7ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118943-9 / MHID: 0-07-118943-2 [IE]www.jacobs.indiana.edu/erpCONTENTSChapter 1- Introduction to ERP Chapter 2- The SAP School Chapter3- Back at the Plant Chapter 4- A Different BusinessData Mining* Concepts of data mining introduced early: Concept overviews precedethe discussion of data mining algorithms, allowing readers to understandthe importance of techniques by seeing how they are applied beforethey actually learn them.CONTENTSPart I: INTRODUCTION. Chapter 1: Initial Description of Data Miningin Business. Chapter 2: Data Mining Processes and KnowledgeDiscovery. Chapter 3: Database Support to Data Mining. Part II: DATAMINING METHODS AS TOOLS. Chapter 4: Overview of Data MiningTechniques. Chapter 4 Appendix: Enterprise Miner Demonstration onExpenditure Data Set. Chapter 5: Cluster Analysis. Chapter 5 Appendix:Clementine. Chapter 6: Regression Algorithms in Data Mining. Chapter7: Neural Networks in Data Mining. Chapter 8: Decision Tree Algorithms.Appendix 8: Demonstration of See5 Decision Tree Analysis.Chapter 9: Linear Programming-Based Methods. Chapter 9 Appendix:Data Mining Linear Programming Formulations. Part III: BUSINESSAPPLICATIONS. Chapter 10: Business Data Mining Applications Applications.Chapter 11: Market-Basket Analysis. Chapter 11 Appendix:Market-Basket Procedure. Part IV: DEVELOPING ISSUES. Chapter 12:Text and Web Mining. Chapter 12 Appendix: Semantic Text Analysis.Chapter 13: Ethical Aspects of Data MiningInternational EditionNEWINTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS DATA MININGby David L Olson, Uni ver si ty of Nebraska - Lincoln, and Yong Shi,University of Nebraska-Omaha2007 (November 2005) / 336 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124470-1 / MHID: 0-07-124470-0 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson1eIntroduction to Business Data Mining was developed to introducestudents, as opposed to professional practitioners or engineeringstudents, to the fundamental concepts of data mining.Most importantly, this text shows readers how to gather andanalyze large sets of data to gain useful business understanding.A four part organization introduces the material (Part I),describes and demonstrated basic data mining algorithms (PartII), focuses on the business applications of data mining (PartIII), and presents an overview of the developing areas in thisfield, including web mining, text mining, and the ethical aspectsof data mining. (Part IV). The author team has had extensiveexperience with the quantitative analysis of business as well aswith data mining analysis. They have both taught this materialand used their own graduate students to prepare the text’s datamining reports. Using real-world vignettes and their extensiveknowledge of this new subject, David Olson and Yong Shihave created a text that demonstrates data mining processesand techniques needed for business applications.FEATURES* Coverage of business applications: This text focuses on the value ofdata analyses to business decision making while also exploring conceptssuch as lift, customer relationship management, market segmentation,and more.* Straightforward explanation of methods, demonstrated with examples:Short vignettes are used throughout showing how specific concepts havebeen applied in actual business situations. References to data miningsoftware and websites are also featured.* Major software addressed: The text’s appendices show how majorsoftware projects support various aspects of data mining. Also, the textreviews popular data mining software to help students become familiarwith the software options available in data mining.Database Management(Professional References)SQL SERVER 2005The Complete Reference, 2nd EditionJeffrey Shapiro and Steen Bowman2006 (March 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226152-3 / MHID: 0-07-226152-8An Osborne Media Title• Enterprise data management capabilities, including securityand clustering• Powerful developer tools -- T-SQL, .NET, CLR, XML, ADO.NET 2.0• Business Intelligence features, such as Integration Services,data warehousing, and reportsINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg153HED 2007 MIS.indd 15310/5/2006 2:04:12 PM

Management Information Systems154HED 2007 MIS.indd 15410/5/2006 2:04:12 PM

2007-2008 NEW Marketing TitlesMarketing ~ ContentsAdvertising & Promotion / IMC ..................................... 174Business to Business ..................................................... 182Consumer Behavior ...................................................... 165Customer Relation Management ................................... 192Customer Relation Management (Prof Ref.) ................... 195Direct Marketing .......................................................... 190International Marketing ................................................. 187Internet Marketing ........................................................ 190Introductory Marketing - Supplement ............................ 163Logistics ....................................................................... 185Marketing Channels ...................................................... 183Marketing Management Cases ...................................... 171Marketing Management - Software ................................ 172Marketing Management - Text ...................................... 168Marketing Management - Text & Cases ......................... 169Marketing Planning ...................................................... 190Marketing Principles ..................................................... 157Marketing (Professional References) .............................. 194Marketing Research ...................................................... 164Marketing - Software ..................................................... 163New Product Management ........................................... 184Pricing .......................................................................... 191Product Design ............................................................. 184Product Management .................................................... 183Public Relations ............................................................ 192Retail Management ....................................................... 186Sales Management ........................................................ 181Selling .......................................................................... 177Services Marketing ....................................................... 189Special Topics in Marketing .......................................... 193Strategic Marketing - Cases ........................................... 174Strategic Marketing - Text ............................................. 172Strategic Marketing - Text & Cases ................................ 174Travel and Tourism ....................................................... 1912007 New Titles• ALSEMStrategic Marketing: A Practical Approach..............172ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302586-5 / MHID: 0-07-302586-0• ARENSEssentials of Contemporary Advertising ..................175ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313666-0 / MHID: 0-07-313666-2• BEARDENMarketing: Principles and Perspectives, 5e .............158ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310120-0 / MHID: 0-07-310120-6• BELCHAdvertising and Promotion, 7e ................................175ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310126-2 / MHID: 0-07-310126-5• CATEORAInternational Marketing, 13e ...................................187ISBN-13: 978-0-07-308006-2 / MHID: 0-07-308006-3• ETZELMarketing, 14e ........................................................159ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301634-4 / MHID: 0-07-301634-9• FULLERTONSports Marketing .....................................................193ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312821-4 / MHID: 0-07-312821-X• FUTRELLABC’s of Relationship Selling, 9e .............................178ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310132-3 / MHID: 0-07-310132-X• HARWOODRelationship Marketing ............................................192ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711422-0 / MHID: 0-07-711422-1[MH UK Title]• HAVALDARSales and Distribution Management: Textand Cases ................................................................181MHID: 0-07-061190-4[Tata MH Title]• HAWKINSConsumer Behavior, 10e .........................................166ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310137-8 / MHID: 0-07-310137-0• JOBBERFoundations of Marketing, 2e ..................................161ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710918-9 / MHID: 0-07-710918-X[MH UK Title]• JOBBERPrinciples and Practice of Marketing, 5e .................160ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711415-2 / MHID: 0-07-711415-9[MH UK Title]• KERINMarketing: The Core, 2e ..........................................160ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321574-7 / MHID: 0-07-321574-0• LEVYRetailing Management, 6e .......................................186ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301978-9 / MHID: 0-07-301978-X155HED 2007 Marketing.indd 15510/5/2006 1:42:46 PM

2007-2008 NEW Marketing Titles2007 New Titles• NARGUNDKARServices Marketing, 2e ............................................189ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061631-8 / MHID: 0-07-061631-0[Tata MH Title]• NEALConsumer Behavior, Enhanced Ed, 4e .....................167ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471693-9 / MHID: 0-07-471693-X[MH Aust Title]• PETERMarketing Management, 8e ..................................... 169ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313763-6 / MHID: 0-07-313763-4• QUESTERMarketing: Creating and Delivering Value5e ............................................................................162ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471560-4 / MHID: 0-07-471560-7[MH Aust Title]• RICHARDSONAnnual Editions: Marketing 07/08, 29e ....................163ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337988-3 / MHID: 0-07-337988-3• WEITZSelling, 6e ................................................................179ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313690-5 / MHID: 0-07-313690-52008 New Titles• ARENSContemporary Advertising, 11e ...............................174ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352991-2 / MHID: 0-07-352991-5• FUTRELLFundamentals of Selling, 10e ...................................177ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340469-1 / MHID: 0-07-340469-1• GREWALMarketing: Value-Based ...........................................157ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304902-1 / MHID: 0-07-304902-6• JOHNSTONRelationship Selling and Sales Management,2e ............................................................................177ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352981-3 / MHID: 0-07-352981-8• MULLINSMarketing Management, 6e .....................................168ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352982-0 / MHID: 0-07-352982-6• PERREAULTBasic Marketing, 16e ...............................................157ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352980-6 / MHID: 0-07-352980-X• PETERConsumer Behavior, 8e ...........................................165ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352985-1 / MHID: 0-07-352985-0• SPIROManagement of a Sales Force,12e ...........................181ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352977-6 / MHID: 0-07-352977-X• ULRICHProduct Design and Development, 4e .....................184ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310142-2 / MHID: 0-07-310142-7156HED 2007 Marketing.indd 15610/5/2006 1:42:46 PM

MarketingInternational EditionMarketing PrinciplesNEWMARKETING: Value-BasedBy Dhruv Grewal and Michael Levy of Babson College2008 (December 2006) / 704 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-304902-1 / MHID: 0-07-304902-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-333668-8 / MHID: 0-07-333668-8(with OLC)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110905-5 / MHID: 0-07-110905-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/grewalThis text applies the marketing concept. Marketing and it’ssupplementary package was built from scratch by focusing onwhat the market wants. The motto, “Marketing Creates Value”permeates this text and stresses values, ethics, entrepreneurship,assessment and global topics.FEATURES• Assessment Tool Kit. Assessment has become an increasingly importantcomponent of business schools’ accreditation with AACSB. Theweb-based Tool Kit enables students to walk away from the course witha “bag of tricks”. They really learn how to do things, rather than justmemorize terms, a weakness in so many other fundamental texts. Thefollowing topics are covered in the Tool Kit: SWOT Analysis (Ch. 2),Ethical-Decision Making (Ch. 3), Contemporary vs. Non-contemporaryConsumer Decision Making (Ch. 5), Vendor Evaluation Analysis (Ch. 6),Market Positioning (Ch. 8), Survey Design (Ch. 9), Product Life Cycle(Ch. 11), Service Quality (Ch. 12), Break-even Analysis (Ch. 16, andDeveloping an Advertisement (Ch. 18).• End of Chapter Material. Include marketing application instead of“list and describe-type” questions and exercises that asks students togo to the Internet and do reading/research, before answering thoughtfulquestions.• Integrated Concepts. Other texts in this market have added conceptsof market a chapter at a time, giving the concepts of marketing the lookand feel of several disconnected “silos”. By integrating the conceptsof marketing, this book demonstrates to students how all concepts ofmarketing are integrated. It gives a “bigger picture” perspective.• Coverage of Ethics. Ethics has its own chapter (Three), plus boxedinserts called “Ethical Dilemmas” and end of chapter applications.CONTENTSSection 1 Assessing the Marketplace 1 Overview of Marketing 2 DevelopingMarketing Strategies 3 Ethics 4 Analyzing the Environment Section2 Understanding the Marketplace 5 Consumer Behavior 6 Businessto-Business7 Global Markets Section 3 Targeting the Marketplace 8Segmenting & Targeting 9 Marketing Research Section 4 Value Creation10 Developing New Products 11 Managing the Product Portfolio andBranding 12 The Role of Services Section 5 Value Capture 13 PricingConcepts 14 Setting Prices Section 6 Value Delivery 15 Designing theChannel and Supply Chain Management 16 Retailing Section 7 ValueCommunication 17 Integrated Marketing Communication 18 Advertising19 Personal SellingInternational EditionNEWBASIC MARKETING16th EditionBy William Perreault, University of North Carolina—Chapel Hill,Joseph Cannon, Colorado State University and E. Jerome McCarthy,Michigan State University—East Lansing2008 (October 2006) / 800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352980-6 / MHID: 0-07-352980-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-332404-3 / MHID: 0-07-332404-3(with Student CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110110-3 / MHID: 0-07-110110-1 [IE]Basic Marketing 16e builds on the foundation pillars of previouseditions – the four Ps framework, managerial orientation, andstrategy planning focus. 16e builds upon its pioneering beginningsthat introduced the “four Ps” to the introductory marketingcourse. The unifying focus of Basic Marketing has always beenon how to make the marketing decisions that a manager mustmake in deciding what customers to focus on and how best tomeet their needs. Over many editions there has been constantchange in marketing management and the marketing environment.Some of the changes have been dramatic, and othershave been subtle. As a result, the authors have made ongoingchanges to the text to reflect marketing’s best practices andideas. Throughout all of these changes, Basic Marketing andthe supporting materials that accompany it have been morewidely used than any other teaching materials for introductorymarketing. Consistent with our belief in continuous qualityimprovement, this edition has been critically revised, updated,and rewritten to reflect new concepts, new examples, andrecent “best practices.” This edition extends the strategy planningapproach, integrating concepts tightly with the marketingstrategy planning model.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New Co-Author. Introducing Joe Cannon! Joe Cannon is an AssociateProfessor of Marketing at Colorado State University. Prior to joiningCSU, Joe taught at the Goizueta Business School at Emory University forfive years. He received his Ph.D. in Marketing from University of NorthCarolina, where he was a student of Bill Perreault. Joe also brings vastmarketing and sales industry experience as well, such as time spent insales and marketing for Eastman Kodak.• Marketing Strategy Process Planning Model. We have enhancedthe clarity of content organization through this model which showshow each chapter’s material fits into the “big picture.” This builds ona long-time strength of Basic Marketing, helping students integrate keymarketing concepts.• Expanded Emphasis on Customer Equity and Customer Service. Theseconcepts are introduced early in the book and integrated throughout toemphasize their central role in modern marketing.• Interesting and Integrated Coverage of Marketing Practice. Thisedition includes hundreds of updated concepts, examples, and bestpractices – across a broad variety of business and nonprofit organizations.The examples are chosen to be interesting to students and todemonstrate effective marketing.• Ethics Questions. Each chapter now includes provocative scenariobasedexercises which place students in real world situations faced bytoday’s marketing managers. The questions force students to take a standand think more deeply about the dilemmas facing marketing managers.The flexible format allows instructors to create written assignments,discuss the questions in class or simply encourage student reflection.The Instructor’s Manual provides teaching suggestions.• Marketing Plan Coach Software. (Now located on the Student CD)Along with end-of-chapter Creating Marketing Plans questions providea new set of flexible teaching and learning materials that demonstratehow concepts from the book are applied by marketing managers. The157HED 2007 Marketing.indd 15710/5/2006 1:42:47 PM

Marketingauthor developed Coach connects concepts from the book with a realmarketing plan. The Coach helps students understand how to planmarketing strategies, builds their self-confidence, and helps preparethem for the business world.FEATURES• The Four Ps. Clear interesting and authoritative coverage of all thebasics of marketing, organized using the four Ps framework and amanagerial strategy planning focus.• Integration of Special Topics. Careful incorporation of special topicssuch as e-commerce, marketing relationships, ethics and social responsibility,marketing over the Internet, and the marketing of services. Theseconcepts cut across the marketing fabric and must be understood in thisbroader context for effective marketing strategy planning.• Comprehensive Supplements. A flexible set of teaching and learningmaterials that help instructors meet their objectives and studentsefficiently learn marketing concepts.• Author Commitment. Maintains an author team dedicated to continuousquality improvement that meets student and instructor needs.• Beneficial Web Resources. Internet exercises that are more than anexcuse to go to the web – they demonstrate key concepts from eachchapter.CONTENTS1 Marketing’s Value to Consumers, Firms, and Society 2 MarketingStrategy Planning 3 Focusing Marketing Strategy with Segmentationand Positioning 4 Evaluating Opportunities in the Changing MarketingEnvironment 5 Demographic Dimensions of Global Consumer Markets6 Final Consumers and Their Buying Behavior 7 Business and OrganizationalCustomers and Their Buying Behavior 8 Improving Decisions withMarketing Information 9 Elements of Product Planning for Goods andServices 10 Product Management and New-Product Development 11Place and Development of Channel Systems 12 Distribution CustomerService and Logistics 13 Retailers, Wholesalers, and Their StrategyPlanning 14 Promotion—Introduction to Integrated Marketing Communications15 Personal Selling and Customer Service 16 Advertising andSales Promotion 17 Pricing Objectives and Policies 18 Price Setting inthe Business World 19 Implementing and Controlling Marketing Plans:Evolution and Revolution 20 Managing Marketing’s Link with OtherFunctional Areas 21 Developing Innovative Marketing Plans 22 EthicalMarketing in a Consumer-Oriented World: Appraisal and Challenges /Appendix A: Economics Fundamentals / Appendix B: Marketing Arithmetic/ Appendix C: Career Planning in Marketing / IndexInternational EditionNEWMARKETINGPrinciples and Perspectives, 5th EditionBy William O. Bearden, University of South Carolina—Columbia,Thomas N. Ingram, Colorado State University and Raymond LaForge,University of Louisville—Louisville2007 (November 2005) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310120-0 / MHID: 0-07-310120-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322356-8 / MHID: 0-07-322356-5(Looseleaf with OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322569-2 / MHID: 0-07-322569-X(with OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110811-9 / MHID: 0-07-110811-4[IE with OLC and Premium Content Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bearden07Marketing: Principles and Perspectives, 5e is a cutting edgetext. In the first four editions, we demonstrated this leadingcoverage with our strong integration of Integrated MarketingCommunication, cross-functional teams, and integration ofthe Internet throughout. The authors not only talk about whatmarketing is, but prepare students to be marketers by involvingthem in interactive exercises which strengthen decision makingskills. Marketing, 5e offers the latest coverage and quality supplements,but is still approximately $20 less than most principlesof marketing competitors. The perspectives approach is presentin the fifth edition; however, the over-riding theme concentrateson building customer equity.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Student CD-ROM: This CD-ROM features an interactive onlinebusiness case from SmartSims featuring music company Music2Go.This simulation game allows students to create business strategies andmarketing plans in a simulated business setting.• Acting Ethically Box: Each chapter now contains examples of goodbehavior by companies. Real companies are used and students arepresented with dilemmas that relate to the environment, morals, etc.We need more ethical business leaders and Bearden helps us achievethat.• Creating Customer Value Box: The creating customer value box asksthe question of what is a marketer doing to build long term relationshipsover a long period of time. How is that marketing activity addingvalue? is answered.• Marketing Plan integration: The Marketing Plan appendix now tiesdirectly to the appropriate place in the chapter. Students can use thisoutline when completing a marketing planning project or simply to tiethe chapter content to a marketing plan.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com• Introductory Prologue: The book now contains an introductoryprologue that gives students a frame of reference for marketing withouttaking up valuable assignment or classroom time. The prologue reallyhelps to keep students engaged.FEATURES• Connections: Highlighted throughout the text, are seven issues withinmarketing: relationship, global, customer value, technology, entrepreneurship,ethics, and productivity. This integration illustrates how theseimportant concepts are a part of every part of marketing and the studentcan apply these perspectives to everyday marketing situations.• Comprehensive Marketing Plan: A marketing plan for is presentedin Appendix A. This marketing plan illustrates to students how the mostimportant marketing concepts in the text are integrated into a unifiedplan to guide the marketing efforts.• Speaking from Experience: These boxes highlight the experiences ofreal business professional people talking about real marketing experiences,marketing in every day life, and how marketing affects businessfunctions within a company, showing students marketing put intopractice in everyday situations.158HED 2007 Marketing.indd 15810/5/2006 1:42:47 PM

Marketing• Integration of Electronic Marketing: Discussion and examples of electronicmarketing are integrated throughout the text, addressing primarye-Commerce business models, key marketing issues in e-Commerce,and legal and ethical issues in the electronic arena. This integration ofelectronic marketing signifies to students the importance of e-Commercein the fabric of business and shows them the challenges and utilizationof technology’s role in marketing.• Thinking Critically: Students apply their knowledge and think criticallyabout they just learned. These boxes strengthen understanding oftext material and encourage active learning.• Strong Global Coverage: End-of-chapter cases highlights a globalcompany. Global issues are integrated throughout the text, illustratingto students that marketers need to view the world marketplace.• End of Chapter Internet Exercises: Each chapter closes with Internetexercises that encourage Internet exploration; the student analyzesexamples of both successful and weak Internet Marketing strategies.• You Make the Marketing Decision Exercises: This feature gives studentsthe opportunity to be active learners in real business situationsand apply their knowledge strengthen decision-makers, and preparesstudents to be marketers.• End-of-Chapter cases: The 40 end-of-chapter cases focus on wellknowncompanies and current marketing situations. After reading thecases, students must make decisions regarding the current activities ofeach company, using the marketing principles and perspectives theyare learning. Students are given an accurate picture of the marketingworld as they deal with a mix of both consumer and business-to-businesscases, cases involving both multinational firms and small businesses,and cases reflecting both service and retail situations.CONTENTSPart One: Marketing in a Dynamic Environment 1. An Overview ofContemporary Marketing 2. The Global Marketing Environment 3. Marketing’sStrategic Role in the Organization Part Two: Buying Behavior 4.Consumer Buying Behavior and Decision Making 5. Business to BusinessMarkets and Buying Behavior Part Three: Marketing Research and MarketSegmentation 6. Marketing Research and Decision Support Systems7. Market Segmentation and Targeting Part Four: Product and ServiceConcepts and Strategies 8. Product and Service Concepts 9. DevelopingNew Products and Services 10. Product and Service Strategies PartFive: Pricing Concepts and Strategies 11. Pricing Concepts 12. PriceDetermination and Pricing Strategies Part Six: Marketing Channels andLogistics 13. Marketing Channels 14. Retailing 15. Wholesaling and LogisticsManagement Part Seven: Integrated Marketing Communications16. An Overview of Marketing Communications 17. Advertising andPublic Relations 18. Consumer and Trade Sales Promotion 19. PersonalSelling and Sales Management 20. Direct Marketing Communications /Appendix A: Developing a Marketing Plan / Appendix B: Applicationsof Mathematical and Financial Tools to Marketing DecisionsINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sgInternational EditionNEWMARKETING14th EditionBy Michael J. Etzel, University of Notre Dame, Bruce J. Walker,University of Missouri Columbia and William J. Stanton, Universityof Colorado Boulder2007 (December 2005) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-301634-4 / MHID: 0-07-301634-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325289-6 / MHID: 0-07-325289-1(with OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110835-5 / MHID: 0-07-110835-1[IE with OLC Premium Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/etzel14eMarketing, 14/e, by Etzel, Walker and Stanton continues to bea popular, low-cost, paperback option in the Principles market.This text is completely updated, and continues to incorporatetechnology, and feature in-text and boxed examples that highlightglobal issues, technology, ethics, applied decision making,chapter opening cases, and part-ending cases. Other marketingthemes integrated throughout the text include critical and currentthemes such as global marketing, customer relationshipmanagement, small business and entrepreneurship.FEATURES• Paperback and Inexpensive: This text remains the low-cost, comprehensiveoption for the first marketing course (undergraduate or MBA).• You Make the Decision Boxes: These boxes present synopses ofactual situations faced by marketers and ask students how they wouldrespond. The boxes move the student from a passive observer of marketingto an active participant who makes decision about marketingactions.• Chapter-Related Cases: Each chapter begins with a contemporary casethat introduces some of the concepts, strategies, and tactics covered inthe chapter. The case is revisited at the end of the chapter and additionalinformation is presented. By addressing the questions presented at theend of each case, students can apply what they learned in the chapterto the challenges and issues faced in actual marketing situations.• Part-Ending Cases: Each of the seven parts of the text ends with twocases. All deal with familiar firms facing significant marketing challengesand opportunities. Each case is realistic, yet the focus is on the aspectsof marketing specific to the particular text part. Students utilize the textmaterial to address issues faced by the firms described in the cases.• Global Marketing (Chapter 3): Introduced earlier in the text, thisplacement reinforces the importance of global marketing and underscoreshow common it has become to develop a strong marketingstrategy that includes global elements. The text provides extensiveexamples and coverage throughout, reinforcing the idea that businessand marketing have some global element regardless of the size ornature of the firm.• CRM & Database Management: This text highlights “hot” marketingtopics including CRM and Database Management. Customer RelationshipManagement (CRM) focuses on developing and keeping long-termrelationships to develop profitability. Database Management focuses onknowing as much as you can about a customer to better communicateand serve their needs. Both CRM and Database Management havebecome important tools in modern marketing.• Technology in Marketing (Chapter 22): This chapter offers an in-depthlook at the Internet and the role it plays in marketing strategies. TheInternet and use of technology are integrated throughout the textbookshowing students how they play an important part in communicationand commerce.• Marketing Research (Chapter 7): This chapter identifies what marketresearch is, the need for it, the variety of forms it takes, how to conductresearch, what to do with the results, how ethics come into play andwhat the future of market research is. Because market research is needed159HED 2007 Marketing.indd 15910/5/2006 1:42:47 PM

Marketingbefore a product is launched and also through its lifecycle, students musthave a firm understanding of its importance, uses and limitations.• Integrated Marketing Communications (Chapter 17): This chapterprovides an overview of integrated marketing communication, includingthe various types of promotion, how promotion works, and managementissues in developing a promotion program. Students need torecognize the value of IMC and how it contributes to the firm’s totalmarketing program.• Interactive Web page: http://www.mhhe.com/etzel07 This webpage includes resources for students and professors. Students can accesson-line quizzes, career profiles, and Internet exercises. Professorscan download supplements, access current events and Business Weekarticles through PowerWeb, and create their very own course webpage using PageOut.CONTENTSPart I: Nature and Scope of Marketing 1. The Field of Marketing 2. TheDynamic Marketing Environment 3. Global Markets and Marketing PartII: Identifying and Selecting Markets 4. Consumer Markets and BuyingBehavior 5. Business Markets and Buying Behavior 6. Market Segmentation,Targeting and Positioning 7. Marketing Research and MarketInformation Part III: Product 8. Product Planning and Development9. Product-Mix Strategies 10. Brands, Packaging, and Other ProductFeatures 11. Services Marketing Part IV: Price 12. Price Determination13. Pricing Strategies Part V: Distribution 14. Channels of Distribution15. Retailing 16. Wholesaling and Physical Distribution Part VI:Promotion 17. Integrated Marketing Communications 18. PersonalSelling and Sales Management 19. Advertising, Sales Promotion, andPublic Relations Part VII: Managing the Marketing Effort 20. StrategicMarketing Planning 21. Marketing Implementation and Evaluation 22.Marketing and the Information EconomyNEWPRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF MARKETING5th EditionBy David Jobber, University of Bradford2007 (January 2007) / 976 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711415-2 / MHID: 0-07-711415-9McGraw-Hill UK TitlePrinciples and Practice of marketing, 5th edition is the essentialtext for all marketing students. With its established authority andreputation, the new edition is the discerning choice for introductorymarketing modules at undergraduate, MA or MBA level.FEATURES• Expanded coverage on branding, ethics, and relationship marketing,updating these from the previous edition• New content on Corporate Social Responsibility• An updated chapter on internet marketing, to include mobile, wirelessand e-mail marketing• Expanded and updated case studies• Colour images and adverts throughout the book to demonstratemarketing principles in practice, together with an accompanying CDfeaturing on-line adverts• Strong pedagogical features; including key terms, e-marketing andmarketing in action boxes, study questions, internet exercises, ethicaldilemmas and review sectionsCONTENTSPart 1: Fundamentals of Modern Marketing Thought Chapter 1: Marketingin the Modern Firm Chapter 2: Marketing Planning: An Overviewof Marketing Chapter 3: Understanding Consumer Behaviour Chapter4: Understanding Organisational Buyer Behaviour Chapter 5: TheMarketing Environment and Corporate Social Responsibility Chapter 6:Marketing Research and Information Systems Chapter 7: Marketing Segmentationand Positioning Part 2: Marketing Mix Decisions Chapter 8:Managing Products: Brand and Corporate Identity Management Chapter9: Managing Products: Product Life-Cycle, Portfolio Planning and ProductGrowth Strategies Chapter 10: Developing New Products Chapter11: Pricing Strategy Chapter 12: Advertising Chapter 13: Personal Sellingand Sales Management Chapter 14: Direct Marketing Chapter 15: E-Marketing and New Media Chapter 16: Other Promotional Mix MethodsChapter 17: Distribution Part 3: Competition and Marketing Chapter 18:Analysing Competitors and Creating a Competitive Advantage Chapter19: Competitive Marketing Strategy Part 4: Markting Implementationand Application Chapter 20: Managing Marketing Implementation,Organisation and Control Chapter 21: Marketing Services Chapter 22:International MarketingInternational EditionNEWMARKETINGThe Core, 2nd EditionBy Roger A. Kerin, Southern Methodist University, Eric N. Berkowitz,University of Massachusetts—Amherst, Steven W. Hartley, Universityof Denver and William Rudelius, University of St. Thomas2007 (March 2006) / 400 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-321574-7 / MHID: 0-07-321574-0(with OLC and Premium Content Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-341497-3 / MHID: 0-07-341497-2(with SmartSims CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110772-3 / MHID: 0-07-110772-X[IE with OLC and Premium Content Card]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kerinMARKETING: THE CORE, 2/e by Kerin, Berkowitz, Hartley, andRudelius continues the tradition of cutting-edge content andstudent-friendliness set by Marketing 8/e, but in a shorter, moreaccessible package. The Core distills Marketing’s 22 chaptersdown to 18, leaving instructors just the content they need tocover the essentials of marketing in a single semester. Instructorsusing The Core also benefit from a full-sized supplementspackage that surpasses anything offered by the competition,while students will appreciate the easy-to-read paperback formatthat’s equally kind to both the eyes and the pocketbook. TheCore is more than just a “baby Kerin”; it combines great writing,currency, and supplements into the ideal package for budgetconsciousstudents and time-conscious professors.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Assessment Ready. The 2nd edition makes it even easier to quantifythe achievements of your students. There is a clearer connection nowbetween the Concept Checks and the Learning Objectives and, as in theprevious edition, the test bank questions are tied directly to the bookvia page numbers and Learning Objectives.• Reallocation of Material. Without sacrificing content and keeping theoverall text length the same, chapters have been shortened as necessaryto accommodate new Learning Objectives, Chapters in Review,and Build Your Own Marketing Plan activities. The point of doing sogoes along with the authors’ quest to promote a less lecture-based anda more active learning approach.• More Colorful Design. The design of Marketing 2/e is even morevibrant, with the addition of more photos and artwork. Not only willthey make the text more exciting visually, but they will make it easierto understand the concepts and the implications of those concepts.160HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16010/5/2006 1:42:47 PM

MarketingFEATURES• Engaging Writing. The easy-to-read writing style engages studentsthrough active learning techniques, timely and interesting examples,and challenging applications.• Personal Look at Marketing Professionals. The Core provides vividand accurate descriptions of contemporary marketing professionals--through cases, extended examples, and testimonials--that allow studentsto “personalize” marketing and identify possible career interests androle models.• Contemporary and Classic Real World Examples. The Core featuresup-to-date examples that students are likely to recognize from their ownexperiences in the marketplace, plus classic examples that students ofbusiness and marketing can easily relate to text concepts and typicalmarketing decisions.• Built-in Learning Aids. Learning objectives, concept checks, marginalkey terms, chapter summaries, internet exercises, and application questionsare used to reinforce learning and to allow students to self-assesstheir progress.• Outstanding Support Resources. Each chapter has a video segmentwhich supplements the written case and adds an exciting visual perspectiveto the company, products, and marketing decision makersdiscussed in the case.CONTENTSPart One: Initiating the Marketing Process. Chapter 1 Creating CustomerRelationships and Value through Marketing. Chapter 2 DevelopingSuccessful Marketing and Corporate Strategies. Appendix A Building anEffective Marketing Plan. Chapter 3 Scanning the Marketing Environment.Chapter 4 Ethics and Social Responsibility in Marketing. Part Two:Understanding Buyers and Markets. Chapter 5 Consumer Behavior.Chapter 6 Organizational Markets and Buyer Behavior. Chapter 7 ReachingGlobal Markets. Part Three: Targeting Marketing Opportunities.Chapter 8 Marketing Research: From Information to Action. Chapter 9Identifying Market Segments and Targets. Part Four: Satisfying MarketingOpportunities. Chapter 10 Developing New Products and Services.Chapter 11 Managing Products, Services, and Brands. Chapter 12 PricingProducts and Services. Chapter 13 Managing Marketing Channelsand Supply Chains. Chapter 14 Retailing and Wholesaling. Chapter 15Retailing and Wholesaling. Chapter 16 Integrated Marketing Communicationsand Direct Marketing. Chapter 17 Personal Selling and SalesManagement. Chapter 18 Implementing Interactive and MultichannelMarketing. Appendix B Planning a Career in MarketingNEWFOUNDATIONS OF MARKETING2nd EditionBy Jobber and Fahy2006 (February 2006) / 384 pagesISBn-13: 978-0-07-710918-9 / MHID: 0-07-710918-XMcGraw-Hill UK TitleFoundations of Marketing 2/e is a thorough, up-to-date andexciting introductory textbook that’s ideal for students studyingmarketing for the first time. The book presents a solid groundingin the fundamentals of contemporary marketing, and is full oflively and recent examples of marketing designed to educateand inspire.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Up-to-date topic coverage: This edition boasts the most full coverageof the most contemporary issues in marketing, including: branding,mobile marketing, ethics in marketing, services marketing, sponsorship,CRM and relationship marketing.• Contemporary examples: Each chapter features numerous boxedexamples of recent European marketing campaigns to help engageand interest readers.• Case studies: As well as boxed vignette examples, each chapterincludes its own extended case study to bring the chapter topics coveredtogether. Companies included in this new edition are: Persil, Zara,Nivea and Pret a Manger.• Integrated Marketing Communications: This new edition boasts 2full chapters on IMC, with brand new coverage on the hottest topics inmarketing communications.• New Services Marketing chapters Brand new to this edition is a fullchapter on services marketing management, which gives readers a fullerunderstanding of managing services marketing.CONTENTS1.The nature of marketing 2.The global business environment 3.Customerbehaviour 4.Marketing research and information systems 5.Fundamentalsof marketing management 6.Product and brand management7.Services marketing management 8.Pricing decisions 9.Integratedmarketing communications part I: Mass communications techniques10.Integrated marketing communications part II: Direct communicationstechniques 11.Distribution management 12.Marketing planningand strategyInternational EditionMARKETING8th EditionBy Roger A. Kerin, Southern Methodist University, Steven W.Hartley, University of Denver, Eric N. Berkowitz, University of Massachusetts– Amherst and William Rudelius, University of Minnesota—Mineapolis2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-308015-4 / MHID: 0-07-308015-2(with Student CD and PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111609-1 / MHID: 0-07-111609-5[IE with CD and PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/kerin06Marketing, 8e by Kerin, Hartley, Berkowitz, and Rudelius continuesa tradition of leading the market with contemporary, cutting-edgecontent presented in a conversational student-orientedstyle, supported by the most comprehensive, innovative, anduseful supplement package available. This text and package isdesigned to meet the needs of a wide spectrum of faculty—fromthe professor who just wants a good textbook and a few keysupplements, to the professor who wants a top-notch fully integratedmultimedia program. This edition is available in bothprint version and interactive /online version via PowerText, anintegrated learning experience that combines the traditionalcontent of a textbook with the media-rich environment of theInternet and both versions are supported by a dramatically expandedand improved multimedia teaching package.CONTENTSPart One Initiating the Marketing Process 1 Creating Customer Relationshipsand Value through Marketing 2 Developing Successful Marketingand Corporate Strategies Appendix A Building an Effective MarketingPlan 3 Scanning the Marketing Environment 4 Ethics and Social Responsibilityin Marketing Part Two Understanding Buyers and Markets 5Consumer Behavior 6 Organizational Markets and Buyer Behavior 7Reaching Global Markets Part Three Targeting Marketing Opportunities8 Marketing Research: From Information to Action 9 Identifying MarketSegments and Targets Part Four Satisfying Marketing Opportunities10 Developing New Products and Services 11 Managing Products andBrands 12 Managing Services 13 Building the Price Foundation 14 Arrivingat the Final Price Appendix B Financial Aspects of Marketing 15Managing Marketing Channels and Wholesaling 16 Integrating SupplyChain and Logistics Management 17 Retailing 18 Integrated Marketing161HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16110/5/2006 1:42:48 PM

MarketingCommunications and Direct Marketing 19 Advertising, Sales Promotion,and Public Relations 20 Personal Selling and Sales Management PartFive Managing the Marketing Process 21 Implementing Interactiveand Multi-channel Marketing 22 Pulling It All Together: The StrategicMarketing Process Appendix C Planning a Career in Marketing AppendixD Alternate Cases Glossary Chapter Notes CreditsInternational EditionESSENTIALS OF MARKETING10th EditionBy William Perreault, University of North Carolina—Chapel Hill andE. Jerome McCarthy, Michigan State University—East Lansing2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304920-5 / MHID: 0-07-304920-4(with Student CD, PowerWeb and OLC with PremiumContent Card)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-341833-9 / MHID: 0-07-341833-1(with Student CD and SmartSims)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111634-3 / MHID: 0-07-111634-6[IE with Student CD, PowerWeb and OLC]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fourpsEssentials of Marketing is a brief version of Basic Marketing.Basic Marketing and Essentials of Marketing are the first booksto develop and present the 4Ps framework (Product, Price, Place,Promotion) which describes the components of the marketingmix and forms the foundation of Marketing. Like Basic Marketing,Essentials of Marketing offers a very thorough integrationof the latest marketing themes, topics, and examples woventhroughout. While Essentials of Marketing is a brief text, it isnot a cut-and-paste of Basic Marketing. It is written carefully,thoroughly and specifically to be suitable for shorter Marketingcourses. Author Bill Perreault shows this same dedication to thesupplements package. Where most principles of marketing textshave separate supplement authors, Bill Perreault creates everyitem in the package. This unique involvement ensures quality,accuracy, and reliabilityCONTENTS1. Marketing’s Role in the Global Economy 2. Marketing’s Role withinthe Firm or Nonprofit Organization 3. Focusing Marketing Strategywith Segmentation and Positioning 4. Evaluating Opportunities inthe Changing Marketing Environment 5. Final Consumers and TheirBuying Behavior 6. Business and Organizational Customers and TheirBuying Behavior 7. Improving Decisions with Marketing Information8. Elements of Product Planning for Goods and Services 9. ProductManagement and New-Product Development 10. Place and Developmentof Channel Systems 11. Distribution Customer Service andLogistics 12. Retailers, Wholesalers, and Their Strategy Planning 13.Promotion—Introduction to Integrated Marketing Communications14. Personal Selling 15. Advertising and Sales Promotion 16. PricingObjectives and Policies 17. Price Setting in the Business World 18.Developing Innovative Marketing Plans: Appraisal and Challenges /Appendixes / A. Economics Fundamentals / B. Marketing Arithmetic /C. Career Planning in MarketingInternational EditionNEWMARKETINGCreating and Delivering Value, , 5th EditionBy Pascale Quester, University of Adelaide and Robyn Mcguiggan,University of Technology2006 (September 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471560-4 / MHID: 0-07-471560-7McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/quester4eQuester and McGuigan’s text has evolved from the traditional4 Ps, embracing new shifts and trends in the industry and takingintroductory students on an exploration of marketing withunprecedented vitality and energy. Interesting and relevantreal examples challenge students to open their eyes to the applicationssurrounding them in the world and through mediachannels. The fifth edition includes engaging new topical casestudies; the addition of challenging end-of-chapter questionsand projects; even stronger links to industry; and an increasedemphasis on ethics, relationship marketing, global marketing,and societal marketing.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Simplified Instructors PackageFEATURES• Industry Connections and Applications• A Book for LearnersCONTENTSPART I Marketing Strategy and Management 1 Creating customer valueand building relationships 2 Strategic marketing planning 3 Identifyingmarketing opportunities / End of Part Case Studies / PART II UnderstandingMarkets 4 Marketing research and information management 5Market segmentation 6 Consumer behaviour (heavily revised chapter)7 Business-to-business marketing / End of Part Case Studies / PARTIII The Marketing Mix / 8 Product planning 9 Product managementand new product development 10 Managing distribution channels 11Marketing logistics 12 Pricing objectives and policies 13 Setting pricesof goods and services 14 Marketing communications 15 MarketingCommunications mix 16 Sales marketing / End of Part Case Studies /PART IV Evaluating Marketing / 17 Implementation and control / Appendix:Ethical marketing in a consumer-oriented world / End of PartCase Studies / End of Book Case StudiesINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg162HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16210/5/2006 1:42:48 PM

MarketingNEWIntroductory Marketing- SupplementANNUAL EDITIONS: MARKETING 07/0829th EditionBy John E Richardson, Pepperdine University – Los Angeles2007 (November 2006) / 240 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-337988-3 / MHID: 0-07-337988-3McGraw-Hill/Dushkin TitleWebsite: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073379883.mhtmlThis Twenty-Ninth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: MARKET-ING provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articlesselected from the best of the public press. Organizational featuresinclude: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Websites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a generalintroduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index;and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials. US-ING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered asa practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles aresupported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.CONTENTSUNIT 1. Marketing In the 2000s and Beyond Part A. Changing PerspectivesNew! 1. Marketing Outlook 2006 New! 2. The World’s MostInnovative Companies 3. The Next 25 Years New! 4. Customers atWork 5. The Vanishing Mass Market Part B. The Marketing Concept 6.Marketing Myopia (With Retrospective Commentary) New! 7. ManageCustomer-Centric—Innovation—Systematically New! 8. Best Buy’s GiantGamble 9. Listening to Starbucks Part C. Services and Social Marketing10. Surviving in the Age of Rage New! 11. Pill Pushers Part D. MarketingEthics and Social Responsibility 12. Wrestling With Ethics 13. Trust inthe Marketplace New! 14. Fidelity Factor UNIT 2. Research, Markets,and Consumer Behavior Part A. Market Research New! 15. A Centuryof Innovation New! 16. Team Spirit Part B. Markets and DemographicsNew! 17. A New Age for the Ad Biz 18. The Halo Effect New! 19.Kodak Sharpens Digital Focus On Its Best Customers: Women 20.Kid Power Part C. Consumer Behavior New! 21. You Choose New!22. Every Move You Make UNIT 3. Developing and ImplementingMarketing Strategies 23. The Very Model of a Modern Marketing PlanPart A. Product New! 24. Breakaway Brands 25. In Praise of the PurpleCow New! 26. He Came. He Sawed. He Took on the Whole Power-Tool Industry Part B. Pricing New! 27. Customer-Centric Pricing: TheSurprising Secret for Profitability 28. Mind Your Pricing Cues New!29. Pricing Gets Creative New! 30. Boost Your Bottom Line by Takingthe Guesswork Out of Pricing Part C. Distribution 31. The Old Pillarsof New Retailing New! 32. Upscale Experience Downscale Prices 33.How to Beat Wal-Mart Part D. Promotion New! 34. Behind the Magic35. The Online Ad Surge 36. Stronger Sales in Just 28 Minutes UNIT4. Global Marketing 37. Segmenting Global Markets: Look Before YouLeap New! 38. How China Will Change Your Business New! 39. ThreeDimensional 40. Tech’s Future 41. Selling to the PoorAPPLICATIONS IN BASIC MARKETING 2006-2007TO ACCOMPANY ESSENTIALS OF MARKETINGBy William Perreault2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296467-7 / MHID: 0-07-296467-7Applications in Basic Marketing (Annual Editions). This collectionof short, interesting and timely “clippings” from the popularbusiness press-drawn from publications such as the New YorkTimes, Ad Age, Wall Street Journal, Brand Week, Fortune, andBusiness Week—gives students an in depth look at how marketingimpacts all aspects of current business practice. Readings arekeyed to relevant sections of the text and there is ample varietyto give instructors a choice of topics for out of class assignmentsor in class discussion.Marketing - SoftwareMERLIN: A MARKETING SIMULATIONBy Phillip Anderson, University of St Thomas, David Beveridge,Leigh Lawton and Timothy Scott of Mankato State University2004 / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-294658-1 / MHID: 0-07-294658-X(with CD-ROM)MERLIN, A Marketing Simulation 1/e, by Anderson, Beveridge,Lawton & Scott is a user-friendly, Windows-based comprehensivemarketing simulation designed for use in Principles ofMarketing, Marketing Management or the Marketing Strategycourse. MERLIN puts students into the role of marketing managerswhere they make the decisions needed to market theproducts of a small-marketing-oriented enterprise. MERLINmodels a small marketing business, which sells two productsin three sales territories, each with different profiles and demandcharacteristics. MERLIN gives students the opportunityto demonstrate their understanding of marketing concepts andchallenges them to respond to the difficulties of marketing ina dynamic, competitive environment. MERLIN allows studentsto compete on the basis of price, quality, features, and service.Students make quarterly decisions that include: selecting productcharacteristics (features and quality), setting prices, selectingmedia and a message (price, service, etc.). The combination ofthe decision options allows students the choice of a push versuspull promotional strategy. Two versions: MERLIN is available intwo versions: Solo (student vs. computer-managed companies)and Team (students vs. other student-managed companies).CONTENTSStudent Table of Contents: Preface / Chapter 1 - Overview Chapter 2- Loading the Merlin Software Chapter 3 - Working with the Merlin ProgramChapter 4 - The Merlin Business Environment Chapter 5 - Reviewof Marketing Management Functions Chapter 6 - Making DecisionsChapter 7 - Merlin Reports / Appendix A - Quarter 0 Decisions AppendixB - Quarter 0 Reports Appendix C - An Example of an IndustryPerformance Report Appendix D - An Example of a Marketing ResearchReport Appendix E - Initial Cost Parameters Appendix F - Limits & TimeLags Appendix G - Merlin “Hot / Keys Appendix H - Excel CompanyData File Appendix I - Excel Performance Data File Appendix J - MerlinFlow Chart Appendix K - A Step-by-Step Walk-Through Index InstructorTable of Contents: Preface / Chapter 1 - Introduction to Merlin Teamand Merlin Solo Chapter 2 - Loading and Registering the Merlin SoftwareChapter 3 - Initializing a Merlin Team Industry Chapter 4 - Merlin TeamOperating Instructions Chapter 5 - Merlin Solo’s Operating InstructionsChapter 6 - Tips and Techniques for Using Merlin Team and Merlin SoloChapter 7 - Assisting Participants in the Registration Process AppendixA: Administrator Summary / Appendix B: Sample Company Reports forQuarter 0 Appendix C-1: Merlin Quiz Appendix C-2: Merlin Quiz AppendixD: Sales Potential Tables for Merlin Team Appendix E: DecisionLimits Costs Appendix F: Merlin Team and Merlin Solo Assignments163HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16310/5/2006 1:42:48 PM

MarketingAppendix G: Group-Based Peer Evaluation Appendix H: Sample MerlinBulletins Appendix I: Common Student Issues Appendix J: AdministratorIssues to Watch Appendix K: Time Lags in Merlin Appendix L: ExcelSpreadsheet File Appendix M: Merlin: Participant Guide IndexInternational EditionMARKETING GAME!3rd EditionBy Charlotte Mason and William Perreault of University of NorthCarolina2002 / 128 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-251380-6 / MHID: 0-07-251380-2(with Student CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115046-0 / MHID: 0-07-115046-3[IE with CD-ROM]The Marketing Game is a competitive marketing strategy simulationthat allows students the opportunity to apply their marketingknowledge in a fun and interesting way. The Marketing Gameis applicable for all areas of Marketing and all levels becausethe game is not based on just one simulation. Rather it is basedon several simulations with one integrated framework. Theinstructor can decide the level of complexity by selecting thenumber of decision areas a student is forced to consider, thusmaking the game equally applicable for a first year Principlesstudent and a Graduate student. The instructor can also “setup” or adjust the marketing environments in the simulation tomeet specific learning or teaching objections, and can decideif students will compete in groups against each other, or simplyagainst themselves. The Marketing Game is based on realisticmarketing and realistic marketing relationships, and allows formaximum flexibility.Marketing ResearchInternational EditionMARKETING RESEARCHBy Donald R. Cooper, Florida Atlantic University—Boca Raton andPamela S. Schindler, Wittenberg University2006ISBN-13: 978-0-07-305430-8 / MHID: 0-07-305430-5(with Student CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111571-1 / MHID: 0-07-111571-4[IE with Student CD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cooper06Marketing Research is written to introduce readers to the interestingand challenging world of research-supported marketingdecisions. Donald Cooper and Pamela Schindler use their researchand teaching experience, as well as their contacts in theresearch industry, to create a text full of practical examples andresearcher insights. Unlike other first editions, the author team ofCooper and Schindler have been writing successful textbooks inresearch methods for more than a decade. In Marketing Researchthey tap into their experience to create a fresh visual approachfull of practical examples and researcher insights.CONTENTSPart 1 Introduction to Marketing Research Chapter 1 The Role of Researchin Marketing Chapter 2 The Marketing Research Industry Chapter3 Thinking Like a Researcher Chapter 4 The Marketing Research ProcessChapter 5 Clarifying the Research Question Through Secondary Dataand Exploration Appendix 5A: Searching a Bibliographic DatabaseAppendix 5B: Advanced Searching Chapter 6 The Marketing ResearchRequest and Proposal Process Chapter 7 Ethics in Marketing ResearchPart 2 The Design of Marketing Research Chapter 8 Design StrategiesChapter 9 Qualitative Research Chapter 10 Observational StudiesChapter 11 Survey Data Collection Methods Chapter 12 Experimentsand Test Markets Appendix 12A: Complex Experimental Designs Part 3The Sources and Collection of Data Chapter 13 Measurement Chapter14 Measurement Scales Chapter 15 Surveys and Instruments Chapter16 Surveys and Instruments Appendix 16A: Pretesting Options andDiscoveries Chapter 17 Determining Sample Size Part 4 DiscoveringInsights: Analysis and Presentation of Data Chapter 18 Data Preparationand Description & Exploration Chapter 19 Exploring, Displaying, andExamining Data Chapter 20 Hypothesis Testing Chapter 21 Measures ofAssociation Chapter 22 Multivariate Analysis: An Overview Appendix22A: MindWriter and Simalto+Plus Chapter 23 Presenting Insights andFindings: Written and Oral Appendixes A A Summary of MarketingResearch to 1960 B Case Abstracts C Focus Group Discussion GuideD Direct Marketing Association Information Security Guidelines ENonparametric Significance Tests F Selected Statistical Tables References& Readings Glossary Credits and Acknowledgements IndexesName/Company/Product Index Subject IndexInternational EditionMARKETING RESEARCH3rd EditionBy Joseph Hair, Louisiana State University—Baton Rouge, RobertP. Bush, University of Louisiana@Lafayette and David J. Ortinau ofUniversity of South Florida—Tampa2006 / 728 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-283087-3 / MHID: 0-07-283087-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313615 8 / MHID: 0-07-313615-8(with SPSS Student CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111592-6 / MHID: 0-07-111592-7 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hair06Marketing Research, 3/e takes an application-oriented approach,providing students with the tools and skills necessary to solvebusiness problems and exploit business opportunities. Thisbook is unique from any other in the market in three significantways. First, it provides a greater balance between primary andsecondary information and the techniques and methods thatunderpin these two important types of data. Second, it offersin-depth coverage of the critical research tools and skills thatwill be required of today and tomorrow’s marketing researchersand business decision-makers. Third, with its in-depth coverageof secondary research, the practice of customer-based managementis highlighted as this book helps students see what realcompanies are doing for their marketing research. This bookprovides students a realistic and current view of the practice andimportance of marketing research in the business world.CONTENTSPart 1: The Role and Value of Marketing Research Information 1Marketing Research for Managerial Decision Making 2 The MarketingResearch Process 3 Information Management for Marketing Decisions:Secondary Data Sources Part 2: Technology in the Research Process4 Customer Relationship Management and the Marketing ResearchProcess 5 Marketing Decision Support Systems Part 3: Designing theMarketing Research Project 6 Exploratory Designs: In-Depth Interviewsand Focus Groups 7 Descriptive Research Designs: Survey Methods andErrors 8 Observation Techniques, Experiments, and Test Markets Part4: Gathering and Collecting Accurate Data 9 Sampling: Theory andDesign 10 Sampling: Methods and Planning 11 Overview of Measurement:Construct Development and Scale Measurement 12 Attitude ScaleMeasurements Used in Marketing Research 13 Questionnaire Designand Issues Part 5: Data Preparation, Analysis, and Reporting the Results14 Coding, Editing, and Preparing Data for Analysis 15 Data Analysis:Testing for Significant Differences 16 Data Analysis: Testing for Association17 Data Analysis: Multivariate Techniques for the Research Process18 Preparing the Marketing Research Report and Presentation164HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16410/5/2006 1:42:48 PM

MARKETING RESEARCH PROJECT MANUALBy James Molinari, SUNY Oswego2006 / 80 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-312888-7 / MHID: 0-07-312888-0This manual is intended for an introductory marketing researchcourse that requires a marketing research project. The manualhas been developed to assist the student throughout the variousstages of a marketing research project. It is organized aroundthe steps of the research process. This manual is designed toanswer the common questions that, experience suggests, arisethroughout the student project. It is not intended as mini-text,but rather as a complement to a standard text in marketingresearch.CONTENTSChapter 1 The marketing research project / Introduction / Project overview/ Forming your group / Team evaluation / Project score sheet /Peer evaluation form Chapter 2 Choosing a topic / Introduction / Typesof studies / Customer satisfaction / Market segmentation / Productpositioning / The assignment / The group meeting / What to submitChapter 3 Review of Decision Situation / Introduction / DecisionSituation / The assignment / Situation Analysis / Company / Competition/ Customer / Sources Chapter 4 Literature Review- SecondaryData / Introduction / Construct definition / Methodology / Measures/ Determinants of Customer Satisfaction / The assignment / SourcesChapter 5 Research Objectives and Information Needs / Introduction/ Research Objectives –What you want to know / Information needs /The assignment Chapter 6 Methodology / Introduction / DescriptiveDesigns / Data Sources / Data Collection method / The assignmentChapter 7 Questionnaire Design / Introduction / The Process / QuestionWording / Question order / Layout / The assignment Chapter 8Sampling Plan / Introduction / Population Definition / Sample Frame/ Sampling Procedure / Sample Size / Precision / Confidence level /Estimate of Variance / The assignment Chapter 9 Data Analysis / Mockuptables / Descriptive analysis / Inferential analysis Chapter 10 ReportFindings / Recommendation / Attention to detail / CitationsMARKETING RESEARCH3rd EditionBy Joseph Hair, Louisiana State University—Baton Rouge, RobertP. Bush, University of Louisiana@Lafayette and David J. Ortinau ofUniversity of South Florida—Tampa2005 / 704 pagesISBN-13: 9780-07-710936-3 / MHID: 0-07-710936-8McGraw-Hill UK TitleThe Revised International Edition of Marketing Research, 3/eincludes a variety of UK and European cases, providing Europeanstudents with a clear insight into marketing research ina European environment. This edition takes an applicationorientedapproach, providing students with the tools and skillsnecessary to solve business problems and exploit business opportunities.This book is unique from any other in the marketin three significant ways. First, it provides a greater balancebetween primary and secondary information and the techniquesand methods that underpin these two important types of data.Second, it offers in-depth coverage of the critical research toolsand skills that will be required of today and tomorrow’s marketingresearchers and business decision-makers. Third, withits in-depth coverage of secondary research, the practice ofcustomer-based management is highlighted as this book helpsstudents see what real companies are doing for their marketingresearch. This book provides students a realistic and currentview of the practice and importance of marketing research inthe business world.CONTENTSPart 1: The Role and Value of Marketing Research Information 1Marketing Research for Managerial Decision Making 2 The MarketingResearch Process 3 Information Management for Marketing Decisions:Secondary Data Sources Part 2: Technology in the Research Process4 Customer Relationship Management and the Marketing ResearchProcess 5 Marketing Decision Support Systems Part 3: Designing theMarketing Research Project 6 Exploratory Designs: In-Depth Interviewsand Focus Groups 7 Descriptive Research Designs: Survey Methods andErrors 8 Observation Techniques, Experiments, and Test Markets Part4: Gathering and Collecting Accurate Data 9 Sampling: Theory andDesign 10 Sampling: Methods and Planning 11 Overview of Measurement:Construct Development and Scale Measurement 12 Attitude ScaleMeasurements Used in Marketing Research 13 Questionnaire Designand Issues Part 5: Data Preparation, Analysis, and Reporting the Results14 Coding, Editing, and Preparing Data for Analysis 15 Data Analysis:Testing for Significant Differences 16 Data Analysis: Testing for Association17 Data Analysis: Multivariate Techniques for the Research Process18 Preparing the Marketing Research Report and PresentationNEWConsumer BehaviorMarketingCONSUMER BEHAVIOR8th EditionBy Paul Peter, University of Wisconsin-Madison and Jerry Olson,Olson Zaltman Associates2008 (January 2007) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352985-1 / MHID: 0-07-352985-0Website: http://www.mhhe.com/peter08This book is a strategic look at consumer behavior in order toguide successful marketing activities. The Wheel of ConsumerAnalysis is the organizing factor in the book. The four majorparts of the wheel are consumer affect and cognition, consumerbehavior, consumer environment, and marketing strategy. Eachof these components is the topic of one of the four major sectionsin the book.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Coverage of Ethics. Increased and integrated coverage of Ethics forcesstudents to think more deeply about the dilemmas facing marketingmanagers.• Chapter Openers. All new or updated chapter opening vignettesdemonstrate real-world scenarios that involve consumer behavior whichallow students to think through their decisions step-by-step.• New cases. Approximately 2/3 of the cases in the book are eithernew or updated and provide additional illustrations of the conceptbeing reviewed. Presentation will better capture student attention andwill help to reinforce the concepts learned.FEATURES• Wheel of Consumer Analysis. First appearing in Section One, TheWheel of Consumer Analysis is a powerful tool that presents a cognitiveprocessing model of consumer decision making to the student, that notonly organizes consumer behavior knowledge (and the book), but alsohelps the student understand consumers and guides the developmentof successful marketing strategies.• Real-life examples. “Highlights” are longer examples within eachchapter that show the relevance of concepts in a real-life example of amarketing strategy and increase student interest in the material.• Key Terms and Concepts. Each chapter includes a list of key termsand concepts and the page on which they are discussed at the end ofthe chapter to facilitate study of the material. These terms and conceptsare also boldfaced within the chapter text.• Marketing Strategy in Action Cases. Focus more in-depth on consumeranalysis issues facing real companies. Discussion questions accompanyingeach case can be used for class discussion or as a writingassignment.165HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16510/5/2006 1:42:49 PM

MarketingCONTENTSThe Role of Marketing in Developing Successful Business Strategies1 The Marketing Management Process 2 The Marketing Impliacationof Corporate and Business Strategies Market Opportunity Analysis3 Understanding Market Opportunities 4 Understanding ConsumerBuying Behavior 5 Understanding Organizational Markets and BuyingBehavior 6 Measuring Market Opportunities: Forecasting and MarketKnowledge 7 Targeting Attractive Market Segments 8 Differentiationand Positioning Developing Strategic Marketing Programs 9 BusinessStrategies: A Foundation for Marketing Program Decisions 10 ProductDecisions 11 Pricing Decisions 12 Distrubution Channel Decisions13 Integrated Promotion Decisions Strategic Marketing Programs forSelected Situations 14 Marketing Strategies for the New Economy 15Strategies for New and Growing Markets 16 Strategic Choices for Matureand Declining Markets Implementing and Controlling MarketingPrograms 17 Organizing and Planning Effective Implementation 18Measuring and Delivering Marketing PerformanceInternational EditionNEWCONSUMER BEHAVIORBuilding Marketing Strategy, 10th EditionBy Delbert I. Hawkins and Roger J. Best of University of Oregon andKenneth A. Coney, University of Alabama--Tuscaloosa and KennethA Coney (deceased)2007 (April 2006) / 832 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310137-8 / MHID: 0-07-310137-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326154-6 / MHID: 0-07-326154-8(with DDB Needham Data Disk)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110915-4 / MHID: 0-07-110915-3[IE with DDB Needham Data Disk]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hawkins10eConsumer Behavior, 10/e, by Hawkins, Best, & Coney offersbalanced coverage of consumer behavior including the psychological,social, and managerial implications. The new editionfeatures current and exciting examples that are tied into globaland technology consumer behavior issues and trends, a solidfoundation in marketing strategy, integrated coverage of ethical/socialissues and outlines the consumer decision process.This text is known for its ability to link topics back to marketingdecision-making and strategic planning which gives studentsthe foundation to understanding consumer behavior which willmake them better consumers and better marketers.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New Author—David Mothersbaugh is now on the team and hasbreathed new life into this edition. Adding to the strong foundation of thebook, David has dedicated much of his efforts to livening up the materialwith fresh new examples, terms, hot topics, and current trends.• Opening Vignettes—Each chapter begins with a practical examplethat introduces the material in the chapter. These involve situations inwhich businesses, government units, or ¬nonprofit organizations haveused or misused consumer behavior principles. Approximately 50% ofthese are new to this edition.• Consumer Insights—These boxed discussions provide an in-depthlook at a particularly interesting consumer study or marketing practice.Each has several questions with it that are designed to encourage criticalthinking by the students. Many of these have been revised and updatedfor the 10th edition.• Fresh New Design—The color palette for 10/e is more current witha lighter feel. Not only is the new design pleasant aesthetically, but italso serves a functional purpose as well. For example, color tabs havebeen added to indicate part and end of part cases.FEATURES• Cases: The cases in this edition highlight the most current trendsand development in consumer behavior. They generate classroomdiscussion, help students apply what they’ve learned from the chaptermaterials and show consumer behavior in practice.• More Global Examples: This edition has more global examplesthroughout the text and several of the cases are devoted to global issuesto give students a balanced look at consumer behavior here andabroad and to analyze similarities and differences between US andglobal markets.• Increased Internet Integration: Examples of the Internet and its impacton consumer behavior have been increased throughout the text. Theimpact the Internet has on buyer behavior is especially significant andis explored this in detail through current, relevant examples to illustrateits power and importance in the consumer behavior realm.• DDB Needham Lifestyle Data Analyses: Each relevant chapter poses aseries of questions that require students to analyze data from the annualDDB Needham Lifestyle survey. These data are available in spreadsheetformat on the disk that accompanies this text. These exercises increasestudents’ data analysis skills as well as their understanding of consumer¬behavior.• Integrated Coverage Ethical/Social Issues: Marketers face numerousethical issues as they apply their understanding of consumer behaviorin the marketplace. The authors describe and discuss many of theseissues. In addition, Chapter 20 is devoted to the consumerism movementand the regulation of marketing practice. Several of the cases arealso focused on ethical or ¬regulatory issues, including all of the casesfollowing Part Six.• International Examples: As with past editions, the authors alwaysinclude a solid balance of international examples throughout, specificallyin Chapter 2, and in several of the cases. These examples givethe students an opportunity to see how cultures impact consumerbehavior.• Internet Exercises: The Internet is a major source of data on consumerbehavior and an excellent way for marketers to use their knowledge ofconsumer behavior to influence consumers. A section at the end of eachchapter has Internet assignments. These serve two purposes: to teachstudents how to use the Internet as a research tool to learn about consumersand consumer behavior and to enhance students’ understanding ofhow marketers are approaching consumers using this medium.• Application Activities: The final learning aid at the end of eachchapter is a set of application exercises-they range in complexity fromshort evening assignments to term projects. The student utilizes chaptermaterial in conjunction with external activities such as visiting stores toobserve point- of purchase displays, interviewing customers or managers,or evaluating television ads.• Application Activities: The final learning aid at the end of eachchapter is a set of application exercises-they range in complexity fromshort evening assignments to term projects. The student utilizes chaptermaterial in conjunction with external activities such as visiting stores toobserve point- of purchase displays, interviewing customers or managers,or evaluating television ads.• Four-Color Illustrations: Print ads, Web pages, storyboards, and photosof point-of-purchase displays and packages appear throughout thetext. Each is directly linked to the text material both by text referencesto each illustration and by the descriptive comments that accompanyeach illustration.• Review Questions: Students can test their comprehension of chapterkey terms and concepts.• Discussion Questions: These questions can serve as in-class activitiesor outside studying and have students apply their knowledge toconsumer behavior situations.166HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16610/5/2006 1:42:49 PM

MarketingCONTENTSBrief Contents. Part One Introduction. Chapter 1 Consumer Behaviorand Marketing Strategy. Part Two External Influences. Chapter2 Cross-Cultural Variations in Consumer Behavior. Chapter 3 TheChanging American Society: Values. Chapter 4 The Changing AmericanSociety: Demographics and Social Stratification. Chapter 5 The ChangingAmerican Society: Subcultures. Chapter 6 The American Society:Families and Households. Chapter 7 Group Influences on ConsumerBehavior. Part Two Cases Cases 2–1 through 2–9. Part Three InternalInfluences. Chapter 8 Perception. Chapter 9 Learning, Memory, andProduct Positioning. Chapter 10 Motivation, Personality, and Emotion.Chapter 11 Attitudes and Influencing Attitudes. Chapter 12 Self-Conceptand Lifestyle. Part Three Cases Cases 3–1 through 3–10. Part FourConsumer Decision Process. Chapter 13 Situational Influences. Chapter14 Consumer Decision Process and Problem Recognition. Chapter 15Information Search. Chapter 16 Alternative Evaluation and Selection.Chapter 17 Outlet Selection and Purchase. Chapter 18 PostpurchaseProcesses, Customer Satisfaction, and Customer Commitment. Part FourCases Cases 4–1 through 4–8. Part Five Organizations as Consumers.Chapter 19 Organizational Buyer Behavior. Part Five Cases Cases 5–1and 5–2. Part Six Consumer Behavior and Marketing Regulation.Chapter 20 Marketing Regulation and Consumer Behavior. Part SixCases Cases 6–1 and 6–2. Appendix A Consumer Research Methods.Appendix B Consumer Behavior Audit. IndexesCONSUMER BEHAVIOURBy Karen Webb, Western Sydney Institute of TAFE2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471343-3 / MHID: 0-07-471343-4McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: www.mhhe.com/au/webbKaren Webb’s Consumer Behaviour is a hands-on, practicaltext exploring the individual, social and lifestyle influences onconsumer motivation and using this information to help assessand devise marketing strategies. Consumer Behaviour is theonly buyer-behaviour text for TAFE students that is structuredaround the VET Training Package.CONTENTSChapter 1 Buyer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Chapter 2 MarketSegmentation and the Marketing Environment Chapter 3 Consumerdecision making process Chapter 4 Organisational buying behaviourChapter 5 Perception and information processing Chapter 6 Learningand memory Chapter 7 Personality Chapter 8 Motivation and emotionChapter 9 Attitudes Chapter 10 Lifestyles, values, and culture Chapter11 Groups, Families and households Chapter 12 Situational influencesChapter 13 Legal and ethical issues / Glossary / IndexInternational EditionNEWCONSUMER BEHAVIOREnhanced Edition, 4th EditionBy Cathy Neal, Queensland University of Technology, PascaleQuester, University of Adelaide and Del Hawkins, University ofOregon2006 (May 2006)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471693-9 / MHID: 0-07-471693-XMcGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: http://www.mhhe.com/au/neal4eConsumer Behaviour, the market leading text by Cathy Nealand Pascale Quester, is now even more current, more livelyand more relevant. This new Enhanced edition now offers aNEW 32 page section up front that hosts contemporary hottopics in areas such as: culture and consumption, childrenand consumption, subcultures and consumption, phishing andmore. Specifically created to meet the needs of contemporaryusers interested in presenting their students with the latest developmentsin the field, this enhanced edition includes a newcapstone case and several new cases from New Zealand. Theenhanced material builds on the existing 4th edition that hascome to be recognised for its fresh and contemporary design,features that engage students and enhance their comprehensionof the key concepts. The strategic and decision-making focusof this text is retained.CONTENTS1 Hot topics 2 Case collection: Capstone case / New Zealand cases /Classroom cases / Introduction Chapter 1 Consumer behaviour andmarketing strategy 3 Part 1 Consumer decision process Chapter 2 Situationalinfluences Chapter 3 Problem recognition Chapter 4 Informationsearch Chapter 5 Evaluating and selecting alternatives Chapter 6 Outletselection and purchase Chapter 7 Postpurchase processes, customersatisfaction and consumer loyalty Part 2 Internal influences Chapter8 Perception Chapter 9 Learning and memory Chapter 10 Motivation,personality and emotion Chapter 11 Attitude and attitude change Part3 External influences Chapter 12 Australian society: demographics andlifestyles Chapter 13 Household structure and consumption behaviourChapter 14 Group influence and communication Chapter 15 Socialclass Chapter 16 Culture and cross-cultural variations in consumerbehaviour Part 4 Contemporary topics in consumer behaviour Chapter17 Business-to-business buying behaviour Chapter 18 Consumersand societyInternational EditionCONSUMERS2nd EditionBy Eric Arnould and Linda Price of University of Nebraska—Lincolnand George M. Zinkhan, University of Georgia2004 / 896 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-253714-7 / MHID: 0-07-253714-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124709-2 / MHID: 0-07-124709-2 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/arnould04Consumers, 2/e, by Arnould, Price and Zinkhan, analyses howand why consumers purchase and consume the way they do.It outlines both the individual and social factors that influencethese processes. The text presents a global, behavioral, andmulti-disciplinary coverage of consumer behavior. Consumersis praised as the most current text in the field in the areas oftechnology, research, and illustrative examples.CONTENTSPart 1: An Overview of Consumer Behavior 1 Introduction:The Worldof Consumers 2 The Changing World of Consumption 3 The Meaningand Nature of Culture 4 Consumption Meanings Part 2: MarketingDecisions and Consumer Behavior 5 Consumer Behaviors and MarketingStrategies 6 Learning About Consumers Part 3: Consumer DecisionMaking and Acquisition 7 Consumer Motives, Goals, and Involvement 8Perception: Worlds of Sensations 9 Experience, Learning and Knowledge10 Consumer Attitudes, Judgements, and Decisions 11 Purchase andAlternatives to Purchase Part 4: Social Context and Consumption 12Economic and Social Segments 13 Organizational and Household Behaviors14 Interpersonal Influence 15 Consumer Attitudes and Decisions16 Acquiring Things Part 5: Postacquistion 17 Consumer Innovation18 Consumer Satisfaction 19 Disposal, Recycling and Reuse167HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16710/5/2006 1:42:49 PM

MarketingMarketing Management- TextInternational EditionNEWMARKETING MANAGEMENTA Strategic Decision-Making Approach, 6th EditionBy John Mullins, University of Denver, Orville Walker, University ofMinnesota and Harper Boyd (deceased)2008 (October 2006) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352982-0 / MHID: 0-07-352982-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110109-7 / MHID: 0-07-110109-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com.mullins08Marketing Management: A Strategic Decision-Making Approach6th Edition concentrates on strategic decision making. This approachsets Mullins apart from other texts which place greateremphasis on description of marketing phenomena rather thanon the strategic and tactical marketing decisions that managersand entrepreneurs must make each and every day. This 6thEdition continues to be the most current and internet-savvybook available, injecting the latest developments in internetbasedcommunication and distribution technology into everychapter. Also, an entire chapter (Chapter 15) is devoted to thedevelopment of marketing strategies for the new economy. Theauthor team’s rich entrepreneurial, marketing management, andconsulting experience spans a broad variety of manufacturing,service, software, and distribution industries provides an abundanceof real-world, global perspectives.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Coverage of New Technology. Chapter 14 has been extensivelyupdated to bring to this edition the latest developments in Web-basedmarketing including new technologies like RSS feeds and other newwrinkles that have emerged in what’s now loosely called Web 2.0. Asthe Web continues to evolve, keeping students (this is the easier part, asthe changes are being led by their generation) and instructors (the moredifficult part!) current on such developments is simply essential.• New Sequencing of Topics. We’ve moved our overview of theproduct life cycle and its strategic implications to Section Four, where itserves as the foundation for Chapters 15 and 16, which examine marketingstrategies for product-markets in different stages of development.• New Examples. Many of the new examples were chosen for theexpress purpose of increasing the book’s global focus and internationalperspective. Extensive effort was made to find and incorporate examplesof marketing strategies and actions from firms and not-for-profit organizationsaround the world, not just in the United States. Even many of theextensive case vignettes that open each chapter now focus on firms inEurope, Asian and Africa.• Integrated Material. The Authors have combined the two chaptersdealing with the market environment, industry, and competitive analysis(Chapters 3 and 4 in the previous editions) into a single chapter called“Understanding Market Opportunities” (Chapter 3 in this 6th edition).By bringing together and integrating material dealing with variousaspects of the external environment, this new chapter provides a morecomprehensive framework for evaluating the attractiveness of marketsand industries at the macro and micro levels.FEATURES• A Focus on Strategic Decision Making. This book’s focus on strategicdecision making sets it apart from other texts that place greateremphasis on description of marketing phenomena than on the strategicand tactical marketing decisions that managers and entrepreneurs makeeach and every day.• Web-Savvy Insights. This book brings a realistic and informedperspective to an important question: “Has the advent of the Internetchanged all of the rules?” Throughout the book, the authors integrateexamples of new-economy companies-both successful and otherwise-toshow how both yesterday’s and today’s marketing tools and decisionframeworks can most effectively be applied.• A Real World Global Perspective. Along with an academic perspective,the authors of this book bring a real world perspective to this textthat is unmatched in this market space. John Mullins brings to thisbook 20 years of executive experience in the retailing industry in theUnited States, including three entrepreneurial companies. John nowworks in Europe at the London Business School, where he draws onthe perspectives of MBA students and executive education participantsfrom more than 60 countries to inform this book with the realities ofbuilding businesses in today’s global economy. Orv Walker spent mostof his career at the Carlson School of Management at the Universityof Minnesota, where he studied and worked with some of the world’sleading consumer goods marketers and won the marketing discipline’smost prestigious awards for his research. He now spends much of histime as a vintner in the rolling hills of Wisconsin.CONTENTSSection One: The Role of Marketing in Developing Successful businessStrategies Chapter 1 The Marketing Management Process Chapter 2 TheMarketing Implications of Corporate and Business Strategies SectionTwo: Market Opportunity Analysis Chapter 3 Understanding MarketOpportunities Chapter 4 Understanding Consumer Buying BehaviorChapter 5 Understanding Organizational Markets and Buying BehaviorChapter 6 Measuring Market Opportunities: Forecasting and MarketingKnowledge Chapter 7 Targeting Attractive Market Segments Chapter8 Differentiation and Positioning Section Three: Developing StrategicMarketing Programs Chapter 9 Business Strategies: A Foundation forMarketing Program Decisions Chapter 10 Product Decisions Chapter 11Pricing Decisions Chapter 12 Distribution Channel Decisions Chapter13 Integrated Promotion Decisions Section Four: Strategic MarketingPrograms for Selected Situations Chapter 14 Marketing Strategies for theNew Economy Chapter 15 Strategies for the New and Growing MarketsChapter 16 Strategic Choices for Mature and Declining Markets SectionFive: Implementing and Controlling Marketing Programs Chapter17 Organizing and Planning for Effective Implementation Chapter 18Measuring and Delivering Marketing PerformanceInternational EditionPREFACE TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT10th EditionBy J Paul Peter, University of Wisconsin—Madison and James H.Donnelly, University of Kentucky—Lexington2006 / 320 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296216-1 / MHID: 0-07-296216-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-111635-0 / MHID: 0-07-111635-4 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/peterdon31nelly06Preface to Marketing Management, 10/e, by Peter and Donnelly,is praised in the market for its organization, format, clarity,brevity and flexibility. The text serves as an overview forcritical issues in marketing management. Its brief, inexpensive,paperback format makes it a perfect fit for instructors who assigncases, readings, simulations or offer modules on marketingmanagement for MBA students. The text also works in coursesthat implement a cross-functional curriculum where the studentsare required to purchase several texts.CONTENTSSection I: Essentials of Marketing Management Part A: IntroductionChapter One: Strategic Planning and the Marketing Management ProcessPart B: Marketing Information, Research, and Understanding the TargetMarket Chapter Two: Marketing Research: Process and Systems for DecisionMaking Chapter Three: Consumer Behavior Appendix: SelectedConsumer Behavior Data Sources Chapter Four: Business, Government,and Institutional Buying Chapter Five: Market Segmentation Part C:168HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16810/5/2006 1:42:50 PM

MarketingThe Marketing Mix Chapter Six: Product Strategy Chapter Seven: NewProduct Planning and Development Chapter Eight: Integrated MarketingCommunications: Advertising, Sales Promotion, Public Relations,and Direct Marketing Appendix: Major Federal Agencies Involved inControl of Advertising Chapter Nine: Personal Selling, RelationshipBuilding, and Sales Management Chapter Ten: Distribution StrategyChapter Eleven Pricing Strategy Part D: Marketing in Special FieldsChapter Twelve: The Marketing of Services Chapter Thirteen: GlobalMarketing Section II: Analyzing Market Problems and Cases SectionIII: Financial Analysis for Marketing Decisions Section IV: DevelopingMarketing Plans Notes IndexInternational EditionTHE NEW POSITIONINGThe Battle for Your Mind EscalatesBy Jack Trout, and Steve Rivkin1997 / 173 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-065328-3 / MHID: 0-07-065328-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114779-8 / MHID: 0-07-114779-9 [IE]A Professional Reference Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)CONTENTSPart 1. Understanding the Mind. Chapter 1: Minds can’t Cope Chapter2: Minds are Limited Chapter 3: Minds Hate Confusion Chapter 4:Minds are Insecure Chapter 5: Minds Don’t Change Chapter 6: MindsCan’t Lose Focus Part 2. Dealing with Change. Chapter 7. Repositioning:Where Positioning is at Chapter 8. Repositioning a SoftwareCompany Chapter 9. Repositioning an Ice Cream Company Chapter10. Repositioning an Accounting Firm Chapter 11. RepositioningPolitical CandidatesMarketing Management- Text & CasesInternational EditionNEWMARKETING MANAGEMENT8th EditionBy J. Paul Peter, University of Wisconsin — Madison and James H.Donnelly, Jr, University of Kentucky—Lexington2007 (February 2006) / 896 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313763-6 / MHID: 0-07-313763-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110722-8 / MHID: 0-07-110722-3 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/peterdonelly8eMarketing Management: Knowledge and Skills, 8/e, by Peterand Donnelly, serves an overview for critical issues in marketingmanagement. The text strives to enhance knowledge of marketingmanagement and advance student skills so they can developand maintain successful marketing strategies. The text does thisthrough comprehensive text chapters that analyze that marketingprocess and gives students the foundation needed for successin marketing management and through 40 cases (12 of themnew, many others updated) that go beyond traditional marketingprinciples and focus on the role of marketing in cross-functionalbusiness and organization strategies.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New Cases: 12 of the 40 cases are new. Among those, companieslike eBay, Yum! Brands, and Mountain Dew are profiled. All the casesfeature domestic and global companies, high-tech companies, consumerand organizational products, small and large businesses, products andservices, and manufacturers and channel members-all chosen to highlightmarketing management principles and strategies in action. Boththe new and “classic” cases feature themes relevant to the marketingmanager: global, technology, ethics, and services, strategic partnerships,creativity, vision, values, relationship marketing.• New Videos: Approximately 50% of the video segments are brandnew for this edition. The management practices of companies like Wal-Mart and eBay are showcased, giving students a practical interpretationof the concepts in the book.FEATURES• New and Revised Marketing Highlights boxes throughout the text.These boxes emphasize important information and handy tools foranalyzing marketing cases and problems that allows students to applytext concepts to real world situations.• Revised Chapter 1: “ Strategic Planning and the Marketing ManagementProcess” includes new mission statement examples, a discussionof organizational strategies, and updated highlights introduce the studentto the marketing management process and outline what marketingmanagers must manage in order to be effective.• Chapter 3 is reorganized in order to better examine Social Marketing,and Situational and Psychological influences before discussingconsumer decision-making. This chapter also features a new sectionon the Psychological Influences on Consumer Decision Making.These topics emphasize to the student how critical it is to discover andunderstand consumer needs in order to develop a marketing mix thatsatisfies those needs.• Re-titled Chapter 4: “Business, Government, and Institutional Buying”reflect changes in the organizational buying process with particularemphasis on vendor analysis and organizational purchasing policies andprocedures. This coupled with a new section on “Categories of OrganizationalBuyers” illustrates to students how critical it is to understand theinfluences and process organizations use determine their needs.• Chapter 6 features a new discussion of product mix and productline. This discussion is framed by the definition and classification ofproducts, the importance of product quality and value, and the nature ofproduct mix and product lines, as well as branding and packaging. Theunderstanding of these elements are critical to marketing strategy-if youdon’t sell the right products and services, the company will fail.• “Integrated Marketing Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotion,Public Relations, and Direct Marketing” is the new Chapter 8.This chapter highlights new discussions of public relations and directmarketing and includes a new discussion of the promotion mix andan expanded discussion of integrated marketing communications. Anew discussion of sales promotion and push vs pull marketing roundsout this chapter to give a complete analysis of what IMC is and howall aspects of the promotions mix works together toward the goal ofbranding and brand relationships.• Re-titled Chapter 9: “Personal Selling, Relationship Management, andSales Management” reflects the expansion of the personal selling discussionand the new discussions on technology, sales force objectives,and the evolution of personal selling shows the student how personalselling is crucial to the promotion mix and how organizations rely onsales and relationship management to prosper and grow.• Expanded coverage of electronic commerce in Chapter 10 emphasizesthe advantages and disadvantages for marketers in this fastest growingsegment of non-store retailing and students will gain an understandingof this established alternative for marketing goods and services.• Chapter 13 contains a new discussion on organizing the multinationalfirm and a new discussion on global branding, that, along with the restof the chapter, introduce the student to the opportunities, problems,and challenges involved in global marketing169HED 2007 Marketing.indd 16910/5/2006 1:42:50 PM

Marketing• Analysis of Cross-Functional Teams: Each chapter has cross-functionalexamples, coverage and topics woven throughout the text that reflectswhat’s happening in today’s business world. The text demonstrateshow teams of people representing all areas of business work togetherto solve problems and create business strategies. Example coverage ofcross-functional teams can be seen in Chapter 1 (Strategic Planning andthe Marketing Management Process), Chapter 6 (the Product Managementdiscussion), Chapter 9 (Personal Selling).• Coverage of Marketing Research: This expanded coverage offers anemphasis on both qualitative and quantitative research methods. Marketinginformation systems and sources of marketing research informationare also discussed. Marketing managers require current, reliable, anduseful information to make effective decisions and need to exploit opportunitiesand avoid mistakes in order to survive and be profitable.• Market Segmentation Discussion: The text presents the developmentof a comprehensive list of segmentation bases, additional discussionof geo-demographic segmentation, and expanded coverage of productpositioning so the student can utilize this information and developsuccessful marketing programs.• Integrated Social and Ethical Dimensions of Marketing: Social andEthical Dimensions of Marketing in integrated throughout the text togive understanding of why and how consumers make decisions in orderto develop successful marketing strategies.• How to Analyze Marketing Problems and Cases: Section II providesthe students with an approach on how to analyze, write and presentcase analysis so the student can focus on the role of marketing in crossfunctionalbusiness and organization strategies.• Coverage of Financial Tools Used in Decision-Making: Section IIIcovers important financial calculations that are helpful to students inevaluating the financial position of the firm.• Coverage of Developing Marketing Plans: Section IV presents amarketing plan outline and hints for creating a marketing strategy.After taking marketing management, students should be able to doone thing and do it very well: construct a quality marketing plan forany product or service.• Secondary Data Sources: Section V provides a bibliography of numerousrelevant secondary sources that can be used as a resource forthe analysis of many types of marketing problems. This is important forstudents as it increases the depth of case analysis as well as exposesstudents to important secondary sources that they can make use of intheir careers.• E-Commerce topics integrated throughout the book underscore theimportance of the Internet in the management of marketing plans andshows students how they must manage the Internet in order to findeffective and efficient means of making the business meet the needsof its customers.CONTENTSSection I Essentials of Marketing Management. Part A Introduction.Chapter One Strategic Planning and the Marketing Management Process.Part B Marketing Information, Research, and Understanding theTarget Market. Chapter Two Marketing Research: Process and Systemsfor Decision Making. Chapter Three Consumer Behavior. Chapter FourBusiness, Government, and Institutional Buying. Chapter Five MarketSegmentation. Part C The Marketing Mix. Chapter Six Product Strategy.Chapter Seven New Product Planning and Development. Chapter EightIntegrated Marketing Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotion,Public Relations, and Direct Marketing. Chapter Nine Personal Selling,Relationship Building, and Sales Management. Chapter Ten DistributionStrategy. Chapter Eleven Pricing Strategy. Part D Marketing in SpecialFields. Chapter Twelve The Marketing of Services. Chapter ThirteenGlobal Marketing. Section II Analyzing Marketing Problems and Cases.Section III Financial Analysis for Marketing Decisions. Section IV InternetExercises and Sources of Marketing Information. Part A InternetExercises. Part B Annotated Bibliography of Major Online DatabasesUsed in Marketing. Section V Marketing Management Cases. CaseGroup A Market Opportunity Analysis. Case Group B Product Strategy.Case Group C Promotion Strategy. Case Group D Distribution Strategy.Case Group E Pricing Strategy. Case Group F Social and Ethical Issues inMarketing Management. Section VI Strategic Marketing Cases. SectionVII Developing Marketing PlansInternational EditionMARKETING MANAGEMENTText and CasesBy Rajiv Lal, Harvard Business School, John A Quelch, London BusinessSchool and V Kasturi Rangan of Harvard Business School2005 / 832 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296762-3 / MHID: 0-07-296762-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124218-9 / MHID: 0-07-124218-X [IE]Marketing Management Text and Cases, 1/e includes a newcollection of cases from Harvard Business School. HBS sets thestandard for effective case writing and teaching and provideshere the latest cases in Marketing Management.CONTENTSI Introduction 1. Marketing Strategy - An Overview 2. Callaway GolfCompany 3. Tesco Plc II Creating Value 4. Creating Value 5. FreemarketsOnLine 6. Xerox: Book-In-Time 7. Freeport Studio 8. Omnitel ProntoItalia III Choosing Customers 9. Target Market Selection and ProductPositioning 10. Warner-Lambert Ireland: Niconil 11. TIVO 12. NewBeetle 13. Aqualisa Quartz: Simply a Better Shower 14. Documentum,Inc. IV Communicating Value 15. Integrated Marketing Communications16. Guru.com 17. Colgate-Palmolive Company: The PrecisionToothbrush 18. Launching the BMW Z3 Roadster 19. Mountain Dew:Selecting New Creative V Going to Market 20. Going to Market 21. RingMedical 22. HP Consumer Products Business Organization: DistributingPrinters via the Internet 23. Goodyear: The Aquatred Launch 24.Merrill Lynch: Integrated Choice 25. Avon.com (A) VI Capturing Value26. Pricing: A value Based Approach 27. Pricing and Market Makingon the Internet 28. Coca-Cola’s New Vending Machine (A): Pricing ToCapture Value, or Not? 29. Tweeter etc. 30. DHL Worldwide Express VIIBranding 31. Brands and Branding 32. Charles Schwab Corp.: IntroducingA New Brand 33. Heineken N.V.: Global Branding and Advertising34. UNICEF 35. Steinway & Sons: Buying a Legend (A) VIII ManagingCustomers for Profits 36. Note on Customer Management 37. Fabtek(A) 38. Hunter Business Group: Team TBA 39. Harrah’s EntertainmentInc. IX Sustaining Value 40. Sustaining Value 41. Koc Holding: ArcelikWhite Goods 42. KONE: The MonoSpace Launch in Germany 43. H-E-B Own Brands 44. Zucomor S.A.: Global Competition in Argentina45. Dell - New HorizonsCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com170HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17010/5/2006 1:42:50 PM

MarketingMARKETING MANAGEMENT3rd EditionBy Rajan Saxena, Indian Institute of Management2005ISBN13: 978-0-07-059953- 6 / MHID: 0-07-059953-XTata McGraw-Hill TitleNEW TO THIS EDITIONThe revision has been motivated by changes which have taken placepost 2002, like diffusion of technology in rural markets, emergence oforganized retailing, growing emphasis on services, changing demographics,focus on rural markets, emphasis on eco-friendly products,WTO and so on...Three new chapters: 1. Retailing 2. Ecological Marketing 3. CustomerValueFour new case studies:•L’oreal--building a brand• Revamping Rasna•Airtel Magic--selling a service•Amway’s Indian network experience•Thoroughly rewritten chapter on Rural Marketing•The “Technology in marketing” theme has been strengthened•Detailed discussion on the upwardly mobile consumer on the affluencyladder scale•Comprehensive discussion on competition analysis--price wars andrecent work by Prahalad• Data updation, and wherever relevant projections upto 2007-2010CONTENTSMarketing Management: An Introduction / The Market Environment /Competition Analysis / Marketing Planning / Marketing research andInformation Systems / onsumer Behaviour: Understanding the buyer/ Organisational Buying Behaviour / Segmenting and Targetting theMarket / Market Measurement and Forecasting / Product Management/ New Product Decisions / Brand Equity / Pricing decisions / PromotionDecisions / Advertising Management / Sales Promotion / Personal Selling/ Managing the Sales Force / Managing the Distribution Function /Retailing / Direct Marketing / Marketing Strategy / Customer relationshipManagement / Marketing Organization / Marketing Performance andcontrol / Global Marketing / Customer Service / Service Marketing /Rural Marketing / Customer Value / Ecological Marketing / CASE STUD-IES / Western India Limited / Hi-Tech Systems Distributors Limited /HLL Jugger naut--The Dilemma of Growth / Marketing of Milk—Amul/ Service Standardisation / Jet Airways / Revamping Rasna--A MarketingOverhaul Saga / L’Oreal: Building a Global Cosmetci Brand /Airtel-Selling a Prepaid Cellphone Service / Amways’s Indian NetworkMarketing ExperienceInternational EditionMARKETING MANAGEMENTText and CasesBy John A Quelch, Robert Dolan, Harvard Business School, andThomas Kosnik1993 / 864 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-10955-9 / MHID: 0-256-10955-9(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115459-8 / MHID: 0-07-115459-0 [IE]CONTENTSOverview / An Introduction To Cases / An Introduction To Marketing /Basic Quantitative Analysis For Marketing / I. THE MARKETING MIX/ Introduction / The Marketing Mix / Hurricane Island Outward BoundSchool / Dominion Motors & Controls Ltd. / Mem Company Inc. /Communications Policy / Communications Policy / APPENDIX A. MassCommunications / Sunkist Growers Inc. / Reebok International Ltd. / TheMassachusetts Lottery / British Airways / APPENDIX B. Personal Selling/ Waters Chromatography Division: U.S Field Sales (A) / MCI TelecommunicationsCorporation: VNET (A) / Petite Playthings,Inc.1984 / PricingPolicy / Pricing Policy / Computron, Inc. / Cumberland Metal Industries:Engineered Products Division, 1980 / Federated Industries (A) / HartmanLuggage Company:Price Promotion Policy / Workbench PricingStrategy / Product Policy / Product Policy / Suzuki Samurai / Ford MotorCompany: The Product Warranty Program (A) / The Black & DeckerCorporation / Household Products Group: Brand Transition / Proctor &Gamble: Lenor / Chipman-Union, Inc.: Odor-Eaters Socks / DistributionPolicy / Distribution Policy / Lotus Development Corporation / KraftFood Service / Murrayhill,Inc. / U.S Pioneer Electronics Corporation /Pizza Hut, Inc. / II. THE MARKETING PROCESS / Marketing Research/ Marketing Research / Xerox Corporation:The Customer SatisfactionProgram / Boston Fights Drugs (A) / Archdiocese of New York / ChemicalBank: The Pronto System / Marketing Strategy Formulation / MarketingStrategy Formulation / Note On the Motorcycle Industry-1975 / Deereand Company: Industrial / Equipment Operations / Sealed Air Corporations/ Impacts of Eliminating CFCs / Microsoft Introduction: The Introductionof Microsoft Works / Cigna Worldwide / Marketing Planning /Marketing Planning / Perkin-Elmer: Data Systems Group / ScandinavianAirline Systems SAS (A) / Titanium Industries,Inc. :Titanium FabricationsDivision (A) / Cheesebrough-Pond’s Inc.: Vaseline Petroleum Jelly /Marketing Organization and Implementation / Marketing Organizationand Implementation / General Foods Corporation: The Product ManagementSystem / Regency Facsimile,Inc. / IBM Innovations: Introduction ofthe PS/2 / Black & Decker Corporation: Spacemaker Plus Coffee Maker(A) / Rossin, Greenberg, Seronick & Hill, Inc. (A) / CONCLUSION /Marketing Strategy an Overview / IDS Financial Services / Lifespan Inc.:Abbott Northwestern Hospital / Loctite Corporation: Industrial ProductsGroup / APPENDICES / Legal Restrictions on Marketing Management/ Glossary of Marketing TermsMarketing Management CasesINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sgInternational EditionMARKETING MANAGEMENT: CASESBy Robert Dolan, Havard Business School2002 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-249980-3 / MHID: 0-07-249980-X(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112328-0 / MHID: 0-07-112328-8 [IE]CONTENTSPart I: Introduction to the Marketing Process Part II. Product Policy PartIII. Going to Market Part IV. Integrated Marketing CommunicationsPart V. Pricing Policy171HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17110/5/2006 1:42:50 PM

MarketingMarketing Management- SoftwareSIMSERIES: SIMMARKETING MANAGEMENTBy Nentl2004 / 75 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-283969-2 / MHID: 0-07-283969-4(Student CD/Manual)Website: http://mhhe.com/business/marketing/simseries_websiteTHE SIM SERIES is a set of five CD-based simulation modules(each accompanied by a print manual) that can be packagedseparately or as a set with any marketing, sales, or managementtext and are designed to teach strategic decision making whilereinforcing marketing and sales principles. Each module usestoday’s hottest marketing and financial analytics to underscorethe importance of making quality management decisions. Allof the modules stress the importance of optimizing short-termrevenue gains and long-term profitability (customer lifetimevalue). Students will understand the challenge of aligning shorttermand long-term goals, and recognize when these goals canbe in conflict. The most unique selling feature of the modulesand the hallmark of the Sim Series is The PhisoTech Story. Eachsimulation features the continuing saga of PhisoTech, a nicheplayer in the pharmaceutical industry, and its cast of engagingand sometimes eccentric characters. The PhisoTech Story isboth entertaining and compelling, and is written specificallyto enhance the cognitive involvement of students and inspirecreative, analytical decision making.FEATURES• Teaches today’s most important marketing and financial analytics tohelp students make quality, strategic decisions.• An MS Excel Platform. The simulations are built on the familiarMSExcel platform for broad distribution and universal appeal.• Ease of Use. While powered by a complex mathematical engine, thesimulation screens are intuitive and easy to navigate. The main focus ison developing analysis and strategy skills for students, not on enhancingtheir computer skills.• Easy to Grasp. The data used in the simulation is typical order datathat has been aggregated into a robust model of analyses. The overallconcepts are easy to grasp and the reporting output generated from thesimulation is easy to comprehend, but immensely challenging in itsstrategic implications.• SIMMarketing Management with Student CD / Manual: 0072839694(Instructor’s CD /Annotated Student Manual—0072839139)• This simulation addresses the array of issues within the marketingdiscipline. Decisions that are related to market segmentation, marketpenetration strategies, utilizing a BSG matrix or facsimile, and balancingvarious aspects of the administration and promotional budgets to achievemarketing objectives are included. Pricing issues and financial analysisare also addressed in the decisions. This simulation prominently featuresthe Customer Relationship Management (CRM) paradigm.• SIMSales Management with Student CD/Manual: 0072839368 (Instructor’sCD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839082)• This simulation teaches students how to manage a sales force usingfinancial analytics such as sales revenue, contribution income and longtermprofitability. Some of the questions addressed in this module arehow to achieve management goals and objectives while staying withinbudget, how to design the right combination of benefits and compensationto help the sales force make quota, who to hire, who to fire, andhow to use incentives for motivation.• This simulation is wrapped around Customer Relationship Management(CRM) principles; it teaches students how to leverage databasetechnology in the marketplace. Students learn how to use a databasefor customized marketing strategies based on a customer’s value to thecompany, and how to design database tables in order to execute differentpromotional tactics. Predictive modeling, data transformation, andother general database issues will be reviewed. Students learn aboutthe economics of utilizing in-house marketing and sales promotionresources vs. partnering with outside resources such as ad agencies orprinting and promotions firms with digital marketing capabilities.• SIMSell with Student CD/Manual: 007283999X (Instructor’sCD/Annotated Student Manual-0072839082. The first simulation inthe SIMSeries, this module teaches students about the importance ofunderstanding a customer’s value to the company in allocating timeand resources. Using Customer Relationship Management (CRM) andrelationship selling principles, SimSell also teaches about the costs toservice accounts, as well as the cost and benefit of professional trainingand development seminars.• SIMMarketing Research with Student CD/Manual: 0072839686(Instructor’s CD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839112)• This simulation covers primary and secondary research methods,experimentation, observation, survey design, etc. It teaches students howto synthesize information to make pricing decisions, design promotionaldirectives, determine customer behavior and attitudes, etc. The practicalapplication of descriptive and inferential statistical methods in a businessand marketing setting is reinforced.Strategic Marketing - TextInternational EditionNEWSTRATEGIC MARKETINGA Practical ApproachBy Karel Jan Alsem, University of Gronigen, The Netherlands andDick Wittink, Yale University2007 (May 2006) / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-302586-5 / MHID: 0-07-302586-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124417-6 / MHID: 0-07-124417-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/alsem06This text is designed as a stand alone text in a Marketing Strategycourse with a focus on building customer value throughthe firm’s marketing activities. The author aims to indicate thespecific steps that comprise the strategic marketing planningprocess and how each of these steps should be implemented.The focus is on the activities that a company should performwithin the framework of strategic marketing. The book followsthe four-part division of evaluation, analysis, planning, andimplementation.FEATURES• A How-To Orientation: This book’s main concentration lies in itsability to support a student’s writing of a marketing plan for a brand.It has step by step decision making in each chapter in the order onewould conduct the steps when completing a plan.• A Focus On Customer Value: Delivering customer value is the purposeof good marketing strategy. Attention will be paid to the relationbetween customer value strategies and other functional areas withinthe firm such as finance, HRD, etc.,• SIMDatabase Marketing with Student CD/Manual: 0072839678(Instructor’s CD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839090172HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17210/5/2006 1:42:51 PM

Marketing• Logical Structure: The book is completely structured following thestrategic marketing planning process. Each chapter is one step in theplanning process and the first eight chapters contain a step-by-stepdescription of a SWOT analysis.CONTENTS1. The strategic marketing planning process 1.1. Introduction 1.1.1.Strategic planning 1.1.2. Strategic management 1.1.3. Strategic marketing1.2. The new marketing 1.2.1. Customer values 1.2.2. Relationshipmarketing 1.2.3. On-line marketing 1.2.4. The new strategic marketingplanning 1.2.5. Purpose of the book 1.3. Levels in an organization 1.4.Objectives and strategies 1.5. Sustainable competitive advantage andcustomer values 1.5.1. The 3 C-model 1.5.2. Sustainable competitiveadvantage 1.5.3. Customer value disciplines 1.6. The strategic marketingplanning process: an overview 2. Strategy review and market definition2.1. Introduction 2.2. Review of past mission, objectives and strategy2.2.1. Mission, identity and core competencies 2.2.2. Objectives 2.2.3.Marketing strategy 2.3. Market definition: defining current pmc’s 2.4.Market definition and competition 2.5. Dimensions of market definition3. Customer analysis 3.1. Introduction 3.2. Framework for customeranalysis 3.3. Customer profitability analysis 3.3.1. Customer satisfactionand retention 3.3.2. Loyal and switching customers 3.3.3. Profitability ofindividual customers 3.4. The multi attribute model 3.4.1. Brand equity3.4.2. Importance of product attributes and key success factors 3.4.3.Perceptions of brand positions on attributes 3.4.4. Emotional benefits3.5. Sources of consumer data 3.5.1. Introduction 3.5.2. Purchase andsurvey data 3.5.3. Segmentation systems 4. Internal analysis 4.1. Introduction4.2. Performance analysis (control) 4.2.1. Balanced Score Card4.2.2. Financial measures 4.2.3. Customer related measures 4.2.4. Othermeasures 4.3. Identifying strengths and weaknesses 4.3.1. Analysis ofstrengths and weaknesses 4.3.2. Core competencies 5. Competitoranalysis 5.1. Introduction 5.2. Objective and overview 5.3. Competitoridentification 5.3.1. Levels of competition 5.3.2. Identification methods5.3.3. Choice of a method 5.3.4. Selecting competitors 5.4. Assessingcompetitors’ current objectives 5.5. Assessing competitors’ currentstrategies 5.6. Key success factors and competitors’ strengths and weaknesses5.6.1. Identification of key success factors 5.6.2. Assessing thecompetitors’ strengths and weaknesses 5.6.3. Assessing relative strengthsand weaknesses 5.7. Predicting competitors’ future strategies 5.8. Thethreat of new competitors 5.9. Data sources 6. Industry attractivenessanalysis 6.1. Overview 6.2. Competitive analysis: industry and competitors6.3. Dimensions of an industry analysis 6.4. Environmentalanalysis 6.4.1. Overview 6.4.2. Demographic factors 6.4.3. Economicfactors 6.4.4. Social-cultural factors 6.4.5. Technological factors 6.4.6.Ecological factors 6.4.7. Political factors 6.4.8. Implementation of theenvironmental analysis 6.5. Aggregate market factors 6.5.1. Overview6.5.2. Market size 6.5.3. Market growth and product life cycle 6.5.4.Sales periodicity and seasonality 6.6. Industry structure 6.6.1. Introduction6.6.2. Industry profitability 6.6.3. Industry structure: the five-factormodel 6.7. Assessing market attractiveness 7. Distribution channel andsupplier analysis 7.1. Overview 7.2. Channel analysis at the macrolevel 7.3. Channel analysis at the meso level 7.3.1. Channel structure7.3.2. Intensity of brand distribution 7.4. Channel analysis at the microlevel 7.4.1. Market position of distributor 7.4.2. Brand position 7.4.3.Objectives and strategies of distributor 7.4.4. Strengths, weaknessesand future behavior of distributor 7.5. Internet (disintermediation)7.6. Supplier analysis 8. Other techniques for strategic analysis 8.1.Overview 8.2. SWOT-analysis 8.2.1. Objective and contents 8.2.2.Situation analysis 8.2.3. The SWOT-matrix 8.2.4. Formulating strategicoptions 8.2.5. Selecting a strategic option 8.2.6. SWOT-analysis inpractice 8.3. Portfolio-analysis 8.3.1. Objective and contents 8.3.2. TheGrowth-Share matrix 8.3.3. Multifactor Portfolio analysis: the businessscreen 8.3.4. Trajectory analysis 8.3.5. Limitations of portfolio matrixapproaches 8.3.6. Portfolio analysis in practice 8.4. Forecasting 8.4.1.Objective and contents 8.4.2. Overview of forecasting methods 8.4.3.Choosing forecasting methods 8.4.4. What is forecasting used for 8.4.5.Making forecasts 8.4.6. Forecasting in practice 8.5. Semi-causal models8.5.1. Objective and contents 8.5.2. Steps in the model-buildingprocess 8.5.3. Models in practice 8.6. Marketing information systems8.6.1. Objective and contents 8.6.2. Building a marketing informationsystem 8.6.3. Marketing information systems in practice 9. Corporateobjectives and strategies 9.1. Introduction 9.2. Setting objectives 9.3.Corporate objectives and strategies 9.3.1. Overview 9.3.2. Corporatemission and objectives 9.3.3. Corporate strategies: investment decisionsfor SBU’s 9.3.4. Corporate strategies: choosing a primary value discipline9.4. External growth: co-operative strategies 9.4.1. Internal andexternal growth 9.4.2. SWOT-analysis and co-operative strategies 9.4.3.Co-operative strategies in practice 9.5. Implications for other functionalareas 10. Marketing objectives and strategies 10.1. Introduction 10.2.Marketing objectives 10.3. Dimensions of marketing strategy 10.4. Segmentationand targeting 10.4.1. Relevance 10.4.2. Steps in segmentation10.4.3. Evaluating segments 10.4.4. Selecting segments 10.5. Selectingcustomers 10.5.1. One-to-one marketing 10.5.2. Loyals versus switchers10.6. Sustainable competitive advantage 10.6.1. Relevance 10.6.2.Dimensions of a SCA 10.6.3. Choice of a SCA 10.7. Positioning 10.7.1.Relevance 10.7.2. Contents of positioning 10.7.3. Brand image building10.7.4. Positioning strategies 10.7.5. Successful positioning in practice11. Marketing instrument objectives and strategies 11.1. Introduction11.2. Marketing instrument objectives 11.3. Product decisions 11.3.1.Introduction 11.3.2. Product objectives 11.3.3. Product decisions 11.4.Pricing decisions 11.4.1. Introduction 11.4.2. Pricing objectives 11.4.3.Pricing decisions 11.4.4. Customer reward systems 11.5. Distributiondecisions 11.5.1. Introduction 11.5.2. Distribution objectives 11.5.3.Distribution decisions 11.5.4. E-commerce 11.6. Communication andpromotion decisions 11.6.1. Overview 11.6.2. Setting objectives 11.6.3.Communication decisions 11.6.4. Advertising decisions 11.6.5. Internetas communication medium 11.7. Value disciplines and marketinginstruments 11.7.1. Operational efficiency 11.7.2. Product leadership11.7.3. Customer intimacy 12. Marketing plan and implementation12.1. Introduction 12.2. Plans at different levels 12.3. Function of amarketing plan 12.4. Contents of a marketing plan 12.5. Briefing for theadvertising agency 12.6. Implementation and planning issuesInternational EditionMARKETING STRATEGY5th EditionBy Orville C. Walker, University of Minnesota—Minneapolis, JohnMullins, University of Denver and Harper W. Boyd (deceased)2006 / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296190-4 / MHID: 0-07-296190-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111674-9 / MHID: 0-07-111674-5 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/walker06Marketing Strategy 5/e is a flexible, short, paper-back text whichcan be used on its own or packaged with a case book. It coversthe concepts and theories of creating and implementing amarketing strategy and offers a focus on the strategic planningprocess and marketing’s cross/inter-functional relationships.This book helps the student integrate what they have learnedabout analytical tools and the 4Ps of marketing within a broaderframework of competitive strategy.CONTENTSSection One: Introduction to Strategy Chapter 1 Market-Oriented PerspectivesUnderlie Successful Corporate, Business and Marketing StrategiesChapter 2 Corporate Strategy Decisions and their Marketing ImplicationsChapter 3 Business Strategies and Their Marketing ImplicationsSection Two: Opportunity Analysis Chapter 4 Understanding MarketOpportunities Chapter 5 Measuring Market Opportunities: Forecastingand Market Knowledge Chapter 6 Targeting Attractive Market SegmentsChapter 7 Differentiation and Positioning Section Three: FormulatingMarketing Strategies Chapter 8 Marketing Strategies for New MarketEntries Chapter 9 Strategies for Growth Markets Chapter 10 Strategiesfor Mature and Declining Markets Chapter 11 Marketing Strategies forthe New Economy Section Four: Implementation And Control Chapter12 Organizing and Planning for Effective Implementation Chapter 13Marketing Metrics for Marketing Performance173HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17310/5/2006 1:42:51 PM

MarketingStrategic Marketing- Text & CasesStrategic Marketing - CasesInternational EditionInternational EditionSTRATEGIC MARKETING8th EditionBy David Cravens, Texas Christian University and Nigel Piercy,Cranfield University2006 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296634-3 / MHID: 0-07-296634-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124432-9 / MHID: 0-07-124432-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cravens06Strategic Marketing 8/e by Cravens and Piercy is a text andcasebook that discusses the concepts and processes for gainingthe competitive advantage in the marketplace. The authors examinemany components of a market-driven strategy, includingtechnology, customer service, customer relationships, pricing,and the global economy. The text provides a strategic perspectiveand extends beyond the traditional focus on managing themarketing mix. The cases demonstrate how real companies buildand implement effective strategies. Author David Cravens is wellknown in the marketing discipline and was the recipient of theAcademy of Marketing Science’s Outstanding Marketing EducatorAward. Co-author Nigel Piercy, has a particular researchinterest in market-led strategic change and sales management,for which he has attracted academic and practitioner acclaimin the UK and USA.CONTENTSPart 1: Strategic Marketing Chapter 1 Market-Driven Strategy Chapter2 Corporate, Business and Marketing Strategy Cases for Part I: NokiaCorporation / Charles Schwab Corporation / McKinsey & Company PartII: Markets, Segments and Customer Value Chapter 3 Markets AndCompetitive Space Chapter 4 Strategic Market Segmentation Chapter5 Capabilities For Continuous Learning About Markets Cases for PartII: Wi-Fi Incorporated / Nike Incorporated / Campbell Soup Company /Johnson & Johnson Part III: Designing Market-Driven Strategies Chapter6 Market Targeting and Strategic Positioning Chapter 7 Strategic RelationshipsCRM Appendix Chapter 8 Planning for New Products Casesfor Part III: Samsung Electronics / McDonald’s / Apex Chemical Company/ Cisco Systems, Incorporated Part IV: Market-Driven ProgramDevelopment Chapter 9 Strategic Brand Management Chapter 10 ValueChain Strategy Chapter 11 Pricing Strategy And Management Chapter12 Promotion, Advertising and Sales Promotion Strategies Chapter 13Sales Force, Internet and Direct Marketing Strategies Cases for Part IV: Planet Starbucks / Hennes & Mauritz / Dell, Incorporated / Sun Microsystems,Incorporated Part V: Implementing and Managing Market-Driven Strategies Chapter 14 Designing Market-Driven OrganizationsChapter 15 Marketing Strategy Implementation and Control Casesfor Part V: Verizon Communications, Incorporated / General MotorsCorporation / Yahoo! Incorporated / PSA Peugeot Citroen SA Part VI:Comprehensive Cases Microsoft Corporation / Samsung Electronics /General Electric Appliances / Slendertone / Toyota / Pfizer, Inc. AnimalHealth Products (A) / Capital / Dura-Plast, Incorporated / Wal-Mart /Blair Water Purifiers / Murphy Brewery Ireland Limited / Dairyland SeedCompany / International Business Machines / L’Oreal Nederland / A.T. Kearney / Camar Automotive Hoist / Proctor & Gamble Corporation/ Hewlett-Packard Company / Nanophase Technologies Corporation /CUTCO International / Smith & Nephew – Innovex / Sun Microsystems/ Telus Mobility / Tri-Cities Community Bank / Cima MountaineeringIncorporatedSTRATEGIC MARKETING MANAGEMENT CASES7th EditionBy David Cravens, Texas Christian University2002ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251482-7 / MHID: 0-07-251482-5(with Excel Spreadsheet CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112491-1 / MHID: 0-07-112491-8[IE with Excel Spreadsheet CD]CONTENTSPart 1 Market Orientation and Organizational Learning Part 2 MarketingProgram Development Part 3 Growth Strategies Part 4 Innovationand Strategic Brand Management Part 5 Supply Chain Managementand Partnership Alignment Part 6 Cross-Functional Integration Part 7Implementing Marketing Plans and Assessing Performance AppendixA Marketing Financial Analysis Appendix B Guide to Case AnalysisIndex of CasesAdvertising & Promotion /IMCInternational EditionNEWCONTEMPORARY ADVERTISING11th EditionBy William Arens, Michael Weibold and Chris Arens2008 (March 2007) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352991-2 / MHID: 0-07-352991-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110105-9 / MHID: 0-07-110105-5(Details unavailable at press time)COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com174HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17410/5/2006 1:42:51 PM

MarketingInternational EditionNEWInternational EditionNEWESSENTIALS OF CONTEMPORARY ADVERTISINGBy William Arens and David Schaefer, Sacramento City College2007 (March 2006) / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-313666-0 / MHID: 0-07-313666-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110627-6 / MHID: 0-07-110627-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/arensessentials1eEssentials of Contemporary Advertising, 1/e by William Arensand David Schaefer explores the core principles that drive advertising,using a lively voice that goes beyond academic theory.The authors’ goal was to present advertising as it is actuallypracticed and make the fundamentals accessible and relevantto the student’s “real life.” This approach truly transcends theconceptual and propels students into an exciting and practicaldimension.FEATURES• Opening Vignettes—Chapter-opening vignettes introduce eachchapter, featuring an actual situation that illustrates a basic conceptin the student of advertising. Wherever possible, the opening story isthen woven through the chapter to demonstrate how textbook conceptsactually come to life in real-world situations.• Commercial Breaks—Active participation enhances learning, so theCommercial Break plays a significant role in many chapters. Theseunique sidebars to the world of advertising introduce students to topicsof current interest or controversy and then involve them in the subjectby posing questions that stimulate critical thinking.• Ethical Issues in Advertising—Ethics play a vital role in the practiceof advertising. The Ethical Issues focus attention on the most criticalsocial facing advertisers today. These include the debate over puffery,advertising to children, comparative advertising, the targeting of ethnicminorities, consumer profiling, privacy, negative political advertising,visual and statistical manipulation, and others.• Exploring Advertising—Every chapter concludes with active learningexercises that provide students opportunities to apply what they justlearned to real world situations. Instructors will find these activitiesextremely useful as homework assignments or in-class activities.• Practical Checklists—Handy checklists appear regularly throughoutthe text. They teach students how to handle a large volume of informationand creatively convert this information into effective marketingcommunications. The Checklists can stimulate memory, organizethinking, and reinforce important concepts.CONTENTSPart One An Introduction to Advertising. Chapter 1 Advertising Todayand How We Got Here. Chapter 2 The Economic, Social, and RegulatoryAspects of Advertising. Chapter 3 The Advertising Industry. Part TwoUnderstanding the Target Audience. Chapter 4 Segmentation, Targeting,and the Marketing Mix. Chapter 5 Communication and ConsumerBehavior. Part Three The Planning Process. Chapter 6 Account Planningand Research. Chapter 7 Developing Marketing and Advertising Plans.Part Four The Creative Process. Chapter 8 Creative Strategy and theCreative Process. Chapter 9 Creative Execution: Art and Copy. Chapter10 Producing Ads for Print, Electronic, and Digital Media. Part FiveReaching the Target Audience. Chapter 11 Print Advertising. Chapter 12Electronic Media: Television and Radio. Chapter 13 Digital InteractiveMedia and Direct Mail. Chapter 14 Out-of-Home, Trade Shows, andSupplementary Media. Part Six Integrating Marketing CommunicationsElements. Chapter 15 Media Planning and Buying. Chapter 16 RelationshipBuilding: Direct Marketing, Personal Selling and Sales Promotion.Chapter 17 Relationship Building: Public Relations, Sponsorship, andCorporate AdvertisingADVERTISING AND PROMOTIONAn Integrated Marketing CommunicationsPerspective, 7th EditionBy Michael A. Belch and George E. Belch of San Diego StateUniversity—San Diego2007 (May 2006) / 864 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310126- 2 / MHID: 0-07-310126-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325596-5 / MHID: 0-07-325596-3(with PowerWeb)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110852-2 / MHID: 0-07-110852-1[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/belch07Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing CommunicationsPerspective, 7/e, by Belch and Belch, is the number onetext in the Advertising market. As the field of advertising andpromotion continues to dramatically change since the dominantdays of high-powered Madison Avenue agencies, marketersmust look beyond traditional media in order to achieve success.In order to best communicate with consumers, advertisers mustutilize a myriad of tools (advertising, public relations, directmarketing, interactive/Internet marketing, sales promotion,and personal selling); Belch/Belch is the first book to reflect theshift from the conventional methods of advertising to the morewidely recognized approach of implementing an integratedmarketing communications strategy. The text underscores theimportance of recognizing that a firm must use all promotionaltools available to convey a unified message to the consumer. Theintegrated marketing communications perspective, (the themeof the text), catapults the reader into the business practices ofthe 21st century.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Streamlined Content—The 8th edition features expanded coverageof modern topics and a corresponding reduction of universally knownmaterial. For example, in Chapter 15: The Internet and InteractiveMedia, concepts that are no longer new (i.e. search engines and searchoptimization) are touched lighter than topics like wireless technology,which are given more treatment. The benefit to the student is twofold: 1)They relate (and thus are more connected) with the up-to-date conceptsand technology and 2) They learn how they are translated realisticallyin the business world.• New Videos—There are new videos with this book. One segment,showcasing the successful IMC campaign of The California Milk AdvisoryBoard, illustrates to students the variety of ways product messagesare delivered (radio, point-of-purchase, TV…etc) and how they workharmoniously together.• New Diversity Perspectives—These boxed sections highlight theindustry’s move to market to diverse audiences. Targeted campaigns andspecialty agencies are highlighted, showing student the steps advertiserstake to market certain products to certain audiences.• More Career Coverage— Sprinkled throughout the text are CareerProfiles, a feature that introduces successful individuals working in anumber of fields. These profiles highlight problems, issues, successes,and failures faced by individuals working and illustrate to the studentshow text concepts, theories, and applications are put into practice ineveryday situations. In addition to this coverage, there is a career sectionon the website that will provide future-minded students with evenmore guidance.FEATURES• Most Current Text on the Market: This text features the very best,most current examples; examples and references are added right upuntil the book is put into production. The text features updated chapteropenings, advertisements and advertising and promotion perspectives.In the changing world of advertising and promotion, currency is keyand students will be on the cutting edge with this text.175HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17510/5/2006 1:42:52 PM

Marketing• Cases: Advertising and promotion cases are located in the onlinelearning center and offer students the opportunity to see how advertisingconcepts and theories in the text are applied in everyday practiceat real companies.• Interactive Web Page: http://www.mhhe.com/belch07 This web pagefeatures an advertising campaign project, examples of print advertisementsand commercials which ask the student to identify ad types andadvertising theories.• Marketing Leading Video Library This is the best video library in themarket. This package includes over 400 commercials and 4 video cases.The videos give context and reinforce text concepts and theories andhelp the student see advertising and promotion in everyday practice.• PowerPoint Lecture Presentation: This high-quality presentationfeatures content screens, ads and exhibits from the text and additionalads, commercials, and video clips from the video package.• Online Campaign Builder: This online template shows the studenthow to build an advertising campaign. Everything the student learns inthe course builds up to the ad campaign and the students uses concepts,theories, and tools learned throughout the term and puts them all togetherto create a successful campaign for a product or service.• Integrated Marketing Communications Theme: This text is known foroffering the best balance of advertising practice and IMC. Belch/Belchwere the first to recognize the growing importance of IMC and build itinto the text from the first edition onward. IMC is introduced early andnumerous examples illustrate and reinforce its importance throughoutshowing students how various marketing and promotional elementsmust be coordinated to communicate effectively.• Strong Ethical Coverage: Ethical issues faced by advertisers are analyzedand discussed throughout the text and are highlighted in boxedsidebars. This feature discusses specific issues, developments, andproblems that call into question the ethics of marketers and their decisionsas they develop and implement their advertising and promotionalprograms. Students have the opportunity to evaluate decisions from anethical perspective and decide if a company acted appropriately or notin a variety of situations.• Strong Global Examples: Global examples are integrated throughouteach chapter, in the text and in boxed sidebars, examining the roleof advertising and other promotional areas in international markets.These current and interesting examples underscore to the students howadvertising theories apply worldwide.• Internet and WWW (Chapter 15): This chapter introduces theimportant role the Internet plays in creating an effective IntegratedMarketing Campaign. Successful Internet campaigns are highlightedand illustrate the steps advertisers take to maximize their exposure onthe web, showing students how the web is one important part of theadvertising and promotional mix.CONTENTSPart 1: The Role of IMC in Marketing. Chapter 1: An Introduction ofIntegrated Marketing Communications. Chapter 2: The Role of IMC inthe Marketing Process. Part 2: Integrated Marketing Program SituationAnalysis. Chapter 3: Organizing for Advertising and Promotion.Chapter 4: Perspectives on Consumer Behavior. Part 3: Analyzing theCommunication Process. Chapter 5: The Communication Process.Chapter 6: Source, Message, and Channel Factors. Part 4: Objectivesand Budgeting for Integrated Marketing Communications Programs.Chapter 7: Establishing Objectives and Budgeting for the PromotionalProgram. Part 5: Developing the Integrated marketing CommunicationsProgram. Chapter 8: Creative Strategy: Planning and Development.Chapter 9: Creative Strategy: Implementation and Evaluation. Chapter10: Media Planning and Strategy. Chapter 11: Evaluation of BroadcastMedia. Chapter 12: Evaluation of Print Media. Chapter 13: SupportMedia. Chapter 14: Direct Marketing and Marketing on the Internet.Chapter 15: Internet and WWW. Chapter 16: Sales Promotion. Chapter17: Public Relations, Publicity, and Corporate Advertising. Chapter 18:Personal Selling. Part 6: Monitoring, Evaluation, and Control. Chapter19: Measuring the Effectiveness of the Promotional Program. Part 7:Special Topics and Perspectives. Chapter 20: International Advertisingand Promotion. Chapter 21: Regulation of Advertising and Promotion.Chapter 22: Evaluating the Social, Ethical, and Economic Aspects ofAdvertising and PromotionInternational EditionCONTEMPORARY ADVERTISING10th EditionBy William F. Arens2006 (April 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296472-1 / MHID: 0-07-296472-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313569-4 / MHID: 0-07-313569-0(with OLC and Premium Content)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111786-9 / MHID: 0-07-111786-5[IE with OLC & Premium Content]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/aren06Contemporary Advertising, 10/e, is one of the best-selling advertisingtexts in this field. Known as the “coffee table book” forAdvertising, it is known for its current examples, the author’sability to pull from real-world experiences, and the clear writingstyle. Taking a comprehensive view of the industry, this textpresents advertising from the creative stand-point and Arensdraws from his own industry experience to lend life to the examples.Author Bill Arens continues to address the importanceof Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) in the field ofAdvertising and how it impacts advertising strategy throughfeatured examples of IMC campaigns.CONTENTSPart I: Advertising Perspectives Chapter 1 What is Advertising Today?Chapter 2 The Evolution of Advertising Chapter 3 The Economic,Social and Regulatory Aspects of Advertising Chapter 4 The Scopeof Advertising: From Local to Global Part II: Crafting Marketing andAdvertising Strategies Chapter 5 Marketing and Consumer Behavior:The Foundations of Advertising Chapter 6 Market Segmentation andthe Marketing Mix: Determinants of Advertising Strategy Chapter 7Research: Gathering Information for Advertising Planning Chapter 8Marketing and Advertising Planning: Top-Down, Bottom-Up, and IMCChapter 9 Planning Media Strategy: Finding Links to the Market PartIII: Integrating Advertising With Other Elements of the CommunicationMix Chapter 10 Relationship Building: Direct Marketing, PersonalSelling, and Sales Promotion Chapter 11 Relationship Building: PublicRelations, Sponsorship, and Corporate Advertising Part IV: CreatingAdvertisements and Commercials Chapter 12 Creative Strategy andthe Creative Process Chapter 13 Creative Execution: Art and CopyChapter 14 Producing Ads for Print, Electronic and Digital Media PartV: Using Advertising Media Chapter 15 Using Print Media Chapter 16Using Electronic Media: Television and Radio Chapter 17 Using DigitalInteractive Media and Direct Mail Chapter 18 Using Out-of-Home,Exhibitive, and Supplemental MediaINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg176HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17610/5/2006 1:42:52 PM

MarketingInternational EditionPRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING AND IMC2nd EditionBy Tom Duncan, University of Colorado Boulder2005 / 800 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-304971-7 / MHID: 0-07-304971-9(with AdSim CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111119-5 / MHID: 0-07-111119-0[IE with OLC and PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/duncan05Principles of Advertising and IMC, 2/e by Tom Duncan explainsthe principles and practices of advertising and the other marketingcommunication functions within an integrated contextcomplete with an integrated planning process. Duncan’s textpresents the new ways companies communicate with businesssavvycustomers. It also shows how and why top managementdemands accountability of how advertising and promotiondollars are spent. Principles of Advertising and IMC providesstudents with a basic understanding of all the major marketingcommunication functions, the major media alternatives, and theprocesses for integrating these activities in the most effective andefficient way in order to develop long-term, profitable customerrelationships that build brands and create brand equity. Basedon feedback from reviewers, author Tom Duncan has increasedthe 2nd Edition coverage of key advertising concepts (like channelmarketing, customer service, direct response and personalselling) to ensure a well-rounded approach to the Principles ofAdvertising course. AdSim is an Advertising Simulation set inthe consumer electronics industry where students are requiredto make decisions about Agency selection; Brand positioningand messages; Media Selection, including traditional and nontraditional;Market Research, both ordering and interpreting; andBudgeting. This simulation, created by SmartSims, provides ahighly engaging means of developing a real understanding andappreciation of the fundamentals and dynamics of communications,advertising and promotion in business. AdSim challengesstudents to apply recently learned concepts, principles andexplained practices in development of overall communications,advertising and promotion campaigns, whether against thecomputer in the Single-Player version or in direct competitionwith their peers in the Multi-Player version. AdSim for Duncanincorporates an Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC)approach as promulgated in Principles of Advertising and IMC,2/e by Tom Duncan. AdSim for Duncan has been modeledon the contemporary US Digital Camera Market. Using thissimulation, students will develop: • A better understanding ofhow to implement an IMC approach in the development of anoverall advertising and promotion plan. • Insights into selectingdifferent media for specific communications goals and targetmarkets while being constrained by a fixed budget. • Insightsinto the influence of brand awareness and the importance ofon-going measurement. • A better understanding of implementingpromotion campaigns for existing customers, including theuse of customer relationship management (CRM) applications.• Critical decision-making and team participation skills in aninteractive learning environment.CONTENTSPart I How Brands are Built Chapter 1 The Marketing CommunicationFunctions and IMC Chapter 2 Marketing Communication Partners andOrganization Chapter 3 Brands and Stakeholder Relationships PartII Basic MC Strategies for Building Brands Chapter 4 Integrating theBrand Communication Process Chapter 5 Customer Brand DecisionMaking Chapter 6 Advertising and IMC Planning Chapter 7 Segmenting,Targeting and Positioning Chapter 8 Data-Driven CommunicationsPart III Creating, Sending, and Receiving Brand Message Chapter 9Advertising and IMC Creative Strategies Chapter 10 Creative ExecutionsChapter 11 Advertising and IMC Media Chapter 12 Internet ande-Commerce Chapter 13 Advertising and IMC Media Planning PartIV The Marketing Communication Functions Chapter 14 ConsumerPromotional and Packaging Chapter 15 Channel Marketing and TradePromotion Chapter 16 Personal Selling Chapter 17 Public Relationsand Brand Publicity Chapter 18 Integrated Direct Marketing Chapter 19Customer Service, Trade Shows, Events and Sponsorships Part V TheBig Picture Chapter 20 Social, Legal, and Ethical Issues in MarketingCommunications Chapter 21 International IMC Chapter 22 EffectivenessMeasurements and EvaluationsInternational EditionSellingNEWFUNDAMENTALS OF SELLING10th EditionBy Charles M Futrell, Texas A&M University2008 (January 2007) / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-340469-1 / MHID: 0-07-340469-1ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330588-2 / MHID: 0-07-330588-X(with Act! Express CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128591-9 / MHID: 0-07-128591-1[IE with Act! Express CD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/futrell10eCONTENTSPART I SELLING AS A PROFESSION 1 The Life, Times, and Career ofthe Professional Salesperson 2 Relationship Marketing: Where PersonalSelling Fits 3 Ethics First . . . Then Customer Relationships PART IIPREPARATION FOR RELATIONSHIP SELLING 4 The Psychology ofSelling: Why People Buy 5 Communication for Relationship Building:It’s Not All Talk 6 Sales Knowledge: Customers, Products, TechnologiesPART III THE RELATIONSHIP SELLING PROCESS 7 Prospecting—theLifeblood of Selling 8 Planning the Sales Call Is a Must! 9 Carefully SelectWhich Sales Presentation Method to Use 10 Begin Your PresentationStrategically 11 Elements of a Great Sales Presentation 12 Welcome YourProspect’s Objections 13 Closing Begins the Relationship 14 Service andFollow-Up for Customer Retention PART IV Managing Yourself, YourCareer, and Others 15 Time, Territory, and Self-Management: Keys toSuccess 16 Planning, Staffing, and Training Successful Salespeople 17Motivation, Compensation, Leadership, and Evaluation of Salespeople/ APPENDIX A: Sales Call Role-Plays APPENDIX B: Personal SellingExperiential Exercises APPENDIX C: Comprehensive Sales CasesAPPENDIX D: Selling Globally APPENDIX E: Answers to CrosswordPuzzles Glossary of Selling TermsInternational EditionNEWRELATIONSHIP SELLING AND SALES MANAGMENT2nd EditionBy Mark Johnston and Greg Marshall of Rollins College-Winter Park2008 (January 2007) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352981-3 / MHID: 0-07-352981-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330401-4 / MHID: 0-07-330401-8(with Act! Express CD)ISBN-13: 9780-07-128574-2 / MHID: 0-07-128574-1[IE with Act! Express CD](Details unavailable at press time)177HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17710/5/2006 1:42:52 PM

MarketingInternational EditionNEWABC’S OF RELATIONSHIP SELLING9th EditionBy Charles Futrell, Texas A&M University2007 (October 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310132-3 / MHID: 0-07-310132-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-322573-9 / MHID: 0-07-322573-8(with ACT! Express CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110776-1 / MHID: 0-07-110776-2[IE with ACT! Express CD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/futrell07ABC’s of Relationship Selling, 9/e by Futrell is written by asales person turned teacher and is filled with practical tipsand business-examples gleaned from years of experience insales with Colgate, Up-john, and Ayerst and from the author’ssales consulting business. Charles Futrell focuses on improvingcommunication skills and emphasizes that no matter whatcareer a student pursues, selling skills are a valuable asset. Thisaffordable, brief paperback contains a wealth of exercises androle plays is perfect for a selling course where professors spendconsiderable time utilizing other resources and projects. Thetext also makes a nice companion to a sales management textin Marketing programs that offer a sales management course,but do not offer a separate selling course.FEATURES• The Tree of Business Life – This feature integrates ethical sellingcoverage throughout the book. Beginning with Chapter 4, the firstmajor section of each chapter focuses on the fact that ethical servicebuilds true relationships.• Increased Technology Coverage – Technology--super-hero Batmanhas his high tech communication gadgets. Salespeople have their mobileoffice (Sales Mobile) with a global positioning system (GPS), PDA, fax,e-mail, internet access which is covered in Chapter 6.• Additional Role-Plays: More role-play selling scenarios have beenadded to provide students with additional opportunities to perfect theirsales approach and customer relationship skills.• Sales World Wide Web Directory: This resource contains the URLs forthe Sales World Wide Web Exercises found at the end of each chapterand for organizations with the largest sales forces in the United States.Utilizing this directory will bring the text exercises to life and will givestudents ideas about where to begin their sales careers.• Customer Focused Selling: Charles Futrell has expanded his coverageand exploration of the customer-focused, service approach to sellingthat this text has taken for over seven editions. The key to developinglong-lasting, and profitable, relationships with buyers is through a customer-focused,services-approach. Through active listening and puttingyour customer first the relationships you develop will benefit you, youremployer, and most of all, your customer.• Expanded Coverage of Sales Careers: Career information has beenexpanded throughout to emphasize that there are sales jobs in all organizations– business, service, and nonprofit. This coverage reveals amultitude of career opportunities for students.• Ethical Coverage: Closely related to the customer-focused or serviceapproach to selling is the ethical means by which it is accomplished.Charles Futrell broadens his exploration of the ethical demands of asales position, discussing how to strike a balance between the pressuresof sales goals and treating your customer’s needs as a priority. Findingthis balance in selling creates a better salesperson and this text givesthe Fundamentals to achieve that balance• Emphasis and Coverage of Technology: Charles Futrell understandsthe important role that technology plays in today’s selling environment.Students will benefit by learning applications like: how to search forcustomer information and competitor information on the World WideWeb, use an automated territory management system to manage asales territory, use order and inventory tracking systems to provide upto-dateinformation to customers, and communicate with customersthrough e-mail. The author incorporates the WWW exercises, technologyin selling, and information on ACT! Customer Contact Softwarethroughout the text.• ACT! Express Software: Included with this textbook is ACT! Express,a tool that will help students entering the business world. Based on thebest-selling ACT! contact management system, ACT! Express showsstudents how to become more productive—resulting in better businessrelationships and greater business opportunities. ACT! Express includesthe following features: Complete contact and calendar management:seventy pre-defined fields for contact information, notes, tasks, schedules,history, and more; Search capabilities: allows quick location ofany information in the database by name, ZIP code, phone number,or keyword; Groups: sort contacts into groups by company, interests,or other commonalities; Activity reminders: set alarms for upcomingactivity reminders; Basic e-mail functions: send and track e-mail correspondence—andattach e-mails directly to specific contact records.• The Author’s Pedagogical Approach: Charles stresses learning bydoing. He believes that selling skills will benefit all students and makethem better communicators.• Coverage of Relationship Selling. Charles has integrated coverageof relationship and consultative selling. Students who understand theimportance of developing relation ships with customers will ultimatelybe more successful.• Sales Challenge/Solution: Each chapter begins with a real-life challengefaced by sales professionals that introduces the topic of the chapterand heightens student interest in chapter concepts. The challenge isresolved at the end of the chapter, where chapter concepts guiding thesalesperson’s actions are highlighted.• Ethical Dilemma Boxes: Provide students with an opportunity toconsider ethical dilemmas faced in the selling job.• Selling Tip Boxes: Offer the reader additional selling tips for use indeveloping their role-plays.• Selling Globally Boxes: These boxes provide a global-view for students,featuring selling situations from around the world. Many werewritten by the author’s colleagues from around the world.• Selling Experiential Exercises. These exercises help students to betterunderstand themselves and/or the text material. Many can be donewithin the class or completed outside and discussed within class.• Cases for Analysis: Each chapter ends with several brief but substantivecases for student analysis and class discussion to providing thestudents with an opportunity to think critically about the applicationof chapter concepts.• The Price: Approximately $20 less than a traditional marketing text.ContentsCONTENTSPart I: Selling as a Profession Chapter 1: The Life, Times, and Careerof the Professional Salesperson Chapter 2: Ethics First…Then CustomerRelationships Part II: Preparation For Relationship Selling Chapter 3:The Psychology of Selling: Why People Buy Chapter 4: Communicationfor Relationship Building: It’s Not All Talk Chapter 5: Sales Knowledge:Customers, Products, Technologies Part III: The Relationship SellingProcess Chapter 6: Prospecting: The Lifeblood of Selling Chapter 7:Planning the Sales Call Is a Must! Chapter 8: Carefully Select WhichSales Presentation Method to Use Chapter 9: Begin Your PresentationStrategically Chapter 10: Elements of a Great Sales Presentation Chapter11: Welcome Your Prospects Objections Chapter 12: Closing Beginsthe Relationship Chapter 13: Service and Follow-Up for CustomerRetention Part IV: Careers in Selling Chapter 14: Time, Territory, andSelf-Management: Keys to Success / Appendix A: Sales Call Role Plays/ Appendix B: Personal Selling Experiential Exercises / Appendix C:Selling Globally178HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17810/5/2006 1:42:52 PM

MarketingInternational EditionNEWSELLINGBuilding Partnerships, 6th EditionBy Barton W Weitz, University of Florida, Stephen B Castleberry,University of Minnesota, and John F Tanner, Baylor University2007 (November 2005)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313690-5 / MHID: 0-07-313690-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322940-9 / MHID: 0-07-322940-7(with ACT! Express CD)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110830-0 / MHID: 0-07-110830-0[IE with ACT! Express CD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/weitz07Selling: Building Partnerships, 6/e, by Weitz, Castleberry, andTanner is the first text to integrate the partnerships/relationshiptheme in the selling course. It presents selling theories and skillsand encourages the students to practice applying them. Studentswill be presented with situations that occur in the field. Thiscontent will dovetail nicely into the training they receive fromcompanies they go to work for.NEW TO THIS EDITION• Sales Technology Box: Appearing at least once per chapter, theseboxes apply concepts to current uses of technology. Since many studentstoday are tech savvy, the material will be easily relatable.• Ethics Problems: Each chapter contains a minimum of 2 ethicalquestions at the end of every chapter, preparing students to approachcomplicated selling situations with utmost character and integrity.• Chapter Opening Vignettes: Each chapter opens with a descriptionof a former student who is now successful in the world of sales. Thisfeature gives current students a realistic sense of what it is like to be asales person today. These first-person testimonials are especially compellingbecause it shows how concepts learned in the classroom cantranslate into the real world.• Lifetime Customer Value: New material on Lifetime Customer Valuehas been woven into all the chapters. It emphasizes to students that thekey to developing long-lasting, and profitable, relationships with buyersis through a customer-focused, services-approach.• Role Play Exercises: A role play section utilizing the same companiesmentioned in the text (as appropriate) has been added to the end ofchapter material. These exercises lead toward the complete role playexperience that typically occurs at the end of the semester. In a manageablefashion, students can build on the knowledge they have acquiredthroughout the course.FEATURES• Relationship Theme: In spite of the growth of the Internet, face-tofacemeetings and personal relationships between sellers and buyersare more important than ever. The idea and importance of relationshipmarketing is highlighted throughout the text, emphasizing how crucialrelationships are to a firm’s profitability and success. The use of technologyto support face-to-face relationships is used to underscore itsimportance in selling.• Thorough Coverage of the Technology and the Internet: The textoutlines and analyzes technology and how it impacts the salesperson’slife. The authors discuss PDA’s, Cell Phones, the Internet and email asa source of leads (e.g. search engines, Banner ads, extranets, e-commerce,and problem of SPAMing), presentation software, and voice mailand ways to manage these technologies to achieve the highest level ofsuccess. Included in the technology discussion is coverage of SIC andnewer NAICS as helpful tools when prospecting. The technology andInternet coverage helps students to see how the Internet is a valuabletool for planning and managing a sales territory.• Selling Scenarios and Updated Building Partnership Scenarios: Featuredin each chapter, the Selling Scenarios were written specificallyfor the text and reinforce the concepts and present applications of sellingprinciples. Also featured in each chapter is a Building PartnershipsScenario that emphasizes and examines how salespeople build relationships.Both features highlight these skills which are crucial tools for asalesperson. Some of these are written from the buyers perspective.• Lead Qualification and Management Systems: This coverage of leadqualification and management systems includes pre-qualifications systemsand gives the students a glimpse into how salespeople qualify andmanage leads in their territories. Companies now have more informationavailable to them due to better systems and modeling. This informationis being used and collected by sales organizations in the form of CRM,therefore contact management software has been more fully integratedthroughout the chapters.• Thinking it Through Boxes: These boxes are involving exercises thatinspire classroom dialogue or serve as a short-essay exam question tohelp students experience concepts as they read and internalize keyselling concepts to help with their comprehension and retention of thetheories and skills presented in the text.• Cross-Cultural Coverage: Current and continued emphasis on sellingexamples from Canada, Mexico, and all around the globe serve toreflect the reality of the global nature of selling and cultural differenceswithin a culture.• Coverage of Training Formats: Discussion about various trainingformats, including FAB (features, advantages, benefits), SPIN Selling,Social Style Matrix training, and FEBA (features, evidence, benefits,agreement). A majority of sales representatives will go through trainingprograms and the text offers them early exposure to prepare them forsuch programs.• Mini-Cases: These class-tested cases, found at the end of each chapter,work well as daily assignments and as frameworks for lectures, discussion,or small-group practices. The cases encourage the student to applytheories and skills learned in the text to solve sales situations.CONTENTSPart One: The Field of Selling Chapter 1: Selling and Salespeople Chapter2: Building Partnering Relationships Part Two: Knowledge and SkillRequirements Chapter 3: Ethical and Legal Issues in Selling Chapter4: Buying Behavior and the Buying Process Chapter 5: Using CommunicationPrinciples to Build Relationships Chapter 6: Adaptive Sellingfor Relationship Building Part Three: The Partnership Process Chapter7: Prospecting Chapter 8: Planning the Sales Call Chapter 9: Makingthe Sales Call Chapter 10: Strengthening the Presentation Chapter 11:Responding to Objections Chapter 12: Obtaining Commitment Chapter13: Formal Negotiation Chapter 14: After the Sale: Building Long-TermPartnerships Part Four: The Salesperson as Professional Chapter 15:Managing Your Time and Territory Chapter 16: Managing Within YourCompany Chapter 17: Managing Your CareerCOMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com179HED 2007 Marketing.indd 17910/5/2006 1:42:53 PM

MarketingInternational EditionFUNDAMENTALS OF SELLINGCustomers For Life Through Service, 9th EditionBy Charles M. Futrell, Texas A & M University—College Station2006 / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296210-9 / MHID: 0-07-296210-0ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319263-5 / MHID: 0-07-319263-5(with ACT CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111791-3 / MHID: 0-07-111791-1[IE with ACT CD-ROM]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/futrellFUNDAMENTALS OF SELLING: Customers For Life ThroughService, 9/e is one of McGraw-Hill’s best-selling texts in theSelling discipline. Its approach is classic and practical andemphasizes role-plays. FUNDAMENTALS, written by a salespersonturned teacher, draws widely from Charles Futrell’sexperience as a sales professional rather than from a staidtheoretical perspective. The text is filled with practical tips andbusiness-examples gleaned from years of experience in saleswith Colgate, Upjohn, and Ayerst and from the author’s salesconsulting business. Charles Futrell focuses on improving communicationskills and emphasizes that no matter what career astudent pursues; selling skills are a valuable asset.CONTENTSPart 1 Selling as a Profession Chapter 1 The Life, Times, and Careerof the Professional Salesperson Chapter 2 Relationship Marketing:Where Personal Selling Fits Chapter 3 Ethics First…Then CustomerRelationships Part 2 Preparation for Relationship Selling Chapter 4The Psychology of Selling: Why People Buy Chapter 5 Communicationfor Relationship Building: It’s Not All Talk Chapter 6 Sales Knowledge:Customers, Products, and Technologies Part 3 The Relationship SellingProcess Chapter 7 Prospecting—The Lifeblood of Selling Chapter8 Planning Your Sales Call is a Must! Chapter 9 Carefully Select WhichSales Presentation Method to Use Chapter 10 Begin Your PresentationStrategically Chapter 11 Elements of a Great Sales Presentation Chapter12 Welcome Your Prospect’s Objections Chapter 13 Closing Begins theRelationship Chapter 14 Service and Follow-up for Customer RetentionPart 4 Managing Yourself, Your Career, and Others Chapter 15 Time,Territory, and Self-Management: Keys to Success Chapter 16 Planning,Staffing, and Training Successful Salespeople Chapter 17 Motivation,Compensation, Leadership, and Evaluation of Salespeople Appendix ASales Call Role-Plays Appendix B Personal Selling Experiential ExercisesAppendix C Sale Technology Directory and www. Exercises AppendixD Comprehensive Sales CasesInternational EditionRELATIONSHIP SELLING AND SALES MANAGEMENTBy Mark W Johnston and Gregg W Marshall of Rollins College—Winter Park2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298317-3 / MHID: 0-07-298317-5(with Act! Express CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-320316-4 / MHID: 0-07-320316-5(with Act! CD-ROM)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110429-6 / MHID: 0-07-110429-1[IE with CD-ROM]Website: www.mhhe.com/johnston05Relationship Selling and Sales Management, 1/e by Johnstonand Marshall is truly unique as it is the only book on the marketthat fuses Relationship Selling and Customer Value (70%) withLeadership and Sales Management (30%). Instead of purchasingmultiple books to amass material in those areas, professorsnow have the convenience of having it all in one text. The70/30 coverage allocation reflects the overwhelming majorityof opinions expressed through market research. Authors of oursuccessful Churchill/Ford/Walker’s Sales Force Managementtext and individuals with quite a presence in the field, MarkJohnston and Greg Marshall bring a wealth of expertise andenergy into this product. The book is written for appropriateuse both at the college/university setting and the communitycollege/junior college setting.CONTENTSPART ONE: What is Relationship Selling? 1 Introduction to RelationshipSelling 2 Understanding Sellers and Buyers 3 Value Creation inBuyer-Seller Relationships 4 Ethical and Legal Issues in RelationshipSelling PART TWO: Elements of Relationship Selling 5 Using Informationin Prospecting and Sales Call Planning 6 Communicating the SalesMessage 7 Negotiating for Win-Win Solutions 8 Closing the Sale andFollow-up 9 Managing Territory and Time Effectively PART THREE:Managing the Relationship Selling Process 10 Salesperson Performance:Behavior, Role Perception, and Motivation 11 Recruiting and SelectingSalespeople for Relationship Selling 12 Training and DevelopingSalespeople 13 Salesperson Compensation and Incentives 14 EvaluatingSalesperson PerformanceSELLING MANAGING CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS3rd EditionBy Rix, Western Sydney Institute of TAFE-Blacktown College, Bussand Herford2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471561-1 / MHID: 0-07-471561-5McGraw-Hill Australia TitleThis brand new edition reflects the substantial changes thathave occurred in personal selling. The text focuses on the twofundamentals of personal selling—consultation and persuasion—togetherwith in-depth coverage of customer relationshipmanagement strategies for practical success in the field. Itprovides extensive opportunities for both new and experiencedsalespeople to develop their knowledge and skills. Selling3e introduces a new chapter on CRM and in-depth coveragethroughout on this expanding and dynamic topic. In addition,it includes end-of-chapter case studies, website references, andchallenging cases at the close of the text, all with a practicalfocus. The book’s extension section includes class activities, roleplays and workbook sections to facilitate group research anddiscussion. This book has a clear and accessible writing style,and is an invaluable resource for sales trainees and students inselling courses at university and vocational colleges. The chapterson negotiating with customers and presenting to customergroups provide an ideal reference for salespeople and otherswho are looking to further develop their selling skills. It alsodemonstrates how the practices and technologies of customerrelationship management (CRM) can be used by salespeople toimprove their sales performance. This third edition offers a free30-day trial of ACT!7 software, one of the most popular CRMpackages used in business today.CONTENTSPart 1: Customers and Organisations. Chapter 1: Selling, Marketingand Customer Relationship Management. Chapter 2: UnderstandingConsumers. Chapter 3: Understanding Organisational Buyers. Chapter4: Ethical and Legal Issues in Selling. Part 2: Preparing to BuildCustomer Relationships. Chapter 5: Developing your CommunicationSkills. Chapter 6: Getting Organised. Chapter 7: Prospecting. Part 3:Conducting Sales Interviews with Customers. Chapter 8: Selling asConsultation. Chapter 9: Managing Objections and Buyer Concerns.Chapter 10: Obtaining Commitment. Part 4: Managing Customer Relationships.Chapter 11: CRM in the Modern organisation. Appendixto Chapter 11. Implementing customer contact programs. Chapter 12:Managing Relationships with Key Customers. Chapter 13: Negotiatingwith Customers. Chapter 14: Making Presentations to Customer Groups.Part 5: Extension Case Studies and Activities180HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18010/5/2006 1:42:53 PM

NEWSales ManagementMANAGEMENT OF A SALES FORCE12th EditionBy Rosann Spiro, Indiana University-Bloomington, William Stanton,University of Colorado-Boulder and Greg Rich, Bowling Green StateUniversity2008 (Feburary 2007) / 608 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-352977- 6 / MHID: 0-07-352977-XFEATURES• A strong emphasis on relationship selling and particularly the use ofteam-selling. Most chapters have a “team box” highlighting the principleswithin a given chapter as they relate to managing selling teams. Thecover of the book reflects the team emphasis.• New and Updated Cases. About 1/3 of the end of chapter casesare new – in order to reflect the latest, cutting-edge issues, includingtechnology and Internet selling. The integrative cases at the end of thebook are updated. With these cases, students can apply the conceptsand methods discussed in the chapters in order to stimulate understandingof the materials and serve as a jumping off point to further classdiscussions.• Excel spreadsheets. Several of the cases have data that is availableon supplementary Excel spreadsheets. This will help students learn howto arrange data in organized and meaningful ways.• End-of-Chapter Internet Exercises. Internet exercises have beenadded at the end of every chapter to help reinforce learned conceptsin fun ways.• Leadership of a Sales Force (Chapter 11) is revised substantially.The new focus compares and contrasts management with leadership,and emphasizes transformational leadership – a style that inspires salesorganizations to perform above and beyond expectations.• Experiential Exercises. At the end of each chapter are experientialexercises that help to reinforce concepts by allowing students to criticallythink about sales force management issues. Along the same lines,every chapter contains International boxes and Ethical Dilemma boxesthat present realistic situations for students to think about.International EditionSALES FORCE MANAGEMENT8th EditionBy Mark Johnston and Greg Marshall of Rollins College – WinterPark2006 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296183-6 / MHID: 0-07-296183-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-111605-3 / MHID: 0-07-111605-2 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/sfm8eThe primary goal of Sales Force Management, 8e is to offerstudents the most comprehensive, up-to-date, and integratedoverview of the theory, research, and management practicesrelevant to sales management. In revising the book we continueto focus on creating a book that enables students to take thewealth of information available and apply it to “real world” salesmanagement problems and opportunities. The Eighth Edition,like the others before it, showcases how real managers use currenttheory and research in their own organizations. By identifyingrecent practices, applications, and the use of state-of-the-arttechnologies this edition combines in one source real worldsales management “best practices” with cutting edge researchand theory. Instructors will find that they are proud to presentthe information and approach to sales management within theEighth Edition to both undergraduate and graduate businessstudents, as it captures the essence of what it means to be asuccessful sales manager in the customer relationship era.CONTENTSChapter 1 Overview of Sales Management and the Selling EnvironmentPart One: Formulation of the Sales Program Chapter 2 The Process ofBuying and Selling Chapter 3 Linking Strategies and the Sales Role inthe Era of Customer Relationship Management Chapter 4 Organizingthe Sales Effort Chapter 5 The Strategic Role of Information in SalesManagement Part Two: Implementation of the Sales Program Chapter6 Salesperson Performance: Behavior, Role Perceptions, and SatisfactionChapter 7 Salesperson Performance: Motivating the Sales Force Chapter8 Personal Characteristics and Sales Aptitude: Criteria for SelectingSalespeople Chapter 9 Sales Force Recruitment and Selection Chapter10 Sales Training: Objectives, Techniques, and Evaluation Chapter 11Designing Compensation and Incentive Programs Part Three: Evaluationand Control of the Sales Program Chapter 12 Cost Analysis: Analyzingthe Cost of Implementing CRM for Neobrands Chapter 13 Behavior andOther Performance AnalysesNEWMarketingSALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENTText and CasesBy Krishna Havaldar and Cavale2006 (July 2006) / 560 pagesMHID: 0-07-061190-4Tata McGraw-Hill TitleThe book contains all major concepts in “sales” and “distribution.All important concepts are illustrated with Indian examplesboth from industrial and consumer goods. The concepts havebeen dealt in a practical manner for a sales manager who wantsto adopt some of the practices enumerated. Both sales anddistribution are being used jointly in the context of a manageras there is no sales manager who does not have distribution responsibilities.The tables and charts in the book which are takenfrom businesses in the manner in which they are being used.Most of the examples given are from the rich experience of theauthors as operating managers, consultants, and teachers.FEATURES• The concepts are supported by extensive practical examples• There are end-of-chapter concept-testing questions to test the depthof understanding of the subject• Application questions have been compiled with great care to givethe reader an existing problem• The reference notes are very comprehensive and will help the readerto go through the best publications on the subject. This is also a veryuseful aid for the teaching faculty.• The book contains an excellent set of small cases and quite a fewcomprehensive cases. These are all from real life experiences.CONTENTSPART 1: SALES MANAGEMENT 1. Introduction to Sales Management2. Personal Selling Process 3. Planning and Organizing Sales Force 4.Staffing the Sales Force 5. Training the Sales Force 6. Directing the SalesForce 7. Motivating and Leading The Sales Force 8. Controlling andEvaluation the Sales Force 9. Social, Ethical, and Legal ResponsibilitiesPART II: DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT 10. Introduction to DistributionManagement 11. Marketing Channels 12. Channel Institutions13. Wholesaling 14. Channel Planning 15. Channel Management 16.Channel Information Systems 17. Market Logistics & Supply ChainManagement181HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18110/5/2006 1:42:53 PM

MarketingInternational EditionMANAGEMENT OF A SALES FORCE11th EditionBy Rosann Spiro, Indiana University - Bloomington, William Stanton,University of Colorado — Boulder and Greg Rich, Bowling GreenState University2003 / 672 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-239887-8 / MHID: 0-07-239887-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119898-1 / MHID: 0-07-119898-9 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/spiroCONTENTSPART I: Introduction to Sales Force Management Chapter 1: The Fieldof Sales Force Management Chapter 2: Strategic Sales Force ManagementChapter 3: Personal Selling Process PART II: Organizing, Staffing,and Training a Sales Force Chapter 4: Sales Force Organization Chapter5: Profiling and Recruiting Salespeople Chapter 6: Selecting and HiringApplicants Chapter 7: Developing, Delivering, and Reinforcing a SalesTraining Program PART III: Directing Sales Force Operations Chapter 8:Motivating a Sales Force Chapter 9: Sales Force Compensation Chapter10: Sales Force Expenses and Transportation Chapter 11: Leadershipof a Sales Force PART IV: Sales Planning Chapter 12: Sales Forecastingand Developing Budgets Chapter 13: Sales Territories PART V: EvaluatingSales Performance Chapter 14: Analysis of Sales Volume Chapter15: Marketing Cost and Profitability Analysis Chapter 16: Evaluating aSalesperson’s Performance Chapter 17: Ethical and Legal Responsibilitiesof Sales Managers Appendix A: Integrative Cases Appendix B:Careers in Sales ManagementBusiness to BusinessInternational EditionBUSINESS MARKETINGConnecting Strategy, Relationships, and Learning,3rd EditionBy F Robert Dwyer, University of Cincinnati and John Tanner, BaylorUniversity2006 / 720 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286578-3 / MHID: 0-07-286578-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124438-1 / MHID: 0-07-124438-7 [IE]This text is targeted at the undergraduate Business Marketingcourse. It introduces the concepts of marketing to businessesand stresses the importance of building relationships withcustomers.CONTENTSPart I: Business Markets and Business Marketing Chapter 1 Introductionto Business Marketing Chapter 2 The Character of Business MarketingChapter 3 The Purchasing Function Chapter 4 Organizational BuyerBehavior Part II: Foundations for Creating Value Chapter 5 MarketOpportunities: Current & Potential Customers Chapter 6 MarketingStrategy Chapter 7 Weaving Marketing into the Fabric of the FirmPart III: Business Marketing Programming Chapter 8 Developing andManaging Products: What Do Customers Want? Chapter 9 BusinessMarketing Channels: Partnerships for Customer Service Chapter 10Creating Customer Dialogue Chapter 11 Communicating with theMarket: Advertising, Public Relations, & Trade Shows Chapter 12 TheOne-To-One Media Chapter 13 Sales and Sales Management Chapter14 Pricing & Negotiating for Value Part IV: Managing Programs andCustomers Chapter 15 Evaluating Marketing Efforts Chapter 16 CustomerRetention and Maximization Cases 1. Bama Pie, Ltd 2. BGH-Motorola3. Calox (A) (B) 4. Daynor Chemical Company 5. ExhibitsPlus 6. FleuryEquipment de Batiment 7. JC Decaux 8. Jewelmart.com 9. Li & FungLimited 10. Little Tikes Commercial Play Systems 11. Majsperk (A) (B)(C) 12. Metropol Base – Fort Security Group 13. Northcrest Salmon 14.Outdoor Sporting Products, Inc. 15. Pfizer, Inc. Animal Health Products(A) (B) 16. SPC Products 17. Texas Instruments 18. Whole Tree Energy19. Wind Technology 20. XeroxInternational EditionBUSINESS MARKETING3rd EditionBy Frank Bingham, Bryant College and Roger Gomes and Patricia AKnowles of Clemson University2005 / 496 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-285911-9 / MHID: 0-07-285911-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124396-4 / MHID: 0-07-124396-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bingham05Business Marketing, 3/e by Bingham, Gomes, and Knowlesprovides students with the practical foundation they will needto become successful business marketers. By addressing realissues that face business-to-business (B2B) marketers as well asthe newest developments and insights into this rapidly changingfield, the authors provide a practical introduction to this importantmarketing area. Business Marketing focuses on general businessmarketing, e-commerce/internet marketing, and businessethics. The new edition features a wealth of pedagogical aidswhich add structure and depth to the learning process. Fromend-of-chapter reviews of the Concept Questions and ChapterCases, to the real-world profiles found in the Business Marketingin Action, Strategy at Work, and What Would You Do? boxes,the 3rd Edition of Business Marketing actively involves studentsin the real world of business marketing.CONTENTSPart 1: The Business Marketing Environment Chapter 1: Introductionto the Business Marketing Environment Chapter 2: Ethical Considerationsin Business to Business Marketing Chapter 3: Professional Sellingand Sales Management Chapter 4: The Organizational Buying ProcessPart 2: Research Analysis and Strategic Planning Chapter 5: MarketingResearch and Information Systems Chapter 6: Market Segmentation,Positioning, and Demand Projection Chapter 7: New Product Development,Management, and Strategy Chapter 8: Price Planning and StrategyPart 3: Communication and Delivery Chapter 9: Promotional StrategyChapter 10: Business Marketing Channel Participants Chapter 11: SupplyChain Management and Logistics Part 4: International ApplicationsChapter 12: International Business MarketingInternational EditionINDUSTRIAL MARKETING2nd EditionBy Krishna Havaldar, Indian Institute of Management, Ahmedabad2005 / 416 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-058840-0 / MHID: 0-07-058840-6ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124982-9 / MHID: 0-07-124982-6 [IE]Tata McGraw-Hill TitleThis well-received book (reprinted 6 times) has been revised tomake it up-to-date, by including recent changes in the industrialmarkets. The book focuses on decision making in variousindustrial marketing situations. As the earlier edition, it retainsthe context of Indian business environment. A dozen cases atthe end of the book would aid students in applying the conceptsin real-life situations. Among others, the following additionalcoverage would give the students of industrial marketing coursesa definite advantage — (a) International industrial marketing, (b)Role of electronic commerce in business-to-business marketing,© Innovation, competitiveness and technology, (d) High-tech182HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18210/5/2006 1:42:54 PM

Marketingmarketing, (e) Evaluation of supplier performance, (f) Supplychain management, (g) Customer relationship management,(h) Pricing strategies, and so on…... The book is meant forpostgraduate and undergraduate students of management andcommerce. Managers in the field of industrial marketing wouldfind this book a valuable reference resource. PEDAGOGICALAIDS: Learning Objectives at the beginning of each chapter;summary at the end of each chapter; questions for discussion atthe end of each chapter; ample examples to illustrate conceptsand practicesCONTENTS1. The nature of Industrial Marketing 2. Understanding IndustrialMarkets and Environment 3. The Nature of Industrial Buying andBuying Behaviour 4. Buyer-seller Relationship 5. Industrial MarketingIntelligence and Marketing Research 6. Industrial Market Segmentation,Target Marketing, and Positioning 7. Product Strategy andnew product Development 8. Industrial Distribution Channels andMarketing Logistics 9. Managing the personal Selling function 10.Industrial Communication: Advertising, Sales Promotion Publicityand Direct Marketing 11. Industrial Pricing Strategies and Policies12. Strategic Planning, Implementing and Controlling in IndustrialMarketing 13. Business-to-Business (Industrial) Marketing through ElectronicCommerce 14. International Industrial Marketing CASE STUDIES:1. Metal Products India Ltd 2. Star Engineering Co. Ltd 3. Star MaterialHandling Co. Ltd 4. Precision Steel Tubes Ltd 5. Sigma TelecomCompany 6. Plastic Technologies (India) Ltd. 7. Alfa Networks 8. ROBOKNON 9. Shah and Company – New Training package for sales personnel10. Electrical Equipment Ltd 11. Saragam Aluminium Ltd 12.Hindustan Engineering and Automotive products Ltd.Marketing ChannelsInternational EditionMARKETING CHANNELS2nd EditionBy Lou E Pelton and David Strutton of University of North Texas,James R Lumpkin, Oklahoma State University-Stillwater2002 / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-289512-4 / MHID: 0-07-289512-8(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120705-8 / MHID: 0-07-120705-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/peltonCONTENTSPart I. MARKETING CHANNELS FRAMEWORK. 1. Marketing Channels:Information-Driven, Customer-Steered. 2. Channel Roles in a VirtualMarketplace. 3. Attaining Competitive Advantage Through ChannelDesign. 4. Marketing Mix and Relationship Marketing. Part I Cases. PartII. CHANNEL EXOSYSTEMS. 5. Managing Uncertainty in the ChannelEnvironment. 6. Channel Relationships in the Global Village. 7. Legaland Ethical Imperatives in Channel Relationships. Part II Cases. PartIII. CHANNEL MICROSYSTEMS. 8. Conflict Resolution Strategies. 9.Information Systems and Relational Logistics. 10. Developing PositiveChannel Relationships. Part III Cases. Part IV. CHANNEL MESOSYS-TEM. 11. Transactional Costs and Vertical Marketing Systems. 12.Franchising in the Global Economy. 13. Developing Long-Term Value.14. Strategic Partnering Agreements. Part IV Cases.International EditionSTRATEGIC MARKETING CHANNEL MANAGEMENTBy Donald Bowersox, and M. Bixby Cooper, Michigan StateUniversity1992 / 544 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-006757-8 / MHID: 0-07-006757-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112916-9 / MHID: 0-07-112916-2 [IE]Product ManagementInternational EditionPRODUCT MANAGEMENT4th EditionBy Donald Lehmann, Columbia University and Russell Winer,University of California2005 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286598-1 / MHID: 0-07-286598-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123832-8 / MHID: 0-07-123832-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lehmann05Product Management, 4/e by Lehmann and Winer is a lean,defining text that covers three major tasks facing today’s productmangers: analyzing the market, developing objectives and strategiesfor the product or service in question, and making decisionsabout price, advertising, promotion, channels of distributionand service. Product Management utilizes the familiar MarketingPlan as the unifying framework for its lessons, and takes a«hands-on» approach toward preparing graduates to assume theposition of product manager.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction to Product Management Chapter 2: MarketingPlanning Chapter 3: Defining the Competitive Set Chapter 4: CategoryAttractiveness Analysis Chapter 5: Competitor Analysis Chapter 6:Customer Analysis Chapter 7: Market Potential and Sales ForecastingChapter 8: Developing Product Strategy Chapter 9: New Products Chapter10: Pricing Decisions Chapter 11: Advertising Decisions Chapter12: Promotions Chapter 13: Channel Management Chapter 14: Serviceand Direct Customer-Based Marketing Chapter 15: Financial AnalysisChapter 16: Marketing MetricsINVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg183HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18310/5/2006 1:42:54 PM

MarketingNew Product ManagementProduct DesignInternational EditionNEW PRODUCTS MANAGEMENT8th EditionBy C. Merle Crawford , Emeritus—University of Michigan and C.Anthony Di Benedetto, Temple University—Philadelphia2006 / 600 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296144-7 / MHID: 0-07-296144-9ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124433-6 / MHID: 0-07-124433-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/crawford06New Products Management, 8/e, by Crawford and Di Bennedettoprovides future new product managers, project managersand team leaders with a comprehensive overview of thenew product development process including how to develop aneffective development strategy, manage cross-functional teamsacross the organization, generate and evaluate concepts, managethe technical development of a product, develop the marketingplan, and manage the financial aspects of a project.CONTENTSPart I Overview and Opportunity Identification/Selection Chapter 1The Menu Chapter 2 The New Products Process Chapter 3 OpportunityIdentification and Selection: Strategic Planning for New Products PartII Concept Generation Chapter 4 Preparation and Alternatives Chapter5 Problem-Based Ideation: Finding and Solving Customers’ ProblemsChapter 6 Analytical Attribute Approaches: Introduction and PerceptualMapping Chapter 7 Analytical Attribute Approaches: Trade-Off Analysisand Qualitative Techniques Part III Concept/Project Evaluation Chapter8 The Concept Evaluation System Chapter 9 Concept Testing Chapter10 The Full Screen Chapter 11 Sales Forecasting and Financial AnalysisChapter 12 Product Protocol Part IV Development Chapter 13 DesignChapter 14 Development Team Management Chapter 15 Product UseTesting Part V Launch Chapter 16 Strategic Launch Planning Chapter 17Implementation of the Strategic Plan Chapter 18 Market Testing Chapter19 Launch Management Chapter 21 Public Policy Issues BibliographyAppendix A Sources of Ideas Already Generated Appendix B OtherTechniques of Concept Generation Appendix C Small’s Idea StimulatorChecklist Appendix D The Marketing Plan Appendix E Guidelines forEvaluating a New Products ProgramNEWPRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT4th EditionBy Karl Ulrich, University of Pennsylvania and StevenEppinger, Mass Institute of Tech2008 (June 2007) / 384 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-310142-2 / MHID: 0-07-310142-7FEATURES• New chapter on Robust Design: explains techniques for design ofexperiments (also called the Taguchi method) that minimizes the effectsof variations on product performance. It does this by consideringthe noise factors (environmental variation during the product’s usage,manufacturing variation, and component deterioration) and the cost offailure in the field. The Robust Design method helps ensure customersatisfaction by focusing on improving the fundamental function of theproduct or process, thus facilitating flexible designs and concurrent engineeringallowing companies to reduce product cost, improve quality,and simultaneously reduce development interval.• New chapter on Patents and Intellectual Property: explains what ispatentable, how the patenting process works, licensing issues, and themany types of intellectual property. With the continuing rapid rate ofdevelopment in technology the need for students to understand theconcepts and processes involved in patenting, licensing, and intellectualproperty is essential to a comprehensive knowledge of thedesign process.• Updated product examples, new photographs, and illustrations togive students better understanding of the topics presented.• Modular Format: the book follows a modular format, a series of nearlyindependent chapters that permits total flexibility by users.• Cross-Functional Approach: The text offers an interdisciplinary orcross-functional approach, which reflects the business world todaywhere product design and development are the result of cross-functionalteams. An understanding of this developmental mix is essentialfor students to know as today’s companies are more aware of the factthat design directly influences the product life cycle cost and thereforeleads to increased earnings when applied properly.• Project-Based Courses: Professors that offer a project-based coursewill find this text ideal because of the structured, step-by-step designand development methods in each chapter.• Excellent Internet Support: http://www.ulrich-eppinger.net This sitefeatures an online (and downloadable) instructors manual with lecturenotes and slides for each chapter. Also on the site, links to relatedcourses and associations, current references, and course-applicablespreadsheets and templates.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.com• Industrial Examples: This book employs detailed industrial examplesto illustrate the key ideas. Each chapter features a different product tooffer a variety of product types and real examples.• Contemporary Design and Development Issues: The book treats contemporarydesign and development issues such as identifying customerneeds, design for manufacturing, prototyping, and industrial design.• AUTHOR-SPONSORED WEBSITE: www.ulrich-eppinger.net: Containschapter links & resources with links to websites related to materialin each chapter, resources for Design & Development with chapter topicrelated web link, engineering & technology links, & Institute, Society,Foundation, & Academic Research links.184HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18410/5/2006 1:42:54 PM

MarketingInternational EditionPRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT3rd EditionBy Karl Ulrich, University of Pennsylvania and Steven Eppinger,Massachusetts Institute of Technology2004 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-247146-5 / MHID: 0-07-247146-8ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123273-9 / MHID: 0-07-123273-7 [IE]Website: http://www.ulrich-eppinger.netTreating such contemporary design and development issuesas identifying customer needs, design for manufacturing,prototyping, and industrial design, Product Design and Development,3/e, by Ulrich and Eppinger presents in a clear anddetailed way a set of product development techniques aimedat bringing together the marketing, design, and manufacturingfunctions of the enterprise. The integrative methods in the bookfacilitate problem solving and decision making among peoplewith different disciplinary perspectives, reflecting the currentindustry trend to perform product design and development incross-functional teamsCONTENTSChapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Development Processes and OrganizationsChapter 3 Product Planning Chapter 4 Identifying CustomerNeeds Chapter 5 Product Specifications Chapter 6 Concept GenerationChapter 7 Concept Selection Chapter 8 Concept Testing Chapter 9Product Architecture Chapter 10 Industrial Design Chapter 11 Designfor Manufacturing Chapter 12 Prototyping Chapter 13 Robust DesignChapter 14 Patents and Intellectual Property Chapter 15 Product DevelopmentEconomics Chapter 16 Managing ProjectsLogisticsFUNDAMENTALS OF LOGISTICS MANAGEMENTBy Douglas Lambert, James Stock, Lisa Ellram and David Grant2005 / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710894-6 / MHID: 0-07-710894-9McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/grantFundamentals of Logistics Management is a brand new Europeantextbook, that approaches logistics from a marketing perspective– making it totally unique to its competitors. By integratingmarketing, accounting, finance, and manufacturing, the bookoffers a thorough and multi-faceted approach to the subject thatwill suit students from all specialisms. Completely up-to-datewith new topics and examples, this European edition is full ofexamples from around Europe and informed by the latest debatesfrom the world of logistics management.CONTENTSChapter 1: Logistics and Supply Chain Management Chapter 2: CustomerService Chapter 3: Log Information Systems and Technology Chapter4: Purchasing and Procurement Chapter 5: Inventory ManagementChapter 6: Managing Materials Flow Chapter 7: Transportation Chapter8: Warehousing Chapter 9: Materials Handling Chapter 10: OrganizingChapter 11: Financial Control Chapter 12: Global Logistics Chapter 13:Implementing StrategyInternational EditionSTRATEGIC LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT4th EditionBy James R Stock, University of South Florida-Tampa and DouglasLambert, Ohio State University2001 / 816 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-13687-6 / MHID: 0-256-13687-4ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118122-8 / MHID: 0-07-118122-9 [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/business/marketing/stockCONTENTS1. Logistics’ Role in the Economy and the Organization 2. Supply ChainManagement 3. Customer Service 4. Order Processing and InformationSystems 5. Financial Impact of Inventory 6. Inventory Management 7.Managing Materials Flow 8. Transportation 9: Decision Strategies inTransportation 10. Warehousing 11. Material Handling, Computerizationand Packaging 12. Procurement 13. Global Logistics 14. GlobalLogistics Strategies 15. Organizing for Effective Logistics 16. LogisticsPerformance Measurement 17. Measuring, Selling, and Value of Logistics18. Strategic Logistics PlanInternational EditionFUNDAMENTALS OF LOGISTICS MANAGEMENTBy Douglas Lambert, The Ohio State University, James R Stock, Universityof South Florida, and Lisa Ellram, Arizona State University1998 / 640 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-14117-7 / MHID: 0-256-14117-7(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115752-0 / MHID: 0-07-115752-2 [IE]CONTENTSChapter 1. Logistics Role in Economy/Organization. Chapter 2. Logistics& Customer Service. Chapter 3. Logistics Information Systems. Chapter4. Inventory Role & Importance of Inventory. Chapter 5. Inventory Management.Chapter 6. Materials Management. Chapter 7. Transportation.Chapter 8. Warehousing/Distribution. Chapter 9. Packaging & MaterialsHandling. Chapter 10. The Procurement Function. Chapter 11. GlobalLogistics. Chapter 12. Organization for Effective Logistics Performance.Chapter 13. Financial Issues in Logistics Performance. Chapter 14. SupplyChain Management/Integrated Channel Management. Chapter 15.Implementing Logistics Strategy.International EditionLOGISTICAL MANAGEMENTBy Donald J. Bowersox, Michigan State University and David J.Closs, Michigan State University1996 / 752 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-006883-4 / MHID: 0-07-006883-6(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114070-6 / MHID: 0-07-114070-0 [IE]CONTENTSPart I·Intergrated Logistics 1 Logistics 2 Logistics Operations Integration3 CustomerService 4 Supply Chain Relationships Appendix 4-A ChannelArrangement Classification 5 Global Logistics Case A IntegratedLogistics Case B Whitmore Products: Time Based Logistics at WorkCase C Zwick Electrical: Developing a Global Logistics Strategy PartII·Logistical Resource 6: Information 7 Forecasting Problem—Set AInformation-Forecasting 8 Inventory Strategy 9 Inventory Management10 Transportation Infrastructure 12 Transportation Management 13Warehouse Management 14 Materials Handling 15 Packaging Problem—SetD Warehousing-Handling Part III ·Logistics System Design16 Logistics Positioning 17 Integration Theory 18 Planning and DesignMethodology 19 Planning and Design Techniques Case D WestminsterCompany: A System Design Assessment Case E Alternative DistributionStrategies Case F Michigan Liquor Control Commission Part IV·Logistics185HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18510/5/2006 1:42:54 PM

MarketingAdministration 20 Organization 21 Planning, Costing and Pricing 22Performance Measurement and Reporting 23 Dimensions of Change—ASeminar Focus usRetail ManagementInternational EditionNEWRETAILING MANAGEMENT6th EditionBy Michael Levy, Babson College and Barton W Weitz, Universityof Florida2007 (April 2006) / 832 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-301978-9 / MHID: 0-07-301978-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-110688-7 / MHID: 0-07-110688-X (IE)Known for its strategic look at retailing and current coverage,this new 6th edition continues to be organized around a modelof strategic decision-making. One of the major advantages ofthe Levy/Weitz approach is the text’s readability, organization,and its emphasis on how students can come to grips with realretailing issues and be able to solve problems. The text’s logicalorganization around a decision-making process allows readersto learn about the process of strategic decisions first beforemoving on to decision implementation. The implementationdecisions are broken down into merchandise managementdecisions and store management decisions, just as they wouldbe in a real retailing setting. The text provides a balanced treatmentof strategic, “how to,” and conceptual material, in a highlyreadable and interesting format. The sixth edition continues itscutting edge coverage on the latest topics and developmentsin retailing including globalization, customer relationshipmanagement programs, multi-channel retailing, supply chainmanagement, and the use of the Internet to improve operatingefficiencies and customer service. Students indicate that this textis a “good read” because of the numerous examples of retailers,their practices, the interesting retail facts in the margins,and eye catching design and layout. Retailing is a high tech,global, growth industry that provides challenging and rewardingcareer opportunities for college graduates. This book andits corresponding tools and exercises were written to exposestudents to the excitement of retailing and prepare them for acareer in retailing and related fields.NEW TO THIS EDITION• More Extensive Treatment of New Technologies and Methods arehighlighted throughout the text, underscoring to students the importanceof the use of the Internet for providing information and selling productsand services to customers (Chapter 3); Application of geographic informationsystem (GIS) technology for store location (Chapter 8); Internetapplications for effective human resource management (Chapter 9);Integrated supply chain management systems, RFID, and CPFR (collaboration,planning, forecasting and replenishment) systems (Chapter10); Analysis of customer databases to identify and tailor offering tobest customer (Chapter 11); Reverse auctions for buying merchandise(Chapter 14); Use of profit optimization decision support systems forsetting prices in different markets and taking markdowns (Chapter 15);Development of targeted promotions using customer databases (Chapter16); Decision support systems for scheduling sales associates (Chapter17); Creation of planograms to optimize the sales and profits frommerchandise categories (Chapter 18); and Use of in-store kiosks, digitalsignage, and the Internet to improve customer service (Chapter 19).• Greater Emphasis on International Retailing features material coveringthe cultural impacts on buying behavior (Chapter 4); keys to successfulentry into international markets (Chapter 5); evaluation of internationalgrowth opportunities (Chapter 6); global sourcing of merchandise (Chapter14); and employee management issues in international markets(Chapters 9 and 17).• Updated Material on Legal and Ethical Issues Confronting Retailersincludes diversity and the glass ceiling (Chapter 9); legal issuesaffecting purchasing and pricing merchandise (Chapter 14, 15); sexualharassment and discrimination in hiring and promotions (Chapter 16);and store design in light of the American with Disabilities Act (ADA)(Chapter 18).• Text reorganization features a number of the more complex chaptershave been reorganized to facilitate the learning process of students; mostof the text’s examples are new and/or updated; the book is about 75pages shorter as a result of carefully editing; and there is a greater overallemphasis on the role of technologies—providing more global and serviceexamples, and increasing the treatment of ethical and legal issuesFEATURES• An interesting read for modern students: This book is organizedaround a retail decision making framework and many of the text’s exampleshighlight current practices and show the reasons why retailersundertake these activities. Students also enjoy the profiles of successfulexecutives and rising stars that introduce each chapter, the retailingviews that apply concepts to industry practices, and the margin REFACTsthat showcase retail factoids.• Good balance of descriptive, how-to, and conceptual information:• Students use the descriptive information throughout the text to learnabout the vocabulary and practice of retailing.• Examples include: o Leading U.S. and international retailers (Chapter1). o Types of store-based and non-store retailers (Chapter 2). o Approachesfor entering international markets (Chapter 5). o Organizationstructure of typical retailers (Chapter 9). o Methods for communicatingwith customers (Chapter 16). o Approaches of motivating storeemployees (Chapter 17)• Step-by-Step procedures with examples go beyond this descriptiveinformation to illustrate how and why retailers, large and small, makedecisions. Examples include: o Managing a multi-channel outreach tocustomers (Chapter 3). o Scanning the environment and developing aretail strategy (Chapter 5). o Analyzing the financial implications of retailstrategy (Chapter 6). o Pricing merchandise (Chapter 15). o Designingthe layout for a store (Chapter 18) o Providing good customer service(Chapter 19).• Students understand why decisions are made by understandingconceptual information such as: o Customers’ decision-making process(Chapter 4). o Development of strategic advantage (Chapter 5) oBuilding vendor relationships (Chapter 14) o Price theory and marginalanalysis for making communications decisions (Chapters 15 and 16). oMotivation principles (Chapter 17) o The gaps model for service qualitymanagement (Chapter 19).• Get Out and Do It! Exercises found at the end of each chapter suggestprojects that students can undertake by visiting local retail stores, surfingthe Internet, or using the Student CD accompanying the textbook. Acontinuing assignment exercise is included so that students can engagein an exercise involving the same retailer throughout the course. Theexercises are designed to provide a hands-on learning experience forstudents.CONTENTSSection I The World of Retailing. 1. Introduction to the World of Retailing.2. Types of Retailers. 3. Multichannel Retailing. 4. Customer BuyingBehavior. Section II Retailing Strategy. 5. Retailing Market Strategy. 6.Financial Strategy. 7. Retail Locations. 8. Retail Site Location. 9. HumanResource Management. 10. Information Systems and Supply ChainManagement. 11. Customer Relationship Management. Section IIIMerchandise Management. 12. Managing Merchandise assortments. 13.Merchandise Planning Systems. 14. Buying Merchandise. 15. Pricing.16. Retail Communications Mix. Section IV Store Management. 17.Managing the Store. 18. Store Layout, Design, and Visual Merchandising.19. Customer Service. Section V Cases186HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18610/5/2006 1:42:55 PM

International MarketingInternational EditionNEWINTERNATIONAL MARKETING13th EditionBy Philip Cateora, University of Colorado-Boulder and John Graham,University of California-Irvine2007 (March 2006) / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-308006-2 / MHID: 0-07-308006-3ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110594-1 / MHID: 0-07-110594-8 [IE]Cateora and Graham’s International Marketing is far and awaythe best selling text in the field, with a pioneering approach tomaking the material accessible and relevant that has becomethe standard by which other books are judged. Providing a wellroundedperspective of international markets that encompasseshistory, geography, language, and religion as well as economics,Cateora helps students to see the cultural and environmentaluniqueness of any nation or region. The 13th edition reflects allthe important events and innovations to affect global businesswithin recent years, while including several new and updatedtechnological learning tools.NEW TO THIS EDITION• New legal/political issues addressed by the 13th edition include theWorld Trade Organization, NAFTA and CAFTA, the war on terrorism,and Asian/Pacific economic cooperation.• The effect of the Internet, cell phones, and other information technologyon international marketing is incorporated throughout the 13thedition.• Several of the popular Crossing Borders boxes are new or revised,as are many of the text’s maps, graphs and figures.• Reflecting the rise of service-based occupations, the 13th editioncovers both consumer and industrial services in greater detail.• Economic issues receiving greater coverage include big emergingmarkets (BEMS), evolving global middle-income households, bottomof-the-pyramidmarkets, and channel structures in Europe, Japan, anddeveloping countries.• The 13th edition encompasses the latest quantitative and qualitativemulticultural research.• The Country Notebook is a complete online tool for investigatinga prospective foreign market, and is available free to users of the 13thedition.• Several of the chapter-ending cases are new, as are 10 of the DVDvideo segments.FEATURES• The popular Crossing Borders boxes offer anecdotal company examples.This feature is a favorite with adopters and no competitor hasbeen able to match our coverage. This material will be improved inthis edition with more examples from small businesses and technologycompanies.• Each chapter is introduced with a Global Perspective, a real-lifeexample of company experiences that illustrates significant issues discussedin the chapter. Companies featured in the Global Perspectivesrange from exporters to global enterprises.• Chapter 19 on international negotiation serves as a culminating finaland unique chapter in which students will use their background onthe international marketing environment and apply it to the nuancesof negotiating. John Graham’s renowned expertise in internationalnegotiation is evident in this chapter.• The text’s Online Learning Center (OLC) is home to the CountryNotebook, a comprehensive, interactive tool for analyzing a foreignmarket prior to drawing up a marketing plan. Through a mixture ofmaps, fill-in-the-blank questions and web links, the Country Notebookleads students through a detailed inventory of the country in question,highlighting political, cultural, economic, and geographic issues. Inconjunction with the Interactive Maps, the Cateora OLC provides acomprehensive guided tool for students to discover and understandinternational marketing issues.• The DVD contains 25 short segments covering specific topics ininternational marketing, usually through a close-up look at a real globalcompany. Ten of the segments are new with the 13th edition, and covertopics including the Russian economy, the rise of China, IBM, and thedeclining US dollar.CONTENTSPart I An Overview. The Scope and Challenge of International Marketing. The Dynamic Environment of International Trade. Part II TheCultural Environment of Global Markets. History and Geography: TheFoundations of Culture. Cultural Dynamics in Assessing Global Markets.Culture, Management Style, and Business Systems. The Political Environment:A Critical Concern. The International Legal Environment: Playingby the Rules. Part III Assessing Global Market Opportunities. Developinga Global Vision through Market Research. Emerging Markets.Multinational Market Regions and Market Groups. Part IV DevelopingGlobal Marketing Strategies. Global Marketing Management: Planningand Organization. Products and Services for Consumers. Products andConsumers for Businesses. International Marketing Channels. Exportingand Logistics: Special Issues for Business. Integrated Marketing Communicationsand International Advertising. Personal Selling and SalesManagement. Pricing for International Markets. Part V ImplementingGlobal Marketing Strategies. Negotiating with International Customers,Partners, and Regulators. Part VI Supplementary Material. The CountryNotebook. CasesInternational EditionMarketingGLOBAL MARKETINGForeign Entry, Local Marketing, and GlobalManagement, 4th EditionBy Johnny Johansson, Georgetown University2006 / 664 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296180-5 / MHID: 0-07-296180-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124454-1 / MHID: 0-07-124454-9 [IE]Johansson’s Global Marketing, 4/e utilizes a three-prongedframework to organize the discussion of how to conductglobal business: Foreign Entry, Local Marketing, and GlobalManagement. Johansson seeks to develop the varied skills amarketing manager needs to be successful in each of thesetasks. The discussion progresses from how to market an existingproduct outside of the domestic market to how to developa new product for specific local markets and then broadensthe scope to discuss marketing and management topics from aglobal managerial perspective. Legal, regulatory, political, andcultural, issues are discussed as appropriate throughout thetext. Excellent examples and cases, many of which are drawnfrom the author’s rich international experience, help studentsmove from concept to application. Most International Marketingbooks have 6-7 separate chapters up front that discuss the legaland regulatory, political, and cultural environments before theybegin to discuss global market entry. Johansson presumes thatthe students have a basic appreciation of these environmentsand begins the market entry discussion after 3 introductorychapters. The orientation of this text is more managerial andless descriptive. This text is used both as the first course in theundergraduate level and in MBA level courses.187HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18710/5/2006 1:42:55 PM

MarketingCONTENTSPart I: Fundamentals Chapter 1: The Global Marketing Job Chapter2: Theoretical Foundations Chapter 3: Cultural Foundations Part II:Foreign Entry Chapter 4: Country Attractiveness Chapter 5: ExportExpansion Chapter 6: Licensing, Strategic Alliances, FDI Part III: LocalMarketing Chapter 7: Understanding Local Buyers Chapter 8: LocalMarketing in Mature Markets Chapter 9: Local Marketing in New GrowthMarkets Chapter 10: Local Marketing in Emerging Markets Part IV:Global Management Chapter 11: Global Segmentation and PositioningChapter 12 Global Products Chapter 13: Global Services Chapter14: Global Pricing Chapter 15: Global Distribution Chapter 16: GlobalAdvertising Chapter 17: Global Promotion, E-Commerce, and PersonalSelling Chapter 18: Organizing for Global Marketing Appendix: GlobalMarketing PlanningINTERNATIONAL MARKETING2nd EditionBy Pervez Ghauri, UMIST and Graham Cateora, University ofGroningen2005 / 624 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710830-4 / MHID: 0-07-710830-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/ghauriInternational Marketing 2/e offers a truly global treatment ofthis exciting area of marketing - providing students with all ofthe resources they need to grasp the complexities and issueswhen marketing across borders. Totally updated since its previousedition, the book now features more streamlined chapters,new chapters, totally new cases and a brand new text design,making it one of the most compelling and competitive booksavailable.CONTENTSPART I : An Overview CHAPTER 1 The Scope and Challenge of InternationalMarketing CHAPTER 2 The Dynamics of International BusinessPART II: The Impact of Culture on International Marketing CHAPTER3 Geography and History: The Foundations of Cultural UnderstandingCHAPTER 4 Cultural Dynamics in International Marketing CHAPTER 5Business Customs and Practices in International Marketing CHAPTER 6The International Political and Legal Environment PART III: AssessingInternational Market Opportunities CHAPTER 7 Researching InternationalMarkets CHAPTER 8 Emerging Markets and Market BehaviourCHAPTER 9 Multinational Market Regions and Market Groups PARTIV Developing International Marketing Strategies CHAPTER 10 InternationalMarketing Strategies CHAPTER 11 International Market EntryStrategies CHAPTER 12 Exporting, Managing and Logistics CHAPTER 13Developing Consumer Products for International Markets CHAPTER 14Marketing Industrial Products and Business Services CHAPTER 15 TheInternational Distribution System CHAPTER 16 International Advertisingand Promotion CHAPTER 17 Personal Selling and Negotiations CHAP-TER 18 Pricing for International Markets PART V Ethical, Financial andOrganisational Issues in International Marketing CHAPTER 19 Ethicsand Social Responsibility in International Marketing CHAPTER 20Financing and Managing International Marketing OperationsMARKETING PLANNINGA Global PerspectiveBy Svend Hollesen, University of Southern Denmark2005 / 312 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710418-4 / MHID: 0-07-710418-8McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill/textbooks/hollensenThe primary aim of this book is to offer students a concise,modern and well-structured introduction to marketing planning.Suitable for modules in Marketing Planning and InternationalMarketing Planning, the book is designed for students at level2 and 3 of their marketing degree. The book is characterizedby a unique global perspective on the subject of marketingplanning, which offers a modern approach to reflect the needsof organizations to deal with customers on a global basis andadapt their marketing plans to the different markets and countriesin which their customers operate.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction PART 1: ANALYSIS Chapter 2: Assessing theInternal Marketing Situation Chapter 3: Assessing the External MarketingSituation Chapter 4: SWOT-Analysis PART 2: DEVELOPING THEMARKETING STRATEGY AND PROGRAMMES Chapter 5: PortfolioPlanning Chapter 6: The Segmentation Process Chapter 7: Marketingobjectives and Gap Analysis Chapter 8: Marketing Mix Decisions PART3: IMPLEMENTING AND MANAGING THE MARKETING PLAN Chapter9: Developing and Managing Buyer-Seller Relationships Chapter 10:Organizing and Implementing the Marketing Plan: Barriers ImpedingImplementation Chapter 11: Controlling and Budgeting Chapter 12: TheFinal Marketing Plan and Budget for the Running Case ExampleTHE NEW ZEALAND MARKETING ENVIRONMENTBy Michel Rod, Victoria University, Sarah Todd, Otago University,Jayne Krisjanous & Matene Love of Victoria University, John Guthrie,Otago University, Noel Spanier, Auckland University of Technologyand Greg Walton, Victoria University2005ISBN-13: 978-0-07-471463-8 / MHID: 0-07-471463-5McGraw-Hill Australia TitleWebsite: www.mhhe.com/au/nzmarketingThis new booklet offers a current and relevant New Zealandperspective on marketing. Consisting of five locally-written chapters,this book illustrates how certain basic marketing theoriesand concepts apply within the marketing environment in NewZealand. It has been developed to be a useful supplement to anystandard marketing principles text, including Quester, Marketing4e, Kerin, Marketing 7e and Rix, Marketing 5e.CONTENTSChapter 1: Consumers Chapter 2: Ethnic Dimensions Chapter 3: PromotionalCommunications Chapter 4: Distribution and Logistics Chapter 5:The Regional and International Context / Conclusion: Trends and FutureDirections in New Zealand Marketing Practice / Glossary / Index188HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18810/5/2006 1:42:55 PM

NEWServices MarketingSERVICES MARKETING2nd EditionBy Rajendra Nargundkar2006 (May 2006) / 450 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-061631-8 / MHID: 0-07-061631-0Tata McGraw-Hill TitleNEW TO THIS EDITION• Services Marketing is a popular elective in the MBA (Marketing)stream. The book would cater to the needs of these MBA students. Anuseful reference for managers.FEATURES• Individual chapters on the 7 Ps• 35 cases (15 new) from the services businesses, almost all fromIndian businesses• Tools and methodologies in Services Marketing like customer satisfactionmeasurement, use of the SERVQUAL scale, service performancemetricsIntegrated services marketing strategies for leaders, challengers,followers and niche marketersRevision highlightsMarketingfers part openers that sequentially build the model gap by gap.Each part of the book includes multiple chapters with strategiesfor understanding and closing the critical gaps. Customerbehavior, expectations, and perceptions are discussed early inthe text to form the basis for understanding services marketingstrategy and the managerial content, in the rest of the text, isframed by the GAPS model. Additionally, the authors continueto refine conceptual frameworks for developing effective servicesmarketing strategy and have incorporated more coverageof the use of technology and business-to-business applicationsin this edition.CONTENTSPART ONE: FOUNDATIONS FOR SERVICES MARKETING Chapter1. Introduction to Services Chapter 2. Conceptual Framework for theBook: The Gaps Model of Service Quality PART TWO: FOCUS ONTHE CUSTOMER Chapter 3. Consumer Behavior in Services Chapter4. Customer Expectations in Services Chapter 5. Customer Perceptionsin Services PART THREE: UNDERSTANDING CUSTOMER REQUIRE-MENTS Chapter 6. Listening to Customers through Research Chapter7. Building Customer Relationships Chapter 8. Service Recovery PARTFOUR: ALIGNING STRATEGY, SERVICE DESIGN, AND STANDARDSChapter 9. Service Development and Design Chapter 10. Customer-Defined Service Standards Chapter 11. Physical Evidence and theServicescape PART FIVE: DELIVERING AND PERFORMING SERVICEChapter 12. Employees’ Roles in Service Delivery Chapter 13. Customers’Roles in Service Delivery Chapter 14. Delivering Service throughIntermediaries and Electronic Channels Chapter 15. Managing Demandand Capacity PART SIX: MANAGING SERVICE PROMISES Chapter 16.Integrated Services Marketing Communications Chapter 17. Pricingof Services PART SEVEN: OUTCOMES OF SERVICE INVESTMENTSChapter 18. The Financial and Economic Effect of Services CASES• 15 new case studies added• Chapter on CRM expanded in light of recent research and practicesin India• Section on Service Quality and the SERVUAL model has been totallyrewritten• New section on Differentiation in Retailing• News section on Unbundling of Advertising Creative and MediaServicesCONTENTS1. Prelude to the 7 ‘P’s 2. Product--the First P 3. Place--the Second P 4.Promotion--the Third P 5. Price--the Fourth P 6. People--the Fifth P 7.Physical Evidence--the Sixth P 8. Process--the Seventh P 9. IntegratedService Strategy for Market Leaders, Challengers, Followers and NicheMarketers 10. Going Global 11. Retailing in India and Around theWorld 12. CRMInternational EditionSERVICES MARKETING4th EditionBy Valerie Zeithaml, Partners for Service Excellence and Mary JoBitner, Arizona State University—Tempe and Dwayne D. Gremler,Bowling Green State University—Bowling Green2006 / 736 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-296194-2 / MHID: 0-07-296194-5ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124496-1 / MHID: 0-07-124496-4 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/zeithaml06Services Marketing, 4/e, by Zeithaml and Bitner provides acomprehensive review and analysis of services marketing issues,practice, and strategy. Utilizing the GAPS Model of ServiceQuality as an organizing framework the structure of the text of-PRINCIPLES OF SERVICES MARKETING4th EditionBy Adrian Palmer, Gloucestershire Business School-Cheltenham2005 / 448 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-710794-9 / MHID: 0-07-710794-2McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/palmerWith a rigorous and comprehensive approach, Services Marketing4/e provides readers with the ideal introduction to this keymarketing topic. This new edition includes the most up-to-dateexamples and most relevant theory, and is structured to coverthe content that is most essential to those taking services marketingcourses on Undergraduate levels 3 and 4, and on MBAand MA Marketing degrees.CONTENTSOne - What Is Services Marketing? Two - The Service Offer Three- The Service Encounter Four - Services Buying Processes Five - RelationshipMarketing And Customer Loyalty Six - Managing KnowledgeSeven - Service Positioning And Targeting Eight - Service Quality Nine- Making Services Accessible To Consumers Ten - The Pricing OfServices Eleven - Promoting Services Twelve – The Marketing ImpactsOf Services Employees Thirteen - Managing Capacity Fourteen - InternationalMarketing Of Services Fifteen - Full length case study: CircularDistributors Marketing Services189HED 2007 Marketing.indd 18910/5/2006 1:42:55 PM

MarketingDirect MarketingMarketing PlanningSUCCESSFUL DIRECT MARKETING METHODS8th EditionBy Bob Stone and Ron Jacobs ofNorthwestern University2007 (February 2007) / 592 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-145829-0 / MHID: 0-07-145829-8A Professional Reference TitleThe book that helps you make the most of the latest marketingtechniques. Now completely updated and expanded, the newedition of Successful Direct Marketing Methods belongs onevery marketer’s bookshelf. This revision covers new topicssuch as the new objectives of direct marketing; acquisition,loyalty, retention, and win back; the growth of direct marketingin Europe, Asia, and Latin America; telemarketing; andmuch more.International EditionDIRECT MARKETINGBy William J McDonald, Hofstra University1998 / 792 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-561743-3 / MHID: 0-07-561743-9(with PowerPoint 3.5” Disk) – Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-122331-7 / MHID: 0-07-122331-2[IE with PowerPoint 3.5” Disk]CONTENTSChapter 1. Introduction to Direct Marketing. Chapter 2. Direct marketingStrategies. Chapter 3. Segmentation and Target Marketing. Chapter4. Direct Marketing and technology. Chapter 5. Database marketing.Chapter 6. List Selection and Management. Chapter 7. Positioning andOffer Planning. Chapter 8. Creative Strategy and Execution. Chapter9. Direct-Mail Marketing. Chapter 10. Catalog Marketing. Chapter 11.Telemarketing. Chapter 12. Direct Response Television. Chapter 13.Direct Response Radio. Chapter 14. Direct Response Print. Chapter 15.Business-to-Business Direct Marketing. Chapter 16. Direct MarketingDecision Support Tools. Chapter 17. Direct marketing Profitability.Chapter 18. The Fulfillment Process. Chapter 19. The Future of DirectMarketing. 1. Avon Products. 2. Barney and Friends. 3. Deal-A-MealUSA. 4. Dell Computer. 5. Dial-A-Mattress. 6. Fidelity Investments. 7.The Franklin Mint. 8. Home Shopping Network. 9. ID Software. 10.Nordictrack.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sgInternational EditionANALYSIS FOR MARKETING PLANNING6th EditionBy Donald Lehmann, Columbia University and Russell Winter,University of California2005 / 272 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286596-7 / MHID: 0-07-286596-2ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123831-1 / MHID: 0-07-123831-X [IE]Website: www.mhhe.com/lehmannanalysis05Analysis for Marketing Planning, 6/e by Lehmann and Winerfocuses on the analysis needed for sound Marketing decisionsand is structured around the core marketing document—theMarketing Plan. Whether studying Marketing strategy or Product/BrandManagement decisions, students need to be able tomake decisions based from sound analysis. This book doesnot attempt to cover all aspects of the marketing plan; rather itfocuses on the analysis pertaining to a product’s environment,customers and competitors.CONTENTSChapter 1: Overview Appendix 1A: Marketing Plan Outline Chapter2: Defining the Competitive Set Chapter 3: Industry Analysis Chapter4: Competitor Analysis Chapter 5: Customer Analysis Appendix 5A:Economic Value to the Customer Chapter 6: Market Potential and SalesForecasting Appendix 6A: Time Series Regression with Seasonal FactorsChapter 7: Developing Marketing StrategyInternet MarketingInternational EditionINTERNET MARKETINGBuilding Advantage in a Networked Economy,2nd EditionBy Rafi Mohammed, Monitor Marketspace Center, Robert J. Fisher,University of Western Ontario, Bernard J. Jaworski, Monitor MarketspaceCenter and Gordon Paddison, New Line Cinema2004 / 768 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-286526-4 / MHID: 0-07-286526-1(with PowerWeb for e-Commerce)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123259-3 / MHID: 0-07-123259-1[IE with PowerWeb]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mohammed04Internet Marketing: Building Advantage in a Networked Economy,2e presents a “road-tested” framework to help studentsand practitioners understand how to think about and implementeffective Internet marketing programs. The focus is on usingmarketing levers to vary the level of intensity that the consumerhas with a Website to build a relationship with the customerthrough four stages: from Awareness, to Exploration/Expansion,to Commitment, and possibly through Dissolution. This fourstage customer-centric framework shows readers how to usethe Internet to create intense and profitable relationships withtheir customers. In addition to comprehensively discussing thekey levers that marketers can use to create relationships, theauthors focus on two primary forces that the Internet brings tomarketing: the Individual and Interactivity—detailing how theseforces influence key marketing levers and how these forces can190HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19010/5/2006 1:42:56 PM

e leveraged to create intense relationships with customers.CONTENTSChapter 1: Introduction to Internet Marketing Part I: Framing the MarketOpportunity Chapter 2: Framing the Market Opportunity Part II:Marketing Strategy Chapter 3: Marketing Strategy in Internet MarketingPart III: The Design of the Customer Experience Chapter 4: CustomerExperience Part IV: Building the Customer Interface Chapter 5: CustomerInterface Part V: The Design of the Marketing Program Chapter6: Customer Relationships Chapter 7: Product Chapter 8: Pricing Chapter9: Communication Chapter 10: Community Chapter 11: DistributionChapter 12: Branding Chapter 13: Designing the Marketspace MatrixChapter 14: Designing the Marketing Program for Lord of the Rings PartVI: Leveraging Customer Information Through Technology Chapter15: Customer Information Systems: Leveraging Customer InformationThrough Internet Technology Part VII: Marketing Program EvaluationChapter 16: Customer MetricsInternational EditionINTERNET MARKETINGReadings and Online ResourcesBy Paul S. Richardson, Loyola University—Chicago2001 / 368 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-242793-6 / MHID: 0-07-242793-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118809-8 / MHID: 0-07-118809-6 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/richardson01CONTENTS1. Introduction To Internet Marketing. 2.Conceptual Foundations ofInternet Marketing. 3.Business-to-Consumer Internet Marketing. 4.Shopping Agents & Consumer Behavior. 5. Internet Marketing Communications.6. Interactivity & Community. 7. Business-to-BusinessInternet Marketing. 8 . Internet Marketing Research. 9. The Internet& International Marketing. 10. The Internet & Public Policy. 11. TheInternet & Information Economics.International EditionPricingMarketingPRICINGMaking Profitable Decisions, 3rd EditionBy Kent B. Monroe, University of Illinois-Urbana-Champaign2003 / 684 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-252881-7 / MHID: 0-07-252881-8(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119860-8 / MHID: 0-07-119860-1 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/monroeCONTENTSSection I Introduction / Chapter 1 Effective Pricing Management /Section II Economic Foundations of Pricing Theory / Chapter 2 TheEconomics of Price Determination / Chapter 3 The Economics of Information/ Chapter 4 Signaling and Managing Competition / Section IIIUnderstanding Customer and Buyer Behavior / Chapter 5 BehavioralFoundations for Pricing Management / Chapter 6 Pricing Practicesthat Endanger Profits / Chapter 7 Price and Customers’ Perceptionsof Value / Chapter 8 Customer Value Analysis / Chapter 9 ResearchMethods for Pricing Decisions / Section IV Profitability Analysis forPricing Decisions / Chapter 10 The Role of Costs in Pricing Decisions /Chapter 11 Using Leverage for Developing Pricing Strategies / Chapter12 Marketing Profitability Analysis / Section V Developing PricingStrategies / Chapter 13 Experience Curve Pricing / Chapter 14 PricingOver the Product Life Cycle / Chapter 15 Product-Line Pricing / SectionVI Managing the Pricing Function / Chapter 16 Developing a PriceStructure / Chapter 17 Pricing To and Through the Channel / Chapter18 Legal Aspects of Pricing Strategy / Section VII Special Topics onPricing / Chapter 19 Auctions and Competitive Bidding / Chapter 20Extending the Concepts of Strategic Planning / Chapter 21 Pricing onthe Internet / Section VIII Recommendations / Chapter 22 Guidelinesfor Better Pricing DecisionsInternational EditionE-MARKETING STRATEGYBy Chaston2000ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709753-0 / MHID: 0-07-709753-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-118873-9 / MHID: 0-07-118873-8 [IE]McGraw-Hill UK TitleWebsite: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/chastonCONTENTS1. Managing in an E-Commerce World /2. E-Buyer Behavior / 3. Mappingthe E-Market System / 4. E-Commerce Competence / 5. E-MarketPositioning and Competitive Advantage / 6. Selecting E-Strategies andConstructing an E-Plan / 7. E-Commerce Innovation / 8. E-Promotion / 9.E-Pricing and Distribution / 10. E-Management Systems / 11. E-Businessand Institutional Markets / 12. E-Service MarketsTravel and TourismInternational EditionVIPAn Introduction to HospitalityBy Dennis L Foster1992 / 251 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-02-808769-6 / MHID: 0-02-808769-0(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116252-4 / MHID: 0-07-116252-6 [IE]CONTENTSThe Hospitality Industry Past. The Lodging Industry Present. Ownershipand Management. Organization. Front Office Operations. GuestServices. Housekeeping, Engineering, and Security. Food and BeverageOperations. Marketing and Sales. The Back Office. AFTER-WORD: TheFuture of the Hospitality Industry.191HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19110/5/2006 1:42:56 PM

MarketingPublic RelationsInternational EditionPUBLIC RELATIONS FOR THE INFORMATION AGEBy Dan L. Lattimore, University of Memphis, Otis W. Baskin, PepperdineUniversity, James K. Van Leuven, University of Oregon, ElizabethL. Toth, Syracuse University and Suzette T. Heimen, Universityof Missouri—Columbia2004ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293531-8 / MHID: 0-07-293531-6(with Online Learning Center)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111355-7 /MHID: 0-07-111355-X[IE with Student CD]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lattimoreCoverage of global markets, new technologies, and multiculturalismthroughout this dynamic new text make it the cutting-edgechoice for public relations courses. Accompanied by a unique,free CD-ROM with video interviews of leaders in the publicrelations field, the text presents and explains in a personal, jargon-freestyle the fundamental tools of public relations practice,providing a multi-disciplinary understanding of the emergingtrends within the field.CONTENTSPart I: THE PROFESSION Chapter 1. Nature of Public RelationsChapter 2. History of Public Relations Chapter 3. A Theoretical Basisfor Public Relations Chapter 4. Ethics, Legal Environment and ProfessionalismPart II: THE PROCESS Chapter 5. Research: UnderstandingPublic Opinion Chapter 6. Strategic Planning Chapter 7. ImplementingAction and Communication Chapter 8. Evaluating Public RelationsEffectiveness Part III: PUBLIC RELATIONS: THE PUBLICS Chapter 9.Media Relations Chapter 10. Employee Communication Chapter 11.Community Relations Chapter 12. Consumer Relations and MarketingChapter 13. Financial Relations Chapter 14. Public Affairs and Relationsin GovernmentCustomer RelationManagementby readers. Courses have traditionally occurred at postgraduatelevel although it is increasingly clear that RM courses areoccurring at final year undergraduate level and in some caseslower. This text aims to fulfil the need of those lecturers andstudents teaching and taking these modules. The text will alsosuit MBAs as a bridge to more strategic marketing texts suchas Christopher et al’s (2004) Relationship Marketing. This textwill present theories and show how they relate to a range ofpractical contexts which are relatively new, including publicsector, arts, professional services and virtual communities, aswell as the more traditional domains of B2B and B2C. Thiswill be achieved through clearly structured sections entitledPerspectives, Dimensions and Contexts. A brief review of theaims of each section follows:• Perspectives: This section presents a brief review of the keyconcepts and theories from different perspectives recognised inthe academic literature.• Dimensions: This section considers the different componentsand processes incorporated within each of the perspectives thathave variously important roles and impact. Included within thisare social ties and emotional labour, knowledge management,the role of quality and performance indicators, the nature ofvirtual communities and their role in relational developmentand management, and, technology.• Contexts: This section provides an in-depth case analysis fora range of different practical contexts (case studies).FEATURES(1) The new structure: Perspectives, Dimensions, Contexts(2) Extended, useful & lively case studies(3) Authors each offer a different experiences & this will be reflectedby the breadth & interest of the case studiesCONTENTSSection 1: PERSPECTIVES 1. Introduction 2. New paradigm of RM 3.Buyer & selling behaviour models 4. Interaction approach 5. Relationalperspectives in services (Gummesson, Gronroos) Section 2: DIMEN-SIONS 6. People 7. Knowledge management 8. Virtual Communities9. Technology? Section 3: CONTEXTS 10. B2B in Professional Services11. Consumer Services – on and off-line 12. Public Sector 13. Arts 14.Conclusions 15. Summary of definitions used 16. Alphabetical list ofall referencesNEWRELATIONSHIP MARKETINGBy Tracy Harwood, Anne Broderick and Tony Garry of LeicesterBusiness School2007 (June 2007) / 368 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711422-0 / MHID: 0-07-711422-1McGraw-Hill UK Title“Relationship Marketing [is] a long-term approach that nurturescustomers, employees and business partners.” (Masterson andPickton: Marketing) Identified in the 1980’s, there were somegroundbreaking texts in the 1990’s and this text now seeks todraw on the existing literature to present a modern view ofRelationship Marketing. Structured in three sections, Perspectives,Dimensions and Contexts, the text provides an integratedoverview of the key theoretical concepts and models; discussionof current practical applications; review of latest thinkingby both academics and practitioners; and, considers how theconcepts may be evolving. Lively case studies & examples willbe given to illustrate the ideas presented. Each chapter willprovide a list of further readings, annotated for accessibilityInternational EditionSIMCRM: STUDENT CD AND MANUALBy Nentl2004 / 75 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-283967-8 / MHID: 0-07-283967-8(Playbook for Students with CD) - Out of PrintISBN-13: 978-0-07-123499-3 / MHID: 0-07-123499-3[IE - Playbook for Students]Website: http://mhhe.com/business/marketing/simseries_websiteTHE SIM SERIES is a set of five CD-based simulation modules(each accompanied by a print manual) that can be packagedseparately or as a set with any marketing, sales, or managementtext and are designed to teach strategic decision making whilereinforcing marketing and sales principles. Each module usestoday’s hottest marketing and financial analytics to underscorethe importance of making quality management decisions. Allof the modules stress the importance of optimizing short-termrevenue gains and long-term profitability (customer lifetimevalue). Students will understand the challenge of aligning shorttermand long-term goals, and recognize when these goals canbe in conflict. The most unique selling feature of the modules192HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19210/5/2006 1:42:56 PM

and the hallmark of the Sim Series is The PhisoTech Story. Eachsimulation features the continuing saga of PhisoTech, a nicheplayer in the pharmaceutical industry, and its cast of engagingand sometimes eccentric characters. The PhisoTech Story isboth entertaining and compelling, and is written specificallyto enhance the cognitive involvement of students and inspirecreative, analytical decision making.on making.FEATURES• Teaches today’s most important marketing and financial analytics tohelp students make quality, strategic decisions.• An MS Excel Platform. The simulations are built on the familiarMSExcel platform for broad distribution and universal appeal.• Ease of Use. While powered by a complex mathematical engine, thesimulation screens are intuitive and easy to navigate. The main focus ison developing analysis and strategy skills for students, not on enhancingtheir computer skills.• Easy to Grasp. The data used in the simulation is typical order datathat has been aggregated into a robust model of analyses. The overallconcepts are easy to grasp and the reporting output generated from thesimulation is easy to comprehend, but immensely challenging in itsstrategic implications.• SIMCRM: Student CD and Manual: 0072839678 (Instructor’s CD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839090 This simulation is wrappedaround Customer Relationship Management (CRM) principles; it teachesstudents how to leverage database technology in the marketplace. Studentslearn how to use a database for customized marketing strategiesbased on a customer’s value to the company, and how to design databasetables in order to execute different promotional tactics. Predictivemodeling, data transformation, and other general database issues willbe reviewed. Students learn about the economics of utilizing in-housemarketing and sales promotion resources vs. partnering with outsideresources such as ad agencies or printing and promotions firms withdigital marketing capabilities.• SIMMarketing Research with Student CD/Manual: 0072839686(Instructor’s CD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839112) This simulationcovers primary and secondary research methods, experimentation,observation, survey design, etc. It teaches students how to synthesizeinformation to make pricing decisions, design promotional directives,determine customer behavior and attitudes, etc. The practical applicationof descriptive and inferential statistical methods in a business andmarketing setting is reinforced.• SIMMarketing Management with Student CD/Manual: 0072839694(Instructor’s CD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839139) This simulationaddresses the array of issues within the marketing discipline.Decisions that are related to market segmentation, market penetrationstrategies, utilizing a BSG matrix or facsimile, and balancing variousaspects of the administration and promotional budgets to achieve marketingobjectives are included. Pricing issues and financial analysis arealso addressed in the decisions. This simulation prominently featuresthe Customer Relationship Management (CRM) paradigm.• SIMSell with Student CD/Manual:007283999X (Instructor’s CD/AnnotatedStudent Manual-0072839082. The first simulation in the SIMSeries,this module teaches students about the importance of understanding acustomer’s value to the company in allocating time and resources. UsingCustomer Relationship Management (CRM) and relationship sellingprinciples, SimSell also teaches about the costs to service accounts, aswell as the cost and benefit of professional training and developmentseminars.• SIMSales Management with Student CD/Manual: 0072839368 (Instructor’sCD/Annotated Student Manual—0072839082) This simulationteaches students how to manage a sales force using financial analyticssuch as sales revenue, contribution income and long-term profitability.Some of the questions addressed in this module are how to achievemanagement goals and objectives while staying within budget, howto design the right combination of benefits and compensation to helpthe sales force make quota, who to hire, who to fire, and how to useincentives for motivation.International EditionSpecial Topics inMarketingNEWMarketingSPORTS MARKETINGBy Sam Fullerton, Eastern Michigan University2007 (July 2006) / 576 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-312821-4 / MHID: 0-07-312821-XISBN-13: 978-0-07-110658-0 / MHID: 0-07-110658-8 [IE]Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fullerton1eSports Marketing presents this field as a new discipline, helpingreaders gain a stronger understanding of how to apply marketingstrategies and tactics within the sports marketing environment.Dr. Fullerton crafted this new text to present the discipline ofsports marketing in two broad perspectives. The first part ofthe text (Chapters 3 – 14) deals with the idea of the marketingof sports products, increasing media audiences, increasing liveattendance, the selling of sports-related products, and more.The second part of the text (Chapters 15 – 22) examines usinga sports platform as a foundation for the marketing of non-sportsproducts, including examples such as Tiger Woods’ endorsementof Tag Heuer watches and Coca-Cola’s sponsorship ofsoccer’s World Cup. This is not simply a basic marketing textusing sports examples. This new title fills a gap for this newlyrecognized course area by presenting a strong business perspectivethrough its content. It looks at the economic impact ofthe industry and identifies an array of career opportunities forstudents interested in sports marketing. There is comprehensivecoverage of how sports are used as a marketing platform and anabundance of real-world national and international examplesto support the material.FEATURES• Variables with the Marketing Mix: Marketing strategy has historicallybeen viewed as the combination of a target market and a correspondingmarketing mix. From Chapter 15, this text examines the target marketingissues by delineating the market segmentation process, while Chapters16 through 19 each cover one of the variables within the marketing mix,including product, distribution (place), price, and promotion.• Real Examples: Actual examples in every chapter focus on howmarketers use sports as a platform for developing their strategies andtactics.• Sponsorship: Within the four presented domains in sports marketing,this text identifies four basic approaches to the selling of sports ornon-sports products, including traditional sponsorship, endorsements,venue naming rights, and licensing.• Written for a Broad Audience: While offering a rigorous treatment ofthis new discipline, this text is also written to interest students that arenew to marketing. Readers begin by learning about four controllablevariables that comprise the marketers’ strategic domain, including decisionsabout the products being sold, the price strategies, the distributionsystem, and the promotional tools available to the marketer.• Controversial Issues: Many marketers feel this course area is morerecreational; these issues are discussed at the end of the text.• Role of Technology: Chapter 21 is dedicated exclusively to toolssuch as the Internet that combine technology and content in the sportsmarketing industry.CONTENTSPART ONE THE FOUNDATION OF SPORTS MARKETING. Chapter 1:Introduction to Sports Marketing. PART TWO MARKETING THROUGHSPORTS. Chapter 2: Marketing Through Sports. Chapter 3: Introduction193HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19310/5/2006 1:42:56 PM

Marketingto Sponsorship. Chapter 4: Sponsorship Objectives and Components.Chapter 5: The Sponsorship Commitment—Resources and Duration.Chapter 6: Ambush Marketing. Chapter 7: Leveraging. Chapter 8:Selling the Sponsorship. Chapter 9: Pre-Event Evaluation. Chapter10: Post-Event Evaluation. Chapter 11: Sponsorship Foundation andFailure. Chapter 12: Endorsements. Chapter 13: Venue Naming Rights.Chapter 14: Licensing. PART THREE THE MARKETING OF SPORTS.Chapter 15: Segmentation of the Sports Market. Chapter 16: ProductDecisions in Sports Marketing. Chapter 17: Distribution Decisions inSports Marketing. Chapter 18: Pricing Decisions in Sports Marketing.Chapter 19: Developing a Promotional Strategy for the Marketing ofSports Products. PART FOUR EMERGING ISSUES IN SPORTS MAR-KETING. Chapter 20: Relationship Marketing in the Business of Sports.Chapter 21: The Role of the Technology in Sports Marketing. Chapter22: Controversial Issues in Sports Marketing. APPENDICES. Appendix A:Important Websites (URLs) for Sports Marketers. Appendix B: Examplesof University Licensing CriteriaInternational EditionCONSUMER AND CREDIT MANAGEMENT11th EditionBy Robert Hartzell Cole, University of Nebraska- Lincoln, and LonMishler, Northeast Wisconsin Technical College1998 / 600 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-256-18704-5 / MHID: 0-256-18704-5(Out of Print)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122439-0 / MHID: 0-07-122439-4 [IE]CONTENTSPart I-Introduction to Credit: Chapter 1. Credit in the Economy. Chapter2. Role of the Credit Manager. Part II-Understanding Consumer Credit:Chapter 3. Retail and Service Credit. Chapter 4. Financial Retail andService Credit Transactions. Chapter 5. Types of Consumer Credit-CashLoan Credit. Chapter 6. Real Estate Credit. Chapter 7. Regulation ofConsumer Credit. Part III-Management and Analysis of ConsumerCredit. Chapter 8. Management and Promotion of Consumer Credit.Chapter 9. The Consumer Credit Investigation. Chapter 10. ConsumerCredit Reporting Agencies. Chapter 11. Decision Making and Control.Part IV-Understanding Business Credit: Chapter 12. Business Use ofMerchandise Credit. Chapter 13. Financial Capital for Business Operations.Part V-Management and Analysis of Business Credit: Chapter 14.Responsibilities of the Business Credit Manager. Chapter 15. BusinessCredit Reporting Agencies. Chapter 16. Financial Statements-Analysisand Interpretation. Chapter 17. Business Credit-Analysis, DecisionMaking, and Credit Lines. Part VI-International Trade Credit: Chapter18. International Trade Credit. Chapter 19. Collection Policies andPractices. Chapter 20. Controlling Accounts and Measuring Efficiency.Glossary. Index.COMPLIMENTARYCOPIESComplimentary desk copies are availablefor course adoption only. Kindly contact yourlocal McGraw-Hill Representative or fax theExamination Copy Request Form availableon the back pages of this catalog.Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.comMarketing(Professional References)STRATEGIC DATABASE MARKETING3rd EditionBy Arthur Middleton Hughes2006 / 388 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-145750-7 / MHID: 0-07-145750-XA Professional Reference TitleWeb-focused strategies for turning a company’s customer listinto its most powerful competitive advantage. For more than adecade, Strategic Database Marketing has been a popular andauthoritative how-to on database marketing, referred to everyday by marketing practitioners around the world. Featuringdozens of innovative, workable strategies, it has shown marketershow to profitably manage customer relationships, retainloyalty, increase the incremental profits from each customer inthe database, and more. Fast-changing tools and technologiesrequire author and database marketing pioneer Arthur Hughesto update the book’s data and techniques. This substantiallyrevised third edition features:• A completely new chapter on modeling and appendeddata• New details on fast-changing Web technologies and marketing• Updated material on prospecting, warehousing, and filtering• In-depth discussion of prospect databases, one of marketing’snewest and most promising innovationsTHE BREAKAWAY BRANDHow Great Brands Stand OutBy Francis Kelly and Barry Silverstein2006 (September 2005) / 272 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-226237-7 / MHID: 0-07-226237-0A Professional Reference TitleWhat would happen if your brand were out of stock in a retailstore? Would a customer wait until it becomes available, travelto another store to buy it...or purchase another brand instead?This is a brand’s moment of truth. In today’s overcrowded marketplace,only a select few brands truly rise above the competition.That’s what The Breakaway Brand is about. It’s about thebrand that stands out, not just in its own product category, butfrom all other brands. It’s about the brand that achieves hugeresults. It’s about the brand that breaks away. Drawing fromtheir experiences at Arnold Worldwide, one of the leading andmost innovative advertising agencies in the business, brandingexperts Francis Kelly and Barry Silverstein reveal what it takes tocreate a breakaway brand and how today’s great brands executebreakaway campaigns, packaging, and promotion. You’ll get aninside look at such phenomenally successful brands as Apple,Nike, Volkswagen, JetBlue, Starbucks, and many others, andyou’ll find out how you can apply their breakaway strategiesin your own organization. Discover how a breakaway brand:• Is positioned for success• Continuously innovates• Connects with its audience194HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19410/5/2006 1:42:57 PM

Marketing• Establishes brand leadership• Delivers brand truth and consistency• Stands out with exceptional campaigns and unique packaging• Uses the Internet for breakaway marketingKelly and Silverstein also take you inside the mind of thebreakaway chief, revealing the level of dedication, vision,and leadership required of CEOs, COOs, and CMOs to fosterbreakaway brands. It isn’t easy for brands to break away. Butit can be done, and The Breakaway Brand shows you how to“Think Different,” “Just do it,” and create a truly revolutionaryand sustainable brand.COMPETING FOR MARKETSGrowth Strategies for SMEsBy Lee Khai Sheang, Lim Guan Hua and Tan Soo Jiuan2002 / 192 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-118959-0 / MHID: 0-07-118959-9An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference TitleThis book focuses on strategies for small and medium enterprises(SMEs) when they compete for markets under resourceconstraints. The authors provide a set of prescriptive strategytools to assist strategic planners and practitioners when they arefaced with resource disadvantages. The basis for these tools is aconceptual framework for generic strategies for SMEs that usesa deductive approach based on game theory.MARKETING WARFARE20th EditionBy Al Ries and Jack Trout2006 (November 2005) / 224 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-146082-8 / MHID: 0-07-146082-9A Professional Reference TitleIt rocked the marketing world in 1986, and now, nearly twodecades later, the strategies set down in Marketing Warfare arestill just as relevant. To commemorate the 20th anniversary ofthe classic book that changed an industry, marketing mavens AlRies and Jack Trout will reunite to annotate their book for anothergeneration of marketers. The Anniversary Edition offers:• A fresh perspective on why waging marketing warfare is evenmore important today than 20 years ago• In-depth analyses of some of the biggest marketing successesand failures of the last two decades• Reproductions of successful (or not so successful) ads, accompaniedby the authors’ comments on why they succeededor failed• Valuable follow-up to the original edition. Where are thesecompanies now? Who’s still a market leader?Marketing is war. To triumph over the competition, it’s notenough to target customers. Marketers must take aim at theircompetitors—and be prepared to defend their own turf. Thisindispensable guide gives smart fighters the best tactics—defensive,offensive, flanking, and guerrilla. Marketing Warfareis the book that wrote the new rules.Customer RelationManagement(Professional References)CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS MANAGEMENTCreating Competitive Advantage Through Win-WinRelationship StrategiesBy Kaj Storbacka, CEO of CRM Group Ltd and Jarmo L Lehtinen,University of Tampere2002 / 176 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-120678-5 / MHID: 0-07-120678-7(Softcover)ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118861-6 / MHID: 0-07-118861-4(Hardcover)An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference TitleThe aim of customer relationship management (CRM) is to buildrelationship strategies that refine relationships, and in this wayincrease their value. This book is the result of an extensiveresearch project that studied new ideas in marketing and howthese ideas are being applied in practice. Field trips to US andEuropean businesses to study their CRM processes, and theparticipation of major Scandinavian companies provide a widerange of practical examples. The authors also draw on theirexperiences in consulting work to present in-depth examplesof successful implementations of these new ideas.BLOG MARKETINGBy Jeremy Wright2006 (November 2005) / 336 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-226251-3 / MHID: 0-07-226251-6A Professional Reference TitleAll companies, large and small, know that reaching customersdirectly and influencing--and being influenced by--them isessential to success. Blog Marketing shows marketing and PRprofessionals as well small business owners how to do just thatwithout spending a lot of money. Readers will learn how to tapinto the power of blogs to create a direct line of communicationwith customers, raise the company’s visibility, and position theirorganizations as industry thought leaders.INVITATION TO PUBLISHMcGraw-Hill is interestedin reviewing manuscriptfor publication. Pleasecontact your localMcGraw-Hill office or email toasiapub@mcgraw-hill.comVisit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg195HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19510/5/2006 1:42:57 PM

Marketing196HED 2007 Marketing.indd 19610/5/2006 1:42:57 PM

Title IndexAABC’s of Relationship Selling, 9e, Futrell ..........................178Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated MarketingCommunications Perspective, 7e, Belch ........................175Alignment, Kaplan ...............................................................124AMA Handbook of Project Management (The), 2e,Dinsmore ........................................................................149Analysis for Marketing Planning, 6e, Lehmann ..................190An Introduction to Business Ethics, 2e, DesJardins ..............90Annual Editions: Business Ethics 07/08, 19e,Richardson.......................................................................89Annual Editions: Business Ethics 06/07, 18e,Richardson.......................................................................89Annual Editions: Computers in Society 06/07, 13e,DePalma .........................................................................151Annual Editions: Entrepreneurship 04/05, 5e, Price ............105Annual Editions: Human Resources 06/07, 16e,Maidment .........................................................................75Annual Editions: International Business, 14e, Maidment .....83Annual Editions: Labor Management Relations 05/06,Overby .............................................................................79Annual Editions: Management, 14e, Maidment ....................53Annual Editions: Marketing 07/08, 29e, Richardson ..........163Application Cases in Management Information Systems,5e, Morgan .....................................................................142Applications in Basic Marketing 2006-2007 to accompanyEssentials of Marketing, Perreault ................................163Art of Leadership (The), 2e, Manning ...................................94Asia-Pacific Cases in Strategic Management, Beamish .......116Assertiveness at Work: A Practical Guide to HandlingAwkward Situation, 3e, Back .........................................122Australian Human Resources Management, Seward .............74BBasic Business Communication, 11e, Lesikar .......................12Basic Business Communication, 10e, Lesikar .......................17Basic Information Systems Analysis and Design,Chester ...........................................................................146Basic Marketing, 16e, Perreault ..........................................157Behavior In Organizations, 8e, Shani .....................................62Ben Franklin: America’s Original Entrepreneur,McCormick ............................................................104, 125Blog Marketing, Wright .......................................................195Breakaway Brand (The): How Great Brands StandOut, Kelly .......................................................................194Building An E-Business: From the Ground Up, Reding ........37Burton’s Legal Thesaurus, 4e, Burton ...................................26Business: A Changing World, 6e, Ferrell .............................128Business: A Changing World, 5e, Ferrell .............................130Business and Administrative Communication, 7eLocker ..............................................................................16Business and Society: A Managerial Approach, 6e,Vernon ..............................................................................88Business and Society: Corporate Strategy, Public Policyand Ethics, 12e, Lawrence ...............................................87Business and Society: Corporate Strategy, Public Policyand Ethics, 11e, Lawrence ...............................................88Business Communication, 3e, Locker ....................................13Business Communication At Work, 3e, Satterwhite ..............14Business Communication Design, 2e, Angell ........................12Business Data Communications, Forouzan .........................148Business Driven Technology, 2e, Haag ................................139Business English And Communication, 8e, Clark .................22Business English At Work, 3e, Jaderstrom ...........................21Business Environment (The), 5e, Palmer.............................118Business Ethics, Ghillyer .......................................................88Business Ethics: A Global and Managerial Perspective,2e, Fritzsche .....................................................................91Business Ethics: Decision-Making for PersonalIntegrity and Social Responsibility, Hartman .................89Business Ethics: Policies and Persons, 4e, Goodpaster .........90Business, Government and Society: A ManagerialPerspective, 11e, Steiner ..................................................87Business Law: The Ethical, Global, and E-CommerceEnvironment, 13e, Mallor ................................................26Business Marketing, 3e, Bingham .......................................182Business Marketing: Connecting Strategy, Relationships,and Learning, 3e, Dwyer ................................................182Business Models: A Strategic Management Approach,Afuah ..............................................................................114Business Plans Made Easy, 3e, Bangs ..................................125Business Scenarios: A Context-Based Approach toBusiness Communication, Schultz ...................................23Business Strategy Game Online, Thompson .......................117Business Strategy Game Player’s Package Version 7.20,7e, Thompson ................................................................118CCases in Collective Bargaining and Industrial Relations,11e, Dilts ...........................................................................78Cases in E-Commerce, Rayport .............................................38Cases in Electronic Commerce, 2e, Huff ...............................38Cases in Strategy and Management, Cutcher ......................116China Casebook (The), Vanhonacker ....................................84Classic Drucker, Drucker .....................................................122College English and Communication, 9e, Camp ...................13Communicating At Work, 8e, Adler .......................................17Communicating In Business and Professional Settings,4e, Hanna .........................................................................17Communication for IT, 2e, Access Educational Services .....16Comparative International Management, Koen ......................86Compensation, 9e, Milkovich ................................................76Competing for Markets: Growth Strategies for SMEs,Lee ..................................................................................195Compensation, 8e, Milkovich ................................................76Consumer and Credit Management, 11e, Cole .....................194Consumer Behavior, 8e, Peter ..............................................165Consumer Behavior, Webb ...................................................167Consumer Behavior: Building Marketing Strategy,10e, Hawkins .................................................................166Consumer Behavior: Enhanced Edition, 4e, Neal ................167Consumers, 2e, Arnould ......................................................167Contemporary Advertising, 11e, Arens ................................174Contemporary Advertising, 10e, Arens ................................176Contemporary Management, 5e, Jones ..................................48Contemporary Management, 4e, Jones ..................................51Contemporary Management, Waddell .............................52, 64Corporate Communication, 4e, Argenti .................................19Corporate Governance, Colley .......................................90, 125Corporate Information Strategy and Management:Text and Cases, 7e, Appleyard ......................................150Corporate Strategy: A Resource Based Approach, 2e,Collis...............................................................................113Corporate Turnaround: Strategies for Renewal,Chandra .........................................................................115Crafting and Executing Strategy: Text and Readings,15e, Thompson ..............................................................110Crafting and Executing Strategy: The Quest forCompetitive Advantage, 15e, Thompson .......................109Creating Business Advantage in the Information Age,Appleyard ......................................................................150197Indexes.indd 19710/5/2006 2:13:56 PM

Title IndexCustomer Relationship Management: Creating CompetitiveAdvantage Through Win-Win RelationshipStrategies, Storbacka ...............................................41, 195Customer Service: Building Successful Skills for theTwenty-First Century, 3e, Lucas ....................................135Cyberlaw and E-Commerce, Baumer ..............................31, 37DDatabase Design, Application Development, andAdministration, 3e, Mannino .........................................143Database Management Systems: Designing andBuilding Business Applications, 3e, Post .......................143Databases: Design, Development and DeploymentUsing Microsoft Access, 2e, Rob ...................................144Data Communications and Networks, Miller .......................148Data Communications and Network Security, Carr ............148Decision Support and Data Warehouse Systems,Mallach ..........................................................................149Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e,Simchi-Levi ......................................................................40Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 2e,Simchi-Levi ......................................................................41Developing Management Skills: What Great ManagersKnow and Do, Baldwin ....................................................67Direct Marketing, McDonald ...............................................190EEbay the Smart Way, 4e, Sinclair ...........................................42E-Business and E-Commerce Infrastructure: TechnologiesSupporting E-Business Initiative, Chaudhury ................35E-Commerce, 2e, Bajaj ..........................................................42E-Commerce, Rayport ...........................................................38E-Commerce: Context, Concepts and Consequences,Bandyopadhyay ...............................................................35E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications,Whiteley ...........................................................................34Effective Behavior In Organizations, 7e, Cohen ....................62Effective Business Communication, 7e, Murphy ..................18Effective Writing: A Practical Grammar Review,4e, Stoddard.....................................................................23Electronic Commerce, 2e, Bhasker ........................................34Electronic Commerce: Security, Risk Management,and Control, 2e, Greenstein .............................................37E-Marketing Strategy, Chaston ......................................36, 191Employee Benefits, 2e, Martocchio .....................................118Employee Training and Development, 4e, Noe ......................77Employment Law for Business, 5e, Bennett-Alexander .......30Entrepreneurship, 7e, Hisrich ...............................................100Entrepreneurship, 2e, Kirby .................................................102Entrepreneurship and Small Firm, 4e, Deakins ....................104Enterpreneurship Small Business, Katz .........................98, 101Essentials of Contemporary Advertising, Arens ..................175Essentials of Contemporary Management, 2e, Jones .............50Essentials of Management: An Asian Perspective, Putti ........53Essentials of Marketing, 10e, Perreault ...............................162Essentials of Negotiation, 4e, Lewicki ...................................97Ethical Decision Making and Information Technology,2e, Grillo ........................................................................152Ethics of Management, 5e (The), Hosmer .............................91Exploring Strategic Analysis and Decision Making,Odgers ............................................................................115Extreme Resume Makeover: The Ultimate Guide toRenovating Your Resume, Kenkel ....................................18FFinancial Intelligence, Berman ............................................122Formulation, Implementation and Control of CompetitiveStrategy, 10e, Pearce ......................................................108Foundations of Business Communication, Young ..................16Foundations of Information Systems, Zwass .......................142Foundations of Marketing, 2e, Jobber .................................161From Conformance to Performance: Best CorporateGovernance Practices for Asian Companies, Mak .........126Fundamentals of Business Law, 5e, Barron ...........................27Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2eNoe ....................................................................................70Fundamentals of Logistics Management, Lambert .............185Fundamentals of Selling, 10e, Futrell ..................................177Fundamentals of Selling: Customers for Life ThroughService, 9e, Futrell .........................................................180GGDP 1-20 Kit, 10e, Ober .....................................................134GDP 1-60 Kit 1 Word 2000, 10e, Ober ................................132GDP 1-60 Kit 1 Word 2002, 10e, Ober ................................132GDP 1-60 Kit 1 Word 2003, 10e, Ober ................................132GDP 61-120 Kit 2 Word 2000, 10e, Ober ............................132GDP 61-120 Kit 2 Word 2002, 10e, Ober ............................132GDP 61-120 Kit 2 Word 2003, 10e, Ober ............................132GDP 1-120 Kit 3 Word 2000, 10e, Ober ..............................133GDP 1-120 Kit 3 Word 2002, 10e, Ober ..............................133GDP 1-120 Kit 3 Word 2003, 10e, Ober ..............................133Gemba Kaizen: A Commonsense, Low-Cost Approachto Management, Imai .....................................................122General Management: Processes and Action, Garvin ..........115Get Real: Empower the Manager-Leader Within, Tani ..........96Ghosn Factor (The): 24 Inspiring Lessons from CarlosGhosn, The Most Successful Transnational CEO,Rivas-Micoud ................................................................123Global Business Today, 5e, Hill ..............................................81Global Business Today, 4e, Hill ..............................................82Global Challenge: Frameworks for International HumanResource Management (The), Evans ...............................81Global Management and Organizational Behavior,Konopaske .......................................................................63Global Marketing: Foreign Entry, Local Marketing,and Global Management, 4e, Johansson .......................187Global Telecommunications Revolution: The BusinessPerspective, Housel ........................................................148Glo-Bus: An Online Business Simulation, Thompson ........117Gregg College Keyboarding and Document Processing(GDP), Lessons 1-120, 10e, Ober ..................................134Gregg College Keyboarding Document Processing(GDP), Lessons 1-20 Text, 10e, Ober ............................134Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing(GDP), Lessons 1-60 Text, 10e, Ober ............................134Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing(GDP), Lessons 61-120 Text, 10e, Ober ........................134Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing(GDP), Lessons 121-180 Text, 10e, Ober ..............134, 135Gregg College Keyboarding & Document Processing(GDP) Student Take-Home Software, 10e, Ober .............13Gregg Quick Filing Practice Kit, 5e, Stewart ......................136198Indexes.indd 19810/5/2006 2:13:56 PM

Title IndexHHuman Relations, 3e, Lamberton ..........................................66Human Relations in Organizations: Applications andSkill Building, 7e, Lussier ...............................................66Human Resource and Personnel Management, 4e,Aswathappa .....................................................................73Human Resource and Personnel Management, 5e,Werther ............................................................................74Human Resource Management, 4e, Bernardin......................68Human Resource Management, 8e, Byars .............................72Human Resource Management, 10e, Ivancevich ...................69Human Resource Management: Gaining a CompetitiveAdvantage, 5e, Noe ...........................................................73Human Resource Management In An InternationalContext, Lucas .................................................................70Human Resource Management In Asia, Ivancevich ..............74Human Resource Management In Australia, 2e, De Cieri .....74Human Resource Strategy, Walker ........................................75Human Resource Strategy: A Behavioral Perspectivefor the General Manager, Dreher .....................................75IIndustrial Marketing, 2e, Havaldar ......................................182Industrial Relations, 3e, Bray .................................................80Information and Knowledge Society,Al-Hawamdeh .........................................................38, 143Information Systems Development, 4e, Avison ....................145Information Systems Essentials, 2e, Haag ...........................139Information Systems Solutions: A Project Approach,Horn ...............................................................................141Information Technology and Management, 2e,Thompson ......................................................................142Innovation and the General Manager, Christensen ..............121Intercultural Communication in the Global Marketplace,4e, Varner.........................................................................21International Business, Aswathappa ......................................83International Business, 11e, Ball ............................................81International Business, 10e, Ball ............................................82International Business, 6e, Hill ...............................................81International Business Law, Willes ........................................30International Management: Culture, Strategy andBehavior, 6e, Hodgetts .....................................................85International Management: Managing in a Diverse andDynamic Global Environment, Phatak ............................86International Management: Text and Cases, 5e, Beamish ......86International Marketing, 13e, Cateora .................................187International Marketing, 2e, Ghauri ....................................188Internet Business Models: Text and Cases, Eisenmann .........35Internet Business Models and Strategies, 2e, Afuah ..............35Internet Marketing: Building Advantage in aNetworked Economy, 2e, Mohammed ....................36, 190Internet Marketing: Readings and OnlineResources, Richardson ............................................36, 191Interpersonal Skills Business, 2e, De Janasz .........................68Interpersonal Skills in Organizations, De Janasz ...................15Introduction to Business, Jones ............................................129Introduction to Business Data Mining, Olson ......................153Introduction to Business Law in Singapore, 3e,Chandran .........................................................................28Introduction to Collective Bargaining and IndustrialRelations, 4e, Katz ...........................................................78Introduction to Collective Bargaining and IndustrialRelations, 3e, Katz ...........................................................80Introduction to E-Commerce, 2e, Rayport ......................34, 37Introduction to Human Resource Management (A),Blosis ................................................................................72Introduction to Human Resource Management,Simmonds ........................................................................72Introduction to Information Systems, 13e, O’Brien ............140Introduction to Information Systems ProjectManagement, 2e, Olson ..................................................150Introduction to Innovation, Smith ........................................120Introduction to Medical Office TranscriptionPackage, 3e, Becklin ......................................................135Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis andDesign, Schach ...............................................................147Introduction to Organizational Behavior, 3e, Dick .................61Introduction to Systems Analysis and Design, Whitten ......144KKaizen: The Key to Japan’s Competitive Success,Imai ................................................................................122Knowledge Management, Natarajan .....................38, 125, 151LLabor Relations, 9e, Fossum ..................................................79Labor Relations: Striking a Balance, 2e, Budd ......................77Labor Relations: Striking a Balance, Budd ............................80Law, Business and Society, 8e, McAdams .............................28Law for Business, 9e, Barnes .................................................27Leaders and The Leadership Process, 4e, Pierce ....................95Leadership Communication, 2e, Barrett ................................19Leadership Communication, Barrett .....................................20Leadership Made Easy, Ponder ..............................................96Leadership: The Art of Experience, 5e, Hughes ....................95Leading Corporate Citizens, 2e, Waddock ......................87, 96Legal and Regulatory Environment of Business, 14e(The), Reed .......................................................................28Legal Aspects of Business, Pathak ........................................29Legal Environment of Business: In the InformationAge, Baumer ....................................................................30Legal Landmines in E-Commerce, Canton ......................31, 36Logistical Management, Bowersox ......................................185MMalaysian Industrial and Employment Law, 5e,Aminuddin .......................................................................79Management, 3e, Gomez-Mejia .............................................47Management, Hill ...................................................................48Management, 3e, Kinicki .......................................................48Management, 12e, Rue ...........................................................51Management: A Global Perspective, 11e, Weihrich ..............53Management and Organizational Behavior, 2e, Blosis ...........64Management and Organizational Behavior, 3e, Cook ............65Management and Organizational Behavior Classics,7e, Matteson .....................................................................65Management: A Practical Introduction, 2e, Kinicki ...............52Management Communication: Principles andPractices, 3e, Hattersley ..................................................19Management Communication: Principles andPractices, 2e, Hattersley ..................................................20Management Control of Multinational Enterprises inChina, O’Connor .............................................................84Management Control Systems, Sekhar ..................................68199Indexes.indd 19910/5/2006 2:13:56 PM

Title IndexManagement Information Systems, 8e, O’Brien .................140Management Information Systems, 4e, Post ........................142Management Information Systems for the InformationAge with CD and MiSource, 6e, Haag ...........................141Management: Leading and Collaborating in theCompetitive World, 7e, Bateman .....................................49Management of a Sales Force, 12e, Spiro ............................181Management of a Sales Force, 11e, Spiro ............................182Management of Telecommunications (The): BusinessSolutions to Business Problems, 2e, Carr......................148Management Strategy, Spulber ............................................115Management Strategy: Achieving SustainedCompetitive Advantage, Marcus ....................................113Managerial Communication: Strategies andApplications, 4e, Hynes ...................................................19Managerial Communication: Strategies andApplications, 3e, Hynes ...................................................20Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource PlanningSystems, Olson ...............................................................152Manager’s Guide to Self-Development (A), 5e, Pedler .........68Managing Change, Palmer .....................................................93Managing Change: Text and Cases, 3e, Jick ..........................93Managing Change: Text and Cases, 2e, Jick ..........................94Managing Human Resources, 7e, Cascio ...............................73Managing Organizations, 3e, Rosenfeld ................................61Managing the Global Corporation: Case Studies inStrategy and Management, 2e, De La Torre ....................87Marketing, 14e, Etzel ...........................................................159Marketing, 8e, Kerin ............................................................161Marketing Channels, 2e, Pelton ...........................................183Marketing: Creating and Delivering Value, 5e, Quester ......162Marketing Game!, 3e, Mason ...............................................164Marketing Management, 8e, Peter .......................................169Marketing Management, 3e, Saxena ....................................171Marketing Management: A Strategic Decision-MakingApproach, 6e, Mullins ....................................................168Marketing Management: Cases, Dolan ................................171Marketing Management: Text and Cases, Lal ......................170Marketing Management: Text and Cases, Quelch ................171Marketing Planning: A Global Perspective, Hollesen ..........188Marketing: Principles and Perspectives, 5e, Bearden ..........158Marketing Research, Cooper ................................................164Marketing Research, 3e, Hair ..............................................164Marketing Research, 3e, Hair [UK Title] .............................165Marketing Research Project Manual, Molinari ....................165Marketing Strategy, 5e, Walker ............................................173Marketing: The Core, 2e, Kerin ...........................................160Marketing: Value-Based, Grewal .........................................157Marketing Warfare, 20e, Ries ...............................................195McGraw-Hill Handbook of More Business Letters, 4e(The), Poe .........................................................................24McGraw-Hill Handbook of More Business Letters, 3e(The), Poe .........................................................................24Measuring and Managing Knowledge, Housel ....................151Merlin: A Marketing Simulation, Anderson ........................163Mike Bikes Advanced, 5e, SmartSims.................................116Mike’s Bikes Intro, 5e, Ferrell .....................................116, 130Modern Competitive Strategy, 2e, Walker ...........................111Motivation and Work Behavior, 7e, Porter ..........................119Multisourcing, Cohen ...........................................................124NNegotiation, 5e, Lewicki ........................................................98Negotiation: Readings, Exercises and Cases, 5e,Lewicki .............................................................................97New Business Mentor 2007, 7e, Timmons ..........................103New Business Ventures and the Entrepreneur, 6e,Roberts ...........................................................................102New Positioning (The): The Battle for Your MindEscalates, Trout ..............................................................169New Products Management, 8e, Crawford ..........................184New Strategic Thinking (The), Robert ................................124New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship for the 21stCentury, 7e, Timmons ....................................................103New Zealand Marketing Environment (The), Rod ...............188OObject-Oriented Systems Analysis and DesignUsing UML, 3e, Bennett ................................................146Object Oriented Systems Development, Bahrami ...............147Offshore Nation: Strategies for Success in GlobalOutsourcing and Offshoring (The), Vashistha .................85Oracle SQL and Introductory PL/SQL, Preece ....................143Organizational Behavior, 3e, Buelens ....................................61Organizational Behavior, 7e, Kreitner ...................................57Organizational Behavior, 11e, Luthans .................................56Organizational Behavior, 4e, McShane ..................................56Organizational Behavior and Management, 8e,Ivancevich ........................................................................64Organizational Behavior and Management, 7e,Ivancevich ........................................................................65Organizational Behavior: Essentials with OnlineLearning Access Card, McShane .....................................59Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work,10e, Luthans ....................................................................62Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work,12e, Newstrom .................................................................59Organizational Behavior In Asia: Issues and Challenges,Tan ....................................................................................63Organizational Behavior: Key Concepts, Skills andBest Practices, 3e, Kinicki ...............................................56Organizational Behavior: Key Concepts, Skills andBest Practices, 2e, Kinicki ...............................................60Organizational Behavior On the Pacific Rim, 2e,McShane ..........................................................................61Organizational Theory: Tension and Change, Jaffee ..............92Organization Behavior: Solutions for Management,Sweeney ............................................................................62Organization Development and Transformation:Managing Effective Change, 6e, French ..........................93Organizations, 12e, Gibson ....................................................60PPerspectives in Business Ethics, 3e, Hartman .......................92Phone Skills for the Information Age, 3e, Maxwell ...............23Preface to Marketing Management, 10e, Peter ....................168Pricing: Making Profitable Decisions, 3e, Monroe ..............191Principles and Practice of Marketing, 5e, Jobber ................160Principles of Advertising and IMC, 2e, Duncan ..................177Principles of Management, 3e, Tripathi ................................52Principles of Services Marketing, 4e, Palmer ......................189Principles of Voice and Data Communications, Bates .........147Product Design and Development, 4e, Ulrich ......................184Product Design and Development, 3e, Ulrich ......................185Product Lifecycle Management: Driving the NextGeneration of Lean Thinking, Grieves .............................24Product Management, 4e, Lehmann ....................................183Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e, Lewis ..........149Public Relations for the Information Age, Lattimore ..........192200Indexes.indd 20010/5/2006 2:13:57 PM

Title IndexPurchasing and Supply Management, Benton ........................39Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e, Leenders ............40RRecruiting Excellence: An Insiders Guide toSourcing Top Talent, Grout ......................................76, 123Redefining Health Care, Porter ............................................124Relationship Marketing, Harwood .......................................192Relationship Selling and Sales Management, 2e,Johnston .........................................................................177Relationship Selling and Sales Management, Johnston ......180Retailing Management, 6e, Levy ..........................................186Roundtable Viewpoints: International Business,Robertson .........................................................................83Roundtable Viewpoints: Organizational LeadershipMunro ..............................................................................95SSales and Distribution Management: Text and Cases,Krishna ..........................................................................181Sales Force Management, 8e, Johnston ...............................181SAP R/3 Enterprise Software: An Introduction,Hayen .............................................................................152Schaum’s Quick Guide to Great Business Writing,Fitzgerald .........................................................................22Selling: Building Partnerships, 6e, Weitz .............................179Selling Managing Customer Relatonships, 3e, Rix ..............180Services Marketing, 2e, Nargundkar ..................................189Services Marketing, 4e, Zeithaml ........................................189SimCRM: Student CD and Manual, Nentl ...........................192SimSeries: SimMarketing Management, Nentl ....................172Small Business Management: An Entrepreneur’sGuidebook, 5e, Megginson ..............................................99Software Project Management, 4e, Hughes .........................149Sports Marketing, Fullerton .................................................193SQL Server 2005: The Complete Reference, 2e,Shapiro ...........................................................................153Staffing Organizations, 5e, Heneman III ...............................76Strategic Database Marketing, 3e, Hughes ..........................194Strategic Dynamics: Concepts and Cases, Burgelman ........120Strategic Logistics Management, 4e, Stock..........................185Strategic Management, Dess .................................................107Strategic Management, 10e, Pearce .....................................108Strategic Management: Creating CompetitiveAdvantage, 3e, Dess........................................................105Strategic Management of Technological Innovation,2e, Schilling ....................................................................119Strategic Management of Technology and Innovation,4e, Burgelman ...............................................................120Strategic Management: Text and Cases, 3e, Dess .................106Strategic Marketing, 8e, Cravens .........................................174Strategic Marketing: A Practical Approach, Alsem ..............172Strategic Marketing Channel Management, Bowersox ........183Strategic Marketing Management Cases, 7e, Cravens .........174Strategies 07/08, Ketchen .....................................................105Strategies for Cross-Cultural Negotiation, Tan ......................98Strategy: Analysis and Practice: Text and Cases,Thomas...........................................................................113Strategy: Core Concepts, Analytical Tools, Readings,2e, Thompson ................................................................112Strategy: Winning in the Marketplace: Core Concepts,Analytical Tools, Cases, 2e, Thompson .........................112Successful Direct Marketing Methods, 8e, Stone ................190Supervision: Concepts and Skill-Building, 6e, Certo ............54Supervision: Concepts and Skill-Building, 5e, Certo ............56Supervision: Key Link to Productivity, 9e, Rue .....................55Supervision: Managing for Results, 9e, Newstrom ...............54Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e, Bowersox .............39Systems Analysis and Design: An Active Approach,Marakas .........................................................................145Systems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e, Whitten ...........145Systems Development Case Studies, Hunter .......................146TTaking Sides: Clashing Views in Management, 2e, Street .....54Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Controversial IssuesIn Business Ethics and Society, 9e, Newton ....................91Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Legal Issues, 12e,Katsch ..............................................................................27Team Learning Assistant Workbook, 2e, Carr ...............63, 121Technical Communication, 2e, Lay ........................................18Technology Management: Text and InternationalCases, Harrison .............................................................121Three Financial Styles of Very Successful Leaders(The), Prince ..................................................................123Transnational Management: Text and Cases, 5e, Bartlett ......84UUnderstanding Business, 8e, Nickels ....................................128Understanding Employment Relations, Rollinson .................71VVIP: An Introduction to Hospitality, Foster .........................191WWhy ERP? An Primer on SAP Implementation,Jacobs .............................................................................153Wisdom of Teams (The), Katzenbach .................................122World Class Supply Management: The Key to SupplyChain Management with Student CD (Cases),7e, Burt .............................................................................41Write to the Point!: Letters, Memos and Reportsthat Get Results, Fruehling ..............................................24Writing, Researching, Communicating: CommunicationSkills for the Information Age, 3e, Windshuttle .............22201Indexes.indd 20110/5/2006 2:13:57 PM

Author IndexAAccess Educational Services: Communication for IT, 2e .....16Adler: Communicating At Work, 8e ......................................17Afuah: Business Models: A Strategic ManagementApproach .........................................................................114Afuah: Internet Business Models and Strategies, 2e ..............35Al-Hawamdeh: Information and KnowledgeSociety ......................................................................38, 143Alsem: Strategic Marketing: A Practical Approach .............172Aminuddin: Malaysian Industrial and EmploymentLaw, 5e ..............................................................................79Anderson: Merlin: A Marketing Simulation ........................163Angell: Business Communication Design, 2e ........................12Appleyard: Corporate Information Strategy andManagement: Text and Cases, 7e....................................150Appleyard: Creating Business Advantage in theInformation Age ..............................................................150Arens: Contemporary Advertising, 11e ................................174Arens: Contemporary Advertising, 10e ................................176Arens: Essentials of Contemporary Advertising ..................175Argenti: Corporate Communication, 4e .................................19Arnould: Consumers, 2e ......................................................167Aswathappa: Human Resource and PersonnelManagement, 4e ................................................................73Aswathappa: International Business .....................................83Avison: Information Systems Development, 4e ...................145BBack: Assertiveness at Work: A Practical Guide toHandling Awkward Situation, 3e ....................................122Bahrami: Object Oriented Systems Development ...............147Bajaj: E-Commerce, 2e ..........................................................42Baldwin; Developing Management Skills: WhatGreat Managers Know and Do .........................................67Ball: International Business, 11e ............................................81Ball: International Business, 10e ............................................82Bandyopadhyay: E-Commerce: Context, Conceptsand Consequences .............................................................35Bangs: Business Plans Made Easy, 3e .................................125Barnes: Law for Business, 9e .................................................27Barrett: Leadership Communication, 2e ...............................19Barrett: Leadership Communication .....................................20Barron: Fundamentals of Business Law, 5e ..........................27Bartlett: Transnational Management: Text and Cases, 5e .....84Bateman: Management: Leading and Collaboratingin the Competitive World, 7e ............................................49Bates: Principles of Voice and Data Communications .........147Baumer: Cyberlaw and E-Commerce ..............................31, 37Baumer: Legal Environment of Business: In theInformation Age ................................................................30Beamish: Asia-Pacific Cases in Strategic Management .......116Beamish: International Management: Text and Cases, 5e .....86Bearden: Marketing: Principles and Perspectives, 5e ..........158Becklin: Introduction to Medical OfficeTranscription Package, 3e ...............................................135Belch: Advertising and Promotion: An IntegratedMarketing Communications Perspective, 7e ..................175Bennett: Object-Oriented Systems Analysis andDesign Using UML, 3e ...................................................146Bennett-Alexander: Employment Law for Business, 5e ......30Benton: Purchasing and Supply Management .......................39Berman: Financial Intelligence ............................................122Bernardin: Human Resource Management, 4e .....................68Bhasker: Electronic Commerce, 2e .......................................34Bingham: Business Marketing, 3e .......................................182Blosis: Introduction to Human Resource Management (A) ...72Blosis: Management and Organizational Behavior, 2e ...........64Bowersox: Logistical Management ......................................185Bowersox: Strategic Marketing Channel Management ........183Bowersox: Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e ............39Bray: Industrial Relations, 3e .................................................80Budd: Labor Relations: Striking a Balance, 2e ......................77Budd: Labor Relations: Striking a Balance ............................80Burgelman: Strategic Dynamics: Concepts and Cases ........120Burgelman: Strategic Management of Technologyand Innovation, 4e ...........................................................120Burt: World Class Supply Management: The Key to SupplyChain Management with Student CD (Cases), 7e ............41Burton: Burton’s Legal Thesaurus, 4e .................................. 26Byars: Human Resource Management, 8e .............................72CCamp: College English and Communication, 9e ...................13Canton: Legal Landmines in E-Commerce .....................31, 36Carr: Data Communications and Network Security ............148Carr: Management of Telecommunications (The):Business Solutions to Business Problems, 2e .................148Carr: Team Learning Assistant Workbook, 2e ...............63, 121Cascio: Managing Human Resources, 7e ...............................73Cateora: International Marketing, 13e .................................187Certo: Supervision: Concepts and Skill-Building, 6e ............54Certo: Supervision: Concepts and Skill-Building, 5e ...........56Chandra: Corporate Turnaround: Strategies forRenewal ..........................................................................115Chandran: Introduction to Business Law inSingapore, 3e ....................................................................28Chaston: E-Marketing Strategy .....................................36, 191Chaudhury: E-Business and E-Commerce Infrastructure:Technologies Supporting E-Business Initiative ................35Chester: Basic Information Systems Analysis andDesign .............................................................................146Christensen: Innovation and the General Manager .............121Clark: Business English And Communication, 8e.................22Cohen: Effective Behavior In Organizations, 7e ....................62Cohen: Multisourcing ..........................................................124Cole: Consumer and Credit Management, 11e .....................194Colley: Corporate Governance .......................................90, 125Collis: Corporate Strategy: A Resource BasedApproach, 2e ...................................................................113Cook: Management and Organizational Behavior, 3e ............65Cooper: Marketing Research ...............................................164Cravens: Strategic Marketing, 8e .........................................174Cravens: Strategic Marketing Management Cases, 7e ........174Crawford: New Products Management, 8e .........................184Cutcher: Cases in Strategy and Management ......................116DDeakins: Entrepreneurship and Small Firm, 4e ...................104De Cieri: Human Resource Management In Australia, 2e .....74De Janasz: Interpersonal Skills Business, 2e .........................68De Janasz: Interpersonal Skills in Organizations ..................15De La Torre: Managing the Global Corporation: CaseStudies in Strategy and Management, 2e ..........................87DePalma: Annual Editions: Computers in Society06/07, 13e .......................................................................151DesJardins: An Introduction to Business Ethics, 2e .............90202Indexes.indd 20210/5/2006 2:13:57 PM

Author IndexDess: Strategic Management ................................................107Dess: Strategic Management: Creating CompetitiveAdvantage, 3e .................................................................105Dess: Strategic Management: Text and Cases, 3e ................106Dick: Introduction to Organizational Behavior, 3e ................61Dilts: Cases in Collective Bargaining and IndustrialRelations, 11e ...................................................................78Dinsmore: AMA Handbook of Project Management(The), 2e ..........................................................................149Dolan: Marketing Management: Cases ................................171Dreher: Human Resource Strategy: A BehavioralPerspective for the General Manager ................................75Drucker: Classic Drucker ....................................................122Duncan: Principles of Advertising and IMC, 2e ..................177Dwyer: Business Marketing: Connecting Strategy,Relationships, and Learning, 3e ......................................182EEisenmann: Internet Business Models: Text and Cases ........35Etzel: Marketing, 14e ...........................................................159Evans: Global Challenge: Frameworks for InternationalHuman Resource Management (The) ...............................81FFerrell: Business: A Changing World, 6e ............................128Ferrell: Business: A Changing World, 5e ............................130Ferrell: Mike’s Bikes Intro, 5e .....................................116, 130Fitzgerald: Schaum’s Quick Guide to GreatBusiness Writing ...............................................................22Forouzan: Business Data Communications .........................148Fossum: Labor Relations, 9e ..................................................79Foster: VIP: An Introduction to Hospitality.........................191French: Organization Development and Transformation:Managing Effective Change, 6e ........................................93Fritzsche: Business Ethics: A Global and ManagerialPerspective, 2e ..................................................................91Fruehling: Write to the Point!: Letters, Memos andReports that Get Results ...................................................24Fullerton: Sports Marketing ................................................193Futrell: ABC’s of Relationship Selling, 9e ..........................178Futrell: Fundamentals of Selling, 10e ..................................177Futrell: Fundamentals of Selling: Customers forLife Through Service, 9e ................................................180HHaag: Business Driven Technology, 2e ................................139Haag: Information Systems Essentials, 2e ...........................139Haag: Management Information Systems for theInformation Age with CD and MiSource, 6e ..................141Hair: Marketing Research, 3e ..............................................164Hair: Marketing Research, 3e [UK Title] ............................165Hanna: Communicating In Business and ProfessionalSettings, 4e ........................................................................17Harrison: Technology Management: Text andInternational Cases ..........................................................121Hartman: Business Ethics: Decision-Making forPersonal Integrity and Social Responsibility ....................89Hartman: Perspectives in Business Ethics, 3e ......................92Harwood: Relationship Marketing ......................................192Hattersley: Management Communication: Principlesand Practices, 3e ...............................................................19Hattersley: Management Communication: Principlesand Practices, 2e ...............................................................20Havaldar: Industrial Marketing, 2e .....................................182Hawkins: Consumer Behavior: Building MarketingStrategy, 10e....................................................................166Hayen: SAP R/3 Enterprise Software: An Introduction .......152Heneman III: Staffing Organizations, 5e76Hill: Global Business Today, 5e .............................................81Hill: Global Business Today, 4e .............................................82Hill: International Business, 6e ..............................................81Hill: Management ...................................................................48Hisrich: Entrepreneurship, 7e ..............................................100Hodgetts: International Management: Culture, Strategyand Behavior, 6e ...............................................................85Hollesen: Marketing Planning: A Global Perspective ..........188Horn: Information Systems Solutions: A ProjectApproach .........................................................................141Hosmer: Ethics of Management, 5e (The) .............................91Housel: Global Telecommunications Revolution:The Business Perspective ................................................148Housel: Measuring and Managing Knowledge ....................151Huff: Cases in Electronic Commerce, 2e ...............................38Hughes: Software Project Management, 4e .........................149Hughes: Leadership: The Art of Experience, 5e ....................95Hughes: Strategic Database Marketing, 3e ..........................194Hunter: Systems Development Case Studies ......................146Hynes: Managerial Communication: Strategies andApplications, 4e ................................................................19Hynes: Managerial Communication: Strategies andApplications, 3e ................................................................20GGarvin: General Management: Processes and Action .........115Ghauri: International Marketing, 2e ....................................188Ghillyer: Business Ethics .......................................................88Gibson: Organizations, 12e ....................................................60Gomez-Mejia: Management, 3e ............................................47Goodpaster: Business Ethics: Policies and Persons, 4e ........90Greenstein: Electronic Commerce: Security, RiskManagement, and Control, 2e ...........................................37Grewal: Marketing: Value-Based .........................................157Grieves: Product Lifecycle Management: Driving theNext Generation of Lean Thinking ...................................24Grillo: Ethical Decision Making and InformationTechnology, 2e ................................................................152Grout: Recruiting Excellence: An Insiders Guideto Sourcing Top Talent ..............................................76, 123IImai: Gemba Kaizen: A Commonsense, Low-CostApproach to Management ...............................................122Imai: Kaizen: The Key to Japan’s Competitive Success ......122Ivancevich: Human Resource Management, 10e ...................69Ivancevich: Human Resource Management In Asia ..............74Ivancevich: Organizational Behavior andManagement, 8e ................................................................64Ivancevich: Organizational Behavior andManagement, 7e ................................................................65203Indexes.indd 20310/5/2006 2:13:58 PM

Author IndexJJacobs: Why ERP? An Primer on SAP Implementation ......153Jaderstrom: Business English At Work, 3e ...........................21Jaffee: Organizational Theory: Tension and Change .............92Jick: Managing Change: Text and Cases, 3e ..........................93Jick: Managing Change: Text and Cases, 2e ..........................94Jobber: Foundations of Marketing, 2e .................................161Jobber: Principles and Practice of Marketing, 5e ................160Johansson: Global Marketing: Foreign Entry,Local Marketing, and Global Management, 4e ..............187Johnston: Relationship Selling and SalesManagement, 2e ..............................................................177Johnston: Relationship Selling and Sales Management ......180Johnston: Sales Force Management, 8e ...............................181Jones: Contemporary Management, 5e ..................................48Jones: Contemporary Management, 4e ..................................51Jones: Essentials of Contemporary Management, 2e .............50Jones: Introduction to Business ............................................129KKaplan: Alignment ..............................................................124Katsch: Taking Sides: Clashing Views on LegalIssues, 12e .........................................................................27Katz: Enterpreneurship Small Business .........................98, 101Katz: Introduction to Collective Bargaining andIndustrial Relations, 4e .....................................................78Katz: Introduction to Collective Bargaining andIndustrial Relations, 3e .....................................................80Katzenbach: Wisdom of Teams (The) .................................122Kelly: Breakaway Brand (The): How Great BrandsStand Out ........................................................................194Kenkel: Extreme Resume Makeover: The UltimateGuide to Renovating Your Resume ...................................18Kerin: Marketing, 8e ............................................................161Kerin: Marketing: The Core, 2e ...........................................160Ketchen: Strategies 07/08 ....................................................105Kinicki: Management, 3e .......................................................48Kinicki: Management: A Practical Introduction, 2e ..............52Kinicki: Organizational Behavior: Key Concepts,Skills and Best Practices, 3e .............................................56Kinicki: Organizational Behavior: Key Concepts,Skills and Best Practices, 2e .............................................60Kirby: Entrepreneurship, 2e .................................................102Koen: Comparative International Management .....................86Konopaske: Global Management and OrganizationalBehavior ............................................................................63Kreitner: Organizational Behavior, 7e...................................57Krishna: Sales and Distribution Management:Text and Cases ................................................................181LLal: Marketing Management: Text and Cases ......................170Lambert: Fundamentals of Logistics Management .............185Lamberton: Human Relations, 3e .........................................66Lattimore: Public Relations for the Information Age..........192Lawrence: Business and Society: Corporate Strategy,Public Policy and Ethics, 12e ...........................................87Lawrence: Business and Society: Corporate Strategy,Public Policy and Ethics, 11e ...........................................88Lay: Technical Communication, 2e .......................................18Lee: Competing for Markets: Growth Strategies forSMEs...............................................................................195Leenders: Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e ............40Lehmann: Analysis for Marketing Planning, 6e .................190Lehmann: Product Management, 4e ....................................183Lesikar: Basic Business Communication, 11e ......................12Lesikar: Basic Business Communication, 10e ......................17Levy: Retailing Management, 6e..........................................186Lewicki: Essentials of Negotiation, 4e ...................................97Lewicki: Negotiation, 5e ........................................................98Lewicki: Negotiation: Readings, Exercises andCases, 5e ...........................................................................97Lewis: Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e ..........149Locker: Business and AdministrativeCommunication, 7e ...........................................................16Locker: Business Communication, 3e ...................................13Lucas: Customer Service: Building Successful Skillsfor the Twenty-First Century, 3e .....................................135Lucas: Human Resource Management In AnInternational Context ........................................................70Lussier: Human Relations in Organizations:Applications and Skill Building, 7e ..................................66Luthans: Organizational Behavior, 11e .................................56Luthans: Organizational Behavior: Human Behaviorat Work, 10e ......................................................................62MMaidment: Annual Editions: Human Resources06/07, 16e .........................................................................75Maidment: Annual Editions: International Business, 14e .....83Maidment: Annual Editions: Management, 14e ....................53Mak: From Conformance to Performance: Best CorporateGovernance Practices for Asian Companies ...................126Mallach: Decision Support and Data WarehouseSystems ...........................................................................149Mallor: Business Law: The Ethical, Global, andE-Commerce Environment, 13e .......................................26Manning: Art of Leadership (The), 2e ...................................94Mannino: Database Design, Application Development,and Administration, 3e ....................................................143Marakas: Systems Analysis and Design: AnActive Approach .............................................................145Marcus: Management Strategy: Achieving SustainedCompetitive Advantage ...................................................113Martocchio: Employee Benefits, 2e ....................................118Mason; Marketing Game!, 3e ..............................................164Matteson: Management and OrganizationalBehavior Classics, 7e ........................................................65Maxwell: Phone Skills for the Information Age, 3e ...............23McAdams: Law, Business and Society, 8e ............................28McCormick: Ben Franklin: America’s OriginalEntrepreneur ...........................................................104, 125McDonald: Direct Marketing ...............................................190McShane: Organizational Behavior, 4e .................................56McShane: Organizational Behavior: Essentials withOnline Learning Access Card ...........................................59McShane: Organizational Behavior On the PacificRim, 2e ..............................................................................61Megginson: Small Business Management: AnEntrepreneur’s Guidebook, 5e ..........................................99Milkovich: Compensation, 9e ................................................76Milkovich: Compensation, 8e ................................................76Miller: Data Communications and Networks ......................148Mohammed: Internet Marketing: BuildingAdvantage in a Networked Economy, 2e ..................36, 190Molinari: Marketing Research Project Manual ...................165Monroe: Pricing: Making Profitable Decisions, 3e..............191204Indexes.indd 20410/5/2006 2:13:58 PM

Author IndexMorgan: Application Cases in ManagementInformation Systems, 5e .................................................142Mullins: Marketing Management: A StrategicDecision-Making Approach, 6e ......................................168Munro: Roundtable Viewpoints: OrganizationalLeadership .........................................................................95Murphy: Effective Business Communication, 7e ..................18NNargundkar: Services Marketing, 2e ..................................189Natarajan: Knowledge Management ....................38, 125, 151Neal: Consumer Behavior: Enhanced Edition, 4e ................167Nentl: SimCRM: Student CD and Manual ..........................192Nentl: SimSeries: SimMarketing Management ....................172Newstrom: Organizational Behavior: Human Behaviorat Work, 12e ......................................................................59Newstrom: Supervision: Managing for Results, 9e ...............54Newton: Taking Sides: Clashing Views on ControversialIssues In Business Ethics and Society, 9e .........................91Nickels: Understanding Business, 8e ...................................128Noe: Employee Training and Development, 4e ......................77Noe: Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2e ....70Noe: Human Resource Management: Gaining aCompetitive Advantage, 5e ...............................................73OOber: GDP 1-20 Kit, 10e .....................................................134Ober: GDP 1-60 Kit 1 Word 2000, 10e ..............................132Ober: GDP 1-60 Kit 1 Word 2002, 10e ..............................132Ober: GDP 1-60 Kit 1 Word 2003, 10e ..............................132Ober: GDP 61-120 Kit 2 Word 2000, 10e ..........................132Ober: GDP 61-120 Kit 2 Word 2002, 10e ..........................132Ober: GDP 61-120 Kit 2 Word 2003, 10e ..........................132Ober: GDP 1-120 Kit 3 Word 2000, 10e ............................133Ober: GDP 1-120 Kit 3 Word 2002, 10e ............................133Ober: GDP 1-120 Kit 3 Word 2003, 10e ............................133Ober: Gregg College Keyboarding and DocumentProcessing (GDP), Lessons 1-120, 10e ..........................134Ober: Gregg College Keyboarding DocumentProcessing (GDP), Lessons 1-20 Text, 10e ...................134Ober: Gregg College Keyboarding & DocumentProcessing (GDP), Lessons 1-60 Text, 10e ...................134Ober: Gregg College Keyboarding & DocumentProcessing (GDP), Lessons 61-120 Text, 10e ...............134Ober: Gregg College Keyboarding & DocumentProcessing (GDP), Lessons 121-180 Text, 10e ......134, 135Ober: Gregg College Keyboarding & DocumentProcessing (GDP) Student Take-Home Software,10e ..................................................................................135O’Brien: Introduction to Information Systems, 13e ............140O’Brien: Management Information Systems, 8e .................140O’Connor: Management Control of MultinationalEnterprises in China ..........................................................84Odgers: Exploring Strategic Analysis and DecisionMaking ............................................................................115Olson: Introduction to Business Data Mining ......................153Olson: Introduction to Information Systems ProjectManagement, 2e ..............................................................150Olson: Managerial Issues of Enterprise ResourcePlanning Systems ............................................................152Overby: Annual Editions: Labor ManagementRelations 05/06 .................................................................79PPalmer: Business Environment (The), 5e ............................118Palmer: Managing Change ....................................................93Palmer: Principles of Services Marketing, 4e......................189Pathak: Legal Aspects of Business ........................................29Pearce: Formulation, Implementation and Controlof Competitive Strategy, 10e ...........................................108Pearce: Strategic Management, 10e .....................................108Pedler: Manager’s Guide to Self-Development (A), 5e .........68Pelton: Marketing Channels, 2e ...........................................183Perreault: Applications in Basic Marketing 2006-2007to accompany Essentials of Marketing ...........................163Perreault: Basic Marketing, 16e ..........................................157Perreault: Essentials of Marketing, 10e ..............................162Peter: Consumer Behavior, 8e ..............................................165Peter: Marketing Management, 8e .......................................169Peter: Preface to Marketing Management, 10e ....................168Phatak: International Management: Managing in aDiverse and Dynamic Global Environment ......................86Pierce: Leaders and The Leadership Process, 4e ...................95Poe: McGraw-Hill Handbook of More BusinessLetters, 4e (The) ................................................................24Poe: McGraw-Hill Handbook of More BusinessLetters, 3e (The) ................................................................24Ponder: Leadership Made Easy .............................................96Porter: Motivation and Work Behavior, 7e ..........................119Porter: Redefining Health Care ...........................................124Post: Database Management Systems: Designingand Building Business Applications, 3e .........................143Post: Management Information Systems, 4e ........................142Preece: Oracle SQL and Introductory PL/SQL ....................143Price: Annual Editions: Entrepreneurship 04/05, 5e ............105Prince: Three Financial Styles of Very SuccessfulLeaders (The) ..................................................................123Putti: Essentials of Management: An Asian Perspective .......53QQuelch: Marketing Management: Text and Cases ...............171Quester: Marketing: Creating and Delivering Value, 5e ......162RRayport: Cases in E-Commerce ............................................38Rayport: E-Commerce ...........................................................38Rayport: Introduction to E-Commerce, 2e ......................34, 37Reding: Building An E-Business: From the Ground Up........37Reed: Legal and Regulatory Environment of Business,14e (The) ...........................................................................28Richardson: Annual Editions: Business Ethics 07/08,19e .....................................................................................89Richardson: Annual Editions: Business Ethics 06/07,18e .....................................................................................89Richardson: Annual Editions: Marketing 07/08, 29e ..........163Richardson: Internet Marketing: Readings andOnline Resources ......................................................36, 191Ries: Marketing Warfare, 20e ...............................................195Rivas-Micoud: Ghosn Factor (The): 24 InspiringLessons from Carlos Ghosn, The Most SuccessfulTransnational CEO .........................................................123Rix: Selling Managing Customer Relatonships, 3e ..............180Rob: Databases: Design, Development andDeployment Using Microsoft Access, 2e .......................144205Indexes.indd 20510/5/2006 2:13:58 PM

Author IndexRobert: New Strategic Thinking (The) ................................124Roberts: New Business Ventures and theEntrepreneur, 6e ..............................................................102Robertson: Roundtable Viewpoints: InternationalBusiness ............................................................................83Rod: New Zealand Marketing Environment (The)...............188Rollinson: Understanding Employment Relations .................71Rosenfeld: Managing Organizations, 3e ................................61Rue: Management, 12e ...........................................................51Rue: Supervision: Key Link to Productivity, 9e .....................55SSatterwhite: Business Communication At Work, 3e .............14Saxena: Marketing Management, 3e ....................................171Schach: Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysisand Design ......................................................................147Schilling: Strategic Management of TechnologicalInnovation, 2e .................................................................119Schultz: Business Scenarios: A Context-BasedApproach to Business Communication ............................23Sekhar: Management Control Systems ..................................68Seward: Australian Human Resources Management .............74Shani: Behavior In Organizations, 8e ....................................62Shapiro: SQL Server 2005: The Complete Reference, 2e ...153Simchi-Levi: Designing and Managing the SupplyChain, 3e ...........................................................................40Simchi-Levi: Designing and Managing the SupplyChain, 2e ...........................................................................41Simmonds: Introduction to Human ResourceManagement .....................................................................72Sinclair: Ebay the Smart Way, 4e ...........................................42SmartSims: Mike Bikes Advanced, 5e ................................116Smith: Introduction to Innovation ........................................120Spiro: Management of a Sales Force, 12e ............................181Spiro: Management of a Sales Force, 11e ...........................182Spulber: Management Strategy ...........................................115Steiner: Business, Government and Society: AManagerial Perspective, 11e .............................................87Stewart: Gregg Quick Filing Practice Kit, 5e ......................136Stock: Strategic Logistics Management, 4e .........................185Stoddard: Effective Writing: A PracticalGrammar Review, 4e ........................................................23Stone: Successful Direct Marketing Methods, 8e ................190Storbacka: Customer Relationship Management:Creating Competitive Advantage ThroughWin-Win Relationship Strategies ..............................41, 195Street: Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Management, 2e .....54Sweeney: Organization Behavior: Solutions forManagement .....................................................................62TTan: Organizational Behavior In Asia: Issues andChallenges .........................................................................63Tan: Strategies for Cross-Cultural Negotiation ......................98Tani: Get Real: Empower the Manager-Leader Within ..........96Thomas: Strategy: Analysis and Practice: Text andCases ...............................................................................113Thompson: Business Strategy Game Online .......................117Thompson: Business Strategy Game Player’sPackage Version 7.20, 7e ................................................118Thompson: Crafting and Executing Strategy: Text andReadings, 15e ..................................................................110Thompson: Crafting and Executing Strategy: TheQuest for Competitive Advantage, 15e ...........................109Thompson: Glo-Bus: An Online Business Simulation ........117Thompson: Information Technology andManagement, 2e ..............................................................142Thompson: Strategy: Core Concepts, AnalyticalTools, Readings, 2e .........................................................112Thompson: Strategy: Winning in the Marketplace:Core Concepts, Analytical Tools, Cases, 2e ...................112Timmons: New Business Mentor 2007, 7e ..........................103Timmons: New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurshipfor the 21st Century, 7e ...................................................103Tripathi: Principles of Management, 3e ................................52Trout: New Positioning (The): The Battle for YourMind Escalates ................................................................169UUlrich: Product Design and Development, 4e ......................184Ulrich: Product Design and Development, 3e, Ulrich .........185VVanhonacker: China Casebook (The) ...................................84Varner: Intercultural Communication in the GlobalMarketplace, 4e .................................................................21Vashistha: Offshore Nation: Strategies for Success inGlobal Outsourcing and Offshoring (The) ........................85Vernon: Business and Society: A ManagerialApproach, 6e .....................................................................88WWaddell: Contemporary Management .............................52, 64Waddock: Leading Corporate Citizens, 2e ......................87, 96Walker: Human Resource Strategy ........................................75Walker: Marketing Strategy, 5e ...........................................173Walker: Modern Competitive Strategy, 2e ...........................111Webb: Consumer Behavior ..................................................167Weihrich: Management: A Global Perspective, 11e ..............53Weitz: Selling: Building Partnerships, 6e.............................179Werther: Human Resource and PersonnelManagement, 5e ................................................................74Whiteley: E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies andApplications ......................................................................34Whitten: Introduction to Systems Analysis and Design ......144Whitten: Systems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e ..........145Willes: International Business Law ........................................30Windshuttle: Writing, Researching, Communicating:Communication Skills for the Information Age, 3e ..........22Wright: Blog Marketing ......................................................195YYoung: Foundations of Business Communication .................16ZZeithaml: Services Marketing, 4e ........................................189Zwass: Foundations of Information Systems .......................142206Indexes.indd 20610/5/2006 2:13:59 PM